Voyages and discoveries in South-America the first up the river of Amazons to Quito in Peru, and back again to Brazil, perform'd at the command of the King of Spain by Christopher D'Acugna : the second up the river of Plata, and thence by land to the mines of Potosi by Mons Acarete : the third from Cayenne into Guiana, in search of the lake of Parima, reputed the richest place in the world by M. Grillet and Bechamel : done into English from the originals, being the only accounts of those parts hitherto extant : the whole illustrated with notes and maps.
      
       
         
           1698
        
      
       Approx. 475 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 185 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2007-01 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A65182
         Wing V746
         ESTC R1215
         12368276
         ocm 12368276
         60479
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A65182)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 60479)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 903:7)
      
       
         
           
             Voyages and discoveries in South-America the first up the river of Amazons to Quito in Peru, and back again to Brazil, perform'd at the command of the King of Spain by Christopher D'Acugna : the second up the river of Plata, and thence by land to the mines of Potosi by Mons Acarete : the third from Cayenne into Guiana, in search of the lake of Parima, reputed the richest place in the world by M. Grillet and Bechamel : done into English from the originals, being the only accounts of those parts hitherto extant : the whole illustrated with notes and maps.
             Acuña, Cristóbal de, b. 1597. Nuevo descubrimiento del gran rio de las Amazonas. English.
             Acarete, du Biscay, 17th cent. Relation des voyages dans la rivière de la Plate. English.
             Grillet, Jean, 1624-1677. Journal du voyage qu'on fait les Per̀es Jean Grillet et François Bećhamel ... dans la Goyane l'an 1674. English.
             Béchamel, François, 1637-1676.
          
           viii, 190 [i.e. 198], 79, [5], 68 p. : [2] fold. maps.
           
             Printed for S. Buckley ...,
             London :
             1698.
          
           
             Reproduction of original in Huntington Library.
             "An account of a voyage up the river de la Plata, and thence over land to Peru ..." has special t.p. and separate pagination.
             "A journal of the travels of John Grillet and Francis Bechamel into Guiana..." has special t.p. and separate pagination.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           South America -- Description and travel.
           French Guiana -- Description and travel.
           Brazil -- Description and travel.
           Amazon River -- Description and travel.
           Rio de la Plata (Argentina and Uruguay)
        
      
    
     
        2006-02 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2006-02 Aptara
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2006-04 Andrew Kuster
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2006-04 Andrew Kuster
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2006-09 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
           
             
             
             
               VOYAGES
               AND
               DISCOVERIES
               IN
               South-America
               .
            
             
               The
               First
               up
               the
               River
               of
               Amazons
               to
               Quito
               in
               Peru
               ,
               and
               back
               again
               to
               Brazil
               ,
               perform'd
               at
               the
               Command
               of
               the
               King
               of
               Spain
               .
            
             
               By
               CHRISTOPHER
               D'ACVGNA
               .
            
             
               The
               Second
               up
               the
               River
               of
               Plata
               ,
               and
               thence
               by
               Land
               to
               the
               Mines
               of
               Potosi
               .
            
             
               By
               Mons
               .
               ACARETE
               .
            
             
               The
               Third
               from
               Cayenne
               into
               Guiana
               ,
               in
               search
               of
               the
               Lake
               of
               Parima
               ,
               reputed
               the
               richest
               Place
               in
               the
               World.
               
            
             
               By
               M.
               GRILLET
               and
               BECHAMEL
               .
            
             
               Done
               into
               English
               from
               the
               Originals
               ,
               being
               the
               only
               Accounts
               of
               those
               Parts
               hitherto
               extant
               .
            
             
               The
               whole
               illustrated
               with
               Notes
               and
               Maps
               ..
            
             
               LONDON
               ,
               Printed
               for
               
                 S.
                 Buckley
              
               at
               the
               Dolphin
               over
               against
               St.
               
               Dunstan's
               Church
               in
               Fleetstreet
               .
               1698.
               
            
          
           
             
             
               ADVERTISEMENT
               .
            
             
               
                 WHEN
                 the
                 Introduction
                 was
                 going
                 into
                 the
                 Press
                 ,
                 Advice
                 came
                 from
              
               Lisbon
               
                 by
                 the
                 way
                 of
              
               Paris
               ,
               That
               the
               Sieur
               
                 de
                 Ferolle
              
               ,
               Governour
               of
               Cayenne
               ,
               being
               informed
               that
               the
               Portuguez
               were
               building
               a
               Fort
               on
               the
               North-side
               of
               the
               River
               of
               Amazons
               ,
               to
               secure
               a
               rich
               Silver
               Mine
               which
               they
               had
               discover'd
               there
               ,
               sent
               notice
               to
               the
               Portuguez
               ,
               that
               they
               had
               invaded
               the
               French
               King's
               Territories
               ,
               and
               therefore
               desir'd
               'em
               to
               retire
               ,
               that
               River
               being
               the
               Limits
               of
               the
               two
               Nations
               ;
               but
               the
               Portuguez
               refusing
               to
               quit
               their
               Enterprize
               ,
               Monsieur
               
                 de
                 Ferolle
              
               march'd
               against
               them
               ,
               and
               attack'd
               'em
               with
               so
               much
               Success
               ,
               that
               those
               who
               guarded
               the
               Mine
               and
               the
               Fort
               were
               killed
               ,
               or
               put
               to
               flight
               .
               
                 How
                 this
                 Contest
                 between
                 these
                 two
                 Nations
                 will
                 be
                 decided
                 ,
                 is
                 uncertain
                 ;
                 but
                 this
                 is
                 certain
                 ,
                 that
                 whatever
                 Europeans
                 first
                 possess
                 themselves
                 of
                 the
              
               Isle
               of
               the
               Sun
               ,
               
                 and
                 the
              
               Bosphore
               or
               Strait
               
                 of
                 the
              
               Amazone
               ,
               
                 will
                 command
                 the
                 Entrance
                 into
                 ,
                 and
                 Passage
                 up
                 that
                 noble
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 secure
                 the
                 Trade
                 of
                 it
                 to
                 themselves
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
             
               INTRODUCTION
               .
            
             
               THE
               following
               Relations
               discovering
               some
               of
               the
               richest
               Parts
               of
               the
               World
               ,
               not
               yet
               planted
               by
               the
               Europeans
               ,
               and
               others
               but
               little
               known
               ,
               worthy
               the
               perusal
               of
               the
               Curious
               ,
               can
               hardly
               fail
               of
               a
               favourable
               Reception
               at
               this
               Juncture
               ;
               for
               of
               all
               the
               Blessings
               of
               Peace
               ,
               none
               appear
               more
               charming
               or
               profitable
               than
               Navigation
               and
               Commerce
               ,
               especially
               to
               the
               
                 English
                 Nation
              
               ,
               whose
               Genius
               is
               much
               bent
               upon
               Improvements
               at
               Sea
               ,
               and
               Plantations
               abroad
               ,
               which
               bring
               great
               Riches
               into
               the
               Kingdom
               ,
               particularly
               those
               in
               America
               ,
               where
               the
               Spaniards
               by
               their
               ill
               Conduct
               have
               given
               Opportunities
               to
               some
               of
               their
               Neighbours
               to
               put
               in
               for
               a
               share
               of
               the
               Wealth
               and
               Trade
               of
               that
               vast
               Tract
               of
               Land.
               
            
             
               The
               frequent
               Sacking
               of
               their
               Towns
               and
               seizing
               of
               their
               Ships
               by
               the
               
                 English
                 ,
                 French
              
               ,
               and
               Dutch
               ,
               put
               
                 Philip
                 the
                 Third
              
               upon
               searching
               out
               new
               ways
               of
               transporting
               the
               Treasures
               of
               
                 Peru
                 ,
                 Chili
              
               ,
               and
               Granada
               into
               Spain
               ;
               to
               which
               end
               (
               the
               Coasts
               about
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               Gulph
               of
               Mexico
               being
               as
               well
               known
               as
               those
               in
               Europe
               )
               Orders
               were
               dispatched
               from
               the
               Court
               at
               Madrid
               to
               the
               Governours
               of
               Brazil
               and
               Peru
               to
               attempt
               the
               Navigation
               of
               the
               great
               River
               of
               AMAZONS
               ,
               that
               if
               't
               were
               found
               practicable
               ,
               the
               
                 Gold
                 ,
                 Silver
              
               ,
               and
               other
               Merchandizes
               of
               Peru
               and
               the
               adjacent
               Countries
               might
               be
               safely
               and
               commodiously
               sent
               down
               to
               Para
               to
               be
               put
               on
               board
               the
               Galleons
               ,
               which
               would
               lie
               less
               expos'd
               there
               ,
               than
               at
               
                 Cartagena
                 ,
                 Porto
                 Belo
              
               ,
               or
               
                 Vera
                 Cruz
              
               ,
               the
               Soundings
               of
               the
               Mouth
               of
               that
               River
               being
               unknown
               ,
               and
               dangerous
               to
               Strangers
               .
               What
               Essays
               
               were
               made
               pursuant
               to
               these
               Instructions
               ,
               is
               best
               seen
               by
               the
               first
               Chapters
               of
               the
               ensuing
               Relation
               of
               
                 F.
                 Chr.
                 d'
                 Acugna
              
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               Reader
               is
               referr'd
               ,
               as
               the
               true
               Journal
               of
               the
               only
               Voyage
               upon
               ,
               and
               Discovery
               of
               that
               noble
               River
               from
               the
               Source
               to
               the
               Mouth
               :
               't
               were
               needless
               to
               offer
               any
               other
               Recommendation
               of
               the
               Work
               ,
               except
               some
               Account
               of
               the
               Author
               .
            
             
               †
               
                 Christopher
                 d'
                 Acugna
              
               was
               born
               at
               Burgos
               in
               
                 Spain
                 ,
                 Anno
              
               1597.
               and
               entred
               into
               the
               Society
               of
               Jesus
               at
               15
               Years
               of
               Age.
               After
               some
               Years
               spent
               in
               Study
               ,
               he
               went
               into
               America
               ,
               and
               was
               Rector
               of
               the
               Jesuits
               College
               at
               Cuence
               under
               the
               Jurisdiction
               of
               Quito
               ,
               when
               
                 Peter
                 Texeira
              
               the
               Portuguez
               General
               came
               thither
               from
               Para
               in
               Brazil
               up
               the
               River
               of
               Amazons
               .
               The
               Viceroy
               of
               Peru
               ordered
               our
               Author
               to
               embark
               with
               Texeira
               (
               who
               return'd
               by
               the
               same
               way
               he
               came
               )
               and
               to
               inform
               himself
               exactly
               in
               his
               Voyage
               of
               every
               thing
               that
               might
               enable
               him
               to
               give
               a
               satisfactory
               Account
               of
               the
               Amazone
               to
               the
               K.
               of
               Spain
               .
               Accordingly
               they
               departed
               from
               
                 Quito
                 Jan.
              
               16.
               1639.
               and
               arriv'd
               at
               
                 Para
                 Dec.
              
               12.
               following
               .
               Thence
               he
               went
               into
               Spain
               ,
               and
               presented
               to
               the
               King
               his
               Master
               an
               ample
               Relation
               of
               the
               said
               River
               ;
               which
               was
               published
               at
               Madrid
               in
               1641
               ,
               and
               entituled
               *
               
                 Nuevo
                 descubrimiento
                 del
                 gran
                 Rio
                 de
                 las
                 Amazonas
                 ,
              
               in
               4o.
               He
               was
               sent
               to
               Rome
               in
               Quality
               of
               Provincial
               ;
               came
               back
               to
               Spain
               honoured
               with
               the
               Title
               of
               
                 Qualificator
                 of
                 the
                 Inquisition
              
               ,
               return'd
               agen
               into
               the
               West-Indies
               ,
               and
               was
               alive
               at
               Lima
               in
               1675.
               according
               to
               Father
               Sotwel
               .
               ‖
               'T
               is
               thought
               that
               the
               Revolutions
               of
               Portugal
               in
               1641.
               
               which
               occasion'd
               the
               Loss
               of
               all
               Brazil
               ,
               and
               the
               Colony
               of
               Para
               ,
               at
               the
               Mouth
               of
               the
               River
               of
               Amazons
               from
               the
               Spaniards
               ,
               were
               the
               Cause
               of
               this
               Relation
               being
               suppress'd
               both
               in
               Spain
               and
               America
               ,
               lest
               being
               of
               no
               use
               to
               the
               Spaniards
               ,
               the
               Portuguez
               might
               make
               too
               great
               Advantages
               of
               it
               :
               Thus
               the
               Copies
               of
               it
               became
               so
               scarce
               ,
               that
               the
               Editor
               of
               the
               French
               Translation
               says
               ,
               there
               was
               not
               one
               single
               Book
               any
               where
               to
               be
               had
               ,
               except
               that
               the
               Translator
               (
               M.
               Gomberville
               of
               the
               French
               Academy
               )
               made
               use
               of
               ,
               and
               perhaps
               there
               might
               be
               another
               in
               the
               
                 Vatican
                 Library
              
               ;
               for
               
                 Philip
                 the
                 Fourth
              
               had
               taken
               all
               possible
               care
               to
               get
               and
               destroy
               most
               of
               the
               printed
               Copies
               in
               Europe
               and
               the
               West-Indies
               .
            
             
               †
               In
               the
               Year
               1655
               the
               
                 Count
                 de
                 Pagan
              
               ,
               Master
               of
               the
               Artillery
               ,
               presented
               to
               Mazarine
               Proposals
               for
               conquering
               and
               planting
               this
               great
               River
               ;
               but
               the
               Cardinal
               being
               involv'd
               in
               Domestick
               Troubles
               ,
               was
               not
               at
               leisure
               to
               push
               on
               the
               Enterprize
               ,
               tho
               it
               had
               been
               first
               started
               by
               that
               eminent
               Minister
               himself
               .
               This
               Discourse
               of
               
                 Monsieur
                 de
                 Pagan
              
               is
               extracted
               for
               the
               most
               part
               out
               of
               Acugna
               ,
               and
               is
               a
               sort
               of
               Paraphrase
               upon
               him
               ,
               full
               of
               Digressions
               ,
               and
               not
               comparable
               to
               the
               Original
               it self
               ,
               which
               is
               more
               uniform
               and
               authentick
               ,
               containing
               abundance
               of
               remarkable
               Observations
               ,
               not
               mentioned
               by
               Pagan
               nor
               any
               other
               Copist
               whatsoever
               .
               The
               Cardinal
               was
               once
               resolv'd
               to
               plant
               five
               several
               Colonies
               ;
               the
               first
               in
               the
               
                 Isle
                 of
                 the
                 Sun
              
               ,
               to
               guard
               the
               best
               Entrance
               into
               the
               Mouth
               of
               the
               Amazone
               ;
               the
               second
               on
               the
               Bosphore
               or
               Strait
               ,
               to
               keep
               the
               Passage
               ;
               the
               third
               on
               the
               Points
               of
               the
               
                 Rio
                 Negro
              
               ;
               the
               fourth
               on
               the
               Zuanes
               near
               the
               Golden
               Mines
               ;
               the
               last
               on
               the
               Mouth
               of
               the
               Maragnon
               ,
               to
               watch
               over
               the
               Spanish
               Frontiers
               on
               that
               side
               
               of
               the
               Andes
               :
               This
               was
               the
               Plan
               of
               his
               Design
               .
               The
               many
               Difficulties
               of
               entring
               the
               Mouth
               ,
               and
               getting
               into
               the
               true
               Channel
               of
               this
               River
               of
               Amazons
               ,
               have
               often
               discouraged
               the
               
                 Spaniards
                 ,
                 English
              
               ,
               and
               Dutch
               from
               attempting
               to
               trade
               in
               it
               ,
               whereas
               upon
               Practice
               and
               Experience
               it
               might
               prove
               as
               navigable
               as
               most
               of
               the
               great
               Rivers
               of
               the
               World
               ,
               whose
               Mouths
               are
               generally
               encumbred
               either
               with
               Sands
               ,
               Flats
               ,
               Isles
               ,
               or
               impetuous
               Currents
               ,
               which
               after
               a
               few
               Trials
               become
               familiar
               .
               The
               way
               propounded
               to
               the
               Cardinal
               was
               this
               .
               First
               shun
               the
               strong
               Currents
               ,
               by
               passing
               aside
               into
               2
               Degrees
               of
               South
               Latitude
               ;
               then
               steer
               up
               agen
               by
               the
               Coast
               of
               Brazil
               at
               30
               min.
               
               South
               Lat.
               double
               the
               Point
               of
               Zaparara
               ,
               and
               sail
               to
               the
               South-west
               ;
               after
               that
               follow
               the
               Coast
               of
               the
               Province
               of
               Para
               ,
               and
               pass
               the
               Channel
               of
               the
               
                 Isle
                 of
                 the
                 Sun
              
               at
               1
               Deg.
               15
               Min.
               South
               Lat.
               and
               26
               Leagues
               from
               the
               main
               Sea
               ;
               lastly
               ,
               sail
               Westward
               ,
               leave
               the
               side
               of
               Para
               ,
               and
               keep
               the
               same
               Latitude
               to
               gain
               the
               Bank-side
               of
               Curupa
               ,
               and
               there
               enter
               into
               the
               best
               Road
               of
               this
               River
               at
               2
               deg
               .
               S.
               Lat.
               and
               30
               Leagues
               beyond
               Curupa
               ,
               which
               is
               but
               1
               deg
               .
               30
               min.
               on
               the
               same
               side
               of
               the
               Line
               .
            
             
               Since
               that
               time
               the
               French
               being
               Masters
               of
               the
               
                 Isle
                 of
                 Cayenne
              
               (
               which
               they
               have
               fortified
               and
               cultivated
               )
               to
               the
               North
               of
               the
               Amazone
               ,
               have
               not
               (
               nor
               any
               other
               Nation
               that
               we
               know
               of
               )
               planted
               any
               Countrey
               on
               this
               River
               ,
               but
               have
               contented
               themselves
               with
               making
               Journeys
               into
               Guiana
               ,
               particularly
               in
               search
               of
               the
               vast
               Lake
               of
               Parima
               ,
               which
               the
               Spaniards
               have
               long
               fancied
               to
               be
               *
               the
               richest
               Place
               in
               the
               World
               ,
               calling
               it
               the
               Kingdom
               of
               Dorado
               ,
               whither
               all
               the
               great
               Families
               of
               Peru
               retir'd
               ,
               and
               built
               the
               
               Golden
               City
               of
               †
               Manoa
               .
               What
               grounds
               the
               Spaniards
               went
               upon
               in
               their
               Attempts
               to
               find
               out
               these
               Places
               at
               a
               mighty
               Expence
               of
               Blood
               and
               Treasure
               ,
               will
               best
               appear
               by
               the
               following
               Travels
               of
               
                 M.
                 Grillet
              
               and
               Bechamel
               ,
               who
               went
               beyond
               the
               suppos'd
               Longitudes
               of
               these
               Places
               ,
               and
               could
               not
               learn
               the
               least
               Tidings
               of
               them
               from
               any
               of
               the
               
                 Indian
                 Nations
              
               ,
               tho
               the
               Circumference
               of
               the
               Lake
               alone
               is
               generally
               reckon'd
               to
               be
               above
               1500
               Miles
               .
               'T
               is
               true
               ,
               some
               may
               object
               that
               this
               doth
               not
               wholly
               destroy
               the
               common
               Geography
               of
               that
               Country
               ,
               and
               give
               this
               plausible
               Argument
               ,
               that
               the
               simple
               innocent
               Indians
               are
               grown
               so
               extremely
               sensible
               of
               the
               cruel
               Dispositions
               of
               the
               Europeans
               ,
               that
               they
               begin
               now
               to
               conceal
               industriously
               every
               thing
               from
               them
               ,
               and
               lead
               them
               out
               of
               the
               way
               ,
               lest
               they
               should
               fix
               in
               their
               Country
               and
               exercise
               their
               Barbarities
               over
               them
               ;
               *
               for
               by
               a
               modest
               Computation
               ,
               the
               number
               of
               Americans
               murder'd
               in
               cold
               Blood
               exceeds
               that
               of
               the
               People
               now
               living
               in
               Europe
               .
               To
               this
               Journey
               a
               short
               Description
               of
               Guiana
               was
               thought
               fit
               to
               be
               annex'd
               ,
               being
               drawn
               up
               by
               
                 M.
                 Gomberville
              
               out
               of
               Original
               Papers
               for
               the
               Instruction
               and
               Vse
               of
               
                 Mareshal
                 D'Estrade
              
               ,
               Vice-roy
               of
               all
               the
               French
               Plantations
               in
               America
               .
               The
               Notes
               are
               from
               another
               hand
               ,
               perhaps
               
                 M.
                 Villamont
              
               ,
               who
               was
               pleas'd
               to
               divert
               himself
               with
               such
               sort
               of
               Papers
               .
            
             
               It
               remains
               now
               that
               we
               give
               some
               Account
               of
               what
               Voyages
               have
               been
               made
               up
               the
               River
               
                 De
                 la
                 Plata
              
               .
               ‖
               In
               the
               Year
               1512.
               
               
                 Joannes
                 Dias
                 de
                 Solis
              
               (
               and
               
               again
               in
               1515.
               )
               was
               the
               first
               Discoverer
               of
               this
               Plate
               or
               Silver
               River
               ,
               wherein
               he
               and
               most
               of
               his
               Relations
               spent
               their
               Lives
               and
               Estates
               .
               ‖
               
                 An.
                 1526.
                 
                 Sebastian
                 Cabota
              
               ,
               a
               Venetian
               by
               his
               Father
               ,
               but
               born
               at
               Bristol
               in
               England
               ,
               went
               above
               120
               Leagues
               up
               this
               River
               ,
               and
               staid
               in
               it
               above
               15
               Months
               .
               
                 An.
                 1527.
                 
                 Diego
                 Garcias
              
               a
               Portuguez
               ,
               made
               further
               Discoveries
               in
               it
               ;
               but
               nothing
               more
               was
               done
               till
               nine
               Years
               after
               ,
               when
               
                 Pedro
                 de
                 Mendoza
              
               return'd
               with
               12
               Ships
               and
               1000
               Men.
               And
               about
               the
               Year
               1540.
               
               *
               
                 Alvarez
                 Cabeca
                 de
                 Vacca
              
               went
               and
               peopled
               the
               Provinces
               to
               some
               purpose
               .
               At
               first
               they
               found
               much
               Gold
               and
               Silver
               ,
               with
               infinite
               numbers
               of
               different
               Nations
               (
               soon
               lessened
               under
               the
               Tyranny
               and
               Devastations
               of
               their
               new
               Masters
               )
               the
               Country
               prodigiously
               fertile
               ,
               the
               Rivers
               overflowing
               every
               Year
               upon
               the
               Stationary
               Rains
               ,
               as
               the
               Amazone
               and
               Orenoque
               in
               Guiana
               ,
               and
               as
               the
               Nile
               and
               the
               Niger
               in
               Africa
               .
               Since
               then
               the
               Spaniards
               have
               been
               possest
               of
               this
               part
               of
               America
               ,
               and
               no
               Strangers
               have
               pass'd
               up
               this
               River
               to
               Potosi
               to
               give
               us
               any
               exact
               Relation
               thereof
               ;
               this
               of
               
                 M.
                 Acarete
              
               is
               the
               latest
               ,
               and
               much
               more
               copious
               and
               particular
               than
               that
               of
               
                 Martin
                 del
                 Barco
              
               ,
               or
               the
               Dutch
               Journal
               translated
               from
               a
               Manuscript
               by
               
                 J.
                 de
                 Laet
              
               in
               his
               
                 Hist
                 .
                 Ind.
              
               besides
               ,
               what
               is
               here
               related
               by
               Acarete
               of
               the
               Mines
               of
               Potosi
               is
               wholly
               new
               ,
               and
               merits
               our
               notice
               .
               The
               way
               he
               went
               seems
               to
               be
               a
               shorter
               and
               a
               safer
               Passage
               to
               and
               from
               the
               Mines
               of
               Potosi
               than
               that
               usually
               practis'd
               by
               
                 Arica
                 ,
                 Lima
                 ,
                 Panama
              
               and
               Porto-Belo
               ,
               especially
               now
               the
               Boucaniers
               are
               so
               well
               acquainted
               with
               those
               Seas
               and
               Countries
               ;
               but
               he
               has
               given
               a
               pretty
               good
               reason
               why
               the
               Spaniards
               don't
               open
               a
               Trade
               that
               way
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               
                 
                   
                     THE
                     COURSE
                     OF
                     THE
                     RIVER
                     OF
                     AMAZONS
                  
                   Described
                   according
                   to
                   the
                   Relation
                   of
                   
                     F
                     :
                     Chr
                     ▪
                     d'Acugna
                  
                   by
                   .
                   
                     Monr.
                     Sanson
                  
                   Geographer
                   in
                   Ordinary
                   to
                   the
                   French
                   King
                   London
                   Printed
                   for
                   S.
                   Buckley
                   ▪
                
                 map of the Amazon River
              
            
          
        
         
           
             
             
               A
               Relation
               of
               the
               Great
               River
               of
               AMAZONS
               in
               South-America
               .
            
             
               Containing
               all
               the
               Particulars
               of
               Father
               Christopher
               d'
               Acugna's
               Voyage
               ,
               made
               at
               the
               Command
               of
               the
               King
               of
               Spain
               .
            
             
               Taken
               from
               the
               Spanish
               Original
               of
               the
               said
               Chr.
               d'
               Acugna
               ,
               Jesuit
               .
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 I.
                 
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Country
                 in
                 which
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 is
                 situated
                 .
                 Of
                 its
                 Reputation
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 first
                 Discoveries
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 made
                 of
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 Spaniards
                 were
                 no
                 sooner
                 become
                 Masters
                 of
                 that
                 Part
                 of
                 America
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 now
                 called
                 Peru
                 ,
                 but
                 they
                 extremely
                 desir'd
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 Discovery
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 which
                 some
                 Geographers
                 through
                 a
                 vulgar
                 Error
                 have
                 call'd
                 the
                 
                 River
                 of
                 Maragnon
                 .
                 They
                 were
                 induc'd
                 to
                 attempt
                 this
                 not
                 only
                 by
                 the
                 Account
                 they
                 had
                 receiv'd
                 of
                 the
                 Fertility
                 of
                 the
                 Soil
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 Riches
                 of
                 the
                 People
                 along
                 that
                 famous
                 River
                 ,
                 but
                 also
                 because
                 they
                 had
                 very
                 good
                 Reasons
                 to
                 believe
                 that
                 it
                 took
                 its
                 Course
                 from
                 the
                 West
                 to
                 the
                 East
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 receiving
                 all
                 the
                 Rivers
                 that
                 descend
                 from
                 the
                 Mountains
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 it
                 was
                 a
                 kind
                 of
                 Canal
                 through
                 which
                 there
                 was
                 a
                 Passage
                 from
                 the
                 Southern
                 to
                 the
                 Northern
                 Sea.
                 Upon
                 these
                 Conjectures
                 some
                 Persons
                 undertook
                 to
                 go
                 in
                 search
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 but
                 to
                 no
                 purpose
                 .
                 Others
                 afterward
                 made
                 the
                 like
                 Essay
                 ,
                 but
                 with
                 no
                 better
                 Success
                 .
                 At
                 length
                 in
                 the
                 Year
                 1539.
                 
                 
                   Gonzalles
                   Pizarre
                
                 being
                 made
                 Governor
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Quito
                 by
                 the
                 Marquess
                 
                   Francis
                   Pizarre
                
                 his
                 Brother
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 Governor
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 put
                 himself
                 in
                 an
                 Equipage
                 to
                 go
                 to
                 his
                 Government
                 ,
                 and
                 from
                 thence
                 to
                 pass
                 on
                 to
                 the
                 Conquest
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 Cannelle
                 .
                 He
                 got
                 together
                 two
                 hundred
                 Foot
                 and
                 a
                 hundred
                 Horse
                 ,
                 partly
                 at
                 his
                 own
                 Charge
                 ,
                 and
                 partly
                 at
                 the
                 Expence
                 of
                 some
                 that
                 accompanied
                 him
                 in
                 this
                 Expedition
                 ,
                 which
                 cost
                 above
                 fifty
                 thousand
                 *
                 Castillans
                 of
                 Gold.
                 Being
                 arriv'd
                 at
                 Quito
                 ,
                 he
                 order'd
                 all
                 necessary
                 
                 Provisions
                 to
                 be
                 made
                 for
                 his
                 Journey
                 ,
                 took
                 a
                 great
                 number
                 of
                 Indian
                 Slaves
                 to
                 carry
                 the
                 Baggage
                 ,
                 and
                 set
                 forward
                 at
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 December
                 in
                 the
                 Year
                 1539
                 ,
                 with
                 four
                 hundred
                 Spaniards
                 and
                 four
                 thousand
                 Indians
                 .
                 He
                 order'd
                 for
                 the
                 Subsistence
                 of
                 his
                 Men
                 four
                 thousand
                 Sheep
                 ,
                 Cows
                 ,
                 and
                 Swine
                 to
                 be
                 driven
                 along
                 with
                 'em
                 ;
                 and
                 taking
                 his
                 Course
                 directly
                 Northward
                 ,
                 he
                 enter'd
                 into
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 the
                 Quixos
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Conquests
                 of
                 the
                 Yncas
                 of
                 Peru
                 ended
                 .
                 This
                 Province
                 is
                 forty
                 Leagues
                 in
                 length
                 ,
                 and
                 twenty
                 in
                 breadth
                 ;
                 and
                 was
                 inhabited
                 by
                 a
                 People
                 that
                 never
                 us'd
                 to
                 dwell
                 together
                 in
                 Towns
                 or
                 Villages
                 like
                 those
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 but
                 liv'd
                 in
                 a
                 straggling
                 manner
                 scatter'd
                 up
                 and
                 down
                 the
                 Country
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 II.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 way
                 Gonzalles
                 Pizarre
                 took
                 in
                 passing
                 out
                 of
                 Quito
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Difficulties
                 he
                 met
                 with
                 in
                 his
                 Journey
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 March
                 of
                 our
                 Adventurers
                 was
                 retarded
                 ,
                 not
                 only
                 by
                 the
                 Opposition
                 they
                 had
                 from
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 who
                 disputed
                 their
                 Passage
                 ,
                 but
                 also
                 
                 by
                 continual
                 Rains
                 and
                 Earthquakes
                 so
                 violent
                 ,
                 that
                 many
                 Houses
                 were
                 overturn'd
                 ,
                 and
                 deep
                 Breaches
                 made
                 in
                 the
                 Earth
                 before
                 'em
                 ,
                 together
                 with
                 such
                 terrible
                 Storms
                 and
                 Claps
                 of
                 Thunder
                 ,
                 that
                 any
                 one
                 but
                 
                   Gonzalles
                   Pizarre
                
                 would
                 have
                 abandon'd
                 such
                 an
                 Enterprize
                 as
                 seem'd
                 to
                 be
                 oppos'd
                 both
                 by
                 Heaven
                 and
                 Earth
                 .
                 However
                 he
                 with
                 his
                 Men
                 did
                 not
                 give
                 over
                 their
                 March
                 for
                 all
                 this
                 bad
                 Weather
                 ,
                 but
                 cross'd
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Quixos
                 ,
                 till
                 they
                 came
                 to
                 the
                 foot
                 of
                 some
                 high
                 Mountains
                 all
                 cover'd
                 with
                 Snow
                 ,
                 which
                 make
                 a
                 part
                 of
                 those
                 which
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 call
                 the
                 Cordeliers
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 bound
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Quixos
                 on
                 the
                 North.
                 Tho
                 the
                 Rains
                 still
                 continued
                 they
                 resolv'd
                 to
                 pass
                 over
                 the
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 but
                 were
                 not
                 far
                 advanc'd
                 before
                 the
                 Rain
                 turn'd
                 into
                 a
                 Snow
                 so
                 thick
                 and
                 cold
                 ,
                 that
                 many
                 of
                 the
                 Indians
                 were
                 kill'd
                 by
                 it
                 .
                 The
                 Spaniards
                 were
                 likely
                 to
                 have
                 undergone
                 the
                 same
                 fate
                 ,
                 if
                 they
                 had
                 continued
                 their
                 March
                 as
                 they
                 began
                 :
                 They
                 concluded
                 that
                 nothing
                 but
                 Expedition
                 could
                 save
                 'em
                 from
                 the
                 Rigor
                 of
                 the
                 Cold
                 ,
                 and
                 therefore
                 left
                 all
                 the
                 Cattle
                 they
                 had
                 with
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 lighted
                 themselves
                 of
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 their
                 Provisions
                 and
                 Baggage
                 ,
                 hoping
                 they
                 should
                 find
                 enough
                 on
                 t'other
                 side
                 of
                 
                 the
                 Mountains
                 .
                 When
                 they
                 were
                 got
                 over
                 them
                 ,
                 they
                 enter'd
                 into
                 a
                 Valley
                 call'd
                 Zumaque
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 a
                 hundred
                 Leagues
                 from
                 Quito
                 by
                 the
                 account
                 of
                 good
                 Geographers
                 ;
                 there
                 they
                 found
                 abundance
                 of
                 Provisions
                 and
                 Refreshments
                 ,
                 and
                 continued
                 there
                 two
                 Months
                 to
                 acquaint
                 themselves
                 with
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 see
                 if
                 they
                 could
                 make
                 any
                 advantage
                 of
                 it
                 .
                 But
                 this
                 Place
                 not
                 answering
                 the
                 great
                 hopes
                 they
                 had
                 conceiv'd
                 of
                 their
                 Adventure
                 ,
                 Pizarre
                 parted
                 from
                 Zumaque
                 with
                 sixty
                 good
                 Souldiers
                 to
                 discover
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 Cannelle
                 ;
                 but
                 in
                 pursuing
                 the
                 Course
                 he
                 had
                 taken
                 towards
                 the
                 North
                 ,
                 he
                 found
                 the
                 way
                 so
                 rough
                 and
                 mountainous
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 was
                 constrain'd
                 to
                 change
                 his
                 Road
                 ;
                 he
                 therefore
                 turn'd
                 directly
                 to
                 the
                 East
                 ,
                 and
                 after
                 some
                 few
                 days
                 march
                 ,
                 enter'd
                 into
                 that
                 famous
                 Country
                 call'd
                 by
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 Cannelle
                 ,
                 from
                 certain
                 great
                 Trees
                 ,
                 like
                 Olive-Trees
                 ,
                 that
                 are
                 call'd
                 so
                 in
                 that
                 Place
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 III.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 Countries
                 near
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 discover'd
                 by
                 Gonzalles
                 Pizarre
                 .
              
               
                 HErrera
                 the
                 Spanish
                 Historian
                 says
                 ,
                 Pizarre
                 exercis'd
                 the
                 greatest
                 Cruelty
                 imaginable
                 on
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 these
                 Regions
                 ,
                 insomuch
                 that
                 he
                 gave
                 Men
                 to
                 be
                 eaten
                 alive
                 by
                 his
                 Dogs
                 .
                 This
                 engag'd
                 all
                 the
                 Country
                 to
                 put
                 themselves
                 in
                 Arms
                 against
                 him
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 he
                 was
                 oblig'd
                 to
                 encamp
                 himself
                 as
                 in
                 an
                 Enemy's
                 Country
                 :
                 And
                 his
                 Cruelties
                 ,
                 together
                 with
                 the
                 Despair
                 he
                 was
                 in
                 of
                 ever
                 being
                 able
                 to
                 find
                 what
                 he
                 was
                 seeking
                 after
                 ,
                 had
                 like
                 to
                 have
                 put
                 an
                 end
                 to
                 his
                 Enterprize
                 at
                 once
                 .
                 He
                 was
                 encamp'd
                 on
                 the
                 Bank
                 of
                 a
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 swell'd
                 so
                 much
                 in
                 one
                 Night
                 ,
                 that
                 if
                 the
                 Sentinels
                 ,
                 who
                 perceiv'd
                 the
                 Water
                 was
                 apace
                 getting
                 ground
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 had
                 not
                 warn'd
                 'em
                 of
                 their
                 Danger
                 ,
                 they
                 had
                 been
                 all
                 drown'd
                 ;
                 but
                 at
                 the
                 Alarm
                 they
                 gave
                 'em
                 they
                 soon
                 secur'd
                 themselves
                 by
                 making
                 towards
                 the
                 Cottages
                 of
                 the
                 wild
                 People
                 ,
                 and
                 Pizarre
                 resolv'd
                 to
                 return
                 to
                 Zumaque
                 ,
                 not
                 knowing
                 what
                 other
                 course
                 to
                 
                 take
                 .
                 From
                 thence
                 he
                 proceeded
                 again
                 with
                 all
                 his
                 Men
                 ,
                 and
                 after
                 a
                 March
                 of
                 four
                 Leagues
                 ,
                 he
                 met
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 Village
                 call'd
                 Ampua
                 ,
                 govern'd
                 by
                 a
                 Cacique
                 ,
                 and
                 found
                 a
                 great
                 number
                 of
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 in
                 a
                 posture
                 of
                 Defence
                 expecting
                 their
                 Enemy
                 .
                 But
                 there
                 was
                 another
                 and
                 a
                 greater
                 Obstacle
                 in
                 his
                 way
                 than
                 this
                 Cacique
                 and
                 all
                 his
                 Troops
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 was
                 a
                 River
                 so
                 wide
                 and
                 deep
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 could
                 have
                 no
                 thoughts
                 of
                 venturing
                 to
                 swim
                 over
                 it
                 .
                 He
                 could
                 therefore
                 find
                 no
                 better
                 Expedient
                 than
                 to
                 enter
                 into
                 a
                 Treaty
                 with
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 desire
                 the
                 help
                 of
                 their
                 Canoos
                 to
                 cross
                 this
                 River
                 .
                 The
                 Cacique
                 receiv'd
                 this
                 Proposal
                 with
                 great
                 Civility
                 ,
                 offer'd
                 'em
                 what
                 they
                 ask'd
                 ,
                 and
                 gave
                 'em
                 as
                 many
                 of
                 those
                 little
                 Boats
                 as
                 they
                 desir'd
                 ,
                 and
                 Pizarre
                 made
                 'em
                 a
                 return
                 of
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 little
                 Spanish
                 Toys
                 by
                 way
                 of
                 Requital
                 .
                 This
                 Cacique
                 having
                 receiv'd
                 Advice
                 of
                 the
                 ill
                 Treatment
                 many
                 of
                 his
                 Neighbours
                 had
                 receiv'd
                 from
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 ,
                 thought
                 of
                 nothing
                 more
                 than
                 how
                 to
                 get
                 rid
                 of
                 them
                 :
                 And
                 to
                 deliver
                 himself
                 from
                 the
                 danger
                 of
                 the
                 Company
                 of
                 such
                 bad
                 Guests
                 ,
                 endeavour'd
                 to
                 make
                 'em
                 believe
                 there
                 were
                 great
                 Riches
                 to
                 be
                 found
                 among
                 the
                 People
                 that
                 dwelt
                 
                 upon
                 this
                 River
                 some
                 days
                 Journey
                 lower
                 .
                 Pizarre
                 both
                 by
                 his
                 Actions
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 his
                 Guides
                 ,
                 who
                 were
                 his
                 Interpreters
                 ,
                 return'd
                 him
                 Thanks
                 for
                 his
                 Courtesy
                 :
                 but
                 finding
                 no
                 appearance
                 of
                 those
                 pretended
                 Riches
                 ,
                 he
                 return'd
                 to
                 Zumaque
                 ,
                 very
                 much
                 dissatisfied
                 with
                 his
                 Expedition
                 .
                 However
                 ,
                 he
                 had
                 too
                 much
                 Courage
                 to
                 return
                 back
                 to
                 Quito
                 just
                 as
                 he
                 came
                 ;
                 he
                 had
                 a
                 mind
                 therefore
                 to
                 attempt
                 some
                 great
                 Exploit
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 the
                 Discovery
                 of
                 some
                 other
                 Peru
                 ,
                 to
                 render
                 himself
                 as
                 considerable
                 as
                 the
                 Marquess
                 of
                 Pizarre
                 his
                 elder
                 Brother
                 :
                 He
                 open'd
                 his
                 Mind
                 to
                 
                   Francis
                   Oreillane
                
                 ,
                 a
                 Gentleman
                 of
                 Truxillo
                 in
                 Spain
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 come
                 to
                 join
                 him
                 in
                 the
                 Valley
                 of
                 Zumaque
                 with
                 fifty
                 Troopers
                 well
                 appointed
                 :
                 He
                 very
                 much
                 encourag'd
                 his
                 Design
                 ;
                 and
                 tho
                 the
                 Rainy
                 Season
                 was
                 not
                 yet
                 past
                 ,
                 that
                 did
                 not
                 hinder
                 him
                 from
                 advancing
                 forward
                 ;
                 he
                 left
                 his
                 little
                 Army
                 at
                 Zumaque
                 ,
                 and
                 having
                 taken
                 a
                 hundred
                 effective
                 Souldiers
                 ,
                 and
                 some
                 Indians
                 for
                 Guides
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 carry
                 Provisions
                 ,
                 he
                 march'd
                 directly
                 to
                 the
                 East
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 IV.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 first
                 News
                 he
                 receiv'd
                 of
                 this
                 famous
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 Riches
                 of
                 the
                 People
                 that
                 dwell
                 near
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 EIther
                 the
                 Ignorance
                 of
                 his
                 Guides
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Hatred
                 they
                 bare
                 him
                 engaged
                 him
                 in
                 a
                 Country
                 all
                 full
                 of
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 Forests
                 and
                 Torrents
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 he
                 was
                 necessitated
                 to
                 make
                 Ways
                 where
                 he
                 found
                 none
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 open
                 himself
                 a
                 Passage
                 through
                 the
                 Woods
                 with
                 Hatchets
                 ,
                 where
                 none
                 had
                 ever
                 gone
                 before
                 .
                 At
                 length
                 after
                 many
                 days
                 March
                 he
                 pierc'd
                 through
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Coca
                 .
                 The
                 Cacique
                 of
                 which
                 Province
                 came
                 before
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 offer'd
                 him
                 all
                 the
                 Accommodations
                 the
                 Country
                 afforded
                 for
                 his
                 Refreshment
                 .
                 Gonzalles
                 promis'd
                 himself
                 much
                 from
                 this
                 kind
                 Entertainment
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 the
                 Assistance
                 of
                 his
                 Guides
                 enter'd
                 into
                 Conversation
                 with
                 the
                 Cacique
                 .
                 He
                 inform'd
                 him
                 that
                 the
                 Country
                 through
                 which
                 he
                 had
                 pass'd
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 so
                 full
                 of
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 Forests
                 and
                 Brooks
                 ,
                 was
                 the
                 only
                 Passage
                 he
                 could
                 have
                 taken
                 to
                 come
                 thither
                 ;
                 that
                 it
                 was
                 extremely
                 difficult
                 to
                 get
                 through
                 it
                 ,
                 but
                 
                 that
                 if
                 he
                 were
                 willing
                 to
                 embark
                 on
                 the
                 River
                 he
                 saw
                 before
                 him
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 follow
                 it
                 by
                 Land
                 ,
                 he
                 might
                 assure
                 himself
                 ,
                 that
                 along
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 another
                 River
                 much
                 greater
                 than
                 this
                 ,
                 he
                 should
                 find
                 a
                 Country
                 abounding
                 with
                 all
                 things
                 ,
                 whose
                 Inhabitants
                 were
                 cover'd
                 with
                 Plates
                 of
                 Gold.
                 There
                 was
                 no
                 need
                 of
                 saying
                 any
                 thing
                 more
                 to
                 Pizarre
                 to
                 incite
                 him
                 to
                 any
                 kind
                 of
                 Enterprize
                 ;
                 who
                 presently
                 sent
                 two
                 of
                 his
                 Guides
                 to
                 Zumaque
                 with
                 Orders
                 to
                 his
                 Officers
                 to
                 come
                 and
                 join
                 him
                 ,
                 who
                 march'd
                 immediately
                 ,
                 and
                 surmounting
                 all
                 the
                 Difficulties
                 of
                 the
                 way
                 ,
                 arriv'd
                 much
                 fatigued
                 to
                 the
                 Town
                 of
                 
                   Coca
                   .
                   Pizarre
                
                 having
                 rested
                 'em
                 some
                 few
                 days
                 ,
                 and
                 afterwards
                 put
                 them
                 in
                 Battalia
                 before
                 the
                 Cacique
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 much
                 terrified
                 at
                 them
                 ;
                 he
                 amass'd
                 almost
                 all
                 the
                 Provisions
                 of
                 his
                 whole
                 Province
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 Present
                 of
                 them
                 to
                 Pizarre
                 ,
                 that
                 by
                 this
                 Magnificence
                 he
                 might
                 civilly
                 acquit
                 himself
                 of
                 his
                 new
                 Acquaintance
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 more
                 impatient
                 of
                 his
                 stay
                 than
                 the
                 other
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 next
                 Morning
                 having
                 filed
                 his
                 Troops
                 along
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 he
                 took
                 his
                 leave
                 of
                 the
                 Cacique
                 ,
                 presenting
                 him
                 with
                 a
                 fine
                 Sword
                 ,
                 and
                 put
                 himself
                 at
                 the
                 head
                 of
                 his
                 Cavalry
                 ,
                 and
                 followed
                 the
                 pleasant
                 Course
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 .
                 This
                 good
                 way
                 
                 did
                 not
                 last
                 long
                 ,
                 but
                 they
                 had
                 Rivulets
                 to
                 swim
                 over
                 ,
                 must
                 go
                 up-hill
                 and
                 down-hill
                 in
                 uneven
                 ways
                 ,
                 and
                 march
                 forty
                 three
                 days
                 without
                 finding
                 any
                 Provision
                 for
                 his
                 Troops
                 ,
                 or
                 any
                 Fords
                 or
                 Canoos
                 by
                 which
                 to
                 pass
                 the
                 River
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 V.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 Discovery
                 which
                 Pizarre
                 made
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Coca
                 ,
                 and
                 Oreillane's
                 floating
                 on
                 this
                 River
                 by
                 Pizarre's
                 order
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 entering
                 into
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 .
              
               
                 THis
                 long
                 March
                 having
                 mightily
                 fatigued
                 our
                 Travellers
                 ,
                 they
                 were
                 stop'd
                 by
                 a
                 very
                 surprizing
                 sight
                 :
                 The
                 River
                 was
                 press'd
                 by
                 two
                 Rocks
                 ,
                 one
                 on
                 each
                 side
                 its
                 Passage
                 ,
                 at
                 no
                 more
                 than
                 twenty
                 foot
                 distance
                 from
                 one
                 another
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 Water
                 going
                 through
                 this
                 Strait
                 ,
                 precipitated
                 it self
                 into
                 a
                 Valley
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 a
                 Leap
                 of
                 two
                 hundred
                 Fathom
                 .
                 Here
                 it
                 was
                 that
                 Pizarre
                 caus'd
                 that
                 famous
                 Bridg
                 to
                 be
                 made
                 for
                 his
                 Troops
                 to
                 pass
                 over
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 so
                 much
                 boasted
                 of
                 by
                 the
                 Spanish
                 Historians
                 .
                 But
                 finding
                 the
                 Way
                 not
                 at
                 all
                 better
                 on
                 the
                 other
                 side
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 Provision
                 growing
                 
                 more
                 and
                 more
                 scarce
                 every
                 day
                 ,
                 Pizarre
                 resolv'd
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 Brigantine
                 to
                 carry
                 by
                 Water
                 all
                 his
                 sick
                 Men
                 ,
                 Provisions
                 ,
                 Baggage
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 hundred
                 thousand
                 Livres
                 in
                 Gold
                 which
                 they
                 had
                 got
                 amongst
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 This
                 was
                 no
                 small
                 Difficulty
                 ,
                 but
                 Industry
                 and
                 Necessity
                 surmounted
                 it
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 Vessel
                 being
                 finished
                 ,
                 Pizarre
                 embark'd
                 all
                 in
                 it
                 that
                 hindred
                 his
                 March
                 ,
                 and
                 gave
                 the
                 Command
                 of
                 it
                 to
                 
                   Francis
                   Oreillane
                
                 with
                 fifty
                 Souldiers
                 ,
                 giving
                 him
                 express
                 Order
                 not
                 to
                 part
                 far
                 from
                 him
                 ,
                 but
                 to
                 come
                 every
                 Night
                 to
                 the
                 Camp.
                 He
                 observ'd
                 this
                 Order
                 exactly
                 ,
                 till
                 his
                 General
                 seeing
                 all
                 his
                 Men
                 were
                 much
                 pinch'd
                 with
                 Hunger
                 ,
                 commanded
                 him
                 to
                 go
                 and
                 seek
                 some
                 Provisions
                 and
                 Cottages
                 ,
                 where
                 his
                 Men
                 might
                 be
                 refreshed
                 .
                 Oreillane
                 had
                 no
                 sooner
                 receiv'd
                 his
                 Orders
                 ,
                 but
                 he
                 launched
                 out
                 into
                 the
                 middle
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 Rapidity
                 of
                 the
                 Stream
                 carry'd
                 him
                 as
                 fast
                 as
                 he
                 could
                 wish
                 ,
                 for
                 he
                 made
                 above
                 a
                 hundred
                 Leagues
                 in
                 three
                 days
                 without
                 the
                 use
                 of
                 either
                 Sails
                 or
                 Oars
                 :
                 The
                 Current
                 of
                 Coca
                 carried
                 him
                 into
                 another
                 River
                 which
                 was
                 much
                 larger
                 ,
                 but
                 nothing
                 near
                 so
                 swift
                 ;
                 he
                 made
                 his
                 Observation
                 of
                 it
                 one
                 whole
                 day
                 ,
                 and
                 seeing
                 that
                 the
                 farther
                 he
                 went
                 down
                 ,
                 the
                 more
                 the
                 River
                 
                 widen'd
                 ,
                 he
                 did
                 not
                 doubt
                 but
                 this
                 was
                 that
                 great
                 River
                 which
                 had
                 been
                 so
                 often
                 and
                 in
                 vain
                 sought
                 after
                 .
                 The
                 Joy
                 he
                 conceiv'd
                 at
                 his
                 good
                 Fortune
                 so
                 transported
                 him
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 made
                 him
                 quite
                 forget
                 himself
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 he
                 thought
                 of
                 nothing
                 but
                 the
                 Enjoyment
                 of
                 this
                 good
                 Success
                 ;
                 and
                 trampling
                 upon
                 his
                 Duty
                 ,
                 Oath
                 ,
                 Fidelity
                 and
                 Gratitude
                 ,
                 he
                 had
                 now
                 nothing
                 in
                 view
                 but
                 how
                 to
                 bring
                 about
                 the
                 Enterprize
                 he
                 was
                 contriving
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 VI.
                 
              
               
                 Oreillane
                 hoping
                 for
                 an
                 extraordinary
                 Success
                 from
                 the
                 Discovery
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ;
                 and
                 being
                 willing
                 to
                 have
                 the
                 sole
                 Glory
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 leaves
                 his
                 General
                 ,
                 and
                 makes
                 himself
                 the
                 Head
                 of
                 this
                 Enterprize
                 .
              
               
                 TO
                 this
                 end
                 Oreillane
                 perswaded
                 his
                 Companions
                 that
                 the
                 Country
                 whither
                 they
                 were
                 arriv'd
                 ,
                 was
                 not
                 the
                 same
                 with
                 that
                 which
                 their
                 General
                 had
                 described
                 ;
                 that
                 it
                 had
                 not
                 that
                 great
                 Plenty
                 the
                 Cacique
                 had
                 told
                 him
                 he
                 should
                 find
                 at
                 the
                 joining
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 Rivers
                 ;
                 that
                 they
                 must
                 certainly
                 float
                 along
                 farther
                 to
                 find
                 that
                 pleasant
                 and
                 fertile
                 Country
                 ,
                 
                 where
                 they
                 might
                 store
                 themselves
                 with
                 Provisions
                 ;
                 and
                 besides
                 that
                 ,
                 they
                 all
                 saw
                 there
                 was
                 no
                 likelihood
                 of
                 getting
                 up
                 this
                 River
                 again
                 ,
                 which
                 indeed
                 they
                 came
                 down
                 in
                 three
                 days
                 ,
                 but
                 ,
                 as
                 he
                 believ'd
                 ,
                 could
                 not
                 make
                 the
                 same
                 way
                 back
                 again
                 in
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 a
                 whole
                 Year
                 ;
                 that
                 it
                 was
                 much
                 more
                 reasonable
                 to
                 wait
                 for
                 their
                 Company
                 on
                 this
                 new
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 in
                 the
                 mean
                 time
                 it
                 was
                 necessary
                 for
                 'em
                 to
                 go
                 seek
                 Provisions
                 .
                 Thus
                 concealing
                 his
                 Design
                 ,
                 he
                 hoisted
                 up
                 the
                 Sails
                 ,
                 and
                 abandoning
                 himself
                 to
                 the
                 Wind
                 ,
                 to
                 his
                 Fortune
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 his
                 Resolution
                 ,
                 he
                 thought
                 of
                 nothing
                 but
                 of
                 pursuing
                 the
                 course
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 till
                 he
                 should
                 discover
                 it
                 quite
                 to
                 the
                 Sea.
                 His
                 Companions
                 were
                 startled
                 at
                 the
                 manner
                 of
                 his
                 putting
                 in
                 execution
                 the
                 Design
                 he
                 had
                 been
                 proposing
                 to
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 thought
                 themselves
                 oblig'd
                 to
                 tell
                 him
                 that
                 he
                 went
                 beyond
                 the
                 Orders
                 of
                 his
                 General
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 in
                 the
                 extreme
                 want
                 he
                 was
                 in
                 ,
                 they
                 ought
                 to
                 carry
                 him
                 the
                 little
                 Provision
                 they
                 could
                 find
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 he
                 had
                 given
                 sufficient
                 Evidence
                 that
                 he
                 had
                 some
                 ill
                 Design
                 ,
                 because
                 he
                 had
                 neglected
                 to
                 leave
                 two
                 Canoos
                 at
                 the
                 Bank
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 Rivers
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 General
                 had
                 appointed
                 him
                 ,
                 for
                 his
                 Army
                 to
                 pass
                 over
                 in
                 .
                 These
                 Remonstrances
                 
                 were
                 made
                 to
                 him
                 chiefly
                 by
                 a
                 Dominican
                 Frier
                 nam'd
                 
                   Gaspard
                   de
                   Carvajal
                
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 a
                 young
                 Gentleman
                 of
                 Badajos
                 in
                 Spain
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Fernand
                   Sanches
                   de
                   Vargas
                
                 .
                 The
                 Consideration
                 they
                 had
                 for
                 these
                 two
                 Persons
                 occasion'd
                 a
                 Division
                 of
                 the
                 Company
                 in
                 this
                 little
                 Vessel
                 into
                 two
                 Parties
                 ;
                 and
                 from
                 Words
                 they
                 were
                 like
                 to
                 have
                 fallen
                 to
                 Blows
                 ,
                 but
                 that
                 Oreillane
                 stifling
                 their
                 Gratitude
                 by
                 his
                 Dissimulation
                 ,
                 by
                 fair
                 Protestations
                 and
                 great
                 Promises
                 appeas'd
                 this
                 Disorder
                 .
                 By
                 means
                 of
                 the
                 Friends
                 he
                 had
                 in
                 the
                 Vessel
                 he
                 gain'd
                 most
                 of
                 the
                 Souldiers
                 that
                 were
                 against
                 him
                 to
                 his
                 side
                 ;
                 and
                 seeing
                 the
                 two
                 Heads
                 of
                 the
                 other
                 Party
                 left
                 almost
                 alone
                 ,
                 he
                 caus'd
                 
                   Fernand
                   Sanches
                   de
                   Vargas
                
                 to
                 be
                 set
                 ashore
                 ,
                 leaving
                 him
                 quite
                 alone
                 ,
                 without
                 Victuals
                 and
                 without
                 Arms
                 ,
                 in
                 a
                 dismal
                 Wilderness
                 ,
                 bounded
                 on
                 one
                 side
                 with
                 high
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 a
                 River
                 on
                 the
                 other
                 :
                 He
                 had
                 more
                 Prudence
                 than
                 to
                 treat
                 the
                 Frier
                 after
                 the
                 same
                 manner
                 ,
                 yet
                 he
                 gave
                 him
                 to
                 understand
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 was
                 not
                 for
                 him
                 to
                 penetrate
                 any
                 more
                 into
                 the
                 Pretensions
                 of
                 his
                 Commander
                 ,
                 unless
                 he
                 had
                 a
                 mind
                 to
                 be
                 severely
                 chastis'd
                 :
                 After
                 this
                 he
                 continued
                 his
                 Voyage
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 next
                 day
                 being
                 willing
                 to
                 know
                 if
                 he
                 might
                 depend
                 upon
                 
                 all
                 that
                 were
                 with
                 him
                 for
                 the
                 success
                 of
                 his
                 Resolutions
                 ,
                 he
                 let
                 'em
                 know
                 that
                 he
                 aspir'd
                 to
                 a
                 much
                 higher
                 pitch
                 of
                 Dignity
                 than
                 what
                 he
                 might
                 have
                 obtain'd
                 in
                 the
                 Service
                 of
                 Pizarre
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 ow'd
                 every
                 thing
                 to
                 himself
                 and
                 his
                 King
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 his
                 Fortune
                 having
                 as
                 it
                 were
                 led
                 him
                 by
                 the
                 hand
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 greatest
                 and
                 most
                 desirable
                 Discovery
                 that
                 was
                 ever
                 made
                 in
                 the
                 Indies
                 ,
                 namely
                 ,
                 the
                 great
                 River
                 upon
                 which
                 they
                 were
                 sailing
                 ,
                 which
                 coming
                 out
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 and
                 running
                 from
                 West
                 to
                 East
                 ,
                 was
                 the
                 finest
                 Channel
                 in
                 the
                 new
                 World
                 ,
                 through
                 which
                 one
                 might
                 pass
                 from
                 the
                 Northern
                 to
                 the
                 Southern
                 Sea
                 :
                 that
                 he
                 could
                 not
                 without
                 betraying
                 them
                 all
                 ,
                 and
                 without
                 ravishing
                 from
                 them
                 the
                 Fruits
                 of
                 their
                 Voyage
                 and
                 Industry
                 ,
                 make
                 others
                 share
                 in
                 a
                 Favour
                 which
                 Heaven
                 had
                 reserv'd
                 for
                 them
                 alone
                 .
                 That
                 as
                 for
                 himself
                 ,
                 his
                 Design
                 was
                 to
                 go
                 into
                 Spain
                 ,
                 to
                 beg
                 of
                 his
                 Catholick
                 Majesty
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 Country
                 all
                 along
                 this
                 noble
                 River
                 ;
                 he
                 promis'd
                 them
                 they
                 should
                 be
                 all
                 Governours
                 of
                 Castles
                 and
                 Towns
                 ,
                 and
                 have
                 other
                 Recompences
                 proportionate
                 to
                 their
                 Valour
                 and
                 Generosity
                 ;
                 that
                 they
                 should
                 only
                 follow
                 him
                 ;
                 that
                 they
                 knew
                 him
                 well
                 ;
                 that
                 he
                 was
                 not
                 uncapable
                 of
                 the
                 
                 Post
                 he
                 design'd
                 to
                 ask
                 of
                 the
                 King
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 it
                 was
                 certainly
                 due
                 to
                 him
                 for
                 having
                 made
                 a
                 Discovery
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 .
                 That
                 as
                 for
                 the
                 Oath
                 he
                 had
                 taken
                 to
                 Pizarre
                 ,
                 he
                 disingag'd
                 himself
                 of
                 it
                 ;
                 that
                 he
                 was
                 resolv'd
                 to
                 be
                 commanded
                 by
                 him
                 no
                 longer
                 ;
                 that
                 he
                 renounc'd
                 the
                 Power
                 he
                 had
                 receiv'd
                 from
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 would
                 have
                 no
                 other
                 Authority
                 nor
                 Command
                 but
                 what
                 he
                 ask'd
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 what
                 they
                 would
                 give
                 him
                 in
                 naming
                 him
                 chief
                 Commander
                 ,
                 under
                 the
                 King
                 their
                 Master
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 Discovery
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 VII
                 .
              
               
                 Oreillane
                 gives
                 his
                 Name
                 to
                 this
                 River
                 .
                 The
                 Change
                 of
                 the
                 Name
                 he
                 had
                 given
                 it
                 by
                 a
                 Fable
                 himself
                 compos'd
                 ,
                 to
                 render
                 his
                 Discovery
                 the
                 more
                 famous
                 .
              
               
                 HIS
                 Harangue
                 was
                 followed
                 with
                 a
                 general
                 Consent
                 to
                 make
                 him
                 the
                 Head
                 of
                 this
                 Enterprize
                 .
                 He
                 began
                 to
                 use
                 his
                 Authority
                 in
                 giving
                 his
                 Name
                 to
                 this
                 great
                 and
                 famous
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 content
                 to
                 know
                 the
                 course
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 he
                 was
                 desirous
                 of
                 discovering
                 the
                 Country
                 it
                 water'd
                 .
                 He
                 therefore
                 went
                 ashore
                 to
                 get
              
               
               
                 Provisions
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 acquaint
                 himself
                 with
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 :
                 But
                 he
                 found
                 the
                 People
                 able
                 to
                 defend
                 their
                 Bread
                 ,
                 and
                 had
                 several
                 Battels
                 with
                 the
                 Natives
                 ,
                 who
                 let
                 him
                 know
                 they
                 were
                 not
                 without
                 Courage
                 ;
                 nay
                 ,
                 they
                 were
                 so
                 stout
                 and
                 resolute
                 in
                 the
                 defence
                 of
                 their
                 Country
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Women
                 mix'd
                 themselves
                 with
                 the
                 Men
                 in
                 the
                 Battel
                 ,
                 and
                 seconded
                 them
                 with
                 admirable
                 Bravery
                 both
                 in
                 shooting
                 of
                 Arrows
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 standing
                 their
                 Ground
                 .
                 'T
                 was
                 this
                 that
                 gave
                 occasion
                 to
                 Oreillane
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 might
                 render
                 his
                 Discovery
                 more
                 considerable
                 and
                 glorious
                 ,
                 to
                 tell
                 that
                 he
                 had
                 enter'd
                 into
                 a
                 Country
                 of
                 vast
                 Extent
                 along
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 govern'd
                 by
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 Women
                 who
                 had
                 no
                 Husbands
                 ,
                 who
                 destroy'd
                 all
                 their
                 Male-Children
                 ;
                 and
                 who
                 came
                 arm'd
                 at
                 a
                 certain
                 time
                 every
                 Year
                 in
                 a
                 Body
                 to
                 the
                 Frontiers
                 of
                 their
                 Neighbours
                 ,
                 there
                 to
                 choose
                 themselves
                 Paramours
                 ,
                 to
                 prevent
                 the
                 Extinction
                 of
                 so
                 extraordinary
                 a
                 Nation
                 :
                 And
                 this
                 was
                 the
                 reason
                 why
                 this
                 River
                 he
                 had
                 first
                 call'd
                 after
                 his
                 own
                 Name
                 ,
                 was
                 since
                 call'd
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 .
                 However
                 Oreillane
                 pursued
                 his
                 Course
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 Success
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 more
                 he
                 advanc'd
                 ,
                 the
                 more
                 all
                 things
                 seem'd
                 to
                 concur
                 to
                 prosper
                 his
                 Infidelity
                 .
                 As
                 he
                 
                 went
                 farther
                 down
                 ,
                 he
                 found
                 other
                 People
                 ,
                 not
                 so
                 warlike
                 and
                 savage
                 as
                 the
                 others
                 :
                 They
                 receiv'd
                 him
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 Civility
                 ,
                 and
                 admir'd
                 all
                 that
                 he
                 and
                 his
                 Company
                 did
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 that
                 they
                 had
                 ,
                 their
                 Persons
                 ,
                 their
                 Clothes
                 ,
                 their
                 Arms
                 ,
                 their
                 Vessel
                 ,
                 and
                 every
                 thing
                 else
                 :
                 They
                 look'd
                 upon
                 'em
                 as
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 extraordinary
                 Men
                 ,
                 were
                 willing
                 to
                 enter
                 into
                 an
                 amicable
                 Treaty
                 with
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 gave
                 'em
                 as
                 much
                 Provision
                 as
                 they
                 could
                 desire
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 VIII
                 .
              
               
                 Oreillane
                 passes
                 out
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 by
                 an
                 Arm
                 that
                 goes
                 into
                 the
                 Sea
                 near
                 the
                 North-Cape
                 .
                 His
                 Voyage
                 into
                 Spain
                 to
                 beg
                 of
                 the
                 King
                 the
                 Conquest
                 and
                 Government
                 of
                 this
                 Country
                 .
                 His
                 unfortunate
                 Return
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 End
                 worthy
                 of
                 his
                 Treachery
                 .
              
               
                 OReillane
                 finding
                 himself
                 in
                 a
                 Post
                 so
                 favourable
                 to
                 his
                 Designs
                 ,
                 stop'd
                 here
                 for
                 some
                 time
                 ,
                 and
                 caus'd
                 another
                 Brigantine
                 to
                 be
                 made
                 larger
                 than
                 the
                 former
                 ,
                 because
                 they
                 were
                 too
                 much
                 crowded
                 in
                 it
                 .
                 He
                 continued
                 there
                 as
                 long
                 as
                 was
                 necessary
                 to
                 inform
                 himself
                 
                 well
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 ;
                 and
                 having
                 taken
                 his
                 Farewel
                 of
                 the
                 courteous
                 Indians
                 ,
                 he
                 set
                 sail
                 .
                 After
                 several
                 days
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 he
                 happily
                 came
                 to
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 this
                 River
                 goes
                 out
                 into
                 the
                 Sea
                 ,
                 and
                 sail'd
                 out
                 with
                 it
                 ;
                 and
                 taking
                 good
                 notice
                 of
                 the
                 Places
                 necessary
                 to
                 be
                 observ'd
                 for
                 his
                 Return
                 ,
                 he
                 coasted
                 along
                 a
                 Cape
                 ,
                 now
                 call'd
                 
                   the
                   North
                   Cape
                
                 ,
                 200
                 Leagues
                 from
                 the
                 Island
                 
                   La
                   Trinidada
                
                 ,
                 and
                 sail'd
                 directly
                 thither
                 ,
                 where
                 he
                 bought
                 a
                 Vessel
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 he
                 pass'd
                 into
                 Spain
                 ,
                 and
                 presented
                 himself
                 to
                 the
                 Emperor
                 Charles
                 V.
                 at
                 Vailladolid
                 ;
                 he
                 so
                 charm'd
                 the
                 Emperor
                 with
                 the
                 agreeable
                 recital
                 of
                 his
                 Adventures
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 the
                 fair
                 Promises
                 he
                 made
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 obtain'd
                 three
                 Ships
                 of
                 him
                 in
                 which
                 to
                 return
                 from
                 whence
                 he
                 came
                 ,
                 with
                 Orders
                 to
                 build
                 Forts
                 and
                 Houses
                 in
                 those
                 places
                 which
                 he
                 should
                 find
                 most
                 commodious
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 take
                 possession
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 in
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 this
                 Prince
                 .
                 His
                 Dispatches
                 were
                 soon
                 given
                 ,
                 but
                 the
                 execution
                 of
                 'em
                 was
                 very
                 tedious
                 ;
                 for
                 he
                 was
                 above
                 seven
                 Years
                 at
                 the
                 Court
                 of
                 Spain
                 before
                 he
                 could
                 put
                 himself
                 in
                 a
                 condition
                 to
                 sail
                 .
                 About
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 Year
                 1549
                 ,
                 he
                 imbark'd
                 with
                 all
                 his
                 Men
                 ;
                 but
                 was
                 no
                 sooner
                 got
                 to
                 the
                 Latitude
                 of
                 the
                 Canaries
                 ,
                 but
                 a
                 contagious
                 
                 Distemper
                 passing
                 from
                 one
                 of
                 his
                 Vessels
                 into
                 the
                 others
                 ,
                 took
                 off
                 part
                 of
                 his
                 Souldiers
                 ,
                 a
                 considerable
                 number
                 of
                 'em
                 was
                 carried
                 off
                 soon
                 after
                 by
                 the
                 same
                 Infection
                 ,
                 tho
                 he
                 was
                 got
                 no
                 further
                 than
                 Cape-Verd
                 ,
                 when
                 he
                 was
                 advis'd
                 to
                 return
                 back
                 to
                 Spain
                 :
                 He
                 was
                 so
                 rash
                 notwithstanding
                 as
                 to
                 continue
                 his
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 promise
                 himself
                 the
                 sight
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 for
                 all
                 this
                 :
                 And
                 indeed
                 he
                 did
                 see
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 came
                 to
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 with
                 his
                 Vessels
                 ;
                 but
                 finding
                 he
                 wanted
                 Men
                 ,
                 he
                 order'd
                 'em
                 all
                 to
                 come
                 aboard
                 his
                 own
                 Ship
                 ,
                 and
                 quitted
                 the
                 two
                 others
                 .
                 But
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 his
                 Men
                 daily
                 diminishing
                 ,
                 having
                 built
                 two
                 Barks
                 in
                 an
                 Island
                 where
                 he
                 had
                 made
                 some
                 stay
                 ,
                 he
                 only
                 reserv'd
                 himself
                 one
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 of
                 a
                 pretty
                 large
                 size
                 ,
                 and
                 several
                 times
                 attempted
                 to
                 get
                 up
                 higher
                 into
                 the
                 River
                 .
                 He
                 was
                 ,
                 in
                 fine
                 ,
                 necessitated
                 to
                 yield
                 to
                 his
                 Fortune
                 ,
                 which
                 had
                 forsaken
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 suffer'd
                 him
                 to
                 go
                 to
                 the
                 place
                 of
                 his
                 Ruin.
                 He
                 was
                 cast
                 on
                 the
                 Coasts
                 of
                 Caracas
                 ,
                 and
                 from
                 thence
                 upon
                 a
                 certain
                 Island
                 call'd
                 St.
                 Marguerite
                 ,
                 where
                 he
                 lost
                 the
                 last
                 of
                 his
                 Men
                 ;
                 and
                 dying
                 as
                 well
                 with
                 Despair
                 as
                 Sickness
                 ,
                 he
                 made
                 Charles
                 V.
                 lose
                 the
                 great
                 Hopes
                 he
                 had
                 conceiv'd
                 of
                 so
                 daring
                 an
                 Enterprize
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 IX
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 Discovery
                 thus
                 begun
                 in
                 1540
                 ,
                 remain'd
                 imperfect
                 till
                 the
                 Year
                 1560
                 ,
                 when
                 a
                 Spanish
                 Gentleman
                 nam'd
                 Orsua
                 ,
                 ask'd
                 leave
                 of
                 the
                 Vice-Roy
                 of
                 Peru
                 to
                 make
                 this
                 Discovery
                 .
                 His
                 Equipage
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 his
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 parting
                 from
                 Quito
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 ill
                 Success
                 of
                 
                 Oreillane's
                 Voyage
                 cool'd
                 the
                 ardent
                 Desire
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 had
                 for
                 the
                 Discovery
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ;
                 and
                 it
                 seem'd
                 quite
                 extinguish'd
                 by
                 the
                 Civil
                 Wars
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 till
                 the
                 Marquess
                 
                   de
                   Caguete
                
                 being
                 Vice-Roy
                 of
                 that
                 Kingdom
                 ,
                 a
                 Gentleman
                 of
                 Navarre
                 ,
                 nam'd
                 
                   Peter
                   de
                   Orsua
                
                 ,
                 who
                 had
                 always
                 entertain'd
                 Thoughts
                 worthy
                 of
                 his
                 great
                 Courage
                 ,
                 turn'd
                 his
                 Designs
                 on
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 believ'd
                 he
                 should
                 be
                 more
                 fortunate
                 than
                 Oreillane
                 :
                 He
                 presented
                 himself
                 to
                 the
                 Vice-Roy
                 ,
                 and
                 propos'd
                 his
                 Design
                 to
                 him
                 ;
                 who
                 being
                 well
                 acquainted
                 with
                 his
                 Merit
                 ,
                 commended
                 his
                 Resolution
                 ,
                 and
                 was
                 perswaded
                 ,
                 that
                 if
                 so
                 difficult
                 a
                 matter
                 should
                 succeed
                 ,
                 it
                 must
                 be
                 by
                 the
                 Conduct
                 of
                 so
                 brave
                 and
                 wise
                 a
                 Commander
                 .
                 He
                 immediately
                 dispatch'd
                 all
                 necessary
                 Orders
                 for
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 caus'd
                 a
                 
                 Publication
                 of
                 his
                 Attempt
                 to
                 be
                 made
                 throughout
                 the
                 Kingdom
                 .
                 Most
                 of
                 the
                 Gentry
                 came
                 to
                 offer
                 their
                 Service
                 to
                 Orsua
                 ;
                 who
                 was
                 so
                 much
                 in
                 every
                 one's
                 Esteem
                 ,
                 that
                 there
                 was
                 no
                 Souldier
                 so
                 old
                 ,
                 but
                 would
                 leave
                 his
                 Retirement
                 with
                 Pleasure
                 to
                 serve
                 under
                 so
                 excellent
                 a
                 General
                 .
                 His
                 chief
                 trouble
                 was
                 to
                 return
                 his
                 Thanks
                 to
                 so
                 many
                 of
                 'em
                 as
                 he
                 could
                 not
                 take
                 along
                 with
                 him
                 :
                 he
                 made
                 choice
                 of
                 such
                 amongst
                 'em
                 as
                 were
                 most
                 fit
                 for
                 his
                 purpose
                 ;
                 and
                 to
                 carry
                 on
                 the
                 famous
                 Conquest
                 he
                 design'd
                 ,
                 he
                 made
                 all
                 necessary
                 Provisions
                 both
                 of
                 Ammunition
                 and
                 Victuals
                 ,
                 to
                 which
                 all
                 the
                 Lords
                 and
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 the
                 Towns
                 contributed
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 Freedom
                 and
                 Liberality
                 ,
                 being
                 well
                 perswaded
                 that
                 Orsua
                 had
                 Qualities
                 that
                 well
                 deserv'd
                 to
                 be
                 oblig'd
                 .
                 He
                 parted
                 from
                 Cusco
                 in
                 1560
                 ,
                 with
                 the
                 Acclamations
                 and
                 good
                 Wishes
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 that
                 Place
                 ;
                 he
                 was
                 attended
                 with
                 above
                 seven
                 hundred
                 choice
                 Souldiers
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 a
                 considerable
                 number
                 of
                 very
                 good
                 Horses
                 .
                 Being
                 well
                 vers'd
                 in
                 the
                 Map
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 and
                 having
                 for
                 some
                 time
                 been
                 laying
                 the
                 Scheme
                 of
                 his
                 Journey
                 ,
                 he
                 march'd
                 directly
                 to
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Mosilones
                 ,
                 first
                 to
                 meet
                 the
                 River
                 Moyabamba
                 ,
                 by
                 which
                 he
                 was
                 sure
                 of
                 entring
                 into
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 X.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 Tragical
                 End
                 of
                 Orsua
                 by
                 the
                 Revolt
                 of
                 two
                 of
                 his
                 Officers
                 ,
                 who
                 were
                 fallen
                 in
                 love
                 with
                 their
                 General
                 's
                 Lady
                 .
                 The
                 yet
                 more
                 Tragical
                 End
                 of
                 those
                 two
                 Rebels
                 one
                 after
                 t'other
                 .
                 And
                 the
                 Cruelty
                 of
                 one
                 of
                 them
                 against
                 his
                 own
                 Daughter
                 .
              
               
                 ONE
                 would
                 have
                 hop'd
                 an
                 Attempt
                 so
                 wisely
                 laid
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 universally
                 approv'd
                 ,
                 should
                 have
                 had
                 a
                 happy
                 Issue
                 :
                 Yet
                 never
                 was
                 any
                 Project
                 more
                 unsuccessful
                 ;
                 for
                 Orsua
                 had
                 taken
                 with
                 him
                 one
                 
                   Don
                   Fernand
                   de
                   Gusman
                
                 ,
                 a
                 young
                 Man
                 who
                 was
                 lately
                 come
                 from
                 Spain
                 ,
                 and
                 another
                 more
                 advanc'd
                 in
                 Years
                 ,
                 named
                 
                   Lopez
                   Daguirre
                
                 of
                 Biscay
                 ,
                 a
                 little
                 ill-favour'd
                 Man
                 ,
                 whom
                 he
                 had
                 made
                 his
                 Ensign
                 .
                 These
                 two
                 Wretches
                 fell
                 in
                 Love
                 with
                 their
                 General
                 's
                 Lady
                 ,
                 whose
                 Name
                 was
                 Agnes
                 ,
                 and
                 who
                 had
                 accompanied
                 her
                 Husband
                 in
                 all
                 his
                 Travels
                 ;
                 and
                 thinking
                 they
                 had
                 a
                 favourable
                 occasion
                 to
                 satisfy
                 their
                 Lust
                 and
                 Ambition
                 together
                 ,
                 engag'd
                 
                 Orsua's
                 Troops
                 to
                 revolt
                 ,
                 and
                 assassinated
                 him
                 .
                 After
                 this
                 Tragical
                 Fact
                 the
                 Traitors
                 who
                 committed
                 it
                 ,
                 who
                 to
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 seven
                 or
                 eight
                 were
                 in
                 a
                 strict
                 Confederacy
                 ,
                 elected
                 
                 
                   Don
                   Fernand
                   de
                   Gusman
                
                 for
                 their
                 King
                 ;
                 whose
                 Mind
                 was
                 vain
                 enough
                 to
                 receive
                 that
                 Title
                 which
                 became
                 him
                 so
                 little
                 :
                 But
                 he
                 did
                 not
                 enjoy
                 it
                 long
                 ;
                 for
                 those
                 very
                 Persons
                 that
                 had
                 given
                 him
                 the
                 Quality
                 of
                 King
                 ,
                 gave
                 him
                 his
                 Death's
                 Wound
                 too
                 ,
                 and
                 Daguirre
                 succeeded
                 him
                 ,
                 who
                 made
                 himself
                 King
                 ,
                 notwithstanding
                 the
                 Remonstrances
                 of
                 others
                 :
                 And
                 naming
                 himself
                 the
                 Rebel
                 and
                 Traitor
                 ,
                 he
                 gave
                 all
                 those
                 he
                 had
                 gain'd
                 to
                 his
                 Party
                 to
                 understand
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 intended
                 to
                 make
                 himself
                 Master
                 of
                 Guiana
                 ,
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 new
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Grenada
                 ,
                 and
                 promis'd
                 'em
                 all
                 the
                 Riches
                 of
                 those
                 great
                 Kingdoms
                 .
                 His
                 Reign
                 was
                 so
                 bloody
                 and
                 barbarous
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 like
                 Tyranny
                 was
                 scarce
                 ever
                 heard
                 of
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 :
                 Therefore
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 to
                 this
                 day
                 call
                 him
                 the
                 Tyrant
                 .
                 However
                 he
                 commanded
                 
                 Orsua's
                 Vessels
                 ,
                 and
                 went
                 down
                 the
                 River
                 Coca
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 hoping
                 to
                 obtain
                 one
                 of
                 those
                 Kingdoms
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 considerable
                 Progress
                 into
                 it
                 .
                 But
                 having
                 enter'd
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 he
                 was
                 not
                 able
                 to
                 master
                 the
                 Current
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 was
                 constrained
                 to
                 suffer
                 himself
                 to
                 be
                 carried
                 down
                 to
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 a
                 River
                 above
                 a
                 thousand
                 Leagues
                 from
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 he
                 imbark'd
                 ,
                 and
                 was
                 driven
                 into
                 the
                 great
                 Channel
                 which
                 goes
                 to
                 the
                 
                 North-Cape
                 ,
                 being
                 the
                 same
                 way
                 Oreillane
                 had
                 taken
                 before
                 him
                 .
                 Going
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 he
                 came
                 to
                 the
                 Island
                 of
                 St.
                 Marguerite
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 to
                 this
                 day
                 call'd
                 the
                 Tyrant's
                 Port
                 ;
                 there
                 he
                 kill'd
                 
                   Don
                   Irean
                   de
                   Villa
                   Andrada
                
                 ,
                 Governour
                 of
                 the
                 Island
                 ,
                 and
                 
                   Don
                   John
                   Sermiento
                
                 his
                 Father
                 .
                 After
                 their
                 Death
                 ,
                 with
                 the
                 Assistance
                 of
                 one
                 
                   John
                   Burq
                
                 ,
                 he
                 made
                 himself
                 Master
                 of
                 the
                 Island
                 ,
                 plunder'd
                 it
                 intirely
                 ,
                 and
                 there
                 committed
                 unheard-of
                 Barbarities
                 .
                 He
                 kill'd
                 all
                 that
                 oppos'd
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 past
                 from
                 thence
                 to
                 Cumana
                 ,
                 where
                 he
                 exercis'd
                 the
                 same
                 Cruelties
                 :
                 He
                 after
                 that
                 desolated
                 all
                 those
                 Coasts
                 that
                 bear
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 Caracas
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 the
                 Provinces
                 along
                 the
                 Rivers
                 Venezuella
                 and
                 Baccho
                 .
                 He
                 then
                 came
                 to
                 St.
                 Martha
                 ,
                 where
                 he
                 put
                 all
                 to
                 the
                 Sword
                 ,
                 and
                 enter'd
                 the
                 new
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Grenada
                 ,
                 designing
                 to
                 march
                 from
                 thence
                 through
                 Quito
                 into
                 Peru.
                 In
                 this
                 Kingdom
                 he
                 was
                 forc'd
                 to
                 a
                 Battel
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 he
                 was
                 utterly
                 defeated
                 ,
                 and
                 put
                 to
                 flight
                 ,
                 but
                 all
                 Ways
                 being
                 stop'd
                 ,
                 he
                 found
                 he
                 must
                 perish
                 ;
                 and
                 therefore
                 begins
                 his
                 Tragedy
                 with
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 Barbarity
                 without
                 Example
                 .
              
               
                 He
                 had
                 a
                 Daughter
                 by
                 his
                 Wife
                 Mendoza
                 ,
                 that
                 had
                 follow'd
                 him
                 in
                 his
                 Expeditions
                 ,
                 and
                 whom
                 he
                 lov'd
                 entirely
                 .
                 Daughter
                 (
                 says
                 he
                 to
                 her
                 )
                 I
                 must
                 kill
                 thee
                 ;
                 I
                 
                 design'd
                 to
                 have
                 plac'd
                 thee
                 on
                 a
                 Throne
                 ,
                 but
                 since
                 Fortune
                 opposes
                 it
                 ,
                 I
                 am
                 not
                 willing
                 thou
                 shouldst
                 live
                 to
                 suffer
                 the
                 Shame
                 of
                 becoming
                 a
                 Slave
                 to
                 my
                 Enemies
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 being
                 call'd
                 the
                 Daughter
                 of
                 a
                 Tyrant
                 and
                 a
                 Traitor
                 .
                 Die
                 ,
                 my
                 Child
                 ,
                 die
                 by
                 the
                 Hand
                 of
                 thy
                 Father
                 ,
                 if
                 thou
                 hast
                 not
                 Courage
                 enough
                 to
                 die
                 by
                 thy
                 own
                 .
                 She
                 surpriz'd
                 at
                 this
                 Discourse
                 ,
                 desir'd
                 him
                 at
                 least
                 to
                 give
                 her
                 some
                 time
                 to
                 prepare
                 for
                 Death
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 beg
                 of
                 God
                 the
                 Pardon
                 of
                 her
                 Sins
                 :
                 This
                 he
                 granted
                 ;
                 but
                 thinking
                 her
                 too
                 tedious
                 in
                 her
                 Devotion
                 ,
                 as
                 she
                 was
                 praying
                 upon
                 her
                 Knees
                 he
                 shot
                 her
                 through
                 the
                 Body
                 with
                 a
                 Carbine
                 ;
                 but
                 having
                 not
                 kill'd
                 her
                 out-right
                 ,
                 he
                 stuck
                 his
                 Dagger
                 into
                 her
                 Heart
                 .
                 She
                 falling
                 down
                 at
                 the
                 Stroke
                 ,
                 cry'd
                 ,
                 Ah
                 ,
                 Father
                 ,
                 't
                 is
                 enough
                 !
              
               
                 Soon
                 after
                 her
                 Death
                 he
                 was
                 taken
                 and
                 carried
                 Prisoner
                 to
                 the
                 Island
                 
                   La
                   Trinidada
                
                 ,
                 where
                 he
                 had
                 a
                 considerable
                 Estate
                 .
                 His
                 Process
                 was
                 made
                 ,
                 and
                 he
                 condemn'd
                 to
                 be
                 quarter'd
                 ;
                 he
                 was
                 publickly
                 executed
                 ,
                 his
                 Houses
                 raz'd
                 to
                 the
                 Ground
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 places
                 where
                 they
                 stood
                 sow'd
                 with
                 Salt
                 ,
                 as
                 may
                 be
                 seen
                 to
                 this
                 day
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 XI
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 Discovery
                 by
                 these
                 sad
                 Accidents
                 continued
                 thus
                 without
                 any
                 farther
                 Advancement
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 Year
                 1560
                 to
                 1606
                 ,
                 when
                 two
                 Jesuits
                 ventur'd
                 to
                 go
                 and
                 preach
                 the
                 Gospel
                 along
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 were
                 there
                 martyr'd
                 .
                 Many
                 other
                 Attempts
                 form'd
                 since
                 by
                 great
                 Persons
                 without
                 Success
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 unhappy
                 Issue
                 of
                 these
                 two
                 Enterprizes
                 abated
                 the
                 Desires
                 of
                 others
                 after
                 this
                 Discovery
                 to
                 that
                 degree
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 last
                 Age
                 past
                 without
                 any
                 farther
                 knowledg
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 :
                 But
                 our
                 Age
                 has
                 been
                 more
                 happy
                 ,
                 and
                 we
                 have
                 seen
                 this
                 great
                 Design
                 perfectly
                 executed
                 in
                 our
                 days
                 .
                 In
                 1606
                 ,
                 and
                 1607
                 ,
                 two
                 Fathers
                 of
                 the
                 Jesuits
                 Society
                 mov'd
                 with
                 the
                 desire
                 of
                 the
                 Conversion
                 of
                 those
                 barbarous
                 People
                 ,
                 went
                 from
                 Quito
                 ,
                 and
                 pierc'd
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Cofanes
                 ,
                 who
                 inhabit
                 those
                 Parts
                 where
                 the
                 Springs
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 Coca
                 rise
                 .
                 Those
                 good
                 Fathers
                 were
                 willing
                 to
                 begin
                 the
                 Publication
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 among
                 these
                 People
                 :
                 But
                 the
                 Hour
                 of
                 their
                 being
                 call'd
                 to
                 the
                 Knowledg
                 of
                 God
                 was
                 not
                 yet
                 
                 come
                 ;
                 for
                 they
                 found
                 these
                 Men
                 so
                 cruel
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 uncapable
                 of
                 hearing
                 the
                 Word
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 kill'd
                 one
                 of
                 these
                 Fathers
                 nam'd
                 
                   Raphael
                   Ferrier
                
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 the
                 other
                 fly
                 for
                 his
                 Life
                 .
              
               
                 In
                 the
                 Year
                 1621.
                 under
                 the
                 Reign
                 of
                 Philip
                 IV.
                 King
                 of
                 
                   Spain
                   ,
                   Vincent
                   Delos
                   Reyes
                   de
                   Villalobos
                   ,
                
                 Serjeant-Major
                 ,
                 Governor
                 and
                 Captain-General
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 the
                 Quixos
                 ,
                 resolv'd
                 to
                 attempt
                 the
                 Navigation
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 Amazone
                 ;
                 but
                 receiving
                 an
                 Order
                 to
                 quit
                 his
                 Government
                 ,
                 he
                 was
                 oblig'd
                 to
                 lay
                 aside
                 the
                 thoughts
                 of
                 this
                 Adventure
                 .
                 
                   Alonze
                   Miranda
                
                 form'd
                 the
                 same
                 Design
                 ,
                 prepar'd
                 his
                 Equipage
                 ,
                 and
                 took
                 all
                 necessary
                 Precautions
                 to
                 overcome
                 all
                 the
                 Difficulties
                 of
                 the
                 Attempt
                 ,
                 but
                 had
                 no
                 better
                 success
                 than
                 the
                 others
                 ,
                 for
                 he
                 dy'd
                 without
                 having
                 so
                 much
                 as
                 seen
                 this
                 famous
                 River
                 .
                 Before
                 either
                 of
                 these
                 two
                 the
                 General
                 
                   Joseph
                   de
                   Villamayor
                   Maldonado
                
                 Governor
                 of
                 the
                 Quixos
                 ,
                 incited
                 by
                 the
                 same
                 Motives
                 of
                 the
                 Glory
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 the
                 Grandure
                 of
                 the
                 King
                 his
                 Master
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Salvation
                 of
                 so
                 many
                 Infidels
                 ,
                 had
                 consum'd
                 all
                 he
                 had
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 in
                 endeavouring
                 to
                 settle
                 himself
                 among
                 those
                 People
                 that
                 dwell
                 on
                 the
                 Borders
                 of
                 that
                 wonderful
                 River
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 XII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Commission
                 the
                 King
                 of
                 Spain
                 sent
                 to
                 the
                 Governour
                 of
                 Brazil
                 to
                 make
                 this
                 Discovery
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 Spaniards
                 were
                 not
                 the
                 only
                 Conquerors
                 of
                 the
                 new
                 World
                 ,
                 that
                 expressed
                 so
                 earnest
                 a
                 desire
                 to
                 render
                 themselves
                 Masters
                 of
                 those
                 unknown
                 Nations
                 .
                 The
                 Portuguez
                 were
                 no
                 less
                 eager
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 Design
                 ,
                 and
                 knowing
                 they
                 were
                 not
                 far
                 distant
                 from
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 they
                 were
                 willing
                 to
                 believe
                 this
                 Discovery
                 was
                 reserv'd
                 for
                 them
                 .
                 In
                 the
                 Year
                 1626
                 ,
                 
                   Bonito
                   Macul
                
                 then
                 Governour
                 of
                 Para
                 receiv'd
                 a
                 Commission
                 from
                 Philip
                 III.
                 King
                 of
                 Spain
                 ,
                 to
                 put
                 to
                 Sea
                 with
                 some
                 good
                 Ships
                 for
                 this
                 purpose
                 ,
                 and
                 try
                 if
                 he
                 could
                 overcome
                 the
                 Difficulties
                 of
                 this
                 Discovery
                 ;
                 but
                 he
                 could
                 not
                 put
                 in
                 execution
                 these
                 Orders
                 of
                 his
                 Catholick
                 Majesty
                 ,
                 being
                 call'd
                 away
                 by
                 others
                 more
                 pressing
                 ,
                 which
                 oblig'd
                 him
                 to
                 go
                 into
                 the
                 King's
                 Service
                 at
                 Phernambuc
                 .
              
               
                 In
                 1633
                 ,
                 and
                 1634.
                 the
                 King
                 of
                 Spain
                 being
                 extremely
                 impatient
                 to
                 see
                 that
                 Enterprize
                 at
                 last
                 succeed
                 ,
                 which
                 had
                 so
                 many
                 
                 times
                 been
                 in
                 vain
                 attempted
                 ,
                 sent
                 very
                 pressing
                 Orders
                 to
                 
                   Francesco
                   Coello
                
                 Governor
                 and
                 Captain-General
                 of
                 the
                 Island
                 of
                 Maraguan
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 Town
                 and
                 Fortress
                 of
                 Para
                 ,
                 to
                 arm
                 a
                 considerable
                 Force
                 to
                 attempt
                 an
                 effectual
                 Discovery
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 :
                 And
                 directed
                 him
                 in
                 his
                 Orders
                 ,
                 in
                 case
                 he
                 had
                 no
                 Officer
                 near
                 him
                 upon
                 whose
                 Conduct
                 he
                 could
                 depend
                 for
                 the
                 execution
                 of
                 this
                 Design
                 ,
                 to
                 go
                 in
                 Person
                 himself
                 ,
                 because
                 he
                 was
                 resolv'd
                 absolutely
                 to
                 know
                 whether
                 it
                 were
                 impossible
                 to
                 go
                 up
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 find
                 the
                 Source
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 consequently
                 its
                 length
                 .
                 Carvallo
                 could
                 not
                 obey
                 the
                 King
                 his
                 Master
                 ,
                 because
                 he
                 did
                 not
                 think
                 himself
                 in
                 a
                 Condition
                 to
                 absent
                 himself
                 from
                 his
                 Government
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 divide
                 his
                 Forces
                 at
                 a
                 time
                 when
                 he
                 expected
                 to
                 be
                 attacked
                 by
                 the
                 Dutch
                 ,
                 who
                 were
                 unwilling
                 to
                 lose
                 any
                 opportunity
                 of
                 making
                 their
                 Descents
                 into
                 Brazil
                 :
                 But
                 what
                 he
                 did
                 not
                 think
                 feasible
                 ,
                 without
                 the
                 help
                 of
                 a
                 good
                 number
                 of
                 Men
                 and
                 Vessels
                 ,
                 was
                 happily
                 accomplished
                 by
                 the
                 good
                 Fortune
                 of
                 two
                 Lay-Friers
                 of
                 the
                 Order
                 of
                 St.
                 Francis
                 ,
                 after
                 the
                 following
                 manner
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 XIII
                 .
              
               
                 That
                 which
                 so
                 many
                 brave
                 Men
                 were
                 not
                 able
                 to
                 perform
                 ,
                 was
                 accomplish'd
                 by
                 two
                 Lay-Friers
                 of
                 the
                 Order
                 of
                 St.
                 Francis
                 ,
                 who
                 escaped
                 the
                 hands
                 of
                 the
                 Indians
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 Town
                 of
                 St.
                 Francis
                 in
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Quito
                 is
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 finest
                 in
                 America
                 ;
                 it
                 is
                 built
                 upon
                 one
                 of
                 those
                 stupendous
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 call
                 Cordeliers
                 ,
                 and
                 Tierras
                 ,
                 half
                 a
                 degree
                 South
                 of
                 the
                 Equinoctial
                 Line
                 ;
                 yet
                 is
                 it
                 of
                 the
                 most
                 agreeable
                 Temperature
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 most
                 plentiful
                 and
                 healthful
                 Place
                 in
                 all
                 Peru
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 never
                 incommoded
                 by
                 excessive
                 Heat
                 .
                 In
                 1635
                 ,
                 1636
                 ,
                 and
                 1637
                 ,
                 Captain
                 
                   John
                   de
                   Palacios
                
                 having
                 undertaken
                 to
                 attempt
                 the
                 Discovery
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 to
                 that
                 end
                 made
                 a
                 small
                 Provision
                 of
                 Arms
                 ,
                 desiring
                 rather
                 to
                 acquaint
                 himself
                 with
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 people
                 it
                 ,
                 than
                 to
                 subdue
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 those
                 Provinces
                 by
                 force
                 of
                 Arms.
                 Several
                 Monks
                 of
                 the
                 Order
                 of
                 St.
                 Francis
                 were
                 desirous
                 to
                 accompany
                 him
                 to
                 essay
                 the
                 Conversion
                 of
                 these
                 Barbarians
                 ,
                 and
                 promis'd
                 themselves
                 more
                 Success
                 in
                 this
                 Work
                 than
                 the
                 
                 Jesuits
                 had
                 ,
                 who
                 30
                 Years
                 before
                 had
                 made
                 the
                 like
                 Attempt
                 ,
                 till
                 they
                 saw
                 one
                 of
                 their
                 number
                 Father
                 
                   Raphael
                   Ferrier
                
                 martyr'd
                 by
                 these
                 Infidels
                 ,
                 as
                 above
                 related
                 .
              
               
                 These
                 march'd
                 with
                 more
                 Precaution
                 ,
                 and
                 after
                 a
                 long
                 Fatigue
                 arriv'd
                 at
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 long-hair'd
                 Indians
                 :
                 This
                 Country
                 they
                 found
                 well
                 peopled
                 ,
                 but
                 not
                 being
                 able
                 to
                 make
                 any
                 Establishment
                 here
                 by
                 reason
                 of
                 the
                 rough
                 Treatment
                 they
                 met
                 with
                 from
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 ,
                 some
                 of
                 them
                 gave
                 over
                 the
                 Attempt
                 ,
                 and
                 return'd
                 to
                 Quito
                 ,
                 but
                 others
                 were
                 more
                 resolute
                 ,
                 and
                 continued
                 with
                 Captain
                 
                   de
                   Palacios
                
                 ,
                 together
                 with
                 some
                 few
                 Souldiers
                 that
                 were
                 always
                 faithful
                 to
                 him
                 :
                 But
                 these
                 being
                 almost
                 all
                 destroy'd
                 in
                 several
                 Battels
                 ,
                 in
                 one
                 of
                 which
                 at
                 last
                 the
                 Captain
                 himself
                 was
                 kill'd
                 ,
                 the
                 Monks
                 made
                 their
                 Escape
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 they
                 could
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 two
                 Lay-Friers
                 we
                 have
                 spoken
                 of
                 ,
                 one
                 of
                 whom
                 was
                 
                   Dominic
                   de
                   Britto
                
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 other
                 
                   Andrew
                   de
                   Tolede
                
                 ,
                 dexterously
                 sav'd
                 themselves
                 from
                 the
                 hands
                 of
                 the
                 Indians
                 ;
                 and
                 having
                 got
                 to
                 their
                 Bark
                 ,
                 with
                 six
                 Souldiers
                 that
                 remain'd
                 ,
                 abandon'd
                 themselves
                 to
                 Providence
                 ,
                 and
                 suffer'd
                 their
                 Bark
                 to
                 be
                 driven
                 at
                 the
                 Pleasure
                 of
                 the
                 Winds
                 and
                 Streams
                 .
              
               
                 It
                 pleas'd
                 God
                 so
                 to
                 favour
                 their
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 that
                 after
                 they
                 had
                 been
                 carried
                 from
                 
                 Province
                 to
                 Province
                 upon
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 ,
                 they
                 happily
                 landed
                 at
                 Para
                 ,
                 a
                 City
                 in
                 Brazil
                 ,
                 forty
                 Leagues
                 distant
                 from
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 Southward
                 .
                 The
                 Portuguez
                 possess
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 have
                 made
                 it
                 a
                 good
                 Garison
                 ,
                 belonging
                 to
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 Maragnon
                 .
                 The
                 two
                 Lay-Friers
                 and
                 the
                 Souldiers
                 were
                 inquir'd
                 of
                 about
                 their
                 long
                 and
                 strange
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 but
                 they
                 were
                 all
                 eight
                 of
                 'em
                 so
                 stupid
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 had
                 made
                 no
                 particular
                 Remark
                 on
                 any
                 thing
                 ;
                 only
                 they
                 said
                 they
                 had
                 pass'd
                 through
                 divers
                 Provinces
                 of
                 different
                 Barbarians
                 ,
                 who
                 eat
                 the
                 Men
                 which
                 they
                 take
                 in
                 War.
                 The
                 two
                 Cordeliers
                 offer'd
                 to
                 return
                 to
                 the
                 place
                 from
                 whence
                 they
                 came
                 ,
                 provided
                 they
                 might
                 have
                 a
                 Vessel
                 and
                 Men
                 granted
                 'em
                 to
                 conduct
                 'em
                 ,
                 hoping
                 they
                 should
                 again
                 find
                 the
                 same
                 Passages
                 of
                 the
                 Rivers
                 by
                 which
                 they
                 came
                 down
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 get
                 back
                 again
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 Quito
                 .
                 They
                 were
                 brought
                 from
                 Para
                 to
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 St.
                 Lewis
                 in
                 
                   Maragnon
                   ,
                   James
                   Raimond
                   de
                   Norogna
                
                 being
                 then
                 Governor
                 of
                 that
                 Place
                 ,
                 who
                 having
                 a
                 Zeal
                 for
                 the
                 Service
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 that
                 of
                 the
                 King
                 ,
                 was
                 willing
                 to
                 examin
                 these
                 Cordelier
                 Friers
                 more
                 particularly
                 than
                 had
                 been
                 done
                 at
                 Para.
                 He
                 discours'd
                 'em
                 with
                 so
                 much
                 Patience
                 and
                 Sweetness
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 
                 made
                 'em
                 talk
                 reasonably
                 :
                 They
                 told
                 him
                 they
                 went
                 from
                 Peru
                 ,
                 that
                 their
                 Monastery
                 was
                 in
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Quito
                 ;
                 that
                 they
                 came
                 out
                 with
                 many
                 of
                 their
                 Brethren
                 to
                 labour
                 to
                 convert
                 the
                 wild
                 People
                 ,
                 but
                 that
                 the
                 Indians
                 had
                 a
                 greater
                 mind
                 to
                 eat
                 'em
                 ,
                 than
                 to
                 hear
                 'em
                 preach
                 ;
                 that
                 their
                 Captain
                 being
                 dead
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 Brethren
                 put
                 to
                 flight
                 ,
                 they
                 with
                 six
                 Souldiers
                 had
                 put
                 themselves
                 into
                 a
                 Bark
                 which
                 miraculously
                 came
                 ashore
                 at
                 Para
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 they
                 were
                 ready
                 to
                 return
                 to
                 Peru
                 ,
                 if
                 they
                 could
                 meet
                 with
                 a
                 convenient
                 Passage
                 .
                 The
                 Governor
                 having
                 deliberated
                 on
                 this
                 Report
                 ,
                 believ'd
                 God
                 had
                 offer'd
                 him
                 a
                 fair
                 occasion
                 to
                 serve
                 his
                 Religion
                 and
                 his
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 he
                 ought
                 to
                 attempt
                 that
                 Design
                 in
                 which
                 so
                 many
                 others
                 had
                 fail'd
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XIV
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Governor
                 of
                 Brazil
                 on
                 the
                 Report
                 of
                 these
                 two
                 Cordelier
                 Friers
                 ,
                 attempts
                 the
                 Discovery
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 .
                 The
                 Preparation
                 he
                 made
                 for
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Commission
                 given
                 to
                 Don
                 Pedro
                 de
                 Texeira
                 ,
                 who
                 parted
                 from
                 Para
                 in
                 the
                 Year
                 1637.
                 
              
               
                 
                   DOn
                   Pedro
                   de
                   Norogna
                
                 resolv'd
                 to
                 make
                 Preparation
                 for
                 this
                 Enterprize
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 caus'd
                 it
                 to
                 be
                 publish'd
                 :
                 at
                 this
                 News
                 many
                 offer'd
                 themselves
                 to
                 serve
                 on
                 this
                 occasion
                 .
                 The
                 Governor
                 retain'd
                 such
                 as
                 he
                 thought
                 most
                 proper
                 for
                 his
                 Design
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 he
                 might
                 have
                 a
                 Man
                 capable
                 of
                 giving
                 him
                 an
                 exact
                 account
                 of
                 all
                 he
                 should
                 see
                 during
                 so
                 long
                 a
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 he
                 chose
                 Capt.
                 
                   Peter
                   de
                   Texeira
                
                 ,
                 a
                 Man
                 of
                 Courage
                 ,
                 Conduct
                 ,
                 and
                 Probity
                 ,
                 to
                 command
                 the
                 Fleet.
                 This
                 Gentleman
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 Joy
                 receiv'd
                 a
                 Command
                 so
                 sutable
                 to
                 his
                 Inclinations
                 ,
                 for
                 he
                 had
                 been
                 all
                 his
                 Life
                 seeking
                 occasions
                 of
                 serving
                 his
                 King
                 to
                 the
                 prejudice
                 of
                 his
                 own
                 private
                 Interest
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 peril
                 of
                 his
                 Life
                 :
                 and
                 according
                 to
                 his
                 desire
                 he
                 had
                 the
                 Glory
                 of
                 accomplishing
                 the
                 most
                 difficult
                 ,
                 and
                 most
                 illustrious
                 Enterprize
                 of
                 his
                 time
                 .
                 He
                 parted
                 from
                 Para
                 the
                 28th
                 of
                 October
                 1637.
                 with
                 forty
                 seven
                 Canoos
                 of
                 an
                 indifferent
                 bigness
                 ,
                 wherein
                 besides
                 Ammunition
                 and
                 Victuals
                 he
                 embark'd
                 seventy
                 Portuguez
                 Souldiers
                 ,
                 and
                 twelve
                 hundred
                 Indians
                 to
                 row
                 and
                 to
                 bear
                 Arms
                 ,
                 who
                 together
                 with
                 their
                 Wives
                 and
                 Servants
                 made
                 two
                 thousand
                 Persons
                 :
                 They
                 enter'd
                 into
                 the
                 mouth
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 on
                 that
                 side
                 that
                 is
                 nearest
                 to
                 Para
                 ,
                 and
                 happily
                 avoided
                 those
                 Rocks
                 that
                 come
                 just
                 to
                 the
                 surface
                 of
                 the
                 Water
                 ,
                 and
                 stop
                 the
                 Passage
                 of
                 Vessels
                 in
                 many
                 places
                 .
                 
                 However
                 they
                 were
                 almost
                 a
                 Year
                 without
                 seeing
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 their
                 Voyage
                 :
                 indeed
                 having
                 no
                 Guides
                 upon
                 whose
                 Fidelity
                 and
                 Experience
                 they
                 could
                 depend
                 in
                 steering
                 their
                 Course
                 ;
                 and
                 besides
                 ,
                 being
                 sometimes
                 carried
                 to
                 the
                 South
                 ,
                 and
                 sometimes
                 to
                 the
                 North
                 by
                 the
                 Violence
                 of
                 the
                 Streams
                 ,
                 they
                 did
                 not
                 make
                 the
                 Advance
                 they
                 would
                 have
                 done
                 if
                 they
                 had
                 been
                 us'd
                 to
                 navigate
                 the
                 River
                 .
                 Besides
                 ,
                 Texeira
                 being
                 obliged
                 to
                 provide
                 for
                 the
                 Subsistence
                 of
                 all
                 those
                 People
                 he
                 carried
                 with
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 perceiving
                 his
                 Provisions
                 diminished
                 considerably
                 every
                 day
                 ,
                 was
                 forc'd
                 from
                 time
                 to
                 time
                 to
                 send
                 Parties
                 in
                 some
                 of
                 the
                 Canoos
                 to
                 make
                 Descents
                 sometimes
                 on
                 Islands
                 ,
                 and
                 sometimes
                 on
                 the
                 Continent
                 ,
                 to
                 procure
                 a
                 Supply
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XV.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 Difficulties
                 Texeira
                 found
                 in
                 his
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 both
                 from
                 the
                 People
                 he
                 carried
                 with
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 from
                 the
                 length
                 of
                 the
                 way
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 happy
                 Descent
                 of
                 his
                 advanc'd
                 Squadron
                 into
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 the
                 Quixos
                 ,
                 belonging
                 to
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 Quito
                 .
              
               
                 OUR
                 Travellers
                 were
                 not
                 advanc'd
                 half
                 way
                 their
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 before
                 the
                 
                 Indians
                 were
                 weary
                 of
                 their
                 Labour
                 ,
                 and
                 quitting
                 their
                 Oars
                 ,
                 began
                 to
                 murmur
                 ,
                 and
                 make
                 loud
                 Complaints
                 that
                 they
                 had
                 been
                 engag'd
                 in
                 so
                 tedious
                 a
                 Voyage
                 .
                 'T
                 was
                 in
                 vain
                 to
                 tell
                 'em
                 they
                 would
                 soon
                 be
                 at
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 it
                 :
                 they
                 desir'd
                 Texeira
                 to
                 dismiss
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 finding
                 he
                 put
                 'em
                 off
                 from
                 day
                 to
                 day
                 ,
                 many
                 tack'd
                 about
                 and
                 return'd
                 to
                 Para.
                 The
                 General
                 perceiv'd
                 ,
                 that
                 on
                 this
                 occasion
                 he
                 must
                 use
                 Prudence
                 rather
                 than
                 Force
                 ,
                 therefore
                 he
                 did
                 not
                 cause
                 them
                 that
                 were
                 fled
                 back
                 to
                 be
                 pursu'd
                 ,
                 but
                 endeavour'd
                 with
                 all
                 imaginable
                 Mildness
                 to
                 hinder
                 others
                 from
                 following
                 their
                 Example
                 :
                 To
                 this
                 end
                 he
                 treated
                 the
                 Indians
                 that
                 remain'd
                 with
                 very
                 kind
                 Words
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 extremely
                 pleas'd
                 'em
                 with
                 his
                 Discourse
                 ,
                 that
                 those
                 that
                 heard
                 him
                 convey'd
                 it
                 from
                 one
                 Canoo
                 to
                 another
                 with
                 those
                 external
                 Demonstrations
                 of
                 Joy
                 and
                 Satisfaction
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 use
                 to
                 express
                 in
                 their
                 Assemblies
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 they
                 unanimously
                 cry'd
                 from
                 all
                 the
                 Canoos
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 were
                 willing
                 Texeira
                 should
                 continue
                 his
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 they
                 would
                 never
                 leave
                 him
                 .
                 The
                 General
                 having
                 given
                 'em
                 his
                 Thanks
                 for
                 their
                 goodwill
                 ,
                 caus'd
                 some
                 Brandy
                 to
                 be
                 distributed
                 through
                 all
                 the
                 Canoos
                 ,
                 assuring
                 'em
                 they
                 would
                 in
                 a
                 little
                 time
                 arrive
                 at
                 the
                 Place
                 design'd
                 .
                 And
                 not
                 content
                 in
                 
                 having
                 spread
                 this
                 Report
                 among
                 'em
                 ,
                 to
                 fix
                 the
                 Indians
                 the
                 more
                 firmly
                 in
                 their
                 Resolution
                 ,
                 he
                 thought
                 it
                 necessary
                 to
                 do
                 somewhat
                 that
                 might
                 still
                 make
                 a
                 greater
                 appearance
                 for
                 their
                 Encouragement
                 .
                 To
                 this
                 purpose
                 he
                 visited
                 all
                 the
                 Canoos
                 ,
                 and
                 chose
                 out
                 eight
                 of
                 the
                 best
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 which
                 he
                 loaded
                 with
                 Provision
                 ,
                 Souldiers
                 and
                 Rowers
                 .
                 He
                 made
                 Colonel
                 
                   Benedito
                   Rodriguez
                   d'Olivera
                
                 ,
                 a
                 Native
                 of
                 Brazil
                 ,
                 Commander
                 of
                 this
                 Squadron
                 ;
                 and
                 having
                 communicated
                 his
                 Design
                 to
                 him
                 ,
                 sent
                 him
                 away
                 with
                 a
                 Charge
                 to
                 send
                 him
                 often
                 such
                 News
                 as
                 might
                 be
                 most
                 agreeable
                 to
                 the
                 Indians
                 .
                 Olivera
                 was
                 no
                 ordinary
                 Man
                 ,
                 he
                 had
                 naturally
                 a
                 quick
                 and
                 piercing
                 Wit
                 ;
                 and
                 having
                 been
                 all
                 his
                 Life
                 brought
                 up
                 with
                 the
                 Indians
                 ,
                 he
                 had
                 so
                 well
                 studied
                 their
                 Actions
                 and
                 Countenances
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 could
                 hardly
                 dissemble
                 so
                 well
                 ,
                 but
                 he
                 could
                 with
                 one
                 cast
                 of
                 his
                 Eye
                 discover
                 what
                 was
                 in
                 their
                 Minds
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 they
                 look'd
                 upon
                 him
                 as
                 a
                 Man
                 that
                 could
                 divine
                 what
                 others
                 thought
                 ;
                 and
                 from
                 this
                 Conceit
                 they
                 had
                 not
                 only
                 a
                 great
                 Veneration
                 for
                 him
                 ,
                 but
                 stood
                 so
                 much
                 in
                 awe
                 of
                 him
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 yielded
                 him
                 a
                 blind
                 Obedience
                 in
                 what
                 he
                 commanded
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 not
                 to
                 be
                 question'd
                 after
                 this
                 ,
                 whether
                 those
                 in
                 the
                 eight
                 Canoos
                 which
                 he
                 was
                 to
                 command
                 were
                 
                 very
                 willing
                 to
                 go
                 with
                 him
                 .
                 His
                 Men
                 were
                 so
                 industrious
                 one
                 while
                 at
                 their
                 Oars
                 ,
                 and
                 another
                 while
                 at
                 their
                 Sails
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 overcame
                 all
                 the
                 Obstacles
                 that
                 presented
                 ,
                 and
                 safely
                 arriv'd
                 on
                 the
                 24th
                 of
                 June
                 1638
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Pagamino
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
                 There
                 is
                 a
                 Port
                 near
                 that
                 place
                 call'd
                 after
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 had
                 fortified
                 themselves
                 ,
                 and
                 had
                 built
                 a
                 Town
                 to
                 keep
                 the
                 Quixos
                 in
                 subjection
                 ,
                 who
                 had
                 not
                 yet
                 been
                 well
                 accustom'd
                 to
                 the
                 Yoke
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XVI
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Descent
                 of
                 General
                 Texeira
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Orders
                 he
                 gave
                 for
                 the
                 Preservation
                 of
                 his
                 Army
                 in
                 his
                 Absence
                 .
              
               
                 IF
                 the
                 Impatience
                 they
                 were
                 in
                 to
                 make
                 their
                 Descent
                 had
                 not
                 stop'd
                 'em
                 at
                 this
                 place
                 ,
                 they
                 would
                 in
                 sailing
                 some
                 time
                 longer
                 have
                 met
                 with
                 the
                 Entrance
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 Napo
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 some
                 account
                 shall
                 be
                 given
                 hereafter
                 ;
                 where
                 they
                 would
                 have
                 met
                 with
                 better
                 Entertainment
                 ,
                 and
                 would
                 have
                 been
                 less
                 expos'd
                 to
                 the
                 Losses
                 and
                 Inconveniences
                 which
                 they
                 suffer'd
                 in
                 this
                 Country
                 .
                 The
                 very
                 day
                 they
                 landed
                 Colonel
                 Benedito
                 dispatch'd
                 a
                 Canoo
                 to
                 his
                 
                 General
                 ,
                 to
                 give
                 him
                 advice
                 of
                 the
                 Success
                 of
                 his
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 how
                 little
                 time
                 he
                 might
                 also
                 arrive
                 at
                 the
                 same
                 place
                 .
                 This
                 News
                 being
                 spread
                 through
                 the
                 Fleet
                 ,
                 inspir'd
                 them
                 with
                 new
                 Vigor
                 ,
                 when
                 their
                 Courage
                 was
                 almost
                 exhausted
                 with
                 the
                 tedious
                 length
                 of
                 their
                 Toil
                 and
                 Hunger
                 together
                 .
                 Texeira
                 made
                 an
                 Improvement
                 of
                 this
                 good
                 Success
                 like
                 a
                 prudent
                 Man
                 ,
                 and
                 confirm'd
                 the
                 Assurance
                 that
                 had
                 been
                 given
                 'em
                 of
                 their
                 near
                 approach
                 to
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 they
                 were
                 to
                 land
                 ,
                 and
                 follow'd
                 Benedito
                 with
                 great
                 Expedition
                 :
                 The
                 Portuguez
                 and
                 the
                 Indians
                 perform'd
                 their
                 Duty
                 with
                 great
                 Emulation
                 ,
                 and
                 every
                 day
                 that
                 came
                 about
                 they
                 concluded
                 the
                 next
                 would
                 be
                 the
                 last
                 of
                 their
                 Voyage
                 .
                 In
                 fine
                 ,
                 the
                 Day
                 so
                 much
                 long'd
                 for
                 appear'd
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 General
                 ,
                 to
                 acquit
                 himself
                 of
                 his
                 Promise
                 ,
                 landed
                 all
                 his
                 Men
                 at
                 the
                 mouth
                 of
                 a
                 River
                 that
                 descends
                 into
                 that
                 of
                 the
                 Amazones
                 through
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 those
                 Indians
                 that
                 wear
                 their
                 Hair
                 as
                 long
                 as
                 that
                 of
                 Women
                 .
                 These
                 People
                 formerly
                 kept
                 a
                 good
                 Correspondence
                 with
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 ,
                 and
                 consented
                 to
                 their
                 Establishment
                 in
                 their
                 Country
                 :
                 but
                 having
                 been
                 forced
                 to
                 take
                 up
                 Arms
                 against
                 Captain
                 Palacios
                 for
                 the
                 ill
                 Treatment
                 they
                 had
                 receiv'd
                 from
                 his
                 Souldiers
                 ;
                 and
                 having
                 kill'd
                 
                 the
                 Captain
                 himself
                 in
                 a
                 Battel
                 ,
                 they
                 remain'd
                 implacable
                 Enemies
                 to
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 .
                 The
                 Portuguez
                 General
                 who
                 had
                 never
                 been
                 inform'd
                 of
                 this
                 Rupture
                 ,
                 was
                 desirous
                 to
                 refresh
                 his
                 Troops
                 in
                 this
                 Country
                 ,
                 finding
                 it
                 to
                 be
                 a
                 very
                 fine
                 ,
                 fruitful
                 and
                 commodious
                 place
                 ;
                 he
                 therefore
                 pitch'd
                 his
                 Camp
                 in
                 the
                 Angle
                 of
                 Land
                 which
                 was
                 form'd
                 by
                 the
                 two
                 Rivers
                 ,
                 and
                 having
                 well
                 intrench'd
                 it
                 towards
                 the
                 Plain
                 ,
                 he
                 there
                 plac'd
                 his
                 Portuguez
                 and
                 Indians
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 Captain
                 
                   Peter
                   Dacosta
                   Favotta
                
                 ,
                 and
                 Captain
                 
                   Peter
                   Bajou
                
                 the
                 chief
                 Commanders
                 over
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 These
                 two
                 wise
                 and
                 valiant
                 Officers
                 gave
                 their
                 General
                 the
                 greatest
                 Proofs
                 imaginable
                 both
                 of
                 their
                 Conduct
                 and
                 Fidelity
                 .
                 They
                 continued
                 encamp'd
                 in
                 this
                 place
                 for
                 eleven
                 Months
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 time
                 they
                 endur'd
                 extraordinary
                 Inconveniences
                 ,
                 for
                 they
                 were
                 often
                 oblig'd
                 to
                 fight
                 with
                 these
                 long-hair'd
                 Men
                 to
                 obtain
                 a
                 little
                 Food
                 to
                 live
                 upon
                 ;
                 and
                 many
                 of
                 the
                 Souldiers
                 fell
                 sick
                 ,
                 partly
                 by
                 the
                 bad
                 Disposition
                 of
                 the
                 Air
                 ,
                 which
                 could
                 not
                 be
                 wholsome
                 between
                 two
                 Rivers
                 ,
                 and
                 partly
                 from
                 so
                 tedious
                 a
                 Confinement
                 to
                 their
                 Camp.
                 
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 XVII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Arrival
                 of
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 at
                 Quito
                 .
                 The
                 general
                 Joy
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Emulation
                 of
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 and
                 Spaniards
                 on
                 the
                 account
                 of
                 this
                 Discovery
                 .
              
               
                 TExeira
                 for
                 his
                 own
                 part
                 made
                 the
                 best
                 of
                 his
                 way
                 with
                 a
                 few
                 Men
                 in
                 some
                 of
                 his
                 Canoos
                 ,
                 to
                 join
                 Col.
                 Benedito
                 ;
                 and
                 having
                 receiv'd
                 an
                 account
                 of
                 him
                 ,
                 he
                 left
                 his
                 Bark
                 where
                 the
                 River
                 ended
                 ,
                 and
                 went
                 on
                 foot
                 to
                 find
                 him
                 in
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Quito
                 ,
                 whither
                 he
                 had
                 arriv'd
                 some
                 days
                 before
                 .
                 The
                 coming
                 of
                 General
                 Texeira
                 compleated
                 the
                 Joy
                 which
                 all
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 Quito
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 the
                 Clergy
                 as
                 others
                 ,
                 had
                 receiv'd
                 from
                 a
                 Discovery
                 so
                 much
                 desir'd
                 by
                 'em
                 all
                 .
                 All
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 were
                 entertain'd
                 and
                 caress'd
                 by
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 with
                 the
                 Endearments
                 of
                 Brethren
                 ,
                 not
                 only
                 because
                 they
                 were
                 all
                 Subjects
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 King
                 ,
                 but
                 because
                 by
                 their
                 means
                 they
                 were
                 assur'd
                 of
                 a
                 Way
                 which
                 they
                 had
                 never
                 hitherto
                 been
                 able
                 to
                 pass
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 they
                 saw
                 was
                 now
                 discover'd
                 from
                 the
                 Sea
                 quite
                 to
                 the
                 Sources
                 of
                 this
                 famous
                 River
                 .
                 The
                 Spaniards
                 boasted
                 that
                 they
                 were
                 the
                 first
                 that
                 
                 had
                 navigated
                 it
                 from
                 its
                 Source
                 to
                 the
                 Sea
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 others
                 bragg'd
                 that
                 they
                 had
                 not
                 only
                 sail'd
                 upon
                 it
                 ,
                 but
                 had
                 pass'd
                 quite
                 up
                 it
                 ,
                 made
                 a
                 thorow
                 Discovery
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 knew
                 it
                 from
                 its
                 Mouth
                 on
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 Brazil
                 to
                 its
                 very
                 Source
                 near
                 Quito
                 .
                 All
                 the
                 Religious
                 Orders
                 of
                 that
                 City
                 were
                 fill'd
                 with
                 extraordinary
                 Joy
                 ,
                 thanking
                 God
                 for
                 the
                 Favour
                 he
                 had
                 shewn
                 'em
                 in
                 calling
                 'em
                 to
                 dress
                 a
                 Vineyard
                 that
                 had
                 not
                 been
                 yet
                 cultivated
                 ;
                 and
                 all
                 offer'd
                 themselves
                 with
                 great
                 Readiness
                 to
                 go
                 and
                 preach
                 the
                 Gospel
                 in
                 those
                 Regions
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XVIII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Return
                 of
                 General
                 Texeira
                 to
                 Brazil
                 by
                 the
                 River
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Commission
                 given
                 to
                 the
                 Reverend
                 Father
                 Christopher
                 d'Acugna
                 a
                 Jesuit
                 ,
                 to
                 observe
                 all
                 the
                 Particulars
                 of
                 this
                 Discovery
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 give
                 a
                 Relation
                 of
                 them
                 .
              
               
                 QVito
                 is
                 a
                 Royal
                 Seat
                 ,
                 where
                 there
                 is
                 a
                 President
                 and
                 Assistants
                 :
                 These
                 Officers
                 considering
                 the
                 Importance
                 of
                 this
                 Discovery
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 had
                 made
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 much
                 both
                 the
                 Interest
                 of
                 Religion
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 of
                 his
                 Catholick
                 Majesty
                 might
                 suffer
                 ,
                 if
                 an
                 Affair
                 of
                 this
                 Consequence
                 
                 should
                 be
                 neglected
                 ,
                 were
                 unwilling
                 to
                 take
                 any
                 measures
                 of
                 their
                 own
                 ,
                 but
                 only
                 to
                 write
                 about
                 it
                 to
                 the
                 Count
                 of
                 Chinchon
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 then
                 Viceroy
                 of
                 Peru
                 ;
                 who
                 having
                 deliberated
                 on
                 the
                 matter
                 with
                 the
                 principal
                 Men
                 of
                 the
                 Council
                 of
                 Lima
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 Soveraign
                 Court
                 of
                 that
                 great
                 Kingdom
                 ,
                 return'd
                 an
                 Answer
                 to
                 the
                 President
                 of
                 Quito
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 then
                 the
                 Licentiate
                 
                   Don
                   Alonze
                   de
                   Salazar
                
                 ,
                 and
                 requir'd
                 him
                 by
                 an
                 Order
                 dated
                 the
                 10th
                 of
                 November
                 1638
                 ,
                 to
                 send
                 General
                 Texeira
                 to
                 Para
                 with
                 all
                 his
                 Men
                 by
                 the
                 same
                 way
                 he
                 came
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 furnish
                 him
                 with
                 all
                 things
                 necessary
                 for
                 his
                 Voyage
                 ;
                 he
                 likewise
                 order'd
                 him
                 to
                 choose
                 two
                 Spanish
                 Gentlemen
                 of
                 good
                 account
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 agree
                 with
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 General
                 that
                 they
                 might
                 imbark
                 with
                 him
                 ,
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 faithful
                 Report
                 of
                 the
                 whole
                 Course
                 they
                 should
                 steer
                 in
                 this
                 long
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 that
                 his
                 Catholick
                 Majesty
                 might
                 receive
                 from
                 Eye-witnesses
                 ,
                 and
                 those
                 of
                 an
                 unreproachable
                 Reputation
                 ,
                 a
                 good
                 account
                 of
                 what
                 they
                 had
                 discover'd
                 ,
                 or
                 might
                 farther
                 observe
                 in
                 their
                 Return
                 .
              
               
                 Many
                 Persons
                 ,
                 zealous
                 for
                 the
                 Service
                 of
                 the
                 King
                 their
                 Master
                 ,
                 presented
                 themselves
                 to
                 have
                 a
                 share
                 in
                 so
                 great
                 an
                 Enterprize
                 ;
                 amongst
                 others
                 
                   Don
                   Vasques
                   d'Acugna
                
                 ,
                 Knight
                 of
                 the
                 Order
                 of
                 Calatrava
                 ,
                 and
                 
                 Lieutenant
                 to
                 the
                 Captain
                 General
                 of
                 the
                 Vice-roy
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 and
                 Corregidor
                 of
                 Quito
                 ,
                 offer'd
                 himself
                 to
                 go
                 on
                 this
                 Expedition
                 .
                 The
                 Respect
                 he
                 bare
                 to
                 his
                 Prince
                 made
                 him
                 seek
                 this
                 new
                 occasion
                 of
                 serving
                 him
                 with
                 the
                 same
                 Affection
                 he
                 had
                 done
                 for
                 above
                 fifty
                 Years
                 himself
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 Ancestors
                 all
                 their
                 days
                 on
                 the
                 like
                 occasions
                 .
                 He
                 desir'd
                 of
                 the
                 Vice-roy
                 that
                 he
                 would
                 permit
                 him
                 to
                 furnish
                 the
                 Ammunition
                 and
                 Equipage
                 for
                 this
                 Adventure
                 at
                 his
                 own
                 proper
                 Charge
                 ,
                 without
                 pretending
                 to
                 any
                 other
                 Interest
                 in
                 the
                 matter
                 ,
                 than
                 that
                 of
                 seeing
                 his
                 Master
                 well
                 serv'd
                 .
                 But
                 the
                 Vice-roy
                 not
                 knowing
                 how
                 to
                 spare
                 him
                 from
                 the
                 Post
                 he
                 was
                 already
                 in
                 ,
                 after
                 having
                 commended
                 his
                 Zeal
                 for
                 his
                 King
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Greatness
                 of
                 his
                 Offers
                 ,
                 engag'd
                 him
                 to
                 continue
                 in
                 his
                 present
                 Station
                 ;
                 and
                 to
                 gratify
                 him
                 ,
                 nominated
                 his
                 Brother
                 Father
                 
                   Christopher
                   d'Acugna
                
                 in
                 his
                 place
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 animated
                 with
                 no
                 less
                 degree
                 of
                 Generosity
                 than
                 the
                 other
                 ,
                 and
                 counted
                 it
                 no
                 small
                 Happiness
                 to
                 be
                 able
                 by
                 these
                 means
                 to
                 serve
                 his
                 Prince
                 on
                 so
                 important
                 an
                 Occasion
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 XIX
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Departure
                 of
                 Father
                 D'Acugna
                 .
                 The
                 way
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 and
                 Portuguez
                 took
                 together
                 to
                 get
                 to
                 the
                 River
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 Portuguez
                 General
                 being
                 prepar'd
                 for
                 his
                 return
                 to
                 Para
                 by
                 the
                 River
                 Amazone
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 Royal
                 Audience
                 of
                 Quito
                 having
                 well
                 consider'd
                 that
                 it
                 might
                 very
                 much
                 turn
                 to
                 account
                 for
                 some
                 Jesuits
                 to
                 make
                 this
                 Voyage
                 with
                 him
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 might
                 take
                 exact
                 notice
                 of
                 every
                 thing
                 worthy
                 of
                 Observation
                 on
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 carry
                 the
                 Relation
                 of
                 it
                 into
                 Spain
                 to
                 his
                 Catholick
                 Majesty
                 ,
                 signified
                 their
                 Mind
                 to
                 the
                 Provincial
                 of
                 the
                 Jesuits
                 ,
                 which
                 at
                 that
                 time
                 was
                 Father
                 
                   Francis
                   de
                   Fuentes
                
                 ,
                 who
                 taking
                 it
                 for
                 a
                 great
                 Honour
                 ,
                 that
                 so
                 much
                 Confidence
                 should
                 be
                 put
                 in
                 the
                 Members
                 of
                 his
                 Community
                 as
                 the
                 discharge
                 of
                 so
                 important
                 an
                 Affair
                 ,
                 confirm'd
                 the
                 Nomination
                 that
                 had
                 been
                 made
                 of
                 Father
                 
                   Christopher
                   D'Acugna
                
                 ,
                 tho
                 he
                 was
                 Rector
                 of
                 the
                 Jesuits
                 College
                 at
                 Cuence
                 under
                 the
                 Jurisdiction
                 of
                 Quito
                 ,
                 and
                 gave
                 him
                 Father
                 
                   Andrew
                   Dartieda
                
                 ,
                 Professor
                 of
                 Divinity
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 College
                 ,
                 for
                 his
                 Companion
                 .
                 These
                 two
                 Jesuits
                 receiv'd
                 their
                 
                 Orders
                 by
                 Patents
                 issued
                 from
                 the
                 Chancery
                 of
                 Quito
                 ;
                 the
                 Purport
                 of
                 which
                 was
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 should
                 go
                 without
                 delay
                 with
                 the
                 Captain
                 Major
                 
                   Peter
                   de
                   Texeira
                
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 after
                 they
                 were
                 arriv'd
                 at
                 Para
                 they
                 should
                 go
                 into
                 Spain
                 ,
                 to
                 give
                 the
                 King
                 an
                 Account
                 of
                 all
                 they
                 should
                 observe
                 in
                 their
                 Voyage
                 .
                 These
                 Fathers
                 readily
                 obey'd
                 the
                 Orders
                 they
                 had
                 receiv'd
                 ,
                 and
                 accordingly
                 set
                 forward
                 on
                 the
                 16th
                 of
                 January
                 1639
                 ,
                 to
                 begin
                 a
                 Voyage
                 that
                 lasted
                 ten
                 Months
                 before
                 they
                 arriv'd
                 at
                 Para
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 enter'd
                 into
                 Port
                 the
                 twelfth
                 day
                 of
                 December
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 Year
                 .
                 As
                 they
                 left
                 Quito
                 ,
                 they
                 took
                 the
                 way
                 of
                 those
                 high
                 Mountains
                 on
                 foot
                 ,
                 from
                 which
                 that
                 great
                 River
                 of
                 the
                 Amazones
                 derives
                 its
                 Sources
                 ,
                 a
                 River
                 which
                 has
                 nothing
                 in
                 its
                 rise
                 wherein
                 it
                 excels
                 other
                 Rivers
                 ,
                 but
                 is
                 so
                 very
                 much
                 augmented
                 in
                 its
                 Course
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 is
                 eighty
                 four
                 Leagues
                 in
                 breadth
                 .
                 These
                 Jesuits
                 took
                 all
                 the
                 care
                 they
                 could
                 ,
                 and
                 labour'd
                 with
                 all
                 possible
                 Accuracy
                 to
                 observe
                 every
                 thing
                 that
                 was
                 worth
                 a
                 Remark
                 ;
                 they
                 took
                 the
                 Latitudes
                 in
                 every
                 place
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 where
                 they
                 could
                 do
                 it
                 ;
                 they
                 took
                 an
                 account
                 of
                 the
                 Names
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Rivers
                 that
                 run
                 into
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Nations
                 that
                 inhabit
                 the
                 Borders
                 of
                 it
                 :
                 They
                 took
                 notice
                 of
                 the
                 
                 Quality
                 of
                 the
                 Lands
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 Goodness
                 of
                 the
                 Fruits
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 Temperature
                 of
                 the
                 Climates
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 every
                 thing
                 that
                 is
                 serviceable
                 to
                 the
                 Life
                 of
                 Man
                 ;
                 they
                 enter'd
                 into
                 Commerce
                 with
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 :
                 In
                 a
                 word
                 ,
                 they
                 forgot
                 nothing
                 that
                 they
                 thought
                 might
                 conduce
                 to
                 furnish
                 them
                 with
                 a
                 perfect
                 Knowledg
                 of
                 those
                 Provinces
                 ,
                 which
                 had
                 never
                 been
                 entirely
                 discover'd
                 till
                 then
                 .
                 Therefore
                 they
                 that
                 read
                 this
                 Relation
                 ,
                 are
                 desir'd
                 by
                 one
                 of
                 those
                 Fathers
                 ,
                 who
                 undertook
                 to
                 expose
                 it
                 to
                 the
                 World
                 ,
                 not
                 to
                 disbelieve
                 what
                 he
                 has
                 written
                 ,
                 because
                 he
                 can
                 prove
                 that
                 what
                 he
                 affirms
                 for
                 a
                 Truth
                 ,
                 is
                 really
                 so
                 ,
                 by
                 above
                 thirty
                 Spaniards
                 and
                 Portuguez
                 that
                 accompanied
                 him
                 in
                 this
                 Voyage
                 ;
                 and
                 he
                 hopes
                 the
                 Reader
                 will
                 not
                 imagine
                 he
                 makes
                 no
                 Conscience
                 of
                 affirming
                 things
                 that
                 are
                 untrue
                 in
                 a
                 matter
                 of
                 this
                 Weight
                 and
                 Importance
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XX.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 general
                 Idea
                 which
                 Father
                 D'Acugna
                 gives
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Elogiums
                 he
                 gives
                 it
                 after
                 he
                 had
                 view'd
                 it
                 throughout
                 .
              
               
                 ON
                 the
                 famous
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 is
                 the
                 richest
                 ,
                 most
                 fertile
                 ,
                 and
                 best
                 
                 peopled
                 Country
                 of
                 Peru
                 ;
                 and
                 without
                 an
                 Hyperbole
                 't
                 is
                 the
                 largest
                 and
                 most
                 eminent
                 River
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 ;
                 it
                 passes
                 through
                 divers
                 Kingdoms
                 of
                 a
                 vast
                 Extent
                 ,
                 and
                 enriches
                 more
                 Provinces
                 than
                 the
                 Ganges
                 ,
                 that
                 vast
                 River
                 that
                 waters
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 
                   East
                   Indies
                
                 ;
                 than
                 the
                 Euphrates
                 ,
                 which
                 after
                 it
                 has
                 run
                 through
                 Persia
                 ,
                 comes
                 across
                 Syria
                 to
                 throw
                 it self
                 into
                 the
                 Sea
                 ;
                 or
                 than
                 the
                 Nile
                 ,
                 which
                 comes
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Mountains
                 of
                 Cuama
                 ,
                 and
                 passing
                 through
                 Africa
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 most
                 barren
                 Countries
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 ,
                 turns
                 them
                 into
                 fruitful
                 and
                 delicious
                 Provinces
                 by
                 the
                 overflowing
                 of
                 its
                 Waters
                 .
                 In
                 a
                 word
                 ,
                 the
                 River
                 Amazone
                 nourishes
                 an
                 infinitely
                 greater
                 number
                 of
                 People
                 ,
                 and
                 carries
                 its
                 fresh
                 Water
                 a
                 great
                 way
                 further
                 into
                 the
                 Sea
                 ,
                 than
                 any
                 of
                 those
                 mighty
                 Rivers
                 ,
                 altho
                 these
                 have
                 given
                 their
                 Names
                 to
                 entire
                 Gulphs
                 ,
                 or
                 troubled
                 the
                 Sea
                 with
                 their
                 Waters
                 to
                 a
                 considerable
                 length
                 .
                 A
                 great
                 many
                 more
                 Rivers
                 fall
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 than
                 into
                 the
                 Ganges
                 ;
                 and
                 if
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 the
                 latter
                 are
                 cover'd
                 with
                 gilded
                 Sand
                 ,
                 those
                 of
                 the
                 former
                 are
                 fill'd
                 with
                 a
                 Sand
                 of
                 pure
                 Gold
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Waters
                 that
                 always
                 wash
                 them
                 are
                 continually
                 discovering
                 Mines
                 of
                 Gold
                 and
                 Silver
                 in
                 the
                 Bowels
                 of
                 the
                 Earth
                 .
                 In
                 short
                 ,
                 the
                 Places
                 it
                 
                 waters
                 are
                 an
                 Earthly
                 Paradise
                 ;
                 and
                 if
                 Men
                 did
                 but
                 lend
                 their
                 Assistance
                 ▪
                 Nature
                 in
                 that
                 Country
                 as
                 they
                 〈…〉
                 ,
                 all
                 the
                 Borders
                 of
                 that
                 great
                 River
                 would
                 be
                 full
                 of
                 large
                 Gardens
                 perpetually
                 fill'd
                 with
                 Fruits
                 and
                 Flowers
                 :
                 It
                 sometimes
                 overflows
                 its
                 Banks
                 ,
                 and
                 thereby
                 renders
                 all
                 the
                 Ground
                 fruitful
                 through
                 which
                 its
                 Waters
                 pass
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 not
                 only
                 for
                 one
                 ,
                 but
                 for
                 several
                 Years
                 .
                 After
                 all
                 these
                 extraordinary
                 Improvements
                 ,
                 the
                 change
                 of
                 Seasons
                 is
                 not
                 necessary
                 to
                 the
                 Provinces
                 situate
                 near
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 .
                 They
                 find
                 every
                 thing
                 near
                 'em
                 ,
                 abundance
                 of
                 Fish
                 in
                 their
                 Waters
                 more
                 than
                 they
                 can
                 wish
                 ;
                 a
                 thousand
                 different
                 kinds
                 of
                 Animals
                 in
                 the
                 neighbouring
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Birds
                 in
                 such
                 plenty
                 as
                 can
                 hardly
                 be
                 imagined
                 :
                 The
                 Trees
                 always
                 loaded
                 with
                 Fruit
                 ,
                 the
                 Fields
                 with
                 a
                 plentiful
                 Crop
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Bowels
                 of
                 the
                 Earth
                 consisting
                 of
                 precious
                 Mines
                 of
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Metals
                 .
                 In
                 fine
                 ,
                 among
                 the
                 vast
                 number
                 of
                 People
                 that
                 dwell
                 along
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 scarce
                 any
                 to
                 be
                 seen
                 but
                 what
                 are
                 handsome
                 ,
                 well
                 made
                 ,
                 and
                 very
                 ingenious
                 in
                 all
                 things
                 they
                 are
                 concern'd
                 about
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXI
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Source
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Emulation
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Provinces
                 of
                 Peru
                 about
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 TO
                 enter
                 into
                 a
                 particular
                 History
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 I
                 shall
                 begin
                 with
                 its
                 Original
                 :
                 and
                 as
                 there
                 have
                 heretofore
                 been
                 great
                 Contests
                 between
                 eminent
                 Cities
                 about
                 the
                 Birth
                 of
                 divers
                 Hero's
                 of
                 former
                 Ages
                 ;
                 so
                 there
                 is
                 no
                 less
                 Emulation
                 among
                 the
                 Provinces
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 which
                 of
                 them
                 should
                 be
                 the
                 Mother
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 ,
                 because
                 the
                 true
                 Source
                 of
                 it
                 is
                 unknown
                 to
                 this
                 day
                 .
                 The
                 City
                 of
                 Lima
                 ,
                 as
                 magnificent
                 and
                 as
                 potent
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 ,
                 boasts
                 that
                 she
                 has
                 the
                 Mountains
                 of
                 Ganneo
                 and
                 the
                 Cavaliers
                 within
                 her
                 Jurisdiction
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Fountain-head
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 seventy
                 Leagues
                 above
                 her
                 :
                 But
                 this
                 is
                 not
                 the
                 Source
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 but
                 of
                 another
                 River
                 that
                 runs
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
                 Others
                 maintain
                 that
                 the
                 Source
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 proceeds
                 from
                 the
                 Mountains
                 of
                 Moida
                 in
                 the
                 new
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Granada
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 call'd
                 the
                 River
                 Caquetta
                 :
                 but
                 they
                 are
                 mistaken
                 too
                 ,
                 and
                 confound
                 the
                 matter
                 ;
                 for
                 the
                 Caquetta
                 and
                 the
                 Amazone
                 run
                 separately
                 above
                 seven
                 hundred
                 Leagues
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 when
                 they
                 come
                 near
                 together
                 ,
                 the
                 Caquetta
                 seems
                 to
                 turn
                 its
                 Course
                 ,
                 and
                 running
                 on
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 at
                 a
                 considerable
                 distance
                 ,
                 thus
                 continues
                 it
                 ,
                 till
                 having
                 at
                 length
                 pierced
                 through
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Agnos
                 ,
                 it
                 comes
                 to
                 add
                 its
                 Waters
                 to
                 that
                 vast
                 River
                 .
                 But
                 in
                 a
                 word
                 ,
                 Peru
                 in
                 general
                 claims
                 the
                 Original
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 Work
                 of
                 Nature
                 .
              
               
                 But
                 the
                 truth
                 of
                 this
                 matter
                 is
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 St.
                 Francis
                 ,
                 commonly
                 call'd
                 Quito
                 ,
                 has
                 the
                 sole
                 Glory
                 of
                 producing
                 this
                 great
                 Wonder
                 of
                 the
                 World.
                 Eight
                 Leagues
                 from
                 this
                 City
                 is
                 found
                 the
                 true
                 Source
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 beyond
                 those
                 vast
                 Mountains
                 that
                 divide
                 the
                 Jurisdiction
                 of
                 this
                 City
                 from
                 that
                 of
                 the
                 Quixos
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 foot
                 of
                 two
                 great
                 Rocks
                 ,
                 one
                 of
                 which
                 is
                 call'd
                 Guamana
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 other
                 Pulca
                 ,
                 which
                 stand
                 at
                 near
                 two
                 Leagues
                 distance
                 one
                 from
                 another
                 .
                 Between
                 those
                 two
                 Mountains
                 is
                 a
                 great
                 Lake
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 midst
                 of
                 this
                 Lake
                 is
                 another
                 Mountain
                 ,
                 which
                 has
                 been
                 torn
                 up
                 by
                 the
                 very
                 Roots
                 by
                 an
                 Earthquake
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 overturn'd
                 in
                 the
                 Lake
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 very
                 deep
                 and
                 large
                 :
                 'T
                 is
                 from
                 this
                 Lake
                 that
                 the
                 great
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 proceeds
                 ,
                 within
                 twenty
                 Minutes
                 of
                 the
                 Equinoctial
                 Line
                 ,
                 Southern
                 Latitude
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Course
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 its
                 Length
                 ,
                 its
                 different
                 Breadth
                 and
                 Depth
                 .
              
               
                 THis
                 River
                 runs
                 from
                 West
                 to
                 East
                 ,
                 it
                 continually
                 coasts
                 along
                 the
                 South
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 Equinoctial
                 Line
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 not
                 distant
                 from
                 it
                 above
                 two
                 ,
                 three
                 ,
                 four
                 or
                 at
                 most
                 five
                 Degrees
                 in
                 the
                 greatest
                 of
                 its
                 Windings
                 :
                 From
                 its
                 Rise
                 to
                 the
                 Place
                 where
                 it
                 empties
                 it self
                 into
                 the
                 Sea
                 ,
                 it
                 runs
                 not
                 above
                 1276
                 good
                 Spanish
                 Leagues
                 ,
                 tho
                 Oreillane
                 makes
                 it
                 1800.
                 
                 It
                 always
                 proceeds
                 in
                 a
                 winding
                 Course
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 its
                 great
                 Turnings
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 like
                 so
                 many
                 Arms
                 ,
                 draws
                 into
                 its
                 Channel
                 a
                 great
                 number
                 of
                 Rivers
                 as
                 well
                 from
                 the
                 South
                 as
                 the
                 North
                 side
                 of
                 it
                 .
                 It
                 s
                 breadth
                 is
                 different
                 ;
                 in
                 some
                 places
                 't
                 is
                 a
                 League
                 wide
                 ,
                 in
                 others
                 two
                 ,
                 three
                 ,
                 and
                 more
                 ;
                 in
                 other
                 Places
                 it
                 does
                 not
                 widen
                 it self
                 any
                 more
                 for
                 a
                 long
                 space
                 ,
                 as
                 if
                 it
                 were
                 to
                 amass
                 all
                 its
                 Waters
                 ,
                 and
                 its
                 whole
                 impetuous
                 Force
                 together
                 ,
                 to
                 discharge
                 it self
                 by
                 a
                 Mouth
                 of
                 eighty
                 four
                 Leagues
                 broad
                 into
                 the
                 Sea.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 narrowest
                 Place
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 a
                 quarter
                 of
                 a
                 League
                 ,
                 or
                 a
                 little
                 less
                 ,
                 in
                 
                 two
                 Degrees
                 two
                 thirds
                 of
                 Southern
                 Latitude
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 Strait
                 by
                 the
                 Providence
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 is
                 fitly
                 situated
                 for
                 the
                 building
                 of
                 a
                 Citadel
                 to
                 stop
                 the
                 Course
                 of
                 the
                 strongest
                 Enemy
                 that
                 should
                 enter
                 by
                 Sea
                 through
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ;
                 and
                 if
                 an
                 Enemy
                 should
                 come
                 down
                 by
                 a
                 River
                 that
                 runs
                 into
                 the
                 Amazon
                 call'd
                 Rionegro
                 ,
                 by
                 building
                 a
                 Fort
                 just
                 where
                 this
                 River
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 this
                 Passage
                 may
                 be
                 so
                 secured
                 ,
                 that
                 any
                 that
                 should
                 attempt
                 to
                 get
                 through
                 it
                 may
                 be
                 easily
                 hindred
                 .
                 This
                 Strait
                 is
                 three
                 hundred
                 and
                 seventy
                 Leagues
                 from
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 from
                 whence
                 with
                 Canoos
                 and
                 other
                 light
                 Vessels
                 with
                 Sails
                 and
                 Oars
                 ,
                 timely
                 Advice
                 might
                 be
                 given
                 in
                 eight
                 days
                 of
                 the
                 Arrival
                 of
                 any
                 Vessels
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Fort
                 at
                 this
                 Strait
                 might
                 put
                 it self
                 in
                 a
                 posture
                 of
                 Defence
                 ,
                 and
                 stop
                 the
                 Enemy's
                 Passage
                 .
                 The
                 Depth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 in
                 some
                 Places
                 so
                 great
                 ,
                 that
                 no
                 Bottom
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 found
                 :
                 from
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 River
                 Rio-negro
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 near
                 600
                 Leagues
                 ,
                 there
                 's
                 always
                 at
                 least
                 thirty
                 or
                 forty
                 Fathom
                 of
                 Water
                 in
                 its
                 greatest
                 Channel
                 .
                 From
                 thence
                 upwards
                 the
                 Depth
                 of
                 it
                 is
                 uncertain
                 ,
                 sometimes
                 twenty
                 ,
                 sometimes
                 twelve
                 ,
                 and
                 sometimes
                 eight
                 Fathom
                 :
                 
                 But
                 at
                 its
                 Beginning
                 it
                 has
                 Water
                 enough
                 to
                 carry
                 the
                 largest
                 Vessels
                 :
                 For
                 tho
                 the
                 Current
                 be
                 very
                 swift
                 ;
                 yet
                 every
                 day
                 without
                 fail
                 there
                 rise
                 certain
                 Eastern
                 Breezes
                 ,
                 that
                 continue
                 three
                 or
                 four
                 Hours
                 together
                 ,
                 and
                 sometimes
                 a
                 whole
                 day
                 ;
                 which
                 hold
                 back
                 the
                 Waters
                 ,
                 so
                 as
                 to
                 retain
                 the
                 Stream
                 in
                 a
                 degree
                 of
                 Motion
                 that
                 is
                 not
                 violent
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXIII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 great
                 number
                 of
                 Islands
                 in
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 means
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 use
                 for
                 the
                 Preservation
                 of
                 their
                 Roots
                 at
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 its
                 Inundations
                 .
              
               
                 THis
                 River
                 is
                 all
                 full
                 of
                 Islands
                 of
                 all
                 Sizes
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 so
                 great
                 number
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 are
                 not
                 to
                 be
                 counted
                 ,
                 many
                 of
                 them
                 being
                 very
                 near
                 one
                 to
                 another
                 .
                 There
                 are
                 some
                 four
                 or
                 five
                 ,
                 others
                 ten
                 ,
                 and
                 others
                 20
                 Leagues
                 in
                 compass
                 .
                 That
                 which
                 is
                 inhabited
                 by
                 the
                 Toupinambi
                 ,
                 of
                 whom
                 we
                 shall
                 speak
                 hereafter
                 ,
                 is
                 above
                 100
                 Leagues
                 about
                 :
                 There
                 are
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 very
                 small
                 Islands
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 use
                 only
                 to
                 sow
                 their
                 Seed
                 in
                 ;
                 but
                 all
                 of
                 these
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 greatest
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 large
                 ones
                 ,
                 are
                 overflowed
                 by
                 the
                 River
                 
                 every
                 Year
                 ;
                 and
                 these
                 regular
                 Inundations
                 do
                 so
                 enrich
                 them
                 with
                 the
                 Slime
                 and
                 Mud
                 it
                 carries
                 along
                 with
                 it
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 would
                 never
                 become
                 barren
                 ,
                 tho
                 they
                 should
                 be
                 every
                 year
                 sown
                 with
                 Yuca
                 or
                 Magnioca
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 Roots
                 ,
                 which
                 serve
                 the
                 Natives
                 instead
                 of
                 Bread
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 which
                 the
                 Earth
                 furnishes
                 them
                 in
                 great
                 abundance
                 .
              
               
                 Tho
                 these
                 frequent
                 Inundations
                 seem
                 to
                 be
                 attended
                 with
                 great
                 Inconveniences
                 ;
                 yet
                 the
                 Author
                 of
                 Nature
                 has
                 taught
                 these
                 Barbarians
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 good
                 Improvement
                 of
                 them
                 .
                 Before
                 these
                 Floods
                 come
                 ,
                 they
                 gather
                 in
                 all
                 their
                 Yuca
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 Root
                 they
                 make
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 Bread
                 called
                 Cassave
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 ordinarily
                 used
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 Coasts
                 of
                 Brazil
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 many
                 other
                 Places
                 both
                 of
                 the
                 Continent
                 and
                 Islands
                 of
                 America
                 .
                 They
                 make
                 great
                 Caves
                 in
                 the
                 Ground
                 ,
                 wherein
                 they
                 put
                 these
                 Roots
                 ;
                 and
                 having
                 well
                 stopp'd
                 them
                 up
                 with
                 Earth
                 ,
                 leave
                 'em
                 there
                 as
                 long
                 as
                 the
                 Flood
                 lasts
                 :
                 this
                 is
                 an
                 infallible
                 way
                 of
                 preserving
                 those
                 Roots
                 which
                 otherwise
                 would
                 be
                 subject
                 to
                 rot
                 with
                 the
                 excessive
                 moisture
                 of
                 the
                 Ground
                 .
                 When
                 the
                 Waters
                 are
                 run
                 off
                 ,
                 they
                 open
                 these
                 Caves
                 ,
                 and
                 take
                 out
                 their
                 Roots
                 ,
                 and
                 eat
                 them
                 ,
                 without
                 finding
                 them
                 at
                 all
                 the
                 worse
                 for
                 lying
                 in
                 the
                 Earth
                 .
                 Thus
                 as
                 
                 Nature
                 has
                 taught
                 the
                 Ant
                 to
                 store
                 up
                 Food
                 enough
                 to
                 nourish
                 her
                 all
                 the
                 Year
                 ,
                 no
                 wonder
                 she
                 has
                 taught
                 the
                 Indians
                 ,
                 as
                 barbarous
                 as
                 they
                 are
                 ,
                 how
                 to
                 preserve
                 their
                 Provisions
                 ,
                 seeing
                 the
                 Divine
                 Providence
                 takes
                 a
                 more
                 particular
                 Care
                 of
                 Men
                 than
                 of
                 Beasts
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXIV
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Bread
                 and
                 Drink
                 made
                 by
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 to
                 these
                 Islands
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Places
                 that
                 border
                 on
                 this
                 River
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 various
                 sorts
                 of
                 Fruits
                 ,
                 Roots
                 and
                 Grain
                 they
                 live
                 upon
                 .
              
               
                 THe
                 Roots
                 of
                 Yuca
                 we
                 have
                 been
                 speaking
                 of
                 ,
                 serve
                 these
                 People
                 for
                 Bread
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 eat
                 with
                 their
                 other
                 Food
                 ;
                 besides
                 this
                 they
                 make
                 a
                 Drink
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 all
                 generally
                 esteem
                 as
                 the
                 most
                 delicious
                 and
                 excellent
                 Liquor
                 in
                 the
                 World.
                 To
                 make
                 the
                 Bread
                 ,
                 they
                 squeeze
                 out
                 all
                 the
                 Juice
                 of
                 the
                 Root
                 ,
                 and
                 then
                 beat
                 and
                 pound
                 it
                 ,
                 till
                 't
                 is
                 become
                 a
                 kind
                 of
                 Meal
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 make
                 great
                 Cakes
                 ,
                 and
                 bake
                 them
                 in
                 an
                 Oven
                 ;
                 this
                 they
                 call
                 Cassave
                 ,
                 which
                 has
                 a
                 very
                 pleasant
                 Taste
                 when
                 't
                 is
                 new
                 ,
                 but
                 after
                 one
                 day
                 becomes
                 very
                 dry
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 it
                 may
                 be
                 kept
                 several
                 Months
                 ;
                 they
                 ordinarily
                 put
                 it
                 on
                 the
                 tops
                 
                 of
                 their
                 Huts
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 may
                 keep
                 the
                 more
                 dry
                 .
                 And
                 when
                 they
                 have
                 a
                 mind
                 to
                 make
                 their
                 Drink
                 ,
                 they
                 take
                 these
                 dry
                 Cakes
                 ,
                 and
                 temper
                 them
                 in
                 Water
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 boil
                 as
                 long
                 as
                 they
                 think
                 sufficient
                 ,
                 over
                 a
                 gentle
                 Fire
                 :
                 This
                 Paste
                 boil'd
                 thus
                 in
                 Water
                 ,
                 makes
                 a
                 Drink
                 so
                 strong
                 by
                 its
                 great
                 Fermentation
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 fuddles
                 'em
                 like
                 our
                 Wine
                 .
                 They
                 use
                 this
                 Drink
                 at
                 all
                 their
                 Assemblies
                 and
                 Entertainments
                 ,
                 as
                 when
                 they
                 inter
                 their
                 Dead
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 receive
                 any
                 Guests
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 celebrate
                 their
                 Feasts
                 ,
                 at
                 their
                 Seed-time
                 ,
                 and
                 Harvest
                 ;
                 in
                 a
                 word
                 ,
                 at
                 all
                 times
                 when
                 they
                 meet
                 ,
                 this
                 Liquor
                 is
                 the
                 Spirit
                 that
                 animates
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Charm
                 that
                 holds
                 'em
                 together
                 .
                 They
                 make
                 besides
                 this
                 ,
                 another
                 sort
                 of
                 Drink
                 ,
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 wild
                 Fruit
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 have
                 extraordinary
                 plenty
                 ;
                 this
                 they
                 peel
                 ,
                 and
                 put
                 in
                 Water
                 ,
                 with
                 which
                 when
                 it
                 is
                 well
                 mix'd
                 ,
                 it
                 soon
                 by
                 Fermentation
                 acquires
                 such
                 a
                 Savour
                 and
                 Strength
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 often
                 has
                 a
                 more
                 agreeable
                 Relish
                 than
                 Beer
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 so
                 much
                 in
                 use
                 in
                 many
                 Nations
                 .
                 They
                 keep
                 these
                 Liquors
                 in
                 great
                 Earthen
                 Vessels
                 ,
                 as
                 they
                 do
                 in
                 Spain
                 ,
                 or
                 in
                 lesser
                 ones
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 make
                 of
                 the
                 Trunk
                 of
                 a
                 hollow
                 Tree
                 ;
                 or
                 else
                 in
                 Baskets
                 made
                 of
                 Rushes
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 cover
                 within
                 and
                 without
                 with
                 a
                 sort
                 
                 of
                 Pitch
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 they
                 don't
                 leak
                 in
                 the
                 least
                 .
                 This
                 Bread
                 and
                 Drink
                 are
                 not
                 the
                 only
                 Provisions
                 they
                 live
                 upon
                 ;
                 they
                 have
                 many
                 other
                 sorts
                 of
                 Food
                 in
                 use
                 amongst
                 'em
                 ,
                 besides
                 Fruit
                 of
                 various
                 kinds
                 ,
                 as
                 Bonanes
                 ,
                 Ananas
                 ,
                 Gouyaves
                 ,
                 Amos
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 very
                 pleasant
                 Chesnuts
                 ,
                 which
                 at
                 Peru
                 they
                 call
                 
                   Almandras
                   de
                   la
                   Sierra
                
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 Mountain-Almonds
                 ;
                 but
                 the
                 Truth
                 is
                 ,
                 they
                 are
                 rather
                 of
                 the
                 Figure
                 of
                 a
                 Chesnut
                 than
                 of
                 an
                 Almond
                 ,
                 because
                 they
                 grow
                 in
                 Hulls
                 that
                 are
                 bristly
                 ,
                 like
                 those
                 of
                 our
                 Chesnuts
                 :
                 They
                 have
                 Palms
                 of
                 various
                 kinds
                 ,
                 Coco-Nuts
                 ,
                 and
                 Dates
                 that
                 are
                 very
                 well
                 tasted
                 ,
                 tho
                 they
                 are
                 wild
                 ,
                 and
                 many
                 other
                 sorts
                 of
                 Fruit
                 ,
                 that
                 are
                 produced
                 only
                 in
                 hot
                 Countries
                 .
                 They
                 have
                 likewise
                 divers
                 kinds
                 of
                 Roots
                 ,
                 that
                 are
                 good
                 Food
                 ,
                 as
                 Batates
                 ,
                 Yuca
                 ,
                 Mensa
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 call
                 Machachora
                 ,
                 and
                 Cajas
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 like
                 our
                 Saligots
                 ,
                 and
                 others
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 good
                 both
                 to
                 rost
                 and
                 boil
                 ,
                 have
                 a
                 pleasant
                 Relish
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 very
                 nourishing
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXV
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 great
                 Plenty
                 of
                 Fish
                 in
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 best
                 sort
                 of
                 them
                 .
              
               
                 FIsh
                 is
                 so
                 common
                 with
                 'em
                 ,
                 that
                 when
                 any
                 one
                 offers
                 it
                 to
                 'em
                 ,
                 they
                 proverbially
                 say
                 ,
                 E'ne
                 put
                 it
                 in
                 your
                 own
                 Dish
                 .
                 There
                 is
                 so
                 great
                 a
                 number
                 of
                 'em
                 in
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 that
                 without
                 any
                 other
                 Nets
                 than
                 their
                 Hands
                 ,
                 they
                 can
                 take
                 as
                 many
                 as
                 they
                 please
                 .
                 But
                 the
                 
                   Pege
                   Buey
                
                 is
                 as
                 it
                 were
                 the
                 King
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Fish
                 that
                 swim
                 in
                 the
                 River
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 from
                 its
                 Source
                 till
                 it
                 discharges
                 it self
                 into
                 the
                 Sea.
                 'T
                 is
                 not
                 to
                 be
                 imagin'd
                 what
                 a
                 delicious
                 Taste
                 this
                 Fish
                 has
                 ,
                 any
                 one
                 that
                 eats
                 it
                 would
                 think
                 it
                 to
                 be
                 most
                 excellent
                 Flesh
                 well
                 season'd
                 :
                 This
                 Fish
                 is
                 as
                 big
                 as
                 a
                 Heifer
                 of
                 a
                 Year
                 and
                 a
                 half
                 old
                 ,
                 it
                 has
                 a
                 Head
                 and
                 Ears
                 just
                 like
                 those
                 of
                 a
                 Heifer
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Body
                 of
                 it
                 is
                 all
                 cover'd
                 with
                 Hair
                 ,
                 like
                 the
                 Bristles
                 of
                 a
                 white
                 Hog
                 ;
                 it
                 swims
                 with
                 two
                 little
                 Arms
                 ,
                 and
                 under
                 its
                 Belly
                 it
                 has
                 Teats
                 with
                 which
                 it
                 suckles
                 its
                 young
                 Ones
                 :
                 The
                 Skin
                 of
                 it
                 is
                 very
                 thick
                 ,
                 and
                 when
                 't
                 is
                 dress'd
                 into
                 Leather
                 it
                 serves
                 to
                 make
                 Targets
                 that
                 are
                 Proof
                 against
                 a
                 Musquet
                 Bullet
                 .
                 This
                 Fish
                 feeds
                 upon
                 Grass
                 on
                 the
                 Bank
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 like
                 an
                 Ox
                 ,
                 from
                 which
                 it
                 receives
                 so
                 good
                 Nourishment
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 
                 of
                 so
                 pleasant
                 a
                 Taste
                 ,
                 that
                 a
                 Man
                 is
                 more
                 strengthen'd
                 and
                 better
                 satisfied
                 in
                 eating
                 a
                 small
                 quantity
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 than
                 in
                 eating
                 twice
                 as
                 much
                 Mutton
                 :
                 This
                 Fish
                 has
                 not
                 free
                 Respiration
                 in
                 the
                 Water
                 ,
                 and
                 therefore
                 often
                 thrusts
                 out
                 its
                 Snout
                 to
                 take
                 Breath
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 by
                 this
                 means
                 discover'd
                 to
                 them
                 that
                 seek
                 after
                 it
                 .
                 When
                 the
                 Indians
                 get
                 the
                 sight
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 they
                 follow
                 it
                 with
                 their
                 Oars
                 in
                 little
                 Canoos
                 ;
                 and
                 when
                 it
                 appears
                 above
                 Water
                 to
                 get
                 Breath
                 ,
                 they
                 throw
                 at
                 it
                 their
                 sort
                 of
                 Harping-Irons
                 made
                 of
                 Shells
                 ,
                 with
                 which
                 they
                 stop
                 its
                 course
                 ,
                 and
                 take
                 it
                 :
                 when
                 they
                 have
                 kill'd
                 it
                 ,
                 they
                 cut
                 it
                 into
                 good
                 pieces
                 ,
                 and
                 broil
                 it
                 upon
                 Wooden
                 Grates
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 call
                 Boucan
                 ;
                 and
                 being
                 thus
                 dress'd
                 ,
                 't
                 will
                 keep
                 good
                 above
                 a
                 Month
                 :
                 They
                 have
                 not
                 the
                 way
                 of
                 salting
                 and
                 drying
                 it
                 to
                 keep
                 a
                 great
                 while
                 ,
                 because
                 they
                 have
                 no
                 great
                 quantity
                 of
                 Salt
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 which
                 they
                 use
                 to
                 season
                 their
                 Meat
                 is
                 very
                 rare
                 with
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 made
                 only
                 of
                 the
                 Ashes
                 of
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 Palm-Tree
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 't
                 is
                 more
                 like
                 Salt-Peter
                 than
                 common
                 Salt.
                 
                 
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXVI
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Means
                 the
                 Indians
                 use
                 to
                 preserve
                 their
                 Fish
                 in
                 those
                 Seasons
                 wherein
                 they
                 can
                 neither
                 fish
                 nor
                 hunt
                 .
              
               
                 THO
                 the
                 Indians
                 don
                 't
                 know
                 how
                 to
                 keep
                 their
                 broil'd
                 Fish
                 very
                 long
                 ,
                 yet
                 they
                 sustain
                 no
                 great
                 damage
                 by
                 it
                 ,
                 because
                 Nature
                 has
                 given
                 them
                 Industry
                 enough
                 to
                 get
                 fresh
                 Meat
                 all
                 their
                 Winter
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 the
                 Rains
                 ,
                 during
                 which
                 they
                 can
                 neither
                 hunt
                 nor
                 fish
                 .
                 For
                 this
                 purpose
                 they
                 make
                 choice
                 of
                 some
                 fit
                 places
                 where
                 the
                 Floods
                 can
                 never
                 come
                 ,
                 and
                 there
                 they
                 dig
                 a
                 kind
                 of
                 a
                 Pond
                 of
                 a
                 moderate
                 depth
                 ,
                 to
                 hold
                 a
                 good
                 quantity
                 of
                 Water
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 inclose
                 round
                 with
                 a
                 Palisado
                 of
                 Stakes
                 ;
                 they
                 bring
                 Water
                 into
                 these
                 Ponds
                 ,
                 and
                 keep
                 'em
                 always
                 full
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 may
                 use
                 'em
                 as
                 Reservers
                 for
                 their
                 Winter
                 Provisions
                 .
                 At
                 the
                 season
                 when
                 the
                 Tortoises
                 come
                 ashore
                 to
                 lay
                 their
                 Eggs
                 ,
                 the
                 Indians
                 go
                 to
                 lie
                 in
                 Ambush
                 in
                 the
                 places
                 where
                 they
                 know
                 they
                 ordinarily
                 come
                 ;
                 and
                 when
                 they
                 see
                 a
                 sufficient
                 number
                 upon
                 the
                 shore
                 ,
                 they
                 go
                 and
                 turn
                 'em
                 upon
                 their
                 Backs
                 ,
                 to
                 hinder
                 'em
                 from
                 retreating
                 ;
                 and
                 when
                 they
                 have
                 thus
                 secur'd
                 'em
                 ,
                 they
                 begin
                 at
                 their
                 
                 leisure
                 to
                 carry
                 'em
                 to
                 their
                 Reservers
                 :
                 for
                 this
                 end
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 are
                 at
                 any
                 considerable
                 distance
                 from
                 their
                 Huts
                 ,
                 they
                 string
                 all
                 their
                 Tortoises
                 together
                 with
                 great
                 Cords
                 through
                 holes
                 that
                 they
                 make
                 on
                 the
                 top
                 of
                 their
                 Shells
                 ,
                 and
                 turning
                 'em
                 upon
                 their
                 Feet
                 lead
                 'em
                 to
                 the
                 Water
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 tie
                 'em
                 to
                 their
                 Canoos
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 make
                 'em
                 follow
                 them
                 home
                 :
                 when
                 they
                 are
                 got
                 home
                 ,
                 they
                 put
                 'em
                 in
                 their
                 Reservers
                 ,
                 and
                 unloose
                 'em
                 ,
                 feeding
                 'em
                 with
                 the
                 Leaves
                 and
                 Branches
                 of
                 Trees
                 which
                 they
                 throw
                 into
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 take
                 'em
                 out
                 to
                 spend
                 as
                 they
                 want
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 One
                 of
                 these
                 Tortoises
                 is
                 enough
                 to
                 feed
                 a
                 numerous
                 Family
                 some
                 time
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 't
                 is
                 not
                 to
                 be
                 wonder'd
                 at
                 ,
                 that
                 these
                 Indians
                 are
                 never
                 reduc'd
                 to
                 Scarcity
                 ,
                 seeing
                 they
                 make
                 Provision
                 of
                 so
                 great
                 a
                 number
                 of
                 Tortoises
                 ,
                 having
                 commonly
                 above
                 a
                 hundred
                 in
                 each
                 Reserver
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 the
                 proportion
                 they
                 provide
                 for
                 each
                 Person
                 in
                 their
                 Families
                 is
                 enough
                 to
                 maintain
                 several
                 People
                 .
                 These
                 Tortoises
                 are
                 as
                 large
                 as
                 those
                 Targets
                 Souldiers
                 formerly
                 us'd
                 to
                 defend
                 themselves
                 withal
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 Flesh
                 is
                 as
                 good
                 as
                 that
                 of
                 a
                 Heifer
                 .
                 At
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 their
                 laying
                 ,
                 some
                 Females
                 are
                 found
                 with
                 two
                 or
                 three
                 hundred
                 Eggs
                 in
                 their
                 Belly
                 bigger
                 than
                 those
                 of
                 Pullets
                 ,
                 and
                 as
                 good
                 ,
                 tho
                 
                 not
                 of
                 so
                 easy
                 Digestion
                 .
                 At
                 one
                 Season
                 of
                 the
                 Year
                 they
                 are
                 so
                 fat
                 ,
                 that
                 a
                 good
                 Barrel
                 of
                 Fat
                 may
                 be
                 taken
                 out
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 as
                 good
                 as
                 Butter
                 ,
                 and
                 being
                 salted
                 a
                 little
                 ,
                 tastes
                 extraordinary
                 well
                 ,
                 and
                 keeps
                 very
                 well
                 too
                 ;
                 this
                 will
                 not
                 only
                 serve
                 to
                 fry
                 Fish
                 ,
                 but
                 is
                 likewise
                 as
                 good
                 for
                 Sauces
                 as
                 the
                 best
                 Butter
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 :
                 so
                 that
                 these
                 Barbarians
                 have
                 no
                 absolute
                 need
                 of
                 our
                 Commodities
                 ,
                 but
                 make
                 as
                 good
                 Provision
                 for
                 their
                 Necessities
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 most
                 civiliz'd
                 Nations
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 can
                 do
                 .
                 'T
                 is
                 not
                 amiss
                 further
                 to
                 remark
                 two
                 things
                 in
                 respect
                 of
                 these
                 Tortoises
                 ;
                 one
                 is
                 ,
                 that
                 after
                 they
                 have
                 made
                 a
                 Hole
                 in
                 the
                 Sand
                 above
                 the
                 Bounds
                 of
                 the
                 highest
                 Tides
                 ,
                 they
                 lay
                 all
                 their
                 Eggs
                 at
                 a
                 time
                 ,
                 one
                 after
                 another
                 ,
                 after
                 which
                 they
                 carefully
                 cover
                 them
                 up
                 with
                 the
                 same
                 Sand
                 they
                 have
                 digged
                 up
                 to
                 make
                 their
                 Nest
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 't
                 is
                 impossible
                 for
                 any
                 to
                 discover
                 the
                 place
                 of
                 it
                 .
                 Then
                 they
                 return
                 backwards
                 into
                 the
                 Water
                 ,
                 to
                 prevent
                 the
                 notice
                 of
                 their
                 true
                 Track
                 ,
                 and
                 never
                 come
                 ashore
                 again
                 till
                 the
                 next
                 Year
                 ,
                 leaving
                 their
                 Eggs
                 to
                 be
                 hatch'd
                 by
                 the
                 Heat
                 of
                 the
                 Sun
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 always
                 accomplish'd
                 in
                 forty
                 days
                 ;
                 after
                 which
                 the
                 young
                 ones
                 are
                 seen
                 to
                 creep
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Sand
                 ,
                 being
                 about
                 the
                 bigness
                 of
                 a
                 Crown
                 ,
                 and
                 thus
                 in
                 a
                 train
                 ,
                 like
                 Ants
                 ,
                 they
                 make
                 to
                 the
                 Water
                 .
                 The
                 other
                 Remark
                 
                 is
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Sea-men
                 bone
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 salt
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 carry
                 'em
                 into
                 all
                 the
                 Colonies
                 of
                 the
                 Antego
                 Islands
                 ,
                 a
                 Trade
                 in
                 which
                 many
                 Captains
                 and
                 Merchants
                 have
                 found
                 their
                 Account
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXVII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Prudence
                 these
                 People
                 have
                 been
                 taught
                 by
                 Necessity
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Confidence
                 they
                 have
                 in
                 the
                 abundance
                 of
                 all
                 things
                 which
                 they
                 enjoy
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 Indians
                 of
                 this
                 happy
                 River
                 make
                 this
                 prudent
                 Provision
                 I
                 have
                 been
                 speaking
                 of
                 ,
                 for
                 a
                 Season
                 wherein
                 they
                 seem
                 to
                 want
                 every
                 thing
                 ;
                 but
                 their
                 Winter
                 being
                 past
                 ,
                 their
                 Fears
                 are
                 carried
                 away
                 with
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 have
                 plenty
                 of
                 all
                 things
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 they
                 never
                 take
                 care
                 for
                 the
                 Morrow
                 :
                 and
                 because
                 they
                 don't
                 think
                 of
                 wanting
                 any
                 thing
                 the
                 ensuing
                 day
                 ,
                 they
                 make
                 no
                 other
                 Provision
                 for
                 it
                 ,
                 than
                 in
                 feeding
                 themselves
                 well
                 to
                 day
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 may
                 be
                 the
                 stronger
                 and
                 more
                 ready
                 in
                 seeking
                 their
                 Food
                 to
                 morrow
                 .
                 They
                 have
                 all
                 imaginable
                 Dexterity
                 in
                 catching
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Fish
                 that
                 are
                 in
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 have
                 as
                 many
                 ways
                 for
                 it
                 as
                 there
                 is
                 diversity
                 of
                 Seasons
                 .
                 When
                 the
                 Inundations
                 diminish
                 ,
                 and
                 leave
                 Lakes
                 in
                 the
                 lower
                 
                 parts
                 of
                 the
                 Lands
                 that
                 have
                 been
                 overflow'd
                 ,
                 they
                 have
                 a
                 very
                 pleasant
                 Trick
                 to
                 take
                 the
                 Fish
                 that
                 are
                 left
                 in
                 those
                 places
                 :
                 They
                 strike
                 the
                 Water
                 with
                 two
                 or
                 three
                 flat
                 Sticks
                 ,
                 with
                 the
                 noise
                 of
                 which
                 the
                 Fish
                 are
                 no
                 sooner
                 stunn'd
                 ,
                 but
                 they
                 come
                 up
                 to
                 the
                 top
                 of
                 the
                 Water
                 ,
                 as
                 if
                 they
                 were
                 dead
                 ,
                 and
                 suffer
                 themselves
                 to
                 be
                 taken
                 up
                 with
                 the
                 hand
                 :
                 Not
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 the
                 Noise
                 that
                 produces
                 this
                 Effect
                 ,
                 but
                 the
                 Quality
                 of
                 the
                 Wood
                 ,
                 which
                 makes
                 the
                 Fish
                 drunk
                 .
                 The
                 Galibis
                 who
                 are
                 the
                 Natives
                 of
                 Cayen
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 one
                 part
                 of
                 Guiana
                 ,
                 make
                 use
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 call
                 it
                 Inecou
                 .
              
               
                 But
                 the
                 most
                 common
                 way
                 of
                 fishing
                 which
                 they
                 use
                 at
                 all
                 times
                 ,
                 and
                 on
                 all
                 occasions
                 ,
                 is
                 with
                 an
                 Arrow
                 which
                 they
                 dart
                 with
                 one
                 hand
                 from
                 a
                 smooth
                 little
                 Board
                 which
                 they
                 hold
                 in
                 t'other
                 .
                 This
                 Arrow
                 having
                 pierc'd
                 the
                 Fish
                 ,
                 serves
                 instead
                 of
                 a
                 Cork
                 to
                 shew
                 which
                 way
                 it
                 moves
                 when
                 it
                 is
                 wounded
                 ;
                 they
                 pursue
                 it
                 in
                 their
                 Canoos
                 ,
                 and
                 getting
                 hold
                 of
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 Arrow
                 they
                 draw
                 up
                 the
                 Fish
                 with
                 it
                 :
                 they
                 catch
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Fish
                 after
                 this
                 manner
                 ,
                 neither
                 small
                 nor
                 great
                 can
                 escape
                 their
                 Weapons
                 .
                 And
                 there
                 are
                 so
                 many
                 sorts
                 of
                 'em
                 in
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 of
                 'em
                 so
                 excellent
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 would
                 be
                 too
                 tedious
                 a
                 business
                 to
                 give
                 an
                 ample
                 Description
                 of
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 There
                 is
                 one
                 amongst
                 
                 the
                 rest
                 which
                 the
                 Indians
                 call
                 Paraque
                 ,
                 which
                 resembles
                 a
                 great
                 Eel
                 ,
                 or
                 rather
                 a
                 small
                 Conger
                 ,
                 which
                 has
                 a
                 very
                 strange
                 Property
                 ;
                 for
                 if
                 a
                 Man
                 takes
                 it
                 in
                 his
                 Hand
                 while
                 't
                 is
                 alive
                 ,
                 immediately
                 a
                 Coldness
                 and
                 Shivering
                 seizes
                 him
                 ,
                 as
                 if
                 he
                 were
                 taken
                 with
                 a
                 fit
                 of
                 an
                 Ague
                 ;
                 but
                 the
                 shaking
                 presently
                 ceases
                 upon
                 letting
                 it
                 go
                 out
                 of
                 his
                 Hand
                 again
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXVIII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 abundance
                 of
                 Game
                 that
                 is
                 found
                 near
                 this
                 River
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 divers
                 sorts
                 of
                 Animals
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 these
                 Countries
                 live
                 upon
                 .
              
               
                 TO
                 prevent
                 the
                 Disgust
                 these
                 wild
                 People
                 might
                 have
                 of
                 Fish
                 ,
                 tho
                 it
                 were
                 never
                 so
                 good
                 ,
                 if
                 they
                 should
                 always
                 be
                 forc'd
                 to
                 feed
                 upon
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 satisfy
                 the
                 Desire
                 they
                 might
                 have
                 of
                 sometimes
                 eating
                 Flesh
                 ,
                 Nature
                 has
                 render'd
                 the
                 Land
                 as
                 favourable
                 to
                 'em
                 as
                 the
                 Water
                 ;
                 for
                 it
                 produces
                 Animals
                 of
                 all
                 kinds
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 for
                 the
                 Necessity
                 as
                 for
                 the
                 Delight
                 of
                 its
                 Inhabitants
                 .
                 But
                 among
                 others
                 there
                 is
                 a
                 Creature
                 call'd
                 Dautas
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 bigness
                 of
                 a
                 Mule
                 ,
                 and
                 very
                 like
                 one
                 both
                 in
                 Colour
                 and
                 Shape
                 ,
                 the
                 Flesh
                 of
                 which
                 is
                 as
                 good
                 as
                 that
                 of
                 a
                 young
                 Bullock
                 ,
                 only
                 it
                 has
                 a
                 
                 more
                 faint
                 and
                 waterish
                 Taste
                 :
                 They
                 have
                 likewise
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 Hogs
                 in
                 the
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 that
                 are
                 neither
                 of
                 our
                 domestick
                 ,
                 nor
                 of
                 our
                 wild
                 kind
                 of
                 Swine
                 ,
                 but
                 of
                 a
                 particular
                 Species
                 ,
                 which
                 have
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 Vent
                 upon
                 their
                 Backs
                 ,
                 like
                 a
                 Navel
                 .
                 All
                 the
                 
                   West
                   Indies
                
                 are
                 stor'd
                 with
                 this
                 kind
                 of
                 Animals
                 :
                 Their
                 Flesh
                 is
                 very
                 good
                 and
                 wholsome
                 ,
                 and
                 at
                 least
                 may
                 compare
                 with
                 that
                 of
                 the
                 wild
                 Swine
                 that
                 are
                 taken
                 in
                 some
                 Forests
                 in
                 Europe
                 .
                 Besides
                 these
                 ,
                 there
                 is
                 another
                 sort
                 resembling
                 our
                 Domestick
                 Hogs
                 :
                 they
                 have
                 also
                 
                   Renados
                   ,
                   Pacas
                   ,
                   Cotias
                   ,
                   Ignanats
                   ,
                   Agotis
                   ,
                
                 and
                 other
                 Animals
                 which
                 are
                 peculiar
                 to
                 the
                 
                   West
                   Indies
                
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 as
                 good
                 as
                 the
                 most
                 delicious
                 sorts
                 we
                 have
                 in
                 Europe
                 .
                 They
                 have
                 also
                 Partridges
                 ,
                 and
                 tame
                 Poultry
                 like
                 ours
                 ,
                 which
                 have
                 been
                 brought
                 to
                 'em
                 from
                 Peru
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 from
                 one
                 to
                 another
                 have
                 been
                 spread
                 throughout
                 the
                 Coasts
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 .
                 The
                 many
                 Lakes
                 they
                 have
                 up
                 and
                 down
                 breed
                 a
                 multitude
                 of
                 Geese
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Water-Fowl
                 .
                 'T
                 is
                 very
                 remarkable
                 how
                 little
                 Pains
                 their
                 Game
                 costs
                 'em
                 :
                 We
                 often
                 had
                 experience
                 of
                 it
                 in
                 our
                 Camp.
                 Every
                 Evening
                 when
                 our
                 Men
                 went
                 ashore
                 ,
                 after
                 they
                 had
                 caus'd
                 the
                 Indians
                 that
                 were
                 of
                 our
                 Party
                 to
                 make
                 us
                 as
                 many
                 Huts
                 as
                 were
                 necessary
                 to
                 lodg
                 us
                 (
                 which
                 took
                 up
                 some
                 time
                 )
                 ;
                 our
                 
                 Company
                 separated
                 ,
                 some
                 went
                 a
                 hunting
                 in
                 the
                 Mountains
                 with
                 their
                 Dogs
                 ,
                 others
                 went
                 upon
                 the
                 River
                 with
                 their
                 Bows
                 and
                 Arrows
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 a
                 few
                 hours
                 time
                 we
                 should
                 see
                 'em
                 return
                 loaded
                 with
                 more
                 Fish
                 and
                 Venison
                 than
                 all
                 our
                 Men
                 could
                 eat
                 ;
                 and
                 this
                 was
                 not
                 once
                 or
                 twice
                 only
                 ,
                 but
                 throughout
                 our
                 whole
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 not
                 without
                 our
                 great
                 Admiration
                 ;
                 which
                 gave
                 us
                 occasion
                 to
                 attribute
                 this
                 great
                 Abundance
                 to
                 the
                 mighty
                 and
                 liberal
                 Providence
                 of
                 that
                 God
                 ,
                 who
                 once
                 fed
                 five
                 thousand
                 Persons
                 with
                 five
                 Loaves
                 and
                 a
                 few
                 Fishes
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXIX
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 agreeable
                 Temperature
                 of
                 the
                 Air
                 in
                 all
                 this
                 Country
                 ;
                 what
                 it
                 is
                 that
                 makes
                 Winter
                 there
                 ,
                 and
                 whether
                 the
                 Heat
                 be
                 great
                 ,
                 it
                 being
                 under
                 the
                 Line
                 .
                 That
                 there
                 is
                 but
                 one
                 Inconveniency
                 there
                 .
              
               
                 ALL
                 along
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 neighbouring
                 Provinces
                 ,
                 the
                 Air
                 is
                 so
                 temperate
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Seasons
                 of
                 the
                 Year
                 so
                 regular
                 ,
                 that
                 there
                 's
                 no
                 Excess
                 either
                 of
                 Heat
                 or
                 Cold
                 ,
                 nor
                 any
                 troublesome
                 variety
                 of
                 Weather
                 :
                 For
                 tho
                 there
                 is
                 every
                 Year
                 a
                 kind
                 of
                 Winter
                 ,
                 yet
                 it
                 does
                 not
                 proceed
                 from
                 the
                 different
                 Course
                 of
                 the
                 Planets
                 ,
                 or
                 Distance
                 of
                 the
                 Sun
                 ,
                 for
                 that
                 
                 always
                 rises
                 and
                 sets
                 at
                 the
                 same
                 hour
                 .
                 That
                 which
                 most
                 incommodes
                 'em
                 is
                 the
                 frequency
                 of
                 the
                 Inundations
                 ,
                 which
                 leave
                 a
                 great
                 Dampness
                 in
                 the
                 Ground
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 their
                 overflowing
                 the
                 Plains
                 ,
                 hinder
                 'em
                 several
                 Months
                 from
                 sowing
                 and
                 gathering
                 in
                 the
                 Fruits
                 of
                 the
                 Earth
                 .
                 By
                 these
                 Floods
                 they
                 distinguish
                 the
                 Winter
                 from
                 the
                 Spring
                 throughout
                 all
                 Peru
                 :
                 they
                 call
                 all
                 that
                 time
                 wherein
                 the
                 Earth
                 produces
                 no
                 Crop
                 ,
                 the
                 Winter
                 ;
                 and
                 they
                 call
                 that
                 Season
                 the
                 Spring
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 employ
                 in
                 sowing
                 ,
                 and
                 gathering
                 in
                 not
                 only
                 their
                 Maze
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 principal
                 part
                 of
                 their
                 Harvest
                 ,
                 but
                 all
                 the
                 other
                 Product
                 of
                 the
                 Ground
                 ,
                 whether
                 that
                 which
                 grows
                 spontaneously
                 ,
                 or
                 by
                 Cultivation
                 .
                 These
                 Inundations
                 happen
                 twice
                 a
                 Year
                 all
                 along
                 the
                 whole
                 Extent
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 .
              
               
                 We
                 have
                 observ'd
                 ,
                 that
                 those
                 who
                 dwell
                 near
                 the
                 Mountains
                 of
                 Quito
                 ,
                 suffer
                 more
                 Heat
                 than
                 those
                 that
                 inhabit
                 along
                 this
                 River
                 towards
                 the
                 Sea
                 ;
                 the
                 reason
                 is
                 ,
                 because
                 there
                 come
                 Breezes
                 from
                 the
                 Coast
                 of
                 the
                 Northern
                 Sea
                 ,
                 that
                 continue
                 two
                 ,
                 three
                 or
                 four
                 hours
                 in
                 a
                 day
                 ,
                 and
                 sometimes
                 more
                 ;
                 these
                 Winds
                 extreamly
                 refresh
                 the
                 Air
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 a
                 great
                 Comfort
                 to
                 those
                 People
                 that
                 are
                 less
                 remote
                 from
                 the
                 Sea.
                 
              
               
                 However
                 ,
                 it
                 must
                 be
                 said
                 that
                 the
                 highest
                 degree
                 of
                 Heat
                 ,
                 even
                 in
                 the
                 Mountains
                 
                 themselves
                 ,
                 is
                 no
                 greater
                 than
                 is
                 at
                 Panama
                 ,
                 and
                 at
                 Cartagena
                 :
                 for
                 however
                 violent
                 it
                 be
                 in
                 it self
                 ,
                 it
                 is
                 every
                 where
                 moderated
                 by
                 the
                 gentle
                 Winds
                 ,
                 which
                 blow
                 every
                 day
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 only
                 render
                 the
                 Air
                 tolerable
                 and
                 agreeable
                 to
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 ,
                 but
                 have
                 besides
                 the
                 Property
                 of
                 preserving
                 all
                 their
                 Victuals
                 and
                 Stores
                 from
                 corrupting
                 .
                 I
                 have
                 had
                 the
                 Experience
                 of
                 it
                 my self
                 in
                 the
                 Wafers
                 we
                 carried
                 with
                 us
                 ,
                 which
                 at
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 five
                 Months
                 and
                 a
                 half
                 since
                 we
                 parted
                 from
                 Quito
                 ,
                 were
                 as
                 good
                 as
                 if
                 they
                 had
                 been
                 newly
                 made
                 .
                 This
                 made
                 me
                 and
                 my
                 Companion
                 wonder
                 the
                 more
                 ,
                 because
                 in
                 our
                 Travels
                 in
                 almost
                 all
                 other
                 Parts
                 of
                 America
                 ,
                 we
                 observ'd
                 ,
                 that
                 Bread
                 and
                 other
                 things
                 of
                 the
                 least
                 Substance
                 corrupted
                 in
                 a
                 little
                 time
                 .
              
               
                 And
                 tho
                 all
                 this
                 long
                 stretch
                 of
                 Land
                 is
                 so
                 near
                 the
                 Equinoctial
                 Line
                 ,
                 yet
                 the
                 Heat
                 of
                 the
                 Sun
                 is
                 not
                 at
                 all
                 hurtful
                 ,
                 nor
                 the
                 Evening
                 Air
                 neither
                 ,
                 tho
                 it
                 be
                 very
                 cool
                 and
                 moist
                 .
                 I
                 have
                 good
                 reason
                 to
                 testify
                 this
                 ,
                 for
                 during
                 our
                 whole
                 Voyage
                 I
                 have
                 commonly
                 pass'd
                 whole
                 Nights
                 in
                 the
                 open
                 Air
                 ,
                 without
                 getting
                 the
                 least
                 Pain
                 in
                 my
                 Head
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 least
                 Defluxion
                 of
                 Rhume
                 ;
                 and
                 yet
                 in
                 all
                 other
                 Places
                 ,
                 the
                 least
                 walking
                 abroad
                 in
                 a
                 Moon-shiny
                 Night
                 ,
                 has
                 very
                 much
                 incommoded
                 me
                 .
                 'T
                 is
                 true
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 our
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 almost
                 all
                 
                 of
                 our
                 Men
                 that
                 came
                 from
                 cold
                 Countries
                 had
                 Agues
                 ,
                 but
                 were
                 all
                 cur'd
                 by
                 bleeding
                 three
                 or
                 four
                 times
                 .
                 We
                 neither
                 felt
                 ,
                 nor
                 heard
                 of
                 any
                 such
                 bad
                 Air
                 along
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 as
                 there
                 is
                 in
                 almost
                 all
                 other
                 places
                 of
                 Peru
                 that
                 have
                 been
                 discover'd
                 ,
                 where
                 People
                 are
                 sometimes
                 in
                 a
                 moment
                 taken
                 with
                 violent
                 Rhumatisms
                 throughout
                 all
                 their
                 Limbs
                 ,
                 which
                 could
                 not
                 proceed
                 but
                 from
                 a
                 sudden
                 Corruption
                 of
                 the
                 Humours
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 in
                 some
                 degenerated
                 to
                 an
                 incurable
                 Palsy
                 ,
                 and
                 cost
                 others
                 their
                 Lives
                 .
                 In
                 a
                 word
                 ,
                 were
                 it
                 not
                 for
                 the
                 Heats
                 which
                 are
                 in
                 most
                 of
                 the
                 inhabited
                 Parts
                 of
                 Peru
                 intolerable
                 ,
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 might
                 without
                 Exaggeration
                 be
                 term'd
                 an
                 Earthly
                 Paradise
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXX
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Beauty
                 of
                 this
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 abundance
                 of
                 Medicinal
                 Simples
                 ,
                 Plants
                 and
                 Trees
                 it
                 yields
                 .
              
               
                 THis
                 sweet
                 Temperature
                 of
                 the
                 Air
                 causes
                 all
                 the
                 Borders
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 to
                 be
                 cover'd
                 with
                 a
                 thousand
                 kinds
                 of
                 lovely
                 Trees
                 ,
                 the
                 pleasant
                 Verdure
                 of
                 which
                 is
                 perpetually
                 preserv'd
                 by
                 the
                 moderate
                 Disposition
                 of
                 the
                 Air
                 :
                 a
                 thousand
                 Landskips
                 were
                 presented
                 to
                 our
                 Eyes
                 still
                 more
                 and
                 
                 more
                 fine
                 ,
                 and
                 more
                 diversified
                 ,
                 as
                 if
                 they
                 emulated
                 one
                 another
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 us
                 confess
                 that
                 Art
                 had
                 yet
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 to
                 learn
                 of
                 Nature
                 ,
                 when
                 she
                 discovers
                 her self
                 after
                 so
                 excellent
                 and
                 surprizing
                 a
                 manner
                 .
                 The
                 Ground
                 is
                 very
                 low
                 in
                 most
                 places
                 near
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 but
                 rises
                 gradually
                 at
                 a
                 distance
                 ,
                 with
                 little
                 Hills
                 that
                 adjoin
                 to
                 curious
                 Plains
                 all
                 cover'd
                 with
                 Flowers
                 ,
                 without
                 so
                 much
                 as
                 a
                 Tree
                 ;
                 beyond
                 these
                 are
                 lovely
                 Vales
                 all
                 cloth'd
                 with
                 Grass
                 and
                 Herbs
                 ,
                 preserv'd
                 continually
                 green
                 by
                 the
                 refreshing
                 Rivulets
                 that
                 run
                 through
                 '
                 em
                 .
              
               
                 Beyond
                 all
                 this
                 Extent
                 of
                 Ground
                 are
                 Hills
                 rising
                 one
                 above
                 another
                 ,
                 till
                 they
                 make
                 those
                 high
                 Mountains
                 which
                 extend
                 from
                 one
                 end
                 of
                 Peru
                 to
                 the
                 other
                 ,
                 call'd
                 Cordeliers
                 ,
                 because
                 they
                 are
                 rang'd
                 in
                 order
                 ,
                 as
                 if
                 they
                 were
                 plac'd
                 by
                 a
                 Line
                 or
                 Cord.
                 
              
               
                 There
                 are
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 Thickets
                 that
                 produce
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Simples
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Indians
                 know
                 how
                 to
                 use
                 for
                 the
                 Cure
                 of
                 their
                 Diseases
                 .
                 There
                 grow
                 
                 Cassia-Trees
                 ,
                 which
                 bear
                 the
                 best
                 Cassia
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 Indies
                 .
                 There
                 is
                 excellent
                 
                   Sarsaparilla
                   ,
                   Gums
                
                 and
                 Rosins
                 ,
                 that
                 are
                 very
                 good
                 for
                 Wounds
                 and
                 Bruises
                 ;
                 and
                 a
                 prodigious
                 quantity
                 of
                 Honey
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Bees
                 on
                 all
                 sides
                 make
                 in
                 such
                 abundance
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 store
                 of
                 it
                 is
                 not
                 to
                 be
                 exhausted
                 .
                 This
                 is
                 as
                 good
                 to
                 
                 eat
                 ,
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 for
                 the
                 Composition
                 of
                 various
                 Medicines
                 :
                 The
                 Bees
                 also
                 make
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 black
                 Wax
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 however
                 very
                 good
                 ,
                 and
                 burns
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 that
                 which
                 is
                 white
                 or
                 yellow
                 .
                 There
                 are
                 a
                 kind
                 of
                 Trees
                 ,
                 call'd
                 by
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 Audirouas
                 ,
                 from
                 which
                 there
                 runs
                 an
                 Oil
                 of
                 extraordinary
                 Virtue
                 for
                 curing
                 Wounds
                 :
                 There
                 is
                 another
                 Tree
                 call'd
                 Copayba
                 ,
                 which
                 yields
                 a
                 Balm
                 surpassing
                 the
                 best
                 that
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 had
                 in
                 the
                 East
                 .
                 In
                 a
                 word
                 ,
                 there
                 grows
                 a
                 multitude
                 of
                 different
                 kinds
                 of
                 Herbs
                 and
                 Plants
                 of
                 very
                 great
                 Virtue
                 ,
                 besides
                 those
                 that
                 are
                 not
                 yet
                 known
                 ,
                 which
                 would
                 suffice
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 new
                 Dioscorides
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 second
                 Pliny
                 :
                 And
                 it
                 would
                 be
                 a
                 matter
                 of
                 no
                 small
                 Difficulty
                 to
                 give
                 an
                 account
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Properties
                 of
                 so
                 many
                 different
                 Simples
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXXI
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Multitude
                 of
                 Trees
                 that
                 grow
                 in
                 this
                 Countrey
                 ,
                 Cedars
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 kinds
                 fit
                 for
                 the
                 building
                 of
                 Vessels
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 Providence
                 of
                 Nature
                 in
                 furnishing
                 this
                 Part
                 of
                 the
                 World
                 with
                 all
                 Necessaries
                 for
                 that
                 purpose
                 ,
                 except
                 Iron
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 Trees
                 that
                 grow
                 along
                 this
                 River
                 are
                 innumerable
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 a
                 surprizing
                 
                 Tallness
                 and
                 Bulk
                 .
                 I
                 measured
                 a
                 Cedar
                 that
                 was
                 thirty
                 Hands
                 breadth
                 in
                 Compass
                 ;
                 the
                 Poplars
                 are
                 almost
                 all
                 of
                 that
                 size
                 ,
                 and
                 excellent
                 Timber
                 for
                 building
                 either
                 for
                 Sea
                 or
                 Land.
                 Those
                 Trees
                 which
                 are
                 known
                 in
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 are
                 for
                 the
                 most
                 part
                 Cedars
                 ,
                 
                   Coibos
                   ,
                   Palohierro
                
                 ,
                 and
                 Palocolorado
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 such
                 like
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 no
                 sooner
                 cut
                 down
                 ,
                 but
                 they
                 may
                 be
                 safely
                 used
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 Vessels
                 that
                 are
                 made
                 of
                 'em
                 may
                 be
                 launched
                 as
                 soon
                 as
                 they
                 are
                 finished
                 .
                 There
                 is
                 no
                 need
                 of
                 any
                 of
                 the
                 Materials
                 of
                 Europe
                 for
                 the
                 building
                 of
                 'em
                 in
                 those
                 Parts
                 ;
                 but
                 only
                 of
                 Iron
                 for
                 the
                 forging
                 of
                 Nails
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 pieces
                 of
                 Smiths
                 Work
                 necessary
                 to
                 the
                 building
                 of
                 great
                 and
                 small
                 Vessels
                 .
                 All
                 other
                 things
                 are
                 found
                 in
                 this
                 Country
                 in
                 great
                 Plenty
                 :
                 The
                 Inhabitants
                 make
                 Cables
                 of
                 the
                 Bark
                 of
                 Trees
                 ;
                 they
                 have
                 Pitch
                 and
                 Tar
                 as
                 good
                 as
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 had
                 in
                 Europe
                 ;
                 and
                 they
                 have
                 Oil
                 either
                 to
                 render
                 it
                 firm
                 and
                 solid
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 temper
                 its
                 Hardness
                 ;
                 one
                 sort
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 draw
                 from
                 Fish
                 ,
                 and
                 another
                 sort
                 they
                 get
                 from
                 Trees
                 .
                 They
                 make
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 Tow
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 call
                 Ambira
                 ,
                 so
                 good
                 ,
                 that
                 no
                 better
                 can
                 be
                 used
                 for
                 the
                 caulking
                 of
                 Vessels
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 make
                 Musket-Match
                 .
                 Their
                 Cotton
                 abundantly
                 furnishes
                 'em
                 with
                 Stuff
                 to
                 make
                 Sails
                 ,
                 and
                 this
                 grows
                 the
                 best
                 of
                 all
                 
                 the
                 small
                 Seeds
                 they
                 sow
                 in
                 their
                 Fields
                 .
                 And
                 after
                 all
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 so
                 great
                 numbers
                 of
                 People
                 ,
                 that
                 one
                 might
                 have
                 as
                 many
                 Work-men
                 and
                 Sea-men
                 as
                 one
                 pleas'd
                 for
                 the
                 building
                 and
                 manning
                 of
                 as
                 many
                 Galleons
                 as
                 one
                 should
                 think
                 meet
                 to
                 put
                 upon
                 the
                 Stocks
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXXII
                 .
              
               
                 Four
                 things
                 which
                 abound
                 on
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 capable
                 of
                 inriching
                 great
                 Kingdoms
                 .
              
               
                 THere
                 are
                 four
                 things
                 along
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 being
                 well
                 manag'd
                 ,
                 would
                 be
                 capable
                 of
                 enriching
                 many
                 Kingdoms
                 ;
                 the
                 first
                 is
                 Wood
                 for
                 building
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 there
                 is
                 some
                 found
                 of
                 a
                 rare
                 and
                 particular
                 Colour
                 ,
                 like
                 fine
                 Ebony
                 ;
                 and
                 there
                 is
                 so
                 prodigious
                 a
                 quantity
                 of
                 common
                 Wood
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 worth
                 transporting
                 ,
                 that
                 how
                 much
                 soever
                 should
                 be
                 carried
                 away
                 ,
                 the
                 Country
                 can
                 never
                 be
                 exhausted
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 second
                 thing
                 is
                 the
                 Coco-tree
                 ,
                 which
                 serves
                 for
                 the
                 Composition
                 of
                 Chocolat
                 ;
                 with
                 these
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 are
                 covered
                 ,
                 and
                 throughout
                 our
                 whole
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 our
                 Men
                 cut
                 scarce
                 any
                 thing
                 else
                 to
                 make
                 Huts
                 of
                 for
                 our
                 Camp.
                 This
                 Tree
                 is
                 very
                 much
                 esteem'd
                 for
                 its
                 Fruit
                 
                 throughout
                 all
                 
                   New
                   Spain
                
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 all
                 other
                 Places
                 where
                 it
                 is
                 known
                 what
                 Chocolat
                 is
                 .
                 Every
                 Foot
                 of
                 this
                 Tree
                 will
                 produce
                 eight
                 Silver
                 Rials
                 ,
                 all
                 Charges
                 paid
                 .
                 And
                 it
                 may
                 easily
                 be
                 suppos'd
                 there
                 's
                 no
                 need
                 of
                 great
                 labour
                 to
                 cultivate
                 these
                 Trees
                 along
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 seeing
                 Nature
                 ,
                 without
                 the
                 Assistance
                 of
                 Husbandry
                 and
                 Art
                 ,
                 makes
                 'em
                 bring
                 forth
                 Fruit
                 in
                 so
                 great
                 abundance
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 third
                 is
                 Tobacco
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 there
                 is
                 a
                 prodigious
                 quantity
                 along
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 very
                 much
                 esteem'd
                 by
                 all
                 the
                 Natives
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 if
                 it
                 were
                 raised
                 with
                 that
                 Care
                 this
                 Plant
                 requires
                 ,
                 it
                 would
                 be
                 the
                 best
                 Tobacco
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 ;
                 because
                 in
                 the
                 Judgment
                 of
                 those
                 that
                 understand
                 it
                 ,
                 there
                 can't
                 be
                 desired
                 a
                 better
                 Soil
                 and
                 Climat
                 for
                 this
                 sort
                 of
                 Plant
                 ,
                 than
                 what
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 found
                 on
                 this
                 River
                 .
              
               
                 But
                 that
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 most
                 considerable
                 of
                 all
                 ,
                 and
                 for
                 the
                 sake
                 of
                 which
                 in
                 my
                 opinion
                 it
                 would
                 be
                 very
                 well
                 worth
                 the
                 while
                 to
                 make
                 firm
                 and
                 substantial
                 Establishments
                 along
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 is
                 Sugar
                 :
                 This
                 is
                 the
                 fourth
                 thing
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 Traffick
                 of
                 it
                 is
                 more
                 honourable
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 the
                 Profit
                 more
                 sure
                 and
                 greater
                 for
                 a
                 Nation
                 than
                 that
                 of
                 the
                 rest
                 .
                 And
                 now
                 since
                 we
                 are
                 ingag'd
                 in
                 a
                 War
                 with
                 the
                 Dutch
                 ,
                 it
                 ought
                 to
                 excite
                 an
                 Emulation
                 in
                 us
                 ,
                 and
                 make
                 us
                 endeavour
                 to
                 furnish
                 our selves
                 
                 with
                 those
                 Commodities
                 our
                 Enemies
                 bring
                 from
                 Brazil
                 *
                 ;
                 and
                 we
                 ought
                 to
                 establish
                 our selves
                 with
                 all
                 Expedition
                 in
                 this
                 Countrey
                 ,
                 and
                 set
                 up
                 Mills
                 and
                 other
                 Sugar-Works
                 ;
                 which
                 would
                 neither
                 require
                 very
                 much
                 Time
                 ,
                 nor
                 Labour
                 ,
                 nor
                 Charge
                 ,
                 which
                 last
                 is
                 that
                 which
                 is
                 most
                 fear'd
                 now
                 a
                 days
                 .
                 The
                 Ground
                 is
                 as
                 good
                 for
                 the
                 planting
                 of
                 Sugar-Canes
                 ,
                 as
                 any
                 is
                 in
                 the
                 whole
                 Continent
                 of
                 Brazil
                 ;
                 and
                 of
                 this
                 we
                 can
                 give
                 Assurance
                 ,
                 as
                 having
                 seen
                 and
                 known
                 all
                 those
                 Provinces
                 .
                 The
                 Soil
                 on
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 white
                 and
                 fat
                 ,
                 of
                 as
                 good
                 a
                 kind
                 as
                 can
                 be
                 desired
                 by
                 those
                 that
                 know
                 what
                 belongs
                 to
                 the
                 Cultivation
                 of
                 these
                 Plants
                 ;
                 and
                 it
                 becomes
                 so
                 fruitful
                 and
                 rich
                 by
                 the
                 Inundations
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 by
                 continuing
                 a
                 few
                 days
                 improve
                 the
                 Ground
                 ,
                 that
                 there
                 is
                 more
                 reason
                 to
                 fear
                 too
                 great
                 than
                 too
                 little
                 a
                 Crop.
                 'T
                 will
                 be
                 no
                 new
                 thing
                 to
                 make
                 Sugar-Canes
                 grow
                 in
                 this
                 Country
                 ,
                 because
                 we
                 found
                 throughout
                 the
                 whole
                 Length
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 ,
                 such
                 as
                 gave
                 us
                 sufficient
                 Proof
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 abundance
                 to
                 which
                 they
                 might
                 be
                 multiplied
                 
                 whenever
                 any
                 People
                 should
                 apply
                 themselves
                 to
                 cultivate
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 make
                 Sugar-Mills
                 ,
                 which
                 might
                 be
                 done
                 with
                 a
                 little
                 Charge
                 at
                 any
                 time
                 ;
                 not
                 only
                 because
                 there
                 's
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Wood
                 in
                 great
                 plenty
                 ,
                 as
                 I
                 have
                 already
                 said
                 ,
                 but
                 also
                 because
                 there
                 is
                 the
                 Conveniency
                 of
                 Water
                 for
                 'em
                 in
                 as
                 great
                 quantity
                 as
                 one
                 can
                 desire
                 .
                 There
                 is
                 nothing
                 wanting
                 but
                 Copper
                 ,
                 which
                 we
                 may
                 supply
                 in
                 sending
                 it
                 thither
                 from
                 our
                 own
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 we
                 may
                 be
                 sure
                 will
                 turn
                 to
                 a
                 considerable
                 Account
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXXIII
                 .
              
               
                 Many
                 other
                 Commodities
                 profitable
                 for
                 Traffick
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 found
                 in
                 this
                 Country
                 .
              
               
                 BEsides
                 these
                 four
                 sorts
                 of
                 Commodities
                 that
                 may
                 be
                 brought
                 from
                 these
                 Lands
                 that
                 are
                 discover'd
                 ,
                 capable
                 of
                 inriching
                 the
                 whole
                 World
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 also
                 many
                 others
                 ,
                 which
                 altho
                 less
                 rare
                 ,
                 would
                 not
                 fail
                 to
                 bring
                 a
                 considerable
                 Profit
                 to
                 a
                 Nation
                 ;
                 such
                 as
                 Cotton
                 ,
                 that
                 grows
                 there
                 abundantly
                 ,
                 Rocou
                 ,
                 that
                 our
                 Dyers
                 use
                 to
                 make
                 fine
                 Scarlet
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 so
                 esteem'd
                 by
                 all
                 Nations
                 that
                 have
                 Commerce
                 with
                 us
                 ;
                 Cassia
                 ,
                 and
                 Sarsaparilla
                 :
                 there
                 are
                 made
                 also
                 several
                 Oils
                 for
                 the
                 healing
                 of
                 
                 Wounds
                 which
                 equal
                 the
                 best
                 Balsams
                 ;
                 there
                 are
                 found
                 Gums
                 and
                 Rosins
                 of
                 an
                 admirable
                 Scent
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 certain
                 Plant
                 call'd
                 Pita
                 ,
                 which
                 yields
                 the
                 best
                 Thred
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 the
                 Ground
                 produces
                 in
                 vast
                 plenty
                 ;
                 and
                 a
                 thousand
                 other
                 things
                 ,
                 the
                 Usefulness
                 and
                 Advantages
                 of
                 which
                 are
                 discover'd
                 every
                 day
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXXIV
                 .
              
               
                 Convincing
                 Reasons
                 to
                 shew
                 that
                 many
                 of
                 the
                 Mountains
                 of
                 this
                 Countrey
                 must
                 needs
                 contain
                 Mines
                 of
                 Gold
                 and
                 Silver
                 .
              
               
                 I
                 Do
                 not
                 speak
                 of
                 the
                 many
                 Mines
                 of
                 Gold
                 and
                 Silver
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 discover'd
                 in
                 the
                 conquer'd
                 Countries
                 ,
                 nor
                 those
                 which
                 Time
                 may
                 further
                 discover
                 there
                 ;
                 but
                 I
                 am
                 mightily
                 mistaken
                 in
                 my
                 Judgment
                 ,
                 if
                 many
                 others
                 may
                 not
                 be
                 found
                 in
                 this
                 Countrey
                 more
                 rich
                 than
                 all
                 those
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 tho
                 the
                 famous
                 Mountain
                 of
                 Potosi
                 be
                 comprehended
                 in
                 it
                 :
                 I
                 speak
                 not
                 this
                 without
                 ground
                 ,
                 nor
                 only
                 with
                 a
                 design
                 to
                 advance
                 the
                 Value
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 ,
                 but
                 found
                 what
                 I
                 say
                 upon
                 Reason
                 and
                 Experience
                 ;
                 because
                 I
                 have
                 seen
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 Gold
                 among
                 the
                 Indians
                 whom
                 we
                 met
                 as
                 we
                 went
                 down
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 who
                 gave
                 us
                 very
                 certain
                 Assurances
                 ,
                 that
                 there
                 
                 were
                 a
                 great
                 number
                 of
                 Gold
                 and
                 Silver
                 Mines
                 in
                 their
                 Country
                 .
                 This
                 great
                 River
                 receives
                 all
                 the
                 Waters
                 of
                 the
                 richest
                 Countries
                 of
                 America
                 .
                 On
                 the
                 South-side
                 ,
                 those
                 rich
                 Rivers
                 ,
                 some
                 of
                 which
                 have
                 their
                 Sources
                 round
                 about
                 Potosi
                 ,
                 others
                 at
                 the
                 Foot
                 of
                 Guanico
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 a
                 Mountain
                 near
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Lima
                 ,
                 flow
                 into
                 it
                 ;
                 others
                 come
                 down
                 from
                 Cusco
                 ,
                 others
                 from
                 Cuenca
                 ,
                 and
                 from
                 Gibaros
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 richest
                 Country
                 for
                 Gold
                 of
                 any
                 that
                 has
                 been
                 yet
                 discovered
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 on
                 this
                 side
                 all
                 the
                 Rivers
                 ,
                 Sources
                 ,
                 little
                 Springs
                 and
                 Rivulets
                 ,
                 which
                 run
                 into
                 the
                 Sea
                 for
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 600
                 Leagues
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 from
                 Potosi
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 Quito
                 ,
                 render
                 Homage
                 to
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 and
                 pay
                 it
                 Tributes
                 of
                 Gold
                 ;
                 as
                 all
                 the
                 others
                 likewise
                 do
                 that
                 descend
                 from
                 the
                 new
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Granada
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 no
                 less
                 rich
                 in
                 Gold
                 than
                 all
                 the
                 other
                 Provinces
                 of
                 Peru.
                 And
                 seeing
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 the
                 great
                 Channel
                 and
                 principal
                 Passage
                 to
                 all
                 the
                 richest
                 Places
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 one
                 may
                 reasonably
                 be
                 assured
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 the
                 Soveraign
                 Mistress
                 of
                 them
                 all
                 :
                 besides
                 ,
                 if
                 that
                 golden
                 Lake
                 hath
                 all
                 the
                 Gold
                 which
                 the
                 common
                 Report
                 ascribes
                 to
                 it
                 ;
                 if
                 the
                 Amazons
                 inhabit
                 the
                 richest
                 Mountains
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 ,
                 as
                 many
                 that
                 say
                 they
                 have
                 seen
                 'em
                 assure
                 us
                 ;
                 if
                 the
                 Tocantins
                 abound
                 so
                 much
                 in
                 precious
                 
                 Stones
                 and
                 Gold
                 ,
                 as
                 some
                 of
                 the
                 French
                 ,
                 who
                 have
                 travell'd
                 in
                 their
                 Country
                 ,
                 do
                 affirm
                 ;
                 if
                 the
                 Omagnas
                 with
                 the
                 Reputation
                 of
                 their
                 vast
                 Wealth
                 ,
                 were
                 once
                 capable
                 of
                 casting
                 all
                 Peru
                 into
                 confusion
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 forcing
                 the
                 Viceroy
                 to
                 send
                 a
                 great
                 Army
                 under
                 the
                 Conduct
                 of
                 
                   Pedro
                   de
                   Orsua
                
                 to
                 conquer
                 their
                 Country
                 ;
                 all
                 these
                 Places
                 adjoin
                 to
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 :
                 The
                 Golden
                 Lake
                 ,
                 the
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 the
                 Tocantins
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Omagnas
                 are
                 upon
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 as
                 shall
                 be
                 shewn
                 hereafter
                 ;
                 and
                 in
                 fine
                 ,
                 this
                 is
                 the
                 River
                 that
                 seems
                 to
                 be
                 ordain'd
                 by
                 the
                 Hand
                 of
                 God
                 to
                 be
                 the
                 Depository
                 of
                 those
                 immense
                 Treasures
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Divine
                 Providence
                 has
                 reserved
                 to
                 inrich
                 the
                 Greatest
                 ,
                 most
                 Valiant
                 ,
                 and
                 happiest
                 Prince
                 upon
                 Earth
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXXV
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 prodigious
                 Extent
                 of
                 the
                 Countries
                 along
                 this
                 River
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 vast
                 Extent
                 of
                 Land
                 along
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 ,
                 is
                 as
                 much
                 as
                 an
                 Empire
                 of
                 4000
                 Leagues
                 in
                 Circuit
                 :
                 I
                 think
                 I
                 am
                 not
                 much
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 way
                 in
                 my
                 Computation
                 ;
                 for
                 if
                 it
                 contains
                 in
                 length
                 1276
                 Leagues
                 exactly
                 measur'd
                 (
                 tho
                 Oreillane
                 ,
                 who
                 first
                 discover'd
                 
                 and
                 past
                 through
                 it
                 ,
                 accounts
                 it
                 1800
                 Leagues
                 )
                 if
                 each
                 River
                 which
                 enters
                 into
                 it
                 either
                 on
                 the
                 North
                 or
                 South-side
                 ,
                 runs
                 above
                 200
                 Leagues
                 in
                 length
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 many
                 places
                 above
                 400
                 ,
                 without
                 approaching
                 any
                 Country
                 that
                 is
                 peopled
                 by
                 the
                 Spaniard
                 on
                 any
                 side
                 ,
                 there
                 being
                 only
                 various
                 Nations
                 of
                 Indians
                 that
                 are
                 yet
                 unknown
                 ,
                 to
                 be
                 found
                 from
                 this
                 River
                 to
                 those
                 Places
                 so
                 far
                 distant
                 ,
                 it
                 must
                 be
                 granted
                 that
                 the
                 breadth
                 of
                 this
                 Empire
                 would
                 contain
                 above
                 400
                 Leagues
                 at
                 least
                 in
                 the
                 narrowest
                 part
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 which
                 with
                 the
                 1126
                 Leagues
                 in
                 length
                 of
                 our
                 Account
                 (
                 or
                 1800
                 Leagues
                 by
                 
                 Oreillane's
                 Computation
                 )
                 makes
                 very
                 little
                 less
                 than
                 4000
                 Leagues
                 in
                 Compass
                 by
                 the
                 Rules
                 of
                 Cosmography
                 and
                 Arithmetick
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXXVI
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 many
                 different
                 Nations
                 which
                 live
                 in
                 those
                 Provinces
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 abov●
                 one
                 hundred
                 and
                 fifty
                 .
              
               
                 ALL
                 the
                 new
                 World
                 (
                 it
                 may
                 well
                 be
                 so
                 call'd
                 )
                 is
                 peopled
                 with
                 Barbarians
                 dispers'd
                 in
                 different
                 Provinces
                 ,
                 who
                 make
                 so
                 many
                 Nations
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 there
                 are
                 more
                 than
                 150
                 ,
                 of
                 whom
                 I
                 can
                 speak
                 with
                 good
                 assurance
                 .
                 I
                 shall
                 give
                 an
                 account
                 
                 of
                 their
                 Names
                 ,
                 and
                 describe
                 the
                 Situation
                 of
                 their
                 Countries
                 ,
                 having
                 seen
                 part
                 of
                 'em
                 my self
                 ,
                 and
                 receiv'd
                 Information
                 of
                 the
                 rest
                 by
                 those
                 Indians
                 that
                 have
                 convers'd
                 with
                 'em
                 ;
                 the
                 diversity
                 of
                 their
                 Language
                 makes
                 the
                 Distinction
                 of
                 those
                 Nations
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 as
                 large
                 and
                 as
                 well
                 peopl'd
                 with
                 Inhabitants
                 as
                 any
                 of
                 those
                 we
                 have
                 seen
                 in
                 our
                 whole
                 Voyage
                 :
                 the
                 Country
                 is
                 so
                 well
                 peopl'd
                 that
                 their
                 Huts
                 are
                 near
                 one
                 another
                 ,
                 and
                 this
                 not
                 only
                 in
                 the
                 extent
                 of
                 one
                 and
                 the
                 same
                 Nation
                 ,
                 but
                 throughout
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 the
                 utmost
                 Plantations
                 of
                 one
                 Nation
                 border
                 so
                 near
                 to
                 those
                 of
                 another
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 can
                 hear
                 one
                 another
                 cutting
                 Wood
                 from
                 the
                 last
                 Village
                 of
                 one
                 Nation
                 into
                 divers
                 Plantations
                 of
                 the
                 other
                 .
                 This
                 near
                 Neighbourhood
                 does
                 not
                 at
                 all
                 serve
                 to
                 keep
                 'em
                 in
                 Amity
                 one
                 with
                 another
                 ,
                 but
                 on
                 the
                 contrary
                 ,
                 they
                 are
                 in
                 continual
                 War
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 daily
                 killing
                 and
                 making
                 Slaves
                 of
                 one
                 another
                 ;
                 this
                 is
                 the
                 ordinary
                 Misfortune
                 of
                 great
                 multitudes
                 ,
                 and
                 if
                 it
                 were
                 not
                 for
                 this
                 ,
                 there
                 would
                 not
                 be
                 Ground
                 enough
                 to
                 contain
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 They
                 appear
                 valiant
                 and
                 resolute
                 among
                 themselves
                 ,
                 but
                 yet
                 we
                 never
                 saw
                 any
                 in
                 our
                 whole
                 Voyage
                 who
                 would
                 stand
                 their
                 ground
                 against
                 our
                 Souldiers
                 ;
                 and
                 none
                 of
                 these
                 Barbarians
                 had
                 so
                 much
                 Boldness
                 as
                 to
                 put
                 themselves
                 in
                 a
                 posture
                 
                 of
                 Defence
                 ,
                 but
                 only
                 made
                 use
                 of
                 that
                 shift
                 which
                 those
                 that
                 are
                 cowardly
                 and
                 faint-hearted
                 have
                 always
                 imbraced
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 to
                 betake
                 themselves
                 to
                 flight
                 ,
                 a
                 thing
                 very
                 easy
                 to
                 them
                 ,
                 because
                 they
                 go
                 upon
                 the
                 Water
                 in
                 certain
                 little
                 Vessels
                 so
                 extremely
                 light
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 make
                 to
                 the
                 shore
                 as
                 swift
                 as
                 Lightning
                 ;
                 and
                 taking
                 these
                 Boats
                 at
                 their
                 Backs
                 ,
                 retire
                 towards
                 some
                 Lake
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 there
                 are
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 made
                 by
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 where
                 putting
                 their
                 Vessels
                 again
                 into
                 the
                 Water
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 are
                 got
                 in
                 'em
                 ,
                 they
                 defy
                 all
                 their
                 Enemies
                 let
                 'em
                 be
                 who
                 they
                 will
                 ,
                 because
                 they
                 can't
                 do
                 the
                 same
                 with
                 any
                 Vessels
                 they
                 can
                 have
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXXVII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Arms
                 which
                 these
                 People
                 use
                 both
                 Offensive
                 and
                 Defensive
                 .
              
               
                 ALL
                 their
                 Arms
                 consist
                 in
                 Javelins
                 of
                 a
                 moderate
                 length
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 Darts
                 made
                 of
                 very
                 hard
                 Wood
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 work
                 to
                 so
                 sharp
                 a
                 Point
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 can
                 easily
                 pierce
                 a
                 Man
                 through
                 with
                 'em
                 ,
                 they
                 throw
                 'em
                 with
                 so
                 much
                 dexterity
                 .
                 They
                 have
                 besides
                 these
                 another
                 sort
                 of
                 Weapon
                 call'd
                 Estolicas
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 using
                 of
                 which
                 the
                 Souldiers
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 Irica
                 King
                 of
                 
                 Peru
                 were
                 very
                 well
                 skill'd
                 ;
                 this
                 is
                 a
                 Staff
                 of
                 about
                 six
                 Foot
                 long
                 ,
                 and
                 three
                 Fingers
                 broad
                 ,
                 made
                 as
                 flat
                 as
                 a
                 Board
                 ;
                 at
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 it
                 on
                 one
                 side
                 they
                 fix
                 a
                 Bone
                 made
                 like
                 a
                 Tooth
                 ,
                 to
                 which
                 they
                 fasten
                 an
                 Arrow
                 of
                 six
                 Foot
                 long
                 ,
                 the
                 Point
                 whereof
                 is
                 likewise
                 headed
                 with
                 a
                 Bone
                 ,
                 or
                 with
                 a
                 very
                 hard
                 piece
                 of
                 Wood
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 cut
                 in
                 the
                 form
                 of
                 a
                 barb'd
                 Arrow-head
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 where
                 it
                 hits
                 ,
                 it
                 remains
                 fast
                 ,
                 and
                 hangs
                 at
                 its
                 whole
                 length
                 :
                 they
                 take
                 it
                 in
                 their
                 Right-hand
                 ,
                 with
                 which
                 they
                 hold
                 this
                 Weapon
                 by
                 the
                 lower
                 end
                 ,
                 and
                 fixing
                 the
                 Arrow
                 in
                 the
                 Bone
                 that
                 is
                 in
                 the
                 upper
                 end
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 they
                 cast
                 it
                 with
                 so
                 much
                 Force
                 and
                 Exactness
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 never
                 miss
                 doing
                 Execution
                 within
                 50
                 Paces
                 .
                 These
                 Weapons
                 serve
                 'em
                 for
                 War
                 ,
                 for
                 Hunting
                 ,
                 and
                 especially
                 for
                 Fishing
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 whatever
                 kind
                 of
                 Fish
                 they
                 can
                 perceive
                 in
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 they
                 shoot
                 it
                 ,
                 let
                 it
                 be
                 never
                 so
                 much
                 cover'd
                 under
                 Water
                 :
                 and
                 that
                 which
                 is
                 yet
                 more
                 to
                 be
                 admir'd
                 is
                 ,
                 that
                 with
                 these
                 Weapons
                 they
                 pierce
                 Tortoises
                 ,
                 when
                 ,
                 after
                 they
                 are
                 run
                 into
                 the
                 River
                 to
                 hide
                 themselves
                 ,
                 they
                 thrust
                 their
                 Heads
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Water
                 to
                 take
                 breath
                 ,
                 as
                 they
                 commonly
                 do
                 from
                 time
                 to
                 time
                 after
                 small
                 Intervals
                 ;
                 they
                 strike
                 'em
                 with
                 this
                 Arrow
                 through
                 the
                 Neck
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 only
                 place
                 in
                 which
                 they
                 can
                 be
                 wounded
                 ,
                 because
                 
                 it
                 is
                 not
                 cover'd
                 with
                 the
                 Shell
                 .
                 For
                 Defensive
                 Weapons
                 they
                 make
                 use
                 of
                 Targets
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 make
                 of
                 Canes
                 split
                 in
                 two
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 they
                 so
                 fitly
                 and
                 closely
                 join
                 one
                 with
                 another
                 ,
                 that
                 tho
                 they
                 are
                 much
                 lighter
                 ,
                 yet
                 they
                 are
                 no
                 less
                 strong
                 than
                 those
                 others
                 which
                 they
                 make
                 of
                 the
                 Skin
                 of
                 the
                 Fish
                 Pegebuey
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 I
                 have
                 spoken
                 before
                 .
                 Some
                 of
                 these
                 Nations
                 make
                 use
                 only
                 of
                 Bows
                 and
                 Arrows
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 esteem'd
                 among
                 all
                 the
                 others
                 for
                 the
                 force
                 and
                 swiftness
                 of
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 There
                 are
                 abundance
                 of
                 venomous
                 Herbs
                 ,
                 with
                 which
                 some
                 of
                 these
                 Nations
                 make
                 so
                 subtile
                 a
                 Poison
                 ,
                 that
                 their
                 Arrows
                 being
                 rub'd
                 with
                 it
                 ,
                 never
                 draw
                 the
                 least
                 Blood
                 without
                 taking
                 away
                 the
                 Life
                 at
                 the
                 same
                 time
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXXVIII
                 .
              
               
                 Their
                 manner
                 of
                 living
                 together
                 .
                 Of
                 their
                 Commerce
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 their
                 making
                 Boats
                 for
                 their
                 Traffick
                 .
              
               
                 ALL
                 the
                 Nations
                 that
                 live
                 on
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 dwell
                 together
                 in
                 great
                 Colonies
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 their
                 Commerce
                 and
                 Traffick
                 is
                 carried
                 on
                 by
                 Water
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 at
                 Venice
                 ,
                 or
                 at
                 Mexico
                 ,
                 in
                 little
                 Barks
                 which
                 they
                 call
                 Canoos
                 ;
                 these
                 they
                 make
                 with
                 Cedar-wood
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Providence
                 of
                 
                 God
                 provides
                 these
                 for
                 'em
                 in
                 such
                 abundance
                 ,
                 that
                 without
                 their
                 being
                 at
                 the
                 trouble
                 of
                 cutting
                 'em
                 down
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 drawing
                 'em
                 from
                 the
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 they
                 are
                 sent
                 to
                 'em
                 with
                 the
                 Current
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 to
                 supply
                 the
                 Necessities
                 of
                 these
                 People
                 ,
                 tears
                 up
                 Cedars
                 for
                 'em
                 from
                 the
                 highest
                 Mountains
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 and
                 brings
                 'em
                 down
                 to
                 the
                 foot
                 of
                 their
                 Cottages
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 may
                 every
                 one
                 chuse
                 which
                 they
                 think
                 most
                 fit
                 for
                 their
                 purpose
                 :
                 but
                 the
                 wonder
                 is
                 ,
                 that
                 among
                 so
                 great
                 number
                 of
                 Indians
                 ,
                 every
                 one
                 of
                 whom
                 has
                 need
                 of
                 one
                 or
                 two
                 of
                 these
                 Trunks
                 of
                 Trees
                 for
                 the
                 Service
                 of
                 his
                 Family
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 Canoo
                 or
                 two
                 (
                 for
                 indeed
                 they
                 all
                 have
                 of
                 'em
                 )
                 there
                 's
                 none
                 of
                 'em
                 has
                 any
                 more
                 trouble
                 to
                 procure
                 'em
                 ,
                 than
                 that
                 of
                 going
                 to
                 the
                 River
                 side
                 ,
                 and
                 tying
                 a
                 Cord
                 to
                 the
                 first
                 Tree
                 that
                 floats
                 along
                 ,
                 and
                 bringing
                 it
                 over
                 against
                 his
                 Hut
                 ,
                 where
                 he
                 stops
                 it
                 till
                 the
                 River
                 retires
                 ;
                 and
                 as
                 soon
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 dry
                 ,
                 they
                 with
                 the
                 same
                 Industry
                 apply
                 themselves
                 to
                 hollow
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 make
                 such
                 Canoos
                 of
                 them
                 as
                 they
                 want
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 XXXIX
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Tools
                 which
                 they
                 use
                 to
                 cut
                 and
                 cleave
                 Wood
                 ,
                 to
                 plain
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 make
                 their
                 Houshold
                 Stuff
                 .
              
               
                 ALL
                 the
                 Tools
                 which
                 they
                 have
                 either
                 to
                 make
                 their
                 Canoos
                 ,
                 to
                 build
                 their
                 Huts
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 do
                 other
                 necessary
                 Jobs
                 ,
                 are
                 Axes
                 and
                 Hatchets
                 ,
                 not
                 such
                 as
                 have
                 been
                 forg'd
                 by
                 ingenious
                 Smiths
                 ,
                 but
                 such
                 as
                 have
                 been
                 form'd
                 in
                 their
                 Fancies
                 by
                 Necessity
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 Mother
                 of
                 Invention
                 ,
                 and
                 has
                 taught
                 'em
                 to
                 cut
                 the
                 hardest
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 Tortoise-shell
                 (
                 which
                 is
                 that
                 under
                 the
                 Belly
                 of
                 it
                 )
                 into
                 Leaves
                 of
                 about
                 a
                 hand's-breadth
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 quite
                 so
                 thick
                 as
                 ones
                 Hand
                 .
                 After
                 having
                 dry'd
                 it
                 in
                 the
                 Smoak
                 ,
                 they
                 whet
                 it
                 upon
                 a
                 Stone
                 ,
                 then
                 fasten
                 it
                 to
                 a
                 wooden
                 Helve
                 ,
                 and
                 make
                 use
                 of
                 this
                 Tool
                 to
                 cut
                 every
                 thing
                 they
                 fancy
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 if
                 it
                 were
                 the
                 best
                 Ax
                 that
                 can
                 be
                 ,
                 but
                 with
                 a
                 little
                 more
                 pains
                 .
                 They
                 make
                 their
                 Hatchets
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 matter
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Handle
                 they
                 put
                 to
                 'em
                 is
                 a
                 
                 Pegebeuy's
                 Jaw-bone
                 ,
                 which
                 Nature
                 seems
                 to
                 have
                 purposely
                 fitted
                 to
                 this
                 use
                 .
                 With
                 these
                 Instruments
                 they
                 finish
                 all
                 their
                 Works
                 ,
                 not
                 only
                 their
                 Canoos
                 ,
                 but
                 their
                 Tables
                 ,
                 their
                 Cupboards
                 ,
                 their
                 Seats
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 other
                 Houshold
                 Goods
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 as
                 
                 compleatly
                 as
                 if
                 they
                 had
                 the
                 best
                 Joiners
                 Tools
                 that
                 are
                 in
                 use
                 among
                 us
                 .
                 There
                 are
                 some
                 among
                 these
                 Nations
                 who
                 make
                 their
                 Axes
                 of
                 Stones
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 grind
                 to
                 an
                 Edg
                 with
                 main
                 Strength
                 ;
                 these
                 are
                 much
                 stronger
                 than
                 those
                 of
                 Tortoise-shell
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 they
                 will
                 cut
                 down
                 any
                 great
                 Tree
                 which
                 they
                 have
                 a
                 mind
                 to
                 fell
                 ,
                 with
                 the
                 less
                 fear
                 of
                 breaking
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 much
                 more
                 speed
                 .
                 Their
                 Chizzels
                 ,
                 Plains
                 and
                 Wimbles
                 ,
                 which
                 we
                 use
                 for
                 the
                 finest
                 Works
                 of
                 Joinery
                 (
                 in
                 which
                 they
                 work
                 excellently
                 well
                 )
                 are
                 made
                 of
                 wild
                 Hogs
                 Teeth
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 Horns
                 of
                 other
                 Animals
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 graft
                 in
                 to
                 Wooden
                 Handles
                 ,
                 and
                 make
                 use
                 of
                 'em
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 we
                 can
                 do
                 of
                 the
                 best
                 that
                 are
                 made
                 of
                 Steel
                 .
              
               
                 Almost
                 all
                 these
                 Provinces
                 produce
                 Cotton
                 more
                 or
                 less
                 ,
                 but
                 the
                 greater
                 part
                 of
                 'em
                 make
                 no
                 use
                 of
                 it
                 for
                 Clothing
                 ,
                 but
                 on
                 the
                 contrary
                 ,
                 the
                 most
                 of
                 'em
                 go
                 stark
                 naked
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 Men
                 as
                 Women
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 no
                 more
                 asham'd
                 of
                 appearing
                 so
                 than
                 if
                 they
                 were
                 in
                 the
                 primitive
                 State
                 of
                 Innocency
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 XL.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 Religion
                 of
                 these
                 People
                 ,
                 and
                 what
                 they
                 believe
                 concerning
                 their
                 Idols
                 .
                 The
                 Discourse
                 of
                 a
                 Cacique
                 on
                 this
                 Subject
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 Religion
                 of
                 these
                 barbarous
                 People
                 is
                 much
                 alike
                 ,
                 they
                 all
                 worship
                 Idols
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 make
                 with
                 their
                 own
                 Hands
                 ;
                 to
                 one
                 of
                 them
                 they
                 ascribe
                 the
                 Authority
                 of
                 governing
                 the
                 Waters
                 ,
                 and
                 put
                 a
                 Fish
                 in
                 his
                 Hand
                 in
                 token
                 of
                 his
                 Power
                 ;
                 they
                 chuse
                 others
                 to
                 preside
                 over
                 their
                 Seed-time
                 ,
                 and
                 others
                 to
                 inspire
                 'em
                 with
                 Courage
                 in
                 their
                 Battels
                 ;
                 they
                 say
                 these
                 Gods
                 came
                 down
                 from
                 Heaven
                 on
                 purpose
                 to
                 dwell
                 with
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 shew
                 them
                 Kindness
                 .
                 They
                 don't
                 signify
                 their
                 Adoration
                 of
                 these
                 Idols
                 by
                 any
                 outward
                 Ceremonies
                 ,
                 but
                 on
                 the
                 contray
                 ,
                 seem
                 to
                 have
                 forgotten
                 'em
                 as
                 soon
                 as
                 they
                 have
                 made
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 putting
                 them
                 in
                 a
                 Case
                 let
                 'em
                 lie
                 ,
                 without
                 taking
                 any
                 notice
                 of
                 'em
                 so
                 long
                 as
                 they
                 imagine
                 they
                 have
                 no
                 occasion
                 for
                 their
                 Help
                 ;
                 but
                 when
                 they
                 are
                 ready
                 to
                 march
                 out
                 to
                 War
                 ,
                 they
                 set
                 up
                 the
                 Idol
                 in
                 which
                 they
                 have
                 plac'd
                 the
                 hopes
                 of
                 their
                 Victories
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 Prow
                 of
                 their
                 Canoos
                 :
                 so
                 when
                 they
                 go
                 a
                 fishing
                 ,
                 they
                 take
                 that
                 Idol
                 with
                 'em
                 to
                 which
                 they
                 attribute
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 the
                 Waters
                 ;
                 
                 yet
                 they
                 have
                 not
                 so
                 much
                 Faith
                 in
                 any
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 but
                 that
                 they
                 freely
                 acknowledg
                 that
                 there
                 may
                 possibly
                 be
                 a
                 God
                 who
                 is
                 greater
                 and
                 more
                 powerful
                 than
                 these
                 .
                 I
                 made
                 this
                 Judgment
                 upon
                 what
                 pass'd
                 between
                 us
                 and
                 one
                 of
                 these
                 Savage
                 People
                 ,
                 who
                 yet
                 shew'd
                 nothing
                 in
                 his
                 Conversation
                 that
                 savour'd
                 of
                 a
                 barbarous
                 Education
                 :
                 This
                 Indian
                 had
                 heard
                 some
                 of
                 our
                 Men
                 speak
                 of
                 the
                 Almighty
                 Power
                 of
                 God
                 ;
                 and
                 considering
                 what
                 he
                 had
                 seen
                 with
                 his
                 own
                 Eyes
                 ,
                 that
                 our
                 Army
                 had
                 navigated
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 throughout
                 its
                 whole
                 Course
                 ,
                 and
                 after
                 having
                 pass'd
                 through
                 so
                 many
                 different
                 Warlike
                 Nations
                 ,
                 was
                 return'd
                 without
                 having
                 receiv'd
                 the
                 least
                 Damage
                 or
                 Prejudice
                 from
                 any
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 he
                 thought
                 this
                 could
                 not
                 be
                 ,
                 unless
                 the
                 Assistance
                 and
                 Power
                 of
                 God
                 had
                 conducted
                 us
                 :
                 upon
                 this
                 Imagination
                 he
                 came
                 to
                 meet
                 us
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 Concern
                 and
                 disquiet
                 of
                 Mind
                 signified
                 to
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 for
                 all
                 the
                 kind
                 Entertainment
                 he
                 had
                 given
                 us
                 ,
                 he
                 desir'd
                 no
                 other
                 Recompence
                 but
                 that
                 we
                 would
                 leave
                 him
                 one
                 of
                 our
                 Gods
                 ,
                 seeing
                 they
                 were
                 so
                 good
                 and
                 powerful
                 ,
                 that
                 so
                 he
                 might
                 take
                 him
                 and
                 his
                 Vassals
                 into
                 his
                 Protection
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 might
                 make
                 'em
                 live
                 in
                 Peace
                 and
                 Health
                 ,
                 and
                 continually
                 give
                 'em
                 whatever
                 they
                 stood
                 in
                 need
                 of
                 for
                 their
                 Preservation
                 .
                 Our
                 Men
                 
                 did
                 not
                 fail
                 to
                 promise
                 him
                 whatever
                 he
                 desir'd
                 ,
                 and
                 would
                 fain
                 have
                 set
                 up
                 the
                 Standard
                 of
                 the
                 Cross
                 in
                 his
                 Village
                 for
                 a
                 certain
                 Mark.
                 This
                 is
                 a
                 Custom
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 have
                 introduc'd
                 throughout
                 all
                 places
                 where
                 Idols
                 are
                 worship'd
                 ;
                 I
                 know
                 not
                 whether
                 they
                 do
                 it
                 from
                 a
                 true
                 Principle
                 of
                 Zeal
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Action
                 it self
                 seems
                 to
                 signify
                 ,
                 for
                 there
                 is
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 reason
                 to
                 doubt
                 that
                 they
                 set
                 up
                 the
                 sacred
                 Sign
                 of
                 the
                 Cross
                 only
                 for
                 a
                 specious
                 Pretext
                 to
                 make
                 Slaves
                 of
                 the
                 poor
                 Indians
                 ,
                 whom
                 they
                 carry
                 away
                 from
                 their
                 very
                 Houses
                 ,
                 either
                 for
                 their
                 own
                 Service
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 sell
                 'em
                 to
                 others
                 ;
                 which
                 gave
                 me
                 an
                 extreme
                 Compassion
                 for
                 these
                 People
                 who
                 don
                 't
                 seem
                 unteachable
                 ,
                 and
                 might
                 be
                 more
                 easily
                 brought
                 to
                 the
                 Knowledg
                 of
                 the
                 true
                 God
                 by
                 a
                 courteous
                 and
                 gentle
                 Carriage
                 ,
                 than
                 by
                 all
                 the
                 Rigor
                 that
                 can
                 be
                 us'd
                 upon
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 What
                 I
                 have
                 said
                 is
                 certainly
                 true
                 ,
                 that
                 when
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 have
                 been
                 kindly
                 receiv'd
                 and
                 well
                 treated
                 by
                 these
                 honest
                 and
                 charitable
                 Indians
                 ,
                 they
                 in
                 return
                 to
                 all
                 their
                 Hospitality
                 only
                 leave
                 'em
                 the
                 Sign
                 of
                 the
                 Cross
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 set
                 up
                 in
                 the
                 most
                 eminent
                 place
                 of
                 their
                 Habitations
                 ,
                 commanding
                 'em
                 to
                 keep
                 this
                 holy
                 Sign
                 with
                 so
                 great
                 Care
                 that
                 it
                 may
                 never
                 be
                 defac'd
                 ;
                 and
                 after
                 this
                 when
                 this
                 Cross
                 happens
                 either
                 to
                 be
                 thrown
                 down
                 by
                 the
                 
                 Injuries
                 of
                 the
                 Weather
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 be
                 worn
                 out
                 ,
                 or
                 it
                 may
                 be
                 to
                 be
                 maliciously
                 broken
                 in
                 pieces
                 by
                 some
                 of
                 those
                 Idolatrous
                 Indians
                 who
                 bear
                 no
                 respect
                 to
                 it
                 ,
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 never
                 fail
                 to
                 condemn
                 'em
                 all
                 as
                 guilty
                 of
                 the
                 Profanation
                 of
                 the
                 Cross
                 ,
                 and
                 as
                 such
                 ,
                 declare
                 both
                 them
                 and
                 all
                 their
                 Children
                 and
                 Childrens
                 Children
                 perpetual
                 Slaves
                 .
                 This
                 was
                 the
                 main
                 reason
                 that
                 ingag'd
                 me
                 to
                 forbid
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 to
                 leave
                 the
                 Cross
                 among
                 these
                 People
                 ;
                 besides
                 ,
                 I
                 was
                 not
                 willing
                 that
                 this
                 Cacique
                 that
                 had
                 ask'd
                 us
                 for
                 a
                 God
                 ,
                 should
                 have
                 any
                 occasion
                 to
                 believe
                 that
                 our
                 God
                 was
                 a
                 piece
                 of
                 Wood
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 this
                 had
                 the
                 Power
                 and
                 Divinity
                 of
                 him
                 that
                 sav'd
                 us
                 on
                 the
                 Cross
                 ,
                 for
                 fear
                 of
                 confirming
                 him
                 in
                 Idolatry
                 .
                 I
                 therefore
                 comforted
                 him
                 the
                 best
                 I
                 could
                 ,
                 and
                 told
                 him
                 the
                 God
                 we
                 worship'd
                 would
                 be
                 always
                 with
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 advis'd
                 him
                 to
                 pray
                 to
                 him
                 for
                 whatever
                 he
                 wanted
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 put
                 his
                 Trust
                 intirely
                 in
                 him
                 ,
                 telling
                 him
                 I
                 believ'd
                 he
                 would
                 one
                 day
                 favour
                 him
                 with
                 the
                 Knowledg
                 of
                 the
                 true
                 Religion
                 .
                 By
                 this
                 it
                 appears
                 that
                 this
                 Indian
                 did
                 not
                 believe
                 his
                 Idols
                 were
                 powerful
                 Gods
                 ,
                 seeing
                 he
                 was
                 so
                 ready
                 to
                 forsake
                 'em
                 to
                 worship
                 a
                 greater
                 Deity
                 ,
                 if
                 we
                 would
                 have
                 given
                 him
                 one
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 XLI
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Discourses
                 of
                 two
                 other
                 Caciques
                 ,
                 which
                 shew
                 the
                 Capacity
                 of
                 those
                 Peoples
                 Minds
                 .
              
               
                 ANother
                 of
                 these
                 Barbarians
                 gave
                 us
                 to
                 understand
                 that
                 his
                 Sentiments
                 were
                 not
                 different
                 from
                 those
                 of
                 the
                 former
                 which
                 we
                 have
                 been
                 relating
                 .
                 This
                 Indian
                 who
                 had
                 more
                 Knowledg
                 ,
                 but
                 less
                 Honesty
                 than
                 the
                 other
                 ,
                 knowing
                 that
                 there
                 was
                 no
                 Divinity
                 ,
                 nor
                 any
                 Power
                 in
                 his
                 Idols
                 ,
                 set
                 up
                 himself
                 for
                 the
                 God
                 of
                 all
                 his
                 Country
                 .
                 We
                 receiv'd
                 Information
                 of
                 this
                 some
                 Leagues
                 before
                 we
                 arriv'd
                 at
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 he
                 dwelt
                 ,
                 and
                 sent
                 him
                 word
                 that
                 we
                 were
                 coming
                 to
                 bring
                 him
                 Tidings
                 of
                 the
                 true
                 God
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 much
                 more
                 powerful
                 than
                 he
                 could
                 pretend
                 to
                 be
                 ,
                 and
                 entreated
                 him
                 not
                 to
                 retire
                 from
                 his
                 House
                 ,
                 but
                 to
                 wait
                 for
                 our
                 Arrival
                 .
                 He
                 did
                 so
                 ,
                 and
                 we
                 had
                 scarce
                 set
                 our
                 Feet
                 to
                 Land
                 on
                 the
                 shore
                 of
                 this
                 Country
                 ,
                 but
                 he
                 came
                 to
                 us
                 big
                 with
                 Curiosity
                 to
                 enquire
                 what
                 News
                 we
                 could
                 tell
                 him
                 of
                 that
                 God
                 ,
                 about
                 whom
                 we
                 had
                 sent
                 such
                 a
                 Message
                 to
                 him
                 .
                 I
                 held
                 a
                 long
                 Discourse
                 with
                 him
                 ,
                 to
                 inform
                 him
                 what
                 God
                 was
                 ;
                 but
                 because
                 he
                 would
                 needs
                 see
                 with
                 his
                 own
                 Eyes
                 the
                 God
                 that
                 I
                 preach'd
                 to
                 him
                 ,
                 I
                 was
                 forc'd
                 to
                 leave
                 him
                 in
                 his
                 own
                 Blindness
                 :
                 He
                 told
                 
                 me
                 himself
                 was
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 begotten
                 by
                 the
                 Sun
                 ;
                 affirming
                 that
                 his
                 Soul
                 went
                 every
                 Night
                 into
                 Heaven
                 to
                 give
                 Orders
                 for
                 the
                 succeeding
                 Day
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 regulate
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 the
                 Universe
                 ;
                 such
                 was
                 the
                 Insolence
                 and
                 Pride
                 of
                 this
                 Savage
                 Creature
                 .
              
               
                 Another
                 of
                 'em
                 shew'd
                 himself
                 much
                 more
                 reasonable
                 ;
                 for
                 when
                 I
                 was
                 enquiring
                 of
                 him
                 how
                 it
                 came
                 to
                 pass
                 ,
                 that
                 seeing
                 his
                 Companions
                 retir'd
                 into
                 the
                 Mountains
                 at
                 the
                 approach
                 of
                 our
                 Fleet
                 ,
                 he
                 alone
                 with
                 a
                 few
                 of
                 his
                 Relations
                 durst
                 come
                 near
                 us
                 ,
                 and
                 expose
                 themselves
                 to
                 lie
                 at
                 our
                 Mercy
                 without
                 fear
                 .
                 He
                 answer'd
                 that
                 he
                 had
                 consider'd
                 that
                 such
                 Men
                 as
                 had
                 once
                 got
                 up
                 that
                 River
                 in
                 spight
                 of
                 so
                 many
                 Enemies
                 ,
                 and
                 were
                 return'd
                 in
                 like
                 manner
                 without
                 receiving
                 any
                 harm
                 ,
                 could
                 be
                 no
                 less
                 than
                 the
                 Lords
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 would
                 be
                 sure
                 frequently
                 to
                 return
                 to
                 bring
                 it
                 into
                 Subjection
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 people
                 it
                 with
                 new
                 Inhabitants
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 case
                 being
                 thus
                 ,
                 he
                 was
                 not
                 willing
                 to
                 live
                 always
                 in
                 fear
                 and
                 dread
                 in
                 his
                 House
                 ,
                 but
                 chose
                 rather
                 to
                 render
                 himself
                 to
                 'em
                 in
                 time
                 ,
                 and
                 willingly
                 to
                 acknowledg
                 them
                 for
                 his
                 Masters
                 and
                 Friends
                 ,
                 whom
                 the
                 others
                 would
                 one
                 day
                 be
                 constrain'd
                 to
                 receive
                 and
                 serve
                 by
                 Force
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 XLII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Veneration
                 they
                 have
                 for
                 their
                 Wizards
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Ceremonies
                 of
                 their
                 Funerals
                 .
              
               
                 LET
                 us
                 now
                 resume
                 the
                 Thred
                 of
                 our
                 History
                 ,
                 and
                 return
                 to
                 the
                 Customs
                 of
                 our
                 Indians
                 .
                 'T
                 is
                 very
                 remarkable
                 how
                 much
                 Esteem
                 ▪
                 and
                 Respect
                 all
                 these
                 Nations
                 bear
                 to
                 those
                 Wizards
                 they
                 have
                 among
                 'em
                 ,
                 which
                 proceeds
                 not
                 so
                 much
                 from
                 the
                 Love
                 they
                 have
                 for
                 'em
                 ,
                 as
                 from
                 the
                 continual
                 Fear
                 they
                 live
                 in
                 of
                 receiving
                 some
                 Mischief
                 or
                 other
                 from
                 their
                 Hands
                 .
                 There
                 is
                 a
                 certain
                 House
                 devoted
                 to
                 the
                 use
                 of
                 these
                 Sorcerers
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 they
                 perform
                 their
                 superstitious
                 Exercises
                 ,
                 and
                 converse
                 with
                 the
                 Devil
                 ,
                 (
                 a
                 very
                 common
                 thing
                 with
                 'em
                 in
                 this
                 Place
                 )
                 which
                 serves
                 for
                 no
                 other
                 purpose
                 .
                 They
                 also
                 keep
                 the
                 dead
                 Bones
                 of
                 these
                 Sorcerers
                 with
                 as
                 much
                 Veneration
                 as
                 if
                 they
                 were
                 the
                 Reliques
                 of
                 Saints
                 :
                 when
                 they
                 have
                 put
                 their
                 Bones
                 altogether
                 ,
                 they
                 hang
                 'em
                 in
                 the
                 Air
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 Cotton
                 Beds
                 those
                 Wizards
                 us'd
                 to
                 lie
                 in
                 while
                 alive
                 .
                 These
                 are
                 their
                 Masters
                 ,
                 their
                 Preachers
                 ,
                 their
                 Counsellors
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 Guides
                 :
                 They
                 have
                 recourse
                 to
                 them
                 in
                 their
                 Doubts
                 to
                 obtain
                 the
                 Resolution
                 of
                 'em
                 ;
                 and
                 when
                 
                 they
                 are
                 in
                 the
                 greatest
                 Rage
                 against
                 their
                 Enemies
                 ,
                 they
                 apply
                 themselves
                 to
                 these
                 Conjurers
                 for
                 poisonous
                 Herbs
                 ,
                 by
                 which
                 they
                 execute
                 their
                 Revenge
                 upon
                 '
                 em
                 .
              
               
                 For
                 the
                 Burial
                 of
                 their
                 Dead
                 there
                 are
                 different
                 Ceremonies
                 among
                 'em
                 ;
                 for
                 some
                 keep
                 'em
                 in
                 their
                 own
                 Houses
                 ,
                 that
                 by
                 having
                 'em
                 always
                 before
                 their
                 Eyes
                 ,
                 they
                 may
                 (
                 as
                 they
                 pretend
                 )
                 on
                 all
                 Occasions
                 be
                 put
                 in
                 mind
                 of
                 Death
                 :
                 But
                 certainly
                 if
                 they
                 did
                 it
                 for
                 this
                 intention
                 ,
                 one
                 would
                 think
                 they
                 should
                 keep
                 the
                 Remains
                 of
                 their
                 Dead
                 in
                 better
                 order
                 than
                 they
                 do
                 .
                 Others
                 burn
                 their
                 Carcases
                 in
                 great
                 Pits
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 them
                 all
                 the
                 deceased
                 Party
                 possess'd
                 when
                 alive
                 :
                 But
                 in
                 short
                 ,
                 they
                 all
                 ,
                 one
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 another
                 ,
                 celebrate
                 their
                 Funerals
                 for
                 many
                 Days
                 together
                 ,
                 with
                 continual
                 Mourning
                 and
                 Weeping
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 only
                 interrupt
                 with
                 Drinking
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 they
                 do
                 even
                 to
                 the
                 Excess
                 of
                 Drunkenness
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XLIII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Constitution
                 of
                 their
                 Bodies
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Disposition
                 of
                 their
                 Minds
                 ;
                 their
                 Dexterity
                 ,
                 Manners
                 ,
                 and
                 Inclinations
                 .
              
               
                 IT
                 may
                 be
                 said
                 in
                 general
                 ,
                 that
                 all
                 these
                 People
                 are
                 well
                 made
                 ;
                 they
                 have
                 an
                 
                 agreeable
                 Air
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 Complexion
                 much
                 less
                 tauny
                 than
                 that
                 of
                 the
                 Brazilians
                 ;
                 they
                 have
                 a
                 ready
                 Wit
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 Dexterity
                 in
                 the
                 Exercise
                 of
                 their
                 Weapons
                 ;
                 their
                 Conversation
                 is
                 sweet
                 and
                 peaceable
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 Inclinations
                 very
                 agreeable
                 .
                 We
                 had
                 sufficient
                 Opportunity
                 of
                 knowing
                 this
                 by
                 the
                 Commerce
                 we
                 had
                 with
                 many
                 of
                 them
                 :
                 For
                 they
                 presently
                 had
                 such
                 a
                 good
                 Opinion
                 of
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 did
                 not
                 make
                 the
                 least
                 difficulty
                 of
                 trusting
                 their
                 Lives
                 and
                 all
                 they
                 had
                 besides
                 in
                 our
                 Hands
                 .
                 Some
                 of
                 them
                 continued
                 with
                 us
                 a
                 considerable
                 time
                 ,
                 eating
                 and
                 drinking
                 with
                 our
                 Men
                 without
                 shewing
                 the
                 least
                 Suspicion
                 or
                 Apprehension
                 of
                 Danger
                 :
                 Nay
                 they
                 had
                 the
                 Civility
                 to
                 give
                 us
                 their
                 Huts
                 to
                 lodg
                 in
                 ,
                 while
                 several
                 of
                 their
                 Families
                 crowded
                 themselves
                 in
                 one
                 or
                 two
                 ,
                 that
                 we
                 might
                 have
                 the
                 Accommodation
                 of
                 the
                 rest
                 .
                 The
                 Indians
                 we
                 had
                 with
                 us
                 offer'd
                 'em
                 a
                 thousand
                 insolent
                 Affronts
                 ,
                 and
                 we
                 could
                 not
                 possibly
                 hinder
                 'em
                 from
                 insulting
                 over
                 'em
                 ;
                 but
                 they
                 patiently
                 bore
                 all
                 ,
                 and
                 without
                 the
                 least
                 Resentment
                 .
                 All
                 this
                 ,
                 together
                 with
                 the
                 slender
                 Veneration
                 they
                 seem
                 to
                 have
                 for
                 their
                 Idols
                 ,
                 give
                 us
                 great
                 ground
                 to
                 hope
                 ,
                 that
                 if
                 ever
                 the
                 Knowledg
                 of
                 the
                 true
                 God
                 of
                 Heaven
                 and
                 Earth
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Doctrine
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 should
                 be
                 preach'd
                 
                 to
                 'em
                 ,
                 there
                 will
                 be
                 a
                 great
                 prospect
                 of
                 their
                 becoming
                 good
                 Christians
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XLIV
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 principal
                 Mouths
                 by
                 which
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 empties
                 it self
                 into
                 the
                 Sea
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 chief
                 Rivers
                 of
                 Peru
                 that
                 run
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 WE
                 have
                 hitherto
                 treated
                 in
                 general
                 of
                 this
                 Noble
                 and
                 Famous
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ;
                 now
                 't
                 is
                 but
                 reasonable
                 we
                 should
                 enter
                 upon
                 the
                 Detail
                 of
                 our
                 Account
                 ,
                 and
                 speak
                 particularly
                 of
                 its
                 Sources
                 and
                 Passages
                 :
                 I
                 shall
                 therefore
                 give
                 a
                 Relation
                 of
                 its
                 Ports
                 ,
                 and
                 distinctly
                 observe
                 all
                 the
                 Rivers
                 that
                 seed
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 maintain
                 its
                 prodigious
                 Greatness
                 .
                 I
                 shall
                 even
                 advance
                 into
                 all
                 the
                 Countries
                 it
                 waters
                 :
                 I
                 shall
                 make
                 observation
                 of
                 its
                 Depths
                 in
                 several
                 Parts
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 particular
                 Inclinations
                 of
                 the
                 many
                 sorts
                 of
                 People
                 it
                 maintains
                 .
                 I
                 design
                 to
                 omit
                 nothing
                 that
                 's
                 worthy
                 of
                 notice
                 ,
                 because
                 I
                 have
                 been
                 an
                 Eye-witness
                 of
                 it
                 ;
                 and
                 having
                 been
                 sent
                 by
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 greatest
                 Monarchs
                 in
                 Christendom
                 ,
                 on
                 purpose
                 to
                 make
                 accurate
                 Observations
                 on
                 every
                 thing
                 upon
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 ,
                 it
                 may
                 be
                 I
                 am
                 more
                 capable
                 than
                 another
                 to
                 give
                 an
                 account
                 of
                 
                 what
                 was
                 given
                 me
                 in
                 charge
                 .
                 I
                 shall
                 say
                 nothing
                 of
                 the
                 principal
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 into
                 the
                 Ocean
                 on
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 Para
                 ;
                 for
                 it
                 has
                 long
                 since
                 been
                 known
                 by
                 all
                 that
                 sail
                 into
                 America
                 ;
                 it
                 is
                 well
                 known
                 that
                 it
                 lies
                 under
                 the
                 Line
                 at
                 the
                 utmost
                 Confines
                 of
                 Brazil
                 :
                 Nor
                 shall
                 I
                 say
                 any
                 thing
                 of
                 that
                 Mouth
                 of
                 our
                 River
                 by
                 which
                 the
                 Tyrant
                 
                   Lopez
                   Daguyrre
                
                 invaded
                 the
                 Island
                 of
                 
                   La
                   Trinidada
                
                 ;
                 because
                 I
                 never
                 saw
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 those
                 that
                 have
                 been
                 there
                 have
                 told
                 me
                 there
                 is
                 no
                 direct
                 Entrance
                 into
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 by
                 the
                 Mouth
                 ,
                 it
                 being
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 another
                 River
                 that
                 has
                 Communication
                 with
                 the
                 Amazone
                 by
                 several
                 Arms
                 ,
                 which
                 from
                 one
                 space
                 to
                 another
                 extend
                 themselves
                 far
                 from
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 enter
                 into
                 the
                 Sea
                 with
                 this
                 other
                 River
                 .
                 My
                 Intention
                 is
                 only
                 to
                 give
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 the
                 conquer'd
                 Countries
                 of
                 Peru
                 an
                 account
                 of
                 the
                 Passages
                 they
                 have
                 to
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 or
                 rather
                 of
                 the
                 Rivers
                 of
                 each
                 Province
                 that
                 empty
                 themselves
                 into
                 it
                 .
                 I
                 have
                 already
                 said
                 ,
                 that
                 as
                 we
                 came
                 down
                 it
                 we
                 saw
                 its
                 Banks
                 open'd
                 by
                 many
                 Rivers
                 and
                 Rivulets
                 both
                 on
                 the
                 South
                 and
                 North
                 sides
                 :
                 Therefore
                 if
                 any
                 embark
                 on
                 these
                 Rivers
                 ,
                 they
                 must
                 necessarily
                 fall
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
                 But
                 because
                 't
                 is
                 not
                 certainly
                 known
                 from
                 what
                 Provinces
                 they
                 draw
                 their
                 Original
                 ,
                 and
                 upon
                 
                 what
                 Towns
                 their
                 Sources
                 border
                 ;
                 and
                 because
                 't
                 is
                 yet
                 less
                 known
                 in
                 those
                 places
                 whence
                 they
                 spring
                 ,
                 whether
                 they
                 fall
                 into
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 or
                 no
                 ,
                 I
                 shall
                 endeavour
                 to
                 remove
                 these
                 Doubts
                 ,
                 and
                 shall
                 treat
                 of
                 eight
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 which
                 I
                 have
                 taken
                 particular
                 notice
                 of
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 that
                 know
                 these
                 Provinces
                 will
                 confirm
                 the
                 Report
                 I
                 give
                 .
                 Three
                 of
                 'em
                 pass
                 from
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 and
                 go
                 down
                 toward
                 the
                 new
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Granada
                 :
                 Four
                 others
                 we
                 saw
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 ;
                 and
                 there
                 's
                 another
                 ,
                 which
                 runs
                 under
                 the
                 Equinoctial
                 Line
                 ,
                 and
                 at
                 length
                 empties
                 it self
                 into
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XLV
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Rivers
                 of
                 Caqueta
                 ,
                 Putomayo
                 ,
                 and
                 Aguarcio
                 ,
                 which
                 come
                 from
                 the
                 new
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Granada
                 ,
                 and
                 enter
                 into
                 the
                 River
                 Amazone
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 .
              
               
                 THe
                 first
                 Entrance
                 that
                 we
                 discover'd
                 to
                 fall
                 into
                 this
                 River
                 (
                 which
                 may
                 be
                 termed
                 a
                 Sea
                 of
                 fresh
                 Water
                 )
                 on
                 that
                 side
                 that
                 looks
                 towards
                 the
                 new
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Granada
                 ,
                 is
                 through
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Micoa
                 in
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 Popayan
                 ,
                 following
                 the
                 Current
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 River
                 Caqueta
                 ,
                 into
                 which
                 all
                 those
                 others
                 that
                 descend
                 on
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 
                   St.
                   Foy
                   ,
                   
                   Bogota
                   ,
                   Jimanas
                   ,
                
                 and
                 Cagnan
                 ,
                 come
                 to
                 render
                 Homage
                 as
                 to
                 their
                 Lady
                 and
                 Mistriss
                 .
                 This
                 River
                 is
                 very
                 famous
                 in
                 the
                 Countrey
                 for
                 the
                 Numbers
                 of
                 Indians
                 that
                 inhabit
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 it
                 .
                 It
                 has
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 Arms
                 that
                 extend
                 themselves
                 into
                 very
                 remote
                 Provinces
                 ,
                 and
                 return
                 to
                 join
                 themselves
                 to
                 that
                 Body
                 from
                 which
                 they
                 separated
                 from
                 a
                 great
                 multitude
                 of
                 Islands
                 ,
                 that
                 are
                 all
                 inhabited
                 by
                 an
                 infinite
                 number
                 of
                 wild
                 People
                 .
                 This
                 River
                 continually
                 takes
                 its
                 Course
                 parallel
                 with
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 always
                 running
                 along
                 by
                 it
                 ,
                 tho
                 at
                 a
                 considerable
                 distance
                 ,
                 and
                 from
                 one
                 Place
                 to
                 another
                 sending
                 Arms
                 of
                 Water
                 towards
                 it
                 ,
                 big
                 enough
                 to
                 be
                 taken
                 each
                 of
                 'em
                 for
                 whole
                 Rivers
                 ;
                 at
                 last
                 gathering
                 it self
                 together
                 at
                 the
                 Latitude
                 of
                 four
                 degrees
                 ,
                 it
                 discharges
                 it self
                 into
                 our
                 River
                 :
                 and
                 't
                 is
                 by
                 that
                 Arm
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 nearest
                 to
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Aquas
                 ,
                 that
                 one
                 must
                 directly
                 take
                 ones
                 Course
                 to
                 go
                 down
                 unto
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 because
                 there
                 are
                 some
                 Arms
                 that
                 tend
                 towards
                 the
                 North
                 ;
                 and
                 they
                 that
                 shall
                 be
                 so
                 imprudent
                 as
                 to
                 embark
                 on
                 this
                 Arm
                 ,
                 will
                 certainly
                 be
                 expos'd
                 to
                 the
                 same
                 Danger
                 that
                 befel
                 Capt.
                 
                   Fernand
                   Perez
                   de
                   Quesada
                
                 ,
                 who
                 having
                 embarked
                 on
                 the
                 Caquetta
                 with
                 300
                 Men
                 ,
                 and
                 suffered
                 himself
                 to
                 be
                 carried
                 along
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 
                   St.
                   
                   Foy
                
                 ,
                 arrived
                 in
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Algodonal
                 ,
                 from
                 whence
                 he
                 was
                 forced
                 to
                 retire
                 with
                 much
                 more
                 haste
                 than
                 he
                 came
                 ,
                 tho
                 he
                 was
                 so
                 well
                 attended
                 with
                 a
                 good
                 number
                 of
                 Men.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 second
                 most
                 remarkable
                 Entrance
                 we
                 find
                 on
                 the
                 North
                 side
                 is
                 by
                 the
                 Town
                 of
                 Pasto
                 ,
                 which
                 also
                 depends
                 on
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 Popayan
                 .
                 From
                 this
                 Town
                 you
                 must
                 cross
                 the
                 neighbouring
                 Mountains
                 called
                 the
                 Cordeliers
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 a
                 difficult
                 incommodious
                 Journey
                 ,
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 badness
                 of
                 the
                 Ways
                 ,
                 which
                 you
                 must
                 travel
                 partly
                 on
                 Foot
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 rest
                 on
                 Horse-back
                 .
                 You
                 'l
                 at
                 length
                 arrive
                 at
                 the
                 River
                 Putomayo
                 ,
                 on
                 which
                 you
                 must
                 embark
                 ;
                 and
                 sailing
                 down
                 it
                 ,
                 it
                 will
                 bring
                 into
                 the
                 famous
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 Latitude
                 of
                 two
                 Degrees
                 and
                 a
                 half
                 ,
                 and
                 330
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 Port
                 of
                 Napo
                 .
                 The
                 same
                 Way
                 that
                 leads
                 to
                 the
                 River
                 Putomayo
                 ,
                 leads
                 in
                 like
                 manner
                 to
                 the
                 River
                 Aguarico
                 ;
                 because
                 when
                 you
                 leave
                 the
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 't
                 is
                 but
                 turning
                 near
                 Succombios
                 ,
                 and
                 near
                 that
                 Town
                 you
                 meet
                 the
                 River
                 Aguarico
                 ,
                 otherwise
                 call'd
                 the
                 golden
                 River
                 :
                 you
                 need
                 only
                 follow
                 the
                 Stream
                 of
                 it
                 to
                 enter
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Entrance
                 of
                 it
                 is
                 almost
                 under
                 the
                 Line
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 long-hair'd
                 Indians
                 begins
                 ninety
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 Port
                 
                 of
                 Napo
                 .
                 This
                 is
                 the
                 third
                 Passage
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 discover'd
                 into
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 on
                 the
                 North
                 side
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XLVI
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 River
                 Coca
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 River
                 Pagamino
                 ,
                 which
                 enter
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 on
                 the
                 South
                 side
                 .
              
               
                 UNder
                 the
                 Line
                 there
                 is
                 another
                 River
                 ,
                 by
                 which
                 one
                 may
                 descend
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ;
                 it
                 passes
                 across
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Quixos
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 nearest
                 to
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Quito
                 ,
                 beginning
                 at
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 the
                 Cofanes
                 ,
                 where
                 it
                 takes
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 Coca
                 ,
                 and
                 from
                 all
                 along
                 hence
                 it
                 amasses
                 together
                 such
                 great
                 Quantities
                 of
                 Water
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 may
                 well
                 be
                 said
                 to
                 make
                 the
                 principal
                 of
                 all
                 those
                 Channels
                 that
                 compose
                 this
                 great
                 Fresh-water
                 Sea.
                 The
                 Navigation
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 very
                 troublesom
                 and
                 difficult
                 ,
                 by
                 reason
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 Sreams
                 of
                 Water
                 that
                 trouble
                 it
                 all
                 along
                 ,
                 till
                 it
                 meets
                 the
                 River
                 Napo
                 ;
                 but
                 this
                 last
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 others
                 that
                 enter
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 on
                 the
                 other
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 Line
                 toward
                 the
                 South
                 ,
                 are
                 navigated
                 with
                 much
                 more
                 ease
                 .
                 The
                 first
                 of
                 these
                 is
                 the
                 River
                 Pagamino
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 none
                 of
                 the
                 most
                 commodious
                 and
                 pleasant
                 :
                 it
                 is
                 three
                 days
                 Journey
                 by
                 Land
                 from
                 the
                 
                 City
                 of
                 Avila
                 ,
                 which
                 likewise
                 belongs
                 to
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 the
                 Quixos
                 .
                 'T
                 was
                 by
                 this
                 River
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 Fleet
                 enter'd
                 ,
                 and
                 landed
                 within
                 the
                 Jurisdiction
                 of
                 Quito
                 .
                 This
                 River
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 below
                 the
                 River
                 Quito
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Napo
                 ,
                 at
                 a
                 place
                 call'd
                 
                   La
                   Junta
                   de
                   los
                   Rios
                
                 ,
                 twenty
                 five
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 Port
                 of
                 Napo
                 .
                 When
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 returned
                 ,
                 we
                 found
                 a
                 better
                 way
                 to
                 join
                 their
                 Fleet
                 than
                 that
                 which
                 they
                 lighted
                 on
                 in
                 coming
                 into
                 this
                 Country
                 :
                 For
                 we
                 went
                 strait
                 from
                 Quito
                 to
                 Archidoua
                 ,
                 which
                 likewise
                 belongs
                 to
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 the
                 Quixos
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 under
                 the
                 Jurisdiction
                 of
                 Quito
                 ;
                 from
                 whence
                 by
                 one
                 day's
                 Journey
                 only
                 (
                 which
                 we
                 travelled
                 on
                 foot
                 ,
                 it
                 being
                 in
                 the
                 Winter
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 in
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 the
                 Rains
                 ,
                 but
                 might
                 be
                 performed
                 on
                 Horse-back
                 at
                 any
                 other
                 Season
                 )
                 we
                 arrived
                 at
                 the
                 Port
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 Napo
                 .
                 This
                 River
                 is
                 great
                 and
                 rich
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 the
                 neighbouring
                 Ports
                 under
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 Quito
                 account
                 it
                 the
                 Depository
                 of
                 their
                 Treasures
                 ;
                 for
                 they
                 every
                 Year
                 gather
                 from
                 its
                 Shores
                 all
                 the
                 Gold
                 they
                 need
                 to
                 defray
                 the
                 Expence
                 of
                 their
                 Families
                 .
                 Besides
                 ,
                 this
                 River
                 abounds
                 with
                 Fish
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Fields
                 near
                 it
                 are
                 full
                 of
                 Game
                 ;
                 the
                 Soil
                 is
                 very
                 good
                 ,
                 and
                 requires
                 but
                 little
                 Charge
                 to
                 cultivate
                 it
                 :
                 It
                 returns
                 the
                 Husbandman
                 
                 prodigious
                 quantities
                 of
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Grain
                 :
                 This
                 is
                 the
                 principal
                 and
                 best
                 Way
                 that
                 can
                 be
                 taken
                 to
                 go
                 from
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Quito
                 to
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ;
                 't
                 is
                 much
                 more
                 commodious
                 and
                 easy
                 than
                 all
                 the
                 rest
                 .
                 Yet
                 I
                 have
                 heard
                 on
                 that
                 side
                 ,
                 that
                 near
                 the
                 Town
                 of
                 Ambatte
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 10
                 Leagues
                 from
                 Quito
                 on
                 the
                 River
                 Bamba
                 ,
                 there
                 is
                 another
                 River
                 that
                 comes
                 to
                 discharge
                 it self
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 there
                 is
                 in
                 it
                 but
                 one
                 fall
                 of
                 Water
                 caus'd
                 by
                 the
                 Currents
                 ,
                 that
                 at
                 all
                 obstructs
                 the
                 Navigation
                 of
                 it
                 :
                 This
                 way
                 is
                 very
                 commodious
                 to
                 bring
                 one
                 into
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 about
                 60
                 or
                 70
                 Leagues
                 lower
                 than
                 the
                 Port
                 of
                 Napo
                 ,
                 by
                 which
                 means
                 we
                 may
                 cross
                 through
                 the
                 whole
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Quixos
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XLVII
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Rivers
                 of
                 Curaray
                 and
                 Maragnon
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 seventh
                 way
                 of
                 coming
                 at
                 the
                 River
                 Amazone
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Macas
                 ,
                 which
                 also
                 appertains
                 to
                 the
                 Government
                 and
                 Jurisdiction
                 of
                 Quito
                 ;
                 from
                 the
                 Mountains
                 of
                 this
                 Province
                 there
                 descends
                 a
                 great
                 River
                 call'd
                 Curaray
                 ,
                 by
                 following
                 the
                 Course
                 of
                 which
                 you
                 'l
                 fall
                 into
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 at
                 2
                 degrees
                 
                 Latitude
                 ,
                 and
                 150
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 Port
                 of
                 Napo
                 :
                 all
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 Land
                 is
                 well
                 peopled
                 with
                 several
                 different
                 Nations
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 eighth
                 and
                 last
                 Passage
                 into
                 our
                 great
                 River
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 St.
                 Jago
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 Mountains
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Maguas
                 ,
                 the
                 most
                 powerful
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Rivers
                 that
                 render
                 Tribute
                 to
                 the
                 Amazone
                 :
                 It
                 waters
                 all
                 that
                 great
                 Country
                 so
                 distant
                 from
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 there
                 call'd
                 Maragnon
                 ;
                 but
                 at
                 its
                 Mouth
                 ,
                 and
                 some
                 Leagues
                 higher
                 ,
                 it
                 bears
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 Tumburagna
                 .
                 This
                 River
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 at
                 four
                 degrees
                 Latitude
                 ,
                 and
                 more
                 than
                 300
                 Leagues
                 above
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 ;
                 it
                 is
                 so
                 deep
                 ,
                 and
                 has
                 such
                 impetuous
                 Currents
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Navigation
                 of
                 it
                 is
                 troublesome
                 ,
                 and
                 somewhat
                 dangerous
                 :
                 but
                 the
                 Assurances
                 we
                 have
                 that
                 there
                 are
                 great
                 numbers
                 of
                 Idolatrous
                 and
                 Barbarous
                 Indians
                 inhabiting
                 these
                 large
                 Countries
                 it
                 waters
                 ,
                 will
                 make
                 those
                 that
                 are
                 animated
                 with
                 Zeal
                 for
                 the
                 Glory
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Salvation
                 of
                 Souls
                 ,
                 easily
                 surmount
                 some
                 Difficulties
                 .
                 It
                 was
                 to
                 make
                 an
                 Essay
                 of
                 so
                 noble
                 an
                 Enterprize
                 ,
                 that
                 in
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 Year
                 1638
                 ,
                 two
                 of
                 our
                 Society
                 pass'd
                 through
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Maguas
                 in
                 quest
                 of
                 these
                 large
                 Countries
                 ,
                 from
                 whom
                 I
                 receiv'd
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 Letters
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 they
                 give
                 an
                 account
                 of
                 the
                 endless
                 Extent
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 innumerable
                 Provinces
                 they
                 receiv'd
                 certain
                 Intelligence
                 of
                 from
                 time
                 to
                 time
                 .
                 This
                 River
                 Maragnon
                 joins
                 with
                 Amazone
                 230
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 Port
                 of
                 Napo
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XLVIII
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 River
                 Napo
                 .
              
               
                 THis
                 River
                 Napo
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 I
                 have
                 had
                 occasion
                 to
                 speak
                 so
                 often
                 ,
                 has
                 its
                 Source
                 at
                 the
                 foot
                 of
                 a
                 great
                 Desart
                 call'd
                 Aulizana
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 18
                 Leagues
                 from
                 Quito
                 ;
                 and
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 very
                 wonderful
                 ,
                 tho
                 this
                 Place
                 is
                 so
                 near
                 the
                 Equinoctial
                 Line
                 ,
                 yet
                 this
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 many
                 other
                 Plains
                 that
                 are
                 upon
                 those
                 Mountains
                 call'd
                 the
                 Cordeliers
                 ,
                 is
                 always
                 cover'd
                 with
                 Snow
                 ,
                 that
                 serves
                 to
                 temper
                 the
                 Heat
                 under
                 the
                 Torrid
                 Zone
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 so
                 excessive
                 ,
                 that
                 one
                 would
                 think
                 it
                 should
                 render
                 all
                 those
                 Countries
                 not
                 habitable
                 (
                 as
                 St.
                 Augustin
                 says
                 of
                 them
                 )
                 which
                 yet
                 by
                 means
                 of
                 this
                 perpetual
                 Refreshment
                 ,
                 are
                 the
                 most
                 temperate
                 and
                 serene
                 Regions
                 that
                 have
                 been
                 discover'd
                 since
                 the
                 Age
                 wherein
                 that
                 great
                 Saint
                 flourish'd
                 .
                 This
                 River
                 of
                 Napo
                 from
                 its
                 Source
                 takes
                 its
                 Course
                 between
                 great
                 Rocks
                 ,
                 which
                 render
                 it
                 unnavigable
                 till
                 it
                 comes
                 to
                 touch
                 that
                 place
                 which
                 is
                 call'd
                 the
                 Port
                 of
                 Napo
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Vezinos
                 ,
                 or
                 Inhabitants
                 
                 of
                 Archidoua
                 ,
                 have
                 their
                 Plantations
                 and
                 Gardens
                 ;
                 there
                 it
                 becomes
                 more
                 smooth
                 ,
                 and
                 less
                 rapid
                 ,
                 and
                 bears
                 upon
                 its
                 Waters
                 those
                 little
                 Canoos
                 the
                 Indians
                 use
                 for
                 their
                 Traffick
                 :
                 however
                 ,
                 it
                 retains
                 something
                 of
                 its
                 Roughness
                 and
                 Impetuosity
                 for
                 five
                 or
                 six
                 Leagues
                 below
                 this
                 Port
                 ;
                 and
                 then
                 all
                 on
                 a
                 sudden
                 becomes
                 calm
                 and
                 smooth
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 remains
                 till
                 it
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 River
                 Coca
                 ,
                 which
                 makes
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 about
                 25
                 Leagues
                 ;
                 during
                 which
                 space
                 it
                 has
                 a
                 good
                 Bottom
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 smooth
                 Course
                 ,
                 and
                 affords
                 the
                 largest
                 Vessels
                 a
                 very
                 safe
                 Passage
                 .
                 The
                 Conjunction
                 it
                 makes
                 with
                 the
                 River
                 Coca
                 is
                 call'd
                 
                   La
                   Junta
                   de
                   los
                   Rios
                
                 ,
                 the
                 joining
                 of
                 the
                 Rivers
                 ;
                 and
                 this
                 is
                 reported
                 to
                 have
                 been
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 
                   Francis
                   d'
                   Oreillane
                
                 and
                 his
                 Men
                 arriv'd
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 that
                 Brigantine
                 in
                 which
                 he
                 sailed
                 and
                 discover'd
                 all
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XLIX
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Town
                 of
                 Anose
                 where
                 Capt.
                 John
                 de
                 Palacios
                 dwelt
                 ,
                 with
                 whom
                 there
                 were
                 the
                 two
                 Lay-Friers
                 who
                 made
                 their
                 Escape
                 down
                 to
                 Para
                 (
                 spoken
                 of
                 before
                 .
                 )
              
               
                 FOrty
                 seven
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 these
                 Rivers
                 join
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 ,
                 is
                 situated
                 the
                 Town
                 of
                 Anose
                 ,
                 which
                 
                 is
                 a
                 Plantation
                 made
                 by
                 Capt.
                 
                   John
                   de
                   Palacios
                
                 ,
                 who
                 (
                 as
                 I
                 said
                 before
                 )
                 was
                 kill'd
                 by
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 :
                 18
                 Leagues
                 below
                 this
                 Town
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 lies
                 the
                 River
                 Agarico
                 ,
                 which
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ;
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 sufficiently
                 famous
                 not
                 only
                 for
                 its
                 Air
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 none
                 of
                 the
                 best
                 ,
                 but
                 also
                 for
                 the
                 quantity
                 of
                 Gold
                 that
                 is
                 found
                 in
                 its
                 Sands
                 ,
                 from
                 whence
                 it
                 has
                 had
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 the
                 Golden
                 River
                 these
                 hundred
                 Years
                 .
                 At
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 on
                 one
                 side
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 t'other
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 begins
                 the
                 great
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 long-hair'd
                 Indians
                 ,
                 which
                 extends
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 for
                 above
                 180
                 Leagues
                 ,
                 and
                 continually
                 receives
                 great
                 quantities
                 of
                 Water
                 from
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 which
                 makes
                 divers
                 Lakes
                 of
                 a
                 great
                 Compass
                 and
                 Depth
                 .
                 The
                 first
                 Notices
                 that
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 Quito
                 receiv'd
                 of
                 this
                 Country
                 gave
                 'em
                 a
                 very
                 great
                 desire
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 Conquest
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 number
                 of
                 Indians
                 with
                 which
                 this
                 Province
                 is
                 peopled
                 .
                 And
                 indeed
                 there
                 have
                 been
                 at
                 several
                 times
                 some
                 Essays
                 of
                 this
                 kind
                 made
                 ,
                 but
                 always
                 in
                 vain
                 ,
                 witness
                 the
                 last
                 of
                 'em
                 that
                 had
                 such
                 bad
                 Success
                 ,
                 when
                 Capt.
                 
                   John
                   de
                   Palacios
                
                 was
                 kill'd
                 ,
                 as
                 has
                 been
                 already
                 said
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 L.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 Place
                 where
                 General
                 Texeira
                 left
                 his
                 Fleet
                 of
                 Portuguez
                 .
              
               
                 'T
                 Was
                 in
                 this
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 long-hair'd
                 Indians
                 at
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 which
                 bears
                 their
                 Name
                 ,
                 and
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 20
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 River
                 again
                 ,
                 that
                 by
                 the
                 Order
                 of
                 General
                 Texeira
                 forty
                 Portuguez
                 of
                 his
                 Fleet
                 ,
                 with
                 200
                 of
                 the
                 Indians
                 they
                 brought
                 with
                 'em
                 ,
                 continued
                 constantly
                 for
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 eleven
                 Months
                 :
                 At
                 first
                 they
                 found
                 nothing
                 but
                 good
                 Entertainment
                 of
                 all
                 sorts
                 from
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 to
                 whom
                 in
                 return
                 they
                 gave
                 all
                 Necessaries
                 they
                 had
                 occasion
                 for
                 ;
                 but
                 this
                 did
                 not
                 continue
                 long
                 .
                 This
                 was
                 too
                 great
                 a
                 Familiarity
                 for
                 Men
                 that
                 knew
                 themselves
                 guilty
                 of
                 the
                 death
                 of
                 the
                 Spanish
                 Captain
                 ;
                 for
                 they
                 being
                 the
                 Authors
                 of
                 this
                 Fact
                 ,
                 knew
                 well
                 enough
                 that
                 the
                 Blood
                 they
                 had
                 shed
                 cry'd
                 for
                 Vengeance
                 against
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 therefore
                 being
                 under
                 Apprehensions
                 of
                 being
                 chastis'd
                 for
                 their
                 Boldness
                 on
                 the
                 least
                 occasion
                 that
                 should
                 offer
                 ,
                 they
                 mutinied
                 ,
                 and
                 after
                 they
                 had
                 kill'd
                 three
                 of
                 our
                 Indians
                 ,
                 took
                 up
                 Arms
                 to
                 defend
                 their
                 Lives
                 and
                 Lands
                 .
                 The
                 Portuguez
                 on
                 this
                 occasion
                 acted
                 like
                 themselves
                 ,
                 and
                 presently
                 sought
                 to
                 be
                 reveng'd
                 ;
                 for
                 it
                 being
                 contrary
                 to
                 their
                 Humour
                 to
                 put
                 up
                 Injuries
                 ,
                 
                 or
                 to
                 suffer
                 Indians
                 to
                 take
                 the
                 liberty
                 of
                 acting
                 with
                 so
                 much
                 Insolence
                 as
                 this
                 ,
                 they
                 betook
                 themselves
                 to
                 Arms
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 their
                 wonted
                 Courage
                 ,
                 for
                 which
                 they
                 are
                 so
                 famous
                 ,
                 flew
                 upon
                 their
                 Enemies
                 ,
                 and
                 repuls'd
                 them
                 with
                 so
                 much
                 Vigor
                 ,
                 that
                 with
                 the
                 loss
                 of
                 a
                 very
                 few
                 Men
                 they
                 killed
                 a
                 considerable
                 number
                 of
                 Indians
                 ,
                 and
                 took
                 above
                 70
                 of
                 'em
                 Prisoners
                 ;
                 some
                 of
                 whom
                 died
                 in
                 the
                 places
                 of
                 their
                 Confinement
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 rest
                 made
                 their
                 Escape
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 in
                 a
                 little
                 time
                 there
                 was
                 not
                 one
                 of
                 them
                 left
                 .
                 These
                 Portuguez
                 did
                 not
                 get
                 much
                 by
                 their
                 Victory
                 ,
                 for
                 they
                 now
                 found
                 themselves
                 reduc'd
                 to
                 such
                 Extremity
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 saw
                 they
                 must
                 either
                 perish
                 for
                 want
                 of
                 Food
                 ,
                 or
                 else
                 be
                 oblig'd
                 to
                 go
                 with
                 their
                 Swords
                 in
                 their
                 hands
                 to
                 fetch
                 Provision
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 very
                 Mouths
                 of
                 their
                 Enemies
                 .
                 Accordingly
                 they
                 resolv'd
                 to
                 make
                 Incursions
                 into
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 either
                 by
                 fair
                 means
                 or
                 soul
                 to
                 get
                 a
                 Supply
                 for
                 their
                 pinching
                 Necessities
                 .
                 Some
                 of
                 'em
                 went
                 out
                 to
                 fight
                 ,
                 and
                 others
                 kept
                 the
                 Camp
                 ;
                 but
                 both
                 the
                 one
                 and
                 the
                 other
                 in
                 spite
                 of
                 all
                 their
                 Bravery
                 did
                 not
                 fail
                 to
                 meet
                 with
                 frequent
                 and
                 violent
                 Insults
                 from
                 their
                 Enemies
                 ,
                 who
                 omitted
                 no
                 fit
                 occasion
                 to
                 give
                 'em
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Alarms
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 do
                 'em
                 all
                 the
                 Mischief
                 they
                 could
                 ,
                 especially
                 upon
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 surpriz'd
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 of
                 their
                 Vessels
                 ,
                 some
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 pillaged
                 ,
                 and
                 brake
                 others
                 of
                 'em
                 in
                 pieces
                 :
                 
                 and
                 yet
                 this
                 was
                 not
                 the
                 greatest
                 Damage
                 they
                 did
                 our
                 Men
                 ;
                 for
                 they
                 laid
                 Ambuscades
                 for
                 our
                 Indians
                 ,
                 and
                 cut
                 the
                 Throats
                 of
                 all
                 that
                 fell
                 into
                 their
                 hands
                 :
                 'T
                 is
                 true
                 ,
                 for
                 every
                 Man
                 they
                 kill'd
                 ,
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 kill'd
                 six
                 of
                 them
                 ;
                 but
                 this
                 Chastisement
                 was
                 nothing
                 comparable
                 to
                 what
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 used
                 to
                 make
                 the
                 Indians
                 suffer
                 for
                 such
                 kind
                 of
                 Revolts
                 .
                 These
                 People
                 were
                 call'd
                 by
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 who
                 saw
                 them
                 first
                 ,
                 the
                 Hairy
                 Indians
                 ,
                 because
                 throughout
                 this
                 Province
                 the
                 Men
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 the
                 Women
                 wear
                 their
                 Hair
                 quite
                 down
                 to
                 their
                 Knees
                 .
                 Their
                 Weapons
                 are
                 Darts
                 ,
                 their
                 Houses
                 are
                 Huts
                 made
                 very
                 neatly
                 and
                 curiously
                 with
                 the
                 Branches
                 of
                 Palm-Trees
                 :
                 Their
                 Food
                 is
                 like
                 that
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 other
                 Indians
                 upon
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
                 They
                 are
                 always
                 in
                 War
                 with
                 their
                 Neighbours
                 at
                 the
                 Head
                 of
                 this
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 long-hair'd
                 Savages
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 ;
                 on
                 the
                 other
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 they
                 have
                 for
                 their
                 Neighbours
                 the
                 Avixiras
                 ,
                 the
                 Yurusnies
                 ,
                 the
                 Zaparas
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Yquitos
                 ,
                 who
                 are
                 on
                 one
                 side
                 enclosed
                 by
                 the
                 River
                 Curaray
                 ,
                 and
                 on
                 the
                 other
                 by
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 into
                 which
                 the
                 former
                 empties
                 it self
                 4
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 long-hair'd
                 Indians
                 ,
                 at
                 near
                 two
                 degrees
                 Latitude
                 .
                 Eighty
                 Leagues
                 below
                 Curaray
                 on
                 the
                 same
                 South-side
                 ,
                 the
                 famous
                 River
                 Tumburagua
                 ,
                 which
                 ,
                 as
                 I
                 said
                 before
                 ,
                 descends
                 from
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Maynas
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 
                 Name
                 of
                 Maragnon
                 ,
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ;
                 and
                 is
                 so
                 impetuous
                 and
                 violent
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 preserves
                 its
                 Waters
                 entirely
                 together
                 ,
                 while
                 it
                 runs
                 with
                 its
                 ordinary
                 Swiftness
                 several
                 Leagues
                 forward
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 without
                 mixing
                 with
                 it
                 ,
                 which
                 makes
                 it
                 extend
                 above
                 a
                 League
                 in
                 Breadth
                 at
                 its
                 Mouth
                 :
                 at
                 length
                 it
                 acknowledges
                 the
                 Superiority
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 and
                 pays
                 it
                 not
                 only
                 the
                 ordinary
                 Tribute
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 other
                 Rivers
                 render
                 it
                 ,
                 but
                 another
                 more
                 considerable
                 Advantage
                 besides
                 of
                 many
                 sorts
                 of
                 Fish
                 ,
                 that
                 are
                 not
                 found
                 in
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 till
                 you
                 come
                 to
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LI.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Aguas
                 ,
                 their
                 Manners
                 and
                 Customs
                 .
              
               
                 SIxty
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 River
                 Tumburagua
                 begins
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Aguas
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 most
                 fertile
                 and
                 spacious
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Provinces
                 we
                 found
                 along
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ;
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 vulgarly
                 call
                 it
                 Omaguas
                 ,
                 by
                 a
                 corruption
                 of
                 its
                 proper
                 Name
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 make
                 it
                 answer
                 to
                 the
                 Situation
                 of
                 their
                 Dwellings
                 ;
                 because
                 the
                 Word
                 Aguas
                 in
                 their
                 Language
                 signifies
                 without
                 ,
                 or
                 abroad
                 .
                 This
                 Province
                 is
                 above
                 200
                 Leagues
                 in
                 length
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 so
                 well
                 peopled
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Villages
                 are
                 
                 situate
                 very
                 close
                 one
                 to
                 another
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 almost
                 as
                 soon
                 as
                 you
                 are
                 past
                 one
                 ,
                 you
                 discover
                 another
                 .
                 The
                 Breadth
                 of
                 this
                 Country
                 in
                 all
                 appearance
                 is
                 but
                 of
                 small
                 extent
                 ,
                 it
                 being
                 no
                 greater
                 than
                 that
                 of
                 our
                 River
                 ;
                 for
                 the
                 Habitations
                 of
                 these
                 People
                 are
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 Islands
                 throughout
                 the
                 whole
                 Length
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 in
                 great
                 number
                 ,
                 and
                 some
                 of
                 which
                 are
                 very
                 spacious
                 :
                 and
                 considering
                 they
                 are
                 all
                 either
                 peopled
                 ,
                 or
                 at
                 least
                 cultivated
                 for
                 the
                 Sustenance
                 of
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 ,
                 one
                 may
                 easily
                 imagine
                 there
                 must
                 needs
                 be
                 vast
                 numbers
                 of
                 Indians
                 in
                 a
                 Country
                 that
                 extends
                 200
                 Leagues
                 in
                 Length
                 .
                 This
                 Nation
                 is
                 the
                 most
                 reasonable
                 and
                 best
                 civilized
                 of
                 all
                 those
                 that
                 dwell
                 along
                 this
                 River
                 .
                 This
                 Advantage
                 they
                 received
                 from
                 those
                 that
                 not
                 long
                 since
                 went
                 down
                 amongst
                 'em
                 from
                 the
                 Countrey
                 of
                 the
                 Quixos
                 ;
                 where
                 after
                 having
                 had
                 Peace
                 with
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 for
                 a
                 long
                 time
                 ,
                 they
                 were
                 at
                 last
                 wearied
                 with
                 the
                 ill
                 Treatment
                 they
                 received
                 from
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 embarking
                 in
                 their
                 Canoos
                 ,
                 suffered
                 themselves
                 to
                 be
                 carried
                 down
                 with
                 the
                 Stream
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 till
                 they
                 met
                 with
                 other
                 Indians
                 of
                 their
                 Nation
                 ,
                 upon
                 whose
                 Strength
                 and
                 Power
                 they
                 could
                 rely
                 ,
                 and
                 accordingly
                 took
                 up
                 their
                 Residence
                 with
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 These
                 last
                 Comers
                 introduc'd
                 among
                 the
                 others
                 several
                 things
                 they
                 had
                 seen
                 practised
                 by
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 ,
                 and
                 taught
                 'em
                 how
                 to
                 live
                 after
                 
                 a
                 more
                 civil
                 and
                 regular
                 manner
                 .
                 They
                 were
                 all
                 clothed
                 ,
                 both
                 Men
                 and
                 Women
                 ,
                 with
                 all
                 the
                 Decency
                 imaginable
                 ;
                 their
                 Garments
                 are
                 made
                 of
                 Cotton
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 gather
                 a
                 prodigious
                 quantity
                 ;
                 and
                 they
                 do
                 not
                 only
                 make
                 Stuffs
                 enough
                 for
                 their
                 own
                 use
                 ,
                 but
                 make
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 to
                 sell
                 to
                 their
                 Neighbours
                 ,
                 who
                 are
                 mightily
                 taken
                 (
                 and
                 that
                 not
                 without
                 reason
                 )
                 with
                 the
                 Beauty
                 of
                 those
                 pretty
                 Works
                 with
                 which
                 they
                 deck
                 their
                 Stuffs
                 :
                 they
                 make
                 some
                 very
                 thin
                 Clothes
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 not
                 only
                 woven
                 with
                 Threds
                 of
                 different
                 Colours
                 ,
                 but
                 the
                 Paint
                 of
                 'em
                 is
                 disposed
                 with
                 so
                 much
                 Art
                 in
                 the
                 weaving
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 different
                 Threds
                 can't
                 be
                 distinguished
                 one
                 from
                 another
                 .
                 They
                 are
                 so
                 submissive
                 and
                 obedient
                 to
                 their
                 principal
                 Caciques
                 ,
                 that
                 these
                 whom
                 they
                 look
                 upon
                 as
                 their
                 Princes
                 ,
                 need
                 speak
                 but
                 a
                 Word
                 to
                 have
                 whatever
                 they
                 command
                 put
                 in
                 execution
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 whole
                 Nation
                 has
                 been
                 so
                 long
                 accustomed
                 to
                 make
                 their
                 Heads
                 flat
                 ,
                 that
                 as
                 soon
                 as
                 their
                 Children
                 are
                 born
                 they
                 put
                 them
                 in
                 a
                 kind
                 of
                 Press
                 ;
                 forcing
                 Nature
                 after
                 this
                 manner
                 with
                 one
                 little
                 Board
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 hold
                 upon
                 the
                 Forehead
                 ,
                 and
                 another
                 much
                 larger
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 put
                 behind
                 the
                 Head
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 serves
                 them
                 for
                 a
                 Cradle
                 ;
                 and
                 all
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 Body
                 of
                 the
                 new-born
                 Infant
                 is
                 as
                 it
                 were
                 inclos'd
                 with
                 this
                 piece
                 of
                 Wood
                 :
                 they
                 lay
                 the
                 Child
                 upon
                 his
                 Back
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 this
                 Board
                 being
                 bound
                 fast
                 to
                 that
                 which
                 is
                 upon
                 the
                 Forehead
                 ,
                 they
                 make
                 the
                 Head
                 of
                 the
                 Child
                 almost
                 as
                 slat
                 as
                 ones
                 Hand
                 ;
                 thus
                 there
                 being
                 no
                 room
                 for
                 the
                 Head
                 to
                 grow
                 ,
                 but
                 by
                 spreading
                 it self
                 wide
                 from
                 one
                 Ear
                 to
                 the
                 other
                 ,
                 they
                 are
                 extremely
                 disfigured
                 by
                 this
                 violent
                 Artifice
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Aguas
                 have
                 perpetual
                 War
                 with
                 several
                 other
                 Nations
                 both
                 on
                 the
                 one
                 and
                 the
                 other
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 .
                 On
                 the
                 South
                 side
                 among
                 other
                 Enemies
                 they
                 have
                 the
                 Curinas
                 ,
                 who
                 are
                 so
                 numerous
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 not
                 only
                 very
                 well
                 defend
                 themselves
                 on
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 from
                 innumerable
                 Multitudes
                 of
                 the
                 Aguas
                 ;
                 but
                 at
                 the
                 same
                 time
                 likewise
                 sustain
                 the
                 Efforts
                 and
                 Shocks
                 of
                 other
                 Nations
                 ,
                 that
                 come
                 a
                 great
                 way
                 down
                 the
                 Countrey
                 to
                 make
                 War
                 with
                 them
                 .
                 On
                 the
                 North
                 side
                 the
                 Zoeunas
                 are
                 Enemies
                 to
                 the
                 Aguas
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 Accounts
                 I
                 have
                 had
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 no
                 less
                 numerous
                 ,
                 nor
                 less
                 stout
                 than
                 the
                 Curinas
                 ;
                 which
                 appears
                 in
                 that
                 they
                 maintain
                 a
                 War
                 against
                 a
                 great
                 number
                 of
                 Enemies
                 ,
                 that
                 come
                 down
                 from
                 Places
                 a
                 great
                 way
                 up
                 in
                 the
                 Country
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 LII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Love
                 these
                 People
                 have
                 for
                 the
                 Captives
                 they
                 take
                 in
                 War
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Calumny
                 they
                 bie
                 under
                 in
                 being
                 reported
                 to
                 eat
                 '
                 em
                 .
              
               
                 THese
                 Aguas
                 make
                 Slaves
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Prisoners
                 they
                 take
                 in
                 War
                 ,
                 and
                 use
                 'em
                 for
                 all
                 kinds
                 of
                 Service
                 ;
                 however
                 they
                 treat
                 'em
                 with
                 so
                 much
                 Love
                 and
                 Kindness
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 make
                 'em
                 eat
                 with
                 themselves
                 ;
                 and
                 there
                 's
                 nothing
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 displeases
                 'em
                 more
                 ,
                 than
                 to
                 desire
                 'em
                 to
                 sell
                 'em
                 ,
                 as
                 we
                 found
                 by
                 experience
                 on
                 several
                 occasions
                 :
                 I
                 remember
                 once
                 at
                 our
                 Arrival
                 at
                 an
                 Indian
                 Town
                 ,
                 they
                 received
                 us
                 not
                 only
                 with
                 all
                 the
                 Marks
                 of
                 Peace
                 and
                 Amity
                 ,
                 but
                 even
                 with
                 all
                 the
                 Tokens
                 of
                 extraordinary
                 Joy
                 :
                 They
                 offer'd
                 us
                 all
                 they
                 had
                 for
                 our
                 Sustenance
                 ,
                 without
                 requiring
                 any
                 thing
                 in
                 return
                 :
                 We
                 on
                 our
                 parts
                 shewed
                 that
                 Civility
                 to
                 them
                 that
                 became
                 us
                 ;
                 we
                 bought
                 their
                 painted
                 Cotton-Cloth
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 very
                 willingly
                 parted
                 with
                 ;
                 we
                 desired
                 'em
                 to
                 sell
                 us
                 some
                 Canoos
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 better
                 to
                 them
                 than
                 the
                 best
                 and
                 swiftest
                 Horses
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 presently
                 offer'd
                 'em
                 to
                 us
                 ;
                 but
                 when
                 we
                 began
                 to
                 talk
                 with
                 'em
                 about
                 their
                 Slaves
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 importune
                 'em
                 to
                 sell
                 us
                 some
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 this
                 was
                 to
                 them
                 the
                 most
                 uncivil
                 and
                 inhumane
                 Discourse
                 that
                 could
                 be
                 :
                 one
                 of
                 them
                 presently
                 gave
                 
                 us
                 to
                 understand
                 that
                 he
                 would
                 no
                 longer
                 keep
                 company
                 with
                 us
                 ;
                 another
                 shew'd
                 himself
                 mightily
                 troubled
                 at
                 the
                 matter
                 :
                 On
                 the
                 one
                 hand
                 they
                 were
                 very
                 diligent
                 to
                 hide
                 'em
                 from
                 us
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 other
                 to
                 get
                 some
                 of
                 'em
                 that
                 were
                 with
                 us
                 out
                 of
                 our
                 Hands
                 ;
                 in
                 a
                 word
                 ,
                 they
                 gave
                 us
                 Signs
                 enough
                 to
                 convince
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 had
                 a
                 greater
                 esteem
                 for
                 their
                 Slaves
                 than
                 for
                 all
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 their
                 Goods
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 they
                 had
                 rather
                 part
                 with
                 all
                 they
                 possess'd
                 besides
                 than
                 part
                 with
                 them
                 .
                 And
                 this
                 being
                 the
                 truth
                 of
                 the
                 matter
                 ,
                 't
                 is
                 a
                 malicious
                 thing
                 of
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 to
                 report
                 that
                 the
                 reason
                 why
                 the
                 Aguas
                 are
                 unwilling
                 to
                 sell
                 their
                 Slaves
                 ,
                 is
                 because
                 they
                 fatten
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 keep
                 'em
                 to
                 eat
                 at
                 their
                 Feasts
                 :
                 This
                 is
                 a
                 Calumny
                 they
                 have
                 invented
                 ,
                 to
                 palliate
                 the
                 Cruelties
                 they
                 have
                 exercised
                 upon
                 these
                 poor
                 Wretches
                 .
                 I
                 may
                 farther
                 add
                 ,
                 that
                 at
                 least
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 concerns
                 the
                 Nation
                 of
                 the
                 Aguas
                 I
                 have
                 found
                 the
                 contrary
                 true
                 by
                 the
                 Testimony
                 of
                 two
                 Indians
                 that
                 were
                 Natives
                 of
                 Para
                 ,
                 who
                 came
                 up
                 with
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 Quito
                 ,
                 and
                 ran
                 away
                 when
                 they
                 were
                 arriv'd
                 there
                 ;
                 who
                 falling
                 into
                 the
                 hands
                 of
                 these
                 People
                 ,
                 were
                 made
                 Slaves
                 ,
                 and
                 remained
                 with
                 them
                 eight
                 Months
                 :
                 these
                 assured
                 me
                 they
                 had
                 been
                 out
                 with
                 them
                 at
                 their
                 Wars
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 they
                 never
                 saw
                 'em
                 eat
                 any
                 of
                 their
                 Enemies
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 had
                 taken
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 Slaves
                 of
                 'em
                 :
                 't
                 was
                 true
                 indeed
                 (
                 they
                 said
                 )
                 when
                 
                 they
                 had
                 taken
                 any
                 of
                 their
                 Enemies
                 that
                 had
                 the
                 Reputation
                 of
                 being
                 Valiant
                 and
                 Great
                 ,
                 they
                 kill'd
                 'em
                 at
                 their
                 Feasts
                 and
                 Assemblies
                 ,
                 only
                 out
                 of
                 fear
                 of
                 sustaining
                 some
                 considerable
                 Damage
                 by
                 'em
                 ,
                 if
                 they
                 should
                 suffer
                 'em
                 to
                 live
                 ;
                 but
                 that
                 they
                 did
                 not
                 eat
                 these
                 neither
                 when
                 they
                 had
                 kill'd
                 'em
                 ,
                 but
                 when
                 they
                 had
                 cut
                 off
                 their
                 Heads
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 us'd
                 to
                 hang
                 up
                 in
                 their
                 Huts
                 as
                 Trophies
                 ,
                 they
                 roll'd
                 their
                 Bodies
                 into
                 the
                 River
                 .
              
               
                 I
                 don't
                 deny
                 that
                 there
                 are
                 some
                 Caribees
                 in
                 those
                 Parts
                 that
                 eat
                 their
                 Enemies
                 without
                 any
                 Sentiments
                 of
                 Horror
                 ;
                 but
                 this
                 is
                 a
                 Custom
                 peculiar
                 to
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 not
                 practised
                 among
                 other
                 Indians
                 .
                 And
                 this
                 I
                 desire
                 may
                 be
                 taken
                 notice
                 of
                 and
                 credited
                 ,
                 that
                 Human
                 Flesh
                 has
                 never
                 been
                 sold
                 in
                 any
                 of
                 the
                 Publick
                 Shambles
                 of
                 this
                 Nation
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 have
                 reported
                 ;
                 who
                 under
                 the
                 pretence
                 of
                 revenging
                 such
                 kind
                 of
                 Cruelties
                 ,
                 commit
                 those
                 that
                 are
                 incomparably
                 greater
                 themselves
                 ,
                 since
                 they
                 are
                 so
                 inhuman
                 and
                 barbarous
                 ,
                 as
                 to
                 make
                 Slaves
                 of
                 those
                 that
                 were
                 born
                 free
                 and
                 independent
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 LIII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 great
                 Cold
                 in
                 those
                 parts
                 under
                 the
                 Line
                 in
                 June
                 ,
                 July
                 and
                 August
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 reason
                 of
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 AFter
                 we
                 were
                 got
                 down
                 about
                 100
                 Leagues
                 more
                 or
                 less
                 into
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 the
                 Aguas
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 had
                 pass'd
                 about
                 half
                 way
                 through
                 this
                 vast
                 Province
                 ,
                 we
                 arriv'd
                 at
                 a
                 Town
                 of
                 this
                 Nation
                 ,
                 where
                 we
                 were
                 obliged
                 to
                 continue
                 three
                 days
                 ;
                 we
                 there
                 felt
                 it
                 so
                 extreme
                 cold
                 ,
                 that
                 those
                 of
                 us
                 that
                 were
                 born
                 and
                 bred
                 in
                 the
                 coldest
                 Province
                 of
                 Spain
                 ,
                 were
                 constrain'd
                 to
                 put
                 on
                 more
                 Clothes
                 .
                 This
                 so
                 sudden
                 change
                 of
                 the
                 Temper
                 of
                 the
                 Air
                 surpriz'd
                 me
                 ,
                 and
                 gave
                 me
                 the
                 Curiosity
                 to
                 enquire
                 the
                 Cause
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 :
                 they
                 told
                 me
                 it
                 was
                 no
                 unusual
                 thing
                 in
                 their
                 Quarters
                 ,
                 that
                 every
                 Year
                 for
                 three
                 Moons
                 (
                 for
                 thus
                 they
                 count
                 and
                 mean
                 for
                 three
                 Months
                 )
                 they
                 felt
                 the
                 same
                 Cold
                 ;
                 these
                 three
                 Months
                 are
                 
                   June
                   ,
                   July
                
                 and
                 August
                 :
                 but
                 this
                 Answer
                 did
                 not
                 satisfy
                 me
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 willing
                 to
                 have
                 a
                 more
                 solid
                 and
                 perfect
                 knowledg
                 of
                 the
                 reason
                 of
                 this
                 so
                 piercing
                 Cold.
                 Upon
                 Consideration
                 I
                 found
                 that
                 the
                 Winds
                 passing
                 through
                 that
                 vast
                 and
                 mountainous
                 Desert
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 situate
                 a
                 great
                 way
                 up
                 in
                 the
                 Country
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 ,
                 all
                 those
                 three
                 Months
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 bringing
                 along
                 with
                 them
                 the
                 cold
                 Air
                 occasion'd
                 by
                 the
                 
                 Snow
                 with
                 which
                 those
                 Desert
                 Mountains
                 are
                 cover'd
                 ,
                 cause
                 these
                 surprizing
                 Effects
                 in
                 the
                 Neighbouring
                 Countries
                 under
                 the
                 Torrid
                 Zone
                 .
                 And
                 for
                 this
                 reason
                 I
                 don't
                 question
                 but
                 the
                 Situation
                 of
                 this
                 Country
                 is
                 capable
                 of
                 making
                 the
                 Ground
                 produce
                 good
                 Wheat
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 other
                 sorts
                 of
                 Grain
                 and
                 Fruits
                 ,
                 that
                 grow
                 in
                 the
                 Soil
                 of
                 Quito
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 in
                 like
                 manner
                 situated
                 under
                 the
                 Line
                 ,
                 or
                 very
                 near
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 yet
                 is
                 made
                 very
                 fertile
                 and
                 fit
                 for
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Grain
                 and
                 Fruits
                 ,
                 and
                 this
                 by
                 reason
                 of
                 that
                 fresh
                 Air
                 brought
                 thither
                 by
                 the
                 Winds
                 that
                 come
                 off
                 from
                 the
                 Mountains
                 which
                 are
                 cover'd
                 with
                 Snow
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LIV.
                 
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 River
                 Putomayo
                 ,
                 which
                 comes
                 from
                 the
                 new
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Granada
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 River
                 Yotau
                 ,
                 which
                 comes
                 from
                 the
                 Neighbourhood
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Cusco
                 .
              
               
                 SIxteen
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 we
                 felt
                 so
                 much
                 Cold
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 we
                 met
                 with
                 the
                 great
                 River
                 Putomayo
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 so
                 famous
                 in
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 Popayan
                 in
                 the
                 new
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Granada
                 .
                 This
                 is
                 a
                 very
                 great
                 and
                 wide
                 River
                 ,
                 because
                 it
                 receives
                 30
                 other
                 very
                 considerable
                 Rivers
                 before
                 it
                 falls
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
                 Those
                 that
                 inhabit
                 the
                 places
                 about
                 its
                 Mouth
                 call
                 it
                 Iza
                 ,
                 
                 it
                 comes
                 down
                 from
                 the
                 Mountains
                 of
                 Pasto
                 in
                 the
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Granada
                 :
                 there
                 's
                 abundance
                 of
                 Gold
                 found
                 in
                 the
                 Sand
                 and
                 Gravel
                 of
                 it
                 ;
                 and
                 we
                 were
                 assur'd
                 that
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 it
                 were
                 extremely
                 well
                 peopled
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 a
                 Troop
                 of
                 Spanish
                 Souldiers
                 coming
                 upon
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 found
                 Enemies
                 enow
                 to
                 constrain
                 'em
                 to
                 retire
                 with
                 some
                 loss
                 .
                 The
                 Names
                 of
                 the
                 Natives
                 that
                 inhabit
                 these
                 Parts
                 are
                 the
                 Yurinas
                 ,
                 the
                 Guaraicas
                 ,
                 the
                 Parianas
                 ,
                 the
                 Zyas
                 ,
                 the
                 Ahyves
                 ,
                 the
                 Cuvos
                 ;
                 and
                 those
                 that
                 are
                 nearest
                 the
                 Source
                 dwell
                 on
                 both
                 sides
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 as
                 being
                 the
                 Lords
                 and
                 Masters
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 call'd
                 the
                 Omaguas
                 ;
                 the
                 Aguas
                 of
                 the
                 Islands
                 call
                 'em
                 the
                 true
                 Omaguas
                 .
              
               
                 Fifty
                 Leagues
                 below
                 this
                 Mouth
                 of
                 Putomayo
                 ,
                 we
                 found
                 on
                 the
                 other
                 side
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 another
                 fine
                 large
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 takes
                 its
                 Rise
                 near
                 Cusco
                 ,
                 and
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 at
                 the
                 Latitude
                 of
                 three
                 degrees
                 and
                 a
                 half
                 ;
                 the
                 Natives
                 call
                 it
                 Yosau
                 ,
                 and
                 't
                 is
                 esteem'd
                 above
                 all
                 the
                 rest
                 for
                 its
                 Riches
                 ,
                 and
                 for
                 the
                 great
                 number
                 of
                 People
                 it
                 maintains
                 ;
                 the
                 Names
                 of
                 whom
                 are
                 these
                 ,
                 the
                 Tepanas
                 ,
                 the
                 Gavains
                 ,
                 the
                 Ozuanas
                 ,
                 the
                 Morvas
                 ,
                 the
                 Naunos
                 ,
                 the
                 Conomamas
                 ,
                 the
                 Mariavas
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Omaguas
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 the
                 last
                 Nation
                 that
                 dwell
                 upon
                 this
                 River
                 towards
                 Peru
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 consequence
                 are
                 the
                 nearest
                 Neighbours
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 have
                 on
                 that
                 side
                 .
                 This
                 Nation
                 is
                 accounted
                 to
                 be
                 very
                 rich
                 in
                 Gold
                 ,
                 because
                 they
                 
                 wear
                 great
                 Plates
                 of
                 Gold
                 hanging
                 at
                 their
                 Ears
                 and
                 Nostrils
                 :
                 and
                 if
                 I
                 don't
                 mistake
                 ,
                 these
                 Indians
                 are
                 the
                 same
                 with
                 those
                 I
                 have
                 read
                 of
                 in
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 the
                 Tyrant
                 
                   Lopez
                   Daguirre
                
                 ,
                 to
                 whose
                 Country
                 
                   Pedro
                   d'
                   Orsua
                
                 was
                 sent
                 by
                 the
                 Vice-roy
                 of
                 Peru
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 Discovery
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 Reputation
                 they
                 had
                 of
                 being
                 the
                 most
                 wealthy
                 People
                 in
                 America
                 ;
                 however
                 ,
                 
                   Pedro
                   d'
                   Orsua
                
                 miss'd
                 his
                 way
                 ,
                 and
                 instead
                 of
                 taking
                 the
                 River
                 Yotau
                 ,
                 sail'd
                 upon
                 an
                 Arm
                 of
                 another
                 River
                 which
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 some
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 other
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 when
                 he
                 was
                 fallen
                 down
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 he
                 found
                 himself
                 so
                 far
                 below
                 these
                 People
                 ,
                 whose
                 Country
                 he
                 went
                 to
                 discover
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 perceiv'd
                 it
                 impossible
                 to
                 get
                 up
                 to
                 'em
                 ,
                 not
                 only
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 Impetuosity
                 of
                 the
                 Currents
                 ,
                 against
                 which
                 he
                 was
                 afraid
                 to
                 hazard
                 himself
                 ,
                 but
                 likewise
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 Discontent
                 all
                 his
                 Souldiers
                 express'd
                 at
                 so
                 difficult
                 an
                 Enterprize
                 .
                 This
                 River
                 Yotau
                 abounds
                 with
                 Fish
                 ,
                 and
                 its
                 Banks
                 with
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Venison
                 and
                 wild
                 Fowl
                 ;
                 and
                 is
                 besides
                 very
                 Navigable
                 ,
                 because
                 it
                 has
                 a
                 good
                 Bottom
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 very
                 gentle
                 Current
                 ,
                 by
                 what
                 I
                 have
                 been
                 able
                 to
                 learn
                 from
                 those
                 that
                 dwell
                 upon
                 its
                 Banks
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 LV.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 utmost
                 Borders
                 of
                 the
                 People
                 call'd
                 the
                 Aguas
                 ,
                 who
                 possess
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 54
                 Leagues
                 along
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 River
                 Yurva
                 which
                 comes
                 from
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 Cusco
                 .
              
               
                 IN
                 following
                 the
                 Course
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 we
                 came
                 down
                 about
                 fourteen
                 Leagues
                 lower
                 ,
                 and
                 arriv'd
                 at
                 the
                 utmost
                 Bounds
                 of
                 the
                 long
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Aguas
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 a
                 Town
                 well
                 peopled
                 ,
                 wherein
                 they
                 keep
                 a
                 strong
                 Garison
                 ;
                 this
                 being
                 the
                 principal
                 Fort
                 they
                 have
                 on
                 that
                 side
                 to
                 resist
                 the
                 Irruptions
                 of
                 their
                 Enemies
                 for
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 above
                 54
                 Leagues
                 along
                 this
                 River
                 .
                 They
                 are
                 the
                 sole
                 Masters
                 of
                 its
                 Banks
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 their
                 Enemies
                 don't
                 possess
                 an
                 Inch
                 of
                 Land
                 there
                 :
                 but
                 the
                 Bounds
                 of
                 their
                 Country
                 are
                 so
                 narrow
                 ,
                 that
                 from
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 you
                 may
                 see
                 the
                 remotest
                 Villages
                 they
                 have
                 on
                 the
                 Continent
                 .
                 They
                 have
                 a
                 thousand
                 small
                 Rivers
                 that
                 fall
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 serve
                 to
                 convey
                 'em
                 into
                 the
                 Country
                 for
                 what
                 they
                 want
                 ;
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 the
                 Curis
                 and
                 the
                 Quirabas
                 are
                 their
                 Enemies
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Cachiguaras
                 and
                 the
                 Jucuris
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 .
                 We
                 could
                 not
                 come
                 at
                 the
                 sight
                 of
                 these
                 Nations
                 ,
                 because
                 our
                 Orders
                 would
                 not
                 permit
                 us
                 to
                 go
                 so
                 high
                 into
                 the
                 Country
                 ;
                 but
                 we
                 discover'd
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 a
                 River
                 which
                 we
                 may
                 
                 with
                 good
                 reason
                 call
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Cusco
                 ,
                 because
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 Relation
                 which
                 I
                 have
                 seen
                 of
                 the
                 Voyage
                 of
                 
                   Francis
                   Oreillane
                
                 ,
                 this
                 River
                 goes
                 North
                 and
                 South
                 from
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Cusco
                 ;
                 it
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 at
                 the
                 Latitude
                 of
                 5
                 degrees
                 ,
                 and
                 at
                 24
                 Leagues
                 distance
                 from
                 the
                 last
                 great
                 Village
                 of
                 the
                 Aguas
                 .
                 The
                 Natives
                 call
                 it
                 Yurna
                 ;
                 the
                 Country
                 is
                 well
                 peopled
                 ,
                 and
                 on
                 the
                 Right-hand
                 ,
                 as
                 you
                 enter
                 into
                 this
                 River
                 against
                 the
                 Stream
                 ,
                 are
                 the
                 same
                 People
                 I
                 have
                 spoken
                 of
                 before
                 ,
                 who
                 inhabit
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 Yotau
                 ;
                 for
                 they
                 extend
                 themselves
                 from
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 one
                 of
                 these
                 Rivers
                 to
                 the
                 other
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 dwell
                 between
                 'em
                 both
                 ,
                 almost
                 as
                 in
                 an
                 Island
                 ;
                 and
                 ,
                 if
                 I
                 am
                 not
                 mistaken
                 ,
                 it
                 was
                 by
                 this
                 last
                 River
                 that
                 
                   Pedro
                   d'
                   Orsua
                
                 came
                 down
                 from
                 Peru
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LVI
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Nation
                 of
                 the
                 Curuzicaris
                 who
                 possess
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 24
                 Leagues
                 along
                 this
                 River
                 :
                 Of
                 their
                 Husbandry
                 ,
                 and
                 Ingenuity
                 in
                 making
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Vtensils
                 ,
                 and
                 Earthen
                 Ware.
                 
              
               
                 TWenty
                 eight
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 River
                 Yurva
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 same
                 South-side
                 ,
                 begins
                 the
                 great
                 and
                 potent
                 Nation
                 of
                 the
                 Curuzicaris
                 ,
                 in
                 a
                 Country
                 all
                 cover'd
                 with
                 Mountains
                 and
                 Precipices
                 .
                 This
                 Nation
                 inhabits
                 
                 only
                 the
                 Bank
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 ,
                 and
                 possesses
                 above
                 24
                 Leagues
                 of
                 it
                 in
                 length
                 .
                 This
                 People
                 is
                 so
                 numerous
                 ,
                 that
                 their
                 Villages
                 are
                 very
                 near
                 one
                 another
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 we
                 could
                 scarce
                 make
                 four
                 hours
                 sail
                 ,
                 but
                 we
                 found
                 new
                 Plantations
                 ;
                 and
                 sometimes
                 we
                 found
                 their
                 Towns
                 so
                 long
                 ,
                 that
                 we
                 could
                 not
                 get
                 clear
                 of
                 'em
                 in
                 half
                 a
                 day
                 .
                 We
                 found
                 abundance
                 of
                 those
                 Villages
                 without
                 one
                 Soul
                 in
                 'em
                 ,
                 all
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 being
                 frighted
                 away
                 with
                 the
                 false
                 News
                 ,
                 that
                 we
                 put
                 all
                 to
                 Fire
                 and
                 Sword
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 the
                 least
                 Evil
                 they
                 were
                 to
                 expect
                 from
                 us
                 ,
                 was
                 to
                 be
                 all
                 made
                 Slaves
                 :
                 The
                 greatest
                 part
                 of
                 'em
                 retir'd
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 the
                 Mountains
                 :
                 But
                 tho
                 these
                 People
                 are
                 so
                 timerous
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 may
                 well
                 be
                 term'd
                 the
                 greatest
                 Cowards
                 upon
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 yet
                 we
                 saw
                 in
                 all
                 their
                 Houses
                 the
                 Marks
                 of
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 good
                 Husbandry
                 and
                 Neatness
                 ;
                 for
                 we
                 found
                 abundance
                 of
                 Provisions
                 which
                 they
                 had
                 laid
                 up
                 in
                 store
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 is
                 more
                 ,
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 Houshold-goods
                 ,
                 amongst
                 which
                 ,
                 the
                 Vessels
                 they
                 had
                 made
                 to
                 eat
                 and
                 drink
                 in
                 ,
                 were
                 the
                 neatest
                 and
                 most
                 commodious
                 of
                 any
                 we
                 had
                 yet
                 seen
                 through
                 the
                 whole
                 Course
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 .
                 They
                 have
                 in
                 the
                 Marshy
                 Places
                 where
                 they
                 dwell
                 ,
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 Earth
                 very
                 good
                 to
                 make
                 all
                 kinds
                 of
                 Vessels
                 ;
                 of
                 this
                 they
                 make
                 great
                 Pots
                 or
                 Jars
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 they
                 make
                 their
                 Drink
                 and
                 knead
                 their
                 Dough
                 ,
                 and
                 Pans
                 and
                 Pots
                 to
                 boil
                 
                 in
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 Ovens
                 in
                 which
                 they
                 bake
                 their
                 Bread
                 ;
                 they
                 likewise
                 make
                 Drinking-Cups
                 and
                 Basons
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 very
                 neat
                 Frying-pans
                 :
                 They
                 make
                 great
                 quantities
                 of
                 all
                 these
                 Utensils
                 to
                 carry
                 on
                 the
                 Trade
                 they
                 have
                 with
                 all
                 the
                 neighbouring
                 Nations
                 ,
                 who
                 having
                 occasion
                 for
                 all
                 these
                 pieces
                 of
                 Houshold-stuff
                 come
                 from
                 all
                 Quarters
                 to
                 procure
                 'em
                 in
                 this
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 carry
                 them
                 away
                 in
                 great
                 Burdens
                 ,
                 giving
                 in
                 exchange
                 for
                 'em
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 things
                 this
                 People
                 want
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 not
                 produc'd
                 in
                 their
                 own
                 Country
                 .
                 The
                 first
                 Village
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 of
                 our
                 Fleet
                 met
                 with
                 in
                 coming
                 up
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 they
                 call'd
                 the
                 Golden
                 Town
                 ,
                 because
                 they
                 found
                 some
                 pieces
                 of
                 Gold
                 there
                 ,
                 which
                 these
                 People
                 had
                 receiv'd
                 in
                 exchange
                 from
                 those
                 Indians
                 that
                 wear
                 Plates
                 of
                 Gold
                 at
                 their
                 Ears
                 and
                 Noses
                 .
                 This
                 Gold
                 was
                 carried
                 to
                 Quito
                 ,
                 and
                 upon
                 trial
                 the
                 greatest
                 part
                 of
                 it
                 was
                 found
                 of
                 the
                 ●●ineness
                 of
                 twenty
                 three
                 Carrats
                 :
                 But
                 the
                 Natives
                 observing
                 the
                 Greediness
                 of
                 our
                 Men
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 eagerly
                 they
                 hunted
                 after
                 more
                 of
                 these
                 little
                 Plates
                 of
                 Gold
                 ,
                 took
                 care
                 to
                 hide
                 ●em
                 all
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 in
                 a
                 little
                 time
                 they
                 were
                 none
                 of
                 'em
                 to
                 be
                 found
                 .
                 And
                 they
                 took
                 such
                 exact
                 care
                 of
                 the
                 business
                 at
                 our
                 return
                 ,
                 that
                 altho
                 we
                 found
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 of
                 these
                 Indians
                 ,
                 yet
                 there
                 was
                 but
                 one
                 of
                 'em
                 that
                 had
                 these
                 Far-pendants
                 ,
                 and
                 those
                 very
                 small
                 ones
                 ,
                 which
                 I
                 bought
                 of
                 him
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 LVII
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Golden
                 Mine
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 River
                 Yquyari
                 which
                 springs
                 out
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 yields
                 all
                 those
                 Plates
                 of
                 Gold
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 those
                 People
                 make
                 their
                 Pendants
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 Portuguez
                 Fleet
                 ,
                 as
                 they
                 came
                 from
                 Para
                 to
                 discover
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 could
                 not
                 get
                 any
                 certain
                 knowledg
                 of
                 many
                 things
                 that
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 met
                 with
                 there
                 ,
                 because
                 they
                 came
                 away
                 without
                 Interpreters
                 ,
                 and
                 could
                 obtain
                 none
                 to
                 inform
                 'em
                 and
                 give
                 'em
                 a
                 faithful
                 account
                 of
                 things
                 :
                 So
                 that
                 if
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 pretend
                 to
                 give
                 a
                 good
                 account
                 of
                 any
                 Matter
                 ,
                 it
                 must
                 be
                 only
                 from
                 what
                 they
                 have
                 learn'd
                 of
                 the
                 Indians
                 by
                 Signs
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 ordinarily
                 very
                 uncertain
                 and
                 equivocal
                 ,
                 because
                 every
                 one
                 is
                 apt
                 to
                 apply
                 them
                 to
                 what
                 his
                 Fancy
                 leads
                 him
                 ;
                 these
                 Difficulties
                 ceas'd
                 at
                 their
                 return
                 ,
                 and
                 it
                 pleas'd
                 God
                 to
                 favour
                 us
                 with
                 such
                 good
                 Interpreters
                 ,
                 that
                 I
                 can
                 affirm
                 that
                 all
                 that
                 is
                 contain'd
                 in
                 this
                 Relation
                 ,
                 is
                 written
                 upon
                 the
                 certain
                 Knowledg
                 and
                 ample
                 Discovery
                 of
                 all
                 things
                 by
                 the
                 means
                 of
                 the
                 Interpreters
                 we
                 carried
                 with
                 us
                 .
                 'T
                 is
                 from
                 them
                 I
                 have
                 the
                 Account
                 I
                 am
                 now
                 going
                 to
                 give
                 of
                 that
                 Mine
                 from
                 whence
                 the
                 Natives
                 have
                 those
                 Golden
                 Pendants
                 for
                 their
                 Ears
                 and
                 Noses
                 which
                 we
                 saw
                 .
                 Over
                 against
                 this
                 great
                 Village
                 
                 a
                 little
                 higher
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 ,
                 there
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 a
                 River
                 call'd
                 Yurupaci
                 ;
                 going
                 up
                 this
                 River
                 you
                 arrive
                 at
                 a
                 place
                 where
                 you
                 are
                 to
                 go
                 ashore
                 ,
                 to
                 cross
                 the
                 Country
                 for
                 three
                 days
                 Journey
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 which
                 you
                 meet
                 another
                 River
                 call'd
                 Yupara
                 ,
                 by
                 sailing
                 on
                 which
                 you
                 meet
                 with
                 the
                 River
                 Yquiari
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 that
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 call
                 the
                 Golden
                 River
                 ;
                 it
                 springs
                 from
                 the
                 foot
                 of
                 a
                 Mountain
                 hard
                 by
                 :
                 Here
                 the
                 Natives
                 amass
                 Gold
                 together
                 in
                 prodigious
                 quantities
                 ;
                 they
                 find
                 it
                 all
                 in
                 Spangles
                 ,
                 or
                 Grains
                 of
                 a
                 good
                 alloy
                 ;
                 they
                 beat
                 these
                 small
                 Grains
                 of
                 Gold
                 together
                 till
                 they
                 form
                 those
                 little
                 Plates
                 which
                 they
                 hang
                 at
                 their
                 Ears
                 and
                 Noses
                 ,
                 as
                 we
                 have
                 said
                 before
                 .
                 The
                 People
                 of
                 this
                 Country
                 that
                 find
                 this
                 Gold
                 ,
                 trade
                 with
                 it
                 among
                 their
                 Neighbours
                 ,
                 who
                 are
                 call'd
                 the
                 Mavagus
                 ;
                 as
                 for
                 the
                 other
                 they
                 are
                 call'd
                 the
                 
                   Yuma
                   Guaris
                
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 as
                 much
                 as
                 to
                 say
                 ,
                 the
                 Metal-gatherers
                 ;
                 for
                 Yuma
                 signifies
                 Metal
                 ,
                 and
                 Guaris
                 those
                 that
                 gather
                 it
                 up
                 :
                 and
                 under
                 this
                 general
                 Name
                 of
                 Yuma
                 they
                 understand
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Metals
                 ,
                 therefore
                 they
                 call'd
                 all
                 the
                 Iron
                 Tools
                 that
                 we
                 had
                 ,
                 as
                 Axes
                 ,
                 Hatchets
                 ,
                 Bills
                 ,
                 and
                 Knives
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 same
                 Name
                 of
                 Yuma
                 .
                 The
                 way
                 of
                 getting
                 to
                 this
                 place
                 seem'd
                 to
                 me
                 to
                 be
                 very
                 troublesome
                 and
                 difficult
                 ,
                 because
                 of
                 changing
                 the
                 Rivers
                 so
                 many
                 times
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 making
                 so
                 long
                 a
                 Journey
                 across
                 the
                 Country
                 ;
                 which
                 
                 giving
                 me
                 no
                 satisfaction
                 ,
                 I
                 could
                 not
                 be
                 at
                 rest
                 till
                 I
                 had
                 discover'd
                 an
                 Advantage
                 more
                 easily
                 attainable
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 I
                 shall
                 discourse
                 hereafter
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LVIII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Affectation
                 of
                 this
                 People
                 to
                 have
                 great
                 Holes
                 made
                 in
                 their
                 Ears
                 and
                 Nostrils
                 ,
                 at
                 which
                 they
                 hang
                 their
                 Plates
                 of
                 Gold.
                 
              
               
                 THese
                 Savages
                 go
                 all
                 naked
                 both
                 Men
                 and
                 Women
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 Riches
                 only
                 serve
                 'em
                 for
                 a
                 small
                 Ornament
                 with
                 which
                 they
                 deck
                 their
                 Ears
                 and
                 Noses
                 ;
                 for
                 they
                 put
                 the
                 Gold
                 they
                 get
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Mines
                 to
                 no
                 other
                 use
                 than
                 that
                 of
                 adorning
                 themselves
                 :
                 they
                 all
                 generally
                 have
                 their
                 Ears
                 bored
                 for
                 this
                 end
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 affect
                 to
                 have
                 the
                 Holes
                 made
                 so
                 vastly
                 wide
                 ,
                 that
                 one
                 may
                 almost
                 thrust
                 ones
                 Fist
                 through
                 the
                 Hole
                 in
                 the
                 tips
                 of
                 some
                 of
                 their
                 Ears
                 ;
                 this
                 is
                 the
                 place
                 at
                 which
                 they
                 hang
                 their
                 Jewels
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 commonly
                 wear
                 in
                 them
                 a
                 handful
                 of
                 Leaves
                 made
                 up
                 close
                 together
                 ,
                 to
                 keep
                 their
                 Ears
                 constantly
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 Figure
                 .
                 This
                 passes
                 among
                 'em
                 for
                 the
                 greatest
                 piece
                 of
                 Finery
                 in
                 the
                 World.
                 On
                 the
                 other
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 over
                 against
                 this
                 high
                 Country
                 which
                 the
                 Curazicaris
                 possess
                 ,
                 there
                 is
                 a
                 flat
                 Country
                 all
                 intersected
                 with
                 Rivers
                 (
                 and
                 particularly
                 
                 with
                 several
                 Arms
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 Caqueta
                 )
                 which
                 run
                 along
                 through
                 it
                 :
                 so
                 that
                 this
                 Country
                 is
                 all
                 made
                 up
                 of
                 Islands
                 inclos'd
                 by
                 great
                 Lakes
                 ,
                 that
                 extend
                 several
                 Leagues
                 in
                 length
                 ,
                 till
                 at
                 last
                 all
                 these
                 Waters
                 crowd
                 together
                 ,
                 and
                 pour
                 themselves
                 into
                 the
                 Rionegro
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 fall
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
                 All
                 these
                 Islands
                 are
                 peopled
                 with
                 many
                 different
                 Nations
                 ,
                 but
                 those
                 that
                 possess
                 the
                 most
                 Land
                 are
                 the
                 Zuavas
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LIX
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 River
                 Yupara
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 short
                 Cut
                 it
                 makes
                 to
                 the
                 Golden
                 Mountain
                 .
              
               
                 FOurteen
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 Village
                 which
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 call
                 the
                 Golden
                 Town
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 ,
                 we
                 saw
                 the
                 mouth
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 Yupara
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 that
                 by
                 which
                 one
                 may
                 enter
                 into
                 the
                 Golden
                 River
                 ;
                 and
                 this
                 is
                 the
                 most
                 direct
                 ,
                 the
                 most
                 sure
                 ,
                 and
                 shortest
                 way
                 to
                 come
                 at
                 that
                 Golden
                 Mountain
                 that
                 is
                 so
                 vastly
                 rich
                 .
                 This
                 Mouth
                 is
                 at
                 the
                 Latitude
                 of
                 two
                 degrees
                 and
                 a
                 half
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 is
                 that
                 Village
                 which
                 is
                 situate
                 four
                 Leagues
                 lower
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 on
                 the
                 Edg
                 of
                 a
                 great
                 Precipice
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 foot
                 of
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 another
                 great
                 and
                 fine
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Natives
                 call
                 Tapi
                 ,
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 which
                 are
                 inhabited
                 by
                 a
                 great
                 number
                 of
                 
                 Indians
                 call'd
                 the
                 Paguavos
                 .
                 I
                 have
                 already
                 said
                 that
                 the
                 Nation
                 of
                 the
                 Curazicaris
                 takes
                 up
                 above
                 four
                 and
                 twenty
                 Leagues
                 of
                 the
                 Length
                 of
                 this
                 Country
                 ;
                 and
                 I
                 add
                 ,
                 that
                 all
                 their
                 Lands
                 are
                 very
                 high
                 Ground
                 ,
                 where
                 you
                 may
                 see
                 very
                 pleasant
                 Fields
                 and
                 fine
                 Pastures
                 for
                 Cattel
                 ;
                 there
                 are
                 also
                 Groves
                 of
                 Trees
                 that
                 extend
                 a
                 great
                 length
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 Lakes
                 that
                 abound
                 with
                 Fish
                 ;
                 which
                 would
                 be
                 a
                 great
                 advantage
                 to
                 any
                 that
                 should
                 make
                 Plantations
                 in
                 those
                 parts
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LX.
                 
              
               
                 An
                 Account
                 of
                 many
                 other
                 Nations
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 divers
                 Rivers
                 that
                 descend
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ;
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 Golden
                 Lake
                 that
                 is
                 so
                 famous
                 in
                 Peru.
                 
              
               
                 TWenty
                 six
                 Leagues
                 below
                 Tapi
                 the
                 River
                 Catua
                 falls
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 it
                 forms
                 a
                 great
                 Lake
                 of
                 Water
                 ,
                 that
                 looks
                 green
                 ;
                 it
                 has
                 its
                 Source
                 far
                 up
                 in
                 the
                 Country
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 ,
                 and
                 its
                 Banks
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 those
                 of
                 other
                 Rivers
                 ,
                 are
                 peopled
                 with
                 Indians
                 :
                 Yet
                 't
                 is
                 said
                 ,
                 another
                 River
                 ,
                 that
                 comes
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 ,
                 and
                 falls
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 six
                 Leagues
                 below
                 Tapi
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 called
                 Agaranatuba
                 ,
                 far
                 exceeds
                 all
                 the
                 other
                 Rivers
                 for
                 the
                 multitude
                 of
                 different
                 Nations
                 that
                 inhabit
                 its
                 Banks
                 .
                 One
                 
                 may
                 also
                 have
                 Communication
                 with
                 the
                 River
                 Yupara
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 we
                 have
                 spoken
                 above
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 way
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 .
                 The
                 People
                 it
                 maintains
                 are
                 called
                 the
                 Yacarets
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 All
                 these
                 Nations
                 speak
                 two
                 different
                 Languages
                 ,
                 and
                 't
                 is
                 in
                 their
                 Country
                 (
                 if
                 what
                 is
                 talked
                 in
                 the
                 new
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Granada
                 be
                 true
                 )
                 that
                 this
                 so
                 much
                 desired
                 Golden
                 Lake
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 found
                 *
                 ,
                 which
                 has
                 so
                 long
                 made
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 Peru
                 very
                 uneasy
                 .
                 I
                 don't
                 affirm
                 this
                 as
                 a
                 Certainty
                 :
                 It
                 may
                 be
                 it
                 will
                 please
                 God
                 one
                 day
                 to
                 put
                 this
                 Matter
                 out
                 of
                 doubt
                 .
                 There
                 is
                 another
                 River
                 that
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 sixteen
                 Leagues
                 lower
                 than
                 Araganatuba
                 ,
                 and
                 bears
                 the
                 same
                 Name
                 ;
                 but
                 
                 it
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 observ'd
                 that
                 these
                 two
                 are
                 indeed
                 one
                 and
                 the
                 same
                 River
                 divided
                 into
                 two
                 different
                 Arms
                 ,
                 and
                 therefore
                 both
                 bear
                 the
                 same
                 Name
                 ,
                 till
                 they
                 empty
                 themselves
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
                 Two
                 and
                 twenty
                 Leagues
                 below
                 this
                 last
                 Arm
                 of
                 Araganatuba
                 ,
                 are
                 the
                 utmost
                 Limits
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 and
                 rich
                 Nation
                 of
                 the
                 Curazicaris
                 ,
                 who
                 inhabit
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 best
                 Cantons
                 of
                 Land
                 we
                 have
                 met
                 with
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 Extent
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXI
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 warlike
                 People
                 called
                 Yorimaus
                 .
              
               
                 TWO
                 Leagues
                 lower
                 begins
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 the
                 most
                 renown'd
                 and
                 warlike
                 Nation
                 of
                 any
                 all
                 along
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ;
                 these
                 People
                 made
                 all
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 Fleet
                 tremble
                 when
                 they
                 went
                 to
                 land
                 in
                 their
                 Countrey
                 ,
                 as
                 they
                 came
                 up
                 from
                 Para.
                 They
                 are
                 call'd
                 the
                 Yorimaus
                 ,
                 they
                 dwell
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 only
                 possess
                 all
                 the
                 Continent
                 along
                 its
                 Banks
                 for
                 above
                 sixty
                 Leagues
                 successively
                 ,
                 but
                 likewise
                 the
                 greatest
                 part
                 of
                 all
                 those
                 Islands
                 the
                 Amazone
                 makes
                 in
                 that
                 long
                 space
                 :
                 for
                 tho
                 the
                 Extent
                 of
                 Land
                 this
                 People
                 possess
                 is
                 confin'd
                 within
                 the
                 Space
                 of
                 a
                 little
                 above
                 sixty
                 Leagues
                 on
                 the
                 River
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 yet
                 having
                 all
                 the
                 Islands
                 besides
                 within
                 the
                 
                 same
                 space
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 the
                 Continent
                 a
                 good
                 way
                 up
                 in
                 the
                 Countrey
                 ,
                 they
                 are
                 as
                 numerous
                 as
                 any
                 Nation
                 we
                 saw
                 wherever
                 we
                 set
                 foot
                 to
                 land
                 all
                 along
                 the
                 River
                 .
                 The
                 greatest
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 Yorimaus
                 are
                 well
                 made
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 a
                 better
                 Shape
                 than
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 Indians
                 ;
                 they
                 go
                 naked
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 others
                 ,
                 but
                 one
                 may
                 well
                 see
                 by
                 the
                 Air
                 of
                 their
                 Countenances
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 have
                 a
                 greater
                 dependance
                 upon
                 their
                 Courage
                 than
                 the
                 other
                 Savages
                 :
                 they
                 came
                 amongst
                 us
                 ,
                 and
                 went
                 from
                 us
                 with
                 the
                 greatest
                 Assurance
                 that
                 could
                 be
                 ;
                 and
                 there
                 pass'd
                 no
                 day
                 ,
                 but
                 above
                 200
                 Canoos
                 full
                 of
                 Women
                 and
                 Children
                 came
                 aboard
                 our
                 Admiral
                 ,
                 bringing
                 with
                 them
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Fruits
                 ,
                 Fishes
                 ,
                 Meal
                 and
                 other
                 things
                 ,
                 which
                 we
                 bought
                 of
                 'em
                 in
                 exchange
                 for
                 Glass-Buttons
                 ,
                 Needles
                 and
                 Knives
                 .
                 This
                 was
                 at
                 the
                 first
                 Village
                 of
                 the
                 Yorimaus
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 built
                 at
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 a
                 fine
                 River
                 ,
                 that
                 seemed
                 to
                 us
                 to
                 be
                 very
                 impetuous
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 great
                 Force
                 with
                 which
                 it
                 repuls'd
                 the
                 Waters
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 as
                 it
                 ran
                 into
                 it
                 .
                 I
                 don't
                 doubt
                 but
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 it
                 are
                 inhabited
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 those
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 others
                 ,
                 by
                 many
                 different
                 Nations
                 ;
                 but
                 we
                 could
                 not
                 learn
                 the
                 Names
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 because
                 our
                 Fleet
                 only
                 pass'd
                 by
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Length
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 which
                 these
                 People
                 possess
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 great
                 Islands
                 they
                 inhabit
                 in
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 .
              
               
                 TWo
                 and
                 twenty
                 Leagues
                 below
                 this
                 first
                 Plantation
                 of
                 the
                 Yorimaus
                 ,
                 we
                 met
                 with
                 the
                 greatest
                 Village
                 we
                 had
                 yet
                 seen
                 on
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 :
                 The
                 Houses
                 joined
                 to
                 one
                 another
                 ,
                 and
                 continued
                 so
                 to
                 do
                 above
                 a
                 League
                 in
                 length
                 :
                 each
                 of
                 these
                 Houses
                 contains
                 not
                 only
                 one
                 Family
                 ,
                 as
                 is
                 customary
                 in
                 most
                 Cities
                 in
                 Europe
                 ,
                 but
                 in
                 those
                 that
                 were
                 least
                 filld
                 there
                 dwelt
                 4
                 or
                 5
                 entire
                 Families
                 ,
                 and
                 more
                 in
                 the
                 greatest
                 part
                 of
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 By
                 this
                 may
                 be
                 conjectur'd
                 what
                 an
                 incredible
                 multitude
                 of
                 people
                 must
                 needs
                 live
                 in
                 that
                 one
                 Town
                 .
                 We
                 went
                 to
                 their
                 Houses
                 ,
                 and
                 found
                 all
                 there
                 in
                 profound
                 Peace
                 .
                 They
                 waited
                 for
                 our
                 coming
                 ,
                 without
                 being
                 at
                 all
                 alarm'd
                 by
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 furnished
                 us
                 with
                 all
                 necessary
                 Provisions
                 ,
                 which
                 our
                 Fleet
                 began
                 now
                 to
                 want
                 .
                 We
                 continued
                 five
                 days
                 in
                 this
                 Place
                 ,
                 and
                 stor'd
                 our selves
                 here
                 with
                 a
                 Provision
                 of
                 above
                 five
                 hundred
                 Measures
                 of
                 Meal
                 of
                 *
                 Magnioc
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 we
                 had
                 more
                 than
                 enough
                 
                 of
                 it
                 to
                 accomplish
                 our
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 which
                 as
                 we
                 continued
                 from
                 thence
                 ,
                 we
                 perpetually
                 met
                 with
                 the
                 Villages
                 of
                 this
                 Nation
                 one
                 soon
                 after
                 another
                 ;
                 at
                 last
                 we
                 arriv'd
                 at
                 a
                 place
                 thirty
                 Leagues
                 below
                 this
                 great
                 Town
                 ,
                 which
                 in
                 all
                 appearance
                 is
                 the
                 chief
                 Strength
                 of
                 this
                 Nation
                 .
                 'T
                 is
                 a
                 great
                 Island
                 made
                 by
                 one
                 Arm
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 as
                 it
                 goes
                 to
                 join
                 it self
                 to
                 another
                 River
                 that
                 comes
                 to
                 fall
                 into
                 it
                 ;
                 and
                 both
                 together
                 run
                 against
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 this
                 last
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 inhabited
                 by
                 so
                 great
                 a
                 Multitude
                 of
                 people
                 ,
                 that
                 't
                 is
                 not
                 without
                 reason
                 that
                 their
                 Neighbours
                 fear
                 and
                 respect
                 'em
                 ,
                 if
                 it
                 were
                 only
                 for
                 their
                 Numbers
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXIII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Extent
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Yorimaus
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Cuchiguara
                 .
                 Of
                 a
                 People
                 so
                 ingenious
                 in
                 working
                 of
                 Wood
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 equal
                 the
                 best
                 Masters
                 in
                 Europe
                 .
              
               
                 TEN
                 Leagues
                 below
                 this
                 Island
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Yorimaus
                 ends
                 ;
                 and
                 two
                 Leagues
                 farther
                 we
                 found
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 a
                 famous
                 River
                 which
                 the
                 Indians
                 call
                 Cuchiguara
                 ;
                 't
                 is
                 navigable
                 ,
                 tho
                 there
                 are
                 Rocks
                 in
                 it
                 in
                 some
                 Places
                 ,
                 and
                 't
                 is
                 very
                 full
                 of
                 Fish
                 ,
                 and
                 well
                 stock'd
                 with
                 Tortoises
                 ;
                 its
                 Banks
                 are
                 loaded
                 with
                 Maze
                 and
                 Magnioc
                 .
                 In
                 a
                 word
                 ,
                 it
                 has
                 every
                 thing
                 necessary
                 to
                 make
                 the
                 Navigation
                 of
                 it
                 easy
                 and
                 agreeable
                 .
                 All
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 are
                 peopled
                 with
                 different
                 Nations
                 ,
                 which
                 I
                 shall
                 name
                 one
                 after
                 another
                 successively
                 ,
                 beginning
                 with
                 those
                 that
                 dwell
                 at
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 going
                 on
                 with
                 those
                 that
                 dwell
                 along
                 the
                 River
                 upward
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 the
                 Cuchiguaras
                 ,
                 and
                 bear
                 the
                 same
                 Name
                 with
                 the
                 River
                 Cuchiguara
                 ,
                 &c.
                 and
                 in
                 fine
                 ,
                 all
                 the
                 last
                 are
                 call'd
                 the
                 Curiguiris
                 ;
                 who
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 Report
                 that
                 Persons
                 who
                 have
                 been
                 with
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 offer'd
                 to
                 conduct
                 us
                 to
                 them
                 ,
                 gave
                 us
                 ,
                 are
                 Giants
                 of
                 sixteen
                 Spans
                 height
                 ,
                 and
                 very
                 stout
                 ;
                 they
                 go
                 naked
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 the
                 others
                 ,
                 and
                 wear
                 great
                 Plates
                 of
                 God
                 at
                 their
                 
                 Ears
                 and
                 Nostrils
                 :
                 We
                 were
                 informed
                 that
                 't
                 would
                 be
                 a
                 Journey
                 of
                 two
                 Months
                 to
                 go
                 into
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 these
                 Giants
                 from
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 .
                 When
                 we
                 had
                 passed
                 some
                 space
                 farther
                 ,
                 we
                 found
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 the
                 People
                 call'd
                 the
                 Caupunas
                 and
                 the
                 Zurinas
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 the
                 most
                 ingenious
                 and
                 curious
                 handy-craft
                 Men
                 that
                 we
                 saw
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 Country
                 .
                 Without
                 any
                 other
                 Tools
                 than
                 such
                 as
                 I
                 have
                 spoken
                 of
                 before
                 ,
                 they
                 make
                 Chairs
                 in
                 the
                 Form
                 of
                 Beasts
                 ,
                 with
                 so
                 much
                 Curiosity
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 commodious
                 for
                 a
                 Man
                 to
                 sit
                 at
                 his
                 Ease
                 ,
                 that
                 I
                 think
                 the
                 Invention
                 of
                 Man
                 cannot
                 contrive
                 better
                 .
                 They
                 make
                 Estolicas
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 their
                 ordinary
                 Weapons
                 ,
                 of
                 a
                 very
                 slender
                 Stick
                 ,
                 with
                 so
                 much
                 Art
                 ,
                 that
                 't
                 is
                 not
                 to
                 be
                 wondred
                 at
                 that
                 other
                 Nations
                 in
                 the
                 Country
                 are
                 very
                 desirous
                 of
                 them
                 ;
                 and
                 which
                 is
                 very
                 strange
                 ,
                 they
                 'll
                 cut
                 a
                 rais'd
                 Figure
                 so
                 much
                 to
                 the
                 Life
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 exactly
                 upon
                 any
                 coarse
                 Piece
                 of
                 Wood
                 ,
                 that
                 many
                 of
                 our
                 Carvers
                 might
                 take
                 Pattern
                 by
                 them
                 .
                 'T
                 is
                 not
                 only
                 to
                 gratify
                 their
                 own
                 Fancies
                 ,
                 and
                 for
                 their
                 own
                 Use
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 make
                 these
                 Pieces
                 of
                 Work
                 ,
                 but
                 also
                 for
                 the
                 Profit
                 it
                 brings
                 them
                 ;
                 for
                 they
                 hereby
                 maintain
                 a
                 Trade
                 with
                 their
                 Neighbours
                 ,
                 and
                 truck
                 their
                 Work
                 with
                 them
                 for
                 any
                 Necessaries
                 to
                 serve
                 their
                 Occasions
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXIV
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 River
                 Basurara
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 great
                 Islands
                 it
                 forms
                 :
                 Of
                 the
                 People
                 that
                 inhabit
                 those
                 Parts
                 :
                 Of
                 their
                 Arms
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Commerce
                 they
                 have
                 with
                 the
                 Dutch
                 that
                 inhabit
                 Cayenne
                 .
              
               
                 THirty
                 two
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 Cuchiguara
                 we
                 met
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 another
                 River
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 ,
                 call'd
                 Basurara
                 by
                 the
                 Natives
                 :
                 This
                 River
                 extends
                 it self
                 a
                 great
                 way
                 up
                 in
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 forms
                 several
                 great
                 Lakes
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 the
                 Country
                 is
                 divided
                 into
                 divers
                 large
                 Islands
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 all
                 peopled
                 with
                 an
                 infinite
                 Number
                 of
                 Inhabitants
                 .
                 These
                 Lands
                 lie
                 very
                 high
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 never
                 overflow'd
                 by
                 the
                 Inundations
                 ,
                 let
                 them
                 be
                 never
                 so
                 great
                 .
                 This
                 Country
                 abounds
                 with
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Provision
                 ,
                 as
                 
                   Maze
                   ,
                   Magnioc
                
                 ,
                 all
                 kinds
                 of
                 Fruit
                 ,
                 Venison
                 ,
                 Wild-Fowl
                 ,
                 and
                 Fish
                 ,
                 and
                 yields
                 its
                 Inhabitants
                 a
                 liberal
                 Maintenance
                 ;
                 which
                 makes
                 it
                 abound
                 as
                 much
                 in
                 Men
                 as
                 in
                 all
                 other
                 things
                 .
                 All
                 the
                 People
                 that
                 live
                 in
                 the
                 large
                 Extent
                 of
                 this
                 Country
                 are
                 call'd
                 by
                 the
                 general
                 Name
                 of
                 Carabuyavas
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 divided
                 into
                 particular
                 Provinces
                 ,
                 some
                 of
                 which
                 are
                 call'd
                 the
                 Ceraguanas
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 All
                 the
                 Indians
                 use
                 Bows
                 and
                 Arrows
                 ;
                 and
                 among
                 some
                 of
                 them
                 I
                 saw
                 Iron
                 Tools
                 and
                 Weapons
                 ,
                 as
                 
                 Hatchets
                 ,
                 Halbards
                 ,
                 Bills
                 and
                 Knives
                 .
                 I
                 asked
                 them
                 ,
                 by
                 our
                 Interpreters
                 ,
                 from
                 whence
                 they
                 had
                 those
                 Instruments
                 of
                 Iron
                 :
                 they
                 answered
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 bought
                 them
                 of
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 that
                 Country
                 that
                 dwelt
                 nearest
                 the
                 Sea
                 on
                 that
                 side
                 ,
                 who
                 had
                 their
                 Goods
                 in
                 exchange
                 for
                 'em
                 ;
                 that
                 they
                 were
                 white
                 Men
                 like
                 us
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 use
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 Arms
                 ,
                 as
                 Swords
                 and
                 Guns
                 ,
                 and
                 had
                 Houses
                 upon
                 the
                 Sea-Coast
                 ;
                 that
                 the
                 only
                 difference
                 between
                 them
                 and
                 us
                 was
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 had
                 all
                 light-colour'd
                 Hair.
                 These
                 Tokens
                 were
                 sufficient
                 to
                 assure
                 us
                 that
                 these
                 were
                 the
                 Dutch
                 that
                 were
                 in
                 possession
                 of
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 Smooth
                 River
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 River
                 Philippe
                 ,
                 some
                 time
                 before
                 .
                 It
                 was
                 in
                 the
                 Year
                 1638
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 made
                 a
                 Descent
                 into
                 Guiana
                 ,
                 which
                 depends
                 on
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 the
                 New
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Granada
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 only
                 made
                 themselves
                 Masters
                 of
                 the
                 whole
                 Island
                 ,
                 *
                 but
                 came
                 upon
                 it
                 by
                 such
                 a
                 Surprize
                 ,
                 that
                 
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 had
                 not
                 time
                 to
                 carry
                 away
                 the
                 Holy
                 Sacrament
                 of
                 the
                 Altar
                 ,
                 but
                 left
                 it
                 in
                 Captivity
                 in
                 the
                 Enemies
                 hand
                 :
                 They
                 promised
                 themselves
                 a
                 great
                 Ransom
                 from
                 us
                 to
                 get
                 this
                 holy
                 Pledg
                 out
                 of
                 their
                 hands
                 ,
                 knowing
                 what
                 Respect
                 and
                 Love
                 the
                 Catholicks
                 have
                 for
                 the
                 precious
                 Body
                 of
                 their
                 Saviour
                 ;
                 but
                 our
                 Men
                 took
                 another
                 Course
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 ,
                 to
                 betake
                 themselves
                 to
                 their
                 Arms
                 ,
                 and
                 compose
                 good
                 Companies
                 of
                 Souldiers
                 who
                 were
                 resolved
                 to
                 go
                 with
                 the
                 Courage
                 of
                 Christians
                 to
                 expose
                 their
                 Lives
                 to
                 deliver
                 their
                 Saviour
                 from
                 the
                 hands
                 of
                 his
                 Enemies
                 .
                 They
                 were
                 big
                 with
                 these
                 just
                 and
                 pious
                 Resolutions
                 ,
                 which
                 could
                 only
                 be
                 inspired
                 from
                 Heaven
                 ,
                 when
                 we
                 parted
                 from
                 thence
                 to
                 return
                 into
                 Spain
                 ,
                 to
                 render
                 an
                 Account
                 of
                 our
                 Voyage
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXV
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 great
                 River
                 called
                 Rionegro
                 ,
                 [
                 or
                 the
                 Black
                 River
                 ]
                 because
                 its
                 Waters
                 are
                 so
                 clear
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 look
                 black
                 again
                 :
                 and
                 of
                 a
                 fit
                 Place
                 to
                 fortify
                 upon
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 would
                 be
                 a
                 means
                 to
                 obtain
                 the
                 Sovereignty
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 by
                 the
                 way
                 to
                 it
                 from
                 the
                 North-Cape
                 through
                 the
                 River
                 call'd
                 Riogrande
                 .
              
               
                 ON
                 the
                 same
                 North-side
                 ,
                 thirty
                 Leagues
                 or
                 something
                 less
                 from
                 Basurara
                 ,
                 we
                 met
                 with
                 the
                 largest
                 Mouth
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 finest
                 River
                 of
                 any
                 that
                 come
                 to
                 throw
                 themselves
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
                 It
                 runs
                 a
                 Course
                 of
                 1300
                 Leagues
                 in
                 length
                 ;
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 is
                 a
                 League
                 and
                 a
                 half
                 wide
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 at
                 the
                 Latitude
                 of
                 four
                 degrees
                 ;
                 and
                 to
                 speak
                 a
                 little
                 pleasantly
                 ,
                 one
                 may
                 say
                 ,
                 this
                 mighty
                 River
                 is
                 so
                 haughty
                 ,
                 that
                 't
                 is
                 offended
                 to
                 meet
                 with
                 a
                 greater
                 than
                 it self
                 ;
                 and
                 as
                 the
                 incomparable
                 Amazone
                 stretches
                 out
                 its
                 Arms
                 to
                 receive
                 it
                 ,
                 this
                 proud
                 River
                 disdains
                 to
                 be
                 so
                 embrac'd
                 as
                 to
                 lose
                 it self
                 in
                 the
                 other's
                 Waters
                 ,
                 and
                 therefore
                 keeps
                 separated
                 from
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 fills
                 up
                 half
                 the
                 Bed
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 it self
                 for
                 above
                 the
                 length
                 of
                 twelve
                 Leagues
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 the
                 Waters
                 of
                 the
                 one
                 may
                 be
                 easily
                 distinguished
                 from
                 the
                 other
                 by
                 those
                 that
                 sail
                 in
                 this
                 Channel
                 .
                 The
                 Portuguez
                 had
                 
                 some
                 Reason
                 to
                 call
                 this
                 the
                 
                   Black
                   River
                
                 ,
                 because
                 at
                 its
                 Mouth
                 ,
                 and
                 many
                 Leagues
                 above
                 ,
                 its
                 Depth
                 ,
                 together
                 with
                 the
                 Clearness
                 of
                 those
                 Waters
                 which
                 are
                 pour'd
                 into
                 its
                 Channel
                 from
                 several
                 great
                 Lakes
                 ,
                 make
                 it
                 appear
                 black
                 ,
                 as
                 if
                 it
                 were
                 dyed
                 ,
                 tho
                 when
                 it
                 is
                 put
                 in
                 a
                 Glass
                 it
                 looks
                 as
                 clear
                 as
                 Crystal
                 .
                 It
                 takes
                 its
                 Course
                 from
                 West
                 to
                 East
                 at
                 its
                 beginning
                 ,
                 but
                 has
                 such
                 great
                 Windings
                 ,
                 that
                 in
                 a
                 very
                 little
                 space
                 it
                 changes
                 its
                 Course
                 to
                 different
                 Points
                 ;
                 but
                 the
                 Course
                 it
                 runs
                 for
                 several
                 Leagues
                 before
                 it
                 empties
                 it self
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 is
                 again
                 from
                 West
                 to
                 East
                 .
                 The
                 Indians
                 that
                 live
                 upon
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 it
                 call
                 it
                 Curiguarura
                 ;
                 but
                 the
                 Toupinambous
                 ,
                 of
                 whom
                 we
                 shall
                 speak
                 presently
                 ,
                 give
                 it
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 
                   Vrama
                   ;
                
                 ,
                 which
                 signifies
                 [
                 
                   Black
                   Water
                
                 ]
                 in
                 their
                 Language
                 .
                 They
                 also
                 give
                 another
                 name
                 to
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 which
                 it
                 retains
                 in
                 those
                 Parts
                 ,
                 namely
                 ,
                 Pajanaquris
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 as
                 much
                 as
                 to
                 say
                 [
                 
                   the
                   Great
                   River
                   ]
                
                 ,
                 to
                 distinguish
                 it
                 from
                 another
                 ,
                 which
                 tho
                 it
                 be
                 a
                 great
                 River
                 ,
                 however
                 is
                 much
                 less
                 than
                 this
                 ,
                 and
                 named
                 Pajanamira
                 ,
                 which
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 ,
                 a
                 League
                 below
                 the
                 
                   Black
                   River
                
                 .
                 We
                 were
                 assur'd
                 that
                 this
                 River
                 was
                 inhabited
                 by
                 a
                 great
                 number
                 of
                 People
                 of
                 different
                 Nations
                 ,
                 the
                 last
                 of
                 which
                 wear
                 Clothes
                 and
                 Hats
                 like
                 ours
                 ,
                 which
                 sufficiently
                 convinc'd
                 us
                 that
                 th●se
                 People
                 were
                 not
                 remote
                 from
                 our
                 Cities
                 
                 in
                 Peru.
                 Those
                 that
                 dwell
                 on
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 the
                 Black
                 River
                 ,
                 possess
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 Ground
                 ;
                 they
                 are
                 call'd
                 Canicuaris
                 and
                 Curupatabas
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 last
                 Nation
                 is
                 that
                 of
                 the
                 Quaravaquazanas
                 ,
                 that
                 dwell
                 upon
                 one
                 Arm
                 of
                 the
                 Black
                 River
                 :
                 and
                 't
                 is
                 by
                 this
                 Arm
                 ,
                 as
                 we
                 were
                 sufficiently
                 inform'd
                 ,
                 that
                 one
                 may
                 pass
                 into
                 the
                 Riogrande
                 ,
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 which
                 goes
                 into
                 the
                 Sea
                 at
                 the
                 North-Cape
                 ,
                 near
                 which
                 River
                 the
                 Dutch
                 have
                 established
                 themselves
                 .
              
               
                 All
                 these
                 Nations
                 make
                 use
                 of
                 Bows
                 and
                 Arrows
                 ,
                 the
                 most
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 poison
                 with
                 the
                 Juice
                 of
                 Herbs
                 .
                 All
                 the
                 Lands
                 upon
                 this
                 Black
                 River
                 are
                 situate
                 very
                 high
                 ,
                 the
                 Soil
                 is
                 very
                 good
                 ,
                 and
                 if
                 manur'd
                 ,
                 would
                 yield
                 plenty
                 of
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Fruit
                 (
                 even
                 such
                 as
                 we
                 have
                 in
                 Europe
                 )
                 in
                 some
                 places
                 that
                 lie
                 well
                 to
                 produce
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 There
                 are
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 fine
                 and
                 pleasant
                 Fields
                 all
                 cover'd
                 with
                 excellent
                 Pasturage
                 sufficient
                 to
                 nourish
                 an
                 innumerable
                 stock
                 of
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Cattle
                 .
                 There
                 are
                 likewise
                 abundance
                 of
                 good
                 Trees
                 ,
                 the
                 Timber
                 of
                 which
                 is
                 very
                 good
                 for
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Carpenters
                 Work
                 ,
                 whether
                 for
                 Land
                 or
                 Water
                 :
                 And
                 besides
                 this
                 great
                 plenty
                 of
                 Wood
                 ,
                 the
                 Country
                 yields
                 very
                 good
                 Stones
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 in
                 vast
                 Quantities
                 ,
                 fit
                 for
                 the
                 noblest
                 Buildings
                 .
                 The
                 Borders
                 of
                 it
                 are
                 stor'd
                 with
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Game
                 .
                 Indeed
                 it
                 has
                 but
                 a
                 few
                 Fish
                 in
                 comparison
                 with
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ;
                 
                 the
                 reason
                 of
                 which
                 is
                 from
                 the
                 exceeding
                 Clearness
                 of
                 the
                 Water
                 :
                 But
                 to
                 make
                 amends
                 for
                 this
                 Defect
                 ,
                 the
                 Lakes
                 which
                 are
                 in
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 pour
                 their
                 Waters
                 into
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 yield
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 more
                 Fish
                 than
                 they
                 need
                 .
                 This
                 River
                 has
                 at
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 the
                 best
                 Situation
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 for
                 the
                 making
                 of
                 a
                 Fort
                 ,
                 and
                 plenty
                 of
                 Stones
                 to
                 build
                 it
                 ,
                 which
                 would
                 be
                 very
                 proper
                 to
                 hinder
                 our
                 Enemies
                 from
                 coming
                 by
                 this
                 River
                 to
                 enter
                 into
                 the
                 great
                 Channel
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ;
                 not
                 that
                 I
                 think
                 this
                 to
                 be
                 the
                 best
                 place
                 of
                 all
                 for
                 a
                 Fortification
                 for
                 such
                 a
                 purpose
                 ,
                 but
                 rather
                 several
                 Leagues
                 above
                 this
                 Mouth
                 ,
                 in
                 an
                 Arm
                 that
                 goes
                 to
                 cast
                 it self
                 into
                 the
                 River
                 call'd
                 Riogrande
                 ,
                 whose
                 Mouth
                 (
                 as
                 I
                 have
                 already
                 said
                 )
                 is
                 in
                 the
                 North
                 Sea
                 :
                 there
                 we
                 might
                 place
                 all
                 our
                 Forces
                 with
                 the
                 greatest
                 Certainty
                 of
                 entirely
                 stopping
                 the
                 Passage
                 of
                 our
                 Enemies
                 into
                 this
                 new
                 World
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 so
                 passionately
                 desire
                 to
                 discover
                 ;
                 and
                 which
                 they
                 will
                 some
                 time
                 or
                 other
                 attempt
                 ,
                 if
                 they
                 are
                 not
                 prevented
                 by
                 securing
                 this
                 Passage
                 .
                 I
                 dare
                 not
                 affirm
                 that
                 this
                 River
                 call'd
                 the
                 Riogrande
                 ,
                 into
                 which
                 the
                 Arm
                 of
                 the
                 Black
                 River
                 enters
                 ,
                 is
                 the
                 Smooth
                 River
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Philippe
                 ,
                 for
                 both
                 enter
                 into
                 the
                 Sea
                 toward
                 the
                 North
                 Cape
                 ;
                 but
                 by
                 all
                 the
                 Observations
                 I
                 have
                 made
                 ,
                 I
                 am
                 very
                 inclinable
                 to
                 believe
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 the
                 River
                 Philippe
                 ,
                 
                 because
                 't
                 is
                 the
                 first
                 considerable
                 River
                 that
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Sea
                 beyond
                 the
                 Cape
                 .
                 But
                 this
                 I
                 know
                 for
                 certain
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Riogrande
                 is
                 not
                 the
                 River
                 Orenoque
                 ,
                 because
                 the
                 principal
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 into
                 the
                 Sea
                 is
                 over
                 against
                 the
                 Island
                 of
                 
                   La
                   Trinidada
                
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 above
                 a
                 hundred
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 Place
                 where
                 the
                 Philippe
                 empties
                 it self
                 into
                 the
                 Sea.
                 It
                 was
                 by
                 this
                 River
                 that
                 the
                 Tyrant
                 
                   Lopez
                   Daguirre
                
                 pass'd
                 into
                 the
                 North
                 Sea
                 ;
                 and
                 seeing
                 he
                 made
                 this
                 Voyage
                 very
                 well
                 ,
                 some
                 body
                 else
                 may
                 as
                 well
                 succeed
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 Attempt
                 ,
                 and
                 follow
                 the
                 Course
                 which
                 another
                 has
                 steer'd
                 before
                 him
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXVI
                 .
              
               
                 A
                 Mutiny
                 happens
                 in
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 Fleet
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 see
                 themselves
                 so
                 near
                 home
                 without
                 having
                 got
                 any
                 Treasure
                 :
                 they
                 take
                 up
                 a
                 Resolution
                 to
                 go
                 and
                 pillage
                 the
                 People
                 upon
                 the
                 Black
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 get
                 Slaves
                 ,
                 but
                 are
                 prevented
                 by
                 Father
                 D'
                 Acugna
                 .
              
               
                 OUR
                 Fleet
                 lay
                 still
                 at
                 Anchor
                 in
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 Black
                 River
                 on
                 the
                 12th
                 day
                 of
                 October
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 Year
                 1639
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 Souldiers
                 calling
                 to
                 mind
                 that
                 they
                 were
                 now
                 almost
                 as
                 good
                 as
                 at
                 home
                 ,
                 and
                 had
                 got
                 nothing
                 these
                 two
                 Years
                 since
                 they
                 went
                 out
                 ,
                 began
                 to
                 look
                 upon
                 the
                 end
                 
                 of
                 their
                 Voyage
                 as
                 the
                 greatest
                 Misfortune
                 that
                 could
                 befal
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 tell
                 one
                 another
                 ,
                 that
                 since
                 they
                 had
                 reap'd
                 no
                 other
                 Advantage
                 by
                 all
                 the
                 Labour
                 and
                 Hardship
                 they
                 had
                 pass'd
                 through
                 but
                 the
                 loss
                 of
                 two
                 long
                 Years
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Increase
                 of
                 their
                 Miseries
                 ,
                 they
                 ought
                 to
                 consider
                 what
                 they
                 had
                 to
                 do
                 while
                 opportunity
                 offer'd
                 it self
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 it
                 would
                 be
                 a
                 ridiculous
                 thing
                 to
                 expect
                 of
                 his
                 Catholick
                 Majesty
                 the
                 Reward
                 of
                 those
                 Services
                 they
                 had
                 render'd
                 him
                 in
                 the
                 Discovery
                 of
                 so
                 many
                 Countries
                 ,
                 seeing
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 others
                 before
                 them
                 ,
                 who
                 had
                 been
                 prodigal
                 of
                 their
                 Blood
                 ,
                 and
                 hazarded
                 their
                 Lives
                 for
                 the
                 Advancement
                 of
                 the
                 Grandeur
                 of
                 Spain
                 ,
                 had
                 for
                 all
                 that
                 died
                 upon
                 a
                 Dunghil
                 ,
                 not
                 knowing
                 to
                 whom
                 to
                 apply
                 themselves
                 for
                 the
                 Relief
                 of
                 their
                 Necessities
                 .
                 These
                 seditious
                 Words
                 being
                 received
                 with
                 Applause
                 by
                 the
                 greatest
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 ,
                 they
                 immediately
                 resolv'd
                 to
                 speak
                 their
                 Minds
                 to
                 their
                 General
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 engage
                 him
                 one
                 way
                 or
                 other
                 to
                 fall
                 in
                 with
                 their
                 Designs
                 .
              
               
                 No
                 sooner
                 had
                 they
                 taken
                 up
                 this
                 Resolution
                 ,
                 but
                 they
                 addressed
                 themselves
                 to
                 him
                 ,
                 telling
                 him
                 ,
                 it
                 was
                 needless
                 for
                 them
                 to
                 represent
                 to
                 him
                 the
                 miserable
                 Condition
                 they
                 were
                 in
                 ,
                 since
                 he
                 knew
                 it
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 themselves
                 ;
                 that
                 they
                 had
                 now
                 been
                 for
                 two
                 Years
                 roving
                 up
                 and
                 down
                 upon
                 these
                 Rivers
                 ,
                 
                 where
                 they
                 were
                 every
                 day
                 in
                 danger
                 of
                 perishing
                 ,
                 either
                 by
                 Hunger
                 or
                 excessive
                 Labour
                 ,
                 or
                 by
                 the
                 Arrows
                 of
                 the
                 Savages
                 ;
                 and
                 therefore
                 begg'd
                 him
                 to
                 compassionate
                 their
                 Necessity
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 to
                 take
                 it
                 amiss
                 that
                 they
                 sought
                 some
                 Relief
                 ;
                 that
                 they
                 were
                 sure
                 that
                 only
                 along
                 the
                 Black
                 River
                 they
                 could
                 get
                 as
                 many
                 of
                 those
                 Slaves
                 which
                 the
                 Indians
                 had
                 taken
                 in
                 War
                 ,
                 as
                 would
                 turn
                 to
                 a
                 considerable
                 account
                 to
                 them
                 ;
                 and
                 tho
                 they
                 should
                 bring
                 nothing
                 home
                 from
                 their
                 Voyage
                 but
                 these
                 Slaves
                 ,
                 they
                 hop'd
                 they
                 should
                 not
                 be
                 ill
                 receiv'd
                 by
                 their
                 Friends
                 at
                 Para
                 ,
                 but
                 that
                 if
                 they
                 should
                 return
                 home
                 empty-handed
                 ,
                 and
                 should
                 bring
                 no
                 Slaves
                 with
                 them
                 after
                 they
                 had
                 pass'd
                 through
                 so
                 many
                 populous
                 Provinces
                 ,
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 which
                 durst
                 come
                 to
                 their
                 very
                 Doors
                 to
                 make
                 Slaves
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 they
                 should
                 be
                 reckon'd
                 the
                 most
                 cowardly
                 and
                 infamous
                 Wretches
                 in
                 the
                 World.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 General
                 considering
                 he
                 was
                 but
                 one
                 against
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 ,
                 and
                 perceiving
                 a
                 Mutiny
                 was
                 already
                 form'd
                 in
                 the
                 Minds
                 of
                 the
                 Souldiers
                 ,
                 thought
                 it
                 not
                 his
                 best
                 way
                 to
                 irritate
                 them
                 any
                 more
                 ,
                 but
                 gave
                 'em
                 permission
                 to
                 put
                 this
                 Enterprize
                 in
                 execution
                 ,
                 seeing
                 the
                 Wind
                 favour'd
                 their
                 Entrance
                 into
                 the
                 Black
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 seem'd
                 to
                 invite
                 'em
                 to
                 this
                 Project
                 .
                 The
                 Portuguez
                 were
                 transported
                 with
                 Joy
                 that
                 they
                 had
                 obtain'd
                 this
                 Leave
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 there
                 was
                 not
                 one
                 amongst
                 'em
                 but
                 promis'd
                 himself
                 at
                 least
                 300
                 Slaves
                 for
                 his
                 share
                 .
                 This
                 Resolution
                 gave
                 me
                 no
                 small
                 Uneasiness
                 ,
                 for
                 I
                 did
                 not
                 well
                 know
                 what
                 were
                 the
                 General
                 's
                 true
                 Sentiments
                 of
                 this
                 Attempt
                 ;
                 but
                 I
                 soon
                 found
                 both
                 that
                 he
                 had
                 Courage
                 and
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 Generosity
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 he
                 was
                 a
                 mortal
                 Enemy
                 of
                 such
                 Violences
                 as
                 the
                 Souldiers
                 were
                 going
                 to
                 commit
                 ;
                 for
                 my
                 part
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 Grace
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 I
                 thought
                 my self
                 strong
                 enough
                 not
                 to
                 need
                 fear
                 any
                 thing
                 ,
                 and
                 therefore
                 made
                 a
                 firm
                 Resolution
                 with
                 my self
                 ,
                 rather
                 to
                 die
                 a
                 thousand
                 times
                 if
                 it
                 were
                 possible
                 ,
                 than
                 consent
                 to
                 any
                 thing
                 that
                 would
                 be
                 against
                 the
                 Glory
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 or
                 against
                 the
                 Service
                 of
                 his
                 Catholick
                 Majesty
                 .
                 At
                 the
                 same
                 time
                 I
                 went
                 to
                 celebrate
                 the
                 holy
                 Mass
                 ,
                 and
                 after
                 I
                 had
                 done
                 ,
                 I
                 retir'd
                 with
                 my
                 Comrade
                 ,
                 that
                 we
                 might
                 consult
                 together
                 by
                 what
                 means
                 to
                 hinder
                 so
                 barbarous
                 and
                 diabolical
                 Resolution
                 ;
                 and
                 we
                 agreed
                 to
                 make
                 an
                 open
                 Protestation
                 against
                 their
                 Rashness
                 and
                 Disobedience
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXVII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Order
                 given
                 to
                 the
                 Fleet
                 to
                 set
                 sail
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 done
                 without
                 noise
                 .
                 And
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Wood
                 or
                 Cayary
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 divers
                 Nations
                 that
                 inhabit
                 its
                 Banks
                 ,
                 from
                 whence
                 there
                 is
                 a
                 short
                 cut
                 to
                 the
                 Mountain
                 Potosi
                 .
              
               
                 I
                 Communicated
                 our
                 Resolution
                 to
                 the
                 General
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 very
                 glad
                 to
                 find
                 me
                 of
                 his
                 Mind
                 ,
                 but
                 confess'd
                 nothing
                 could
                 be
                 more
                 bold
                 than
                 my
                 Protestation
                 .
                 However
                 ,
                 he
                 gave
                 signal
                 Proof
                 of
                 the
                 greatness
                 of
                 his
                 Courage
                 on
                 this
                 occasion
                 ;
                 for
                 he
                 caus'd
                 the
                 Paper
                 containing
                 my
                 Protestation
                 to
                 be
                 publish'd
                 through
                 the
                 Fleet
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 same
                 time
                 commanding
                 the
                 Sea-men
                 to
                 furl
                 the
                 Sails
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 put
                 all
                 things
                 in
                 readiness
                 to
                 pass
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Black
                 River
                 the
                 next
                 day
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 return
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 to
                 finish
                 our
                 Voyage
                 .
                 This
                 Order
                 was
                 put
                 in
                 execution
                 ,
                 for
                 we
                 went
                 back
                 the
                 day
                 following
                 ;
                 and
                 continuing
                 our
                 Course
                 40
                 Leagues
                 lower
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 ,
                 we
                 found
                 the
                 great
                 River
                 of
                 Wood
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 a
                 Name
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 gave
                 it
                 when
                 they
                 came
                 from
                 Para
                 ,
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 vast
                 quantity
                 of
                 pieces
                 of
                 Timber
                 this
                 River
                 carried
                 down
                 with
                 it
                 :
                 But
                 the
                 proper
                 Name
                 of
                 it
                 among
                 the
                 Indians
                 that
                 dwell
                 near
                 it
                 is
                 Cayari
                 ;
                 it
                 comes
                 (
                 as
                 I
                 have
                 said
                 )
                 from
                 the
                 South-side
                 ,
                 and
                 ,
                 as
                 we
                 were
                 told
                 ,
                 is
                 form'd
                 of
                 two
                 great
                 Rivers
                 ,
                 
                 which
                 meet
                 together
                 some
                 Leagues
                 above
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 .
                 And
                 in
                 all
                 probability
                 ,
                 seeing
                 it
                 was
                 by
                 this
                 River
                 that
                 the
                 Toupinambous
                 came
                 down
                 into
                 this
                 Country
                 ,
                 one
                 may
                 venture
                 to
                 affirm
                 ,
                 that
                 there
                 is
                 no
                 shorter
                 and
                 surer
                 way
                 to
                 come
                 at
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Potosi
                 ,
                 than
                 by
                 the
                 way
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 .
                 There
                 are
                 many
                 Nations
                 inhabiting
                 the
                 shores
                 of
                 it
                 ;
                 the
                 first
                 on
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 are
                 the
                 Zurinas
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Cayanas
                 ,
                 and
                 above
                 them
                 are
                 the
                 Vrarchaus
                 ,
                 the
                 Anamaris
                 ,
                 the
                 Guarinumas
                 ,
                 the
                 Curanaris
                 ,
                 the
                 Pepunacas
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Abacaris
                 .
                 From
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 as
                 you
                 go
                 down
                 the
                 Amazone
                 you
                 meet
                 with
                 the
                 Zapucayas
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Wbaringas
                 ,
                 who
                 are
                 excellent
                 Workmen
                 in
                 Wood
                 :
                 below
                 them
                 are
                 the
                 Guaranaquacos
                 ,
                 the
                 Maraguas
                 ,
                 the
                 Guimajis
                 ,
                 the
                 Burais
                 ,
                 the
                 Punovis
                 ,
                 the
                 Orequaras
                 ,
                 the
                 Aperas
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Nations
                 ,
                 of
                 whose
                 Names
                 I
                 can
                 give
                 no
                 certain
                 account
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXVIII
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Island
                 of
                 the
                 Toupinambous
                 ,
                 who
                 came
                 out
                 of
                 Brazil
                 when
                 it
                 was
                 conquer'd
                 by
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 themselves
                 Masters
                 of
                 this
                 Island
                 .
              
               
                 TWenty
                 eight
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 River
                 Cayari
                 ,
                 as
                 we
                 continued
                 our
                 Course
                 on
                 the
                 Amazone
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 ,
                 we
                 arriv'd
                 at
                 
                 a
                 great
                 Island
                 60
                 Leagues
                 in
                 breadth
                 ,
                 and
                 consequently
                 above
                 200
                 Leagues
                 in
                 compass
                 .
                 This
                 whole
                 Island
                 is
                 peopled
                 with
                 the
                 valiant
                 Toupinambous
                 ,
                 who
                 when
                 Brazil
                 was
                 conquer'd
                 ,
                 voluntarily
                 exil'd
                 themselves
                 from
                 their
                 Country
                 ,
                 choosing
                 rather
                 to
                 quit
                 all
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Fernambuco
                 than
                 to
                 lose
                 their
                 Liberty
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 submit
                 themselves
                 to
                 the
                 severe
                 Government
                 of
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 :
                 They
                 left
                 above
                 84
                 great
                 Villages
                 where
                 they
                 had
                 planted
                 themselves
                 ,
                 and
                 came
                 away
                 so
                 universally
                 ,
                 that
                 there
                 was
                 not
                 one
                 living
                 Soul
                 left
                 in
                 all
                 their
                 Houses
                 .
                 They
                 took
                 their
                 way
                 on
                 the
                 left-hand
                 of
                 those
                 great
                 Mountains
                 call'd
                 Cordeliers
                 ,
                 which
                 begin
                 at
                 the
                 Strait
                 of
                 Magellan
                 ,
                 and
                 cross
                 through
                 all
                 Southern
                 America
                 ,
                 from
                 North
                 to
                 South
                 .
                 They
                 pass'd
                 all
                 the
                 Rivulets
                 and
                 Rivers
                 that
                 descend
                 from
                 those
                 Mountains
                 to
                 discharge
                 themselves
                 into
                 the
                 Ocean
                 .
                 Some
                 of
                 'em
                 came
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 Peru
                 ,
                 and
                 dwelt
                 with
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 towards
                 the
                 Source
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 Cayari
                 :
                 they
                 continued
                 with
                 'em
                 some
                 time
                 ;
                 but
                 a
                 Spaniard
                 having
                 caus'd
                 one
                 of
                 'em
                 to
                 be
                 whipp'd
                 for
                 killing
                 a
                 Cow
                 ,
                 they
                 could
                 not
                 put
                 up
                 this
                 Injury
                 ,
                 but
                 resolv'd
                 all
                 to
                 be
                 gone
                 ;
                 and
                 making
                 use
                 of
                 the
                 Advantage
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 they
                 all
                 embark'd
                 in
                 their
                 Canoos
                 and
                 went
                 down
                 it
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 this
                 great
                 Island
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 now
                 dwell
                 .
                 They
                 speak
                 the
                 general
                 Language
                 of
                 Brazil
                 ,
                 which
                 extends
                 
                 through
                 all
                 the
                 Country
                 that
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 have
                 conquer'd
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 Maragnon
                 and
                 Para
                 :
                 They
                 told
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 when
                 their
                 Fathers
                 left
                 Brazil
                 ,
                 not
                 knowing
                 how
                 to
                 get
                 Sustenance
                 all
                 together
                 in
                 the
                 Desarts
                 through
                 which
                 they
                 were
                 to
                 pass
                 ,
                 they
                 were
                 constrain'd
                 during
                 a
                 March
                 of
                 above
                 900
                 Leagues
                 to
                 separate
                 by
                 reason
                 of
                 their
                 multitude
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 some
                 went
                 one
                 way
                 ,
                 and
                 some
                 another
                 ;
                 and
                 by
                 this
                 means
                 all
                 the
                 Mountains
                 of
                 Peru
                 call'd
                 the
                 Cordeliers
                 are
                 peopled
                 with
                 the
                 Toupinambous
                 .
                 This
                 is
                 a
                 very
                 brave
                 and
                 valiant
                 Nation
                 of
                 Indians
                 ,
                 as
                 they
                 made
                 themselves
                 appear
                 to
                 be
                 to
                 the
                 People
                 whom
                 they
                 found
                 in
                 this
                 Island
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 are
                 at
                 present
                 estastlish'd
                 .
                 For
                 in
                 all
                 appearance
                 these
                 Toupinambous
                 were
                 very
                 few
                 in
                 comparison
                 of
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 this
                 Island
                 when
                 they
                 arriv'd
                 there
                 ,
                 yet
                 't
                 is
                 certain
                 they
                 so
                 often
                 beat
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 entirely
                 subdued
                 all
                 those
                 they
                 fought
                 with
                 ,
                 that
                 after
                 they
                 had
                 destroy'd
                 whole
                 Nations
                 ,
                 they
                 forc'd
                 the
                 rest
                 to
                 leave
                 their
                 Native
                 Country
                 in
                 fear
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 go
                 and
                 plant
                 themselves
                 in
                 very
                 distant
                 Regions
                 .
                 These
                 Warlike
                 Savages
                 use
                 Bows
                 and
                 Arrows
                 with
                 great
                 dexterity
                 ,
                 and
                 have
                 so
                 noble
                 a
                 Courage
                 ,
                 and
                 Greatness
                 of
                 Mind
                 ,
                 that
                 in
                 these
                 Qualities
                 they
                 seem
                 not
                 to
                 come
                 behind
                 the
                 most
                 accomplish'd
                 Nations
                 in
                 Europe
                 .
                 But
                 tho
                 almost
                 all
                 of
                 'em
                 are
                 but
                 the
                 Children
                 or
                 Grand-children
                 of
                 those
                 that
                 came
                 from
                 Brazil
                 into
                 
                 this
                 Island
                 ,
                 yet
                 it
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 observ'd
                 that
                 they
                 begin
                 to
                 degenerate
                 from
                 their
                 Ancestors
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 Alliances
                 they
                 contract
                 with
                 those
                 of
                 this
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 their
                 accustoming
                 themselves
                 to
                 the
                 manner
                 of
                 living
                 us'd
                 by
                 the
                 original
                 Inhabitants
                 .
                 They
                 all
                 receiv'd
                 us
                 with
                 Demonstrations
                 of
                 extraordinary
                 Joy
                 ;
                 and
                 let
                 us
                 know
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 thought
                 to
                 resolve
                 in
                 a
                 little
                 time
                 to
                 enter
                 into
                 a
                 Treaty
                 with
                 us
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 put
                 themselves
                 in
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 the
                 Allies
                 and
                 Friends
                 of
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 Para.
                 This
                 Declaration
                 of
                 theirs
                 pleas'd
                 me
                 very
                 much
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 me
                 hope
                 that
                 no
                 small
                 Advantages
                 would
                 accrue
                 to
                 our
                 Nation
                 by
                 it
                 :
                 For
                 if
                 these
                 valiant
                 People
                 once
                 become
                 of
                 our
                 Party
                 ,
                 it
                 must
                 needs
                 be
                 an
                 easy
                 matter
                 for
                 us
                 to
                 bring
                 all
                 the
                 other
                 Nations
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 to
                 reasonable
                 Terms
                 ,
                 since
                 there
                 is
                 none
                 of
                 'em
                 but
                 tremble
                 at
                 the
                 very
                 Name
                 of
                 the
                 Toupinambous
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXIX
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Ingenuity
                 of
                 the
                 Toupinambous
                 ;
                 of
                 their
                 Language
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 Account
                 we
                 received
                 of
                 the
                 Salt-Pits
                 in
                 Peru.
                 
              
               
                 THese
                 Toupinambous
                 are
                 a
                 very
                 ingenious
                 and
                 intelligent
                 People
                 ;
                 and
                 having
                 no
                 need
                 of
                 Interpreters
                 to
                 treat
                 with
                 them
                 ,
                 
                 because
                 (
                 as
                 I
                 have
                 said
                 )
                 they
                 speak
                 the
                 general
                 Language
                 of
                 Brazil
                 ,
                 which
                 many
                 of
                 our
                 Portuguez
                 ,
                 that
                 have
                 been
                 born
                 and
                 bred
                 there
                 ,
                 speak
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 they
                 ,
                 we
                 had
                 the
                 Advantage
                 of
                 a
                 very
                 particular
                 Account
                 of
                 divers
                 things
                 ,
                 which
                 I
                 am
                 going
                 to
                 relate
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 may
                 be
                 believed
                 on
                 their
                 Report
                 ,
                 because
                 they
                 are
                 a
                 People
                 that
                 have
                 rov'd
                 abroad
                 ,
                 and
                 subjected
                 all
                 the
                 neighbouring
                 Countries
                 to
                 their
                 Power
                 .
                 They
                 told
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 near
                 their
                 Island
                 there
                 are
                 two
                 Nations
                 among
                 others
                 upon
                 the
                 Continent
                 that
                 are
                 very
                 remarkable
                 ;
                 one
                 of
                 'em
                 are
                 Dwarfs
                 as
                 small
                 as
                 little
                 Children
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 called
                 Guayazis
                 ,
                 the
                 other
                 is
                 a
                 Race
                 of
                 People
                 that
                 come
                 into
                 the
                 World
                 with
                 their
                 Feet
                 turn'd
                 behind
                 'em
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 those
                 that
                 are
                 unacquainted
                 with
                 their
                 monstrous
                 Shape
                 ,
                 and
                 should
                 follow
                 their
                 Track
                 ,
                 would
                 run
                 from
                 'em
                 instead
                 of
                 overtaking
                 'em
                 ;
                 they
                 are
                 called
                 Matayus
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 tributary
                 to
                 the
                 Toupinambous
                 ,
                 whom
                 they
                 are
                 obliged
                 to
                 furnish
                 with
                 Hatchets
                 made
                 of
                 Stone
                 to
                 fell
                 great
                 Trees
                 with
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 have
                 a
                 mind
                 to
                 clear
                 a
                 Piece
                 of
                 Ground
                 ;
                 for
                 they
                 frame
                 these
                 Hatchets
                 very
                 neatly
                 ,
                 and
                 't
                 is
                 their
                 whole
                 business
                 to
                 make
                 of
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 They
                 told
                 us
                 moreover
                 ,
                 that
                 on
                 the
                 other
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 Northward
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 seven
                 Provinces
                 adjoining
                 one
                 to
                 another
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 very
                 populous
                 ;
                 but
                 because
                 they
                 are
                 a
                 People
                 
                 but
                 of
                 mean
                 Courage
                 and
                 Strength
                 ,
                 and
                 only
                 feed
                 upon
                 Fruits
                 and
                 some
                 small
                 wild
                 Animals
                 ,
                 without
                 ever
                 fighting
                 one
                 with
                 another
                 when
                 they
                 are
                 angry
                 ,
                 or
                 ever
                 taking
                 up
                 Arms
                 to
                 defend
                 themselves
                 from
                 other
                 Nations
                 ,
                 they
                 are
                 of
                 no
                 account
                 in
                 the
                 Country
                 .
                 They
                 further
                 told
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 themselves
                 had
                 been
                 a
                 long
                 time
                 at
                 Peace
                 with
                 another
                 Nation
                 ,
                 whose
                 Confines
                 extend
                 to
                 those
                 we
                 have
                 just
                 spoken
                 of
                 ,
                 and
                 had
                 a
                 regular
                 Trade
                 with
                 'em
                 for
                 all
                 Commodities
                 ,
                 wherewith
                 either
                 Countrey
                 abounded
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 the
                 principal
                 thing
                 they
                 had
                 from
                 this
                 People
                 was
                 Salt
                 ,
                 for
                 which
                 they
                 gave
                 'em
                 other
                 things
                 in
                 exchange
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 this
                 Salt
                 came
                 from
                 a
                 Place
                 not
                 far
                 distant
                 from
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 If
                 this
                 be
                 true
                 ,
                 these
                 Salt-pits
                 would
                 be
                 of
                 great
                 advantage
                 to
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 ,
                 and
                 would
                 serve
                 'em
                 not
                 only
                 for
                 those
                 parts
                 of
                 the
                 Countrey
                 that
                 are
                 conquer'd
                 ,
                 but
                 also
                 for
                 the
                 more
                 commodious
                 establishing
                 of
                 Colonies
                 on
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 .
                 But
                 if
                 there
                 should
                 be
                 nothing
                 in
                 this
                 Story
                 on
                 this
                 side
                 ,
                 it
                 is
                 not
                 to
                 be
                 doubted
                 but
                 Salt
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 found
                 in
                 great
                 abundance
                 along
                 those
                 Rivers
                 that
                 come
                 down
                 on
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 Peru
                 ;
                 because
                 in
                 the
                 Year
                 1631
                 ,
                 when
                 I
                 was
                 in
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Lima
                 ,
                 two
                 Men
                 went
                 from
                 thence
                 at
                 two
                 different
                 times
                 to
                 seek
                 some
                 ,
                 and
                 came
                 back
                 with
                 as
                 much
                 as
                 they
                 could
                 carry
                 :
                 they
                 told
                 us
                 they
                 came
                 to
                 a
                 certain
                 Place
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 
                 went
                 on
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 Rivers
                 (
                 in
                 all
                 appearance
                 one
                 of
                 those
                 lesser
                 Rivers
                 that
                 form
                 that
                 great
                 one
                 ,
                 which
                 falls
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 )
                 and
                 arrived
                 at
                 a
                 Mountain
                 all
                 of
                 Salt
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 made
                 great
                 advantage
                 ,
                 being
                 become
                 very
                 rich
                 by
                 the
                 Traffick
                 they
                 had
                 in
                 exchange
                 for
                 it
                 from
                 those
                 Indians
                 that
                 came
                 a
                 great
                 way
                 to
                 buy
                 it
                 ;
                 not
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 any
                 strange
                 thing
                 in
                 Peru
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 to
                 see
                 Rocks
                 of
                 Salt-stones
                 ,
                 the
                 Salt
                 of
                 which
                 is
                 very
                 good
                 ;
                 for
                 no
                 other
                 is
                 made
                 use
                 of
                 in
                 all
                 that
                 Countrey
                 :
                 'T
                 is
                 got
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Rock
                 with
                 Iron
                 Instruments
                 in
                 great
                 pieces
                 ,
                 each
                 of
                 which
                 weigh
                 5
                 or
                 6
                 *
                 Arobas
                 .
                 This
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Toupinambous
                 is
                 sixty
                 six
                 Leagues
                 in
                 length
                 ,
                 and
                 ends
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 Town
                 situated
                 at
                 the
                 Latitude
                 of
                 3
                 Degrees
                 ,
                 as
                 is
                 also
                 the
                 first
                 Town
                 of
                 the
                 Indian
                 Aguas
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 we
                 have
                 spoken
                 before
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXX
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 an
                 Account
                 of
                 their
                 Manners
                 and
                 Customs
                 .
              
               
                 THese
                 Toupinambous
                 likewise
                 confirm'd
                 the
                 Report
                 which
                 is
                 spread
                 throughout
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 of
                 the
                 Renown'd
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 from
                 whence
                 it
                 borrows
                 its
                 true
                 Name
                 ,
                 
                 by
                 which
                 it
                 has
                 been
                 known
                 from
                 the
                 very
                 first
                 Discovery
                 of
                 it
                 to
                 this
                 day
                 ,
                 not
                 only
                 by
                 those
                 who
                 have
                 navigated
                 it
                 ,
                 but
                 also
                 by
                 all
                 Cosmographers
                 who
                 have
                 given
                 any
                 good
                 account
                 of
                 it
                 .
                 It
                 would
                 be
                 very
                 strange
                 if
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 Amazone
                 should
                 have
                 been
                 impos'd
                 on
                 this
                 River
                 without
                 any
                 reasonable
                 Ground
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 tho
                 it
                 well
                 deserves
                 a
                 Name
                 that
                 might
                 render
                 it
                 famous
                 ,
                 it
                 should
                 only
                 be
                 known
                 by
                 a
                 fabulous
                 one
                 :
                 This
                 does
                 not
                 seem
                 at
                 all
                 probable
                 that
                 such
                 a
                 River
                 as
                 this
                 ,
                 that
                 possesses
                 so
                 many
                 Advantages
                 above
                 all
                 others
                 ,
                 should
                 have
                 deriv'd
                 its
                 Glory
                 from
                 a
                 Title
                 that
                 does
                 not
                 belong
                 to
                 it
                 ;
                 like
                 what
                 we
                 see
                 in
                 some
                 Men
                 ,
                 who
                 when
                 they
                 have
                 not
                 Vertue
                 enough
                 to
                 obtain
                 the
                 Glory
                 they
                 desire
                 by
                 their
                 own
                 Merit
                 ,
                 are
                 so
                 mean
                 spirited
                 and
                 disingenuous
                 to
                 deck
                 themselves
                 with
                 the
                 advantageous
                 Qualities
                 of
                 others
                 :
                 But
                 the
                 Proofs
                 that
                 give
                 assurance
                 that
                 there
                 is
                 a
                 Province
                 of
                 Amazons
                 on
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 are
                 so
                 strong
                 and
                 convincing
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 would
                 be
                 a
                 renouncing
                 of
                 moral
                 Certainty
                 to
                 scruple
                 the
                 giving
                 credit
                 to
                 it
                 .
                 I
                 don't
                 build
                 upon
                 the
                 solemn
                 Examinations
                 made
                 by
                 the
                 Authority
                 of
                 the
                 Soveraign
                 Court
                 of
                 Quito
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 many
                 Witnesses
                 have
                 been
                 heard
                 that
                 have
                 been
                 born
                 in
                 those
                 Parts
                 ,
                 and
                 liv'd
                 there
                 a
                 long
                 time
                 ;
                 and
                 of
                 all
                 things
                 contain'd
                 in
                 their
                 Frontier
                 Countries
                 ,
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 principal
                 which
                 is
                 particularly
                 affirm'd
                 
                 by
                 'em
                 is
                 ,
                 that
                 one
                 of
                 those
                 Provinces
                 near
                 our
                 River
                 is
                 peopled
                 with
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 warlike
                 Women
                 ,
                 who
                 live
                 together
                 ,
                 and
                 maintain
                 their
                 Government
                 alone
                 ,
                 without
                 the
                 Company
                 of
                 Men
                 ;
                 that
                 at
                 a
                 certain
                 Season
                 of
                 the
                 Year
                 they
                 seek
                 the
                 Society
                 of
                 Men
                 in
                 order
                 to
                 perpetuate
                 their
                 Race
                 ;
                 but
                 at
                 all
                 other
                 times
                 live
                 together
                 in
                 their
                 Towns
                 ,
                 and
                 imploy
                 themselves
                 in
                 manuring
                 the
                 Ground
                 ,
                 from
                 which
                 with
                 hard
                 Labour
                 they
                 procure
                 all
                 Necessaries
                 for
                 the
                 Support
                 and
                 Comfort
                 of
                 Life
                 .
                 Nor
                 will
                 I
                 insist
                 on
                 other
                 Informations
                 that
                 have
                 been
                 made
                 in
                 the
                 new
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Granada
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 Royal
                 Seat
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Pasto
                 ,
                 where
                 several
                 Indians
                 were
                 examined
                 ,
                 and
                 particularly
                 one
                 Indian
                 Woman
                 ,
                 who
                 affirm'd
                 that
                 she
                 had
                 been
                 in
                 the
                 very
                 Countrey
                 which
                 these
                 valiant
                 Women
                 inhabit
                 ,
                 and
                 whose
                 Account
                 was
                 in
                 every
                 respect
                 conformable
                 to
                 what
                 had
                 been
                 before
                 asserted
                 in
                 the
                 foregoing
                 Relations
                 :
                 but
                 I
                 can't
                 conceal
                 what
                 I
                 have
                 heard
                 with
                 my
                 own
                 Ears
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Truth
                 of
                 which
                 I
                 have
                 been
                 enquiring
                 after
                 from
                 my
                 first
                 embarking
                 on
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ;
                 and
                 I
                 must
                 say
                 I
                 have
                 been
                 inform'd
                 at
                 all
                 the
                 Indian
                 Towns
                 where
                 I
                 have
                 been
                 ,
                 that
                 there
                 are
                 such
                 Women
                 in
                 the
                 Countrey
                 as
                 I
                 have
                 above
                 described
                 ;
                 and
                 every
                 one
                 that
                 gave
                 me
                 an
                 account
                 of
                 'em
                 did
                 it
                 by
                 Characters
                 so
                 exactly
                 agreeing
                 with
                 the
                 rest
                 ,
                 that
                 if
                 there
                 be
                 nothing
                 
                 in
                 it
                 ,
                 it
                 must
                 needs
                 be
                 said
                 that
                 the
                 greatest
                 Lie
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 passes
                 throughout
                 all
                 America
                 for
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 most
                 certain
                 Historical
                 Truths
                 .
                 However
                 we
                 had
                 the
                 clearest
                 Information
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 where
                 these
                 Women
                 dwell
                 ,
                 of
                 their
                 singular
                 Customs
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 Indians
                 that
                 correspond
                 with
                 them
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 Ways
                 into
                 their
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 those
                 Indians
                 with
                 whom
                 they
                 converse
                 to
                 prevent
                 the
                 Extinction
                 of
                 their
                 Race
                 in
                 the
                 last
                 Village
                 ,
                 which
                 makes
                 the
                 Frontier
                 Town
                 between
                 them
                 and
                 the
                 Toupinambous
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXXI
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 best
                 Account
                 of
                 the
                 Amazons
                 of
                 America
                 .
              
               
                 THirty
                 six
                 Leagues
                 below
                 this
                 utmost
                 Village
                 of
                 the
                 Toupinambous
                 ,
                 as
                 you
                 go
                 down
                 our
                 Great
                 River
                 ,
                 you
                 meet
                 with
                 another
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 ,
                 which
                 comes
                 from
                 the
                 very
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 known
                 among
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 by
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 Cunuris
                 .
                 This
                 River
                 bears
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 those
                 Indians
                 that
                 dwell
                 nearest
                 to
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 :
                 Above
                 these
                 first
                 People
                 higher
                 up
                 the
                 River
                 Cunuris
                 you
                 meet
                 with
                 other
                 Indians
                 call'd
                 Apotos
                 ,
                 that
                 speak
                 the
                 general
                 Language
                 of
                 Brazil
                 ;
                 higher
                 still
                 you
                 find
                 the
                 Tagaris
                 ,
                 and
                 lastly
                 the
                 Guacaras
                 ,
                 who
                 are
                 the
                 People
                 that
                 have
                 
                 the
                 Privilege
                 to
                 converse
                 with
                 these
                 valiant
                 Women
                 ,
                 and
                 enjoy
                 their
                 Favours
                 .
                 They
                 dwell
                 upon
                 huge
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 that
                 are
                 prodigiously
                 high
                 ,
                 among
                 which
                 there
                 is
                 one
                 that
                 lifts
                 its
                 Head
                 a
                 great
                 Height
                 above
                 all
                 the
                 rest
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 so
                 buffeted
                 with
                 Winds
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 quite
                 barren
                 ,
                 and
                 looks
                 very
                 bare
                 ;
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 it
                 is
                 Yacamiaba
                 .
                 These
                 Women
                 (
                 as
                 has
                 been
                 said
                 )
                 are
                 very
                 couragious
                 ,
                 and
                 have
                 always
                 maintain'd
                 themselves
                 alone
                 without
                 the
                 help
                 and
                 assistance
                 of
                 Men
                 ;
                 and
                 when
                 their
                 Neighbours
                 come
                 into
                 their
                 Countrey
                 at
                 a
                 time
                 concerted
                 with
                 them
                 ,
                 they
                 receive
                 'em
                 with
                 their
                 Weapons
                 in
                 their
                 Hands
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 Bows
                 and
                 Arrows
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 they
                 exercise
                 as
                 if
                 they
                 were
                 going
                 against
                 their
                 Enemies
                 ;
                 but
                 knowing
                 well
                 that
                 the
                 others
                 don
                 't
                 come
                 to
                 fight
                 ,
                 but
                 are
                 their
                 Friends
                 ,
                 they
                 lay
                 down
                 their
                 Arms
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 run
                 into
                 the
                 Canoos
                 or
                 other
                 little
                 Vessels
                 of
                 these
                 Indians
                 ,
                 and
                 each
                 Amazone
                 takes
                 the
                 Hammock
                 (
                 a
                 Cotton
                 Bed
                 they
                 hang
                 up
                 to
                 sleep
                 in
                 )
                 which
                 she
                 finds
                 next
                 at
                 hand
                 ;
                 this
                 she
                 carries
                 home
                 ,
                 and
                 hangs
                 up
                 in
                 a
                 Place
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Owner
                 of
                 it
                 may
                 know
                 it
                 again
                 when
                 he
                 comes
                 ;
                 after
                 which
                 she
                 receives
                 him
                 as
                 her
                 Guest
                 ,
                 and
                 treats
                 him
                 those
                 few
                 days
                 they
                 continue
                 together
                 .
                 These
                 Indians
                 afterward
                 return
                 to
                 their
                 own
                 Dwellings
                 ,
                 and
                 never
                 fail
                 to
                 make
                 this
                 Voyage
                 every
                 Year
                 at
                 the
                 appointed
                 time
                 .
                 The
                 
                 Girls
                 which
                 they
                 bear
                 are
                 brought
                 up
                 by
                 their
                 Mothers
                 ,
                 and
                 instructed
                 in
                 the
                 use
                 of
                 Arms
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 inur'd
                 to
                 Labour
                 ,
                 as
                 if
                 they
                 were
                 ambitious
                 to
                 advance
                 the
                 wonted
                 Valour
                 of
                 their
                 Predecessors
                 still
                 to
                 a
                 greater
                 Height
                 .
                 As
                 for
                 the
                 Male-Children
                 ,
                 't
                 is
                 not
                 certain
                 what
                 they
                 do
                 with
                 'em
                 :
                 I
                 saw
                 an
                 Indian
                 who
                 told
                 me
                 ,
                 that
                 when
                 he
                 was
                 a
                 Child
                 he
                 was
                 with
                 his
                 Father
                 at
                 such
                 an
                 Enterview
                 ,
                 and
                 assured
                 me
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 gave
                 the
                 Male
                 Children
                 to
                 their
                 Fathers
                 the
                 next
                 time
                 they
                 came
                 after
                 their
                 Birth
                 .
                 But
                 the
                 common
                 Report
                 is
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 kill
                 all
                 their
                 Males
                 as
                 soon
                 as
                 they
                 are
                 born
                 :
                 and
                 this
                 is
                 generally
                 suppos'd
                 to
                 be
                 the
                 truest
                 Account
                 .
                 Time
                 will
                 discover
                 the
                 Truth
                 of
                 this
                 Matter
                 .
                 'T
                 is
                 certain
                 they
                 have
                 Treasures
                 in
                 their
                 Country
                 ,
                 enough
                 to
                 enrich
                 the
                 whole
                 World
                 :
                 The
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 upon
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 which
                 the
                 Amazons
                 dwell
                 ,
                 is
                 at
                 the
                 Latitude
                 of
                 two
                 Degrees
                 and
                 a
                 half
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXXII
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 River
                 Vexamina
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Strait
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 where
                 it
                 is
                 but
                 a
                 quarter
                 of
                 a
                 League
                 in
                 breadth
                 .
              
               
                 AFter
                 having
                 cross'd
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 true
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 we
                 came
                 down
                 24
                 Leagues
                 more
                 upon
                 our
                 great
                 River
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 on
                 the
                 same
                 North-side
                 found
                 another
                 small
                 River
                 call'd
                 Vexamina
                 ,
                 which
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 just
                 at
                 the
                 place
                 wher
                 ,
                 this
                 great
                 and
                 spacious
                 River
                 grows
                 narrow
                 and
                 is
                 so
                 shut
                 up
                 by
                 the
                 Land
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 contracts
                 it self
                 into
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 a
                 little
                 more
                 than
                 a
                 quarter
                 of
                 a
                 League
                 .
                 The
                 Situation
                 is
                 extremely
                 favourable
                 for
                 the
                 building
                 of
                 two
                 Forts
                 on
                 the
                 two
                 Banks
                 of
                 our
                 incomparable
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 would
                 not
                 only
                 obstruct
                 the
                 Passage
                 of
                 an
                 Enemy
                 that
                 should
                 come
                 up
                 this
                 River
                 from
                 the
                 Sea
                 ,
                 but
                 would
                 also
                 serve
                 for
                 Custom-houses
                 for
                 the
                 Entry
                 of
                 every
                 thing
                 that
                 should
                 be
                 carried
                 down
                 from
                 Peru
                 this
                 way
                 ,
                 if
                 this
                 River
                 should
                 ever
                 be
                 inhabited
                 and
                 stock'd
                 with
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 our
                 Nation
                 .
                 Tho
                 this
                 Strait
                 is
                 at
                 360
                 Leagues
                 distance
                 from
                 the
                 Sea
                 ,
                 yet
                 the
                 flowing
                 and
                 ebbing
                 of
                 Tides
                 are
                 perceiv'd
                 here
                 ;
                 for
                 the
                 River
                 is
                 seen
                 to
                 increase
                 and
                 diminish
                 every
                 day
                 ,
                 altho
                 not
                 so
                 sensibly
                 as
                 some
                 Leagues
                 below
                 .
              
               
               
               
               
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXXIII
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 River
                 of
                 the
                 Tapajotos
                 ;
                 their
                 Courage
                 ,
                 their
                 poison'd
                 Arrows
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 manner
                 of
                 their
                 treating
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 Fleet.
                 
              
               
                 FOUR
                 Leagues
                 below
                 this
                 Strait
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 ,
                 is
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 and
                 noble
                 River
                 of
                 the
                 Tapajotos
                 ,
                 which
                 borrows
                 its
                 Name
                 from
                 that
                 of
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 which
                 it
                 waters
                 .
                 This
                 Country
                 is
                 well
                 stock'd
                 with
                 Indians
                 ;
                 the
                 Land
                 of
                 it
                 is
                 very
                 good
                 ,
                 and
                 abounds
                 with
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Provision
                 :
                 These
                 Tapajotos
                 are
                 a
                 couragious
                 People
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 dreaded
                 by
                 all
                 the
                 Nations
                 that
                 dwell
                 near
                 'em
                 ,
                 because
                 they
                 invenom
                 their
                 Arrows
                 with
                 so
                 subtile
                 a
                 Poison
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 kill
                 those
                 they
                 wound
                 ,
                 there
                 being
                 no
                 Remedy
                 found
                 powerful
                 enough
                 to
                 resist
                 their
                 Venom
                 .
                 This
                 was
                 the
                 only
                 Reason
                 why
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 themselves
                 were
                 so
                 long
                 their
                 Neighbours
                 without
                 having
                 any
                 Commerce
                 or
                 Alliance
                 with
                 them
                 ,
                 tho
                 they
                 were
                 very
                 desirous
                 of
                 obtaining
                 their
                 Friendship
                 ;
                 but
                 when
                 they
                 would
                 have
                 obliged
                 'em
                 to
                 quit
                 their
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 come
                 and
                 inhabit
                 the
                 Places
                 which
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 had
                 conquer'd
                 ,
                 the
                 Tapajotos
                 would
                 never
                 give
                 their
                 Consent
                 to
                 it
                 ,
                 because
                 nothing
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 touches
                 'em
                 more
                 sensibly
                 ,
                 than
                 to
                 talk
                 to
                 
                 'em
                 of
                 leaving
                 their
                 native
                 Country
                 .
                 Not
                 but
                 that
                 they
                 received
                 our
                 Men
                 very
                 kindly
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 Joy
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 landed
                 in
                 their
                 Country
                 :
                 We
                 had
                 large
                 Experience
                 of
                 their
                 Kindness
                 when
                 we
                 lodged
                 at
                 one
                 of
                 their
                 great
                 Towns
                 ,
                 which
                 contain'd
                 above
                 500
                 Families
                 ,
                 where
                 for
                 a
                 whole
                 day
                 they
                 were
                 continually
                 coming
                 to
                 visit
                 us
                 ,
                 bringing
                 us
                 Hens
                 ,
                 Ducks
                 ,
                 Fish
                 ,
                 Meal
                 ,
                 Fruits
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 other
                 things
                 we
                 wanted
                 ,
                 with
                 so
                 much
                 Freedom
                 and
                 Confidence
                 in
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Women
                 and
                 Children
                 did
                 not
                 care
                 to
                 go
                 out
                 of
                 our
                 sight
                 :
                 Nay
                 they
                 frankly
                 told
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 if
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 would
                 let
                 them
                 alone
                 to
                 enjoy
                 their
                 own
                 Houses
                 ,
                 they
                 should
                 come
                 if
                 they
                 pleas'd
                 ,
                 with
                 all
                 their
                 Hearts
                 ,
                 to
                 dwell
                 amongst
                 'em
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 they
                 would
                 receive
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 serve
                 'em
                 as
                 their
                 best
                 Friends
                 as
                 long
                 as
                 they
                 liv'd
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXXIV
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 ill
                 Treatment
                 these
                 People
                 receiv'd
                 from
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 at
                 this
                 time
                 .
              
               
                 ALL
                 the
                 Civilities
                 of
                 the
                 Tapajotos
                 were
                 not
                 sufficient
                 to
                 touch
                 the
                 Minds
                 of
                 People
                 that
                 mind
                 nothing
                 but
                 Self-interest
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Gratification
                 of
                 their
                 covetous
                 Humour
                 ,
                 such
                 as
                 those
                 that
                 go
                 to
                 conquer
                 these
                 Countries
                 ,
                 proposing
                 nothing
                 to
                 themselves
                 
                 in
                 so
                 long
                 and
                 difficult
                 an
                 Enterprize
                 ,
                 but
                 to
                 get
                 a
                 great
                 number
                 of
                 Slaves
                 to
                 sell
                 ,
                 or
                 truck
                 for
                 other
                 Goods
                 ;
                 who
                 therefore
                 had
                 scarce
                 Patience
                 to
                 hear
                 the
                 Proposals
                 of
                 these
                 poor
                 People
                 ,
                 much
                 less
                 so
                 much
                 Justice
                 as
                 to
                 treat
                 'em
                 with
                 Civility
                 and
                 Reason
                 ;
                 but
                 having
                 got
                 a
                 Notion
                 that
                 these
                 People
                 had
                 abundance
                 of
                 Slaves
                 to
                 wait
                 on
                 'em
                 ,
                 began
                 to
                 treat
                 'em
                 as
                 Rebels
                 ,
                 to
                 commit
                 great
                 Outrages
                 upon
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 menace
                 'em
                 with
                 a
                 cruel
                 War.
                 All
                 things
                 were
                 in
                 this
                 posture
                 when
                 we
                 arrived
                 at
                 the
                 Fort
                 of
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 call'd
                 Destierro
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 [
                 
                   the
                   Fort
                   of
                   Banishment
                
                 ]
                 where
                 their
                 Troops
                 were
                 coming
                 together
                 to
                 put
                 in
                 execution
                 this
                 barbarous
                 Design
                 .
                 I
                 not
                 being
                 able
                 wholly
                 to
                 hinder
                 it
                 ,
                 however
                 endeavour'd
                 by
                 the
                 best
                 Methods
                 I
                 could
                 take
                 ,
                 at
                 least
                 to
                 suspend
                 the
                 execution
                 of
                 it
                 for
                 a
                 little
                 time
                 ,
                 till
                 I
                 could
                 give
                 the
                 Governour
                 of
                 Para
                 advice
                 of
                 it
                 .
                 He
                 that
                 was
                 to
                 command
                 in
                 this
                 Expedition
                 was
                 
                   Benoise
                   Maziel
                
                 ,
                 the
                 Governour
                 of
                 
                 Para's
                 Son
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 constituted
                 in
                 the
                 Office
                 of
                 Serjeant
                 Major
                 of
                 the
                 State.
                 He
                 gave
                 me
                 his
                 Word
                 that
                 he
                 would
                 not
                 advance
                 to
                 put
                 his
                 Enterprize
                 in
                 execution
                 till
                 he
                 had
                 received
                 fresh
                 Orders
                 from
                 his
                 Father
                 .
                 But
                 I
                 had
                 scarce
                 left
                 him
                 before
                 he
                 embark'd
                 as
                 many
                 Souldiers
                 as
                 he
                 could
                 in
                 a
                 Brigantine
                 arm'd
                 with
                 Pieces
                 of
                 Canon
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 other
                 less
                 Vessels
                 ,
                 with
                 which
                 he
                 came
                 suddenly
                 upon
                 'em
                 to
                 surprize
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 
                 These
                 poor
                 People
                 immediately
                 accepted
                 Peace
                 ,
                 with
                 a
                 thousand
                 Testimonies
                 of
                 their
                 good
                 Affection
                 to
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 ;
                 and
                 when
                 they
                 had
                 submitted
                 their
                 Persons
                 to
                 their
                 pleasure
                 ,
                 Maziel
                 commanded
                 'em
                 to
                 bring
                 him
                 all
                 the
                 poison'd
                 Arrows
                 they
                 had
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 what
                 they
                 most
                 fear'd
                 :
                 These
                 poor
                 Wretches
                 presently
                 obey'd
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 were
                 no
                 sooner
                 disarm'd
                 but
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 made
                 'em
                 all
                 come
                 together
                 ,
                 and
                 inclos'd
                 'em
                 like
                 Sheep
                 in
                 a
                 Fold
                 ,
                 securing
                 'em
                 with
                 a
                 strong
                 Guard
                 ;
                 and
                 immediately
                 let
                 loose
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 Indians
                 of
                 their
                 own
                 Company
                 ,
                 whom
                 they
                 brought
                 with
                 'em
                 ,
                 who
                 for
                 doing
                 of
                 Mischief
                 are
                 like
                 so
                 many
                 unchain'd
                 Devils
                 ;
                 and
                 these
                 in
                 a
                 very
                 little
                 time
                 sack'd
                 this
                 whole
                 Town
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 they
                 spoil'd
                 and
                 broke
                 every
                 thing
                 in
                 it
                 ;
                 they
                 seiz'd
                 all
                 the
                 Daughters
                 and
                 Wives
                 of
                 these
                 miserable
                 Creatures
                 ,
                 and
                 committed
                 such
                 abominable
                 Violences
                 before
                 their
                 Eyes
                 ,
                 that
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 Company
                 that
                 gave
                 me
                 an
                 account
                 of
                 this
                 Action
                 ,
                 protested
                 to
                 me
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 had
                 rather
                 never
                 have
                 any
                 Slaves
                 ,
                 than
                 to
                 procure
                 'em
                 at
                 this
                 rate
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 he
                 would
                 sooner
                 leave
                 all
                 those
                 he
                 had
                 in
                 possession
                 ,
                 than
                 see
                 such
                 Cruelties
                 committed
                 again
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXXV
                 .
              
               
                 That
                 such
                 kind
                 of
                 Treatment
                 makes
                 these
                 People
                 hate
                 the
                 Europeans
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 they
                 have
                 as
                 much
                 Subtlety
                 as
                 Courage
                 to
                 defend
                 themselves
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 Inhumanity
                 of
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 did
                 not
                 stop
                 here
                 ;
                 for
                 they
                 having
                 no
                 other
                 design
                 than
                 that
                 of
                 procuring
                 Slaves
                 ,
                 were
                 not
                 satisfied
                 in
                 having
                 the
                 Masters
                 in
                 possession
                 :
                 therefore
                 they
                 endeavour'd
                 to
                 affright
                 these
                 poor
                 Indians
                 ,
                 whom
                 they
                 kept
                 under
                 Guard
                 ,
                 with
                 terrible
                 Menaces
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 'em
                 tremble
                 at
                 the
                 thoughts
                 of
                 the
                 new
                 Cruelties
                 they
                 said
                 they
                 would
                 exercise
                 on
                 'em
                 ,
                 if
                 they
                 would
                 not
                 give
                 'em
                 Slaves
                 ;
                 and
                 on
                 the
                 other
                 hand
                 promis'd
                 them
                 ,
                 that
                 if
                 they
                 would
                 ,
                 they
                 should
                 not
                 only
                 have
                 their
                 full
                 Liberty
                 ,
                 but
                 they
                 would
                 consider
                 'em
                 as
                 their
                 best
                 Friends
                 ;
                 and
                 besides
                 ,
                 would
                 give
                 'em
                 as
                 many
                 Iron
                 Tools
                 and
                 Cotton
                 Clothes
                 in
                 exchange
                 for
                 'em
                 ,
                 as
                 should
                 fully
                 satisfy
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 What
                 could
                 these
                 poor
                 Creatures
                 do
                 more
                 than
                 abandon
                 themselves
                 to
                 the
                 Discretion
                 of
                 their
                 Enemies
                 ?
                 They
                 saw
                 they
                 were
                 in
                 their
                 hands
                 ,
                 depriv'd
                 of
                 their
                 Arms
                 ,
                 their
                 Houses
                 plunder'd
                 ,
                 their
                 Wives
                 and
                 Daughters
                 ravish'd
                 .
                 They
                 therefore
                 offer'd
                 to
                 procure
                 'em
                 a
                 thousand
                 Slaves
                 ,
                 and
                 sent
                 some
                 of
                 
                 their
                 Company
                 to
                 get
                 'em
                 together
                 ;
                 but
                 these
                 poor
                 Wretches
                 were
                 fled
                 away
                 to
                 secure
                 themselves
                 while
                 the
                 Town
                 was
                 pillaging
                 ;
                 therefore
                 they
                 could
                 not
                 possibly
                 get
                 above
                 two
                 hundred
                 :
                 These
                 they
                 deliver'd
                 to
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 ,
                 and
                 promising
                 to
                 procure
                 all
                 the
                 rest
                 for
                 which
                 they
                 had
                 engag'd
                 ,
                 were
                 set
                 at
                 liberty
                 .
                 In
                 the
                 Condition
                 these
                 poor
                 Creatures
                 were
                 ,
                 they
                 would
                 have
                 given
                 their
                 very
                 Children
                 for
                 Slaves
                 ,
                 to
                 come
                 to
                 a
                 Composition
                 with
                 their
                 Enemies
                 ,
                 as
                 they
                 have
                 frequently
                 done
                 .
                 The
                 Portuguez
                 put
                 all
                 these
                 Slaves
                 in
                 a
                 Vessel
                 ,
                 and
                 sent
                 'em
                 to
                 Maragnon
                 and
                 Para.
                 This
                 I
                 assert
                 as
                 a
                 thing
                 I
                 saw
                 with
                 my
                 own
                 Eyes
                 :
                 This
                 Prey
                 was
                 very
                 grateful
                 to
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 ;
                 and
                 their
                 Success
                 in
                 this
                 Expedition
                 so
                 encouraged
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 excited
                 their
                 Avarice
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 soon
                 made
                 preparation
                 to
                 go
                 and
                 seek
                 a
                 greater
                 Booty
                 of
                 this
                 kind
                 in
                 another
                 Province
                 more
                 remote
                 upon
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 .
                 'T
                 is
                 not
                 to
                 be
                 doubted
                 but
                 they
                 exercis'd
                 still
                 greater
                 Cruelties
                 ,
                 because
                 in
                 these
                 Expeditions
                 there
                 go
                 very
                 few
                 that
                 have
                 any
                 Honour
                 or
                 Conscience
                 ,
                 who
                 might
                 be
                 capable
                 of
                 assisting
                 him
                 that
                 commands
                 ,
                 to
                 restrain
                 the
                 Souldiers
                 Barbarities
                 .
                 These
                 things
                 must
                 needs
                 enrage
                 all
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 against
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 .
                 And
                 I
                 doubt
                 not
                 that
                 when
                 an
                 Attempt
                 shall
                 be
                 made
                 to
                 pacify
                 the
                 Commotions
                 ,
                 and
                 allay
                 the
                 Hatred
                 these
                 Violences
                 
                 have
                 caus'd
                 among
                 those
                 People
                 ,
                 it
                 will
                 be
                 found
                 a
                 matter
                 of
                 that
                 great
                 difficulty
                 that
                 't
                 will
                 scarce
                 ever
                 be
                 accomplish'd
                 ;
                 whereas
                 in
                 the
                 State
                 we
                 left
                 these
                 People
                 upon
                 the
                 River
                 when
                 we
                 pass'd
                 by
                 their
                 Countries
                 ,
                 nothing
                 could
                 have
                 been
                 more
                 easy
                 than
                 to
                 have
                 made
                 a
                 General
                 Peace
                 with
                 them
                 .
                 These
                 are
                 the
                 Conquests
                 of
                 Brazil
                 so
                 much
                 talk'd
                 of
                 ,
                 and
                 this
                 is
                 the
                 Traffick
                 the
                 Souldiers
                 live
                 upon
                 :
                 and
                 let
                 me
                 add
                 ,
                 this
                 is
                 the
                 true
                 and
                 just
                 Cause
                 for
                 which
                 God
                 punishes
                 these
                 miserable
                 Souldiers
                 to
                 that
                 degree
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 are
                 perpetually
                 in
                 War
                 and
                 Trouble
                 ,
                 and
                 have
                 scarce
                 Bread
                 to
                 eat
                 .
                 And
                 I
                 believe
                 ,
                 if
                 it
                 were
                 not
                 that
                 God
                 in
                 some
                 sort
                 makes
                 use
                 of
                 'em
                 to
                 accomplish
                 his
                 Designs
                 upon
                 the
                 Indians
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 they
                 are
                 continually
                 engag'd
                 in
                 War
                 against
                 the
                 Dutch
                 ,
                 and
                 have
                 already
                 obtain'd
                 several
                 Victories
                 over
                 those
                 *
                 Hereticks
                 ;
                 if
                 it
                 were
                 not
                 ,
                 I
                 say
                 ,
                 for
                 these
                 things
                 ,
                 I
                 believe
                 
                 our
                 Lord
                 
                   Jesus
                   Christ
                
                 would
                 have
                 long
                 since
                 extirpated
                 such
                 cruel
                 and
                 abominable
                 Conquerors
                 .
                 But
                 to
                 return
                 to
                 the
                 Tapajotos
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 famous
                 River
                 upon
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 dwell
                 ;
                 I
                 say
                 ,
                 the
                 bottom
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 very
                 good
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 a
                 great
                 English
                 Vessel
                 some
                 Years
                 ago
                 went
                 a
                 considerable
                 way
                 up
                 it
                 ,
                 with
                 a
                 design
                 to
                 make
                 Plantations
                 in
                 this
                 Province
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 settle
                 the
                 Trade
                 of
                 Tobacco
                 with
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 to
                 which
                 end
                 they
                 offer'd
                 'em
                 very
                 advantagious
                 Terms
                 :
                 but
                 the
                 Tapajotos
                 would
                 accept
                 of
                 none
                 ,
                 but
                 surpriz'd
                 the
                 English
                 unawares
                 ,
                 and
                 kill'd
                 all
                 they
                 could
                 come
                 at
                 after
                 they
                 had
                 seiz'd
                 their
                 Arms
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 keep
                 to
                 this
                 day
                 .
                 Thus
                 they
                 made
                 the
                 rest
                 leave
                 the
                 Country
                 in
                 more
                 haste
                 than
                 they
                 come
                 to
                 it
                 ;
                 for
                 they
                 escap'd
                 in
                 their
                 Vessel
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 setting
                 Sail
                 with
                 all
                 speed
                 avoided
                 such
                 another
                 Rencounter
                 ,
                 which
                 would
                 have
                 destroy'd
                 'em
                 all
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXXVI
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 River
                 Curupatuba
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Account
                 we
                 receiv'd
                 of
                 Mountains
                 of
                 Gold
                 ,
                 Silver
                 ,
                 Azure
                 ,
                 and
                 precious
                 Stones
                 ,
                 among
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 .
              
               
                 ABout
                 forty
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 the
                 Tapajotos
                 we
                 met
                 with
                 the
                 River
                 Curupatuba
                 ,
                 which
                 comes
                 down
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 and
                 gives
                 its
                 Name
                 to
                 the
                 first
                 Indian
                 Town
                 that
                 is
                 at
                 Peace
                 with
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 ,
                 and
                 under
                 the
                 Protection
                 of
                 their
                 King.
                 This
                 River
                 is
                 not
                 very
                 big
                 ,
                 but
                 very
                 wealthy
                 ,
                 if
                 the
                 Natives
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 believ'd
                 ,
                 who
                 assure
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 at
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 six
                 days
                 Voyage
                 up
                 the
                 Stream
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 there
                 is
                 a
                 little
                 Rivulet
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 Sand
                 and
                 Banks
                 of
                 which
                 there
                 is
                 a
                 great
                 quantity
                 of
                 Gold
                 found
                 below
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 it
                 washes
                 the
                 foot
                 of
                 an
                 indifferently
                 large
                 Mountain
                 called
                 Yuquaratinci
                 .
                 The
                 Indians
                 moreover
                 told
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 near
                 this
                 River
                 there
                 is
                 another
                 place
                 call'd
                 Picari
                 ,
                 from
                 whence
                 they
                 have
                 often
                 taken
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 Metal
                 harder
                 than
                 Gold
                 ,
                 but
                 very
                 white
                 (
                 without
                 doubt
                 they
                 mean
                 Silver
                 )
                 with
                 which
                 they
                 were
                 wont
                 formerly
                 to
                 make
                 Hatchets
                 
                 and
                 Knives
                 ;
                 but
                 finding
                 the
                 Tools
                 made
                 of
                 this
                 Metal
                 were
                 apt
                 to
                 have
                 their
                 Edg
                 turn'd
                 when
                 any
                 Stress
                 was
                 put
                 to
                 'em
                 ,
                 they
                 did
                 not
                 make
                 any
                 account
                 of
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 They
                 further
                 gave
                 us
                 an
                 account
                 ,
                 That
                 near
                 the
                 Strait
                 I
                 have
                 spoken
                 of
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 two
                 Hills
                 ,
                 one
                 of
                 which
                 by
                 the
                 Signs
                 they
                 gave
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 is
                 in
                 all
                 probability
                 a
                 Hill
                 of
                 Azure
                 ;
                 and
                 it
                 seems
                 the
                 other
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 call
                 Penagara
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 Sun
                 shines
                 ,
                 or
                 when
                 the
                 Nights
                 are
                 clear
                 and
                 bright
                 ,
                 glitters
                 and
                 sparkles
                 as
                 if
                 it
                 were
                 full
                 of
                 rich
                 Diamonds
                 .
                 They
                 assur'd
                 us
                 that
                 horrible
                 Noises
                 were
                 heard
                 in
                 it
                 from
                 time
                 to
                 time
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 a
                 certain
                 sign
                 that
                 this
                 Mountain
                 contains
                 Stones
                 of
                 a
                 great
                 Value
                 in
                 its
                 Entrails
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXXVII
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 River
                 Ginipape
                 ,
                 which
                 has
                 Treasures
                 of
                 Gold
                 in
                 its
                 Banks
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 famous
                 for
                 a
                 good
                 Soil
                 for
                 Tobacco
                 ,
                 and
                 Sugar-Canes
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 River
                 Ginipape
                 which
                 comes
                 down
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 ,
                 and
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 60
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 Villages
                 of
                 Curupatuba
                 ,
                 promises
                 as
                 great
                 Treasures
                 and
                 as
                 rich
                 Mountains
                 as
                 those
                 of
                 which
                 we
                 have
                 
                 just
                 now
                 spoken
                 .
                 The
                 Indians
                 assure
                 us
                 of
                 so
                 much
                 Gold
                 along
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 that
                 if
                 it
                 be
                 according
                 to
                 their
                 Relation
                 ,
                 this
                 one
                 River
                 possesses
                 more
                 Riches
                 than
                 are
                 in
                 all
                 Peru.
                 The
                 Lands
                 this
                 River
                 waters
                 are
                 of
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 Maragnon
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 in
                 the
                 hands
                 of
                 
                   Benedito
                   Maziel
                
                 :
                 And
                 without
                 counting
                 the
                 great
                 Extent
                 of
                 this
                 Country
                 ,
                 which
                 alone
                 is
                 larger
                 than
                 all
                 Spain
                 join'd
                 together
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 it
                 contains
                 several
                 Mines
                 of
                 which
                 we
                 have
                 very
                 certain
                 knowledg
                 ;
                 I
                 shall
                 only
                 say
                 that
                 generally
                 the
                 Ground
                 of
                 it
                 is
                 of
                 the
                 best
                 kind
                 for
                 the
                 Production
                 of
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Grain
                 and
                 Fruit
                 ,
                 and
                 what
                 may
                 turn
                 to
                 the
                 Account
                 of
                 those
                 that
                 inhabit
                 it
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 found
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 vast
                 Extent
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 .
                 This
                 Country
                 is
                 situate
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 ,
                 and
                 comprehends
                 several
                 great
                 Provinces
                 of
                 Savages
                 .
                 But
                 that
                 which
                 is
                 yet
                 more
                 considerable
                 is
                 ,
                 that
                 in
                 this
                 Country
                 are
                 those
                 Fields
                 so
                 famous
                 for
                 the
                 Production
                 of
                 prodigious
                 quantities
                 of
                 Tucui
                 .
                 Our
                 Enemies
                 the
                 Dutch
                 have
                 given
                 a
                 Reputation
                 to
                 these
                 Lands
                 ,
                 and
                 have
                 often
                 found
                 by
                 Experience
                 ,
                 not
                 only
                 the
                 Goodness
                 and
                 Fertility
                 of
                 the
                 Soil
                 ,
                 but
                 also
                 the
                 vast
                 Profits
                 with
                 which
                 this
                 alone
                 is
                 capable
                 of
                 inriching
                 its
                 Inhabitants
                 :
                 Therefore
                 they
                 could
                 never
                 forget
                 this
                 sweet
                 place
                 ,
                 but
                 have
                 made
                 Plantations
                 there
                 several
                 times
                 ,
                 tho
                 to
                 their
                 Damage
                 
                 and
                 Sorrow
                 ,
                 because
                 they
                 have
                 been
                 always
                 forc'd
                 out
                 of
                 'em
                 by
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 .
                 Therefore
                 't
                 is
                 worth
                 Consideration
                 ▪
                 that
                 this
                 Place
                 is
                 very
                 good
                 to
                 make
                 great
                 Plantations
                 of
                 Tobacco
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 there
                 's
                 no
                 part
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Countries
                 that
                 have
                 been
                 discover'd
                 that
                 is
                 better
                 for
                 the
                 planting
                 of
                 Canes
                 ,
                 and
                 for
                 making
                 of
                 Sugar
                 .
                 This
                 Soil
                 returns
                 all
                 the
                 Cultivation
                 that
                 is
                 bestow'd
                 upon
                 it
                 with
                 Usury
                 ,
                 and
                 produces
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Provision
                 in
                 extraordinary
                 plenty
                 :
                 There
                 are
                 very
                 fine
                 pieces
                 of
                 Pasture-ground
                 ,
                 which
                 in
                 their
                 vast
                 Extent
                 would
                 feed
                 an
                 infinite
                 number
                 of
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Cattle
                 .
                 Six
                 Leagues
                 above
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 this
                 River
                 empties
                 it self
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 had
                 a
                 Fort
                 which
                 they
                 call'd
                 
                   Del
                   Dostierro
                
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 [
                 
                   The
                   Fort
                   of
                   Banishment
                
                 ]
                 kept
                 only
                 by
                 thirty
                 Souldiers
                 ,
                 and
                 some
                 pieces
                 of
                 Artillery
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 of
                 more
                 use
                 to
                 keep
                 the
                 Indians
                 that
                 are
                 reduc'd
                 under
                 the
                 Power
                 of
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 ,
                 in
                 Fear
                 and
                 Subjection
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 maintain
                 the
                 Authority
                 of
                 the
                 Governor
                 ,
                 than
                 to
                 secure
                 the
                 River
                 and
                 obstruct
                 the
                 Passage
                 of
                 an
                 Enemy
                 .
                 This
                 Fort
                 has
                 been
                 since
                 demolish'd
                 by
                 
                   Benedito
                   Maziel
                
                 with
                 the
                 Consent
                 of
                 the
                 Governor
                 of
                 Curupa
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 thirty
                 Leagues
                 lower
                 down
                 the
                 River
                 :
                 But
                 it
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 remark'd
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 was
                 situate
                 in
                 a
                 place
                 of
                 some
                 Consideration
                 ,
                 seeing
                 
                 their
                 Enemies
                 Vessels
                 were
                 oblig'd
                 to
                 pay
                 Custom
                 for
                 their
                 Passage
                 that
                 way
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXXVIII
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 River
                 Paranaiba
                 .
              
               
                 TEN
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 River
                 Ginipape
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 is
                 a
                 fine
                 ,
                 large
                 and
                 noble
                 River
                 that
                 comes
                 to
                 render
                 Homage
                 to
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 into
                 which
                 it
                 discharges
                 it self
                 by
                 a
                 Mouth
                 two
                 Leagues
                 wide
                 .
                 The
                 People
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 call
                 it
                 Paranaiba
                 ;
                 there
                 are
                 upon
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 it
                 some
                 Villages
                 of
                 Indians
                 that
                 are
                 at
                 Peace
                 with
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 have
                 settled
                 themselves
                 upon
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 in
                 Obedience
                 to
                 the
                 Orders
                 of
                 the
                 Governor
                 of
                 this
                 Province
                 .
                 There
                 are
                 many
                 other
                 Nations
                 further
                 up
                 in
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 but
                 we
                 could
                 not
                 have
                 any
                 satisfactory
                 Account
                 of
                 'em
                 any
                 more
                 than
                 of
                 divers
                 other
                 things
                 upon
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXXIX
                 .
              
               
                 A
                 farther
                 Account
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 :
                 Of
                 the
                 multitude
                 of
                 Islands
                 near
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 inhabited
                 by
                 an
                 infinite
                 Number
                 of
                 People
                 of
                 different
                 Nations
                 .
              
               
                 TWO
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 River
                 Ginipape
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 I
                 have
                 given
                 some
                 account
                 in
                 the
                 77th
                 Chapter
                 ,
                 our
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 begins
                 to
                 divide
                 it self
                 into
                 divers
                 great
                 Arms
                 ,
                 which
                 form
                 that
                 great
                 Number
                 of
                 Islands
                 that
                 seem
                 to
                 float
                 upon
                 its
                 Waters
                 ,
                 till
                 it
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Sea.
                 These
                 Islands
                 are
                 inhabited
                 by
                 Nations
                 that
                 differ
                 one
                 from
                 another
                 ,
                 both
                 in
                 their
                 Languages
                 and
                 Customs
                 .
                 Not
                 but
                 that
                 most
                 of
                 'em
                 understand
                 the
                 Language
                 of
                 Brazil
                 very
                 well
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 general
                 Tongue
                 in
                 those
                 Parts
                 .
                 The
                 Number
                 of
                 these
                 Islands
                 is
                 so
                 great
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 People
                 that
                 dwell
                 in
                 'em
                 so
                 different
                 ,
                 that
                 't
                 is
                 not
                 possible
                 for
                 me
                 to
                 give
                 a
                 particular
                 Account
                 of
                 what
                 is
                 observable
                 amongst
                 'em
                 ,
                 without
                 composing
                 another
                 Volume
                 .
                 However
                 I
                 'll
                 name
                 some
                 of
                 the
                 most
                 considerable
                 and
                 best
                 known
                 amongst
                 'em
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Tapuyas
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 the
                 valiant
                 Pacaxas
                 ,
                 which
                 last
                 dwell
                 on
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 a
                 River
                 (
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 bear
                 )
                 that
                 enters
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 eighty
                 Leagues
                 above
                 the
                 River
                 Paranaiba
                 ,
                 and
                 upon
                 the
                 Bank
                 of
                 this
                 last
                 River
                 too
                 .
                 These
                 Islands
                 are
                 so
                 well
                 peopled
                 ,
                 that
                 there
                 's
                 no
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 nor
                 indeed
                 of
                 their
                 Villages
                 ;
                 insomuch
                 that
                 some
                 of
                 the
                 Portuguez
                 assur'd
                 me
                 ,
                 they
                 had
                 seen
                 no
                 Countries
                 better
                 stock'd
                 with
                 People
                 through
                 the
                 whole
                 Extent
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXXX
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Town
                 of
                 Commuta
                 .
              
               
                 FOrty
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 Pacaxas
                 lies
                 the
                 Town
                 of
                 Commuta
                 ,
                 which
                 formerly
                 was
                 much
                 noted
                 not
                 only
                 for
                 the
                 multitude
                 of
                 its
                 Inhabitants
                 ,
                 but
                 likewise
                 because
                 it
                 us'd
                 to
                 be
                 the
                 place
                 of
                 rendezvous
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Indians
                 assembled
                 their
                 Armies
                 when
                 they
                 were
                 about
                 to
                 make
                 any
                 Incursions
                 upon
                 their
                 Enemies
                 :
                 But
                 since
                 Brazil
                 has
                 been
                 conquer'd
                 ,
                 it
                 is
                 almost
                 uninhabited
                 ,
                 the
                 People
                 being
                 retir'd
                 into
                 
                 other
                 Parts
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 Provision
                 is
                 scarce
                 there
                 ,
                 only
                 for
                 lack
                 of
                 a
                 little
                 Care
                 and
                 Pains
                 to
                 manure
                 the
                 Ground
                 ,
                 which
                 still
                 retains
                 its
                 former
                 Fruitfulness
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 's
                 all
                 that
                 remains
                 there
                 ,
                 unless
                 it
                 be
                 a
                 small
                 number
                 of
                 the
                 Natives
                 :
                 Tho
                 't
                 is
                 the
                 most
                 lovely
                 Situation
                 to
                 dwell
                 in
                 ,
                 and
                 has
                 the
                 most
                 agreeable
                 Prospect
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 it
                 would
                 continually
                 furnish
                 those
                 that
                 should
                 settle
                 in
                 it
                 with
                 all
                 the
                 Conveniences
                 and
                 Pleasures
                 of
                 Life
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXXXI
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 the
                 Tocantins
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 a
                 French
                 Man
                 that
                 sail'd
                 into
                 this
                 Country
                 to
                 fetch
                 the
                 Sand
                 of
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 BEhind
                 the
                 Town
                 of
                 Commuta
                 passes
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 the
                 Tocantins
                 ,
                 to
                 throw
                 it self
                 into
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 and
                 has
                 the
                 Reputation
                 in
                 this
                 Country
                 of
                 being
                 very
                 rich
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 not
                 without
                 good
                 reason
                 in
                 all
                 appearance
                 :
                 yet
                 the
                 Worth
                 of
                 it
                 has
                 not
                 been
                 yet
                 known
                 by
                 any
                 ,
                 but
                 only
                 by
                 one
                 French
                 Man
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 wont
                 to
                 come
                 ashore
                 upon
                 the
                 Banks
                 of
                 it
                 every
                 Year
                 ,
                 and
                 return'd
                 with
                 his
                 Vessels
                 loaded
                 only
                 with
                 the
                 Earth
                 ,
                 out
                 
                 of
                 which
                 ,
                 by
                 refining
                 ,
                 he
                 got
                 a
                 quantity
                 of
                 Gold.
                 'T
                 is
                 said
                 he
                 inrich'd
                 himself
                 with
                 this
                 Trade
                 ,
                 without
                 ever
                 daring
                 to
                 let
                 the
                 Natives
                 know
                 the
                 Value
                 of
                 the
                 Earth
                 he
                 carried
                 away
                 ,
                 for
                 fear
                 they
                 should
                 become
                 his
                 Enemies
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 came
                 to
                 know
                 what
                 Riches
                 were
                 in
                 their
                 Sands
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 should
                 take
                 up
                 Arms
                 against
                 him
                 to
                 hinder
                 him
                 from
                 transporting
                 this
                 Commodity
                 as
                 he
                 was
                 wont
                 to
                 do
                 .
                 Some
                 Portuguez
                 Souldiers
                 going
                 from
                 Phernambuc
                 some
                 Years
                 ago
                 ,
                 with
                 a
                 Priest
                 in
                 their
                 Company
                 ,
                 past
                 over
                 all
                 the
                 Cordelier
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 and
                 arriv'd
                 at
                 the
                 Source
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 the
                 Tocantins
                 ,
                 with
                 a
                 design
                 to
                 make
                 some
                 new
                 Discovery
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 seek
                 for
                 some
                 Golden
                 Mountains
                 ;
                 and
                 having
                 a
                 mind
                 to
                 know
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 go
                 down
                 quite
                 to
                 its
                 Mouth
                 ,
                 were
                 so
                 unhappy
                 as
                 to
                 fall
                 into
                 the
                 hands
                 of
                 the
                 Tocantins
                 ,
                 who
                 kill'd
                 'em
                 every
                 one
                 .
                 And
                 't
                 is
                 not
                 long
                 since
                 the
                 Chalice
                 was
                 found
                 in
                 the
                 hands
                 of
                 these
                 Indians
                 ,
                 with
                 which
                 the
                 good
                 Priest
                 celebrated
                 Mass
                 during
                 his
                 Travels
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXXXII
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Fort
                 of
                 Para
                 which
                 is
                 in
                 the
                 hands
                 of
                 the
                 Portugeze
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 Island
                 du
                 Soleil
                 ,
                 or
                 of
                 the
                 Sun
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Commodiousness
                 of
                 it
                 for
                 Plantations
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 Great
                 Fort
                 of
                 Para
                 is
                 built
                 Thirty
                 Leagues
                 below
                 Commuta
                 ,
                 it
                 belongs
                 to
                 the
                 Portugeze
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 under
                 the
                 command
                 of
                 a
                 Governor
                 ,
                 who
                 has
                 the
                 oversight
                 of
                 all
                 other
                 Officers
                 of
                 Garrisons
                 belonging
                 to
                 this
                 Government
                 ;
                 he
                 has
                 for
                 his
                 Garrison
                 ordinarily
                 Three
                 Companies
                 of
                 Foot
                 ,
                 under
                 the
                 Command
                 of
                 as
                 many
                 Captains
                 ,
                 who
                 are
                 oblig'd
                 to
                 be
                 always
                 ready
                 at
                 hand
                 for
                 the
                 preservation
                 and
                 defence
                 of
                 this
                 Fort
                 ;
                 but
                 the
                 Officers
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 the
                 Governor
                 of
                 the
                 Place
                 ,
                 are
                 under
                 the
                 Jurisdiction
                 of
                 the
                 Governor
                 of
                 Maragnon
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 absolutely
                 to
                 obey
                 his
                 Orders
                 .
                 The
                 Government
                 of
                 Maragnon
                 is
                 at
                 above
                 130
                 Leagues
                 distance
                 from
                 Para
                 down
                 along
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 then
                 up
                 towards
                 Brezil
                 ,
                 which
                 occasions
                 great
                 inconveniencies
                 in
                 the
                 Conduct
                 of
                 Affairs
                 in
                 relation
                 to
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 Para.
                 And
                 if
                 we
                 should
                 ever
                 be
                 so
                 happy
                 
                 as
                 to
                 plant
                 this
                 River
                 with
                 our
                 People
                 ,
                 it
                 will
                 be
                 necessary
                 to
                 make
                 the
                 Governor
                 of
                 Para
                 Independant
                 ,
                 and
                 Absolute
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Person
                 who
                 possesses
                 the
                 Keys
                 of
                 the
                 whole
                 Country
                 .
                 Not
                 that
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 the
                 Fort
                 of
                 Para
                 is
                 now
                 Situated
                 ,
                 is
                 the
                 best
                 that
                 can
                 be
                 chosen
                 in
                 the
                 Opinion
                 of
                 many
                 Persons
                 of
                 good
                 Judgment
                 ;
                 but
                 if
                 this
                 Discovery
                 be
                 further
                 Improv'd
                 and
                 Advanc'd
                 ;
                 it
                 will
                 be
                 an
                 easie
                 matter
                 to
                 change
                 it
                 ;
                 and
                 I
                 don't
                 find
                 any
                 place
                 more
                 proper
                 for
                 it
                 than
                 the
                 Island
                 
                   du
                   Soleil
                
                 which
                 is
                 Fourteen
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 :
                 This
                 is
                 doubtless
                 the
                 place
                 to
                 be
                 absolutely
                 fix'd
                 on
                 ,
                 not
                 only
                 because
                 it
                 affords
                 abundance
                 of
                 Advantages
                 for
                 the
                 Accomodation
                 of
                 Life
                 ,
                 the
                 Ground
                 being
                 extraordinarily
                 Fertile
                 ,
                 and
                 capable
                 of
                 maintaining
                 as
                 many
                 People
                 as
                 one
                 can
                 desire
                 to
                 settle
                 there
                 ;
                 but
                 also
                 for
                 the
                 convenient
                 harbouring
                 of
                 Vessels
                 :
                 'T
                 is
                 a
                 great
                 Harbour
                 shelter'd
                 from
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 bad
                 Winds
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 Ships
                 may
                 ride
                 with
                 great
                 Safety
                 ,
                 and
                 when
                 they
                 have
                 a
                 mind
                 to
                 Sail
                 ,
                 they
                 need
                 only
                 wait
                 for
                 the
                 full
                 of
                 the
                 Moon
                 ,
                 at
                 which
                 time
                 the
                 Sea
                 is
                 higher
                 than
                 ordinary
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 may
                 pass
                 over
                 all
                 the
                 Sands
                 ,
                 which
                 renders
                 the
                 entrance
                 of
                 
                 this
                 River
                 difficult
                 ;
                 which
                 is
                 none
                 of
                 the
                 least
                 Conveniencies
                 .
                 This
                 Island
                 is
                 above
                 Ten
                 Leagues
                 in
                 Compass
                 ;
                 there
                 is
                 very
                 good
                 Water
                 in
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 abundance
                 of
                 both
                 Sea
                 and
                 River-Fish
                 ,
                 there
                 is
                 an
                 infinite
                 number
                 of
                 Crabs
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 the
                 ordinary
                 Food
                 of
                 the
                 Indians
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 poor
                 People
                 ;
                 and
                 is
                 now
                 the
                 main
                 support
                 of
                 Para
                 ;
                 for
                 there
                 is
                 no
                 Isle
                 all
                 there
                 about
                 ,
                 wherein
                 they
                 go
                 more
                 a
                 Hunting
                 for
                 the
                 Subsistance
                 of
                 the
                 Garison
                 ,
                 and
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 than
                 in
                 this
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXXXIII
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 Eighty
                 Leagues
                 in
                 Breadth
                 ,
                 joyning
                 to
                 the
                 North-Cape
                 on
                 one
                 side
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 the
                 Coasts
                 of
                 Brezil
                 on
                 the
                 other
                 .
              
               
                 TWenty
                 Six
                 Leagues
                 below
                 the
                 Island
                 
                   of
                   the
                   Sun
                
                 directly
                 under
                 the
                 Line
                 ,
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 is
                 84
                 Leagues
                 wide
                 ,
                 bounded
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 by
                 Zaparara
                 ,
                 and
                 on
                 the
                 other
                 side
                 by
                 the
                 North-Cape
                 ,
                 and
                 here
                 at
                 last
                 discharges
                 it self
                 into
                 the
                 Ocean
                 .
                 It
                 may
                 be
                 said
                 to
                 be
                 a
                 Sea
                 of
                 Fresh-Water
                 ,
                 mixing
                 it self
                 with
                 the
                 Salt-Water-Sea
                 .
                 'T
                 is
                 the
                 Noblest
                 
                 and
                 Largest
                 River
                 in
                 the
                 whole
                 known
                 World.
                 This
                 is
                 the
                 River
                 otherwise
                 call'd
                 Oreillane
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 some
                 Maragnon
                 ,
                 so
                 often
                 desir'd
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 much
                 sought
                 after
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 often
                 miss'd
                 by
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 of
                 Peru
                 ;
                 and
                 here
                 at
                 Length
                 it
                 flows
                 into
                 the
                 Sea
                 ,
                 after
                 it
                 has
                 water'd
                 a
                 Country
                 of
                 1276
                 Leagues
                 in
                 Length
                 ,
                 after
                 it
                 has
                 furnished
                 a
                 multitude
                 of
                 Nations
                 with
                 its
                 Fruitfulness
                 and
                 Plenty
                 ;
                 and
                 in
                 a
                 word
                 after
                 it
                 has
                 divided
                 America
                 into
                 Two
                 Parts
                 ,
                 almost
                 in
                 the
                 widest
                 Place
                 of
                 it
                 ;
                 and
                 furnish'd
                 the
                 Natives
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 Channel
                 into
                 which
                 the
                 Best
                 ,
                 the
                 Richest
                 and
                 most
                 Pleasant
                 Rivers
                 ,
                 that
                 come
                 down
                 from
                 all
                 the
                 Mountains
                 and
                 Coasts
                 of
                 the
                 New
                 World
                 discharge
                 their
                 Waters
                 .
                 And
                 't
                 is
                 farther
                 remarkable
                 ,
                 that
                 against
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 for
                 above
                 30
                 Leagues
                 at
                 Sea
                 ,
                 you
                 may
                 take
                 up
                 Fresh-Water
                 during
                 the
                 Ebb
                 of
                 the
                 Tide
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 an
                 extraordinary
                 refreshment
                 to
                 those
                 Ships
                 especially
                 that
                 ,
                 in
                 coming
                 from
                 Europe
                 ,
                 have
                 Sail'd
                 ●2000
                 Leagues
                 before
                 they
                 Arrive
                 here
                 .
              
               
                 Thus
                 in
                 short
                 I
                 have
                 given
                 a
                 Relation
                 of
                 an
                 ample
                 Discovery
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 .
                 Which
                 tho'
                 it
                 possesses
                 so
                 great
                 Treasures
                 ,
                 yet
                 excludes
                 no
                 Nation
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 from
                 'em
                 ,
                 but
                 on
                 the
                 contrary
                 ,
                 
                 invites
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 People
                 to
                 reap
                 the
                 Profits
                 of
                 the
                 Riches
                 with
                 which
                 〈◊〉
                 abounds
                 .
                 It
                 offers
                 to
                 the
                 Poor
                 a
                 plentiful
                 Maintenance
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 Labourer
                 the
                 Liberal
                 Recompence
                 of
                 his
                 Toil
                 ;
                 to
                 the
                 Merchant
                 a
                 Profitable
                 Trade
                 ;
                 to
                 the
                 Souldier
                 an
                 Occasion
                 of
                 Signalizing
                 himself
                 ▪
                 to
                 the
                 Rich
                 an
                 Improvement
                 of
                 their
                 Wealth
                 ;
                 to
                 Gentlemen
                 Honorable
                 Employments
                 ;
                 to
                 Noblemen
                 Large
                 Provinces
                 ;
                 and
                 to
                 Kings
                 themselves
                 Empires
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 New
                 World.
                 But
                 those
                 who
                 of
                 all
                 others
                 are
                 call'd
                 upon
                 to
                 promote
                 such
                 new
                 Conquests
                 ,
                 and
                 ought
                 to
                 be
                 most
                 heartily
                 concern'd
                 in
                 'em
                 ,
                 are
                 such
                 as
                 with
                 the
                 greatest
                 Affection
                 ,
                 seek
                 the
                 Advancement
                 of
                 the
                 Glory
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 Zealously
                 bent
                 to
                 design
                 the
                 Salvation
                 of
                 the
                 Souls
                 of
                 an
                 Innumerable
                 Multitude
                 of
                 Idolatrous
                 and
                 Heathenish
                 Indians
                 ,
                 who
                 want
                 the
                 Help
                 and
                 Light
                 the
                 Faithful
                 Ministers
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 should
                 furnish
                 them
                 withal
                 ,
                 to
                 dispel
                 the
                 shadows
                 of
                 Sin
                 and
                 Death
                 ,
                 with
                 which
                 those
                 poor
                 Wretches
                 have
                 been
                 so
                 long
                 benighted
                 .
                 And
                 let
                 none
                 Excuse
                 themselves
                 from
                 an
                 Attempt
                 of
                 this
                 kind
                 :
                 Here
                 's
                 Work
                 enough
                 to
                 employ
                 every
                 one
                 of
                 us
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 great
                 a
                 Number
                 soever
                 of
                 Labourers
                 should
                 devote
                 themselves
                 
                 to
                 it
                 ,
                 there
                 will
                 still
                 be
                 more
                 wanting
                 for
                 so
                 great
                 a
                 Harvest
                 .
                 This
                 New
                 Vine-yard
                 will
                 still
                 want
                 more
                 hands
                 to
                 Cultivate
                 and
                 Dress
                 it
                 ,
                 how
                 able
                 and
                 how
                 fervent
                 soever
                 they
                 should
                 prove
                 ,
                 who
                 shall
                 be
                 engag'd
                 in
                 this
                 Service
                 ,
                 But
                 it
                 is
                 rather
                 to
                 be
                 wish'd
                 than
                 expected
                 ,
                 that
                 we
                 shall
                 ever
                 see
                 this
                 New
                 World
                 Subjected
                 to
                 the
                 Keys
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 Rome
                 .
                 I
                 hope
                 all
                 the
                 Illustrious
                 Catholick
                 Princes
                 of
                 Christendom
                 ,
                 (
                 to
                 whom
                 may
                 it
                 please
                 the
                 Almighty
                 to
                 grant
                 many
                 and
                 happy
                 Years
                 ,
                 )
                 will
                 each
                 of
                 'em
                 be
                 inspir'd
                 from
                 Heaven
                 with
                 Zeal
                 for
                 so
                 Holy
                 an
                 Enterprize
                 as
                 the
                 Conquest
                 of
                 Souls
                 ;
                 some
                 by
                 their
                 wonted
                 Liberalities
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 Maintenance
                 and
                 Subsistence
                 of
                 Priests
                 and
                 Ministers
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 and
                 others
                 by
                 their
                 care
                 to
                 provide
                 and
                 convey
                 Clergymen
                 into
                 those
                 Countries
                 :
                 And
                 all
                 of
                 'em
                 have
                 reason
                 to
                 esteem
                 it
                 a
                 great
                 happiness
                 for
                 them
                 that
                 in
                 the
                 Age
                 wherein
                 they
                 live
                 ,
                 this
                 difficult
                 and
                 troublesom
                 way
                 should
                 be
                 open'd
                 ,
                 to
                 bring
                 more
                 Nations
                 ,
                 and
                 those
                 more
                 populous
                 at
                 once
                 into
                 the
                 Bosom
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 than
                 all
                 the
                 rest
                 that
                 have
                 been
                 hitherto
                 discover'd
                 in
                 the
                 whole
                 New
                 World.
                 
              
            
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 LXXXIV
                 .
              
               
                 A
                 Computation
                 of
                 the
                 Longitudes
                 ,
                 Latitudes
                 ,
                 and
                 Distances
                 of
                 Places
                 upon
                 this
                 Great
                 River
                 .
              
               
                 FROM
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 Napo
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 South
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 to
                 Anete
                 ,
                 are
                 Forty
                 seven
                 Leagues
                 .
                 Anete
                 is
                 under
                 the
                 Line
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 Anete
                 to
                 the
                 Aguarico
                 ,
                 Eighteen
                 Leagues
                 .
                 The
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 and
                 under
                 the
                 Line
                 also
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Aguarico
                 to
                 the
                 Chevelus
                 Twenty
                 Leagues
                 .
                 The
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 also
                 on
                 the
                 North
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 and
                 declines
                 a
                 little
                 from
                 the
                 Line
                 towards
                 the
                 South
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Chevelus
                 to
                 the
                 Curaray
                 ,
                 Forty
                 Leagues
                 .
                 The
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 South
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 Second
                 Degree
                 of
                 Southern
                 Latitude
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Curaray
                 to
                 the
                 Maragnon
                 ,
                 Eighty
                 Leagues
                 .
                 The
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 South
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 having
                 Four
                 Degrees
                 of
                 Southern
                 Latitude
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 Three
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Seven
                 Degrees
                 and
                 Fifty
                 Minutes
                 of
                 Longitude
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Maragnon
                 to
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Omaquas
                 ,
                 Sixty
                 Leagues
                 .
                 All
                 this
                 Province
                 consists
                 in
                 great
                 Islands
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 this
                 Province
                 to
                 a
                 certain
                 great
                 Habitation
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 ,
                 One
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Nineteen
                 Leagues
                 .
                 This
                 is
                 an
                 Isle
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 of
                 the
                 Channel
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 having
                 three
                 Degrees
                 of
                 Southern
                 Latitude
                 ,
                 and
                 Three
                 hundred
                 and
                 twelve
                 Degrees
                 ,
                 and
                 Fifty
                 five
                 Minutes
                 of
                 Longitude
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 this
                 Habitation
                 to
                 the
                 Putomayo
                 ,
                 Seventeen
                 Leagues
                 .
                 The
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Putomayo
                 to
                 the
                 Yetau
                 ,
                 Fifty
                 ▪
                 Leagues
                 .
                 The
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 and
                 hath
                 Three
                 Degrees
                 Thirty
                 Minutes
                 of
                 Southern
                 Latitude
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Yetau
                 to
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 the
                 Omaquas
                 ,
                 Fourteen
                 Leagues
                 .
                 In
                 this
                 place
                 there
                 is
                 a
                 great
                 and
                 puissant
                 Habitation
                 in
                 an
                 Isle
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 this
                 Province
                 to
                 the
                 Cuzco
                 ,
                 Twenty
                 five
                 Leagues
                 .
                 The
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 of
                 
                 the
                 Amazone
                 having
                 Five
                 Degrees
                 of
                 Southern
                 Latitude
                 ,
                 and
                 Three
                 Hundred
                 Fifteen
                 Degrees
                 ,
                 and
                 Fifty
                 Minutes
                 of
                 Longitude
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Cuzco
                 to
                 the
                 
                   Village
                   of
                   Gold
                
                 ,
                 Twenty
                 eight
                 leagues
                 .
                 This
                 place
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 South-bank
                 of
                 the
                 Channel
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 
                   Village
                   of
                   Gold
                
                 to
                 the
                 Yupura
                 ,
                 Fourteen
                 Leagues
                 .
                 The
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 and
                 hath
                 Three
                 Degrees
                 of
                 Southern
                 Latitude
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Yupura
                 to
                 the
                 Tapi
                 ,
                 Four
                 Leagues
                 .
                 The
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Tapi
                 to
                 the
                 Catua
                 ,
                 Twenty
                 five
                 Leagues
                 .
                 The
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 of
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 and
                 towards
                 the
                 
                   Green
                   Lake
                
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 formed
                 by
                 the
                 great
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Catua
                 and
                 the
                 
                   Green
                   Lake
                
                 to
                 the
                 First
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 Araganatuba
                 ,
                 Six
                 Leagues
                 .
                 This
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 First
                 Mouth
                 to
                 the
                 Second
                 of
                 the
                 Araganatuba
                 ,
                 Sixteen
                 Leagues
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
               
                 From
                 the
                 Second
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 Araganatuba
                 to
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Curusiraris
                 ,
                 Twenty
                 two
                 Leagues
                 .
                 All
                 this
                 Province
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 South
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 River
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 Curusiraris
                 to
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Yoriman
                 ,
                 Two
                 Leagues
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 Yoriman
                 to
                 a
                 great
                 and
                 very
                 long
                 Habitation
                 ,
                 Twenty
                 three
                 Leagues
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 South
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 to
                 Four
                 Degrees
                 of
                 that
                 Latitude
                 ,
                 and
                 Three
                 hundred
                 nineteen
                 Degrees
                 ,
                 and
                 Thirty
                 Minutes
                 of
                 Longitude
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 this
                 long
                 Habitation
                 to
                 the
                 Isle
                 Yoriman
                 ,
                 Thirty
                 two
                 Leagues
                 .
                 On
                 the
                 South-bank
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 this
                 Isle
                 to
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Yoriman
                 ,
                 Ten
                 Leagues
                 ;
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 Yoriman
                 to
                 the
                 Cuchuguara
                 Two
                 Leagues
                 .
                 The
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 also
                 on
                 the
                 South
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Cuchuguara
                 to
                 the
                 Basurura
                 Thirty
                 two
                 Leagues
                 .
                 The
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 and
                 hath
                 Four
                 Degrees
                 ,
                 Thirty
                 Minutes
                 ,
                 of
                 Southern
                 Latitude
                 .
              
               
               
                 From
                 the
                 Basurura
                 to
                 the
                 
                   Rio
                   Negro
                
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Black
                   River
                
                 ,
                 Thirty
                 Leagues
                 .
                 The
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 is
                 also
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 having
                 Four
                 Degrees
                 of
                 Southern
                 Latitude
                 ,
                 and
                 Three
                 Hundred
                 Twenty
                 Two
                 Degrees
                 ,
                 and
                 Twenty
                 Minutes
                 of
                 Longitude
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 Rio-Negro
                 unto
                 the
                 Modera
                 are
                 Four
                 Leagues
                 ;
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 being
                 on
                 the
                 South
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Modera
                 to
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 Isle
                 Topinambas
                 Twenty
                 Eight
                 Leagues
                 .
                 This
                 great
                 Isle
                 is
                 in
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 the
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 towards
                 the
                 South-side
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 beginning
                 to
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 this
                 Isle
                 ,
                 Sixty
                 two
                 Leagues
                 .
                 In
                 this
                 place
                 is
                 a
                 Great
                 and
                 Puissant
                 Habitation
                 of
                 the
                 Topinambi
                 having
                 Three
                 Degrees
                 of
                 Southern
                 Latitude
                 ,
                 and
                 Three
                 Hundred
                 twenty
                 seven
                 Degrees
                 ,
                 Thirty
                 Minutes
                 of
                 Longitude
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 Topinambas
                 to
                 the
                 Cunuris
                 ,
                 Thirty
                 Leagues
                 ;
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 which
                 River
                 is
                 to
                 the
                 North
                 of
                 the
                 Amozone
                 .
              
               
               
                 From
                 the
                 Cunuris
                 to
                 the
                 Bosphore
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 Twenty
                 four
                 Leagues
                 .
                 This
                 Strait
                 hath
                 Two
                 Degrees
                 and
                 Forty
                 Minutes
                 of
                 Southern
                 Latitude
                 ;
                 and
                 Three
                 hundred
                 and
                 twenty
                 eight
                 Degrees
                 ,
                 and
                 Fifty
                 Minutes
                 in
                 Longitude
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Bosphore
                 to
                 the
                 Tapajosos
                 ,
                 Forty
                 Leagues
                 ;
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 which
                 River
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Tapajosos
                 to
                 the
                 Curupatuba
                 ,
                 Forty
                 Leagues
                 ;
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 which
                 River
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Curupatuba
                 to
                 the
                 Fort
                 of
                 Destierro
                 ,
                 Fifty
                 four
                 Leagues
                 ;
                 which
                 Fort
                 is
                 also
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 River
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 foresaid
                 Fort
                 to
                 the
                 Ginipape
                 ,
                 Six
                 Leagues
                 ;
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 which
                 River
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 also
                 ,
                 having
                 Two
                 Degrees
                 of
                 Southern
                 Latitude
                 ,
                 and
                 Three
                 hundred
                 thirty
                 one
                 Degrees
                 and
                 Fifty
                 Minutes
                 of
                 Longitude
                 .
                 And
                 about
                 Two
                 Leagues
                 from
                 this
                 Ginipape
                 towards
                 the
                 Sea
                 ,
                 the
                 great
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 begins
                 to
                 open
                 by
                 little
                 and
                 little
                 towards
                 its
                 great
                 Mouth
                 into
                 the
                 Sea.
                 
              
               
               
                 From
                 the
                 Ginipape
                 to
                 the
                 Paranaiba
                 ,
                 Ten
                 Leagues
                 ;
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 which
                 River
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Paranaiba
                 to
                 the
                 Pacaxas
                 ,
                 Forty
                 Leagues
                 ;
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 which
                 is
                 also
                 on
                 the
                 South
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Pacaxas
                 to
                 Commuta
                 ,
                 Forty
                 Leagues
                 .
                 This
                 place
                 is
                 also
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 Commuta
                 to
                 Para
                 ,
                 Thirty
                 Leagues
                 .
                 This
                 Town
                 is
                 also
                 on
                 the
                 South-bank
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 Amazone
                 ,
                 having
                 one
                 Degree
                 and
                 Thirty
                 Minutes
                 of
                 South
                 Latitude
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 Para
                 to
                 the
                 Isle
                 
                   du
                   Soleil
                
                 ,
                 Fourteen
                 Leagues
                 .
                 This
                 Isle
                 is
                 also
                 near
                 to
                 the
                 same
                 South-bank
                 .
                 And
                 from
                 Para
                 to
                 Zaparara
                 ,
                 Forty
                 Leagues
                 ;
                 which
                 is
                 a
                 Cape
                 on
                 the
                 extremity
                 of
                 the
                 South-bank
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 River
                 ,
                 having
                 Thirty
                 five
                 Minutes
                 of
                 South
                 Latitude
                 ,
                 and
                 Three
                 hundred
                 thirty
                 seven
                 Degrees
                 and
                 ten
                 Minutes
                 of
                 Longitude
                 .
                 So
                 the
                 whole
                 length
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 River
                 of
                 Amazons
                 ,
                 is
                 One
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 seventy
                 six
                 Leagues
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 the
                 Ginipape
                 to
                 Corupa
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 North-side
                 of
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 this
                 River
                 ,
                 Thirty
                 Leagues
                 .
              
               
               
                 From
                 Corupa
                 to
                 the
                 North
                 Cape
                 ,
                 the
                 distance
                 is
                 not
                 well
                 known
                 :
                 This
                 Cape
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 extremity
                 of
                 the
                 North-bank
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 River
                 ,
                 having
                 Forty
                 five
                 Minutes
                 of
                 North
                 Latitude
                 ,
                 and
                 Three
                 hundred
                 thirty
                 three
                 Degrees
                 ,
                 and
                 Fifty
                 Minutes
                 of
                 Longitude
                 .
              
            
             
               The
               End.
               
            
          
        
      
       
         
           
             
             
               AN
               ACCOUNT
               OF
               A
               VOYAGE
               UP
               THE
               River
               
                 de
                 la
                 Plata
              
               ,
               And
               thence
               over
               Land
               to
               PERU
               .
               With
               Observations
               on
               the
               Inhabitants
               ,
               as
               well
               Indians
               and
               Spaniards
               ;
               the
               Cities
               ,
               Commerce
               ,
               Fertility
               ,
               and
               Riches
               of
               that
               Part
               of
               America
               .
            
             
               
                 By
                 Mons
              
               .
               Acarete
               du
               Biscay
               .
            
             
               LONDON
               :
               Printed
               for
               
                 Samuel
                 Buckley
              
               ,
               at
               the
               Dolphin
               over
               against
               St.
               Dunstans
               Church
               in
               Fleetstreet
               .
               1698.
               
            
          
           
             
             
               
                 
                   A
                   MAP
                   of
                   the
                   Provinces
                   PARAGUAY
                   and
                   TUCUMAN
                   with
                   the
                   River
                   Plate
                   ▪
                   
                     London
                     Printed
                     for
                     S
                     :
                     Buckley
                     ▪
                  
                
                 map of the Plate River
              
            
          
        
         
           
             
             
               A
               Relation
               of
               Mons
               .
               Acarete
               du
               Biscay's
               Voyage
               up
               the
               River
               de
               la
               Plata
               ,
               and
               from
               thence
               by
               Land
               to
               Peru
               ,
               and
               his
               Observations
               in
               it
               .
            
             
               THE
               Inclination
               I
               always
               had
               to
               Travelling
               ,
               made
               me
               leave
               my
               Father's
               House
               very
               young
               ,
               but
               I
               can
               truly
               aver
               ,
               that
               I
               was
               not
               so
               much
               prompted
               to
               it
               out
               of
               pure
               Curiosity
               to
               〈◊〉
               Forreign
               Countries
               ,
               as
               out
               of
               hope
               〈◊〉
               acquire
               Knowledge
               and
               improve
               my
               ●●dgment
               ,
               which
               for
               the
               future
               might
               〈◊〉
               helpful
               to
               me
               ,
               not
               only
               in
               my
               private
               concerns
               ,
               but
               likewise
               render
               me
               more
               ●●●viceable
               to
               my
               King
               and
               Country
               ,
               which
               I
               declare
               was
               the
               chief
               aim
               of
               my
               Voyages
               .
               I
               went
               first
               into
               Spain
               ,
               where
               〈◊〉
               tarried
               long
               enough
               to
               learn
               their
               language
               ,
               particularly
               at
               Cadiz
               .
               The
               
               fancy
               took
               me
               to
               go
               to
               the
               West-Indies
               possess'd
               by
               the
               Spaniards
               ,
               for
               I
               often
               heard
               them
               talk
               of
               the
               Beauty
               and
               Fertility
               of
               the
               Country
               ,
               and
               the
               great
               Riches
               they
               draw
               from
               thence
               ,
               but
               then
               I
               was
               at
               a
               loss
               how
               to
               bring
               it
               about
               ,
               because
               't
               is
               very
               difficult
               for
               a
               Stranger
               ,
               to
               get
               into
               those
               Parts
               ;
               but
               there
               happen'd
               a
               conjuncture
               which
               favour'd
               my
               Design
               ,
               and
               gave
               me
               an
               opportunity
               to
               proceed
               in
               it
               ,
               in
               the
               manner
               following
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               Year
               1654
               ,
               
                 Oliver
                 Cromwell
              
               at
               that
               time
               Protector
               of
               the
               Common-wealth
               of
               England
               ,
               sent
               Admiral
               Blake
               with
               a
               Squadron
               of
               Men
               of
               War
               towards
               the
               Coasts
               of
               Algarve
               and
               Andalousia
               ,
               to
               wait
               for
               the
               Spanish
               Gallions
               which
               come
               yearly
               from
               the
               Indies
               .
               The
               Spaniards
               being
               advertis'd
               of
               it
               ,
               resolv'd
               to
               equip
               a
               Fleet
               with
               all
               expedition
               to
               oppose
               the
               English
               and
               frustrate
               their
               design
               :
               To
               this
               end
               they
               set
               out
               28
               Men
               of
               War
               and
               6
               Fireships
               ,
               under
               the
               Command
               of
               
                 Don
                 Paul
                 de
                 Contreras
              
               ,
               whose
               Vice-Admiral
               was
               the
               
                 Amirante
                 Castana
              
               ,
               on
               board
               whom
               was
               I.
               The
               Two
               Fleets
               came
               up
               with
               each
               other
               ,
               near
               
                 Cape
                 St.
                 Vincent
              
               ,
               where
               they
               staid
               many
               Days
               ;
               but
               the
               English
               perceiving
               
               they
               were
               like
               to
               make
               nothing
               on
               't
               ,
               retir'd
               towards
               Lisbon
               ,
               and
               the
               Spaniards
               stood
               into
               Cadiz
               ,
               where
               all
               the
               Gallions
               safely
               arriv'd
               in
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               Year
               1655
               ,
               except
               the
               Vice-Admiral
               ,
               which
               was
               lost
               in
               the
               Channel
               of
               Bahama
               upon
               the
               Coasts
               of
               Florida
               .
               Sometime
               after
               this
               ,
               the
               English
               having
               declar'd
               War
               against
               the
               Spaniards
               more
               openly
               ,
               by
               taking
               Jamaica
               ,
               the
               Navigation
               to
               the
               West-Indies
               was
               a
               long
               time
               interrupted
               ,
               by
               their
               Cruisers
               hovering
               about
               
                 Cadiz
                 ▪
              
               and
               
                 San
                 Lucar
              
               ,
               where
               they
               intercepted
               some
               Ships
               coming
               from
               the
               Indies
               richly
               laden
               ,
               took
               one
               of
               the
               biggest
               ,
               burnt
               Two
               others
               ,
               and
               put
               the
               rest
               to
               flight
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               went
               to
               the
               Canaries
               ,
               where
               they
               burnt
               most
               of
               the
               Flota
               that
               were
               arriv'd
               there
               from
               
                 New
                 Spain
              
               ,
               and
               waited
               orders
               from
               Madrid
               ,
               what
               course
               to
               take
               to
               escape
               falling
               into
               the
               hands
               of
               the
               English
               .
               While
               these
               things
               were
               doing
               ,
               the
               Dutch
               who
               sought
               to
               make
               their
               advantage
               of
               the
               Troubles
               that
               the
               Spaniards
               were
               embroil'd
               in
               ,
               sent
               several
               Ships
               to
               the
               River
               
                 de
                 la
                 Plata
              
               ,
               laden
               with
               Goods
               and
               Negroes
               ,
               which
               they
               took
               in
               at
               Angola
               and
               Congo
               :
               These
               Ships
               being
               arriv'd
               in
               that
               River
               ,
               and
               come
               up
               to
               
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
              
               ,
               the
               Inhabitants
               
               of
               the
               place
               who
               had
               a
               long
               time
               been
               depriv'd
               of
               the
               Supplies
               which
               they
               had
               us'd
               to
               receive
               by
               the
               Spanish
               Gallions
               (
               who
               were
               hinder'd
               by
               the
               English
               from
               making
               their
               constant
               Voyages
               )
               and
               were
               besides
               in
               want
               of
               Negroes
               and
               other
               things
               ,
               wrought
               so
               far
               upon
               the
               Governor
               ,
               that
               for
               a
               Present
               which
               they
               oblig'd
               the
               Hollanders
               to
               give
               him
               ,
               and
               satisfying
               the
               Customs
               due
               to
               the
               King
               of
               Spain
               ,
               they
               were
               permitted
               to
               Land
               and
               Trade
               there
               .
            
             
               Mean
               time
               the
               Spanish
               Ministers
               (
               apprehending
               lest
               the
               Interruption
               of
               the
               Commerce
               ,
               and
               the
               scarcity
               of
               European
               Commodities
               in
               those
               Parts
               ,
               might
               constrain
               the
               Inhabitants
               to
               Traffick
               with
               Strangers
               (
               which
               't
               is
               their
               Interest
               to
               prevent
               as
               much
               as
               they
               can
               )
               thought
               fit
               to
               grant
               Licences
               to
               several
               of
               their
               private
               Subjects
               to
               Trade
               to
               the
               Indies
               at
               their
               own
               proper
               risque
               .
               A
               certain
               Cavalier
               took
               one
               of
               them
               ,
               and
               fitted
               out
               a
               Ship
               at
               Cadiz
               ,
               where
               I
               abode
               at
               that
               time
               ;
               I
               resolv'd
               to
               go
               in
               her
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               more
               willingly
               ,
               because
               I
               had
               formerly
               had
               some
               dealings
               with
               him
               .
               He
               very
               friendly
               consented
               to
               let
               me
               go
               under
               his
               Name
               for
               his
               Nephew
               ,
               that
               I
               might
               conceal
               my
               being
               a
               Forreigner
               ,
               
               which
               if
               known
               would
               have
               stopt
               my
               Voyage
               ,
               because
               in
               Spain
               they
               allow
               none
               but
               Native
               Spaniards
               to
               go
               in
               their
               Ships
               to
               the
               Indies
               .
               We
               set
               Sail
               about
               the
               latter
               end
               of
               December
               1657
               ,
               in
               a
               Ship
               of
               450
               Tuns
               ,
               and
               in
               105
               Days
               reach'd
               the
               Mouth
               of
               the
               River
               
                 de
                 la
                 Plata
              
               ,
               where
               we
               met
               a
               French
               Frigat
               ,
               Captain
               Foran
               Commander
               ,
               and
               fought
               her
               some
               time
               ,
               we
               got
               clear
               of
               her
               ,
               and
               continued
               our
               Course
               till
               we
               came
               before
               
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
              
               ,
               where
               we
               found
               22
               Dutch
               Ships
               ,
               and
               among
               them
               2
               English
               ,
               Laden
               homewards
               with
               Bulls-hides
               ,
               Plate
               ,
               and
               
               Spanish-wool
               ,
               which
               they
               had
               receiv'd
               in
               exchange
               for
               their
               Commodities
               ;
               a
               few
               days
               after
               3
               Dutch
               Ships
               going
               out
               of
               the
               Road
               encounter'd
               Captain
               Foran
               and
               another
               Frigat
               ,
               nam'd
               the
               Mareschale
               ,
               Commanded
               by
               the
               Chevalier
               
                 de
                 Fontenay
              
               ;
               after
               a
               tough
               dispute
               the
               Hollanders
               boarded
               and
               took
               the
               Mareschale
               ,
               put
               all
               her
               Men
               to
               the
               Sword
               ,
               and
               the
               Chevalier
               among
               the
               rest
               .
            
             
               This
               accident
               alarum'd
               those
               of
               
                 Beuenos
                 Ayres
              
               ,
               and
               made
               them
               put
               themselves
               upon
               their
               guard
               ,
               imagining
               there
               was
               a
               French
               Squadron
               come
               into
               the
               River
               to
               make
               an
               attempt
               upon
               their
               Country
               .
               
               Whereupon
               they
               resolv'd
               to
               send
               for
               aid
               to
               Count
               Albaeliste
               ,
               Viceroy
               over
               all
               the
               Spanish
               Acquisitions
               in
               America
               ,
               and
               Resident
               at
               Lima
               in
               Peru
               ;
               who
               caus'd
               to
               be
               Levy'd
               with
               much
               difficulty
               and
               some
               force
               but
               100
               Men
               ,
               which
               were
               not
               sent
               to
               them
               till
               8
               or
               9
               Months
               after
               ,
               under
               the
               Command
               of
               
                 Don
                 Sebastian
                 Comacho
              
               .
            
             
               But
               before
               I
               proceed
               further
               ,
               't
               is
               fit
               I
               deliver
               my
               Observations
               concerning
               the
               River
               
                 de
                 la
                 Plata
              
               ,
               and
               the
               Countries
               through
               which
               it
               runs
               .
               In
               those
               Parts
               't
               is
               call'd
               the
               Paraguay
               ,
               but
               more
               vulgarly
               the
               Great
               Parana
               ;
               probably
               ,
               because
               the
               River
               of
               Parana
               falls
               into
               it
               above
               the
               Town
               
                 de
                 las
                 Corrientes
              
               .
               '
               Its
               Mouth
               (
               which
               lies
               in
               the
               35th
               .
               Degree
               of
               
                 Southern
                 Latitude
              
               ,
               on
               that
               side
               the
               
                 Equinoctial
                 Line
              
               )
               is
               between
               
                 Cape
                 de
                 Castillos
              
               and
               
                 Cape
                 de
                 Sant
                 Antonio
              
               ,
               about
               80
               Leagues
               distant
               from
               each
               ,
               Tho'
               it
               be
               deep
               enough
               every
               where
               ,
               yet
               the
               commonest
               Road
               into
               it
               ,
               and
               most
               us'd
               by
               Sailors
               is
               on
               the
               North-side
               ,
               from
               Castillos
               to
               Montvidio
               ,
               which
               is
               half-way
               to
               
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
              
               ,
               and
               notwithstanding
               there
               is
               a
               Channel
               on
               the
               same
               North-side
               from
               Montvidio
               to
               
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
              
               ,
               the
               shallowest
               place
               in
               which
               is
               Three
               Fathom
               deep
               ,
               
               yet
               for
               more
               security
               they
               cross
               over
               against
               Monvidio
               into
               the
               South
               Channel
               ,
               because
               't
               is
               broader
               and
               has
               Three
               Fathom
               and
               a
               half
               Water
               at
               least
               where
               't
               is
               shallowest
               ;
               all
               the
               bottom
               is
               muddy
               till
               within
               2
               Leagues
               of
               
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
              
               where
               lyes
               a
               sand
               Bank
               ,
               there
               they
               take
               in
               Pilots
               to
               Steer
               them
               to
               a
               place
               call'd
               the
               Posso
               just
               before
               the
               Town
               ,
               distant
               a
               Cannon
               shot
               from
               Shore
               ,
               wherein
               no
               Vessels
               may
               enter
               but
               such
               as
               have
               a
               Licence
               from
               the
               King
               of
               Spain
               ,
               those
               that
               have
               no
               such
               permission
               are
               oblig'd
               to
               Anchor
               a
               League
               Lower
               .
               The
               River
               is
               full
               of
               Fish
               ,
               but
               of
               them
               there
               are
               hardly
               more
               than
               Seven
               or
               Eight
               sorts
               good
               to
               eat
               ,
               there
               are
               abundance
               of
               those
               Whales
               call'd
               Gibars
               ,
               and
               Sea-dogs
               who
               commonly
               bring
               forth
               their
               young
               ashore
               ,
               and
               whose
               Skin
               is
               fit
               for
               several
               uses
               .
               I
               was
               told
               that
               about
               5
               or
               6
               Years
               before
               I
               came
               there
               ,
               the
               River
               was
               almost
               dry'd
               up
               for
               some
               days
               ,
               no
               Water
               being
               left
               but
               only
               in
               the
               middle
               Channel
               ,
               and
               there
               so
               little
               ,
               that
               they
               forded
               it
               on
               Horseback
               ,
               as
               one
               may
               do
               most
               of
               the
               Rivers
               that
               fall
               into
               that
               
                 de
                 la
                 Plata
              
               ,
               in
               which
               there
               are
               likewise
               a
               great
               many
               Otters
               ,
               with
               whose
               Skins
               the
               Savages
               Cloath
               themselves
               .
            
             
             
               The
               Country
               on
               the
               North-side
               of
               the
               River
               
                 de
                 la
                 Plata
              
               is
               of
               great
               extent
               ,
               Inhabited
               by
               none
               but
               Savages
               ,
               call'd
               Charuas
               ;
               most
               of
               the
               little
               Islands
               that
               lie
               all
               along
               the
               River
               ,
               and
               the
               Shore
               sides
               are
               cover'd
               with
               Woods
               full
               of
               Wild
               Boars
               .
               From
               
                 Cape
                 de
                 Castillos
              
               up
               to
               
                 Rio
                 Negro
              
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               from
               the
               same
               Cape
               to
               
                 San
                 Paulo
              
               bordering
               upon
               Brasil
               ;
               the
               Coasts
               are
               uninhabited
               ,
               tho'
               the
               Country
               ,
               especially
               along
               the
               River
               seems
               to
               be
               very
               good
               ,
               having
               little
               Rivulets
               running
               down
               from
               the
               Hills
               thro'
               the
               Plains
               .
               The
               Spaniards
               settled
               first
               there
               ,
               but
               afterwards
               remov'd
               to
               
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
              
               ,
               because
               't
               was
               troublesom
               to
               cross
               over
               the
               great
               Parana
               to
               go
               to
               Peru.
               
            
             
               I
               went
               ashore
               frequently
               beyond
               
                 Rio
                 Negro
              
               ,
               but
               never
               farther
               than
               Three
               quarters
               of
               a
               League
               into
               the
               Land
               ,
               there
               are
               but
               few
               Savages
               to
               be
               seen
               ,
               and
               they
               have
               their
               Habitations
               a
               good
               way
               up
               in
               the
               Country
               ;
               those
               I
               met
               with
               were
               well
               made
               ,
               with
               long
               Hair
               and
               very
               little
               Beard
               ;
               they
               wear
               nothing
               but
               a
               great
               Skin
               ,
               made
               of
               little
               ones
               patch'd
               together
               ,
               that
               hangs
               down
               to
               their
               heels
               ,
               and
               a
               piece
               of
               Leather
               under
               their
               Feet
               ,
               ty'd
               with
               Straps
               about
               their
               Ankles
               .
               For
               Ornament
               they
               bind
               a
               Fillet
               of
               some
               
               Stuff
               about
               their
               Heads
               ,
               which
               comes
               over
               the
               Fore-head
               ,
               and
               keeps
               the
               Hair
               back
               behind
               .
               The
               Women
               have
               no
               other
               Garment
               but
               these
               Skins
               ,
               which
               they
               gird
               about
               their
               Wastes
               ,
               and
               cover
               their
               heads
               with
               a
               sort
               of
               little
               Hats
               made
               of
               Rushes
               of
               divers
               Colours
               .
            
             
               From
               
                 Rio
                 Negro
              
               to
               
                 Las
                 Corrientes
              
               and
               the
               River
               of
               Parana
               ,
               the
               Country
               is
               well
               stockt
               with
               Bulls
               and
               Cows
               ,
               there
               are
               likewise
               a
               great
               many
               Stags
               ,
               whose
               Skins
               they
               sell
               for
               right
               Buff.
               The
               Savages
               about
               
                 Rio
                 Negro
              
               are
               the
               only
               People
               from
               the
               Sea
               thither
               ,
               that
               keep
               Correspondence
               with
               those
               of
               
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
              
               ,
               and
               the
               Casiques
               ,
               and
               Couracas
               their
               Leaders
               do
               Hommage
               to
               the
               Governor
               of
               that
               Place
               ,
               from
               whence
               they
               are
               but
               about
               20
               Leagues
               distant
               .
               One
               of
               the
               chief
               Spanish
               Towns
               on
               that
               side
               is
               
                 Las
                 Siete
                 Corrientes
              
               ,
               Situate
               near
               the
               place
               where
               the
               Two
               Rivers
               Paraguay
               and
               Parana
               meet
               .
               Upon
               the
               Parana
               stand
               Three
               or
               Four
               Villages
               pretty
               far
               from
               each
               other
               ,
               and
               thinly
               Peopled
               ,
               tho'
               the
               Country
               be
               very
               proper
               for
               Vine-yards
               ,
               and
               has
               enough
               planted
               already
               to
               supply
               the
               Neighbouring
               Parts
               with
               Wine
               .
               The
               Inhabitants
               are
               under
               the
               Jurisdiction
               of
               a
               Governour
               resident
               at
               
               Assomption
               ,
               which
               is
               the
               most
               important
               Place
               the
               Spaniards
               have
               in
               that
               Country
               ,
               and
               stands
               higher
               up
               the
               River
               Paraguay
               on
               the
               North-side
               ;
               't
               is
               the
               Metrapolitan
               City
               ,
               a
               Bishop's
               Seat
               ,
               has
               several
               very
               neat
               Churches
               and
               Convents
               ,
               and
               is
               well
               crowded
               with
               Inhabitants
               ,
               because
               a
               great
               many
               Idle
               People
               ,
               and
               such
               as
               have
               run
               out
               their
               Fortunes
               and
               can
               live
               no
               longer
               in
               Spain
               or
               Peru
               ,
               flock
               thither
               as
               to
               their
               last
               refuge
               .
               The
               Land
               abounds
               in
               Corn
               ,
               Millet
               ,
               Sugar
               ,
               Tobacco
               ,
               Honey
               ,
               Cattle
               ,
               Oaks
               fit
               for
               Shipping
               ,
               Pine-Trees
               for
               Masts
               ,
               and
               particularly
               in
               that
               Herb
               ,
               call'd
               ,
               the
               
                 Herb
                 of
                 Paraguay
              
               ,
               which
               they
               drive
               a
               great
               Trade
               in
               all
               over
               the
               West-Indies
               ;
               and
               this
               obliges
               the
               Merchants
               of
               Chili
               and
               Peru
               ,
               to
               hold
               a
               Correspondence
               with
               those
               of
               Paraguay
               ;
               because
               ,
               without
               that
               Herb
               (
               with
               which
               they
               make
               a
               refreshing
               Liquor
               with
               Water
               and
               Sugar
               ,
               to
               be
               drank
               lukewarm
               )
               the
               Inhabitants
               of
               Peru
               ,
               Savages
               and
               others
               ,
               especially
               those
               that
               work
               in
               the
               Mines
               ,
               could
               not
               subsist
               ,
               for
               the
               Soil
               of
               the
               Country
               being
               full
               of
               Mineral
               Veins
               ,
               the
               Vapours
               that
               rise
               out
               of
               the
               Ground
               suffocate
               them
               ,
               and
               nothing
               but
               that
               Liquor
               can
               recover
               them
               again
               ,
               which
               revives
               and
               
               restores
               them
               to
               their
               former
               Vigour
               .
            
             
               In
               this
               City
               of
               Assomption
               ,
               the
               Native
               Indians
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               Spaniards
               are
               very
               courteous
               and
               obliging
               to
               Strangers
               .
               They
               indulge
               themselves
               in
               a
               great
               deal
               of
               liberty
               ,
               even
               with
               respect
               to
               Women
               ,
               insomuch
               that
               being
               often
               necessitated
               to
               Sleep
               in
               the
               open
               Air
               (
               because
               of
               the
               excessive
               Heat
               )
               they
               spread
               their
               Quilts
               in
               the
               Streets
               ,
               and
               lie
               there
               all
               Night
               Men
               and
               Women
               together
               :
               Nor
               is
               any
               Body
               scandaliz'd
               at
               it
               .
               Having
               plenty
               of
               all
               things
               good
               to
               eat
               and
               drink
               ,
               they
               give
               themselves
               up
               to
               Ease
               and
               Idleness
               ,
               and
               don
               't
               much
               trouble
               themselves
               with
               Trading
               abroad
               ,
               nor
               heaping
               up
               Money
               ,
               which
               upon
               that
               account
               is
               very
               scarce
               among
               'em
               ,
               contenting
               themselves
               with
               trucking
               the
               Commodities
               of
               their
               own
               Product
               ,
               for
               others
               more
               necessary
               and
               useful
               to
               them
               .
            
             
               Further
               up
               in
               the
               Country
               ,
               that
               is
               to
               say
               ,
               towards
               the
               Head
               of
               the
               River
               Vrugay
               ,
               in
               the
               Province
               of
               Paraguay
               ,
               are
               many
               Settlements
               of
               Colonies
               ,
               transplanted
               thither
               by
               the
               
                 Jesuits
                 Missionaries
              
               ,
               that
               prevail'd
               upon
               the
               Savages
               in
               those
               Parts
               ,
               who
               are
               naturally
               tractable
               ,
               to
               quit
               their
               Woods
               and
               Mountains
               ,
               and
               
               come
               and
               dwell
               together
               in
               Villages
               in
               a
               Civil
               Community
               ,
               where
               they
               instructed
               them
               in
               the
               Christian
               Religion
               ,
               taught
               them
               Mechanicks
               ,
               to
               play
               upon
               Musical
               Instruments
               ,
               and
               several
               other
               Arts
               covenient
               to
               Human
               Life
               .
               
                 Thus
                 the
                 Missionaries
                 who
                 came
                 upon
                 a
                 Religious
                 Motive
                 ,
                 are
                 largely
                 recompenc'd
                 by
                 the
                 Temporal
                 Advantages
                 which
                 they
                 reap
                 here
                 .
              
               The
               report
               that
               there
               were
               Golden
               Mines
               in
               this
               Country
               ,
               could
               not
               be
               kept
               so
               close
               ,
               but
               that
               the
               Spaniards
               had
               some
               inkling
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               among
               others
               ,
               
                 Don
                 Hiacinto
                 de
                 Laris
              
               Governor
               of
               
                 Buenes
                 Ayres
              
               ,
               who
               about
               the
               Year
               1653
               ,
               had
               orders
               from
               the
               King
               of
               Spain
               ,
               to
               go
               and
               visit
               these
               Settlements
               ,
               and
               examine
               into
               their
               Wealth
               .
               At
               first
               coming
               he
               was
               well
               receiv'd
               ,
               but
               perceiving
               that
               he
               began
               to
               inspect
               their
               Riches
               ,
               and
               search
               for
               Gold
               ,
               The
               Savages
               who
               are
               shy
               of
               working
               in
               the
               Mines
               ,
               took
               up
               Arms
               ,
               and
               forc'd
               him
               and
               his
               Followers
               Fifty
               in
               Number
               to
               depart
               out
               of
               their
               Country
               .
               The
               Governor
               who
               succeeded
               him
               ,
               inform'd
               himself
               more
               particularly
               of
               this
               matter
               ,
               and
               to
               make
               the
               best
               use
               of
               his
               Intelligence
               ,
               inter'd
               into
               a
               strict
               Alliance
               with
               the
               Jesuits
               of
               his
               own
               Government
               ,
               who
               hold
               a
               Correspondence
               
               with
               the
               rest
               of
               their
               Fraternity
               ;
               and
               having
               got
               a
               considerable
               Sum
               from
               the
               Hollanders
               for
               leave
               to
               Trade
               at
               
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
              
               ,
               he
               engag'd
               the
               Jesuits
               to
               furnish
               him
               100000
               Crowns
               in
               Gold
               for
               the
               value
               in
               Silver
               ,
               for
               lightness
               of
               Carriage
               .
               But
               this
               same
               Governor
               being
               arrested
               by
               the
               King
               of
               
               Spain's
               Order
               ,
               for
               permitting
               the
               Dutch
               to
               Trade
               at
               
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
              
               ,
               his
               Gold
               was
               seiz'd
               and
               confiscated
               ,
               which
               upon
               trial
               prov'd
               to
               be
               much
               finer
               than
               that
               of
               Peru
               ,
               and
               by
               this
               and
               other
               Circumstances
               ,
               they
               discover'd
               ,
               that
               it
               came
               from
               the
               Mines
               found
               out
               by
               the
               Jesuits
               in
               these
               parts
               .
            
             
               On
               the
               South-side
               of
               the
               River
               
                 de
                 la
                 Plata
              
               ,
               from
               
                 Cape
                 Sant
                 Antonio
              
               ,
               to
               within
               30
               Leagues
               of
               
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
              
               ,
               't
               is
               dangerous
               Sailing
               ,
               because
               of
               the
               Banks
               that
               lie
               in
               the
               way
               ;
               wherefore
               they
               always
               go
               on
               the
               North-side
               ,
               as
               I
               said
               before
               ,
               till
               they
               come
               up
               so
               far
               ,
               then
               they
               cross
               over
               to
               the
               South-side
               which
               is
               very
               safe
               ;
               especially
               when
               the
               Wind
               blows
               against
               the
               Stream
               of
               the
               River
               and
               swells
               it
               ;
               for
               when
               a
               Westerly
               Wind
               blows
               from
               Land
               ,
               the
               Water
               falls
               ;
               however
               when
               the
               Water
               is
               at
               the
               lowest
               ,
               't
               is
               Three
               Fathom
               and
               a
               half
               deep
               ,
               both
               in
               the
               North
               and
               South
               Channels
               .
               When
               we
               
               enter'd
               into
               the
               South-Channel
               ,
               we
               came
               in
               sight
               of
               those
               Vast
               Plains
               extending
               to
               
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
              
               ,
               and
               thence
               as
               far
               as
               the
               River
               Salladillo
               ,
               60
               Leagues
               short
               of
               Cordoua
               ,
               which
               are
               so
               cover'd
               with
               all
               sorts
               of
               Cattle
               ,
               that
               notwithstanding
               multitudes
               of
               them
               are
               daily
               destroy'd
               for
               their
               Skins
               ,
               there
               's
               no
               Sign
               of
               their
               diminution
               .
            
             
               As
               soon
               as
               we
               arriv'd
               at
               the
               Cape
               of
               
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
              
               ,
               we
               gave
               notice
               of
               it
               to
               the
               Governor
               ,
               who
               understanding
               that
               we
               had
               the
               King
               of
               
               Spain's
               Licence
               for
               coming
               thither
               ,
               (
               without
               which
               he
               could
               not
               have
               permitted
               us
               entrance
               into
               the
               place
               ,
               unless
               he
               would
               have
               broke
               his
               Orders
               )
               he
               sent
               the
               Kings
               Officers
               on
               board
               to
               visit
               our
               Ship
               ,
               according
               to
               custom
               ,
               which
               done
               ,
               we
               landed
               our
               Goods
               ,
               and
               laid
               them
               up
               in
               a
               Ware-house
               hired
               for
               the
               time
               of
               our
               stay
               .
               They
               consisted
               chiefly
               in
               Linnen
               Cloath
               ,
               particularly
               that
               made
               at
               Rouen
               ,
               which
               goes
               off
               very
               well
               in
               those
               Parts
               ,
               as
               also
               in
               Silks
               ,
               Ribans
               ,
               Thread
               ,
               Needles
               ,
               Swords
               ,
               Horse-shoes
               ,
               and
               other
               Iron-work
               ,
               Working-tools
               of
               all
               sorts
               ,
               Drugs
               ,
               Spices
               ,
               Silk
               and
               Wollen-Stockings
               ,
               Woollen-Cloath
               ,
               Serges
               ,
               and
               other
               Woollen-Stuffs
               ,
               and
               generally
               in
               every
               
               thing
               fit
               for
               Cloathing
               :
               which
               as
               we
               were
               inform'd
               were
               proper
               commodities
               for
               those
               Parts
               .
               Now
               the
               Custom
               is
               ,
               that
               as
               soon
               as
               a
               Licens'd
               Ship
               (
               that
               is
               to
               say
               which
               has
               the
               King
               of
               
               Spain's
               Permission
               )
               comes
               to
               
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
              
               .
               The
               Governor
               of
               the
               Place
               ,
               or
               Captain
               of
               the
               Ship
               dispatches
               a
               Messenger
               to
               Peru
               ,
               with
               the
               Letters
               from
               Spain
               ,
               if
               he
               has
               any
               ;
               or
               else
               to
               acquaint
               the
               Merchants
               with
               his
               Arrival
               ,
               whereupon
               some
               of
               them
               immediately
               set
               out
               to
               
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
              
               ,
               or
               else
               send
               Commissions
               to
               their
               Correspondents
               ,
               to
               buy
               up
               what
               Wares
               they
               think
               convenient
               .
               'T
               was
               my
               fortune
               to
               be
               sent
               upon
               both
               these
               Errands
               ,
               for
               among
               a
               great
               many
               Letters
               that
               we
               brought
               with
               us
               ,
               was
               a
               large
               pacquet
               from
               his
               Catholick
               Majesty
               for
               Peru
               ,
               enclos'd
               in
               a
               Leaden
               Box
               ,
               as
               all
               the
               Dispatches
               from
               the
               Spanish
               Court
               to
               the
               Indies
               commonly
               are
               ;
               to
               the
               end
               ,
               that
               if
               the
               Ship
               that
               carries
               them
               should
               be
               in
               eminent
               peril
               of
               falling
               into
               an
               Enemies
               Hands
               ,
               they
               might
               be
               flung
               over
               board
               and
               sunk
               .
               This
               Pacquet
               was
               entrusted
               to
               my
               care
               ,
               wherein
               were
               many
               Letters
               to
               the
               Vice-Roy
               of
               Peru
               ,
               and
               other
               Prime
               Officers
               in
               those
               Parts
               ,
               signifying
               the
               Birth
               of
               the
               Prince
               
               of
               Spain
               :
               and
               I
               carry'd
               likewise
               an
               Inventory
               attested
               by
               the
               Kings
               Officers
               at
               
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
              
               of
               the
               greatest
               part
               of
               our
               Lading
               ,
               to
               be
               shewn
               to
               the
               Merchants
               of
               Potosi
               ;
               they
               rely'd
               upon
               the
               conditions
               of
               the
               Goods
               as
               specified
               in
               the
               Inventory
               ,
               and
               so
               bargain'd
               for
               what
               they
               lik'd
               ,
               but
               their
               effects
               did
               not
               come
               to
               'em
               till
               Seven
               or
               Eight
               Months
               after
               .
            
             
               
                 A
                 Description
                 of
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
                 .
              
               
                 BEfore
                 I
                 say
                 any
                 thing
                 of
                 my
                 Journy
                 to
                 Peru
                 ,
                 I
                 will
                 set
                 down
                 what
                 I
                 observ'd
                 remarkable
                 at
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 whilst
                 I
                 tarry'd
                 there
                 .
                 The
                 Air
                 is
                 pretty
                 temperate
                 ,
                 much
                 as
                 't
                 is
                 in
                 Andalousia
                 ,
                 but
                 not
                 quite
                 so
                 warm
                 ,
                 the
                 Rains
                 fall
                 almost
                 as
                 often
                 in
                 Summer
                 as
                 Winter
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 Rain
                 in
                 sultry
                 weather
                 usually
                 breeds
                 divers
                 kinds
                 of
                 Toads
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 very
                 common
                 in
                 this
                 Country
                 ,
                 but
                 are
                 not
                 venemous
                 .
                 The
                 Town
                 stands
                 upon
                 a
                 rising
                 Ground
                 on
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 
                   de
                   la
                   Plata
                
                 ,
                 a
                 Musquet
                 shot
                 from
                 the
                 Channel
                 ,
                 in
                 an
                 Angle
                 of
                 Land
                 made
                 
                 by
                 a
                 little
                 Rivulet
                 ,
                 call'd
                 Riochuelo
                 ,
                 which
                 falls
                 into
                 the
                 River
                 a
                 quarter
                 of
                 a
                 League
                 from
                 the
                 Town
                 ;
                 it
                 contains
                 400
                 Houses
                 ,
                 has
                 no
                 enclosure
                 ,
                 neither
                 Wall
                 nor
                 Ditch
                 ,
                 and
                 nothing
                 to
                 defend
                 it
                 but
                 a
                 little
                 Fort
                 of
                 Earth
                 surrounded
                 with
                 a
                 Ditch
                 ,
                 which
                 commands
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 has
                 Ten
                 Iron
                 Guns
                 ,
                 the
                 biggest
                 of
                 which
                 is
                 a
                 Twelve
                 Pounder
                 ;
                 there
                 the
                 Governor
                 resides
                 who
                 has
                 but
                 150
                 Men
                 in
                 Garrison
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 form'd
                 into
                 Three
                 Companies
                 Commanded
                 by
                 Three
                 Captains
                 ,
                 whom
                 he
                 appoints
                 at
                 will
                 ,
                 and
                 indeed
                 he
                 changes
                 them
                 so
                 often
                 ,
                 that
                 there
                 is
                 hardly
                 a
                 Wealthy
                 Citizen
                 but
                 has
                 been
                 a
                 Captain
                 ;
                 these
                 Companies
                 are
                 not
                 always
                 full
                 ,
                 because
                 the
                 Souldiers
                 are
                 drawn
                 by
                 the
                 cheapness
                 of
                 Living
                 in
                 those
                 Parts
                 to
                 desert
                 frequently
                 ,
                 notwithstanding
                 they
                 endeavour
                 to
                 keep
                 them
                 in
                 the
                 Service
                 by
                 a
                 large
                 pay
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 
                   per
                   diem
                
                 Four
                 Reals
                 ,
                 worth
                 1
                 
                   s.
                   6
                   d.
                   English
                
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 Loaf
                 of
                 3
                 
                   d.
                   ob
                
                 .
                 which
                 is
                 as
                 much
                 as
                 one
                 Man
                 can
                 eat
                 .
                 But
                 the
                 Governor
                 keeps
                 1200
                 tame
                 Horses
                 in
                 a
                 Plain
                 thereabouts
                 for
                 his
                 ordinary
                 Service
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 case
                 of
                 necessity
                 to
                 mount
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 the
                 Place
                 ,
                 and
                 form
                 a
                 small
                 Body
                 of
                 Cavalry
                 .
                 Besides
                 this
                 Fort
                 ,
                 there
                 is
                 a
                 little
                 Bastion
                 at
                 the
                 
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 Rivulet
                 wherein
                 they
                 keep
                 Guard
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 but
                 Two
                 Iron-Guns
                 mounted
                 upon
                 it
                 ,
                 each
                 carrying
                 a
                 Three
                 Pound
                 Ball
                 ;
                 this
                 commands
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 the
                 Barks
                 come
                 ashore
                 to
                 deliver
                 or
                 take
                 in
                 goods
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 liable
                 to
                 be
                 visited
                 by
                 the
                 Officers
                 of
                 the
                 Bastion
                 when
                 they
                 lade
                 and
                 unlade
                 .
                 The
                 Houses
                 of
                 the
                 Town
                 are
                 built
                 of
                 Earth
                 ,
                 because
                 there
                 is
                 but
                 little
                 Stone
                 in
                 all
                 those
                 Parts
                 up
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 Peru
                 ;
                 they
                 are
                 thatch'd
                 with
                 Canes
                 and
                 Straw
                 ,
                 have
                 no
                 Stories
                 ,
                 all
                 the
                 Rooms
                 are
                 of
                 a
                 Floor
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 very
                 Spacious
                 ;
                 they
                 have
                 great
                 Court-yards
                 ,
                 and
                 behind
                 their
                 Houses
                 large
                 Gardens
                 full
                 of
                 Orange-trees
                 ,
                 Lemon-trees
                 ,
                 Fig-trees
                 ,
                 Apple-trees
                 ,
                 Pear-trees
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Fruit-trees
                 ,
                 with
                 store
                 of
                 Herbs
                 ,
                 Cabbages
                 ,
                 Onions
                 ,
                 Garlick
                 ,
                 Lettice
                 ,
                 Peas
                 ,
                 Beans
                 ,
                 and
                 especially
                 their
                 Melons
                 are
                 excellent
                 ,
                 the
                 Soil
                 being
                 very
                 fat
                 and
                 good
                 ;
                 they
                 live
                 very
                 commodiously
                 ,
                 and
                 except
                 Wine
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 something
                 dear
                 ;
                 they
                 have
                 plenty
                 of
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Victuals
                 ,
                 as
                 Beef
                 ,
                 Veal
                 ,
                 Mutton
                 ,
                 Venison
                 ,
                 Hares
                 ,
                 Coneys
                 ,
                 Pullets
                 ,
                 Ducks
                 ,
                 Wild-geese
                 ,
                 Partridges
                 ,
                 Pidgeons
                 ,
                 Turtles
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 kind
                 of
                 Wild-fowl
                 ;
                 and
                 so
                 cheap
                 ,
                 that
                 one
                 may
                 buy
                 Partridges
                 for
                 a
                 Penny
                 a
                 
                 piece
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 rest
                 proportionably
                 .
                 There
                 are
                 likewise
                 abundance
                 of
                 Ostriches
                 who
                 herd
                 in
                 Flocks
                 like
                 Cattle
                 ,
                 and
                 tho'
                 they
                 are
                 good
                 Meat
                 ,
                 yet
                 none
                 but
                 the
                 Savages
                 eat
                 of
                 them
                 .
                 They
                 make
                 Umbrellas
                 of
                 their
                 Feathers
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 very
                 commodious
                 in
                 the
                 Sun
                 ;
                 their
                 Eggs
                 are
                 good
                 ,
                 and
                 every
                 body
                 eats
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 tho'
                 they
                 say
                 they
                 are
                 of
                 hard
                 Digestion
                 .
                 I
                 saw
                 one
                 thing
                 of
                 these
                 Creatures
                 very
                 remarkable
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 while
                 the
                 Hen
                 sits
                 upon
                 the
                 Eggs
                 ,
                 they
                 have
                 the
                 Instinct
                 or
                 Foresight
                 to
                 provide
                 for
                 their
                 Young
                 ;
                 so
                 five
                 or
                 six
                 days
                 before
                 they
                 come
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Shell
                 ,
                 they
                 set
                 an
                 Egg
                 in
                 each
                 of
                 the
                 four
                 Corners
                 of
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 they
                 sit
                 ,
                 these
                 Eggs
                 they
                 break
                 ,
                 and
                 when
                 they
                 rot
                 ,
                 Worms
                 and
                 Maggots
                 breed
                 in
                 'em
                 in
                 prodigious
                 numbers
                 ,
                 which
                 serve
                 to
                 nourish
                 the
                 Young
                 Ostriches
                 from
                 the
                 time
                 they
                 are
                 hatch'd
                 till
                 they
                 are
                 able
                 to
                 go
                 farther
                 for
                 their
                 sustenance
                 .
                 The
                 Houses
                 of
                 the
                 better
                 sort
                 of
                 Inhabitants
                 are
                 adorn'd
                 with
                 Hangings
                 ,
                 Pictures
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Ornaments
                 and
                 decent
                 Moveables
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 that
                 are
                 tollerably
                 well
                 to
                 pass
                 are
                 serv'd
                 in
                 Plate
                 ,
                 and
                 have
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 Servants
                 ,
                 
                   Blacks
                   ,
                   Moulatos
                   ,
                   Mestices
                   ,
                   Indians
                   ,
                   Cabres
                   ,
                
                 or
                 Sambos
                 ,
                 who
                 are
                 all
                 Slaves
                 .
                 The
                 Negroes
                 come
                 
                 from
                 Guinea
                 ;
                 the
                 Moulatos
                 are
                 begotten
                 by
                 a
                 Spaniard
                 upon
                 a
                 Black
                 ;
                 the
                 Mestices
                 are
                 born
                 of
                 a
                 Spaniard
                 and
                 an
                 Indian
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Sambos
                 of
                 an
                 Indian
                 Man
                 and
                 a
                 Mestice
                 ,
                 all
                 distinguishable
                 by
                 their
                 Colour
                 and
                 Hair.
                 They
                 employ
                 these
                 Slaves
                 in
                 their
                 Houses
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 cultivate
                 their
                 Grounds
                 ,
                 for
                 they
                 have
                 large
                 Farms
                 stock'd
                 with
                 Grain
                 in
                 abundance
                 ,
                 as
                 Wheat
                 ,
                 Barley
                 and
                 Millet
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 look
                 after
                 their
                 Horses
                 and
                 Mules
                 ,
                 who
                 feed
                 upon
                 nothing
                 but
                 Grass
                 all
                 the
                 Year
                 round
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 kill
                 Wild-Bulls
                 ,
                 or
                 in
                 fine
                 to
                 do
                 any
                 kind
                 of
                 Service
                 .
                 All
                 the
                 Wealth
                 of
                 these
                 Inhabitants
                 consists
                 in
                 Cattle
                 ,
                 wich
                 multiply
                 so
                 prodigiously
                 in
                 this
                 Province
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Plains
                 are
                 quite
                 cover'd
                 with
                 'em
                 ,
                 particularly
                 with
                 Bulls
                 ,
                 Cows
                 ,
                 Sheep
                 ,
                 Horses
                 ,
                 Mares
                 ,
                 Mules
                 ,
                 Asses
                 ,
                 Swine
                 ,
                 Deer
                 ,
                 and
                 others
                 ,
                 insomuch
                 that
                 were
                 it
                 not
                 for
                 a
                 vast
                 number
                 of
                 Dogs
                 ,
                 who
                 devour
                 the
                 Calves
                 and
                 other
                 young
                 Beasts
                 ,
                 they
                 would
                 over-run
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 they
                 make
                 so
                 great
                 profit
                 of
                 the
                 Skins
                 and
                 Hides
                 of
                 these
                 Annimals
                 ,
                 that
                 a
                 single
                 Instance
                 will
                 be
                 sufficient
                 to
                 shew
                 how
                 far
                 it
                 might
                 be
                 improv'd
                 by
                 good
                 hands
                 :
                 The
                 22
                 Dutch
                 Ships
                 that
                 we
                 found
                 at
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 were
                 each
                 of
                 them
                 laden
                 with
                 13
                 or
                 14000
                 Bull-hides
                 
                 at
                 least
                 ,
                 which
                 amount
                 to
                 above
                 300000
                 Livers
                 ,
                 or
                 33500
                 
                   l.
                   Sterling
                
                 ,
                 bought
                 by
                 the
                 Dutch
                 at
                 Seven
                 or
                 Eight
                 Reals
                 a
                 piece
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 under
                 an
                 English
                 Crown
                 ,
                 and
                 sold
                 again
                 in
                 Europe
                 for
                 Twenty-five
                 Shillings
                 English
                 at
                 least
                 .
                 When
                 I
                 express'd
                 my
                 astonishment
                 at
                 the
                 sight
                 of
                 such
                 an
                 infinite
                 number
                 of
                 Cattle
                 ,
                 they
                 told
                 me
                 of
                 a
                 Stratagem
                 sometimes
                 made
                 use
                 of
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 apprehend
                 a
                 descent
                 from
                 any
                 Enemies
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 matter
                 of
                 greater
                 wonder
                 ,
                 and
                 't
                 is
                 this
                 ;
                 they
                 drive
                 such
                 a
                 Herd
                 of
                 Bulls
                 ,
                 Cows
                 ,
                 Horses
                 and
                 other
                 Animals
                 to
                 the
                 Shore-side
                 ,
                 that
                 't
                 is
                 utterly
                 impossible
                 for
                 any
                 number
                 of
                 Men
                 ,
                 even
                 tho'
                 they
                 should
                 not
                 dread
                 the
                 fury
                 of
                 those
                 Wild
                 Creatures
                 ,
                 to
                 make
                 their
                 way
                 through
                 so
                 great
                 a
                 drove
                 of
                 Beasts
                 .
                 The
                 First
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 this
                 place
                 ,
                 put
                 every
                 one
                 their
                 mark
                 upon
                 those
                 they
                 could
                 catch
                 ,
                 and
                 turn'd
                 'em
                 into
                 their
                 enclosures
                 ,
                 but
                 they
                 multiply'd
                 so
                 fast
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 were
                 forc'd
                 to
                 let
                 'em
                 loose
                 ,
                 and
                 now
                 they
                 go
                 and
                 kill
                 them
                 according
                 as
                 they
                 want
                 'em
                 ,
                 or
                 have
                 occasion
                 to
                 make
                 up
                 a
                 quantity
                 of
                 Hides
                 for
                 Sale.
                 At
                 present
                 they
                 mark
                 only
                 those
                 Horses
                 and
                 Mules
                 which
                 they
                 catch
                 to
                 tame
                 and
                 breed
                 up
                 for
                 Service
                 .
                 Some
                 Persons
                 make
                 a
                 great
                 Trade
                 of
                 sending
                 
                 them
                 to
                 Peru
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 yield
                 50
                 Patagons
                 ,
                 or
                 11
                 
                   l.
                   13
                   s.
                   4
                   d.
                   Sterling
                
                 a
                 pair
                 .
                 Most
                 of
                 the
                 Dealers
                 in
                 Cattle
                 are
                 very
                 Rich
                 ,
                 but
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Trading
                 People
                 the
                 most
                 considerable
                 are
                 they
                 that
                 Traffick
                 in
                 European
                 Commodities
                 .
                 Many
                 of
                 whom
                 are
                 reputed
                 worth
                 2
                 or
                 300000
                 Crowns
                 ,
                 or
                 67000
                 
                   l.
                   Sterling
                
                 .
                 So
                 that
                 a
                 Merchant
                 worth
                 no
                 more
                 than
                 15
                 or
                 20000
                 Crowns
                 is
                 look'd
                 upon
                 as
                 a
                 mean
                 Retailer
                 ;
                 of
                 these
                 last
                 there
                 are
                 near
                 200
                 Families
                 in
                 the
                 Town
                 ,
                 that
                 make
                 500
                 Men
                 bearing
                 Arms
                 ,
                 besides
                 their
                 Slaves
                 who
                 are
                 three
                 times
                 that
                 Number
                 ,
                 but
                 are
                 not
                 to
                 be
                 reckon'd
                 of
                 any
                 Defence
                 ,
                 because
                 they
                 are
                 not
                 allow'd
                 to
                 bear
                 Arms
                 :
                 Thus
                 the
                 
                   Spaniards
                   ,
                   Portuguese
                
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 Sons
                 (
                 of
                 whom
                 those
                 that
                 are
                 born
                 upon
                 the
                 place
                 are
                 term'd
                 Criolos
                 ,
                 to
                 distinguish
                 them
                 from
                 the
                 Natives
                 of
                 Spain
                 )
                 and
                 some
                 Mestices
                 are
                 the
                 Militia
                 ,
                 which
                 with
                 the
                 Souldiers
                 in
                 Garrison
                 ,
                 compose
                 a
                 Body
                 of
                 above
                 600
                 Men
                 ,
                 as
                 I
                 computed
                 them
                 in
                 several
                 Musters
                 ,
                 for
                 they
                 draw
                 out
                 on
                 Horse-back
                 Three
                 times
                 a
                 Year
                 near
                 the
                 Town
                 on
                 Festival
                 Days
                 .
                 I
                 observ'd
                 there
                 were
                 many
                 Old
                 Men
                 among
                 them
                 that
                 did
                 not
                 carry
                 Fire-arms
                 ,
                 but
                 only
                 a
                 Sword
                 by
                 their
                 side
                 ,
                 a
                 Lance
                 in
                 hand
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 Buckler
                 
                 at
                 their
                 shoulder
                 :
                 Th●●●
                 are
                 also
                 most
                 of
                 them
                 Marry'd
                 and
                 Matters
                 of
                 Families
                 ,
                 and
                 consequently
                 have
                 no
                 great
                 stomach
                 to
                 Fighting
                 .
                 They
                 love
                 their
                 Ease
                 and
                 Pleasure
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 entirely
                 devoted
                 to
                 Venus
                 ;
                 I
                 confess
                 they
                 are
                 in
                 some
                 measure
                 excusable
                 in
                 this
                 point
                 ,
                 for
                 most
                 of
                 their
                 Women
                 are
                 extreamly
                 pretty
                 ,
                 well
                 shaped
                 ,
                 and
                 clear
                 skin'd
                 ;
                 and
                 withal
                 so
                 faithful
                 to
                 their
                 Husbands
                 ,
                 that
                 no
                 Temptations
                 can
                 prevail
                 with
                 them
                 to
                 loosen
                 the
                 Sacred
                 Knot
                 :
                 But
                 then
                 if
                 their
                 Husbands
                 transgress
                 ,
                 they
                 are
                 often
                 punish'd
                 with
                 Poison
                 or
                 Dagger
                 .
                 The
                 Women
                 are
                 more
                 in
                 Number
                 than
                 the
                 Men.
                 Besides
                 Spaniards
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 a
                 few
                 
                   French
                   ,
                   Hollanders
                
                 ,
                 and
                 Genouese
                 ,
                 but
                 all
                 go
                 for
                 Spaniards
                 ,
                 otherwise
                 there
                 would
                 be
                 no
                 dwelling
                 for
                 them
                 there
                 ,
                 especially
                 those
                 that
                 differ
                 in
                 their
                 Religion
                 from
                 the
                 Roman-Catholicks
                 ,
                 because
                 the
                 Inquisition
                 is
                 settled
                 there
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Bishop's
                 Revenue
                 amounts
                 to
                 3000
                 Patagons
                 ,
                 or
                 700
                 
                   l.
                   Sterling
                   per
                   Annum
                
                 .
                 His
                 Diocess
                 takes
                 in
                 this
                 Town
                 and
                 
                   Santa
                   Fe
                
                 ,
                 with
                 the
                 Farms
                 belonging
                 to
                 both
                 ;
                 Eight
                 or
                 Ten
                 Priests
                 Officiate
                 in
                 the
                 Cathedral
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 built
                 of
                 Earth
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 the
                 Houses
                 .
                 The
                 Jesuits
                 have
                 a
                 College
                 ;
                 the
                 Dominicans
                 ,
                 the
                 Recollects
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 the
                 
                   Religious
                   de
                   la
                   Mercy
                
                 ,
                 have
                 each
                 a
                 Convent
                 .
                 There
                 is
                 likewise
                 an
                 Hospital
                 ,
                 but
                 there
                 are
                 so
                 few
                 poor
                 People
                 in
                 these
                 Parts
                 that
                 't
                 is
                 of
                 little
                 use
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Monsieur
                 Acarete
                 du
                 Biscay's
                 Journey
                 from
                 Buenos
                 Ayres
                 to
                 Peru.
                 
              
               
                 I
                 Left
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ,
                 and
                 took
                 the
                 Road
                 to
                 Cordoua
                 ,
                 leaving
                 
                   Santa
                   Fe
                
                 on
                 my
                 right
                 hand
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 place
                 take
                 this
                 account
                 ,
                 't
                 is
                 a
                 Spanish
                 Settlement
                 dependant
                 upon
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ,
                 the
                 Commander
                 is
                 no
                 more
                 than
                 a
                 Lieutenant
                 ,
                 and
                 does
                 nothing
                 but
                 by
                 order
                 from
                 the
                 Governor
                 of
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 .
                 'T
                 is
                 a
                 little
                 place
                 containing
                 25
                 Houses
                 ,
                 without
                 any
                 Walls
                 ,
                 Fortifications
                 ,
                 or
                 Garrison
                 ,
                 distant
                 80
                 Leagues
                 from
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 Northward
                 ,
                 Situate
                 upon
                 the
                 River
                 
                   de
                   la
                   Plata
                
                 ,
                 large
                 Vessels
                 might
                 come
                 up
                 to
                 it
                 ,
                 were
                 it
                 not
                 for
                 a
                 great
                 bank
                 that
                 obstructs
                 the
                 passage
                 a
                 little
                 above
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 .
                 Nevertheless
                 't
                 is
                 a
                 very
                 advantageous
                 Post
                 ,
                 because
                 't
                 is
                 the
                 only
                 passage
                 from
                 
                   Peru
                   ,
                   Chili
                
                 and
                 Tucuman
                 to
                 Paraguay
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 a
                 manner
                 the
                 Magazine
                 of
                 the
                 Commodities
                 
                 drawn
                 from
                 thence
                 ,
                 particularly
                 that
                 Herb
                 already
                 spoken
                 of
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 cannot
                 be
                 without
                 in
                 those
                 Provinces
                 .
                 The
                 Soil
                 is
                 as
                 good
                 and
                 Fertile
                 here
                 as
                 at
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 Town
                 having
                 nothing
                 remarkably
                 different
                 from
                 what
                 has
                 been
                 observ'd
                 of
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ,
                 I
                 leave
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 proceed
                 upon
                 my
                 Journey
                 .
                 'T
                 is
                 counted
                 140
                 Leagues
                 from
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 to
                 Cordoua
                 ,
                 and
                 because
                 some
                 parts
                 of
                 the
                 Road
                 are
                 uninhabited
                 for
                 a
                 long
                 way
                 together
                 ;
                 I
                 furnished
                 my self
                 at
                 my
                 departure
                 with
                 what
                 I
                 was
                 inform'd
                 I
                 should
                 stand
                 in
                 need
                 of
                 ;
                 so
                 I
                 set
                 out
                 having
                 a
                 Savage
                 for
                 my
                 Guide
                 ,
                 with
                 Three
                 Horses
                 and
                 Three
                 Mules
                 ,
                 some
                 to
                 carry
                 my
                 Baggage
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 rest
                 to
                 change
                 upon
                 the
                 way
                 when
                 that
                 I
                 rid
                 upon
                 was
                 tired
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 River
                 Lucan
                 ,
                 and
                 even
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 the
                 River
                 Recife
                 ,
                 30
                 Leagues
                 ,
                 I
                 pass'd
                 by
                 several
                 Habitations
                 and
                 Farms
                 cultivated
                 by
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 ,
                 but
                 beyond
                 Recife
                 to
                 the
                 River
                 Salladillo
                 ,
                 I
                 saw
                 none
                 .
                 Let
                 it
                 be
                 observed
                 by
                 the
                 way
                 ,
                 that
                 these
                 Rivers
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 all
                 the
                 rest
                 in
                 the
                 Provinces
                 of
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                   ,
                   Paraguay
                
                 and
                 Tucuman
                 ,
                 that
                 fall
                 into
                 the
                 River
                 
                   de
                   la
                   Plata
                
                 are
                 fordable
                 on
                 Horse-back
                 ;
                 but
                 when
                 the
                 Rains
                 or
                 
                 any
                 other
                 accident
                 swells
                 them
                 ,
                 a
                 Traveller
                 must
                 either
                 swim
                 over
                 ,
                 or
                 else
                 get
                 upon
                 a
                 bundle
                 in
                 the
                 nature
                 of
                 a
                 raft
                 ,
                 which
                 a
                 Savage
                 hawls
                 over
                 to
                 the
                 other
                 side
                 .
                 I
                 could
                 not
                 Swim
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 was
                 forc'd
                 to
                 make
                 use
                 of
                 this
                 expedient
                 twice
                 or
                 thrice
                 when
                 I
                 could
                 not
                 find
                 a
                 Ford.
                 The
                 way
                 was
                 this
                 ,
                 my
                 Indian
                 kill'd
                 a
                 Wild
                 Bull
                 ,
                 flead
                 the
                 Hide
                 off
                 ,
                 stuffed
                 it
                 with
                 straw
                 ,
                 and
                 ty'd
                 it
                 up
                 in
                 a
                 great
                 bundle
                 with
                 thongs
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 Hide
                 ,
                 upon
                 which
                 I
                 plac'd
                 my self
                 with
                 my
                 Baggage
                 ;
                 he
                 swam
                 over
                 hawling
                 me
                 after
                 him
                 by
                 a
                 Cord
                 ty'd
                 to
                 the
                 bundle
                 ,
                 and
                 then
                 he
                 repass'd
                 and
                 swam
                 my
                 Horses
                 and
                 Mules
                 over
                 to
                 me
                 .
              
               
                 All
                 the
                 Country
                 between
                 the
                 River
                 Recife
                 and
                 Salladillo
                 ,
                 tho'
                 uninhabited
                 ,
                 abounds
                 in
                 Cattle
                 and
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Fruit-trees
                 ,
                 except
                 Walnut
                 and
                 Chesnut-trees
                 ;
                 there
                 are
                 whole
                 Woods
                 of
                 Nectarine-Trees
                 ,
                 Three
                 or
                 Four
                 Leagues
                 in
                 compass
                 ,
                 that
                 bear
                 excellent
                 Fruit
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 not
                 only
                 eat
                 raw
                 ,
                 but
                 bake
                 them
                 ,
                 or
                 dry
                 them
                 in
                 the
                 Sun
                 ,
                 to
                 keep
                 ,
                 as
                 we
                 in
                 France
                 do
                 Prunes
                 :
                 They
                 seldom
                 use
                 any
                 other
                 than
                 the
                 Wood
                 of
                 this
                 Tree
                 for
                 common
                 firing
                 at
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ,
                 and
                 thereabouts
                 .
                 The
                 Savages
                 that
                 dwell
                 in
                 these
                 Parts
                 are
                 distinguish'd
                 into
                 two
                 sorts
                 ,
                 those
                 that
                 
                 voluntarily
                 submit
                 to
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 are
                 call'd
                 Panpistas
                 ,
                 the
                 rest
                 Serranos
                 ,
                 both
                 cloathed
                 with
                 Skins
                 ,
                 but
                 the
                 last
                 set
                 upon
                 the
                 Panpistas
                 as
                 their
                 mortal
                 Enemies
                 wherever
                 they
                 meet
                 with
                 them
                 .
                 All
                 Fight
                 on
                 Horse-back
                 ,
                 either
                 with
                 Lances
                 pointed
                 with
                 Iron
                 or
                 Bones
                 sharpen'd
                 ,
                 or
                 else
                 with
                 Bows
                 and
                 Arrows
                 ,
                 they
                 wear
                 Bulls-hides
                 fashion'd
                 like
                 a
                 Doublet
                 without
                 sleeves
                 ,
                 to
                 defend
                 their
                 Bodies
                 .
                 Their
                 Chiefs
                 that
                 command
                 over
                 them
                 in
                 War
                 and
                 Peace
                 ,
                 are
                 call'd
                 Couracas
                 .
                 When
                 they
                 take
                 any
                 one
                 of
                 their
                 Enemies
                 ,
                 alive
                 or
                 dead
                 ,
                 they
                 meet
                 all
                 together
                 ,
                 and
                 after
                 they
                 have
                 reproach'd
                 him
                 ,
                 that
                 either
                 he
                 or
                 his
                 Relations
                 were
                 the
                 death
                 of
                 their
                 Kindred
                 or
                 Friends
                 ,
                 they
                 cut
                 and
                 tear
                 him
                 into
                 pieces
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 roast
                 a
                 little
                 and
                 eat
                 ,
                 making
                 a
                 drinking
                 Bowl
                 of
                 his
                 Scull
                 .
                 They
                 feed
                 mostly
                 upon
                 flesh
                 either
                 raw
                 or
                 dress'd
                 ,
                 and
                 particularly
                 Colts
                 flesh
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 like
                 better
                 than
                 Veal
                 .
                 They
                 catch
                 abundance
                 of
                 Fish
                 likewise
                 in
                 their
                 Rivers
                 .
                 They
                 have
                 no
                 settled
                 places
                 of
                 aboad
                 ,
                 but
                 ramble
                 up
                 and
                 down
                 ,
                 several
                 Families
                 together
                 ,
                 and
                 live
                 in
                 Tents
                 .
              
               
                 I
                 could
                 not
                 inform
                 my self
                 exactly
                 what
                 Religion
                 they
                 were
                 of
                 ,
                 but
                 I
                 was
                 told
                 that
                 they
                 look'd
                 upon
                 the
                 Sun
                 and
                 
                 Moon
                 as
                 Deities
                 ,
                 and
                 as
                 I
                 travell'd
                 along
                 ,
                 I
                 saw
                 a
                 Savage
                 upon
                 his
                 knees
                 with
                 his
                 Face
                 to
                 the
                 Sun
                 ,
                 who
                 cry'd
                 out
                 and
                 made
                 strange
                 gestures
                 with
                 his
                 Hands
                 and
                 Arms.
                 I
                 learn'd
                 from
                 the
                 Savage
                 that
                 accompany'd
                 me
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 was
                 one
                 of
                 those
                 they
                 call'd
                 Papas
                 ,
                 who
                 in
                 the
                 Morning
                 kneel
                 towards
                 the
                 Sun
                 ,
                 and
                 at
                 Night
                 towards
                 the
                 Moon
                 ,
                 to
                 supplicate
                 those
                 fancy'd
                 Divinities
                 to
                 be
                 propitious
                 to
                 them
                 ,
                 to
                 give
                 them
                 fair
                 Weather
                 ,
                 and
                 Victory
                 over
                 their
                 Foes
                 .
              
               
                 They
                 make
                 no
                 great
                 Ceremony
                 in
                 their
                 Marriages
                 ;
                 but
                 when
                 a
                 Relation
                 dies
                 ,
                 after
                 they
                 have
                 rubb'd
                 his
                 body
                 with
                 a
                 certain
                 Earth
                 that
                 consumes
                 all
                 but
                 the
                 Bones
                 ,
                 they
                 preserve
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 carry
                 as
                 many
                 of
                 them
                 as
                 they
                 can
                 conveniently
                 about
                 with
                 them
                 in
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 Chests
                 ,
                 and
                 this
                 they
                 do
                 in
                 token
                 of
                 their
                 affection
                 to
                 their
                 Kindred
                 ;
                 indeed
                 they
                 are
                 not
                 wanting
                 in
                 good
                 Offices
                 to
                 them
                 during
                 their
                 Lives
                 ,
                 nor
                 in
                 their
                 Sickness
                 and
                 Death
                 .
              
               
                 Along
                 the
                 River
                 Salladillo
                 ,
                 I
                 took
                 notice
                 of
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 Parrats
                 ,
                 or
                 Papagays
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 call
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 certain
                 Birds
                 ,
                 call'd
                 Guacamayos
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 of
                 divers
                 Colours
                 ,
                 and
                 twice
                 or
                 thrice
                 as
                 big
                 as
                 a
                 Parrat
                 .
                 The
                 River
                 it self
                 is
                 
                 full
                 of
                 the
                 Fish
                 ,
                 call'd
                 Dorado
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 very
                 good
                 to
                 eat
                 .
                 There
                 is
                 also
                 a
                 Creature
                 in
                 it
                 ,
                 whether
                 't
                 is
                 Meat
                 or
                 Poyson
                 no
                 body
                 knows
                 ,
                 it
                 has
                 Four
                 Feet
                 and
                 a
                 long
                 Tail
                 like
                 a
                 Lizard
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 Salladillo
                 quite
                 to
                 Cordoua
                 ,
                 you
                 go
                 along
                 a
                 very
                 fine
                 River
                 ,
                 that
                 abounds
                 with
                 Fish
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 neither
                 wide
                 nor
                 deep
                 ,
                 for
                 it
                 may
                 be
                 forded
                 over
                 .
                 On
                 the
                 Bank
                 of
                 it
                 you
                 meet
                 with
                 little
                 Plantations
                 every
                 Three
                 or
                 Four
                 Leagues
                 ;
                 which
                 are
                 like
                 Country
                 Houses
                 inhabited
                 by
                 
                   Spaniards
                   ,
                   Portuguese
                
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Natives
                 ,
                 who
                 have
                 all
                 the
                 necessary
                 accomodations
                 of
                 Life
                 they
                 can
                 wish
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 very
                 Civil
                 and
                 Charitable
                 to
                 Strangers
                 ;
                 their
                 principal
                 Wealth
                 is
                 in
                 Horses
                 and
                 Mules
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 they
                 Trade
                 with
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 Peru.
                 
              
               
                 Cordoua
                 is
                 a
                 Town
                 Situate
                 in
                 a
                 pleasant
                 and
                 fruitful
                 Plain
                 upon
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 a
                 River
                 ,
                 bigger
                 and
                 broader
                 than
                 that
                 I
                 have
                 just
                 spoken
                 of
                 :
                 'T
                 is
                 compos'd
                 of
                 about
                 400
                 Houses
                 ,
                 Built
                 like
                 those
                 of
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 .
                 It
                 has
                 neither
                 Ditches
                 ,
                 nor
                 Walls
                 ,
                 nor
                 Fort
                 for
                 its
                 defence
                 ;
                 He
                 that
                 Commands
                 it
                 is
                 Governor
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Provinces
                 of
                 Tucuman
                 ;
                 and
                 tho'
                 it
                 be
                 the
                 place
                 of
                 his
                 ordinary
                 Residence
                 ,
                 yet
                 he
                 is
                 wont
                 now
                 and
                 then
                 ,
                 as
                 he
                 sees
                 occasion
                 ,
                 
                 to
                 go
                 and
                 pass
                 some
                 time
                 at
                 
                   St.
                   Jago
                   de
                   l'
                   Estro
                
                 ,
                 at
                 
                   St.
                   Miguel
                   de
                   Tucuman
                
                 ,
                 (
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 Capital
                 City
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 )
                 at
                 Salta
                 and
                 at
                 Xuxui
                 .
                 In
                 each
                 of
                 these
                 Villages
                 there
                 is
                 a
                 Lieutenant
                 ,
                 who
                 has
                 under
                 him
                 an
                 Alcalde
                 and
                 some
                 Officers
                 for
                 the
                 Administration
                 of
                 Justice
                 .
                 The
                 Bishop
                 of
                 Tucuman
                 likewise
                 usually
                 resides
                 at
                 Cordoua
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Cathedral
                 is
                 the
                 only
                 Parish
                 Church
                 of
                 the
                 whole
                 Town
                 ;
                 but
                 there
                 are
                 divers
                 Convents
                 of
                 Monks
                 ,
                 namely
                 of
                 
                   Dominicans
                   ,
                   Recollects
                
                 ,
                 and
                 those
                 of
                 the
                 Order
                 
                   de
                   la
                   Mercy
                
                 :
                 and
                 one
                 of
                 Nunns
                 .
                 The
                 Jesuits
                 have
                 a
                 College
                 there
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 Chappel
                 is
                 the
                 finest
                 and
                 richest
                 of
                 all
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Inhabitants
                 are
                 Rich
                 in
                 Gold
                 and
                 Silver
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 get
                 by
                 the
                 Trade
                 they
                 have
                 for
                 Mules
                 ,
                 with
                 which
                 they
                 furnish
                 Peru
                 and
                 other
                 Parts
                 ;
                 which
                 is
                 so
                 considerable
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 sell
                 about
                 28
                 or
                 30000
                 of
                 'em
                 every
                 Year
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 breed
                 up
                 in
                 their
                 Farms
                 .
                 They
                 usually
                 keep
                 'em
                 till
                 they
                 are
                 about
                 Two
                 Years
                 old
                 ,
                 then
                 expose
                 'em
                 to
                 Sale
                 ,
                 and
                 have
                 about
                 Six
                 Patagons
                 a
                 piece
                 for
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 The
                 Merchants
                 that
                 come
                 to
                 buy
                 'em
                 ,
                 carry
                 'em
                 to
                 St.
                 Jago
                 ,
                 to
                 Salta
                 and
                 Xuxui
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 leave
                 'em
                 for
                 Three
                 Years
                 ,
                 till
                 they
                 are
                 well
                 grown
                 and
                 become
                 
                 strong
                 ,
                 and
                 afterwards
                 bring
                 'em
                 to
                 Peru
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 presently
                 have
                 Vent
                 for
                 'em
                 ,
                 because
                 there
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 in
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 Western
                 part
                 of
                 America
                 ,
                 the
                 greatest
                 part
                 of
                 their
                 Carriage
                 is
                 upon
                 Mules
                 .
                 The
                 People
                 of
                 Cordoua
                 also
                 drive
                 a
                 Trade
                 in
                 Cows
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 have
                 from
                 the
                 Countrey
                 of
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ,
                 and
                 carry
                 to
                 Peru
                 ,
                 where
                 without
                 this
                 way
                 of
                 Subsistance
                 't
                 is
                 certain
                 they
                 would
                 have
                 much
                 ado
                 to
                 live
                 .
                 This
                 kind
                 of
                 Traffick
                 makes
                 this
                 Town
                 the
                 most
                 considerable
                 in
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Tucuman
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 for
                 its
                 Riches
                 and
                 Commodities
                 ,
                 as
                 for
                 the
                 Number
                 of
                 its
                 Inhabitants
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 counted
                 to
                 be
                 at
                 least
                 5
                 or
                 600
                 Families
                 ,
                 besides
                 Slaves
                 who
                 are
                 three
                 times
                 the
                 number
                 .
                 But
                 the
                 generality
                 of
                 'em
                 of
                 all
                 degrees
                 have
                 no
                 other
                 Arms
                 but
                 a
                 Sword
                 and
                 Poignard
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 very
                 indifferent
                 Souldiers
                 ,
                 the
                 Air
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Plenty
                 they
                 enjoy
                 ,
                 rendring
                 them
                 Lazy
                 and
                 Cowardly
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 Cordoua
                 I
                 took
                 the
                 way
                 of
                 St.
                 
                   Jago
                   de
                   l'
                   Estro
                
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 90
                 Leagues
                 distant
                 from
                 it
                 .
                 In
                 my
                 Journey
                 I
                 from
                 time
                 to
                 time
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 Seven
                 or
                 Eight
                 Leagues
                 ,
                 met
                 with
                 single
                 Houses
                 of
                 Spaniards
                 and
                 Portuguese
                 ,
                 who
                 live
                 very
                 solitarily
                 ;
                 
                 they
                 are
                 all
                 Situate
                 upon
                 small
                 Rivulets
                 ,
                 some
                 of
                 'em
                 at
                 the
                 Corners
                 of
                 Forrests
                 which
                 are
                 frequently
                 to
                 be
                 met
                 with
                 in
                 that
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 almost
                 all
                 of
                 
                 Algarobe-wood
                 ,
                 the
                 Fruit
                 of
                 which
                 serves
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 Drink
                 that
                 is
                 sweet
                 and
                 sharpish
                 ,
                 and
                 heady
                 as
                 Wine
                 ;
                 others
                 of
                 them
                 in
                 open
                 Fields
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 not
                 so
                 well
                 stock'd
                 with
                 Cattle
                 ,
                 as
                 those
                 of
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ,
                 but
                 however
                 there
                 are
                 enough
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 indeed
                 more
                 than
                 needs
                 for
                 the
                 subsistance
                 of
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 ,
                 who
                 also
                 make
                 a
                 Trade
                 of
                 Mules
                 ,
                 and
                 Cotton
                 ,
                 and
                 Cocheneil
                 for
                 dying
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Country
                 produces
                 .
              
               
                 
                   St.
                   Jago
                   de
                   l'
                   Estro
                
                 is
                 a
                 Town
                 of
                 about
                 300
                 Houses
                 ,
                 without
                 Ditches
                 or
                 Walls
                 ,
                 Situate
                 in
                 a
                 flat
                 Country
                 ,
                 surrounded
                 with
                 Forrests
                 of
                 Algarobe
                 ;
                 it
                 lies
                 on
                 an
                 indifferently
                 large
                 River
                 ,
                 Navigable
                 for
                 Boats
                 ,
                 and
                 pretty
                 well
                 stor'd
                 with
                 Fish
                 .
                 The
                 Air
                 is
                 very
                 hot
                 ,
                 and
                 sultry
                 ,
                 which
                 makes
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 lazy
                 and
                 effemminate
                 .
                 Their
                 Faces
                 are
                 all
                 very
                 Tawny
                 ;
                 they
                 are
                 mightily
                 given
                 to
                 their
                 Divertisements
                 ,
                 and
                 mind
                 Traffick
                 very
                 little
                 .
                 There
                 are
                 300
                 Men
                 that
                 can
                 bear
                 Arms
                 ,
                 taking
                 in
                 as
                 well
                 the
                 Savages
                 as
                 Slaves
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 are
                 all
                 ill
                 Arm'd
                 ,
                 and
                 but
                 very
                 mean
                 Souldiers
                 .
                 
                 The
                 greatest
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 Women
                 are
                 handsome
                 enough
                 ,
                 but
                 have
                 generally
                 a
                 kind
                 of
                 swelling
                 in
                 the
                 Throat
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 call
                 Coto
                 in
                 the
                 Language
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 seems
                 to
                 be
                 much
                 the
                 same
                 with
                 what
                 we
                 call
                 a
                 Wen.
                 The
                 Country
                 is
                 sufficiently
                 stor'd
                 with
                 Wild-Fowl
                 ,
                 Venizon
                 ,
                 Wheat
                 ,
                 Rye
                 ,
                 Barley
                 ;
                 and
                 Fruits
                 ,
                 as
                 Figgs
                 ,
                 Peaches
                 ,
                 Apples
                 ,
                 Pears
                 ,
                 Plumbs
                 ,
                 Heart-Cherries
                 ,
                 Grapes
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 There
                 are
                 abundance
                 of
                 Tigers
                 ,
                 that
                 are
                 very
                 fierce
                 and
                 ravenous
                 ;
                 Lions
                 that
                 are
                 very
                 gentle
                 ;
                 and
                 Guanacos
                 that
                 are
                 as
                 big
                 as
                 Horses
                 ,
                 with
                 very
                 long
                 Necks
                 ,
                 little
                 Heads
                 ,
                 and
                 very
                 short
                 Tails
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 Stomachs
                 of
                 these
                 Creatures
                 the
                 
                 Bezoar-stone
                 is
                 found
                 .
                 There
                 are
                 Four
                 Churches
                 in
                 this
                 Town
                 ,
                 namely
                 the
                 Parish-Church
                 ,
                 that
                 of
                 the
                 Jesuits
                 ,
                 that
                 of
                 the
                 
                   Recollect
                   Friers
                
                 ,
                 and
                 one
                 more
                 .
                 Here
                 the
                 Inquisitor
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Tucuman
                 has
                 his
                 residence
                 ;
                 he
                 is
                 a
                 Secular
                 Priest
                 ,
                 and
                 has
                 Commissaries
                 or
                 Deputies
                 under
                 him
                 ,
                 whom
                 he
                 places
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 other
                 Towns
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 .
              
               
                 After
                 I
                 had
                 continued
                 Three
                 Days
                 at
                 
                   St.
                   Jago
                
                 ,
                 I
                 went
                 from
                 thence
                 to
                 Salta
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 100
                 Leagues
                 from
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 leaving
                 
                   St.
                   Miguel
                
                 of
                 Tucuman
                 on
                 the
                 left
                 hand
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 a
                 Town
                 under
                 the
                 Jurisdiction
                 
                 of
                 
                   St.
                   Jago
                
                 ,
                 I
                 took
                 the
                 Road
                 of
                 Esseco
                 ,
                 finding
                 in
                 my
                 way
                 some
                 little
                 Villages
                 of
                 Spaniards
                 here
                 and
                 there
                 ,
                 and
                 very
                 few
                 Savages
                 .
                 The
                 Country
                 is
                 flat
                 ,
                 and
                 consists
                 partly
                 of
                 Fruitful
                 Plains
                 ,
                 and
                 partly
                 of
                 Forrests
                 full
                 of
                 Algarobe
                 and
                 Palm-trees
                 ;
                 which
                 bear
                 Dates
                 somewhat
                 less
                 than
                 those
                 in
                 the
                 East-Countries
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 many
                 other
                 sorts
                 of
                 Trees
                 and
                 Plants
                 ,
                 amongst
                 others
                 ,
                 those
                 that
                 yield
                 Pitch
                 ,
                 and
                 those
                 that
                 produce
                 Cocheneil
                 and
                 Cotton
                 .
                 There
                 are
                 divers
                 small
                 Lakes
                 ,
                 about
                 which
                 there
                 are
                 great
                 quantities
                 of
                 Salt
                 produc'd
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 us'd
                 by
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 that
                 Country
                 .
                 I
                 stay'd
                 one
                 day
                 at
                 Esseco
                 ,
                 to
                 prepare
                 my self
                 some
                 Provisions
                 to
                 live
                 upon
                 .
                 It
                 's
                 Situation
                 is
                 upon
                 a
                 very
                 handsome
                 broad
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 yet
                 may
                 be
                 foarded
                 on
                 Horseback
                 .
                 This
                 Town
                 was
                 formerly
                 as
                 big
                 and
                 as
                 considerable
                 as
                 Cordona
                 ,
                 but
                 is
                 now
                 ruin'd
                 ,
                 there
                 being
                 not
                 above
                 30
                 Families
                 left
                 in
                 it
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 rest
                 deserted
                 it
                 ,
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 number
                 of
                 Tigers
                 that
                 infested
                 'em
                 ,
                 devouring
                 their
                 Children
                 ,
                 and
                 sometimes
                 Men
                 when
                 they
                 could
                 surprize
                 'em
                 ,
                 besides
                 an
                 incredible
                 number
                 of
                 Venemous
                 Flies
                 ,
                 that
                 sting
                 very
                 smartly
                 ,
                 with
                 which
                 the
                 Country
                 is
                 fill'd
                 for
                 four
                 or
                 five
                 Leagues
                 about
                 
                 the
                 Town
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 there
                 's
                 no
                 going
                 abroad
                 without
                 being
                 mask'd
                 .
                 This
                 Country
                 is
                 also
                 sufficiently
                 Fruitful
                 in
                 Wheat
                 ,
                 Barley
                 ,
                 Vines
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Fruit-trees
                 ;
                 and
                 would
                 abound
                 in
                 Cattle
                 if
                 the
                 Tigers
                 did
                 not
                 devour
                 '
                 em
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 Esseco
                 to
                 Salta
                 is
                 15
                 Leagues
                 :
                 And
                 this
                 space
                 of
                 Land
                 ,
                 would
                 be
                 like
                 that
                 I
                 have
                 just
                 now
                 spoken
                 of
                 ,
                 but
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 Gravelly
                 in
                 some
                 places
                 .
                 One
                 may
                 easily
                 discern
                 Salta
                 about
                 2
                 Leagues
                 before
                 one
                 comes
                 at
                 it
                 ;
                 because
                 it
                 stands
                 in
                 the
                 middle
                 of
                 a
                 fine
                 Plain
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 fertile
                 in
                 Corn
                 ,
                 Grapes
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 sorts
                 of
                 Fruit
                 ,
                 Cattle
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 necessaries
                 of
                 Life
                 :
                 Encompass'd
                 in
                 some
                 places
                 with
                 Hills
                 ,
                 and
                 some
                 pretty
                 high
                 Mountains
                 .
                 The
                 Town
                 is
                 upon
                 the
                 bank
                 of
                 a
                 Little
                 River
                 ,
                 over
                 which
                 there
                 is
                 a
                 Bridge
                 :
                 It
                 may
                 contain
                 about
                 400
                 Houses
                 ,
                 and
                 5
                 or
                 6
                 Churches
                 and
                 Convents
                 ,
                 the
                 Structure
                 of
                 which
                 ,
                 is
                 like
                 that
                 of
                 those
                 I
                 have
                 before
                 describ'd
                 .
                 'T
                 is
                 not
                 encompass'd
                 with
                 any
                 Walls
                 ,
                 Fortifications
                 or
                 Ditches
                 ;
                 but
                 the
                 Wars
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 have
                 had
                 with
                 their
                 Neighbours
                 ,
                 have
                 train'd
                 them
                 in
                 Martial
                 Discipline
                 ,
                 and
                 render'd
                 'em
                 more
                 careful
                 to
                 have
                 Arms
                 in
                 a
                 readiness
                 than
                 formerly
                 :
                 They
                 are
                 about
                 500
                 Men
                 ,
                 who
                 
                 all
                 bear
                 Arms
                 ,
                 besides
                 Slaves
                 ,
                 Moulatos
                 ,
                 and
                 Blacks
                 ,
                 who
                 are
                 three
                 times
                 as
                 many
                 .
                 'T
                 is
                 a
                 place
                 of
                 great
                 resort
                 ,
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 considerable
                 Trade
                 they
                 have
                 ,
                 in
                 Corn
                 ,
                 Meal
                 ,
                 Cattle
                 ,
                 Wine
                 ,
                 Salted
                 Meat
                 ,
                 Tallow
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Commodities
                 wherewith
                 they
                 Trade
                 with
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 Peru.
                 
              
               
                 Twelve
                 Leagues
                 beyond
                 it
                 lies
                 Xuxui
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 last
                 Town
                 of
                 Tucuman
                 on
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 Peru.
                 There
                 are
                 up
                 and
                 down
                 on
                 the
                 Road
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 Cottages
                 or
                 Farms
                 ,
                 and
                 more
                 than
                 in
                 any
                 other
                 place
                 ,
                 tho'
                 the
                 Country
                 is
                 not
                 so
                 pleasant
                 nor
                 so
                 fruitful
                 ,
                 being
                 almost
                 nothing
                 else
                 but
                 Hills
                 and
                 Mountains
                 .
                 This
                 Town
                 of
                 Xuxui
                 contains
                 about
                 300
                 Houses
                 :
                 'T
                 is
                 not
                 very
                 full
                 of
                 People
                 ,
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 continual
                 Wars
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 those
                 of
                 Salta
                 ,
                 have
                 with
                 the
                 Savages
                 of
                 the
                 Valley
                 of
                 Calchaqui
                 ,
                 who
                 are
                 continually
                 harasing
                 of
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 The
                 Cause
                 that
                 set
                 these
                 Wars
                 on
                 Foot
                 is
                 as
                 follows
                 ;
                 The
                 Governor
                 of
                 
                   Tucuman
                   ,
                   Don
                   Alonso
                   de
                   Mercado
                   ,
                
                 and
                 
                   de
                   Villa
                   Corta
                
                 ,
                 having
                 receiv'd
                 Information
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 House
                 of
                 the
                 last
                 Incas
                 or
                 Kings
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 call'd
                 the
                 White-house
                 ,
                 was
                 in
                 this
                 Valley
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 there
                 was
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 Treasure
                 
                 there
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Natives
                 kept
                 as
                 a
                 mark
                 of
                 their
                 Ancient
                 Grandeur
                 ,
                 gave
                 advice
                 of
                 it
                 to
                 his
                 Catholick
                 Majesty
                 ,
                 and
                 begg'd
                 leave
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 Conquest
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 subject
                 it
                 to
                 his
                 Government
                 ,
                 as
                 it
                 had
                 far'd
                 with
                 so
                 many
                 other
                 places
                 which
                 he
                 obtain'd
                 .
                 To
                 accomplish
                 his
                 design
                 ,
                 he
                 thought
                 meet
                 to
                 employ
                 
                   Don
                   Pedro
                   Bohoriers
                
                 a
                 Moor
                 ,
                 and
                 Native
                 of
                 Estramadura
                 ,
                 as
                 being
                 a
                 Person
                 who
                 had
                 been
                 accustom'd
                 to
                 converse
                 with
                 Savage
                 People
                 ,
                 and
                 was
                 capable
                 of
                 carrying
                 on
                 Intreagues
                 amongst
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 more
                 fit
                 than
                 another
                 ,
                 to
                 make
                 this
                 design
                 succeed
                 ;
                 but
                 the
                 business
                 had
                 a
                 quite
                 contrary
                 Event
                 .
                 For
                 this
                 Bohoriers
                 ,
                 when
                 he
                 was
                 got
                 among
                 the
                 Savages
                 of
                 this
                 Valley
                 ,
                 and
                 had
                 gain'd
                 their
                 Affections
                 ,
                 instead
                 of
                 acquitting
                 himself
                 of
                 his
                 Commission
                 ,
                 endeavor'd
                 to
                 establish
                 himself
                 in
                 Power
                 amongst
                 'em
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 he
                 succeeded
                 so
                 well
                 ,
                 that
                 by
                 his
                 Craft
                 and
                 good
                 address
                 ,
                 he
                 brought
                 'em
                 to
                 choose
                 and
                 acknowledge
                 him
                 for
                 their
                 King
                 ;
                 after
                 which
                 he
                 declar'd
                 himself
                 against
                 this
                 Spanish
                 Governor
                 ,
                 and
                 began
                 a
                 War
                 with
                 him
                 towards
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 1638
                 ,
                 and
                 several
                 times
                 routed
                 him
                 and
                 his
                 Forces
                 ,
                 which
                 gave
                 occasion
                 to
                 several
                 of
                 the
                 Indian
                 Natives
                 ,
                 that
                 were
                 under
                 the
                 Dominion
                 
                 of
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 ,
                 to
                 throw
                 of
                 their
                 Yoke
                 ,
                 and
                 joyn
                 with
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 this
                 Valley
                 ,
                 who
                 by
                 these
                 additions
                 have
                 render'd
                 themselves
                 somewhat
                 formidable
                 .
                 Hither
                 also
                 the
                 Slaves
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 particularly
                 those
                 that
                 serve
                 in
                 the
                 Mines
                 ,
                 fly
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 can
                 find
                 an
                 opportunity
                 to
                 make
                 their
                 escape
                 :
                 And
                 the
                 safe
                 retreat
                 they
                 find
                 here
                 ,
                 draws
                 a
                 great
                 number
                 of
                 'em
                 to
                 this
                 place
                 ;
                 insomuch
                 that
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 would
                 not
                 have
                 half
                 Men
                 enough
                 to
                 work
                 in
                 the
                 Mines
                 ,
                 if
                 they
                 did
                 not
                 get
                 Negros
                 from
                 
                   Congo
                   ,
                   Angola
                
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 places
                 on
                 the
                 Coast
                 of
                 Guinea
                 ,
                 by
                 means
                 of
                 divers
                 Genoese
                 that
                 go
                 thither
                 to
                 fetch
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 sell
                 'em
                 to
                 them
                 at
                 a
                 price
                 concerted
                 between
                 '
                 em
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 Xuxui
                 to
                 Potosi
                 they
                 count
                 a
                 100
                 Leagues
                 ,
                 the
                 way
                 is
                 very
                 troublesome
                 ,
                 and
                 there
                 is
                 but
                 this
                 one
                 Road
                 to
                 go
                 from
                 Tucuman
                 to
                 Peru.
                 Two
                 Leagues
                 from
                 Xuxui
                 I
                 began
                 to
                 advance
                 to
                 the
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 between
                 which
                 there
                 's
                 a
                 little
                 and
                 very
                 narrow
                 Valley
                 ,
                 that
                 reaches
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 Omagoaca
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 20
                 Leagues
                 beyond
                 ,
                 and
                 along
                 it
                 there
                 runs
                 a
                 small
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 one
                 is
                 oblig'd
                 to
                 pass
                 and
                 repass
                 very
                 often
                 .
                 Before
                 you
                 are
                 got
                 4
                 Leagues
                 in
                 this
                 Road
                 ,
                 you
                 meet
                 with
                 Vulcanos
                 ,
                 or
                 Burning
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 
                 full
                 of
                 Sulphurous
                 matter
                 ,
                 which
                 break
                 out
                 in
                 Flames
                 from
                 time
                 to
                 time
                 ,
                 and
                 sometimes
                 burst
                 open
                 and
                 throw
                 quantities
                 of
                 Earth
                 into
                 the
                 Valley
                 ,
                 which
                 makes
                 the
                 way
                 so
                 dirty
                 when
                 a
                 Rain
                 comes
                 soon
                 after
                 it
                 ,
                 as
                 it
                 almost
                 always
                 happens
                 ,
                 that
                 sometimes
                 you
                 must
                 be
                 forc'd
                 to
                 stay
                 Five
                 or
                 Six
                 Months
                 ,
                 or
                 till
                 the
                 Summer
                 comes
                 to
                 dry
                 it
                 to
                 make
                 it
                 passable
                 .
                 These
                 Vulcanos
                 continue
                 for
                 2
                 Leagues
                 upon
                 this
                 Road
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 all
                 this
                 space
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 no
                 Houses
                 either
                 of
                 Spaniards
                 or
                 Savages
                 ,
                 but
                 beyond
                 it
                 all
                 along
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 Omagoaca
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 little
                 Cottages
                 ,
                 inhabited
                 only
                 by
                 Indians
                 ,
                 and
                 depending
                 on
                 some
                 Towns
                 of
                 theirs
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 govern'd
                 by
                 their
                 Chiefs
                 ,
                 whom
                 they
                 call
                 Couracas
                 ,
                 who
                 have
                 a
                 Cacique
                 over
                 them
                 ,
                 whose
                 Orders
                 they
                 obey
                 ,
                 and
                 whose
                 residence
                 is
                 at
                 Omagoaca
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 a
                 Town
                 of
                 200
                 Houses
                 ,
                 built
                 of
                 Earth
                 ,
                 and
                 standing
                 in
                 no
                 good
                 Order
                 .
                 The
                 Land
                 about
                 it
                 is
                 none
                 of
                 the
                 best
                 ,
                 however
                 they
                 sow
                 Wheat
                 there
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 great
                 quantity
                 of
                 Millet
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Indians
                 ordinarily
                 use
                 .
                 As
                 for
                 Cattle
                 ,
                 they
                 have
                 very
                 few
                 ,
                 and
                 commonly
                 eat
                 Beef
                 dry'd
                 in
                 the
                 Sun
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 brought
                 them
                 by
                 those
                 that
                 Trade
                 with
                 'em
                 ;
                 they
                 have
                 also
                 Goats
                 
                 and
                 Sheep
                 of
                 their
                 own
                 Product
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 most
                 of
                 these
                 Savages
                 are
                 Catholicks
                 ,
                 and
                 live
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 Rules
                 of
                 the
                 Roman
                 Catholick
                 Religion
                 ;
                 they
                 have
                 a
                 Church
                 at
                 Omagoaca
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 supplied
                 with
                 Priests
                 ,
                 who
                 go
                 from
                 time
                 to
                 time
                 to
                 celebrate
                 Mass
                 there
                 :
                 These
                 Priests
                 dwell
                 at
                 Socchoa
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 Plantation
                 of
                 
                   Don
                   Paulo
                   d'
                   Obaudo
                
                 ,
                 who
                 is
                 a
                 Spaniard
                 ,
                 but
                 born
                 in
                 this
                 Country
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 Lord
                 Proprietor
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 which
                 contains
                 not
                 only
                 all
                 the
                 Valley
                 of
                 Omagoaca
                 ,
                 but
                 likewise
                 a
                 great
                 space
                 of
                 Land
                 beyond
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 a
                 Country
                 of
                 about
                 60
                 or
                 80
                 Leagues
                 in
                 extent
                 ,
                 where
                 there
                 are
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 Vigognes
                 of
                 whose
                 Wool
                 this
                 Lord
                 makes
                 a
                 very
                 considerable
                 Advantage
                 .
                 He
                 takes
                 these
                 Creatures
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 ease
                 by
                 means
                 of
                 his
                 Subjects
                 the
                 Indians
                 ,
                 who
                 have
                 no
                 other
                 trouble
                 than
                 that
                 of
                 making
                 a
                 great
                 Inclosure
                 with
                 Nets
                 about
                 a
                 Foot
                 and
                 a
                 half
                 high
                 ,
                 to
                 which
                 they
                 tie
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 Feathers
                 that
                 are
                 blown
                 to
                 and
                 fro
                 by
                 the
                 Wind
                 ,
                 after
                 which
                 the
                 Savages
                 hunt
                 these
                 Creatures
                 ,
                 and
                 drive
                 'em
                 within
                 the
                 Nets
                 ,
                 as
                 they
                 do
                 Wild-Boars
                 in
                 France
                 into
                 the
                 Toils
                 ;
                 when
                 this
                 is
                 done
                 ,
                 some
                 come
                 on
                 Horse-back
                 within
                 the
                 compass
                 of
                 Ground
                 in
                 which
                 they
                 are
                 inclos'd
                 ,
                 and
                 
                 while
                 the
                 poor
                 Beasts
                 dare
                 not
                 go
                 near
                 the
                 Nets
                 for
                 fear
                 of
                 the
                 Feathers
                 that
                 play
                 about
                 'em
                 ,
                 they
                 with
                 certain
                 Bowls
                 fastened
                 to
                 Cords
                 ,
                 knock
                 down
                 and
                 kill
                 as
                 many
                 of
                 'em
                 as
                 they
                 please
                 .
              
               
                 From
                 Omagoaca
                 to
                 Mayo
                 ,
                 they
                 count
                 it
                 30
                 Leagues
                 ,
                 &
                 there
                 's
                 nothing
                 to
                 be
                 met
                 with
                 along
                 this
                 way
                 ,
                 but
                 a
                 very
                 few
                 Plantations
                 of
                 Savages
                 ,
                 because
                 't
                 is
                 so
                 very
                 Cold
                 here
                 in
                 the
                 Winter
                 ,
                 that
                 't
                 is
                 hard
                 to
                 be
                 endur'd
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 way
                 from
                 Mayo
                 to
                 Toropalca
                 is
                 through
                 very
                 pleasant
                 Plains
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 Two
                 hundred
                 Houses
                 in
                 the
                 Town
                 ,
                 inhabited
                 by
                 Catholick
                 Savages
                 ,
                 only
                 one
                 Portuguese
                 lives
                 there
                 with
                 his
                 Family
                 .
              
               
                 Beyond
                 Toropalca
                 ,
                 is
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 Chichas
                 which
                 is
                 very
                 Mountainous
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 stor'd
                 with
                 divers
                 Mines
                 of
                 Gold
                 and
                 Silver
                 ,
                 and
                 Work-houses
                 where
                 they
                 prepare
                 the
                 Metal
                 .
                 'T
                 is
                 25
                 Leagues
                 in
                 extent
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 Potosi
                 ,
                 where
                 I
                 arriv'd
                 after
                 a
                 Journey
                 of
                 Sixty
                 three
                 Days
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 A
                 Description
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Potosi
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Mines
                 there
                 .
              
               
                 I
                 Was
                 no
                 sooner
                 alighted
                 from
                 my
                 Horse
                 ,
                 at
                 a
                 Merchants
                 House
                 to
                 whom
                 I
                 had
                 been
                 recommended
                 ,
                 but
                 I
                 was
                 conducted
                 by
                 him
                 to
                 the
                 President
                 of
                 the
                 Provinces
                 of
                 
                   Los
                   Charcas
                
                 ,
                 to
                 whom
                 the
                 Order
                 I
                 carried
                 from
                 the
                 King
                 of
                 Spain
                 was
                 directed
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Principal
                 Director
                 of
                 his
                 Catholick
                 Majesty's
                 Affairs
                 in
                 this
                 Province
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 Potosi
                 is
                 Situate
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 place
                 of
                 his
                 Ordinary
                 Residence
                 ,
                 altho'
                 the
                 City
                 
                   de
                   la
                   Plata
                
                 is
                 the
                 Capital
                 .
                 After
                 I
                 had
                 deliver'd
                 the
                 Order
                 to
                 him
                 ,
                 I
                 was
                 brought
                 to
                 the
                 Corregidor
                 ,
                 to
                 deliver
                 that
                 which
                 belong'd
                 to
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 afterwards
                 to
                 those
                 other
                 Officers
                 for
                 whom
                 I
                 brought
                 Orders
                 ;
                 they
                 all
                 receiv'd
                 me
                 very
                 well
                 ,
                 particularly
                 the
                 President
                 ,
                 who
                 presented
                 me
                 with
                 a
                 Chain
                 of
                 Gold
                 for
                 the
                 good
                 News
                 I
                 had
                 brought
                 him
                 .
              
               
                 But
                 before
                 we
                 go
                 any
                 farther
                 't
                 is
                 convenient
                 I
                 should
                 give
                 some
                 description
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Potosi
                 ,
                 as
                 I
                 have
                 done
                 of
                 
                 others
                 .
                 The
                 Spaniards
                 call
                 it
                 the
                 Imperial
                 City
                 ,
                 but
                 no
                 body
                 could
                 ever
                 tell
                 me
                 for
                 what
                 reason
                 ;
                 't
                 is
                 Situate
                 at
                 the
                 Foot
                 of
                 a
                 Mountain
                 ,
                 call'd
                 Arazassou
                 ,
                 and
                 divided
                 in
                 the
                 midst
                 by
                 a
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 comes
                 from
                 a
                 Lake
                 inclos'd
                 with
                 Walls
                 ,
                 which
                 lies
                 about
                 a
                 quarter
                 of
                 a
                 League
                 above
                 the
                 City
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 a
                 kind
                 of
                 reserver
                 to
                 hold
                 the
                 Water
                 that
                 is
                 necessary
                 for
                 the
                 Work-houses
                 of
                 that
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 on
                 this
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 over
                 against
                 the
                 Mountain
                 ,
                 is
                 rais'd
                 upon
                 a
                 little
                 Hill
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 the
                 largest
                 and
                 most
                 inhabited
                 part
                 ;
                 for
                 on
                 that
                 which
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 Mountain
                 ,
                 there
                 's
                 scarce
                 any
                 thing
                 but
                 Engines
                 and
                 the
                 Houses
                 of
                 those
                 that
                 Work
                 in
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 The
                 City
                 has
                 neither
                 Walls
                 ,
                 Ditches
                 ,
                 nor
                 Forts
                 for
                 its
                 defence
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 reckon'd
                 to
                 be
                 4000
                 Houses
                 well
                 built
                 of
                 good
                 Stone
                 ,
                 with
                 several
                 Floors
                 ,
                 after
                 the
                 manner
                 of
                 the
                 Buildings
                 in
                 Spain
                 .
                 The
                 Churches
                 are
                 well
                 made
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 richly
                 adorn'd
                 with
                 Plate
                 ,
                 Tapestry
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Ornaments
                 ,
                 and
                 above
                 all
                 those
                 of
                 the
                 Monks
                 and
                 Nunns
                 ,
                 of
                 whom
                 there
                 are
                 several
                 Convents
                 of
                 different
                 Orders
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 very
                 well
                 furnish'd
                 .
                 This
                 is
                 not
                 the
                 least
                 populous
                 City
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 with
                 
                   Spaniards
                   ,
                   Mestices
                   ,
                   
                   Strangers
                   ,
                
                 and
                 Natives
                 (
                 which
                 last
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 call
                 Indios
                 )
                 with
                 Moulatos
                 and
                 Negroes
                 .
                 They
                 count
                 there
                 are
                 between
                 3
                 and
                 4000
                 Natural
                 Spaniards
                 bearing
                 Arms
                 ,
                 who
                 have
                 the
                 Reputation
                 of
                 being
                 very
                 stout
                 Men
                 and
                 good
                 Souldiers
                 .
                 The
                 number
                 of
                 the
                 Mestices
                 is
                 not
                 much
                 less
                 ,
                 nor
                 are
                 they
                 less
                 expert
                 at
                 a
                 Weapon
                 ,
                 but
                 the
                 greatest
                 part
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 are
                 Idle
                 ,
                 apt
                 to
                 quarrel
                 and
                 Treacherous
                 ,
                 therefore
                 they
                 commonly
                 wear
                 Three
                 or
                 Four
                 Buff-wast-coats
                 one
                 upon
                 another
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 proof
                 against
                 the
                 point
                 of
                 a
                 Sword
                 ,
                 to
                 secure
                 themselves
                 from
                 private
                 stabs
                 .
                 The
                 Strangers
                 there
                 are
                 but
                 few
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 some
                 
                   Dutch
                   ,
                   Irish
                
                 ,
                 and
                 Genoese
                 ;
                 and
                 some
                 French
                 ,
                 most
                 of
                 whom
                 are
                 of
                 
                   St.
                   Malo
                   ,
                   Provence
                
                 or
                 Bayonne
                 ,
                 and
                 pass
                 for
                 People
                 of
                 Navarre
                 and
                 Biscaye
                 .
                 As
                 for
                 the
                 Indians
                 they
                 are
                 reckon'd
                 to
                 amount
                 to
                 near
                 10000
                 besides
                 the
                 Moulatos
                 and
                 the
                 Blacks
                 :
                 but
                 they
                 are
                 not
                 permitted
                 to
                 wear
                 either
                 Swords
                 or
                 Fire-Arms
                 ,
                 no
                 not
                 their
                 Couracas
                 and
                 Caciques
                 ,
                 tho'
                 they
                 may
                 all
                 aspire
                 to
                 any
                 degree
                 of
                 Knight-hood
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 Benefices
                 ,
                 to
                 which
                 they
                 are
                 often
                 rais'd
                 ,
                 for
                 their
                 laudable
                 Actions
                 ,
                 and
                 good
                 Services
                 .
                 They
                 are
                 also
                 forbidden
                 to
                 wear
                 the
                 Spanish
                 habit
                 ,
                 but
                 
                 are
                 oblig'd
                 to
                 cloath
                 themselves
                 in
                 a
                 different
                 manner
                 ,
                 in
                 a
                 close-coat
                 without
                 sleeves
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 wear
                 next
                 their
                 Shirts
                 ,
                 to
                 which
                 their
                 Band
                 and
                 lac'd
                 Cuffs
                 are
                 fasten'd
                 ,
                 their
                 Breeches
                 are
                 wide
                 at
                 bottom
                 after
                 the
                 French
                 fashion
                 ;
                 their
                 Legs
                 and
                 Feet
                 naked
                 .
                 The
                 Blacks
                 and
                 Moulatos
                 being
                 in
                 the
                 Service
                 of
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 ,
                 are
                 habited
                 after
                 the
                 Spanish
                 Mode
                 ,
                 and
                 may
                 bear
                 Arms
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 the
                 Indian
                 Slaves
                 after
                 Ten
                 Years
                 service
                 are
                 set
                 at
                 liberty
                 ,
                 and
                 have
                 the
                 same
                 privileges
                 with
                 the
                 others
                 .
                 The
                 Government
                 of
                 this
                 City
                 is
                 very
                 exact
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 Care
                 which
                 is
                 taken
                 by
                 Twenty
                 four
                 Magistrates
                 ,
                 who
                 are
                 constantly
                 observing
                 ,
                 that
                 good
                 orders
                 be
                 kept
                 in
                 it
                 ;
                 besides
                 the
                 Corregidor
                 and
                 President
                 of
                 
                   Los
                   Charcas
                
                 ,
                 who
                 directs
                 Officers
                 after
                 the
                 manner
                 of
                 Spain
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 observ'd
                 ,
                 that
                 excepting
                 these
                 two
                 Principal
                 Officers
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 at
                 Potosi
                 as
                 every
                 where
                 else
                 in
                 the
                 Indies
                 ,
                 all
                 the
                 People
                 ,
                 whether
                 Knights
                 ,
                 Gentlemen
                 ,
                 Officers
                 or
                 others
                 ,
                 are
                 concern'd
                 in
                 Commerce
                 :
                 of
                 which
                 some
                 of
                 them
                 make
                 so
                 great
                 an
                 advantage
                 ,
                 that
                 in
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Potosi
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 some
                 reckon'd
                 to
                 be
                 worth
                 ,
                 Two
                 ,
                 some
                 Three
                 ,
                 and
                 some
                 Four
                 Millions
                 of
                 Crowns
                 ;
                 and
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 worth
                 Two
                 ,
                 
                 Three
                 ,
                 or
                 Four
                 hundred
                 thousand
                 Crowns
                 .
                 The
                 common
                 People
                 to
                 live
                 much
                 at
                 their
                 ease
                 ,
                 but
                 are
                 all
                 proud
                 and
                 haughty
                 ,
                 and
                 always
                 go
                 very
                 fine
                 ,
                 either
                 in
                 Cloth
                 of
                 Gold
                 and
                 Silver
                 ,
                 or
                 in
                 Scarlet
                 ,
                 or
                 Silk
                 trimmed
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 Gold
                 and
                 Silver-Lace
                 .
                 The
                 Furniture
                 of
                 their
                 Houses
                 is
                 very
                 Rich
                 ,
                 for
                 they
                 are
                 generally
                 serv'd
                 in
                 Plate
                 .
                 The
                 Wives
                 both
                 of
                 Gentlemen
                 and
                 Citizens
                 ,
                 are
                 kept
                 very
                 close
                 ,
                 to
                 a
                 degree
                 beyond
                 what
                 they
                 are
                 in
                 Spain
                 ;
                 they
                 never
                 go
                 abroad
                 ,
                 unless
                 it
                 be
                 to
                 go
                 to
                 Mass
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 make
                 some
                 Visit
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 some
                 publick
                 Feast
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 but
                 rarely
                 .
                 The
                 Women
                 here
                 are
                 generally
                 addicted
                 to
                 excess
                 in
                 taking
                 Coca
                 :
                 This
                 is
                 a
                 Plant
                 that
                 comes
                 from
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 Cusco
                 ,
                 which
                 when
                 it
                 is
                 made
                 up
                 in
                 Rowls
                 and
                 dry'd
                 they
                 chew
                 ,
                 as
                 some
                 do
                 Tobacco
                 ;
                 they
                 are
                 so
                 heated
                 ,
                 and
                 sometimes
                 absolutely
                 fuddled
                 by
                 it
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 have
                 no
                 command
                 of
                 themselves
                 at
                 all
                 :
                 'T
                 is
                 likewise
                 often
                 us'd
                 by
                 the
                 Men
                 ,
                 and
                 has
                 the
                 same
                 effects
                 upon
                 them
                 .
                 They
                 are
                 otherwise
                 very
                 Temperate
                 in
                 eating
                 and
                 drinking
                 ,
                 tho'
                 they
                 have
                 before
                 dwelt
                 in
                 places
                 well
                 stor'd
                 with
                 all
                 sort
                 of
                 Provisions
                 ,
                 as
                 Beef
                 ,
                 Mutton
                 ,
                 Fowls
                 ,
                 Venizon
                 ,
                 raw
                 and
                 preserv'd
                 Fruits
                 ,
                 Corn
                 and
                 Wine
                 ,
                 
                 which
                 are
                 brought
                 hither
                 from
                 other
                 parts
                 ,
                 and
                 some
                 from
                 a
                 great
                 distance
                 ,
                 which
                 makes
                 these
                 Commodities
                 dear
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 the
                 meaner
                 sort
                 of
                 People
                 ;
                 especially
                 those
                 that
                 have
                 very
                 little
                 before-hand
                 ,
                 would
                 find
                 it
                 hard
                 enough
                 to
                 live
                 there
                 ,
                 if
                 Money
                 were
                 not
                 very
                 plenty
                 ,
                 and
                 easie
                 to
                 be
                 got
                 by
                 them
                 that
                 are
                 willing
                 to
                 work
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 best
                 and
                 finest
                 Silver
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 Indies
                 ,
                 is
                 that
                 of
                 the
                 Mines
                 of
                 Potosi
                 ,
                 the
                 principal
                 of
                 which
                 are
                 found
                 in
                 the
                 Mountain
                 of
                 Aranzasse
                 ,
                 where
                 besides
                 the
                 prodigious
                 quantities
                 of
                 Silver
                 that
                 have
                 been
                 taken
                 out
                 of
                 Veins
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 the
                 Mettal
                 evidently
                 appear'd
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 are
                 now
                 exhausted
                 ,
                 there
                 is
                 almost
                 as
                 great
                 quantities
                 of
                 it
                 found
                 in
                 places
                 where
                 they
                 had
                 not
                 digg'd
                 before
                 ;
                 nay
                 from
                 some
                 of
                 the
                 Earth
                 which
                 they
                 threw
                 aside
                 formerly
                 when
                 they
                 open'd
                 the
                 Mines
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 Pits
                 ,
                 and
                 Cross-ways
                 in
                 the
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 they
                 have
                 taken
                 Silver
                 ,
                 and
                 have
                 found
                 by
                 this
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Silver
                 has
                 been
                 form'd
                 since
                 that
                 time
                 ,
                 which
                 shews
                 how
                 proper
                 the
                 Quality
                 of
                 this
                 Ground
                 is
                 for
                 the
                 production
                 of
                 that
                 Metal
                 :
                 But
                 indeed
                 this
                 Earth
                 does
                 not
                 yield
                 so
                 much
                 as
                 the
                 Mines
                 that
                 are
                 found
                 by
                 Veins
                 among
                 the
                 Rocks
                 .
                 There
                 are
                 besides
                 
                 these
                 another
                 sort
                 of
                 Veins
                 of
                 Earth
                 which
                 they
                 call
                 Paillaco
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 as
                 hard
                 as
                 a
                 Stone
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 Colour
                 of
                 Clay
                 ,
                 which
                 were
                 slighted
                 heretofore
                 ,
                 and
                 yet
                 as
                 Experience
                 has
                 since
                 taught
                 ,
                 were
                 not
                 so
                 contemptable
                 as
                 was
                 suppos'd
                 ;
                 since
                 Silver
                 is
                 got
                 out
                 of
                 'em
                 with
                 so
                 little
                 Charge
                 ,
                 that
                 there
                 is
                 no
                 inconsiderable
                 profit
                 found
                 in
                 the
                 Work.
                 Besides
                 the
                 Mines
                 of
                 this
                 Mountain
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 others
                 about
                 the
                 Country
                 at
                 a
                 greater
                 distance
                 ,
                 that
                 are
                 pretty
                 good
                 ,
                 amongst
                 others
                 those
                 of
                 Lippes
                 ,
                 of
                 Carangas
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 Porco
                 ;
                 but
                 those
                 of
                 Ouroures
                 that
                 have
                 been
                 lately
                 discover'd
                 are
                 better
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 King
                 of
                 Spain
                 does
                 not
                 cause
                 any
                 of
                 these
                 Mines
                 to
                 be
                 wrought
                 on
                 his
                 own
                 account
                 ,
                 but
                 leaves
                 'em
                 to
                 those
                 Persons
                 that
                 make
                 the
                 Discovery
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 who
                 remain
                 Masters
                 of
                 'em
                 after
                 the
                 Corregidor
                 has
                 visited
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 declar'd
                 'em
                 Proprietors
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 accustom'd
                 Conditions
                 and
                 Privileges
                 .
                 The
                 same
                 Corregidor
                 describes
                 and
                 marks
                 out
                 the
                 superfices
                 of
                 the
                 Ground
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 they
                 are
                 allow'd
                 to
                 open
                 the
                 Mine
                 on
                 the
                 outside
                 ,
                 which
                 does
                 not
                 for
                 all
                 that
                 ,
                 limit
                 or
                 restrain
                 their
                 work
                 under-ground
                 ;
                 every
                 Man
                 having
                 liberty
                 to
                 follow
                 the
                 
                 Vein
                 he
                 has
                 found
                 ,
                 let
                 the
                 extent
                 and
                 depth
                 of
                 it
                 reach
                 never
                 so
                 far
                 ,
                 tho'
                 it
                 should
                 cross
                 that
                 which
                 another
                 has
                 digged
                 near
                 it
                 .
                 All
                 that
                 the
                 King
                 reserves
                 for
                 himself
                 ,
                 besides
                 the
                 Duties
                 we
                 shall
                 hereafter
                 speak
                 of
                 ,
                 is
                 to
                 give
                 a
                 general
                 direction
                 by
                 his
                 Officers
                 ,
                 for
                 all
                 the
                 work
                 of
                 the
                 Mines
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 order
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 Savages
                 to
                 be
                 employ'd
                 in
                 'em
                 ;
                 to
                 prevent
                 the
                 disorders
                 that
                 would
                 arise
                 ,
                 if
                 every
                 Proprietor
                 of
                 the
                 Mines
                 should
                 have
                 liberty
                 to
                 set
                 as
                 many
                 of
                 'em
                 to
                 work
                 as
                 he
                 pleas'd
                 ;
                 which
                 would
                 frequently
                 give
                 occasion
                 to
                 those
                 that
                 are
                 most
                 powerful
                 and
                 Rich
                 ,
                 to
                 ingross
                 and
                 have
                 so
                 great
                 a
                 Number
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 that
                 few
                 or
                 none
                 would
                 remain
                 for
                 others
                 to
                 employ
                 ,
                 to
                 keep
                 their
                 work
                 going
                 forward
                 :
                 for
                 this
                 would
                 be
                 contrary
                 to
                 the
                 Kings
                 Interest
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 to
                 make
                 Provision
                 that
                 that
                 there
                 be
                 a
                 sufficient
                 number
                 of
                 Slaves
                 for
                 all
                 the
                 Mines
                 that
                 are
                 open'd
                 .
                 For
                 this
                 end
                 he
                 obliges
                 all
                 the
                 Couracas
                 or
                 Chiefs
                 of
                 the
                 Savages
                 ,
                 to
                 furnish
                 every
                 one
                 a
                 certain
                 number
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 must
                 always
                 keep
                 compleat
                 ,
                 or
                 else
                 are
                 forc'd
                 to
                 give
                 twice
                 as
                 much
                 Money
                 as
                 would
                 have
                 been
                 paid
                 in
                 Wages
                 to
                 those
                 that
                 are
                 wanting
                 ,
                 if
                 they
                 had
                 been
                 present
                 .
                 Those
                 that
                 are
                 destin'd
                 for
                 the
                 Mines
                 of
                 
                 Potosi
                 ,
                 don't
                 amount
                 to
                 above
                 Two
                 thousand
                 and
                 two
                 or
                 three
                 hundred
                 ,
                 these
                 are
                 brought
                 and
                 put
                 into
                 a
                 great
                 Enclosure
                 which
                 is
                 at
                 the
                 Foot
                 of
                 the
                 Mountain
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Corregidor
                 makes
                 a
                 distribution
                 of
                 'em
                 to
                 the
                 Conductors
                 of
                 the
                 Mines
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 Number
                 they
                 want
                 ,
                 and
                 after
                 Six
                 days
                 constant
                 Work
                 ,
                 the
                 Conductor
                 brings
                 'em
                 back
                 the
                 Saturday
                 following
                 to
                 the
                 same
                 place
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Corregidor
                 causes
                 a
                 review
                 to
                 be
                 made
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 to
                 make
                 the
                 owners
                 of
                 the
                 Mines
                 give
                 'em
                 the
                 Wages
                 that
                 are
                 appointed
                 'em
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 see
                 how
                 many
                 of
                 'em
                 are
                 dead
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Couracas
                 may
                 be
                 oblig'd
                 to
                 supply
                 the
                 number
                 that
                 is
                 Wanting
                 :
                 for
                 there
                 's
                 no
                 Week
                 passes
                 but
                 some
                 of
                 'em
                 die
                 ,
                 either
                 by
                 divers
                 accidents
                 that
                 Occur
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 tumbling
                 down
                 of
                 great
                 quantities
                 of
                 Earth
                 ,
                 and
                 falling
                 of
                 Stones
                 ,
                 or
                 by
                 Sickness
                 and
                 other
                 Casualties
                 .
                 They
                 are
                 sometimes
                 very
                 much
                 incommoded
                 by
                 Winds
                 that
                 are
                 shut
                 up
                 in
                 the
                 Mines
                 ;
                 the
                 coldness
                 of
                 which
                 joyn'd
                 to
                 that
                 of
                 some
                 parts
                 of
                 the
                 Earth
                 ,
                 chills
                 'em
                 so
                 excessively
                 ,
                 that
                 unless
                 they
                 chew'd
                 Coca
                 ,
                 which
                 heats
                 and
                 fuddles
                 'em
                 ,
                 it
                 would
                 be
                 intolerable
                 to
                 '
                 em
                 .
                 Another
                 great
                 hardship
                 which
                 they
                 suffer
                 is
                 ,
                 that
                 in
                 other
                 places
                 ,
                 the
                 Sulphurous
                 and
                 
                 Mineral
                 Vapours
                 are
                 are
                 so
                 great
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 strangely
                 drys
                 'em
                 up
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 it
                 hinders
                 'em
                 from
                 free
                 respiration
                 ;
                 and
                 for
                 this
                 they
                 have
                 no
                 other
                 remedy
                 ,
                 than
                 the
                 Drink
                 which
                 is
                 made
                 with
                 the
                 Herb
                 of
                 Paraguay
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 prepare
                 a
                 great
                 quantity
                 to
                 refresh
                 and
                 moisten
                 'em
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 come
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Mines
                 at
                 the
                 times
                 appointed
                 for
                 eating
                 or
                 sleeping
                 ;
                 this
                 Drink
                 serves
                 'em
                 also
                 for
                 Physick
                 to
                 make
                 'em
                 Vomit
                 ,
                 and
                 cast
                 up
                 whatever
                 incommodes
                 their
                 Stomachs
                 .
                 Among
                 these
                 Savages
                 they
                 ordinarily
                 choose
                 the
                 best
                 Workmen
                 to
                 break
                 up
                 the
                 Oar
                 between
                 the
                 Rocks
                 ;
                 this
                 they
                 do
                 with
                 Iron-barrs
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 call
                 Palancas
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Instruments
                 of
                 Iron
                 ;
                 others
                 serve
                 to
                 carry
                 what
                 they
                 digg
                 in
                 little
                 Baskets
                 to
                 the
                 entrance
                 of
                 the
                 Mine
                 ;
                 others
                 to
                 put
                 it
                 in
                 Sacks
                 ,
                 and
                 load
                 it
                 upon
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 great
                 Sheep
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 call
                 
                   Carneros
                   de
                   la
                   Tierra
                
                 ,
                 they
                 are
                 taller
                 than
                 Asses
                 ,
                 and
                 commonly
                 carry
                 Two
                 hundred
                 Pound
                 weight
                 ;
                 these
                 serve
                 to
                 carry
                 it
                 to
                 the
                 Work-houses
                 which
                 are
                 in
                 the
                 Town
                 along
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 which
                 comes
                 from
                 the
                 Lake
                 I
                 have
                 spoken
                 of
                 before
                 .
                 In
                 these
                 Work-houses
                 which
                 are
                 a
                 Hundred
                 and
                 twenty
                 in
                 Number
                 ;
                 the
                 Oar
                 is
                 refined
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 take
                 the
                 following
                 
                 account
                 .
                 They
                 first
                 beat
                 it
                 well
                 upon
                 Anvils
                 with
                 certain
                 great
                 Hammers
                 ,
                 which
                 a
                 Mill
                 continually
                 keeps
                 at
                 work
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 are
                 pretty
                 well
                 reduc'd
                 to
                 Powder
                 ,
                 they
                 pass
                 it
                 thro'
                 a
                 fine
                 Sieve
                 ,
                 and
                 spread
                 it
                 upon
                 the
                 Ground
                 about
                 half
                 a
                 Foot
                 thick
                 in
                 a
                 square
                 place
                 that
                 is
                 very
                 smooth
                 ,
                 prepar'd
                 for
                 the
                 purpose
                 ;
                 then
                 they
                 cast
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 Water
                 upon
                 it
                 ,
                 after
                 which
                 they
                 with
                 a
                 Sieve
                 spread
                 upon
                 it
                 a
                 certain
                 quantity
                 of
                 Quick-silver
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 proportion'd
                 by
                 the
                 Officers
                 of
                 the
                 Mint
                 ,
                 and
                 also
                 a
                 Liquid
                 substance
                 of
                 Iron
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 prepar'd
                 by
                 Two
                 Millstones
                 ,
                 one
                 of
                 which
                 is
                 fix'd
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 other
                 is
                 continuly
                 turning
                 ,
                 between
                 these
                 they
                 put
                 an
                 Old
                 Anvil
                 ,
                 or
                 some
                 other
                 Massy
                 piece
                 of
                 Iron
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 worn
                 away
                 and
                 Consum'd
                 with
                 Water
                 by
                 the
                 turning
                 Mill-stone
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 't
                 is
                 reduc'd
                 to
                 a
                 certain
                 Liquid
                 Matter
                 .
                 The
                 Oar
                 being
                 thus
                 prepar'd
                 ,
                 they
                 stir
                 it
                 about
                 and
                 mix
                 it
                 ,
                 as
                 Men
                 do
                 when
                 they
                 make
                 Mortar
                 ,
                 for
                 a
                 Fortnight
                 together
                 ,
                 every
                 day
                 tempering
                 it
                 with
                 Water
                 ;
                 and
                 after
                 this
                 they
                 several
                 times
                 put
                 it
                 into
                 a
                 Tub
                 ,
                 wherein
                 there
                 is
                 a
                 little
                 Mill
                 ,
                 which
                 by
                 its
                 motion
                 separates
                 from
                 it
                 all
                 the
                 Earth
                 with
                 the
                 Water
                 ,
                 and
                 casts
                 'em
                 off
                 together
                 ,
                 
                 so
                 that
                 nothing
                 but
                 the
                 Metallick
                 Matter
                 remains
                 at
                 the
                 bottom
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 afterwards
                 put
                 into
                 the
                 Fire
                 in
                 Crucibles
                 ,
                 to
                 separate
                 the
                 Quick-silver
                 from
                 it
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 done
                 by
                 Evaporation
                 ,
                 for
                 as
                 for
                 the
                 Iron
                 substance
                 ,
                 that
                 does
                 not
                 Evaporate
                 ,
                 but
                 remains
                 mix'd
                 with
                 the
                 Silver
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 reason
                 that
                 there
                 is
                 always
                 in
                 Eight
                 Ounces
                 (
                 for
                 example
                 sake
                 )
                 Three
                 quarters
                 of
                 an
                 Ounce
                 or
                 thereabouts
                 of
                 false
                 Alloy
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Silver
                 when
                 thus
                 refin'd
                 is
                 carried
                 to
                 the
                 Mint
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 make
                 an
                 Essay
                 of
                 it
                 whether
                 it
                 be
                 of
                 the
                 right
                 Alloy
                 ,
                 after
                 which
                 it
                 is
                 melted
                 into
                 Barrs
                 or
                 Ingots
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 weigh'd
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 fifth
                 part
                 of
                 'em
                 deducted
                 ,
                 which
                 belongs
                 to
                 the
                 King
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 stamp'd
                 with
                 his
                 mark
                 ;
                 the
                 rest
                 appertain
                 to
                 the
                 Merchant
                 ,
                 who
                 in
                 like
                 manner
                 applies
                 his
                 mark
                 to
                 them
                 ;
                 and
                 takes
                 'em
                 away
                 from
                 thence
                 when
                 he
                 pleases
                 in
                 Barrs
                 ,
                 or
                 else
                 converts
                 'em
                 into
                 Reals
                 and
                 other
                 Money
                 .
                 This
                 fifth
                 part
                 is
                 the
                 only
                 profit
                 the
                 King
                 has
                 from
                 the
                 Mines
                 ,
                 which
                 yet
                 are
                 esteem'd
                 to
                 amount
                 to
                 several
                 Millions
                 ;
                 But
                 besides
                 this
                 ,
                 he
                 draws
                 considerable
                 Sums
                 by
                 the
                 ordinary
                 Impositions
                 upon
                 Goods
                 ,
                 without
                 reckoning
                 what
                 he
                 raises
                 upon
                 Quick-silver
                 ,
                 both
                 that
                 which
                 
                 is
                 taken
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Mines
                 of
                 Guancavelica
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 Situated
                 between
                 Lima
                 and
                 Cusco
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 which
                 is
                 brought
                 from
                 Spain
                 ,
                 with
                 which
                 Two
                 Vessels
                 are
                 loaded
                 every
                 Year
                 ,
                 because
                 that
                 which
                 is
                 taken
                 out
                 of
                 these
                 Mines
                 is
                 not
                 sufficient
                 for
                 all
                 the
                 Indies
                 .
              
               
                 They
                 use
                 divers
                 ways
                 of
                 Carriage
                 ,
                 to
                 Transport
                 all
                 the
                 Silver
                 that
                 is
                 annually
                 made
                 about
                 Potosi
                 for
                 Spain
                 ;
                 first
                 they
                 Load
                 it
                 upon
                 Mules
                 ,
                 that
                 carry
                 it
                 to
                 Arica
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 a
                 Port
                 on
                 the
                 South-Sea
                 ,
                 from
                 whence
                 they
                 Transport
                 it
                 in
                 small
                 Vessels
                 to
                 the
                 Fort
                 of
                 Lima
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Los
                   Reys
                
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 a
                 Fort
                 upon
                 the
                 same
                 Sea
                 ,
                 Two
                 Leagues
                 from
                 Lima
                 ;
                 here
                 they
                 Embark
                 it
                 with
                 all
                 that
                 comes
                 from
                 other
                 parts
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 in
                 Two
                 great
                 Gallions
                 that
                 belong
                 to
                 his
                 Catholick
                 Majesty
                 ,
                 each
                 of
                 which
                 carry
                 1000
                 Tuns
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 Arm'd
                 each
                 with
                 50
                 or
                 60
                 Pieces
                 of
                 Canon
                 ;
                 these
                 are
                 commonly
                 accompanied
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 small
                 Merchant
                 Ships
                 as
                 Richly
                 Loaded
                 ,
                 which
                 have
                 no
                 Guns
                 but
                 a
                 few
                 Petareroes
                 to
                 give
                 Salutes
                 ;
                 and
                 take
                 their
                 Course
                 towards
                 Panama
                 ,
                 taking
                 care
                 always
                 to
                 send
                 a
                 little
                 Pinnace
                 8
                 or
                 10
                 Leagues
                 before
                 to
                 make
                 discoveries
                 .
                 They
                 might
                 make
                 this
                 way
                 in
                 a
                 Fortnights
                 time
                 ,
                 having
                 always
                 
                 the
                 help
                 of
                 the
                 South-wind
                 which
                 reigns
                 alone
                 in
                 this
                 Sea
                 ;
                 yet
                 they
                 never
                 make
                 it
                 less
                 than
                 a
                 Months
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 because
                 by
                 this
                 delay
                 the
                 Commander
                 of
                 the
                 Gallions
                 makes
                 a
                 great
                 advantage
                 in
                 furnishing
                 those
                 with
                 Cards
                 that
                 have
                 a
                 mind
                 to
                 play
                 on
                 Ship-board
                 ,
                 during
                 the
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 which
                 amounts
                 to
                 a
                 very
                 considerable
                 Sum
                 ,
                 both
                 because
                 the
                 Tribute
                 he
                 receives
                 is
                 Ten
                 Patagons
                 for
                 every
                 Pack
                 of
                 Cards
                 ,
                 and
                 because
                 there
                 is
                 a
                 prodigious
                 quantity
                 of
                 'em
                 consum'd
                 ,
                 they
                 being
                 continually
                 at
                 play
                 ;
                 and
                 there
                 being
                 scarce
                 any
                 body
                 aboard
                 ,
                 but
                 is
                 concern'd
                 for
                 very
                 considerable
                 Sums
                 .
                 When
                 the
                 Gallions
                 arrive
                 at
                 Panama
                 on
                 the
                 Continent
                 ,
                 they
                 put
                 their
                 Lading
                 ashoar
                 ,
                 and
                 wait
                 to
                 hear
                 of
                 those
                 from
                 Spain
                 ,
                 who
                 commonly
                 about
                 the
                 same
                 time
                 ,
                 or
                 a
                 little
                 after
                 ,
                 arrive
                 at
                 Portobelo
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 18
                 Leagues
                 from
                 the
                 North-Sea
                 ;
                 in
                 the
                 mean
                 time
                 they
                 carry
                 thither
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 Gold
                 ,
                 Silver
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Commodities
                 of
                 this
                 Fleet
                 which
                 are
                 design'd
                 for
                 Europe
                 ,
                 upon
                 Mules
                 by
                 Land
                 ,
                 and
                 part
                 by
                 Water
                 upon
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Chiagre
                 ,
                 in
                 Boats
                 made
                 of
                 an
                 entire
                 piece
                 of
                 Wood
                 call'd
                 Piragouas
                 .
                 A
                 few
                 days
                 after
                 they
                 are
                 unladen
                 ,
                 and
                 after
                 the
                 Gallions
                 are
                 likewise
                 arriv'd
                 from
                 Spain
                 ;
                 a
                 
                 very
                 great
                 Fair
                 is
                 held
                 there
                 ,
                 for
                 a
                 Fortnight
                 together
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 they
                 Sell
                 and
                 Barter
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Goods
                 necessary
                 for
                 each
                 Country
                 ;
                 which
                 is
                 perform'd
                 with
                 so
                 much
                 honesty
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Sale
                 is
                 made
                 only
                 by
                 the
                 Inventories
                 ,
                 without
                 opening
                 the
                 Bales
                 ,
                 without
                 the
                 least
                 Fraud
                 .
                 The
                 Fair
                 being
                 ended
                 ,
                 they
                 all
                 retire
                 to
                 the
                 places
                 to
                 which
                 they
                 respectively
                 belong
                 .
                 The
                 Gallions
                 that
                 are
                 to
                 return
                 into
                 Spain
                 ,
                 go
                 to
                 Havana
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 Island
                 of
                 Cuba
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 wait
                 for
                 the
                 Arrival
                 of
                 the
                 Flota
                 of
                 
                   la
                   Vera-Crux
                
                 in
                 
                   New
                   Spain
                
                 ;
                 as
                 soon
                 as
                 that
                 has
                 joyn'd
                 'em
                 ,
                 they
                 continue
                 their
                 Course
                 together
                 ,
                 passing
                 thro'
                 the
                 Channel
                 of
                 Bahama
                 along
                 the
                 Coast
                 of
                 Florida
                 ,
                 they
                 touch
                 at
                 the
                 Island
                 of
                 Bermudos
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 commonly
                 meet
                 with
                 Advice
                 of
                 the
                 State
                 of
                 Affairs
                 in
                 Europe
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 orders
                 to
                 direct
                 them
                 how
                 to
                 avoid
                 any
                 disasters
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 perform
                 their
                 Voyage
                 in
                 safety
                 .
                 As
                 for
                 the
                 Gallions
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 after
                 they
                 have
                 taken
                 in
                 a
                 new
                 Cargo
                 at
                 Panama
                 ,
                 they
                 return
                 to
                 Lima
                 ,
                 steering
                 divers
                 Courses
                 ,
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 Contrariety
                 of
                 the
                 Wind
                 ,
                 which
                 keeps
                 'em
                 Two
                 or
                 Three
                 Months
                 at
                 Sea.
                 Being
                 there
                 ,
                 they
                 dispose
                 of
                 what
                 they
                 have
                 for
                 Peru
                 :
                 And
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 Goods
                 is
                 taken
                 off
                 by
                 the
                 Merchants
                 
                 of
                 Chili
                 ,
                 who
                 give
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 Commodities
                 of
                 their
                 Country
                 in
                 exchange
                 for
                 'em
                 ;
                 as
                 Goats-leather
                 ,
                 which
                 in
                 the
                 Language
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 is
                 call'd
                 Cordouan
                 ,
                 Cordage
                 ,
                 Hemp
                 ,
                 Pitch
                 and
                 Tar
                 ,
                 Oyls
                 ,
                 Olives
                 ,
                 and
                 Almonds
                 ,
                 and
                 above
                 all
                 a
                 great
                 quantity
                 of
                 Dust
                 of
                 Gold
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 taken
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Rivers
                 of
                 
                   Capiapo
                   ,
                   Coquinbo
                   ,
                   Baldivia
                
                 ,
                 and
                 others
                 which
                 fall
                 into
                 the
                 South-Sea
                 .
                 And
                 now
                 we
                 are
                 speaking
                 of
                 the
                 Commodities
                 of
                 Chili
                 ,
                 some
                 small
                 matter
                 must
                 be
                 said
                 concerning
                 this
                 great
                 Province
                 or
                 Kingdom
                 .
                 At
                 the
                 Mouths
                 of
                 those
                 Rivers
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 I
                 have
                 just
                 been
                 speaking
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 good
                 Ports
                 ,
                 and
                 Cities
                 ,
                 each
                 of
                 which
                 consist
                 of
                 about
                 4
                 or
                 500
                 Houses
                 ,
                 and
                 those
                 sufficiently
                 stock'd
                 with
                 People
                 .
                 The
                 most
                 considerable
                 Cities
                 upon
                 the
                 Sea-Coast
                 ,
                 are
                 
                   Baldivia
                   ,
                   la
                   Conception
                   ,
                   Copiapo
                
                 and
                 
                   Coquinbo
                   .
                   Baldivia
                
                 is
                 Fortified
                 ,
                 and
                 has
                 a
                 Garrison
                 in
                 it
                 ,
                 usually
                 compos'd
                 only
                 of
                 Banish'd
                 Men
                 ,
                 and
                 Malefactors
                 of
                 the
                 Indies
                 ;
                 the
                 Three
                 others
                 are
                 Cities
                 of
                 Trade
                 .
                 Farther
                 up
                 in
                 the
                 Countrey
                 is
                 
                   St.
                   Jago
                   de
                   Chili
                
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 Capital
                 of
                 all
                 Chili
                 ,
                 where
                 there
                 is
                 likewise
                 a
                 strong
                 Garrison
                 ,
                 and
                 some
                 regular
                 Troops
                 ,
                 by
                 reason
                 of
                 the
                 continual
                 War
                 they
                 have
                 with
                 the
                 Savages
                 ,
                 
                 call'd
                 Aoucans
                 .
                 Beyond
                 it
                 in
                 the
                 Mountains
                 ,
                 lies
                 the
                 little
                 Province
                 of
                 Chicuito
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 the
                 principal
                 Places
                 are
                 
                   St.
                   Juan
                   de
                   la
                   Frontera
                
                 ,
                 and
                 Mendoca
                 ,
                 round
                 about
                 these
                 Towns
                 ,
                 there
                 grows
                 a
                 great
                 deal
                 of
                 Corn
                 ,
                 and
                 abundance
                 of
                 Vines
                 ,
                 which
                 furnish
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 Chili
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Tucuman
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 .
              
               
                 Three
                 Weeks
                 after
                 my
                 Arrival
                 at
                 Potosi
                 ;
                 there
                 were
                 great
                 rejoycings
                 made
                 for
                 the
                 Birth
                 of
                 the
                 Prince
                 of
                 Spain
                 ,
                 which
                 lasted
                 for
                 a
                 Fortnight
                 together
                 ,
                 during
                 which
                 time
                 all
                 Work
                 ceased
                 ,
                 throughout
                 the
                 City
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 Mines
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 Adjacent
                 places
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 the
                 People
                 great
                 and
                 small
                 ,
                 whether
                 
                   Spaniards
                   ,
                   Forreigners
                   ,
                   Indians
                
                 ,
                 or
                 Blacks
                 ,
                 minded
                 nothing
                 else
                 but
                 to
                 do
                 something
                 extraordinary
                 for
                 the
                 Solemnizing
                 of
                 this
                 Festival
                 .
                 It
                 began
                 with
                 a
                 Cavalcade
                 ,
                 made
                 by
                 the
                 Corregidor
                 ,
                 the
                 Twenty
                 four
                 Magistrates
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 ,
                 the
                 other
                 Officers
                 ,
                 the
                 Principal
                 of
                 the
                 Nobility
                 and
                 Gentry
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 most
                 eminent
                 Merchants
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 ;
                 all
                 richly
                 Cloth'd
                 .
                 All
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 People
                 ,
                 and
                 particularly
                 the
                 Ladies
                 being
                 at
                 the
                 Windows
                 ,
                 and
                 casting
                 down
                 abundance
                 of
                 perfum'd
                 Waters
                 ,
                 and
                 great
                 quantities
                 of
                 
                 dry
                 Sweet-meats
                 .
                 The
                 following
                 days
                 they
                 had
                 several
                 Plays
                 ,
                 some
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 call
                 
                   Juegos
                   de
                   Toros
                
                 ,
                 others
                 
                   Juegos
                   de
                   Cannas
                
                 ,
                 several
                 sorts
                 of
                 Masquerades
                 ,
                 Comedies
                 ,
                 Balls
                 ,
                 with
                 Vocal
                 and
                 Instrumental
                 Musick
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Divertisements
                 ,
                 which
                 were
                 carry'd
                 on
                 one
                 day
                 by
                 the
                 Gentlemen
                 ,
                 another
                 day
                 by
                 the
                 Citizens
                 ;
                 one
                 while
                 by
                 the
                 Gold-smiths
                 ,
                 another
                 while
                 by
                 the
                 Miners
                 ;
                 some
                 by
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 divers
                 Nations
                 ,
                 others
                 by
                 the
                 Indians
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 with
                 great
                 Magnificence
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 prodigious
                 Expence
                 .
                 The
                 Rejoycings
                 of
                 the
                 Indians
                 deserve
                 a
                 particular
                 remark
                 ,
                 for
                 besides
                 that
                 they
                 were
                 richly
                 cloth'd
                 ,
                 and
                 after
                 a
                 different
                 manner
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 Comical
                 enough
                 ;
                 with
                 their
                 Bows
                 and
                 Arrows
                 ;
                 they
                 in
                 one
                 Night
                 and
                 Morning
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 Chief
                 Publick
                 place
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 ,
                 prepar'd
                 a
                 Garden
                 in
                 the
                 form
                 of
                 a
                 Labyrinth
                 ,
                 the
                 Plats
                 of
                 which
                 were
                 adorn'd
                 with
                 Fountains
                 spouting
                 out
                 Waters
                 ,
                 furnished
                 with
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Trees
                 and
                 Flowers
                 ,
                 full
                 of
                 Birds
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Wild-beasts
                 ,
                 as
                 Lions
                 ,
                 Tygers
                 and
                 other
                 kinds
                 ;
                 in
                 the
                 midst
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 express'd
                 their
                 Joy
                 a
                 Thousand
                 different
                 ways
                 ,
                 with
                 extraordinary
                 Ceremonies
                 .
                 The
                 last
                 day
                 save
                 one
                 surpass'd
                 all
                 the
                 rest
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 
                 was
                 a
                 Race
                 at
                 the
                 Ring
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 perform'd
                 at
                 the
                 Charge
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 with
                 very
                 surpizing
                 Machines
                 .
                 First
                 there
                 appear'd
                 a
                 Ship
                 Tow'd
                 along
                 by
                 Savages
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 bulk
                 and
                 burden
                 of
                 a
                 100
                 Tuns
                 ,
                 with
                 her
                 Guns
                 and
                 Equipage
                 of
                 Men
                 cloth'd
                 in
                 Curious
                 Habit
                 ,
                 her
                 Anchors
                 ,
                 Ropes
                 ,
                 and
                 Sails
                 swelling
                 with
                 the
                 Wind
                 ,
                 which
                 very
                 luckily
                 blew
                 along
                 the
                 Street
                 through
                 which
                 they
                 drew
                 her
                 to
                 the
                 great
                 publick
                 place
                 ,
                 where
                 as
                 soon
                 as
                 she
                 arriv'd
                 ,
                 she
                 saluted
                 the
                 Company
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 discharge
                 of
                 all
                 her
                 Canon
                 ;
                 and
                 at
                 the
                 same
                 time
                 a
                 Spanish
                 Lord
                 ,
                 representing
                 an
                 Emperor
                 of
                 the
                 East
                 ,
                 coming
                 to
                 Congratulate
                 the
                 Birth
                 of
                 the
                 Prince
                 ,
                 came
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Vessel
                 attended
                 with
                 Six
                 Gentlemen
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 very
                 fine
                 Train
                 of
                 Servants
                 that
                 led
                 their
                 Horses
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 mounted
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 went
                 to
                 salute
                 the
                 President
                 of
                 
                   Los
                   Charcas
                
                 ,
                 and
                 while
                 they
                 were
                 making
                 their
                 Compliment
                 to
                 him
                 ,
                 their
                 Horses
                 kneel'd
                 down
                 ,
                 and
                 kept
                 in
                 that
                 Posture
                 ,
                 having
                 been
                 taught
                 this
                 Trick
                 before
                 .
                 They
                 afterwards
                 went
                 to
                 salute
                 the
                 Corregidor
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Judges
                 of
                 the
                 Field
                 ,
                 from
                 whom
                 when
                 they
                 had
                 receiv'd
                 permission
                 to
                 run
                 at
                 the
                 Ring
                 against
                 the
                 Defendants
                 ,
                 they
                 acquitted
                 themselves
                 
                 with
                 great
                 Gallantry
                 ,
                 and
                 receiv'd
                 very
                 fine
                 prizes
                 distributed
                 by
                 the
                 hands
                 of
                 the
                 Ladies
                 .
                 The
                 Race
                 at
                 the
                 Ring
                 being
                 finish'd
                 ,
                 the
                 Ship
                 and
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 other
                 small
                 Barks
                 that
                 were
                 brought
                 thither
                 advanc'd
                 to
                 attack
                 a
                 great
                 Castle
                 wherein
                 Cromwel
                 the
                 Protector
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 then
                 in
                 War
                 with
                 the
                 King
                 of
                 Spain
                 ,
                 was
                 feign'd
                 to
                 be
                 shut
                 up
                 ;
                 and
                 after
                 a
                 pretty
                 long
                 Combat
                 of
                 Fire-works
                 ;
                 the
                 fire
                 took
                 hold
                 of
                 the
                 Ship
                 ,
                 the
                 small
                 Barkes
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Castle
                 and
                 all
                 was
                 consum'd
                 together
                 .
                 After
                 this
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 pieces
                 of
                 Gold
                 and
                 Silver
                 were
                 distributed
                 and
                 thrown
                 among
                 the
                 People
                 in
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 his
                 Catholick
                 Majesty
                 :
                 And
                 there
                 were
                 some
                 particular
                 Persons
                 that
                 had
                 the
                 prodigality
                 to
                 throw
                 away
                 Two
                 or
                 Three
                 Thousand
                 Crowns
                 a
                 Man
                 among
                 the
                 Mob
                 .
                 The
                 Day
                 following
                 these
                 Rejoycings
                 were
                 concluded
                 by
                 a
                 Procession
                 ,
                 made
                 from
                 the
                 great
                 Church
                 to
                 that
                 of
                 the
                 Recollects
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 the
                 Holy
                 Sacrament
                 was
                 carry'd
                 ,
                 attended
                 with
                 all
                 the
                 Clergy
                 and
                 Laiety
                 ;
                 and
                 because
                 the
                 way
                 from
                 one
                 of
                 these
                 Churches
                 to
                 the
                 other
                 had
                 been
                 unpav'd
                 for
                 the
                 Celebration
                 of
                 the
                 other
                 Rejoycings
                 ,
                 they
                 repair'd
                 it
                 for
                 this
                 Procession
                 with
                 Barrs
                 of
                 Silver
                 ,
                 
                 with
                 which
                 all
                 the
                 way
                 was
                 entirely
                 cover'd
                 .
                 The
                 Altar
                 where
                 the
                 Host
                 was
                 to
                 be
                 Lodg'd
                 in
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 the
                 Recollects
                 was
                 so
                 furnish'd
                 with
                 Figures
                 ,
                 Vessels
                 ,
                 and
                 Plates
                 of
                 Gold
                 and
                 Silver
                 ,
                 adorn'd
                 with
                 Pearles
                 ,
                 Diamonds
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Precious
                 Stones
                 ,
                 that
                 scarce
                 ever
                 could
                 any
                 thing
                 be
                 seen
                 more
                 Rich
                 :
                 For
                 the
                 Citizens
                 brought
                 thither
                 all
                 the
                 rarest
                 Jewels
                 they
                 had
                 .
                 The
                 extraordinary
                 Charge
                 of
                 this
                 whole
                 time
                 of
                 Rejoycing
                 ,
                 was
                 reckon'd
                 to
                 amount
                 to
                 above
                 500000
                 Crowns
                 .
              
               
                 These
                 Divertisements
                 being
                 ended
                 ,
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 time
                 that
                 I
                 continued
                 at
                 Potosi
                 ,
                 was
                 employ'd
                 in
                 compleating
                 the
                 Sale
                 of
                 the
                 Goods
                 ,
                 the
                 Inventories
                 of
                 which
                 I
                 had
                 brought
                 with
                 me
                 ,
                 and
                 I
                 oblig'd
                 my self
                 to
                 cause
                 these
                 Goods
                 to
                 be
                 deliver'd
                 in
                 a
                 certain
                 time
                 at
                 Xuxui
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 pay
                 all
                 the
                 Charge
                 of
                 Carriage
                 so
                 far
                 .
                 I
                 took
                 most
                 of
                 my
                 Payment
                 in
                 Silver
                 ,
                 namely
                 in
                 Patagons
                 ,
                 Plate
                 ,
                 Barrs
                 ,
                 and
                 Pignas
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 Virgin-silver
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 rest
                 in
                 Vigogne
                 Wool
                 ,
                 and
                 when
                 I
                 had
                 quite
                 finish'd
                 the
                 business
                 for
                 which
                 I
                 was
                 sent
                 to
                 Potosi
                 ;
                 I
                 left
                 the
                 place
                 to
                 return
                 to
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 the
                 same
                 way
                 I
                 came
                 .
                 I
                 loaded
                 all
                 my
                 Bales
                 upon
                 Mules
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 ordinary
                 way
                 of
                 Carriage
                 
                 to
                 pass
                 the
                 Moutains
                 which
                 divide
                 Peru
                 from
                 Tucuman
                 .
                 But
                 when
                 I
                 was
                 arriv'd
                 at
                 Xuxui
                 ,
                 I
                 thought
                 meet
                 to
                 make
                 use
                 of
                 Waggons
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 much
                 more
                 Commodious
                 ,
                 and
                 thus
                 I
                 continu'd
                 my
                 Travels
                 ;
                 and
                 after
                 a
                 Journey
                 of
                 4
                 Months
                 happily
                 arriv'd
                 at
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Lucan
                 ;
                 which
                 is
                 5
                 Leagues
                 from
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ;
                 where
                 I
                 met
                 with
                 
                   Ignatio
                   Maleo
                
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 got
                 thither
                 before
                 me
                 ;
                 he
                 came
                 thither
                 by
                 the
                 River
                 in
                 a
                 little
                 Boat
                 ,
                 which
                 we
                 resolv'd
                 to
                 make
                 use
                 of
                 ,
                 to
                 convey
                 most
                 of
                 the
                 Silver
                 I
                 had
                 brought
                 with
                 me
                 ,
                 privately
                 to
                 our
                 Ship
                 ;
                 we
                 thought
                 meet
                 to
                 take
                 this
                 Course
                 to
                 avoid
                 the
                 risque
                 we
                 must
                 have
                 run
                 of
                 being
                 Confiscated
                 ,
                 if
                 we
                 had
                 brought
                 our
                 Vessel
                 by
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ,
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 Prohibition
                 of
                 the
                 Exportation
                 of
                 Gold
                 and
                 Silver
                 ,
                 tho'
                 this
                 order
                 is
                 not
                 always
                 very
                 regularly
                 observ'd
                 ,
                 the
                 Governour
                 sometimes
                 ,
                 suffering
                 it
                 to
                 be
                 carried
                 out
                 privately
                 ,
                 Conniving
                 at
                 it
                 ,
                 for
                 some
                 present
                 ,
                 or
                 else
                 not
                 being
                 very
                 strict
                 in
                 taking
                 notice
                 of
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 I
                 must
                 not
                 omit
                 here
                 to
                 tell
                 the
                 reason
                 why
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 will
                 not
                 suffer
                 the
                 Silver
                 of
                 Peru
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 other
                 Neighbouring
                 Provinces
                 to
                 be
                 Transported
                 by
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 
                   la
                   Plata
                
                 ,
                 nor
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Vessels
                 to
                 go
                 
                 and
                 Trade
                 there
                 without
                 Permission
                 :
                 It
                 is
                 from
                 this
                 Consideration
                 ,
                 that
                 if
                 they
                 should
                 give
                 way
                 to
                 a
                 free
                 Trade
                 on
                 that
                 side
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Country
                 is
                 good
                 and
                 Plentiful
                 ,
                 the
                 Earth
                 Fruitful
                 ,
                 The
                 Air
                 wholesome
                 ,
                 and
                 Carriage
                 Commodious
                 ;
                 the
                 Merchants
                 that
                 Trade
                 in
                 
                   Peru
                   ,
                   Chili
                
                 ,
                 and
                 Tucuman
                 ,
                 would
                 soon
                 quit
                 the
                 way
                 of
                 the
                 Gallions
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Ordinary
                 Passages
                 through
                 the
                 North
                 and
                 South-Seas
                 ,
                 and
                 through
                 the
                 Continent
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 difficult
                 and
                 Incommodious
                 ;
                 and
                 would
                 take
                 the
                 way
                 of
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 :
                 And
                 this
                 would
                 infallibly
                 cause
                 most
                 of
                 the
                 Cities
                 of
                 the
                 Continent
                 to
                 be
                 deserted
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Air
                 is
                 bad
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Necessaries
                 and
                 Accomodations
                 of
                 Life
                 are
                 not
                 to
                 be
                 had
                 in
                 such
                 plenty
                 .
              
               
                 When
                 we
                 had
                 secur'd
                 our
                 Silver
                 by
                 the
                 precaution
                 we
                 had
                 us'd
                 ,
                 I
                 came
                 to
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 with
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 our
                 Goods
                 ;
                 where
                 I
                 was
                 no
                 sooner
                 Arriv'd
                 ,
                 but
                 our
                 return
                 to
                 Spain
                 was
                 resolv'd
                 on
                 .
                 But
                 least
                 any
                 thing
                 should
                 be
                 found
                 on
                 board
                 us
                 to
                 give
                 occasion
                 for
                 any
                 Seizure
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 Kings
                 Officers
                 should
                 make
                 their
                 usual
                 Visit
                 on
                 our
                 Vessel
                 ,
                 before
                 it
                 went
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Port
                 ;
                 we
                 thought
                 convenient
                 at
                 first
                 to
                 Embark
                 only
                 those
                 Commodities
                 
                 that
                 took
                 up
                 the
                 most
                 room
                 ,
                 as
                 Vigogne
                 Wool
                 ,
                 Leather
                 of
                 several
                 sorts
                 ,
                 amongst
                 others
                 16000
                 Bulls-hides
                 ,
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 other
                 Bales
                 and
                 Chests
                 belonging
                 to
                 the
                 Passengers
                 that
                 were
                 to
                 return
                 with
                 us
                 ,
                 and
                 about
                 30000
                 Crowns
                 in
                 Silver
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 largest
                 Sum
                 that
                 is
                 permitted
                 to
                 be
                 carried
                 away
                 ,
                 to
                 supply
                 all
                 necessary
                 charges
                 that
                 may
                 occur
                 in
                 the
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 pay
                 off
                 the
                 Ship.
                 But
                 after
                 this
                 Visit
                 was
                 made
                 ,
                 we
                 made
                 an
                 end
                 of
                 Embarking
                 the
                 Silver
                 we
                 had
                 hidden
                 ,
                 which
                 with
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 Lading
                 might
                 amount
                 to
                 about
                 Three
                 Millions
                 of
                 Livers
                 .
              
               
                 We
                 parted
                 from
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 in
                 the
                 Month
                 of
                 May
                 1659
                 ,
                 in
                 company
                 of
                 a
                 Dutch
                 Vessel
                 ,
                 Commanded
                 by
                 
                   Isaac
                   de
                   Brac
                
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 also
                 richly
                 Laden
                 ;
                 he
                 engag'd
                 us
                 to
                 steer
                 our
                 Course
                 with
                 him
                 ,
                 because
                 his
                 Ship
                 leak'd
                 ;
                 and
                 this
                 fault
                 increasing
                 in
                 the
                 sequel
                 of
                 the
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 we
                 were
                 oblig'd
                 to
                 put
                 in
                 at
                 the
                 Island
                 of
                 
                   Fernande
                   de
                   Lorona
                
                 ,
                 within
                 3
                 Degrees
                 and
                 a
                 half
                 of
                 the
                 Line
                 on
                 the
                 South-side
                 .
                 It
                 prov'd
                 well
                 for
                 us
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 for
                 the
                 Dutch
                 ,
                 that
                 we
                 stop'd
                 here
                 .
                 For
                 having
                 a
                 mind
                 for
                 fear
                 of
                 the
                 worst
                 to
                 take
                 in
                 a
                 new
                 Provision
                 of
                 Fresh-Water
                 here
                 ,
                 we
                 perceiv'd
                 the
                 greatest
                 part
                 of
                 that
                 we
                 had
                 taken
                 in
                 at
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 was
                 run
                 out
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 a
                 Hundred
                 Barrels
                 ,
                 which
                 we
                 thought
                 we
                 had
                 remaining
                 of
                 our
                 Store
                 ;
                 we
                 had
                 but
                 
                 Thirty
                 left
                 .
                 Therefore
                 tho'
                 the
                 Water
                 we
                 found
                 there
                 had
                 a
                 very
                 flat
                 Taste
                 ,
                 and
                 had
                 this
                 ill
                 quality
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 presently
                 cast
                 them
                 that
                 drank
                 of
                 it
                 into
                 a
                 Looseness
                 ,
                 we
                 were
                 however
                 necessitated
                 to
                 fill
                 our
                 Barrels
                 with
                 it
                 .
                 And
                 an
                 Accident
                 unhappy
                 enough
                 befell
                 those
                 of
                 our
                 Men
                 that
                 went
                 to
                 fetch
                 it
                 from
                 the
                 Rock
                 out
                 of
                 which
                 it
                 sprang
                 ,
                 for
                 having
                 stripp'd
                 themselves
                 almost
                 naked
                 ,
                 to
                 work
                 the
                 more
                 commodiously
                 ,
                 the
                 heat
                 of
                 the
                 Sun
                 scorch'd
                 'em
                 so
                 vehemently
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 made
                 their
                 Bodies
                 all
                 over
                 red
                 ,
                 and
                 afterwards
                 those
                 parts
                 upon
                 which
                 the
                 Sun
                 darted
                 its
                 Rays
                 with
                 the
                 greatest
                 violence
                 ,
                 were
                 full
                 of
                 Buboes
                 and
                 Pustules
                 ,
                 which
                 were
                 very
                 troublesome
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 'em
                 very
                 uneasie
                 for
                 a
                 Fortnights
                 Time.
                 
              
               
                 I
                 went
                 ashore
                 to
                 see
                 this
                 Island
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 about
                 a
                 League
                 and
                 an
                 half
                 in
                 compass
                 ,
                 and
                 uninhabited
                 .
                 One
                 of
                 our
                 Pilots
                 told
                 me
                 that
                 the
                 Dutch
                 possess'd
                 it
                 ,
                 while
                 they
                 held
                 Fermanbues
                 in
                 Brasil
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 they
                 had
                 a
                 small
                 Fort
                 there
                 ,
                 some
                 small
                 remains
                 of
                 which
                 were
                 still
                 left
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 sow'd
                 Millet
                 and
                 Beans
                 there
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 had
                 a
                 tolerable
                 Crop
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 they
                 bred
                 up
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 Fowls
                 ,
                 Goats
                 and
                 Hogs
                 .
                 We
                 saw
                 a
                 great
                 number
                 of
                 Birds
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 some
                 were
                 good
                 to
                 eat
                 ;
                 we
                 continu'd
                 there
                 Four
                 days
                 ,
                 but
                 when
                 we
                 saw
                 the
                 Dutch
                 could
                 not
                 be
                 so
                 soon
                 in
                 a
                 condition
                 to
                 continue
                 
                 their
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 being
                 oblig'd
                 to
                 put
                 their
                 Cargo
                 ashore
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 lay
                 their
                 Vessel
                 upon
                 one
                 side
                 to
                 refit
                 ;
                 we
                 set
                 sail
                 ,
                 and
                 after
                 a
                 Voyage
                 sufficiently
                 troublesome
                 by
                 the
                 Storms
                 we
                 suffer'd
                 ,
                 which
                 sometimes
                 drove
                 us
                 towards
                 the
                 Coasts
                 of
                 Florida
                 ,
                 and
                 sometimes
                 upon
                 others
                 ,
                 we
                 at
                 last
                 discover'd
                 the
                 Coasts
                 of
                 Spain
                 .
                 Instead
                 of
                 going
                 to
                 Cadiz
                 ,
                 being
                 under
                 apprehensions
                 of
                 meeting
                 the
                 English
                 who
                 were
                 still
                 at
                 War
                 with
                 the
                 Spaniards
                 ;
                 we
                 thought
                 convenient
                 to
                 make
                 to
                 
                   St.
                   Andero
                
                 ,
                 where
                 we
                 happily
                 arriv'd
                 about
                 the
                 middle
                 of
                 August
                 .
                 We
                 were
                 immediatly
                 inform'd
                 that
                 the
                 Spanish
                 Gallions
                 came
                 to
                 Moor
                 at
                 the
                 same
                 Port
                 in
                 their
                 return
                 from
                 Mexico
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 same
                 reason
                 that
                 brought
                 us
                 thither
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 they
                 set
                 Sail
                 but
                 Two
                 days
                 before
                 our
                 Arrival
                 .
                 And
                 because
                 the
                 Officers
                 of
                 the
                 King
                 of
                 Spain
                 ,
                 that
                 had
                 been
                 sent
                 to
                 'em
                 were
                 still
                 there
                 ,
                 we
                 thought
                 best
                 to
                 treat
                 with
                 them
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 to
                 save
                 the
                 Fine
                 we
                 had
                 incurr'd
                 ,
                 for
                 not
                 returning
                 to
                 the
                 place
                 from
                 whence
                 we
                 were
                 sent
                 out
                 ,
                 as
                 that
                 we
                 might
                 not
                 be
                 troubled
                 with
                 a
                 visit
                 from
                 them
                 .
                 And
                 for
                 4000
                 Patagons
                 ,
                 which
                 we
                 presented
                 'em
                 ,
                 we
                 were
                 excus'd
                 and
                 exempted
                 from
                 any
                 search
                 .
                 We
                 therefore
                 put
                 our
                 Silver
                 and
                 other
                 Commodities
                 ashore
                 there
                 ,
                 part
                 of
                 which
                 was
                 afterwards
                 sent
                 to
                 Bilboa
                 ,
                 and
                 part
                 to
                 
                   St.
                   Sebastian
                
                 ,
                 where
                 in
                 a
                 little
                 time
                 they
                 were
                 sold
                 
                 and
                 distributed
                 to
                 several
                 Merchants
                 ,
                 who
                 Transported
                 'em
                 to
                 divers
                 places
                 to
                 put
                 'em
                 off
                 .
                 When
                 we
                 had
                 finished
                 the
                 Sale
                 of
                 all
                 our
                 Commodities
                 ,
                 there
                 was
                 an
                 exact
                 account
                 stated
                 among
                 those
                 that
                 were
                 concern'd
                 in
                 the
                 Ship
                 ,
                 both
                 of
                 their
                 Charge
                 and
                 Profit
                 of
                 this
                 Voyage
                 ;
                 about
                 the
                 detail
                 of
                 which
                 I
                 shall
                 not
                 trouble
                 my
                 head
                 .
                 I
                 shall
                 only
                 say
                 ,
                 to
                 give
                 a
                 short
                 account
                 of
                 it
                 in
                 Gross
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Charge
                 consisted
                 first
                 in
                 290000
                 Crowns
                 employ'd
                 in
                 buying
                 the
                 Goods
                 with
                 which
                 our
                 Vessel
                 was
                 Loaded
                 at
                 Cadiz
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 paying
                 the
                 Dues
                 of
                 Exportation
                 from
                 
                   Spain
                   .
                   74000
                   Livers
                
                 for
                 the
                 Freight
                 of
                 the
                 Vessel
                 for
                 19
                 Months
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 rate
                 of
                 3200
                 
                   Livers
                   per
                
                 Month
                 ,
                 43000
                 Livers
                 more
                 for
                 the
                 pay
                 of
                 76
                 Seamen
                 great
                 and
                 small
                 for
                 the
                 time
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 rate
                 of
                 10
                 Crowns
                 per
                 Month
                 one
                 with
                 another
                 .
                 30000
                 Crowns
                 spent
                 in
                 Victualling
                 the
                 Ship
                 for
                 that
                 time
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 for
                 the
                 Ships
                 Crew
                 as
                 for
                 the
                 Passengers
                 ,
                 there
                 being
                 a
                 very
                 good
                 Provision
                 made
                 ,
                 because
                 in
                 those
                 long
                 Voyages
                 beyond
                 the
                 Line
                 the
                 Sailers
                 must
                 have
                 good
                 Sustenance
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Passengers
                 must
                 have
                 a
                 great
                 many
                 Sweet-meats
                 ,
                 good
                 Liquors
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Costly
                 things
                 .
                 More
                 2000
                 Crowns
                 for
                 the
                 Dues
                 of
                 Entry
                 at
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 Presents
                 to
                 the
                 Officers
                 of
                 the
                 Place
                 ;
                 and
                 1000
                 Crowns
                 in
                 Custom
                 at
                 our
                 going
                 from
                 thence
                 ;
                 more
                 in
                 Expences
                 ,
                 Imposts
                 and
                 
                 Charges
                 in
                 carrying
                 our
                 Goods
                 from
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 to
                 Potosi
                 ,
                 and
                 from
                 Potosi
                 to
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 rate
                 of
                 20
                 Crowns
                 for
                 a
                 Quintal
                 or
                 100
                 weight
                 ;
                 more
                 4000
                 Crowns
                 to
                 procure
                 an
                 Exemption
                 from
                 being
                 search'd
                 and
                 visited
                 at
                 our
                 return
                 to
                 Spain
                 .
                 And
                 in
                 fine
                 some
                 other
                 Expences
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 in
                 Customs
                 of
                 Entry
                 ,
                 when
                 we
                 Landed
                 our
                 Goods
                 in
                 Spain
                 ,
                 as
                 in
                 some
                 other
                 things
                 not
                 fore-seen
                 ,
                 which
                 did
                 not
                 amount
                 to
                 any
                 great
                 Sums
                 .
                 These
                 were
                 almost
                 all
                 the
                 Principal
                 Articles
                 of
                 the
                 Charge
                 ,
                 which
                 being
                 deducted
                 and
                 paid
                 ,
                 the
                 Profit
                 was
                 found
                 to
                 amount
                 to
                 250
                 
                   per
                   Cent.
                
                 Comprehending
                 that
                 which
                 was
                 got
                 by
                 the
                 Hides
                 ,
                 which
                 came
                 to
                 15
                 Livers
                 a
                 piece
                 ,
                 that
                 being
                 the
                 Ordinary
                 Price
                 ,
                 tho'
                 they
                 cost
                 but
                 a
                 Crown
                 at
                 the
                 first
                 hand
                 ;
                 and
                 likewise
                 what
                 was
                 got
                 by
                 the
                 Passengers
                 ,
                 of
                 whom
                 we
                 had
                 above
                 50
                 on
                 board
                 us
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 in
                 going
                 as
                 coming
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 not
                 inconsiderable
                 ;
                 for
                 one
                 Man
                 who
                 had
                 nothing
                 but
                 his
                 Chest
                 paid
                 800
                 Crowns
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 rest
                 paid
                 proportionably
                 for
                 their
                 Passage
                 and
                 Diet.
                 
              
               
                 We
                 were
                 told
                 at
                 
                   St.
                   Andero
                
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Dutch
                 Vessels
                 which
                 we
                 had
                 seen
                 at
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 were
                 safely
                 arriv'd
                 at
                 Amsterdam
                 ,
                 but
                 that
                 the
                 Spanish
                 Embassador
                 being
                 inform'd
                 that
                 they
                 came
                 from
                 the
                 River
                 
                   de
                   la
                   Plata
                
                 ,
                 and
                 had
                 brought
                 thence
                 a
                 prodigious
                 Quantity
                 of
                 Silver
                 and
                 other
                 Commodities
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 
                 on
                 the
                 account
                 of
                 some
                 Dutch
                 Merchants
                 ,
                 as
                 for
                 several
                 Spaniards
                 ,
                 who
                 had
                 taken
                 the
                 opportunity
                 of
                 the
                 return
                 of
                 these
                 Vessels
                 to
                 come
                 back
                 into
                 Europe
                 ,
                 and
                 had
                 remitted
                 their
                 Money
                 from
                 Amsterdam
                 to
                 Cadiz
                 and
                 Sevil
                 by
                 Bills
                 of
                 Exchange
                 ,
                 besides
                 the
                 Dutch
                 Goods
                 which
                 they
                 sent
                 thither
                 ,
                 had
                 given
                 advice
                 of
                 it
                 to
                 the
                 Council
                 for
                 the
                 Indies
                 at
                 Madrid
                 ,
                 who
                 judged
                 this
                 Money
                 and
                 these
                 Effects
                 liable
                 to
                 Confiscation
                 ,
                 because
                 all
                 Spaniards
                 are
                 Prohibited
                 from
                 Trading
                 upon
                 Forreign
                 Vessels
                 ,
                 and
                 from
                 Transporting
                 Silver
                 to
                 any
                 other
                 place
                 besides
                 Spain
                 ;
                 and
                 accordingly
                 had
                 seiz'd
                 and
                 confiscated
                 the
                 greatest
                 part
                 of
                 'em
                 ,
                 the
                 rest
                 being
                 saved
                 by
                 the
                 precautions
                 some
                 of
                 the
                 Merchants
                 took
                 ,
                 who
                 were
                 not
                 so
                 much
                 in
                 haste
                 as
                 the
                 others
                 .
                 The
                 same
                 Embassador
                 having
                 remonstrated
                 at
                 the
                 same
                 time
                 ,
                 what
                 would
                 be
                 the
                 Consequence
                 of
                 Tolerating
                 Strangers
                 to
                 continue
                 to
                 trade
                 in
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Plata
                 ,
                 without
                 putting
                 any
                 restraint
                 upon
                 'em
                 ,
                 the
                 Council
                 had
                 so
                 much
                 regard
                 to
                 his
                 advice
                 ,
                 as
                 to
                 Equip
                 a
                 Vessel
                 with
                 all
                 speed
                 at
                 
                   St.
                   Sebastian
                
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 Loaded
                 with
                 Arms
                 and
                 Men
                 ,
                 to
                 send
                 to
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 with
                 very
                 strict
                 orders
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 to
                 seize
                 the
                 Person
                 of
                 the
                 Governor
                 for
                 having
                 suffer'd
                 these
                 Dutch
                 Vessels
                 to
                 come
                 and
                 Trade
                 in
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 as
                 to
                 take
                 an
                 exact
                 account
                 of
                 the
                 Acquaintance
                 and
                 Intelligence
                 the
                 
                 Dutch
                 had
                 gotten
                 there
                 ,
                 as
                 also
                 to
                 reestablish
                 things
                 so
                 well
                 there
                 ,
                 in
                 fortifying
                 the
                 Garrisons
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 Arming
                 them
                 better
                 than
                 they
                 had
                 yet
                 been
                 in
                 time
                 past
                 ,
                 that
                 for
                 the
                 Future
                 they
                 might
                 be
                 in
                 a
                 condition
                 to
                 resist
                 Forreigners
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 hinder
                 their
                 Descent
                 and
                 Communication
                 in
                 the
                 Country
                 .
                 Soon
                 after
                 our
                 Arrival
                 ,
                 
                   Ignatio
                   Maleo
                
                 the
                 Captain
                 of
                 our
                 Ship
                 ,
                 receiv'd
                 an
                 Order
                 from
                 the
                 Court
                 of
                 Spain
                 to
                 come
                 to
                 Madrid
                 ,
                 to
                 inform
                 the
                 Council
                 for
                 the
                 Indies
                 of
                 the
                 Condition
                 in
                 which
                 he
                 found
                 and
                 left
                 things
                 at
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 :
                 He
                 was
                 desirous
                 that
                 I
                 would
                 accompany
                 him
                 thither
                 ,
                 which
                 I
                 did
                 .
                 As
                 soon
                 as
                 we
                 arriv'd
                 at
                 Madrid
                 ,
                 he
                 gave
                 in
                 the
                 Memories
                 ,
                 not
                 only
                 of
                 all
                 he
                 had
                 observ'd
                 in
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Plata
                 ,
                 but
                 also
                 of
                 the
                 means
                 that
                 might
                 be
                 us'd
                 to
                 hinder
                 Strangers
                 from
                 having
                 the
                 least
                 thoughts
                 of
                 Trading
                 there
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 first
                 by
                 keeping
                 Two
                 good
                 Men
                 of
                 War
                 at
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 to
                 dispute
                 and
                 hinder
                 the
                 Passage
                 of
                 such
                 Merchant
                 Ships
                 as
                 should
                 attempt
                 to
                 go
                 up
                 to
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ;
                 in
                 the
                 second
                 place
                 by
                 sending
                 every
                 Year
                 Two
                 Ships
                 Loaded
                 with
                 all
                 things
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 those
                 parts
                 have
                 occasion
                 for
                 .
                 That
                 being
                 this
                 way
                 sufficiently
                 supply'd
                 ,
                 they
                 might
                 have
                 no
                 thoughts
                 of
                 favouring
                 the
                 descent
                 and
                 entrance
                 of
                 Strangers
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 should
                 come
                 thither
                 .
                 He
                 moreover
                 made
                 a
                 proposal
                 
                 of
                 changing
                 the
                 usual
                 Way
                 of
                 carrying
                 Goods
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 sent
                 to
                 Peru
                 ,
                 and
                 brought
                 them
                 by
                 the
                 Way
                 of
                 the
                 Gallions
                 ;
                 that
                 it
                 might
                 be
                 settled
                 on
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Plata
                 ,
                 from
                 whence
                 he
                 assur'd
                 'em
                 ,
                 the
                 Carriage
                 of
                 'em
                 by
                 Land
                 to
                 Peru
                 ,
                 would
                 be
                 more
                 conveniently
                 perform'd
                 ,
                 and
                 at
                 a
                 cheaper
                 Rate
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 with
                 less
                 Risque
                 ,
                 than
                 any
                 other
                 Way
                 .
                 But
                 of
                 all
                 these
                 Proposals
                 the
                 Council
                 of
                 Spain
                 relish'd
                 only
                 that
                 of
                 sending
                 to
                 Buenos-Ayres
                 Two
                 Vessels
                 laden
                 with
                 Commodities
                 proper
                 for
                 the
                 Country
                 .
                 And
                 Maleo
                 having
                 obtain'd
                 a
                 Grant
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 Commission
                 for
                 this
                 Purpose
                 ,
                 upon
                 the
                 Assurance
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 we
                 return'd
                 to
                 Guipuscoa
                 ,
                 to
                 make
                 Preparation
                 for
                 this
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 set
                 our
                 Affairs
                 in
                 order
                 ;
                 which
                 we
                 so
                 well
                 dispatch'd
                 ,
                 that
                 in
                 a
                 little
                 time
                 ,
                 we
                 had
                 a
                 Vessel
                 ready
                 to
                 set
                 sail
                 ,
                 which
                 Maleo
                 order'd
                 to
                 be
                 bought
                 at
                 Amsterdam
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 be
                 brought
                 to
                 the
                 Port
                 from
                 whence
                 we
                 were
                 to
                 go
                 ,
                 being
                 partly
                 laden
                 with
                 Dutch
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 other
                 Commodities
                 ,
                 taken
                 up
                 at
                 Bayonne
                 ,
                 St.
                 Sebastian
                 ,
                 and
                 Bilboa
                 ,
                 bought
                 in
                 gross
                 at
                 a
                 Venture
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 Affair
                 I
                 was
                 employ'd
                 ,
                 having
                 undertaken
                 it
                 by
                 
                 Maleo's
                 Commission
                 .
              
               
                 During
                 these
                 Preparations
                 ,
                 and
                 while
                 we
                 waited
                 for
                 the
                 Dispatch
                 of
                 the
                 Grant
                 ,
                 that
                 had
                 been
                 promis'd
                 him
                 by
                 the
                 Council
                 of
                 Spain
                 ,
                 it
                 happen'd
                 that
                 the
                 Baron
                 of
                 Vateville
                 
                 being
                 in
                 haste
                 to
                 go
                 into
                 England
                 ,
                 in
                 Quality
                 of
                 Ambassador
                 from
                 his
                 Catholick
                 Majesty
                 ;
                 and
                 having
                 Orders
                 to
                 make
                 use
                 of
                 the
                 first
                 Ship
                 that
                 was
                 ready
                 to
                 Sail
                 ,
                 took
                 
                 Maleo's
                 Vessel
                 ;
                 which
                 ,
                 yet
                 serv'd
                 only
                 to
                 carry
                 his
                 Baggage
                 ,
                 the
                 King
                 of
                 Great
                 Britain
                 having
                 sent
                 him
                 a
                 Frigat
                 at
                 the
                 same
                 time
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 he
                 cross'd
                 the
                 Sea.
                 During
                 the
                 Stay
                 ,
                 which
                 Maleo
                 was
                 oblig'd
                 to
                 make
                 in
                 England
                 ,
                 he
                 made
                 new
                 Provision
                 for
                 his
                 Voyage
                 to
                 the
                 Indies
                 ;
                 and
                 seeing
                 his
                 Grant
                 was
                 not
                 yet
                 sent
                 him
                 ,
                 he
                 thought
                 it
                 expedient
                 to
                 take
                 a
                 Commission
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 Baron
                 of
                 Vateville
                 ,
                 as
                 Captain-General
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Guipuscoa
                 ,
                 in
                 my
                 Name
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 of
                 
                   Pascoal
                   Hiriarte
                
                 ,
                 commanding
                 his
                 Ship
                 to
                 go
                 in
                 pursuit
                 of
                 the
                 Portuguese
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 Coast
                 of
                 Brezil
                 ;
                 that
                 this
                 might
                 serve
                 us
                 for
                 a
                 Pretext
                 ,
                 to
                 go
                 into
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Plata
                 .
                 Being
                 fortified
                 with
                 this
                 Order
                 ,
                 we
                 embark'd
                 ,
                 and
                 having
                 stopp'd
                 at
                 
                   Havre
                   de
                   Grace
                
                 to
                 set
                 N
                 —
                 ashoar
                 ,
                 who
                 thought
                 good
                 to
                 return
                 to
                 Madrid
                 ,
                 to
                 solicite
                 a
                 Commission
                 also
                 from
                 the
                 Council
                 of
                 Spain
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 Two
                 Vessels
                 ,
                 with
                 which
                 we
                 agreed
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 should
                 come
                 and
                 joyn
                 us
                 at
                 Buenos-Ayres
                 ;
                 we
                 continued
                 our
                 Course
                 ,
                 and
                 after
                 many
                 cross
                 Winds
                 ,
                 we
                 arriv'd
                 in
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 
                   Plata
                   :
                
                 .
                 As
                 we
                 enter'd
                 into
                 it
                 ,
                 we
                 met
                 Two
                 Dutch
                 Vessels
                 that
                 came
                 from
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ;
                 the
                 Captains
                 of
                 which
                 inform'd
                 
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 one
                 of
                 'em
                 could
                 by
                 no
                 means
                 obtain
                 leave
                 to
                 Trade
                 there
                 ;
                 but
                 that
                 the
                 other
                 Arriving
                 there
                 before
                 him
                 ,
                 in
                 a
                 conjuncture
                 when
                 the
                 Government
                 was
                 oblig'd
                 to
                 send
                 a
                 very
                 important
                 Message
                 in
                 all
                 haste
                 to
                 his
                 Catholick
                 Majesty
                 ,
                 relating
                 to
                 his
                 Service
                 ,
                 was
                 so
                 happy
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 promise
                 he
                 made
                 of
                 taking
                 the
                 Courrier
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 order'd
                 for
                 Spain
                 on
                 board
                 him
                 ,
                 as
                 to
                 find
                 means
                 of
                 disposing
                 of
                 all
                 his
                 Goods
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 bringing
                 away
                 a
                 very
                 Rich
                 Cargo
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 he
                 spake
                 the
                 very
                 Truth
                 ;
                 for
                 he
                 had
                 the
                 prudence
                 before
                 he
                 came
                 to
                 the
                 Port
                 ,
                 to
                 take
                 out
                 his
                 richest
                 Goods
                 ,
                 and
                 leave
                 'em
                 in
                 an
                 Island
                 below
                 ,
                 and
                 only
                 reserv'd
                 those
                 of
                 the
                 greatest
                 bulk
                 to
                 be
                 expos'd
                 to
                 the
                 View
                 of
                 the
                 Officers
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 he
                 had
                 made
                 a
                 false
                 Envois
                 at
                 the
                 price
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 separate
                 from
                 the
                 general
                 one
                 ,
                 and
                 had
                 made
                 the
                 Value
                 of
                 his
                 Cargo
                 to
                 amount
                 to
                 270000
                 Crowns
                 .
                 He
                 agreed
                 with
                 the
                 Governor
                 to
                 leave
                 these
                 Goods
                 with
                 him
                 ,
                 provided
                 he
                 would
                 give
                 him
                 for
                 'em
                 22000
                 Hides
                 at
                 a
                 Crown
                 apiece
                 ,
                 12000
                 pound
                 of
                 Vigogne
                 Wool
                 at
                 4
                 
                   Livers
                   10
                   Sous
                   per
                
                 Pound
                 ,
                 ane
                 30000
                 Crowns
                 in
                 Silver
                 to
                 pay
                 the
                 Charges
                 of
                 Equipping
                 his
                 Ship
                 ;
                 which
                 was
                 perform'd
                 accordingly
                 .
                 But
                 under
                 the
                 pretence
                 of
                 his
                 Bargain
                 ,
                 and
                 while
                 the
                 Leather
                 was
                 Loading
                 in
                 the
                 Vessel
                 ,
                 the
                 Captain
                 under-hand
                 sold
                 his
                 Richest
                 Commodities
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 for
                 the
                 Value
                 of
                 'em
                 which
                 amounted
                 to
                 100000
                 Crowns
                 ,
                 he
                 got
                 at
                 least
                 400000.
                 
                 Thus
                 the
                 Captain
                 of
                 the
                 Ship
                 and
                 the
                 Governor
                 both
                 made
                 a
                 great
                 Advantage
                 ;
                 but
                 this
                 Governor
                 whose
                 Name
                 is
                 
                   Don
                   Alonza
                   de
                   Mercado
                
                 and
                 
                   de
                   Villacorta
                
                 ,
                 being
                 a
                 very
                 disinterested
                 Man
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 at
                 all
                 greedy
                 of
                 Money
                 ,
                 declar'd
                 that
                 the
                 Profit
                 of
                 this
                 business
                 was
                 for
                 the
                 King
                 his
                 Master
                 ,
                 and
                 gave
                 him
                 advice
                 of
                 it
                 by
                 this
                 Courrier
                 .
              
               
                 Being
                 separated
                 from
                 these
                 Vessels
                 ,
                 we
                 came
                 to
                 an
                 Anchor
                 before
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ;
                 but
                 for
                 all
                 the
                 Instances
                 and
                 Offers
                 we
                 could
                 make
                 one
                 time
                 after
                 another
                 to
                 this
                 Governor
                 ,
                 we
                 could
                 never
                 obtain
                 his
                 Permission
                 to
                 put
                 our
                 Goods
                 ashore
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 expose
                 'em
                 to
                 Sale
                 to
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 the
                 Place
                 ;
                 because
                 we
                 had
                 no
                 Licence
                 for
                 it
                 from
                 Spain
                 .
                 He
                 only
                 consented
                 to
                 let
                 us
                 go
                 into
                 the
                 City
                 from
                 time
                 to
                 time
                 to
                 procure
                 Victuals
                 for
                 our
                 Men
                 ,
                 and
                 such
                 other
                 Necessaries
                 as
                 we
                 wanted
                 .
                 He
                 treated
                 us
                 with
                 this
                 Rigour
                 for
                 Eleven
                 Months
                 ,
                 after
                 which
                 there
                 happen'd
                 an
                 Occasion
                 which
                 oblig'd
                 him
                 to
                 use
                 us
                 better
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 enter
                 into
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 an
                 Accommodation
                 with
                 us
                 .
                 There
                 was
                 another
                 Spanish
                 Ship
                 in
                 the
                 Port
                 ,
                 the
                 same
                 that
                 a
                 Year
                 before
                 had
                 brought
                 Troops
                 and
                 Arms
                 from
                 Spain
                 ,
                 to
                 reinforce
                 the
                 Garisons
                 of
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 Chili
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 I
                 
                 have
                 spoken
                 above
                 ;
                 which
                 contin'd
                 here
                 all
                 this
                 time
                 upon
                 her
                 own
                 private
                 business
                 ,
                 but
                 the
                 Captain
                 that
                 Commanded
                 her
                 could
                 not
                 manage
                 his
                 Affairs
                 with
                 so
                 much
                 secrecy
                 ,
                 but
                 it
                 came
                 to
                 the
                 Governor's
                 Ear
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 design'd
                 in
                 prejudice
                 of
                 the
                 Prohibition
                 that
                 was
                 made
                 ,
                 to
                 carry
                 away
                 a
                 great
                 quantity
                 of
                 Silver
                 ,
                 and
                 indeed
                 he
                 seiz'd
                 on
                 a
                 Sum
                 of
                 113000
                 Crowns
                 that
                 was
                 just
                 ready
                 to
                 be
                 carry'd
                 of
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 the
                 Captain
                 could
                 have
                 no
                 restitution
                 made
                 ;
                 and
                 fearing
                 a
                 greater
                 disapointment
                 ,
                 namely
                 that
                 he
                 should
                 be
                 seiz'd
                 ,
                 he
                 set
                 Sail
                 to
                 return
                 into
                 Spain
                 ,
                 without
                 waiting
                 for
                 any
                 Letters
                 for
                 his
                 Catholick
                 Majesty
                 ,
                 with
                 which
                 the
                 Gouernor
                 would
                 have
                 intrusted
                 him
                 ,
                 together
                 with
                 the
                 Information
                 he
                 had
                 receiv'd
                 of
                 the
                 Intelligence
                 the
                 Dutch
                 had
                 gotten
                 in
                 the
                 Country
                 ,
                 which
                 he
                 had
                 a
                 mind
                 to
                 send
                 into
                 Spain
                 with
                 all
                 speed
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 some
                 Persons
                 whom
                 he
                 had
                 seiz'd
                 ,
                 that
                 were
                 guilty
                 of
                 holding
                 this
                 Correspondence
                 with
                 the
                 Dutch
                 ,
                 among
                 whom
                 there
                 was
                 a
                 Captain
                 ,
                 nam'd
                 
                   Alberto
                   Janson
                
                 ,
                 a
                 
                 Dutch-man
                 .
                 The
                 flight
                 of
                 this
                 Spanish
                 Vessel
                 therefore
                 oblig'd
                 the
                 Governor
                 to
                 alter
                 his
                 carriage
                 toward
                 us
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 facilitate
                 the
                 Return
                 of
                 our
                 Vessel
                 ,
                 which
                 he
                 thought
                 good
                 to
                 make
                 use
                 of
                 ,
                 for
                 want
                 of
                 another
                 to
                 carry
                 his
                 Letters
                 and
                 Prisoners
                 into
                 Spain
                 ;
                 upon
                 condition
                 we
                 would
                 take
                 upon
                 us
                 
                 this
                 Charge
                 ,
                 he
                 suffer'd
                 us
                 after
                 a
                 tacite
                 manner
                 to
                 do
                 our
                 business
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 carry
                 off
                 4000
                 Hides
                 ;
                 but
                 we
                 having
                 great
                 Acquaintance
                 with
                 the
                 Merchants
                 of
                 the
                 Place
                 ,
                 manag'd
                 our
                 Affairs
                 so
                 well
                 ,
                 that
                 under
                 the
                 Umbrage
                 of
                 this
                 permission
                 ,
                 we
                 sold
                 all
                 our
                 Goods
                 ,
                 and
                 brought
                 away
                 a
                 Rich
                 Cargo
                 ,
                 in
                 Silver
                 ,
                 Hides
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Commodities
                 ,
                 after
                 which
                 without
                 loosing
                 any
                 time
                 we
                 took
                 our
                 Course
                 for
                 Spain
                 .
              
               
                 At
                 our
                 Arrival
                 in
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Corunna
                 in
                 Gallicia
                 ,
                 we
                 receiv'd
                 Advice
                 by
                 the
                 Letters
                 which
                 N
                 —
                 sent
                 us
                 to
                 the
                 Ports
                 upon
                 all
                 the
                 Coasts
                 ,
                 that
                 there
                 was
                 an
                 Order
                 from
                 the
                 King
                 of
                 Spain
                 to
                 seize
                 us
                 at
                 our
                 return
                 ,
                 because
                 we
                 had
                 been
                 at
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 without
                 leave
                 .
                 Upon
                 this
                 we
                 resolv'd
                 (
                 after
                 we
                 had
                 sent
                 the
                 Letters
                 and
                 Prisoners
                 ,
                 that
                 were
                 committed
                 to
                 our
                 Charge
                 to
                 the
                 Governor
                 of
                 Corunna
                 by
                 the
                 hand
                 of
                 the
                 Sergeant
                 Major
                 of
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ,
                 who
                 came
                 about
                 the
                 Affairs
                 of
                 that
                 Country
                 in
                 our
                 Vessel
                 )
                 to
                 pass
                 out
                 of
                 that
                 River
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 go
                 6
                 Leagnes
                 from
                 thence
                 into
                 the
                 Road
                 of
                 Barias
                 ,
                 where
                 I
                 found
                 a
                 small
                 Vessel
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 I
                 loaded
                 the
                 greatest
                 part
                 of
                 what
                 I
                 had
                 on
                 my
                 own
                 account
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 of
                 my
                 Friends
                 .
                 The
                 Governor
                 of
                 Corunna
                 receiving
                 advice
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 dispatch'd
                 a
                 Hoy
                 after
                 me
                 to
                 stop
                 me
                 ,
                 but
                 I
                 us'd
                 that
                 precaution
                 and
                 diligence
                 ,
                 that
                 this
                 Hoy
                 could
                 never
                 
                 come
                 up
                 with
                 me
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 I
                 happily
                 arriv'd
                 in
                 France
                 at
                 the
                 Port
                 of
                 Socca
                 ,
                 where
                 I
                 by
                 this
                 means
                 sav'd
                 the
                 fruit
                 of
                 my
                 Labours
                 and
                 long
                 Voyage
                 .
                 The
                 great
                 Ship
                 which
                 I
                 left
                 in
                 the
                 Road
                 of
                 Barias
                 had
                 not
                 so
                 favourable
                 a
                 Lot
                 ,
                 and
                 one
                 may
                 say
                 ,
                 was
                 ship-wrack'd
                 at
                 the
                 very
                 Port
                 ;
                 for
                 having
                 left
                 the
                 Road
                 of
                 Barias
                 ,
                 to
                 get
                 speedily
                 to
                 that
                 of
                 Santonge
                 ,
                 to
                 secure
                 all
                 the
                 Goods
                 she
                 had
                 on
                 board
                 ,
                 except
                 4000
                 Hides
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 her
                 Bill
                 of
                 Lading
                 gave
                 an
                 account
                 ,
                 and
                 having
                 begun
                 to
                 put
                 600
                 Hides
                 into
                 a
                 Dutch
                 Vessel
                 that
                 she
                 met
                 there
                 ,
                 the
                 bad
                 Weather
                 constrain'd
                 her
                 to
                 put
                 in
                 at
                 the
                 Port
                 from
                 whence
                 she
                 first
                 went
                 out
                 ,
                 where
                 she
                 was
                 Confiscated
                 with
                 all
                 her
                 Cargo
                 for
                 the
                 use
                 of
                 the
                 King
                 of
                 Spain
                 ,
                 under
                 the
                 pretence
                 before
                 spoken
                 of
                 ,
                 that
                 she
                 had
                 not
                 the
                 Permission
                 of
                 his
                 Catholick
                 Majesty
                 for
                 her
                 Voyage
                 .
              
               
                 While
                 these
                 things
                 were
                 transacting
                 ,
                 the
                 Sergeant
                 Major
                 of
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 Arriv'd
                 at
                 Madrid
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 King
                 of
                 Spain
                 having
                 Caused
                 the
                 Informations
                 he
                 brought
                 to
                 be
                 examin'd
                 ,
                 which
                 principally
                 insisted
                 upon
                 the
                 necessity
                 there
                 was
                 of
                 sending
                 new
                 Recruits
                 of
                 Men
                 and
                 Ammunition
                 ,
                 to
                 augment
                 the
                 Carisons
                 of
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 Chili
                 ,
                 the
                 better
                 to
                 secure
                 the
                 Country
                 against
                 the
                 Enterprizes
                 of
                 Strangers
                 ,
                 and
                 also
                 from
                 the
                 attempt
                 of
                 the
                 Savages
                 of
                 Chili
                 ,
                 
                 immediately
                 orderd
                 Three
                 Vessels
                 to
                 be
                 Equipp'd
                 for
                 this
                 purpose
                 ,
                 the
                 Command
                 of
                 which
                 was
                 given
                 to
                 N
                 —
                 .
                 There
                 was
                 good
                 store
                 of
                 Ammunition
                 Embark'd
                 in
                 'em
                 ,
                 but
                 for
                 Recruits
                 of
                 Souldiers
                 ,
                 there
                 were
                 but
                 300
                 Men
                 ,
                 of
                 whom
                 the
                 greatest
                 part
                 were
                 sent
                 into
                 Chili
                 .
                 In
                 the
                 same
                 Vessel
                 there
                 were
                 Lawyers
                 sent
                 ,
                 to
                 form
                 a
                 Court
                 of
                 Common-Justice
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 call
                 an
                 Audience
                 ,
                 at
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 ,
                 where
                 there
                 were
                 only
                 some
                 Officers
                 for
                 the
                 Decisions
                 of
                 Petty
                 Matters
                 before
                 ,
                 the
                 Greater
                 Causes
                 being
                 remitted
                 to
                 the
                 Audience
                 that
                 is
                 Established
                 at
                 Chaquisaca
                 ,
                 otherwise
                 call'd
                 
                   la
                   Plata
                
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 
                   Los
                   Charcas
                
                 ,
                 500
                 Leagues
                 from
                 
                   Buenos
                   Ayres
                
                 .
              
               
                 When
                 N
                 —
                 return'd
                 from
                 this
                 Voyage
                 ,
                 he
                 came
                 to
                 Oyarson
                 in
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Guipuscoa
                 his
                 Native
                 Country
                 ,
                 from
                 whence
                 he
                 sent
                 me
                 an
                 account
                 of
                 himself
                 ,
                 and
                 we
                 agreed
                 to
                 have
                 a
                 secret
                 Enterview
                 upon
                 the
                 Frontiers
                 ;
                 accordingly
                 we
                 met
                 ,
                 and
                 gave
                 one
                 another
                 an
                 account
                 of
                 the
                 Affairs
                 in
                 which
                 we
                 were
                 both
                 concern'd
                 ;
                 and
                 by
                 this
                 account
                 we
                 found
                 there
                 were
                 about
                 60000
                 Livers
                 due
                 from
                 him
                 to
                 me
                 ,
                 which
                 he
                 has
                 not
                 yet
                 paid
                 .
              
            
             
               FINIS
               .
            
          
        
      
       
         
           
             
             
             
               A
               JOURNAL
               OF
               THE
               TRAVELS
               OF
               JOHN
               GRILLET
               ,
               AND
               FRANCIS
               BECHAMEL
               INTO
               GVIANA
               ,
               In
               the
               Year
               ,
               1674.
               
            
             
               IN
               Order
               to
               Discover
               the
               Great
               Lake
               of
               PARIMA
               ,
               and
               the
               many
               Cities
               said
               to
               be
               situated
               on
               its
               Banks
               ,
               and
               reputed
               the
               Richest
               in
               the
               WORLD
               .
            
             
               LONDON
               :
               
                 Printed
                 for
              
               Samuel
               Buckley
               .
               1698.
               
            
          
           
             
             
             
               A
               LETTER
               written
               from
               the
               Island
               of
               Cayenne
               ,
               in
               the
               Month
               of
               September
               ,
               1674.
               
            
             
               
                 
                   Cayenne
                   ,
                   Sept.
                   2.
                   1674.
                   
                
              
               
                 Reverend
                 Father
                 ,
              
            
             
               THE
               Discovery
               that
               I
               and
               Father
               Bechamel
               ,
               have
               made
               of
               divers
               Savage
               Nations
               on
               the
               Continent
               of
               Guiana
               ,
               near
               the
               Island
               of
               Cayenne
               ,
               obliges
               me
               to
               draw
               up
               a
               brief
               Relation
               of
               our
               Voyage
               ,
               and
               to
               present
               it
               to
               your
               Reverence
               ,
               that
               you
               may
               know
               what
               Employment
               we
               may
               have
               here
               ,
               and
               how
               many
               Missionaries
               may
               find
               a
               fit
               Occasion
               for
               the
               Exercise
               of
               their
               Zeal
               .
               If
               I
               had
               had
               some
               Companions
               whom
               I
               might
               have
               left
               with
               the
               Nouragues
               and
               the
               Acoquas
               ,
               I
               should
               have
               pierc'd
               much
               farther
               into
               the
               Country
               ;
               but
               the
               Nouragues
               who
               were
               our
               Guides
               ,
               not
               daring
               to
               advance
               farther
               into
               the
               Country
               of
               the
               Acoquas
               ,
               to
               retain
               the
               good
               will
               of
               'em
               both
               ,
               we
               should
               have
               left
               a
               Missionary
               in
               each
               of
               these
               Nations
               ,
               that
               the
               Acoquas
               might
               have
               conducted
               us
               to
               their
               Friends
               ,
               who
               (
               as
               far
               as
               I
               can
               conjecture
               )
               reach
               quite
               to
               the
               
                 Equinoctial
                 Line
              
               .
               We
               might
               also
               have
               pass'd
               to
               the
               West
               of
               the
               River
               Maroni
               ,
               and
               have
               enter'd
               into
               an
               Alliance
               with
               the
               Nations
               that
               extend
               to
               the
               River
               of
               Surinam
               ,
               upon
               which
               the
               Dutch
               have
               planted
               (
               1
               )
               a
               Colony
               :
               
               but
               since
               we
               have
               confin'd
               our selves
               to
               those
               Countries
               that
               are
               from
               Three
               Degrees
               of
               Northern
               Latitude
               to
               the
               
                 Equinoctial
                 Line
              
               ,
               we
               need
               not
               be
               afraid
               that
               the
               People
               of
               any
               European
               Nation
               will
               trouble
               us
               in
               our
               Missions
               ,
               because
               there
               's
               no
               gain
               to
               be
               made
               by
               'em
               ;
               besides
               ,
               that
               we
               run
               the
               risque
               of
               being
               Massacred
               by
               the
               Natives
               .
               'T
               is
               from
               your
               Reverence
               that
               we
               expect
               Support
               and
               Assistance
               so
               far
               as
               you
               are
               capable
               ,
               and
               shall
               think
               convenient
               in
               sending
               us
               Missionaries
               of
               a
               Vigorous
               Constitution
               ,
               of
               great
               Vertue
               ,
               and
               of
               a
               Disposition
               ready
               to
               suffer
               hardships
               ;
               because
               in
               these
               parts
               there
               can
               little
               or
               no
               Accommodations
               be
               brought
               to
               relieve
               them
               in
               case
               of
               Sickness
               ;
               for
               the
               less
               one
               carries
               thither
               so
               much
               the
               better
               ;
               besides
               that
               the
               Ignorance
               and
               Barbarity
               of
               those
               People
               always
               give
               a
               Missionary
               just
               occasion
               to
               fear
               ,
               that
               they
               take
               up
               mischievous
               Resolutions
               against
               him
               at
               the
               very
               first
               shadow
               of
               dissatisfaction
               they
               receive
               .
               I
               expect
               here
               a
               good
               number
               of
               Missionaries
               to
               dispose
               up
               and
               down
               this
               vast
               Country
               ;
               and
               I
               hope
               your
               Reverence
               will
               not
               refuse
               this
               Request
               ;
               which
               obliges
               me
               particularly
               to
               recommend
               my self
               to
               your
               good
               Prayers
               ,
               who
               am
            
             
               
                 Reverend
                 Father
                 ,
              
               
                 Your
                 most
                 Humble
                 ,
                 and
                 most
                 Obedient
                 Servant
                 in
                 our
                 Lord
                 ,
                 
                   John
                   Grillet
                
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 Society
                 of
                 JESVS
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             
             
               A
               JOURNAL
               OF
               THE
               TRAVELS
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               THE
               Reverend
               Father
               
                 Francis
                 Mercier
              
               having
               been
               sent
               from
               France
               ,
               in
               Quality
               of
               Visitor
               of
               the
               Missions
               of
               our
               Society
               ,
               both
               in
               the
               Islands
               ,
               and
               Continent
               of
               the
               Southern
               America
               ,
               by
               the
               Reverend
               Father
               ,
               
                 John
                 Pinet
              
               ,
               Provincial
               of
               the
               Jesuits
               in
               France
               ;
               with
               the
               Reverend
               Father
               
                 Gerard
                 Brion
              
               ,
               Superior-General
               of
               the
               said
               Missions
               ,
               and
               Father
               Mace
               ,
               and
               Father
               Alarole
               ;
               he
               arriv'd
               in
               the
               Island
               of
               Cayenne
               the
               21st
               of
               December
               ,
               1673.
               and
               parted
               thence
               Ten
               Days
               after
               :
               During
               his
               Stay
               there
               ,
               he
               regulated
               divers
               Affairs
               ,
               as
               well
               Temporal
               as
               Spiritual
               ;
               and
               among
               other
               Things
               ,
               finding
               we
               had
               yet
               no
               Knowledge
               of
               any
               other
               People
               ,
               but
               the
               Galibis
               ,
               and
               Aracarels
               ,
               our
               Neighbours
               ,
               who
               dwell
               near
               the
               Sea
               ,
               and
               among
               whom
               
               the
               Fathers
               of
               our
               Society
               employ'd
               their
               Talents
               ,
               with
               abundance
               of
               Zeal
               ;
               he
               resolv'd
               to
               attempt
               a
               Discovery
               of
               those
               Nations
               that
               lie
               remote
               from
               the
               Sea.
               It
               was
               my
               Happiness
               to
               be
               chosen
               for
               so
               pious
               a
               Work
               ;
               and
               I
               was
               particularly
               instructed
               by
               my
               Orders
               ,
               to
               discover
               the
               Acoquas
               ,
               a
               very
               populous
               Nation
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               Report
               ,
               some
               Nouragues
               ,
               who
               frequent
               the
               Galibis
               ,
               gave
               us
               ;
               withal
               ,
               telling
               us
               ,
               they
               were
               a
               Warlike
               People
               ,
               and
               us'd
               to
               eat
               Men.
               One
               of
               these
               Nouragues
               being
               ask'd
               ,
               Two
               Months
               before
               the
               Arrival
               of
               the
               Reverend
               Father-Visitor
               ,
               
                 If
                 it
                 were
                 true
                 ,
                 that
                 the
              
               Acoquas
               
                 us'd
                 to
                 eat
                 their
                 Enemies
              
               ,
               answer'd
               ,
               
                 That
                 he
                 came
                 from
                 'em
                 Four
                 Months
                 ago
                 ,
                 and
                 then
                 they
                 had
                 just
                 made
                 an
                 end
                 of
                 boiling
                 in
                 their
                 Pots
                 ,
                 and
                 eating
                 a
                 Nation
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 had
                 destroy'd
                 .
              
               I
               desir'd
               the
               Reverend
               Father
               ,
               
                 Francis
                 Bechamel
              
               ,
               for
               my
               Comrade
               ,
               who
               has
               a
               great
               Deal
               of
               Zeal
               for
               these
               Missions
               ,
               and
               has
               an
               extraordinary
               Faculty
               of
               learning
               strange
               Languages
               ;
               besides
               that
               ,
               he
               already
               understood
               the
               Tongue
               of
               the
               Galibis
               ,
               which
               many
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               also
               speak
               ;
               some
               of
               whom
               we
               were
               oblig'd
               to
               take
               for
               our
               Guides
               ,
               to
               conduct
               us
               to
               the
               Acoquas
               ;
               for
               we
               yet
               know
               no
               other
               Way
               to
               come
               at
               'em
               ,
               but
               through
               the
               Country
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               :
               And
               Father
               Bechamel
               took
               care
               to
               provide
               some
               
               Galibis
               ,
               to
               conduct
               us
               to
               the
               Nouragues
               ,
               who
               dwell
               above
               the
               Source
               of
               the
               River
               (
               2
               )
               Vvia
               ,
               and
               to
               buy
               some
               Cassave
               and
               Paste
               of
               (
               3
               )
               Ovicou
               for
               his
               Voyage
               ,
               which
               we
               counted
               would
               be
               for
               about
               Ten
               Days
               .
            
             
               This
               Father
               having
               provided
               all
               Necessaries
               ;
               namely
               ,
               Three
               Galibis
               ,
               some
               Cassave
               ,
               and
               Paste
               of
               Ovicou
               ,
               in
               hopes
               of
               finding
               by
               the
               good
               Providence
               of
               God
               ,
               either
               Fish
               ,
               or
               Venison
               ,
               with
               the
               Assistance
               of
               our
               Indians
               ,
               we
               left
               the
               Port
               of
               Cayenne
               the
               25th
               of
               January
               ,
               taking
               our
               Leave
               of
               the
               Reverend
               Father
               Brion
               ,
               Superior-General
               ,
               and
               Father
               Mace
               ,
               and
               Father
               Bechet
               ;
               but
               particularly
               of
               the
               (
               4
               )
               
                 Chevalier
                 de
                 Lezy
              
               ,
               our
               Governour
               ,
               who
               did
               us
               the
               Honour
               to
               conduct
               us
               together
               ,
               with
               the
               Fathers
               of
               our
               Society
               ,
               quite
               to
               the
               Canoo
               ,
               in
               which
               we
               embark'd
               in
               the
               Afternoon
               ,
               having
               our
               Fisherman
               to
               steer
               the
               Canoo
               ,
               and
               Three
               
                 Indian
                 Galibis
              
               to
               row
               with
               our
               Two
               Servants
               .
               All
               of
               us
               were
               of
               Opinion
               ,
               That
               our
               Canoo
               was
               too
               small
               ,
               and
               indeed
               it
               would
               have
               prov'd
               so
               ,
               if
               we
               had
               embarked
               at
               the
               coming
               up
               of
               the
               Tide
               ,
               for
               at
               that
               time
               the
               Waves
               are
               very
               rough
               near
               the
               Shoar
               ;
               but
               we
               avoided
               this
               Danger
               by
               embarking
               a
               little
               before
               the
               Tide
               came
               up
               ;
               so
               that
               we
               were
               out
               of
               all
               danger
               when
               the
               Tide
               began
               to
               drive
               us
               into
               the
               River
               ,
               which
               gives
               its
               Name
               to
               this
               Island
               ;
               besides
               ,
               
               our
               Canoo
               being
               very
               light
               ,
               and
               not
               easie
               to
               be
               turn'd
               ,
               was
               very
               fit
               to
               get
               clear
               of
               several
               little
               Falls
               that
               are
               in
               the
               River
               Vvia
               ,
               which
               we
               were
               to
               pass
               almost
               quite
               through
               ,
               'till
               we
               came
               to
               the
               Entrance
               of
               a
               lesser
               River
               ,
               that
               let
               us
               into
               the
               Country
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               ,
               the
               first
               Nation
               that
               we
               were
               willing
               to
               be
               acquainted
               with
               ,
               that
               by
               their
               Means
               we
               might
               find
               a
               Passage
               to
               the
               Acoquas
               .
               Our
               Way
               was
               between
               the
               Island
               of
               Cayenne
               ,
               and
               the
               main
               Land
               ;
               and
               in
               the
               Evening
               we
               arriv'd
               at
               the
               House
               of
               one
               Deslauriers
               ,
               that
               had
               settled
               himself
               there
               ;
               we
               continued
               with
               him
               for
               a
               certain
               Reason
               ,
               all
               the
               next
               Day
               ,
               being
               the
               26th
               of
               January
               .
               Since
               God
               was
               pleas'd
               to
               protect
               and
               lead
               us
               by
               the
               Hand
               ,
               as
               it
               were
               in
               all
               this
               Voyage
               ;
               we
               must
               confess
               ,
               that
               it
               was
               he
               who
               inspir'd
               us
               with
               the
               Resolution
               to
               begin
               it
               by
               the
               River
               Vvia
               ;
               for
               we
               knew
               but
               two
               Ways
               of
               entering
               into
               the
               Country
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               ,
               one
               by
               the
               River
               Vvia
               ,
               and
               t'other
               by
               the
               River
               (
               5
               )
               Aproague
               ;
               this
               last
               is
               very
               difficult
               ,
               because
               the
               Falls
               of
               the
               Water
               are
               so
               great
               ,
               that
               the
               Sapayes
               ,
               and
               Galibis
               ,
               that
               live
               at
               the
               Mouth
               of
               this
               River
               ,
               require
               a
               very
               large
               Reward
               to
               perform
               this
               Voyage
               ;
               and
               indeed
               ,
               are
               the
               more
               unwilling
               to
               undertake
               it
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               afraid
               of
               those
               Nouragues
               ,
               that
               eat
               Humane
               Flesh
               :
               So
               ,
               that
               when
               any
               of
               'em
               
               go
               into
               those
               Parts
               ,
               they
               stay
               there
               as
               little
               time
               as
               they
               can
               :
               Therefore
               it
               is
               scarce
               possible
               to
               go
               this
               Way
               ,
               and
               if
               we
               had
               gone
               it
               ,
               we
               should
               have
               been
               altogether
               unacquainted
               with
               those
               Indians
               ,
               that
               dwell
               on
               the
               Coasts
               of
               the
               River
               Vvia
               ,
               and
               with
               the
               Nouragues
               that
               dwell
               above
               the
               Source
               of
               it
               .
               But
               without
               knowing
               any
               thing
               of
               this
               before
               ,
               we
               chose
               to
               pass
               into
               the
               Country
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               ,
               by
               the
               Vvia
               ,
               and
               have
               this
               Way
               visited
               that
               whole
               Nation
               .
            
             
               The
               27th
               of
               January
               we
               left
               the
               Sieur
               Deslauriers
               somewhat
               late
               ,
               and
               therefore
               proceeded
               but
               a
               little
               way
               that
               Day
               :
               Our
               Galibis
               brought
               us
               into
               a
               Hut
               of
               the
               (
               6
               )
               Maprouanes
               ,
               as
               well
               to
               shelter
               us
               from
               a
               great
               Shower
               of
               Rain
               ,
               as
               to
               lodge
               us
               (
               7
               )
               there
               that
               Night
               .
               These
               Maprouanes
               are
               about
               Thirty
               in
               Number
               ,
               who
               retir'd
               from
               their
               Country
               ,
               near
               the
               River
               of
               Amazons
               ,
               to
               avoid
               the
               Persecution
               of
               the
               Portugese
               ,
               and
               of
               those
               Indians
               call'd
               the
               (
               8
               )
               Arianes
               ,
               who
               have
               almost
               extirpated
               that
               Nation
               :
               We
               found
               nothing
               there
               but
               Cassave
               and
               Ovicou
               ;
               and
               to
               the
               6th
               of
               February
               ,
               we
               had
               nothing
               but
               Cassave
               ,
               besides
               Two
               Fishes
               ,
               and
               a
               Couple
               of
               Fowls
               ,
               which
               the
               Galibis
               took
               ,
               (
               which
               serv'd
               us
               for
               Four
               small
               Meals
               )
               and
               a
               little
               Piece
               of
               Fish
               we
               met
               with
               at
               another
               Indian
               Cottage
               .
            
             
             
               The
               28th
               we
               arriv'd
               at
               a
               Mountain
               ,
               where
               a
               certain
               Galibi
               ,
               nam'd
               Maure
               ,
               dwells
               ;
               this
               is
               Twelve
               Leagues
               from
               the
               Mouth
               of
               the
               Vvia
               :
               And
               Two
               Leagues
               below
               this
               Mountain
               ,
               the
               Land
               upon
               the
               River
               ,
               which
               is
               hitherto
               very
               low
               ,
               and
               almost
               always
               overflow'd
               ,
               is
               a
               high
               ,
               fine
               Country
               ,
               as
               far
               as
               the
               Dwelling
               of
               the
               first
               Nouragues
               .
            
             
               The
               29th
               we
               lay
               in
               a
               Wood
               ,
               and
               so
               we
               did
               on
               the
               30th
               ,
               having
               pass'd
               by
               a
               Village
               of
               the
               
               Galibi's
               ,
               which
               contain'd
               but
               very
               few
               People
               ,
               to
               make
               the
               bigger
               Day
               's
               Journey
               .
            
             
               The
               31st
               we
               lodg'd
               in
               a
               
               Galibi's
               Cottage
               ,
               whose
               Family
               consisted
               of
               about
               Six
               or
               Seven
               ,
               but
               Three
               or
               Four
               of
               'em
               were
               absent
               .
            
             
               The
               First
               of
               February
               we
               pass'd
               the
               Night
               in
               the
               Woods
               ,
               and
               on
               the
               Second
               we
               lay
               at
               a
               
               Galibi's
               Cottage
               again
               ;
               and
               this
               was
               the
               poorest
               ,
               and
               most
               pitiful
               Hut
               that
               ever
               I
               saw
               among
               the
               Indians
               of
               this
               Country
               ;
               there
               was
               in
               it
               only
               one
               Man
               ,
               and
               his
               Wife
               and
               Children
               ,
               who
               had
               nothing
               at
               all
               that
               Day
               to
               sup
               on
               .
               One
               of
               their
               Children
               was
               much
               swell'd
               ,
               and
               in
               a
               languishing
               Condition
               ,
               with
               a
               continual
               Fever
               ,
               of
               which
               we
               thought
               it
               could
               never
               recover
               ;
               therefore
               Father
               Bechamel
               baptiz'd
               it
               ;
               and
               the
               Consolation
               this
               gave
               us
               sweeten'd
               all
               our
               past
               Hardships
               .
            
             
             
               The
               Third
               we
               went
               ashoar
               in
               the
               Country
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               ,
               after
               having
               this
               Day
               ,
               and
               the
               Day
               before
               pass'd
               Three
               Falls
               in
               the
               River
               Vvia
               ,
               and
               another
               in
               the
               River
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               ;
               but
               this
               was
               nothing
               in
               comparison
               of
               the
               Falls
               of
               Water
               we
               were
               to
               pass
               on
               the
               Rivers
               of
               Aproague
               and
               Camopi
               .
            
             
               And
               it
               was
               now
               time
               to
               land
               ,
               for
               our
               (
               9
               )
               Cassave
               would
               have
               been
               spent
               if
               we
               had
               had
               but
               a
               little
               farther
               to
               go
               in
               those
               great
               Desarts
               ,
               and
               vast
               Forests
               ,
               that
               are
               all
               along
               upon
               this
               River
               ;
               upon
               which
               there
               are
               no
               other
               Cottages
               but
               those
               I
               have
               been
               speaking
               of
               ,
               and
               those
               of
               some
               Galibis
               and
               Areacarets
               ,
               who
               live
               towards
               the
               Mouth
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               are
               in
               all
               about
               a
               Hundred
               or
               Sixscore
               Persons
               .
               This
               River
               winds
               very
               much
               ,
               and
               runs
               a
               Course
               of
               near
               Fifty
               Leagues
               .
            
             
               Our
               Galibis
               serv'd
               us
               in
               this
               Voyage
               with
               a
               great
               deal
               of
               Respect
               ,
               and
               gave
               us
               Access
               to
               the
               Chief
               of
               these
               first
               Nouragues
               ,
               to
               whom
               we
               presented
               a
               Hatchet
               ,
               to
               engage
               him
               to
               enter
               into
               an
               Alliance
               with
               us
               ;
               they
               did
               not
               remember
               ,
               that
               they
               had
               seen
               above
               One
               French
               Man
               before
               in
               their
               Country
               ;
               so
               that
               the
               Women
               and
               Girls
               ,
               who
               had
               never
               travell'd
               into
               the
               Country
               of
               the
               Galibis
               ,
               were
               mightily
               amaz'd
               at
               the
               Sight
               of
               us
               .
               If
               one
               might
               judge
               of
               the
               whole
               Nation
               
               by
               these
               People
               ,
               one
               might
               very
               well
               say
               ,
               the
               Nouragues
               are
               a
               very
               courteous
               and
               affable
               People
               .
               Some
               of
               'em
               could
               speak
               the
               Language
               of
               the
               Galibis
               very
               well
               ,
               and
               serv'd
               for
               our
               Interpreters
               .
               They
               did
               all
               they
               could
               to
               seek
               Provision
               ,
               to
               treat
               us
               well
               ;
               but
               being
               unsuccessful
               in
               their
               Hunting
               ,
               we
               had
               only
               Cassave
               ,
               and
               a
               little
               Meat
               at
               one
               of
               our
               Repasts
               ,
               but
               with
               great
               Demonstrations
               of
               their
               Kindness
               .
               We
               bought
               Cassave
               of
               'em
               for
               the
               Supply
               of
               the
               Men
               that
               belong
               to
               our
               Canoo
               ;
               and
               on
               the
               Sixth
               of
               February
               ,
               after
               the
               Galibis
               had
               been
               treated
               with
               a
               small
               Feast
               after
               the
               Fashion
               of
               the
               Country
               ,
               they
               parted
               from
               us
               at
               about
               Ten
               a
               Clock
               in
               the
               Morning
               .
            
             
               We
               also
               left
               this
               first
               Cottage
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               ,
               on
               the
               Seventh
               of
               February
               ,
               to
               go
               a
               Journey
               of
               Four
               and
               Twenty
               Leagues
               by
               Land
               ,
               over
               very
               rugged
               Mountains
               ;
               but
               went
               only
               half
               a
               League
               from
               thence
               to
               lodge
               that
               Night
               ,
               being
               attended
               with
               Two
               young
               Nouragues
               ,
               each
               of
               about
               Sixteen
               or
               Seventeen
               Years
               of
               Age
               ,
               who
               were
               to
               carry
               our
               Baggage
               ;
               here
               we
               were
               to
               take
               another
               Man
               ,
               who
               had
               promis'd
               to
               carry
               our
               Provision
               for
               us
               ,
               which
               consisted
               of
               Cassave
               ,
               and
               Paste
               of
               Ovicou
               :
               This
               Man's
               Wife
               ,
               in
               this
               Second
               Hut
               ,
               was
               ill
               of
               a
               Cancer
               in
               her
               Breast
               ,
               which
               so
               tormented
               her
               ,
               and
               had
               so
               exceedingly
               wasted
               her
               ,
               that
               
               seeing
               her
               under
               so
               terrible
               a
               Distemper
               ,
               without
               the
               Help
               of
               any
               Medicine
               ,
               we
               suppos'd
               she
               could
               not
               recover
               ,
               and
               that
               in
               Probability
               ,
               she
               would
               live
               morally
               the
               rest
               of
               her
               Days
               ;
               for
               these
               People
               endure
               their
               Pains
               and
               Hardships
               very
               patiently
               ,
               as
               we
               observ'd
               in
               all
               the
               Galibis
               ;
               therefore
               we
               resolv'd
               to
               baptize
               her
               :
               In
               order
               to
               this
               ,
               Father
               Bechamel
               took
               care
               to
               instruct
               her
               ,
               having
               already
               made
               some
               Improvement
               in
               the
               Language
               of
               this
               People
               ,
               and
               had
               likewise
               the
               Assistance
               of
               one
               of
               our
               young
               Nouragues
               ,
               who
               understood
               the
               Galibis
               Tongue
               .
               This
               poor
               sick
               Woman
               receiv'd
               his
               Instructions
               very
               well
               ,
               and
               was
               baptized
               ,
               which
               was
               an
               occasion
               of
               great
               Comfort
               to
               us
               .
            
             
               The
               Eighth
               ,
               having
               Bread
               and
               Paste
               of
               Ovicou
               enough
               to
               serve
               us
               Four
               Days
               ,
               we
               set
               forward
               with
               our
               Three
               Nouragues
               ,
               to
               perform
               our
               Journey
               of
               Four
               and
               Twenty
               Leagues
               ,
               over
               Mountains
               all
               the
               way
               ,
               which
               the
               Nouragues
               sometimes
               perform
               in
               a
               Day
               and
               a
               half
               ;
               but
               ordinarily
               in
               Two
               or
               Three
               Days
               ,
               when
               they
               have
               Women
               in
               their
               Company
               .
               One
               of
               our
               French
               Men
               of
               Cayenne
               ,
               that
               came
               thence
               on
               the
               27th
               of
               January
               ,
               follow'd
               us
               closely
               with
               Seven
               Galibis
               ,
               and
               overtook
               us
               where
               we
               lodg'd
               the
               Second
               Night
               ,
               who
               gave
               me
               a
               Letter
               from
               the
               Reverend
               Father
               Brion
               ,
               our
               Superior
               
               written
               the
               day
               he
               came
               away
               ,
               which
               gave
               us
               no
               small
               joy
               ,
               for
               it
               contain'd
               a
               great
               deal
               of
               Good
               Advice
               ,
               that
               might
               be
               serviceable
               to
               us
               in
               our
               Expedition
               .
            
             
               This
               
               French-Man
               was
               much
               fatigu'd
               with
               his
               Journey
               ,
               and
               sent
               his
               Indians
               before
               him
               the
               day
               following
               ,
               who
               in
               that
               one
               day
               being
               the
               Tenth
               of
               February
               ,
               went
               as
               much
               ground
               as
               we
               could
               do
               in
               a
               day
               and
               a
               half
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               difficulty
               of
               the
               ways
               .
               He
               having
               joyn'd
               himself
               to
               our
               Company
               ,
               and
               comparing
               our
               Nouragues
               with
               his
               Galibis
               ,
               found
               a
               great
               alteration
               ,
               and
               could
               not
               but
               admire
               the
               Meekness
               and
               Patience
               of
               these
               Three
               Indians
               ,
               but
               especially
               their
               Respect
               .
               They
               carry'd
               our
               Provisions
               ,
               yet
               they
               durst
               not
               take
               any
               without
               asking
               ,
               tho'
               we
               had
               often
               told
               'em
               that
               they
               might
               take
               of
               'em
               when
               they
               pleas'd
               .
               This
               day
               we
               passed
               the
               River
               Aratay
               ,
               which
               throws
               it self
               into
               the
               Aproague
               .
               The
               Aratay
               is
               a
               fine
               River
               ,
               which
               comes
               from
               a
               Country
               that
               is
               Situate
               between
               the
               Source
               of
               the
               River
               Vvia
               and
               the
               County
               of
               the
               Mercious
               ,
               which
               the
               Nouragues
               say
               is
               a
               space
               of
               Land
               that
               extends
               about
               Seven
               days
               Journey
               .
               We
               were
               forc'd
               to
               pass
               this
               River
               Aratay
               which
               is
               pretty
               wide
               and
               deep
               ,
               and
               the
               Stream
               of
               which
               is
               somewhat
               Rapid
               ,
               in
               a
               little
               Canoo
               ,
               in
               much
               danger
               of
               being
               cast
               away
               ,
               as
               this
               
               
               French-Man
               that
               joyn'd
               us
               happen'd
               to
               be
               ,
               when
               he
               repass'd
               it
               in
               his
               return
               ,
               where
               he
               lost
               what
               he
               carry'd
               with
               him
               ;
               which
               was
               all
               he
               had
               in
               the
               World.
               After
               this
               we
               lodg'd
               a
               third
               time
               in
               the
               Woods
               ,
               and
               on
               the
               Eleventh
               of
               February
               ,
               being
               very
               weary
               we
               about
               Noon
               Arriv'd
               at
               the
               Cottage
               of
               Imanon
               the
               Nourague
               a
               Famous
               (
               10
               )
               Piaye
               (
               or
               Physician
               )
               in
               all
               that
               Country
               ,
               where
               we
               found
               the
               Galibis
               that
               had
               advanc'd
               before
               us
               the
               preceding
               day
               .
               These
               Galibis
               mutinied
               against
               this
               poor
               
               French-Man
               ,
               and
               probably
               were
               the
               occasion
               of
               hindring
               the
               Nouragues
               of
               that
               place
               from
               selling
               any
               thing
               to
               him
               ;
               so
               that
               he
               lost
               his
               Journey
               .
               Nay
               he
               was
               oblig'd
               to
               entreat
               one
               of
               our
               Nourague
               Guides
               to
               carry
               part
               of
               his
               Iron
               Wares
               ,
               which
               he
               brought
               to
               trade
               with
               ,
               because
               these
               Galibis
               refus'd
               to
               help
               him
               .
               And
               there
               was
               no
               remedy
               for
               it
               but
               Patience
               ,
               since
               he
               was
               80
               Leagues
               from
               Cayenne
               ,
               in
               a
               Nation
               that
               had
               no
               Commerce
               with
               the
               French.
               
            
             
               We
               did
               not
               part
               with
               our
               Three
               Guides
               without
               regret
               ;
               but
               we
               could
               not
               detain
               'em
               ,
               because
               they
               were
               oblig'd
               to
               return
               for
               several
               good
               Reasons
               .
               The
               Principal
               of
               'em
               whose
               Name
               was
               Paratou
               ,
               told
               us
               ,
               for
               our
               comfort
               ,
               that
               in
               the
               place
               where
               we
               now
               were
               ,
               which
               they
               call
               Caraoribo
               ,
               from
               the
               Name
               of
               a
               little
               River
               that
               passes
               by
               it
               ,
               
               we
               should
               find
               a
               great
               many
               Paratous
               ,
               he
               meant
               a
               great
               many
               Nouragues
               ,
               as
               good
               humor'd
               as
               himself
               .
               But
               we
               found
               a
               great
               deal
               of
               difference
               in
               the
               Temper
               of
               those
               Guides
               we
               had
               from
               Caraoribo
               to
               the
               Acoquas
               ,
               and
               of
               those
               we
               had
               before
               .
            
             
               As
               soon
               as
               these
               had
               left
               us
               ,
               we
               enter'd
               into
               a
               good
               Correspondence
               with
               the
               Chief
               Camiati
               the
               Father
               of
               Imanon
               ,
               by
               presenting
               him
               with
               a
               Hatchet
               ;
               this
               is
               a
               very
               Famous
               Chief
               ,
               and
               the
               Principal
               one
               the
               Nouragues
               have
               ,
               and
               the
               next
               to
               him
               in
               Eminence
               ,
               is
               the
               Chief
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               of
               Vvia
               .
               This
               Camiati
               the
               day
               after
               our
               Arrival
               came
               to
               his
               Son's
               Cottage
               ,
               (
               for
               his
               own
               is
               upon
               the
               River
               Aproague
               )
               he
               may
               be
               about
               60
               Years
               of
               Age
               ,
               and
               seems
               to
               be
               still
               very
               Vigorous
               :
               His
               Countenace
               tho'
               lean
               has
               a
               Warlike
               Mien
               ,
               but
               withal
               he
               has
               a
               Savage
               Aspect
               ;
               his
               Humour
               is
               but
               very
               indifferent
               toward
               Strangers
               ,
               tho'
               mild
               enough
               toward
               his
               own
               People
               ,
               to
               whom
               according
               to
               the
               Fashion
               of
               the
               Country
               ,
               he
               every
               day
               gives
               the
               Good-morrow
               ,
               and
               the
               Good-night
               ,
               from
               the
               Oldest
               People
               to
               Children
               of
               Fifteen
               Years
               of
               Age.
               He
               promis'd
               us
               to
               conduct
               us
               quite
               to
               the
               Acoquas
               ,
               when
               his
               Canoo
               was
               made
               ,
               to
               whose
               Country
               he
               pretended
               he
               would
               go
               himself
               ,
               and
               desir'd
               but
               the
               space
               of
               Ten
               Days
               to
               finish
               this
               Canoo
               ;
               now
               tho'
               we
               knew
               well
               enough
               after
               what
               manner
               
               the
               Indians
               us'd
               to
               reckon
               ,
               who
               are
               often
               Three
               Months
               in
               doing
               what
               they
               might
               perform
               in
               the
               space
               of
               Ten
               Days
               :
               we
               resolv'd
               however
               to
               continue
               with
               him
               to
               have
               the
               advantage
               of
               being
               under
               his
               Protection
               ;
               and
               to
               perswade
               him
               ,
               if
               we
               should
               find
               him
               make
               too
               long
               a
               delay
               ,
               to
               borrow
               another
               Canoo
               ,
               that
               was
               at
               Five
               Days
               Journy
               distance
               from
               us
               ;
               and
               in
               the
               mean
               time
               to
               acquaint
               our selves
               with
               the
               Language
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               as
               much
               as
               we
               could
               ,
               which
               (
               as
               we
               were
               told
               )
               differ'd
               but
               little
               from
               that
               of
               the
               Acoquas
               and
               Mercious
               .
               The
               Language
               of
               the
               Galibis
               ,
               which
               some
               of
               us
               understood
               ,
               and
               which
               was
               very
               Familiar
               to
               Father
               Bechamel
               was
               some
               help
               to
               us
               on
               this
               Occasion
               .
               This
               Nouragues
               Tongue
               is
               not
               of
               an
               easie
               and
               soft
               Pronunciation
               like
               that
               of
               the
               Galibis
               ,
               but
               has
               a
               great
               number
               of
               Words
               that
               must
               be
               pronounc'd
               with
               very
               rough
               Aspirations
               ,
               others
               of
               'em
               can't
               be
               pronounc'd
               without
               shutting
               the
               Teeth
               ;
               at
               another
               time
               one
               must
               speak
               through
               the
               Nose
               ;
               and
               sometimes
               these
               Three
               difficulties
               all
               occur
               in
               the
               same
               Word
               .
            
             
               Father
               Bechamel
               immediately
               began
               to
               apply
               himself
               to
               the
               study
               of
               this
               Language
               ;
               and
               I
               made
               so
               much
               advantge
               of
               his
               Labour
               in
               which
               he
               succeeded
               to
               admiration
               ,
               that
               by
               means
               of
               the
               Galibis
               Language
               I
               made
               a
               small
               Discourse
               of
               the
               Creation
               
               of
               the
               World
               ;
               to
               make
               these
               People
               know
               something
               of
               their
               Creator
               .
               Imanon
               the
               Master
               of
               this
               Hut
               was
               the
               first
               that
               took
               delight
               in
               hearing
               this
               Discourse
               ,
               and
               after
               him
               the
               Chief
               himself
               ;
               and
               Five
               or
               Six
               others
               ,
               as
               they
               were
               working
               would
               repeat
               in
               that
               very
               indiffent
               Galibis
               I
               could
               speak
               ,
               these
               Words
               ;
               
                 God
                 made
                 the
                 Heavens
                 ,
                 God
                 made
                 the
                 Earth
                 ,
              
               &c.
               
               Here
               were
               many
               Men
               that
               had
               each
               of
               'em
               Two
               Wives
               ,
               and
               one
               of
               'em
               who
               had
               Three
               ;
               this
               did
               not
               hinder
               me
               from
               telling
               'em
               in
               the
               Account
               I
               gave
               'em
               of
               the
               Creation
               of
               Mankind
               ;
               that
               God
               made
               but
               one
               Woman
               for
               the
               First
               Man
               ,
               and
               that
               he
               did
               not
               allow
               one
               Man
               to
               have
               Two
               Wives
               .
               And
               tho'
               all
               these
               Nouragues
               perceiv'd
               we
               condemn'd
               their
               Custom
               of
               taking
               Two
               or
               Three
               Wives
               at
               a
               time
               ,
               yet
               they
               said
               not
               a
               word
               against
               the
               Christian
               Law
               for
               not
               indulging
               the
               same
               Liberty
               .
            
             
               Seeing
               these
               People
               so
               docile
               and
               pliable
               ,
               I
               was
               willing
               to
               try
               if
               the
               Songs
               of
               the
               Church
               would
               please
               'em
               ,
               and
               accordingly
               I
               sang
               the
               Magnificat
               in
               the
               first
               Tune
               ,
               Father
               Bechamel
               and
               our
               Two
               Servants
               joyning
               in
               with
               me
               .
               This
               was
               so
               grateful
               to
               'em
               ,
               that
               afterwards
               we
               ordinarily
               sang
               some
               Hymns
               three-times
               a
               day
               to
               their
               great
               satisfaction
               .
               Nay
               some
               of
               'em
               learn'd
               to
               answer
               to
               the
               Litanies
               of
               the
               Blessed
               Virgin
               ,
               
               which
               we
               sang
               every
               Evening
               .
               In
               the
               mean
               while
               our
               Chief's
               Canoo
               went
               forward
               but
               very
               (
               11
               )
               slowly
               ,
               and
               we
               thought
               we
               had
               mnch
               better
               endeavour
               to
               prevail
               with
               him
               to
               borrow
               another
               ,
               with
               which
               he
               comply'd
               ,
               and
               sent
               Two
               of
               his
               Men
               for
               this
               end
               Five
               Days
               Journey
               from
               his
               House
               ,
               to
               get
               a
               convenient
               one
               for
               us
               .
            
             
               It
               was
               the
               Twenty
               eighth
               of
               February
               ,
               when
               these
               Men
               parted
               from
               us
               ,
               and
               seeing
               him
               the
               next
               day
               which
               was
               the
               First
               of
               March
               dispatch
               away
               another
               Company
               of
               his
               Men
               ,
               we
               thought
               convenient
               to
               make
               use
               of
               this
               occasion
               to
               engage
               some
               of
               'em
               to
               carry
               our
               Baggage
               ,
               whom
               Father
               Bechamel
               accompany'd
               ,
               together
               with
               one
               of
               our
               Servants
               ,
               while
               I
               and
               our
               other
               Servant
               remain'd
               with
               the
               Chief
               ,
               that
               we
               might
               give
               him
               no
               offence
               ;
               because
               we
               stood
               in
               need
               of
               his
               Protection
               .
            
             
               After
               I
               had
               continu'd
               a
               Fortnight
               with
               him
               ,
               making
               all
               the
               Children
               say
               their
               Prayers
               Morning
               and
               Evening
               ,
               and
               repeating
               my
               little
               Instrustions
               to
               the
               greatest
               part
               of
               those
               I
               was
               acquainted
               with
               ,
               but
               especially
               to
               Three
               Young
               Men
               who
               were
               well
               Marry'd
               ,
               confirming
               'em
               in
               the
               Resolution
               they
               had
               made
               never
               to
               take
               a
               Second
               Wife
               ;
               of
               which
               promise
               they
               seem'd
               to
               make
               no
               difficulty
               .
               I
               set
               forward
               the
               
               Fifteenth
               of
               March
               ,
               to
               seek
               Father
               Bechamel
               ,
               and
               to
               wait
               for
               the
               Chief
               of
               the
               Cottage
               ,
               who
               was
               to
               go
               by
               Water
               Five
               days
               after
               with
               his
               Canoo
               ;
               I
               had
               but
               Three
               Leagues
               to
               go
               by
               Land
               ,
               whereas
               it
               was
               near
               Fifteen
               by
               Water
               .
               From
               that
               time
               I
               found
               those
               People
               still
               more
               teachable
               ,
               and
               when
               the
               Captain
               return'd
               ,
               among
               Four
               and
               twenty
               Persons
               ,
               there
               were
               not
               above
               Three
               ,
               but
               signified
               they
               took
               a
               great
               deal
               of
               pleasure
               in
               my
               Instructions
               .
               During
               our
               stay
               here
               ,
               a
               Serpent
               came
               in
               the
               Night
               in
               the
               place
               where
               we
               lay
               ,
               and
               bit
               a
               Hound
               ,
               so
               that
               he
               died
               in
               30
               Hours
               after
               .
               This
               Accident
               was
               Injurious
               to
               us
               ,
               because
               the
               Chief
               ,
               and
               the
               Owner
               of
               the
               Dog
               attributed
               it
               to
               the
               Prayers
               which
               we
               sang
               ;
               so
               that
               I
               durst
               not
               Sing
               any
               more
               ,
               but
               contented
               my self
               to
               make
               every
               body
               in
               the
               Cottage
               say
               their
               Prayers
               ,
               except
               three
               (
               as
               I
               said
               before
               )
               namely
               the
               Chief
               Camiati
               and
               Two
               other
               Old
               Men.
               
            
             
               The
               Ninth
               of
               April
               ,
               after
               I
               had
               much
               importun'd
               the
               Chief
               ,
               that
               we
               might
               set
               forward
               ;
               he
               told
               us
               ,
               he
               was
               not
               willing
               to
               make
               this
               Voyage
               ,
               and
               that
               all
               his
               Men
               should
               go
               to
               set
               us
               in
               our
               way
               ,
               and
               should
               leave
               us
               when
               we
               went
               ashore
               to
               go
               by
               Land
               to
               the
               Rivers
               that
               lead
               to
               the
               Acoquas
               ,
               whether
               Four
               of
               the
               Company
               should
               attend
               us
               .
               We
               understood
               that
               their
               Voyage
               
               was
               determin'd
               without
               any
               regard
               to
               us
               ;
               however
               we
               did
               not
               scruple
               to
               pay
               'em
               for
               it
               ,
               being
               willing
               to
               make
               use
               of
               this
               Opportunity
               ,
               because
               it
               was
               no
               easie
               matter
               to
               meet
               with
               another
               .
               However
               I
               oppos'd
               the
               Design
               of
               having
               so
               many
               Men
               go
               with
               us
               ,
               because
               the
               Two
               Canoos
               they
               had
               were
               too
               small
               for
               such
               a
               Company
               :
               This
               was
               a
               great
               difficulty
               with
               us
               ,
               and
               was
               not
               resolv'd
               till
               the
               next
               day
               ,
               when
               we
               represented
               to
               the
               Chief
               ,
               that
               we
               would
               leave
               him
               our
               little
               Chest
               ,
               that
               we
               would
               take
               very
               few
               of
               our
               (
               12
               )
               things
               out
               of
               it
               for
               our
               Voyage
               ,
               that
               when
               we
               return'd
               I
               would
               continue
               with
               him
               ;
               that
               if
               he
               was
               not
               pleas'd
               to
               assist
               us
               in
               our
               Voyage
               ,
               I
               must
               return
               to
               Cayenne
               ,
               that
               then
               he
               must
               never
               expect
               to
               see
               any
               of
               us
               again
               ,
               and
               would
               have
               no
               more
               of
               our
               Commodities
               ;
               this
               made
               him
               resolve
               to
               lessen
               the
               number
               of
               his
               Men.
               
            
             
               The
               Tenth
               of
               March
               we
               parted
               ,
               being
               Sixteen
               in
               Number
               ,
               of
               which
               the
               Chief
               would
               needs
               be
               one
               for
               Three
               days
               ,
               that
               he
               might
               bring
               back
               his
               Canoo
               .
               In
               the
               Evening
               we
               went
               ashore
               into
               the
               Woods
               ,
               and
               on
               the
               Eleventh
               ,
               after
               we
               had
               pass'd
               several
               Falls
               of
               Waters
               in
               the
               way
               we
               made
               the
               Two
               days
               ,
               we
               Arriv'd
               at
               a
               Cottage
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               ,
               Ten
               Leagues
               from
               the
               former
               ;
               here
               we
               were
               well
               receiv'd
               ,
               and
               went
               
               forward
               the
               Third
               day
               with
               a
               Third
               Canoo
               which
               was
               very
               small
               ;
               it
               carry'd
               only
               Two
               Men
               ,
               a
               Woman
               ,
               and
               a
               Girl
               of
               Ten
               or
               Twelve
               Years
               Old.
               We
               passed
               Two
               Falls
               that
               were
               difficult
               enough
               ,
               and
               Arriv'd
               at
               a
               Third
               ,
               which
               the
               Canoo
               could
               not
               pass
               ,
               which
               has
               oblig'd
               the
               Nouragues
               to
               make
               a
               way
               to
               draw
               their
               Canoos
               by
               Land
               almost
               half
               a
               League
               ,
               this
               fall
               is
               at
               Two
               Degrees
               ,
               and
               Forty
               Six
               Minutes
               of
               Northern
               Latitude
               .
               The
               Indians
               drew
               only
               the
               little
               Canoo
               by
               Land
               ;
               for
               the
               Chief
               left
               us
               and
               return'd
               back
               with
               the
               Two
               others
               ;
               and
               we
               who
               were
               then
               Fifteen
               in
               Number
               went
               to
               Embark
               in
               a
               great
               Canoo
               ,
               that
               was
               above
               the
               Water-fall
               ,
               which
               the
               Two
               Persons
               that
               were
               sent
               by
               Camiati
               had
               borrow'd
               ;
               Four
               Leagues
               higher
               ,
               we
               found
               the
               Mouth
               of
               the
               River
               Tenaporibo
               :
               and
               went
               to
               lie
               in
               a
               Cottage
               hard
               by
               ,
               which
               was
               yet
               upon
               the
               River
               Aproague
               ,
               where
               we
               found
               Five
               Nourague
               Travellers
               ,
               who
               were
               going
               to
               the
               Country
               of
               the
               Mercious
               ;
               besides
               whom
               there
               was
               a
               Woman
               who
               had
               a
               little
               Girl
               of
               Seven
               or
               Eight
               Months
               Old
               that
               was
               very
               ill
               .
               Imanon
               (
               of
               whom
               I
               have
               spoken
               )
               was
               now
               the
               Chief
               of
               our
               Company
               ;
               he
               is
               the
               greatest
               Physician
               (
               that
               is
               the
               greatest
               Juggler
               )
               of
               the
               Country
               :
               who
               tho'
               he
               is
               a
               great
               Hypocrite
               ,
               and
               very
               much
               for
               plurality
               of
               Wives
               ;
               yet
               did
               not
               scruple
               to
               acquaint
               
               us
               ,
               that
               this
               Child
               was
               very
               Sick
               ;
               when
               we
               had
               examin'd
               the
               matter
               we
               judged
               it
               necessary
               to
               Baptize
               her
               ,
               which
               Father
               Bechamel
               did
               ,
               at
               the
               time
               when
               these
               Travellers
               parted
               from
               us
               .
               I
               had
               before
               Baptiz'd
               a
               little
               Girl
               in
               the
               Cottage
               of
               this
               Imanon
               immediately
               after
               it
               was
               born
               ,
               because
               the
               Mother
               of
               it
               when
               she
               brought
               it
               into
               the
               World
               had
               left
               it
               in
               the
               (
               13
               )
               Dirt
               ,
               from
               whence
               they
               would
               not
               take
               it
               up
               for
               a
               long
               time
               ,
               being
               told
               of
               this
               disorder
               ,
               and
               finding
               they
               would
               put
               nothing
               under
               the
               Infant
               to
               keep
               it
               from
               the
               coldness
               of
               the
               Mud
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               Night
               I
               baptiz'd
               it
               .
            
             
               The
               Fourteenth
               we
               left
               this
               Hutt
               ,
               and
               presently
               enter'd
               into
               the
               River
               of
               Tenaporibo
               ,
               which
               is
               very
               deep
               and
               rapid
               ,
               tho'
               it
               winds
               much
               ;
               we
               were
               not
               the
               First
               
               French-Men
               that
               had
               been
               upon
               this
               River
               ;
               and
               we
               have
               been
               inform'd
               that
               Three
               
               English-Men
               were
               kill'd
               and
               Eaten
               there
               (
               14
               )
               some
               Years
               ago
               by
               the
               Nouragues
               :
               'T
               is
               very
               difficult
               to
               Navigate
               this
               River
               ,
               meerly
               because
               of
               its
               narrowness
               ,
               and
               because
               the
               great
               Trees
               upon
               the
               Banks
               of
               it
               when
               they
               fall
               ,
               often
               extend
               their
               Branches
               to
               the
               other
               side
               ,
               so
               that
               one
               must
               either
               pass
               over
               or
               under
               these
               Trees
               ,
               which
               is
               not
               done
               without
               a
               great
               deal
               of
               difficulty
               .
               We
               lay
               one
               Night
               in
               the
               Woods
               ,
               and
               on
               the
               Fifteenth
               Arriv'd
               at
               a
               Hutt
               where
               we
               continued
               
               to
               the
               Eighteenth
               ,
               which
               was
               the
               last
               Day
               we
               were
               upon
               this
               River
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               Evening
               we
               saw
               the
               last
               Company
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               on
               this
               River
               ,
               80
               Leagues
               from
               the
               Mouth
               of
               it
               :
               This
               Company
               consists
               of
               Four
               Huts
               ,
               at
               a
               little
               distance
               one
               from
               another
               ,
               wherein
               there
               are
               above
               Sixscore
               Persons
               ,
               of
               a
               good
               natural
               Disposition
               ,
               and
               very
               teachable
               :
               There
               was
               not
               one
               in
               the
               Cottage
               ,
               where
               we
               lodg'd
               ,
               but
               was
               taught
               by
               us
               ,
               to
               pray
               to
               God
               every
               Day
               ;
               this
               Cottage
               was
               compos'd
               of
               several
               Men
               ,
               some
               of
               whom
               were
               single
               Persons
               ,
               others
               were
               married
               only
               to
               one
               Wife
               ,
               with
               whom
               they
               liv'd
               very
               well
               ;
               and
               there
               is
               great
               Probability
               of
               making
               good
               Christians
               of
               '
               em
               .
               This
               Cottage
               is
               at
               Two
               Degrees
               ,
               Forty
               Two
               Minutes
               of
               Northern
               Latitude
               ,
               and
               together
               with
               the
               Neighbouring
               ones
               ,
               and
               two
               others
               at
               Two
               Leagues
               distance
               ,
               might
               give
               employ
               to
               a
               good
               Missionary
               .
            
             
               We
               left
               this
               Hut
               ,
               on
               the
               Twenty
               Seventh
               of
               April
               ,
               towards
               Evening
               ,
               to
               go
               and
               seek
               our
               Guides
               ,
               who
               were
               not
               far
               off
               ,
               with
               whom
               we
               advanc'd
               by
               Land
               ,
               and
               went
               only
               Five
               Leagues
               among
               very
               difficult
               Mountains
               .
            
             
               The
               Twenty
               Ninth
               we
               travell'd
               about
               Ten
               Leagues
               ,
               in
               a
               Way
               a
               little
               more
               pleasant
               ,
               and
               lay
               in
               the
               Woods
               as
               we
               had
               
               done
               the
               Night
               before
               .
               Our
               Three
               Guides
               shew'd
               us
               Two
               Rivulets
               ,
               which
               they
               said
               were
               Tenaporibo
               and
               Camopi
               ,
               that
               were
               very
               rapid
               ;
               and
               Five
               or
               Six
               Leagues
               beyond
               ,
               Tenaporibo
               is
               Forty
               Foot
               broad
               ,
               and
               full
               Twelve
               in
               depth
               :
               And
               at
               Fifteen
               Leagues
               distance
               ,
               or
               a
               little
               more
               ,
               the
               River
               Camopi
               is
               as
               big
               as
               the
               Sein
               is
               below
               Paris
               ,
               from
               whence
               one
               may
               conjecture
               what
               Compass
               it
               takes
               in
               its
               course
               .
            
             
               The
               Thirtieth
               we
               went
               to
               lodge
               upon
               the
               River
               Eiski
               ,
               from
               whence
               Two
               of
               our
               Nouragues
               ,
               went
               to
               the
               Nouragues
               of
               the
               River
               Inipi
               ,
               to
               borrow
               a
               Canoo
               ,
               and
               so
               to
               come
               again
               at
               us
               ,
               where
               we
               lodg'd
               ;
               for
               the
               River
               Eiski
               runs
               into
               the
               Inipi
               .
               This
               they
               did
               for
               our
               Ease
               ,
               our
               Journey
               having
               been
               very
               hard
               ,
               considering
               our
               Weakness
               .
            
             
               The
               First
               of
               May
               they
               came
               to
               us
               again
               ,
               with
               a
               pretty
               handsome
               Canoo
               ,
               wherein
               there
               were
               Three
               Nouragues
               ,
               that
               never
               had
               seen
               a
               French
               Man
               ,
               or
               any
               other
               European
               ,
               in
               their
               Lives
               .
               Their
               Aspect
               was
               very
               sweet
               ,
               and
               they
               seem'd
               to
               be
               of
               a
               very
               tractable
               Disposition
               ;
               when
               they
               had
               seen
               us
               they
               returned
               Home
               ,
               and
               we
               embarked
               in
               this
               Canoo
               ,
               a
               little
               after
               Noon
               ,
               and
               came
               to
               lodge
               in
               the
               Woods
               ,
               upon
               the
               River
               Inipi
               ,
               where
               our
               Guides
               (
               15
               )
               mended
               the
               Canoo
               ;
               and
               the
               next
               Day
               ,
               being
               the
               Second
               of
               May
               ,
               having
               gone
               down
               this
               River
               ,
               
               which
               has
               a
               very
               rapid
               Stream
               ,
               about
               Ten
               Leagues
               ,
               we
               enter'd
               into
               the
               River
               Camopi
               ,
               in
               which
               we
               we
               went
               Four
               Leagues
               more
               ,
               and
               that
               against
               the
               Stream
               :
               For
               Inipi
               loses
               its
               Name
               ,
               and
               with
               Camopi
               makes
               a
               great
               River
               ,
               which
               goes
               and
               joyns
               it self
               to
               the
               River
               (
               16
               )
               Yapoque
               ,
               Five
               Days
               Voyage
               from
               thence
               .
               Camopi
               is
               very
               swift
               ,
               and
               has
               so
               many
               difficult
               Falls
               ,
               that
               't
               is
               no
               easie
               Matter
               to
               number
               them
               ;
               we
               went
               up
               this
               River
               the
               Third
               and
               Fourth
               of
               May
               ,
               with
               a
               great
               deal
               of
               Difficulty
               and
               Danger
               .
               The
               Fourth
               of
               May
               we
               lay
               upon
               a
               flat
               Rock
               ,
               where
               we
               found
               a
               Piece
               of
               a
               Min'd
               Cottage
               ,
               the
               Covering
               of
               which
               our
               Men
               mended
               with
               Boughs
               :
               That
               Day
               we
               pass'd
               through
               a
               perilous
               Place
               ,
               not
               only
               because
               of
               a
               dangerous
               Fall
               of
               Water
               ;
               but
               likewise
               ,
               because
               it
               was
               commanded
               by
               a
               Cottage
               of
               Nouragues
               ,
               which
               is
               the
               Last
               of
               that
               Nation
               ,
               the
               Master
               of
               it
               is
               a
               Morou
               ,
               the
               Name
               of
               an
               Indian
               Nation
               ,
               one
               of
               whom
               was
               hang'd
               at
               Cayenne
               ,
               above
               a
               Year
               ago
               ,
               for
               killing
               a
               French
               Man
               :
               We
               had
               Reason
               to
               fear
               ,
               that
               he
               would
               ,
               after
               the
               Manner
               of
               the
               Indians
               ,
               revenge
               this
               Man's
               Death
               upon
               us
               ;
               but
               one
               of
               our
               Guides
               ,
               who
               was
               also
               a
               Morou
               ,
               had
               married
               his
               Daughter
               ,
               and
               we
               hop'd
               the
               Presence
               of
               this
               young
               Man
               ,
               whom
               we
               then
               took
               to
               be
               a
               Nourague
               ,
               would
               divert
               his
               ill
               Humour
               ;
               
               as
               indeed
               it
               happen'd
               :
               And
               after
               we
               were
               got
               ashoar
               upon
               our
               flat
               Rock
               ,
               which
               is
               in
               the
               Country
               of
               the
               Acoquas
               ,
               we
               were
               greatly
               comforted
               to
               see
               our
               Three
               Guides
               ask
               for
               their
               Supper
               by
               the
               Sign
               of
               the
               Cross
               ,
               where
               no
               Person
               had
               ever
               done
               it
               before
               ;
               and
               that
               ,
               without
               having
               any
               need
               to
               be
               put
               in
               mind
               of
               it
               .
               But
               that
               which
               still
               increas'd
               our
               Joy
               ,
               was
               ,
               that
               the
               youngest
               of
               our
               Guides
               ,
               who
               might
               be
               about
               Seventeen
               Years
               of
               Age
               ,
               after
               Supper
               ,
               of
               his
               own
               accord
               ,
               sang
               in
               the
               Tune
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               
                 Sancta
                 Maria
                 ,
                 Ora
                 pro
                 nobis
              
               ;
               having
               been
               yet
               taught
               no
               more
               than
               that
               .
               I
               continued
               the
               Litanies
               ,
               and
               he
               answer'd
               me
               .
               Towards
               Evening
               our
               principal
               Guide
               gave
               a
               Signal
               ,
               with
               a
               sort
               of
               a
               Pipe
               ,
               that
               may
               be
               heard
               at
               a
               great
               Distance
               .
               The
               next
               Day
               ,
               being
               the
               Fifth
               of
               May
               ,
               we
               had
               a
               very
               rainy
               Morning
               ,
               which
               hinder'd
               us
               from
               going
               forward
               ;
               but
               notwithstanding
               the
               Rain
               about
               Nine
               a
               Clock
               in
               the
               Morning
               ,
               we
               saw
               three
               young
               Acoquas
               ,
               who
               were
               sent
               to
               know
               who
               we
               were
               ,
               we
               went
               with
               them
               towards
               Noon
               ,
               and
               about
               Three
               a
               Clock
               arriv'd
               soon
               after
               them
               ,
               at
               the
               first
               Hut
               of
               the
               Acoquas
               ;
               which
               is
               at
               Two
               Degrees
               ,
               and
               Twenty
               Five
               Minutes
               of
               Northern
               Latitude
               .
               They
               were
               mightily
               pleas'd
               to
               see
               us
               ;
               for
               in
               all
               appearance
               ,
               they
               had
               some
               considerable
               time
               before
               heard
               of
               our
               
               Voyage
               .
               They
               so
               familiarly
               acquainted
               themselves
               with
               us
               ,
               that
               in
               Three
               Days
               time
               ,
               there
               was
               not
               one
               of
               them
               that
               refus'd
               to
               pray
               to
               God
               ;
               and
               we
               every
               Day
               put
               'em
               upon
               saying
               their
               Prayers
               Morning
               and
               Evening
               .
               The
               Second
               Day
               our
               first
               Guide
               brought
               us
               to
               two
               other
               Cottages
               not
               far
               off
               ;
               where
               we
               were
               entertain'd
               with
               as
               much
               Kindness
               ,
               as
               Strangers
               could
               desire
               of
               a
               Savage
               People
               :
               Immediately
               ,
               those
               that
               liv'd
               about
               a
               Day
               's
               Journey
               more
               remote
               receiv'd
               the
               News
               of
               our
               Arrival
               ,
               and
               came
               to
               see
               us
               .
               They
               all
               admir'd
               our
               Hats
               ,
               our
               Cassocks
               ,
               our
               Shooes
               ,
               a
               Gun
               ;
               which
               we
               made
               our
               first
               Guide
               discharge
               from
               time
               to
               time
               ,
               in
               great
               Companies
               of
               'em
               ;
               the
               Pictures
               of
               our
               Breviaries
               ,
               our
               Writing
               ,
               and
               the
               Songs
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               which
               they
               desir'd
               to
               hear
               a
               great
               many
               times
               in
               a
               Day
               .
               They
               heard
               our
               Instructions
               with
               Attention
               ;
               and
               seem'd
               to
               have
               very
               good
               Sentiments
               ,
               and
               to
               be
               much
               affected
               ,
               when
               we
               told
               'em
               ,
               that
               formerly
               the
               People
               of
               our
               Country
               were
               ignorant
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               that
               some
               good
               People
               came
               into
               our
               Nation
               ,
               who
               taught
               us
               ,
               that
               there
               was
               a
               God
               ,
               who
               would
               make
               us
               happy
               for
               ever
               in
               Heaven
               ;
               and
               what
               we
               were
               to
               do
               ,
               that
               we
               might
               go
               to
               that
               blessed
               Place
               :
               That
               we
               were
               come
               to
               do
               them
               the
               same
               good
               Office
               ,
               that
               they
               might
               go
               to
               Heaven
               as
               well
               as
               we
               .
               
               That
               which
               gives
               me
               good
               Hopes
               of
               the
               Conversion
               of
               this
               Nation
               ,
               is
               ,
               that
               they
               heard
               those
               Commands
               of
               God
               with
               Reverence
               ,
               which
               are
               most
               opposite
               to
               their
               ancient
               Manner
               of
               living
               .
               And
               this
               gives
               me
               occasion
               to
               speak
               more
               distinctly
               of
               what
               I
               have
               remark'd
               in
               these
               Two
               Nations
               .
            
             
               The
               Nouragues
               and
               the
               Acoquas
               ,
               in
               Matter
               of
               Religion
               ,
               are
               the
               same
               with
               the
               Galibis
               .
               They
               acknowledge
               there
               is
               a
               God
               ,
               but
               don't
               worship
               him
               .
               They
               say
               he
               dwells
               in
               Heaven
               ,
               without
               knowing
               whether
               he
               is
               a
               Spirit
               or
               no
               ,
               but
               rather
               seem
               to
               believe
               he
               has
               a
               Body
               .
               The
               Galibis
               call
               God
               (
               17
               )
               Tamoucicabo
               ;
               that
               is
               as
               much
               as
               to
               say
               ,
               the
               Ancient
               of
               Heaven
               .
               The
               Nouragues
               and
               the
               Acoquas
               call
               him
               Maire
               ,
               and
               never
               talk
               of
               him
               but
               in
               fabulous
               Stories
               :
               They
               have
               a
               great
               many
               Superstitions
               ,
               which
               are
               only
               like
               the
               idle
               Tales
               and
               Fooleries
               of
               Children
               ,
               in
               which
               I
               never
               observ'd
               'em
               practise
               any
               Idolatry
               :
               But
               I
               am
               very
               much
               afraid
               their
               Physicians
               ,
               by
               their
               juggling
               Tricks
               ,
               debauch
               the
               Women
               and
               Maids
               ;
               for
               they
               have
               given
               me
               great
               Reason
               to
               think
               so
               .
            
             
               The
               natural
               Disposition
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               and
               Acoquas
               is
               mild
               ;
               but
               the
               more
               remote
               from
               the
               Sea
               the
               Nouragues
               live
               ,
               the
               more
               tractable
               you
               'll
               find
               'em
               ;
               for
               the
               frequent
               Concourse
               they
               have
               with
               the
               Indians
               ,
               on
               
               the
               Sea-Coasts
               ,
               renders
               'em
               more
               uncontroulable
               and
               difficult
               to
               be
               treated
               with
               .
               'T
               is
               certain
               ,
               the
               Acoquas
               are
               quite
               another
               sort
               of
               People
               ,
               than
               the
               French
               at
               Cayenne
               imagine
               'em
               to
               be
               ,
               who
               account
               'em
               fierce
               ,
               cruel
               ,
               treacherous
               and
               perfidious
               ,
               to
               those
               they
               entertain
               ,
               For
               if
               one
               may
               judge
               of
               that
               Nation
               ,
               by
               near
               Two
               Hundred
               of
               'em
               ,
               whom
               we
               have
               seen
               ,
               they
               are
               an
               honest
               ,
               affable
               ,
               pleasant
               People
               ,
               and
               are
               very
               attentive
               and
               ready
               to
               receive
               what
               is
               said
               to
               '
               em
               .
               T
               is
               true
               ,
               they
               not
               long
               since
               exterminated
               a
               small
               Nation
               ,
               and
               eat
               several
               of
               them
               ;
               but
               I
               attribute
               this
               Barbarity
               to
               the
               ill
               Custom
               of
               the
               Country
               ,
               rather
               than
               to
               the
               Disposition
               of
               the
               People
               ;
               and
               this
               seems
               the
               more
               probable
               ,
               because
               being
               inform'd
               Two
               or
               Three
               Days
               after
               our
               arrival
               ,
               that
               there
               was
               half
               a
               Day
               's
               Journey
               from
               us
               ,
               some
               of
               the
               Flesh
               of
               a
               Magapa
               (
               the
               Name
               of
               a
               People
               that
               are
               their
               Enemies
               )
               whom
               they
               had
               newly
               kill'd
               with
               another
               ,
               while
               they
               were
               watching
               their
               opportunity
               to
               surprize
               one
               or
               other
               of
               the
               Acoquas
               alone
               ;
               and
               besides
               ,
               one
               of
               the
               People
               of
               the
               Cottage
               having
               set
               before
               us
               the
               Jaw
               of
               a
               young
               Man
               ;
               we
               told
               'em
               ,
               
                 This
                 was
                 not
                 well
                 done
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 God
                 forbids
                 us
                 to
                 kill
                 an
                 Enemy
                 ,
                 when
                 we
                 take
                 him
                 Prisoner
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 eat
                 him
                 afterwards
                 :
              
               At
               this
               they
               look'd
               down
               very
               much
               without
               giving
               
               one
               Word
               of
               a
               Reply
               .
               Another
               time
               ,
               the
               Master
               of
               one
               of
               the
               Cottages
               having
               heard
               ,
               that
               the
               Galibis
               to
               hinder
               us
               from
               undertaking
               this
               Voyage
               ,
               had
               threaten'd
               us
               ,
               that
               we
               should
               be
               roasted
               by
               the
               Acoquas
               ,
               was
               fill'd
               with
               great
               Indignation
               at
               it
               ,
               and
               could
               not
               be
               pacified
               till
               I
               told
               him
               ,
               I
               took
               those
               Galibis
               for
               Lyars
               and
               Fools
               :
               Having
               moreover
               ,
               told
               'em
               ,
               I
               had
               been
               made
               Prisoner
               of
               War
               by
               the
               English
               ,
               and
               restor'd
               to
               the
               French
               ,
               without
               receiving
               any
               harm
               ;
               and
               that
               God
               would
               not
               allow
               us
               to
               kill
               those
               we
               took
               in
               War
               ;
               they
               seem'd
               pretty
               well
               to
               approve
               of
               this
               Law.
               And
               tho'
               this
               barbarous
               Custom
               is
               a
               Point
               so
               much
               establish'd
               and
               receiv'd
               in
               all
               Times
               among
               the
               Acoquas
               ,
               and
               among
               the
               Nouragues
               too
               ;
               yet
               it
               seems
               ,
               by
               what
               I
               have
               been
               relating
               ,
               to
               be
               no
               difficult
               Matter
               to
               restrain
               'em
               from
               this
               Savage
               Practice
               ,
               of
               killing
               and
               eating
               their
               Enemies
               .
            
             
               Polygamy
               is
               a
               Second
               Obstacle
               which
               we
               found
               against
               the
               Christian
               Religion
               among
               these
               Two
               Nations
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               ,
               and
               Acoquas
               ;
               for
               where
               there
               's
               one
               Man
               to
               be
               found
               ,
               that
               has
               but
               one
               Wife
               ,
               there
               are
               six
               ,
               who
               have
               each
               of
               'em
               two
               or
               three
               .
               The
               Hope
               that
               may
               be
               conceiv'd
               for
               the
               eradicating
               of
               this
               Vice
               ,
               is
               ,
               not
               concerning
               Persons
               that
               are
               already
               pre-ingag'd
               in
               this
               evil
               Custom
               ,
               but
               only
               those
               
               that
               have
               yet
               but
               one
               Wife
               ,
               and
               young
               Men
               that
               are
               not
               yet
               married
               ,
               who
               might
               be
               perswaded
               to
               be
               content
               with
               one
               Wife
               .
               I
               confess
               ,
               there
               's
               no
               hope
               of
               working
               upon
               the
               others
               .
            
             
               The
               Way
               of
               Living
               among
               the
               People
               of
               these
               Two
               Nations
               ,
               is
               very
               agreeable
               ,
               and
               has
               something
               more
               courteous
               in
               it
               ,
               than
               that
               of
               the
               Galibis
               .
               For
               Instance
               ,
               Among
               the
               Galibis
               ,
               those
               that
               are
               married
               ,
               dine
               every
               one
               apart
               ,
               and
               those
               that
               are
               unmarried
               eat
               all
               together
               ;
               and
               all
               the
               Women
               ,
               Maids
               and
               little
               Children
               ,
               go
               to
               another
               side
               of
               the
               Hut
               to
               eat
               .
               The
               Nouragues
               and
               Acoquas
               do
               quite
               otherwise
               ,
               for
               the
               Husband
               eats
               with
               his
               Wife
               ,
               or
               Wives
               and
               Children
               with
               admirable
               Agreement
               and
               Union
               .
               They
               don't
               drink
               (
               19
               )
               much
               ,
               but
               are
               great
               eaters
               ;
               and
               are
               always
               Fishing
               or
               Hunting
               ,
               in
               which
               they
               spare
               no
               Pains
               ,
               to
               get
               their
               Living
               .
               They
               are
               all
               Lyars
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               all
               other
               Indians
               ,
               that
               we
               know
               .
               And
               when
               they
               perceive
               their
               Lyes
               are
               discover'd
               ,
               they
               retire
               ,
               seeming
               to
               be
               a
               little
               asham'd
               ,
               but
               will
               not
               fail
               to
               frame
               a
               Lye
               again
               on
               the
               next
               Occasion
               .
               The
               Nouragues
               endeavour'd
               to
               fright
               us
               with
               a
               great
               many
               Stories
               of
               their
               own
               Invention
               ,
               to
               make
               us
               alter
               our
               Resolution
               of
               going
               to
               the
               Acoquas
               ,
               that
               we
               might
               spend
               all
               our
               Stock
               of
               Goods
               with
               them
               ;
               sometimes
               telling
               us
               ,
               
               they
               had
               seen
               the
               Track
               of
               some
               strange
               wild
               Beast
               ;
               sometimes
               that
               the
               Caranes
               ,
               their
               Enemies
               ,
               were
               running
               up
               and
               down
               their
               Woods
               ,
               and
               that
               they
               had
               observ'd
               the
               Steps
               of
               Three
               of
               that
               Nation
               not
               far
               from
               their
               Hut
               :
               But
               when
               they
               saw
               they
               could
               not
               terrifie
               us
               ,
               they
               did
               what
               we
               would
               have
               '
               em
               .
               This
               Vice
               induces
               'em
               to
               promise
               much
               ,
               and
               to
               perform
               but
               little
               ;
               which
               also
               is
               occasion'd
               by
               the
               little
               Judgment
               they
               have
               ,
               to
               esteem
               any
               thing
               according
               to
               the
               Value
               and
               Importance
               of
               it
               ;
               for
               this
               makes
               'em
               not
               matter
               what
               Injury
               they
               do
               any
               one
               ,
               in
               breaking
               their
               Word
               ;
               nor
               how
               much
               they
               dishonour
               themselves
               in
               so
               doing
               .
               To
               have
               a
               thorough
               Conception
               ,
               how
               common
               this
               is
               in
               these
               Two
               Nations
               (
               which
               is
               also
               rife
               among
               all
               the
               Indian
               Nations
               we
               are
               acquainted
               with
               )
               one
               must
               compare
               'em
               to
               little
               Children
               ,
               who
               esteem
               what
               they
               see
               only
               by
               Fancy
               :
               They
               are
               also
               subject
               to
               Steal
               ;
               so
               that
               some
               times
               they
               must
               be
               narrowly
               watch'd
               ,
               or
               else
               they
               will
               be
               pilfering
               one
               thing
               or
               other
               .
            
             
               The
               Nouragues
               make
               about
               Six
               or
               Seven
               Hundred
               Persons
               ,
               the
               Mercious
               ,
               who
               dwell
               on
               the
               West-side
               of
               'em
               ,
               are
               equal
               to
               'em
               in
               Number
               ;
               the
               Acoquas
               are
               South
               of
               'em
               ,
               and
               conceal'd
               from
               us
               the
               Strength
               of
               their
               Nation
               ;
               however
               ,
               I
               suppose
               it
               may
               be
               three
               
               or
               four
               times
               stronger
               than
               that
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               ;
               for
               having
               ask'd
               an
               old
               Woman
               ,
               how
               many
               Cottages
               there
               were
               on
               one
               side
               ,
               to
               which
               we
               pointed
               ;
               she
               told
               us
               ,
               there
               were
               Ten
               ;
               then
               pointing
               toward
               the
               Quarter
               ,
               where
               their
               Chief
               dwelt
               ,
               she
               took
               a
               (
               20
               )
               Handful
               of
               her
               Hair
               ,
               to
               signifie
               to
               us
               ,
               the
               great
               Number
               of
               Cottages
               there
               were
               on
               that
               side
               .
               Between
               the
               Acoquas
               ,
               and
               the
               Mercious
               ,
               they
               told
               us
               ,
               there
               was
               the
               Nation
               of
               the
               Pirios
               ,
               which
               the
               Acoquas
               say
               ,
               are
               equal
               to
               themselves
               in
               Strength
               :
               On
               the
               East
               and
               South-East-side
               are
               the
               Pirionaus
               ,
               and
               on
               the
               East
               the
               Pirios
               and
               Magapas
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               midst
               of
               all
               these
               Nations
               the
               Morous
               ,
               who
               are
               very
               barbarous
               .
               These
               Nations
               all
               speak
               one
               and
               the
               same
               Language
               ,
               and
               are
               understood
               by
               the
               Caranes
               ,
               who
               are
               the
               Enemies
               of
               the
               Nouragues
               .
               They
               also
               say
               ,
               the
               Maranes
               ,
               who
               are
               a
               very
               great
               People
               ,
               understand
               the
               same
               Tongue
               :
               On
               the
               South
               South-West
               of
               the
               Acoquas
               are
               the
               Aramisas
               ,
               whose
               Language
               borders
               on
               that
               of
               the
               Galibis
               ,
               having
               a
               great
               many
               of
               the
               same
               Words
               in
               it
               ,
               tho'
               they
               are
               unacquainted
               with
               that
               Nation
               .
               The
               Acoquas
               say
               ,
               these
               Aramisas
               are
               a
               very
               great
               Nation
               .
               If
               there
               be
               a
               Lake
               of
               Parima
               ,
               these
               People
               can't
               be
               Forty
               Leagues
               distant
               from
               it
               on
               the
               North-side
               :
               We
               could
               get
               no
               Account
               of
               this
               Lake
               .
               
               There
               was
               not
               one
               Indian
               ,
               who
               when
               we
               enquir'd
               of
               them
               ,
               whether
               they
               did
               not
               know
               of
               a
               vast
               Place
               of
               Water
               like
               the
               Sea
               ,
               the
               Sand
               of
               which
               is
               Caracoli
               (
               for
               so
               they
               call
               Gold
               ,
               Silver
               and
               Copper
               )
               could
               give
               me
               the
               least
               Intelligence
               of
               it
               .
               These
               (
               21
               )
               Aramisas
               are
               in
               the
               same
               Longitude
               ,
               wherein
               the
               Maps
               place
               the
               Eastern
               Part
               of
               the
               Lake
               of
               Parima
               .
            
             
               After
               we
               had
               been
               with
               the
               Acoquas
               Twelve
               or
               Thirteen
               Days
               ,
               the
               Air
               grew
               unwholsome
               ,
               by
               an
               excessive
               Heat
               ,
               at
               a
               time
               when
               there
               was
               very
               little
               Wind
               ;
               which
               seldom
               fails
               to
               blow
               in
               those
               Countries
               ;
               and
               indeed
               ,
               't
               is
               that
               that
               renders
               'em
               habitable
               .
               Father
               Bechamel
               was
               taken
               with
               a
               Tertian
               Ague
               ,
               and
               the
               strongest
               of
               our
               Servants
               also
               fell
               very
               sick
               :
               We
               therefore
               press'd
               our
               Guides
               to
               return
               ,
               since
               they
               were
               not
               willing
               to
               conduct
               us
               any
               farther
               ,
               nor
               suffer
               the
               Acoquas
               to
               go
               and
               fetch
               their
               Chief
               ,
               who
               dwelt
               at
               the
               Distance
               of
               Three
               Days
               Journey
               ,
               from
               the
               Place
               where
               we
               were
               ,
               with
               whom
               we
               would
               have
               contracted
               an
               Alliance
               .
               These
               Three
               Guides
               became
               insolent
               ,
               upon
               the
               Supposition
               ,
               that
               it
               was
               to
               honour
               them
               that
               the
               Acoquas
               came
               in
               such
               great
               Numbers
               ;
               tho'
               in
               all
               appearance
               ,
               it
               was
               the
               Curiosity
               of
               seeing
               us
               French
               Men
               that
               brought
               'em
               together
               :
               They
               became
               very
               troublesome
               ,
               especially
               
               the
               Morou
               ,
               who
               gave
               sufficient
               Indications
               of
               his
               wicked
               Disposition
               ,
               perswading
               the
               Acoquas
               ,
               that
               we
               ought
               to
               leave
               them
               all
               our
               Wares
               ;
               these
               so
               unreasonable
               Proposals
               did
               not
               much
               surprize
               us
               ;
               but
               to
               give
               'em
               good
               Hopes
               of
               our
               Return
               ,
               we
               left
               an
               (
               22
               )
               Iron
               Tool
               of
               Half
               a
               Crown
               Price
               with
               one
               of
               'em
               ,
               who
               had
               but
               one
               Wife
               ,
               upon
               Condition
               ,
               that
               I
               should
               have
               a
               great
               (
               23
               )
               Hamock
               when
               I
               came
               again
               ;
               promising
               I
               would
               then
               give
               him
               a
               Bill
               and
               a
               Knife
               ,
               to
               make
               up
               what
               this
               wanted
               of
               the
               Value
               of
               it
               .
               I
               made
               choice
               of
               this
               Man
               on
               purpose
               to
               signifie
               what
               respect
               I
               had
               for
               lawful
               Marriages
               ;
               and
               he
               understood
               me
               very
               well
               ,
               and
               promis'd
               me
               ,
               he
               would
               not
               take
               a
               Second
               Wife
               ,
               during
               the
               Life
               of
               this
               he
               already
               had
               ,
               with
               whom
               he
               had
               liv'd
               at
               least
               Eight
               or
               Nine
               Years
               ,
               for
               they
               had
               a
               Daughter
               about
               Seven
               Years
               old
               ;
               however
               ,
               this
               Project
               facilitated
               our
               Return
               .
            
             
               The
               25th
               of
               May
               we
               embark'd
               on
               the
               River
               Camopi
               ,
               in
               Two
               
               Canoo's
               ;
               Father
               Bechamel
               was
               in
               the
               least
               of
               'em
               ,
               with
               our
               principal
               Nourague
               ,
               and
               an
               Acoquas
               ,
               who
               had
               a
               Mind
               to
               go
               with
               us
               to
               Cayenne
               ;
               and
               I
               went
               in
               the
               other
               with
               our
               Two
               Servants
               ,
               the
               Morou
               ,
               and
               the
               young
               Nourague
               ,
               who
               not
               taking
               care
               to
               guide
               the
               Vessel
               right
               ,
               let
               it
               run
               so
               near
               the
               Precipice
               of
               a
               great
               
               Fall
               of
               Water
               ,
               that
               those
               in
               the
               other
               Canoo
               ,
               cry'd
               out
               ,
               believing
               we
               should
               be
               lost
               :
               But
               these
               Two
               young
               Men
               ,
               with
               much
               ado
               ,
               brought
               our
               Canoo
               under
               a
               Rock
               ,
               that
               brake
               the
               Violence
               of
               the
               Stream
               ,
               and
               getting
               up
               the
               Rock
               ,
               with
               all
               their
               Might
               ,
               drew
               the
               Canoo
               out
               of
               this
               Danger
               .
               'T
               is
               abundantly
               more
               dangerous
               to
               go
               down
               these
               Falls
               ,
               than
               to
               get
               up
               'em
               ;
               because
               they
               chose
               those
               places
               where
               the
               Water
               runs
               less
               violently
               to
               get
               the
               Canoo
               up
               with
               main
               Strength
               ,
               whereas
               in
               going
               down
               'em
               they
               take
               the
               swiftest
               Part
               of
               the
               Stream
               ,
               so
               that
               one
               runs
               a
               greater
               Hazard
               of
               one's
               Life
               ,
               than
               can
               easily
               be
               express'd
               .
            
             
               After
               having
               pass'd
               these
               Dangers
               ,
               the
               Second
               Day
               after
               we
               embark'd
               ,
               our
               young
               Nourague
               ,
               that
               had
               never
               run
               the
               like
               Risque
               before
               ,
               said
               in
               his
               own
               Language
               ,
               
                 God
                 is
                 good
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 not
                 angry
                 with
                 us
                 .
              
               When
               we
               came
               to
               the
               Place
               ,
               where
               we
               were
               to
               go
               by
               Land
               ,
               betwixt
               the
               River
               Inipi
               and
               Tenaporibo
               ,
               our
               Guides
               ,
               who
               were
               well
               loaded
               with
               Hamocks
               ,
               and
               other
               things
               ,
               which
               they
               had
               bought
               of
               the
               Acoquas
               ,
               were
               not
               willing
               to
               help
               us
               ,
               which
               yet
               they
               would
               have
               done
               ,
               if
               that
               Morou
               had
               not
               put
               'em
               out
               of
               Humour
               :
               They
               walk'd
               very
               fast
               ,
               as
               the
               Indians
               are
               wont
               to
               do
               ,
               when
               they
               are
               loaded
               ,
               and
               at
               last
               left
               us
               at
               Five
               Leagues
               distance
               from
               Tenaporibo
               ;
               but
               
               by
               the
               Goodness
               of
               God
               we
               got
               thro'
               without
               losing
               our
               Way
               ,
               by
               following
               a
               Path
               ,
               in
               which
               these
               Indians
               had
               thrown
               little
               Boughs
               ,
               in
               several
               places
               where
               it
               was
               not
               easie
               to
               discern
               the
               Track
               ;
               to
               signifie
               which
               Way
               they
               went.
               When
               we
               came
               within
               Three
               quarters
               of
               a
               League
               of
               the
               first
               Cottages
               ,
               we
               heard
               some
               Nouragues
               calling
               to
               us
               ,
               who
               brought
               us
               Cassave
               and
               Fish
               to
               eat
               ,
               and
               some
               Ovicou
               to
               drink
               .
            
             
               The
               First
               Day
               of
               June
               our
               young
               Morou
               ,
               being
               drunk
               ,
               treated
               us
               very
               ill
               ,
               which
               made
               us
               resolve
               to
               return
               to
               Cayenne
               in
               another
               Canoo
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               Company
               of
               other
               Indians
               ,
               and
               the
               rather
               because
               our
               Distempers
               increas'd
               upon
               us
               .
               I
               had
               a
               violent
               Fever
               ,
               and
               a
               great
               Cough
               ,
               and
               Father
               Bechamel
               was
               very
               ill
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               the
               lustiest
               of
               our
               Servants
               .
               And
               now
               as
               we
               had
               need
               of
               the
               special
               Assistance
               of
               Providence
               ,
               to
               find
               a
               Conveniency
               for
               our
               Return
               ;
               so
               it
               pleas'd
               God
               to
               manifest
               to
               us
               ,
               how
               particular
               a
               Care
               he
               took
               of
               our
               Preservation
               ,
               in
               furnishing
               us
               with
               what
               we
               needed
               ;
               not
               indeed
               ,
               at
               the
               Time
               we
               wish'd
               ,
               nor
               after
               that
               Manner
               we
               thought
               best
               ,
               but
               in
               such
               a
               Season
               ,
               and
               in
               such
               a
               Way
               ,
               as
               was
               most
               convenient
               for
               us
               ,
               'till
               at
               length
               we
               arriv'd
               at
               Cayenne
               .
            
             
               The
               Second
               Day
               of
               June
               we
               made
               an
               Agreement
               with
               the
               first
               Nourague
               ,
               who
               had
               
               done
               us
               some
               Service
               at
               Caraotibo
               ,
               Three
               Leagues
               from
               Aproague
               ,
               who
               was
               of
               a
               very
               good
               Temper
               ,
               and
               was
               come
               thither
               with
               two
               other
               Nouragues
               of
               the
               same
               Place
               ,
               who
               had
               a
               Kindness
               for
               us
               ,
               and
               were
               willing
               to
               return
               Home
               as
               soon
               as
               they
               could
               .
               We
               determin'd
               to
               set
               forward
               the
               next
               Day
               ,
               to
               prevent
               our
               Morou
               ,
               and
               our
               other
               Guides
               ,
               who
               were
               elsewhere
               ,
               from
               opposing
               our
               Design
               .
               We
               were
               to
               go
               three
               Leagues
               by
               Land
               ,
               or
               Seven
               by
               Water
               ,
               to
               get
               to
               this
               Man
               's
               Canoo
               ;
               but
               I
               was
               so
               ill
               ,
               I
               could
               not
               go
               by
               Land
               ,
               and
               our
               Servant
               was
               asbad
               as
               I
               ,
               so
               that
               we
               were
               forc'd
               to
               seek
               a
               Canoo
               ,
               to
               go
               by
               Water
               ,
               the
               Providence
               God
               provided
               us
               a
               little
               One
               ,
               which
               we
               hired
               ,
               that
               was
               sunk
               in
               the
               Water
               ,
               but
               was
               big
               enough
               to
               carry
               Four
               of
               us
               ;
               namely
               ,
               the
               Indian
               and
               his
               Wife
               ,
               our
               Servant
               and
               my self
               .
               Father
               Bechamel
               ,
               tho'
               very
               weak
               ,
               had
               the
               Courage
               to
               undertake
               the
               Journey
               on
               Foot
               ,
               with
               our
               other
               Servant
               .
               We
               were
               desirous
               to
               have
               gone
               forward
               the
               next
               Day
               ,
               from
               the
               Place
               where
               this
               
               Nourague's
               Canoo
               lay
               ;
               but
               we
               should
               not
               have
               been
               able
               to
               have
               undergone
               this
               Fatigue
               :
               It
               pleas'd
               God
               to
               provide
               for
               our
               Welfare
               ,
               on
               this
               occasion
               ,
               in
               permitting
               the
               Indians
               to
               detain
               us
               Eleven
               Days
               in
               this
               Place
               ,
               where
               there
               were
               near
               Sixty
               Persons
               :
               The
               Chief
               of
               whom
               ,
               who
               had
               a
               Son
               in
               the
               Neighbourhood
               of
               Cayenne
               ,
               
               plac'd
               us
               in
               a
               Cottage
               by
               our selves
               ,
               that
               we
               might
               not
               be
               disturb'd
               ,
               with
               the
               Noise
               of
               a
               great
               Merry-meeting
               they
               were
               going
               to
               have
               ,
               and
               order'd
               his
               Wife
               to
               treat
               us
               the
               best
               she
               could
               :
               This
               was
               partly
               from
               his
               good
               Humour
               ,
               and
               partly
               to
               secure
               his
               Son
               from
               receiving
               any
               ill
               Treatment
               from
               the
               French
               at
               Cayenne
               .
               God
               was
               pleas'd
               ,
               during
               our
               stay
               here
               ,
               to
               give
               us
               an
               Opportunity
               again
               ,
               to
               instruct
               a
               Woman
               that
               was
               almost
               eaten
               up
               with
               Cancers
               ;
               so
               that
               she
               was
               at
               length
               baptiz'd
               by
               Father
               Bechamel
               ,
               the
               Day
               before
               we
               left
               this
               Place
               :
               This
               Father
               was
               so
               weak
               ,
               that
               he
               could
               not
               repeat
               his
               Breviary
               walking
               ;
               and
               yet
               the
               next
               Day
               ,
               he
               was
               strong
               enough
               to
               walk
               near
               a
               League
               from
               thence
               to
               embark
               .
               There
               now
               remain'd
               but
               one
               Difficulty
               to
               encounter
               with
               ,
               since
               we
               were
               in
               the
               Hands
               of
               Three
               very
               honest
               Nouragues
               ;
               and
               that
               was
               ,
               how
               to
               get
               away
               from
               
               Camiati's
               Cottage
               ,
               with
               our
               little
               Chest
               that
               contain'd
               all
               our
               Goods
               ;
               and
               to
               find
               a
               convenient
               Passage
               to
               the
               Mouth
               of
               the
               Aproague
               ;
               for
               I
               had
               promis'd
               Camiati
               ,
               to
               continue
               with
               him
               after
               my
               return
               from
               the
               Acoquas
               ;
               and
               those
               People
               are
               not
               very
               easie
               ,
               when
               they
               see
               us
               carry
               our
               Commodities
               out
               of
               their
               Cottages
               ;
               so
               that
               we
               had
               Reason
               to
               fear
               ,
               that
               he
               would
               detain
               us
               with
               him
               ,
               at
               least
               Two
               Months
               ,
               before
               he
               would
               conduct
               us
               to
               
               the
               Indians
               ,
               that
               dwell
               at
               the
               mouth
               of
               the
               Aproague
               :
               But
               it
               pleas'd
               God
               to
               remove
               all
               these
               Obstructions
               ;
               for
               our
               Three
               Nouragues
               promis'd
               to
               convey
               us
               to
               the
               Sea
               ,
               upon
               condition
               that
               we
               would
               give
               'em
               an
               indifferent
               Reward
               .
               And
               as
               we
               went
               by
               
               Camiati's
               Cottage
               ,
               we
               found
               he
               was
               gone
               a
               Hunting
               ,
               and
               those
               we
               found
               in
               his
               Cottage
               were
               only
               his
               Two
               Wives
               ,
               and
               some
               Strangers
               ,
               who
               durst
               not
               hinder
               us
               from
               taking
               our
               little
               Chest
               ,
               and
               our
               Three
               Guides
               ,
               tho'
               they
               were
               affraid
               to
               displease
               Camiati
               their
               Chief
               ,
               yet
               knew
               not
               how
               to
               refuse
               to
               lead
               us
               to
               a
               Cottage
               that
               was
               a
               League
               lower
               ,
               where
               at
               that
               time
               no
               body
               dwelt
               ,
               and
               hither
               they
               were
               to
               go
               in
               order
               to
               pass
               by
               Land
               to
               Caraotibo
               where
               they
               dwelt
               ,
               and
               to
               conduct
               their
               Wives
               thither
               ,
               and
               then
               to
               come
               back
               again
               to
               us
               ;
               tho'
               they
               would
               fain
               have
               set
               us
               ashore
               at
               
               Camiati's
               House
               ,
               and
               left
               us
               there
               .
            
             
               When
               we
               Arriv'd
               at
               the
               empty
               Cottage
               ,
               I
               found
               my self
               so
               ill
               ,
               that
               I
               thought
               I
               should
               have
               died
               ;
               but
               being
               somewhat
               recruited
               again
               ,
               and
               perceiving
               the
               Master
               of
               the
               Canoo
               had
               a
               mind
               to
               go
               and
               speak
               with
               Camiati
               ,
               and
               that
               one
               of
               our
               Servants
               desir'd
               to
               go
               with
               him
               ,
               to
               fetch
               a
               Hound
               he
               had
               bought
               that
               was
               run
               away
               thither
               .
               I
               gave
               him
               an
               Iron-tool
               of
               half
               a
               Crown
               price
               to
               present
               from
               me
               to
               Camiati
               ,
               that
               he
               might
               order
               
               his
               Wives
               to
               prepare
               me
               a
               Hamock
               ,
               and
               bid
               him
               tell
               him
               I
               would
               pay
               the
               rest
               at
               my
               return
               ,
               which
               should
               be
               as
               soon
               as
               I
               had
               recover'd
               my
               Health
               :
               this
               I
               did
               to
               prevent
               his
               offering
               any
               injury
               to
               our
               Servant
               ,
               and
               that
               he
               might
               not
               oppose
               us
               in
               our
               design
               of
               going
               back
               .
               The
               Master
               of
               the
               Canoo
               told
               the
               Story
               of
               the
               Affront
               the
               Young
               Morou
               gave
               us
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               ill
               Condition
               of
               my
               Health
               ,
               so
               well
               to
               Camiati
               ;
               that
               when
               he
               had
               receiv'd
               the
               Present
               I
               sent
               him
               ,
               he
               would
               needs
               accompany
               me
               to
               the
               Mouth
               of
               the
               Aproague
               ,
               to
               the
               Cottage
               of
               the
               Chief
               of
               the
               Sapayes
               ,
               whom
               he
               had
               had
               a
               mind
               to
               Visit
               a
               great
               while
               ,
               being
               his
               very
               good
               Friend
               .
               He
               came
               accordingly
               the
               next
               day
               with
               one
               of
               his
               Sons
               ,
               who
               was
               about
               Thirthy
               Years
               of
               Age
               ,
               and
               his
               Two
               Wives
               ,
               and
               sent
               home
               Two
               of
               our
               Guides
               ,
               taking
               their
               places
               ,
               he
               sent
               the
               Woman
               ,
               and
               one
               of
               our
               Servants
               one
               League
               by
               Land.
               Our
               other
               Servant
               continued
               in
               the
               Canoo
               to
               row
               ,
               or
               to
               use
               the
               Term
               of
               the
               Country
               to
               Pagay
               ,
               with
               these
               Three
               stout
               Nouragues
               ;
               we
               also
               remain'd
               in
               the
               Canoo
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               our
               Weakness
               ,
               which
               would
               not
               suffer
               us
               to
               go
               this
               League
               by
               Land.
               They
               lighted
               the
               Canoo
               thus
               ,
               that
               they
               might
               the
               better
               pass
               a
               fall
               of
               the
               River
               ,
               that
               was
               so
               rough
               and
               difficult
               ,
               that
               the
               Indians
               could
               not
               choose
               but
               turn
               pale
               at
               the
               extreme
               danger
               we
               
               were
               in
               .
               One
               time
               amongst
               others
               they
               toil'd
               so
               hard
               to
               keep
               the
               Canoo
               from
               being
               carry'd
               down
               a
               precipice
               of
               Water
               ,
               that
               when
               they
               had
               made
               shift
               to
               get
               under
               a
               Rock
               ,
               that
               breaks
               the
               Violence
               of
               the
               Stream
               ,
               they
               were
               forc'd
               to
               rest
               themselves
               for
               half
               a
               quarter
               of
               an
               Hour
               ,
               because
               they
               were
               so
               much
               spent
               ,
               that
               they
               could
               scarce
               fetch
               their
               Breath
               .
               I
               have
               twice
               been
               very
               near
               being
               cast
               away
               in
               two
               Ships
               ,
               but
               the
               sight
               of
               this
               fall
               of
               the
               River
               was
               more
               dreadful
               to
               me
               ,
               than
               any
               thing
               I
               ever
               saw
               at
               Sea.
               
            
             
               The
               Nineteenth
               of
               June
               we
               pass'd
               down
               Two
               of
               these
               Falls
               ,
               at
               the
               first
               they
               sent
               the
               Women
               away
               by
               Land
               ,
               and
               cross'd
               the
               River
               to
               know
               of
               a
               Galibi
               that
               was
               lately
               come
               thither
               to
               make
               a
               new
               Cottage
               ,
               what
               course
               they
               had
               best
               take
               to
               avoid
               being
               over-set
               ,
               because
               the
               Bed
               of
               the
               River
               declin'd
               ,
               so
               that
               it
               gave
               an
               extraordinary
               rapidity
               to
               the
               Stream
               ;
               and
               besides
               there
               were
               a
               great
               many
               Rocks
               under
               water
               ,
               against
               which
               we
               were
               liable
               to
               be
               dash'd
               ,
               and
               so
               cast
               away
               .
               And
               observing
               our
               Men
               were
               in
               a
               great
               perplexity
               in
               their
               minds
               about
               it
               ,
               notwithstanding
               all
               the
               directions
               this
               Man
               gave
               'em
               ,
               we
               intreated
               him
               to
               conduct
               us
               through
               this
               difficult
               passage
               ,
               promising
               him
               a
               Fishing-hook
               for
               his
               pains
               ,
               which
               he
               willingly
               undertook
               ,
               and
               happily
               perform'd
               .
               At
               the
               Second
               which
               was
               the
               last
               we
               met
               
               with
               upon
               the
               Aproague
               ,
               we
               all
               went
               ashore
               and
               walk'd
               along
               the
               River-side
               upon
               very
               uneven
               Rocks
               ,
               and
               the
               Nouragues
               held
               the
               Canoo
               by
               a
               Line
               which
               they
               tied
               behind
               it
               ,
               and
               so
               let
               it
               go
               gently
               down
               this
               place
               ,
               which
               is
               very
               dangerous
               at
               Low-water
               ,
               for
               the
               Flowing
               of
               the
               Tide
               covers
               it
               ,
               tho'
               't
               is
               Twenty
               Leagues
               up
               the
               River
               .
            
             
               After
               we
               had
               pass'd
               these
               many
               difficulties
               by
               the
               mercy
               of
               God
               ;
               we
               at
               last
               had
               no
               Cassave
               left
               ,
               no
               Meat
               nor
               Fish
               ,
               nor
               Ovicou
               ,
               when
               we
               were
               distant
               a
               days
               Voyage
               and
               a
               half
               from
               the
               Cottage
               of
               the
               Sapayes
               ,
               but
               God
               of
               his
               Goodness
               was
               pleas'd
               to
               make
               Provision
               for
               our
               great
               necessity
               ;
               for
               as
               we
               coasted
               along
               the
               River
               we
               saw
               a
               Dog
               barking
               ;
               upon
               which
               the
               Nouragues
               call'd
               out
               to
               know
               if
               any
               body
               were
               a
               Hunting
               ,
               and
               presently
               to
               their
               great
               joy
               perceiv'd
               it
               was
               their
               good
               Friend
               ,
               the
               Chief
               of
               the
               Sapayes
               ,
               who
               came
               to
               us
               ,
               and
               saluted
               us
               all
               with
               demonstrations
               of
               Friendship
               .
               We
               did
               what
               the
               Nouragues
               would
               not
               venture
               to
               do
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               to
               ask
               him
               to
               sell
               us
               some
               Provision
               ;
               acquainting
               him
               ,
               that
               neither
               we
               nor
               the
               Nouragues
               had
               any
               left
               .
               When
               he
               understood
               in
               what
               necessity
               we
               were
               ,
               he
               sent
               to
               fetch
               his
               Canoo
               ,
               which
               was
               a
               large
               one
               ,
               and
               very
               well
               stor'd
               with
               
                 Cassave
                 ,
                 Ovicou
              
               ,
               Meat
               and
               Fish
               (
               24
               )
               Boucaneed
               ;
               which
               he
               furnish'd
               us
               and
               the
               Nouragues
               ,
               
               and
               we
               paid
               him
               for
               it
               immediately
               .
               He
               told
               us
               his
               Lodging
               was
               a
               League
               off
               ,
               whither
               he
               would
               come
               and
               meet
               us
               in
               the
               Evening
               ,
               and
               that
               because
               his
               little
               half-cover'd
               Hut
               had
               only
               room
               enough
               for
               him
               and
               his
               Men
               ,
               we
               must
               make
               another
               for
               our selves
               .
               He
               came
               according
               to
               his
               word
               toward
               Night
               ,
               and
               the
               next
               day
               he
               made
               Father
               Bechamel
               and
               me
               go
               into
               his
               Canoo
               ,
               because
               he
               thought
               the
               
                 Nouragues
                 Canoo
              
               was
               over-loaded
               .
            
             
               On
               the
               21st
               we
               Arriv'd
               at
               the
               Cottage
               of
               this
               Chief
               of
               the
               Sapayes
               ,
               where
               we
               were
               kindly
               entertain'd
               .
               We
               were
               no
               sooner
               got
               thither
               ,
               but
               we
               began
               to
               think
               how
               we
               should
               get
               from
               thence
               to
               Cayenne
               ;
               and
               we
               could
               think
               of
               no
               better
               way
               ,
               than
               to
               perswade
               the
               Chief
               of
               the
               Sapayes
               to
               conduct
               us
               thither
               himself
               ,
               which
               would
               have
               taken
               up
               Three
               Weeks
               time
               ,
               and
               would
               have
               been
               a
               great
               charge
               to
               us
               ,
               but
               the
               Providence
               of
               God
               had
               made
               Provision
               for
               us
               ,
               for
               the
               next
               day
               we
               were
               inform'd
               that
               a
               Chief
               of
               the
               Galibis
               would
               come
               the
               day
               following
               to
               take
               a
               Sapaye
               with
               him
               to
               go
               to
               Cayenne
               ,
               and
               from
               thence
               to
               Maroui
               ,
               from
               whence
               he
               was
               to
               fetch
               his
               Son
               ,
               who
               had
               been
               there
               with
               the
               Sapayes
               for
               Two
               Years
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Son
               of
               the
               Chief
               of
               the
               Sapayes
               .
               He
               was
               willing
               to
               take
               us
               in
               his
               Canoo
               for
               a
               small
               matter
               ,
               and
               we
               went
               to
               
               Lodge
               at
               a
               small
               Island
               ,
               which
               is
               in
               the
               River
               at
               a
               pretty
               good
               distance
               from
               the
               Sea
               ;
               here
               we
               stay'd
               the
               Twenty
               fourth
               of
               June
               .
               I
               observ'd
               that
               the
               Sea
               came
               up
               here
               Eight
               Foot
               high
               ,
               and
               concluded
               from
               thence
               ,
               because
               it
               covers
               the
               last
               Fall
               of
               the
               River
               ,
               that
               it
               declines
               but
               Eight
               Foot
               in
               the
               space
               of
               Twenty
               five
               Leagues
               from
               the
               Sea.
               In
               the
               Night
               they
               heard
               the
               Cry
               of
               a
               Bird
               ,
               and
               said
               to
               one
               another
               in
               the
               Galibis
               Tongue
               ,
               
                 Hark
                 how
                 the
                 Devil
                 cries
              
               ;
               I
               reprov'd
               'em
               ,
               telling
               'em
               they
               were
               mistaken
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               Devil
               had
               no
               Body
               ,
               but
               was
               a
               Spirit
               as
               our
               Souls
               are
               ,
               which
               they
               confess
               to
               be
               Invisible
               and
               Immortal
               ,
               which
               yet
               they
               do
               not
               say
               of
               the
               Devils
               ,
               but
               pretend
               that
               their
               Physicians
               or
               Piaies
               kill
               'em
               with
               great
               Clubs
               .
               
                 The
                 Nouragues
              
               of
               one
               Cottage
               made
               the
               Figure
               of
               a
               Man
               in
               the
               the
               way
               by
               which
               they
               thought
               the
               Devil
               came
               to
               their
               Cottage
               in
               the
               Night
               ,
               to
               make
               'em
               Sick
               ;
               that
               so
               while
               he
               stop'd
               at
               this
               Fantome
               and
               took
               it
               to
               be
               a
               Nourague
               ,
               the
               Piaies
               that
               watch'd
               for
               him
               might
               take
               their
               opportunity
               ,
               when
               they
               saw
               him
               ,
               to
               knock
               him
               on
               the
               head
               .
               We
               parted
               from
               this
               Island
               to
               go
               and
               lodge
               at
               Co
               ,
               from
               whence
               the
               next
               day
               we
               saw
               a
               great
               many
               Canoos
               of
               the
               Galibis
               at
               Sea
               ,
               which
               were
               going
               toward
               the
               River
               of
               Amazons
               ,
               these
               the
               Master
               of
               our
               Canoo
               ,
               and
               the
               Sapaye
               
               went
               to
               visit
               ,
               drawing
               their
               Canoos
               along
               over
               the
               Mud
               at
               Low-water
               ,
               and
               found
               in
               one
               of
               'em
               the
               Two
               Young
               Men
               they
               were
               going
               to
               seek
               for
               at
               Maroui
               .
               They
               had
               now
               nothing
               to
               do
               but
               to
               carry
               us
               to
               Cayenne
               ;
               and
               because
               the
               Sea
               was
               so
               rough
               ,
               that
               they
               could
               not
               well
               bear
               up
               against
               it
               ,
               we
               desir'd
               'em
               to
               set
               us
               ashore
               at
               Mahuti
               ,
               the
               first
               place
               we
               could
               land
               at
               in
               the
               Island
               of
               Cayenne
               ,
               which
               they
               compass'd
               with
               a
               great
               deal
               of
               Labour
               .
               As
               soon
               as
               I
               set
               my
               Foot
               upon
               the
               Sand
               ,
               I
               fell
               down
               upon
               my
               Knees
               to
               thank
               God
               for
               the
               Protection
               he
               had
               favour'd
               us
               with
               for
               a
               Hundred
               and
               Seventy
               Leagues
               ,
               since
               we
               came
               from
               the
               Country
               of
               the
               Acoquas
               ,
               for
               our
               whole
               Voyage
               was
               Two
               hundred
               and
               forty
               Leagues
               .
               We
               went
               to
               lodge
               at
               the
               House
               of
               Mons
               .
               Fontain
               ,
               whose
               Estate
               lies
               in
               this
               part
               of
               the
               Island
               ;
               and
               he
               receiv'd
               us
               with
               great
               Joy.
               The
               next
               day
               being
               the
               Twenty
               seventh
               ,
               Father
               Bechet
               came
               to
               fetch
               us
               with
               Two
               Horses
               ,
               and
               we
               borrow'd
               another
               of
               (
               25
               )
               Monsieur
               Fontaine
               ,
               and
               so
               Arriv'd
               at
               the
               Fort
               of
               Cayenne
               ,
               where
               the
               Governor
               was
               pleas'd
               to
               treat
               us
               with
               all
               imaginable
               Friendship
               .
               And
               all
               the
               People
               came
               about
               us
               ,
               to
               see
               us
               ,
               and
               to
               signifie
               the
               geat
               affection
               they
               had
               to
               us
               .
               In
               three
               Months
               I
               hope
               by
               the
               Grace
               of
               God
               to
               Visit
               the
               Marshes
               of
               the
               Aracarets
               ,
               the
               Palicours
               ,
               
               the
               Mayes
               ,
               the
               Marones
               ,
               and
               the
               Coussades
               ,
               whose
               Habitations
               stand
               more
               thick
               and
               close
               one
               to
               another
               ,
               than
               those
               I
               have
               given
               an
               account
               of
               in
               this
               Relation
               .
               Here
               's
               a
               great
               Field
               open'd
               to
               the
               Gospel-Labourers
               ,
               into
               which
               I
               am
               ready
               to
               conduct
               those
               that
               are
               willing
               to
               employ
               themselves
               in
               it
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               to
               discover
               to
               'em
               a
               great
               many
               other
               Nations
               :
               Being
               fully
               resolv'd
               by
               the
               Grace
               of
               God
               to
               expose
               my
               Life
               for
               so
               Glorious
               a
               purpose
               ,
               as
               the
               Propagation
               of
               the
               Gospel
               ,
               and
               the
               Conversion
               of
               such
               Numbers
               of
               People
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               NOTES
               UPON
               THE
               TRAVELS
               OF
               Father
               JOHN
               GRILLET
               ,
               AND
               Father
               FRANCIS
               BECHAMEL
               ,
               Jesuits
               ,
               INTO
               GVIANA
               .
            
             
               Note
               (
               1
               )
               in
               the
               Letter
               .
            
             
               A
               Fort
               which
               the
               Dutch
               took
               from
               the
               English
               Fourteen
               or
               Fifteen
               Year
               ago
               ,
               on
               which
               the
               English
               Colony
               depends
               ,
               which
               is
               pretty
               Numerous
               ,
               and
               was
               Establish'd
               there
               Eight
               or
               Ten
               Years
               before
               under
               the
               Command
               of
               the
               Lord
               Willoughby
               .
               This
               Fort
               was
               built
               by
               the
               French
               in
               1644
               ,
               they
               quitted
               it
               in
               1646
               ,
               for
               the
               Reasons
               that
               have
               been
               reported
               in
               divers
               Relations
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 2
                 )
                 P.
              
               3.
               
               This
               River
               discharges
               it self
               into
               the
               Sea
               on
               the
               East-side
               of
               the
               Cayenne
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 3
                 )
                 Ibid.
              
               Of
               Ovicou
               they
               make
               a
               sort
               of
               Drink
               of
               the
               Consistence
               and
               Colour
               
               of
               Milk
               ,
               by
               steeping
               it
               in
               Water
               ,
               it
               will
               keep
               a
               Month
               or
               Six
               Weeks
               in
               a
               kind
               of
               Baskets
               lin'd
               with
               the
               Leaves
               of
               
               Bonana-Trees
               ,
               which
               are
               4
               or
               5
               Foot
               long
               ,
               and
               above
               2
               Foot
               wide
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 4
                 )
                 Ibid.
              
               The
               Brother
               of
               the
               Marquis
               
                 de
                 la
                 Barre
              
               ,
               who
               was
               formerly
               Governor
               ,
               and
               the
               King's
               Lieutenant
               General
               in
               the
               American
               Islands
               ,
               both
               by
               Sea
               and
               Land
               ,
               and
               is
               now
               a
               Captain
               of
               one
               of
               his
               Majesty's
               Ships
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 5
                 )
                 P.
              
               4.
               
               The
               Mouth
               of
               this
               River
               is
               14
               Leagues
               Eastward
               from
               Cayenne
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 6
                 )
                 P.
              
               5.
               
               This
               is
               one
               of
               the
               Nations
               that
               fled
               into
               the
               Country
               of
               the
               Galibis
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 7
                 )
                 Ibid.
              
               In
               these
               Huts
               or
               Cottages
               the
               Indians
               hang
               their
               Hamocks
               or
               Cotton-beds
               when
               the
               Sun
               sets
               ,
               in
               which
               they
               repose
               themselves
               all
               Night
               .
               They
               ordinarily
               rise
               with
               the
               Sun
               ,
               and
               then
               their
               Wives
               take
               down
               their
               Beds
               and
               Hamocks
               ,
               and
               hang
               'em
               in
               the
               Carbet
               ,
               which
               is
               their
               kind
               of
               Hall
               or
               Out-house
               ,
               the
               Props
               of
               which
               not
               only
               serve
               to
               support
               the
               Roof
               ,
               which
               is
               made
               of
               Palm-leaves
               ,
               but
               also
               to
               hang
               up
               all
               the
               Beds
               of
               the
               Men
               and
               Boys
               in
               the
               Family
               ,
               and
               those
               of
               Strangers
               ,
               when
               at
               any
               time
               they
               entertain
               '
               em
               .
               This
               Carbet
               is
               plac'd
               Ten
               or
               Twelve
               paces
               on
               the
               upper-side
               of
               the
               Cottage
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Women
               always
               leave
               their
               own
               Beds
               .
               At
               one
               end
               of
               the
               Cottage
               
               they
               commonly
               make
               Cassave
               ,
               and
               their
               Liquor
               Ovicou
               ;
               this
               part
               of
               it
               serves
               for
               the
               Kitchin
               ,
               and
               for
               all
               the
               Work
               that
               belongs
               to
               the
               subsistance
               of
               the
               Family
               .
               Some
               of
               these
               Cottages
               have
               a
               Loft
               above
               to
               hang
               their
               Beds
               in
               in
               the
               Night
               ;
               and
               then
               the
               lower-part
               of
               the
               Hut
               serves
               for
               the
               Carbet
               ;
               where
               the
               Men
               spend
               the
               day
               (
               when
               they
               are
               at
               home
               )
               in
               making
               their
               Bows
               and
               Arrows
               ,
               and
               what
               other
               conveniencies
               they
               want
               ;
               for
               their
               business
               is
               different
               from
               that
               of
               the
               Women
               in
               these
               Parts
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               in
               most
               other
               Places
               .
               But
               there
               's
               one
               thing
               belonging
               to
               the
               other
               Sex
               which
               the
               Men
               have
               usurp'd
               ,
               that
               deserves
               to
               be
               treated
               on
               in
               a
               particular
               Article
               ,
               of
               which
               I
               shall
               only
               speak
               a
               word
               or
               two
               here
               by
               the
               by
               .
               They
               go
               to
               bed
               ,
               when
               their
               Wives
               are
               deliver'd
               ,
               and
               receive
               the
               Compliments
               of
               their
               happy
               delivery
               as
               if
               they
               had
               endur'd
               the
               pain
               ,
               and
               accordingly
               answer
               their
               Visitors
               as
               the
               Women
               do
               on
               the
               like
               occasion
               in
               other
               places
               .
               This
               Custom
               is
               not
               peculiar
               to
               the
               Galibis
               ,
               but
               is
               us'd
               in
               a
               great
               many
               other
               Nations
               of
               Brasil
               ,
               and
               in
               other
               parts
               of
               America
               .
            
             
               'T
               is
               farther
               to
               be
               noted
               ,
               that
               their
               Carbets
               are
               the
               places
               where
               they
               hold
               their
               Consultations
               ,
               and
               deliberate
               on
               their
               most
               weighty
               Affairs
               ,
               which
               is
               ordinarily
               done
               with
               great
               Solemnity
               ;
               those
               that
               are
               concern'd
               and
               invited
               ,
               assembling
               together
               from
               divers
               places
               for
               this
               purpose
               .
            
             
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 8
                 )
                 Ibid.
              
               This
               Nation
               dwells
               near
               the
               mouth
               of
               the
               River
               of
               Amazons
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 9
                 )
                 P.
              
               7.
               
               This
               is
               the
               ordinary
               Bread
               of
               the
               Country
               ,
               made
               of
               a
               sort
               of
               Root
               ,
               which
               they
               scrape
               ,
               and
               then
               press
               to
               get
               the
               Water
               out
               of
               it
               ,
               which
               is
               a
               cold
               Poison
               ,
               and
               will
               kill
               Men
               ,
               or
               Beasts
               if
               they
               drink
               but
               half
               a
               glass
               of
               it
               ;
               which
               for
               all
               that
               may
               be
               put
               in
               Sauces
               and
               Pottage
               ,
               and
               gives
               'em
               a
               better
               relish
               ,
               provided
               it
               be
               but
               boyl'd
               tho'
               never
               so
               little
               ,
               afterwhich
               it
               has
               no
               pernicious
               quality
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 10
                 )
                 P.
                 11.
                 
                 Piaie
              
               is
               a
               Name
               which
               the
               Galibis
               give
               their
               Physicians
               ,
               who
               besides
               the
               practise
               of
               Physick
               pretend
               also
               to
               Divination
               ;
               but
               they
               profess
               neither
               ,
               till
               they
               have
               made
               divers
               Experiments
               ,
               one
               of
               which
               is
               so
               dangerous
               that
               it
               often
               makes
               'em
               burst
               .
               They
               stamp
               the
               green
               Leaves
               of
               Tobacco
               ,
               and
               squeeze
               out
               the
               Juice
               of
               it
               ,
               of
               which
               they
               drink
               the
               quantity
               of
               a
               large
               Glass
               full
               ;
               so
               that
               none
               but
               those
               that
               are
               of
               a
               very
               robust
               Constitution
               ,
               who
               try
               this
               practise
               upon
               themselves
               ,
               escape
               with
               their
               Lives
               .
               Besides
               divers
               sorts
               of
               Plants
               ,
               Gumms
               ,
               and
               Wood
               they
               use
               to
               cure
               diseases
               and
               wounds
               ,
               they
               have
               a
               way
               of
               sucking
               their
               Patients
               in
               that
               part
               of
               the
               Body
               in
               which
               they
               feel
               their
               pain
               ;
               and
               this
               method
               is
               most
               commonly
               very
               successful
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 11
                 )
                 P.
              
               15.
               
               The
               reason
               why
               they
               employ
               so
               much
               time
               in
               making
               their
               Canoos
               
               is
               because
               after
               they
               have
               chosen
               and
               fell'd
               a
               Tree
               ,
               and
               have
               with
               a
               Hatchet
               made
               it
               hollow
               ,
               about
               the
               breadth
               of
               half
               a
               Foot
               ,
               and
               about
               the
               same
               depth
               through
               the
               whole
               length
               of
               it
               ,
               they
               hollow
               the
               rest
               of
               it
               with
               a
               gentle
               Fire
               ;
               and
               this
               work
               ,
               which
               goes
               on
               very
               slowly
               ;
               continues
               in
               proportion
               to
               the
               bulk
               of
               the
               piece
               of
               Timber
               ,
               and
               to
               the
               length
               they
               give
               their
               Canoo
               .
               This
               way
               of
               making
               their
               Canoos
               is
               very
               tedious
               ,
               but
               tends
               much
               to
               their
               duration
               ,
               so
               that
               they
               scarce
               ever
               rot
               ,
               because
               after
               they
               are
               thus
               made
               ,
               the
               Worm
               never
               touches
               'em
               ,
               which
               is
               also
               partly
               owing
               to
               the
               hardness
               of
               the
               Wood
               ;
               there
               being
               scarce
               any
               betwixt
               the
               Tropicks
               but
               has
               this
               quality
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 12
                 )
                 P.
              
               17.
               
               The
               Commodities
               that
               have
               vent
               among
               these
               Nations
               are
               Hatchets
               ,
               Bills
               ,
               Knives
               ,
               Looking-glasses
               ,
               Hooks
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 13
                 )
                 P.
              
               19.
               
               'T
               is
               the
               Custom
               of
               this
               Nation
               to
               use
               their
               Children
               after
               this
               manner
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 14
                 )
                 Ibid.
              
               In
               the
               Year
               1625
               ,
               the
               English
               attempted
               to
               make
               a
               Settlement
               at
               Cayenne
               ,
               &
               these
               Three
               who
               were
               devour'd
               by
               the
               Indians
               were
               probably
               some
               of
               'em
               ,
               for
               their
               Establishment
               did
               not
               succeed
               ,
               they
               being
               defeated
               by
               the
               Indians
               ,
               for
               not
               managing
               themselves
               well
               towards
               '
               em
               .
               Their
               Principal
               Plantation
               was
               at
               Cayenne
               ,
               upon
               the
               River
               Remire
               .
               The
               same
               disappointment
               befel
               the
               Dutch
               some
               Years
               after
               .
            
             
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 15
                 )
                 P.
              
               21.
               
               The
               Poop
               of
               great
               Canoos
               being
               commonly
               joyn'd
               to
               the
               rest
               ,
               they
               caulk
               it
               with
               a
               sort
               of
               fat
               Earth
               ,
               which
               the
               Water
               in
               a
               little
               time
               washes
               away
               ,
               and
               therefore
               they
               are
               oblig'd
               to
               put
               it
               in
               a
               fresh
               from
               time
               to
               time
               ;
               and
               this
               they
               call
               mending
               or
               refitting
               a
               Canoo
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 16
                 )
                 P.
              
               22.
               
               The
               mouth
               of
               this
               River
               enters
               into
               the
               Amazone
               ,
               and
               into
               the
               River
               of
               Cayenne
               ,
               about
               20
               Leagues
               from
               the
               Aproague
               ;
               't
               was
               from
               hence
               that
               Mons
               .
               Lecy
               ,
               the
               Governor
               of
               Cayenne
               ,
               with
               10
               Men
               drove
               away
               6
               or
               700
               of
               the
               Dutch
               ,
               in
               the
               last
               Wars
               we
               had
               with
               them
               ;
               tho'
               they
               had
               a
               Fort
               there
               with
               some
               pieces
               of
               Canon
               :
               At
               the
               same
               time
               they
               were
               likewise
               twice
               driven
               from
               the
               River
               Aproague
               ,
               where
               they
               also
               had
               a
               Fort
               defended
               with
               Canon
               .
            
             
               Note
               (
               17
               )
               P.
               25.
               
               Tamouci
               ,
               or
               Tamechi
               signifies
               Old
               ,
               and
               Cabo
               signifies
               Heaven
               
                 in
                 the
              
               Galibian
               Tongue
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 18
                 )
                 P.
                 27.
                 
                 Line
              
               9.
               
               When
               the
               English
               came
               from
               Barbadoes
               ,
               with
               4
               or
               5
               Frigats
               ,
               to
               make
               a
               descent
               upon
               Cayenne
               in
               the
               Year
               1666
               ,
               Father
               Grillet
               was
               Superior
               of
               the
               Jesuits
               there
               ,
               and
               was
               some
               time
               amongst
               the
               English
               ,
               who
               left
               him
               there
               with
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Colony
               when
               they
               went
               away
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 19
                 )
                 P.
              
               28.
               
               'T
               is
               true
               ,
               they
               drink
               but
               little
               or
               nothing
               at
               their
               ordinary
               meals
               till
               they
               have
               done
               eating
               ,
               and
               then
               commonly
               
               drink
               one
               draught
               ;
               but
               when
               they
               assemble
               together
               ,
               either
               for
               Warlike
               Enterprizes
               ,
               or
               to
               begin
               a
               Canoo
               ,
               or
               to
               launch
               it
               when
               't
               is
               made
               ,
               and
               when
               they
               make
               a
               Chief
               ,
               or
               admit
               him
               into
               their
               Council
               ,
               after
               they
               have
               expos'd
               him
               to
               several
               rude
               kind
               of
               Trials
               ;
               they
               have
               extraordinary
               Rejoycings
               ,
               which
               frequently
               hold
               3
               or
               4
               days
               ,
               continuing
               till
               they
               have
               drank
               up
               all
               their
               Liquor
               ;
               which
               is
               what
               the
               French
               call
               
                 Faire
                 un
                 Vin.
              
               For
               these
               occasions
               they
               make
               3
               or
               4
               different
               sorts
               of
               Drink
               ,
               some
               of
               which
               become
               very
               strong
               by
               fermentation
               ,
               as
               that
               which
               they
               call
               Palinot
               ,
               which
               they
               make
               with
               Cassave
               that
               is
               bak'd
               more
               than
               ordinary
               :
               The
               pieces
               of
               which
               they
               pile
               up
               one
               upon
               another
               when
               they
               are
               very
               hot
               ,
               and
               keep
               'em
               thus
               till
               they
               begin
               to
               be
               mouldy
               ,
               after
               which
               they
               mix
               them
               with
               Potatoes
               ,
               which
               they
               cut
               in
               small
               pieces
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Cassave
               ,
               and
               put
               them
               in
               great
               Earthen
               Jarrs
               ,
               then
               they
               pour
               a
               proportionate
               quantity
               of
               Water
               upon
               'em
               ,
               and
               so
               leave
               all
               to
               ferment
               and
               work
               together
               till
               this
               Liquor
               is
               as
               strong
               as
               they
               desire
               ;
               which
               is
               after
               about
               5
               or
               6
               days
               fermentation
               .
               They
               strain
               it
               before
               they
               use
               it
               ,
               and
               then
               't
               is
               of
               the
               Colour
               and
               Consistence
               of
               Beer
               ,
               of
               a
               much
               better
               tast
               ,
               but
               much
               more
               heady
               and
               intoxicating
               .
               They
               have
               besides
               a
               great
               many
               sorts
               of
               drink
               ,
               the
               diversity
               of
               which
               Results
               
               from
               the
               different
               Fruits
               of
               which
               they
               make
               '
               em
               .
               But
               that
               which
               they
               ordinarily
               make
               use
               of
               ,
               is
               as
               white
               as
               Milk
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               same
               consistence
               .
               It
               is
               very
               refreshing
               and
               nourishing
               ,
               and
               is
               compos'd
               of
               Cassave
               bak'd
               after
               their
               ordinary
               manner
               ,
               and
               Potatoes
               boil'd
               with
               it
               ,
               till
               they
               are
               of
               the
               consistence
               of
               Paste
               ,
               this
               they
               put
               into
               Baskets
               lin'd
               with
               the
               Leaves
               of
               
               Bonano-trees
               ,
               in
               which
               it
               keeps
               good
               for
               a
               Month
               ,
               and
               then
               begins
               to
               grow
               sower
               ,
               but
               not
               quite
               so
               soon
               if
               it
               be
               kept
               in
               a
               cool
               place
               .
               When
               they
               use
               it
               they
               steep
               as
               much
               as
               they
               have
               present
               occasion
               for
               in
               a
               sufficient
               quantity
               of
               Water
               ,
               and
               if
               they
               are
               at
               leisure
               they
               strain
               it
               :
               But
               they
               often
               only
               steep
               it
               ,
               and
               drink
               it
               without
               straining
               ,
               and
               if
               Sugar
               or
               Sugar-cains
               bruis'd
               be
               mix'd
               with
               it
               ,
               it
               comes
               very
               near
               the
               tast
               ,
               and
               colour
               ,
               and
               consistence
               of
               Orgeate
               ,
               the
               use
               of
               which
               the
               French
               have
               taken
               from
               the
               Italians
               some
               Years
               since
               .
               This
               drink
               is
               call'd
               Ovacou
               upon
               the
               Continent
               ;
               and
               Ovicou
               in
               the
               Islands
               .
               'T
               is
               believ'd
               that
               the
               reason
               why
               the
               Europeans
               can
               never
               attain
               to
               make
               it
               so
               good
               as
               the
               Indians
               do
               ,
               is
               because
               these
               chew
               the
               Potatoes
               and
               Cassave
               ,
               before
               they
               boil
               'em
               together
               ,
               and
               understand
               better
               what
               degree
               of
               boyling
               they
               require
               ,
               to
               give
               this
               Liquor
               its
               greatest
               perfection
               .
               But
               the
               seeing
               this
               way
               of
               its
               preparation
               turns
               ones
               stomach
               more
               than
               the
               reading
               of
               it
               ;
               and
               
               the
               Wine
               that
               washes
               the
               dirty
               Feet
               of
               the
               Grape-gatherers
               as
               they
               tread
               the
               Grapes
               is
               no
               less
               nauseous
               ,
               but
               the
               Fermentation
               both
               of
               the
               one
               and
               the
               other
               corrects
               all
               this
               uncleanliness
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 20
                 )
                 P.
              
               30.
               
               This
               is
               their
               common
               way
               of
               expressing
               things
               they
               cannot
               number
               ,
               saying
               Enoura
               ,
               which
               signifies
               [
               
                 thus
                 much
              
               .
               ]
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 21
                 )
                 P.
              
               31.
               
               This
               Nation
               is
               situated
               towards
               the
               Source
               of
               the
               River
               Maroni
               ,
               the
               Mouth
               of
               which
               is
               about
               50
               Leagues
               from
               Cayenne
               Westward
               ,
               and
               30
               from
               the
               River
               Surinam
               ;
               where
               the
               Dutch
               have
               a
               Fort
               ,
               which
               the
               French
               built
               in
               the
               Year
               ,
               1644
               ,
               and
               were
               oblig'd
               to
               quit
               in
               1646
               ,
               for
               want
               of
               Help
               from
               France
               .
               This
               Fort
               is
               3
               Leagues
               from
               the
               Mouth
               of
               the
               Surinam
               ,
               on
               the
               Right-hand
               as
               you
               enter
               into
               it
               .
               The
               Lord
               Willoughby
               retir'd
               thither
               in
               1648
               ,
               or
               1649
               ,
               with
               a
               Colony
               of
               1000
               or
               1200
               English
               ,
               who
               endeavour'd
               to
               support
               the
               Interest
               of
               the
               King
               of
               England
               against
               Cromwell
               ,
               in
               the
               Barbadoes
               ;
               that
               is
               ,
               those
               of
               the
               Antilles
               ,
               or
               Antego
               Islands
               ,
               which
               the
               English
               have
               ;
               for
               the
               English
               call
               all
               those
               Islands
               ,
               the
               Barbadoes
               ,
               as
               the
               French
               call
               all
               the
               Antilles
               they
               possess
               ,
               St.
               
               Christopher's
               Islands
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 22
                 )
                 P.
              
               32.
               
               There
               are
               several
               sorts
               of
               Tools
               proper
               for
               the
               Indians
               ,
               of
               the
               Value
               of
               about
               Half
               a
               Crown
               ,
               Two
               Shillings
               ,
               Twenty-pence
               ,
               Fifteen-pence
               ,
               &c.
               as
               Hatchets
               
               or
               Axes
               ,
               Bills
               ,
               with
               Wooden
               Handles
               ,
               others
               with
               Iron
               Handles
               ,
               in
               the
               Socket
               of
               which
               they
               may
               be
               fix'd
               or
               taken
               off
               at
               Pleasure
               ;
               and
               such
               little
               Planing-Axes
               ,
               as
               Cooper's
               Use
               ;
               this
               Tool
               serves
               the
               Indians
               in
               making
               their
               Canoos
               ,
               particularly
               in
               hollowing
               the
               inside
               of
               the
               Tree
               ,
               they
               design
               for
               that
               use
               :
               They
               also
               use
               Plains
               to
               smooth
               the
               outside
               of
               the
               Canoos
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               for
               other
               Works
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 23
                 )
                 Ibid.
              
               A
               Hamock
               is
               an
               Indian
               Bed
               ,
               made
               of
               Cotton
               ;
               tho'
               they
               all
               hang
               'em
               up
               by
               the
               two
               ends
               ,
               when
               they
               would
               lie
               in
               'em
               ,
               sometimes
               upon
               2
               Trees
               ,
               at
               10
               or
               12
               Foot
               distance
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               at
               two
               of
               the
               Posts
               that
               support
               their
               Houses
               ,
               or
               their
               Carbets
               ;
               yet
               they
               differ
               very
               much
               both
               in
               the
               Stuff
               and
               Work.
               For
               Instance
               ,
               All
               the
               Hamocks
               that
               are
               made
               from
               the
               River
               of
               Amazons
               to
               the
               Orenoque
               ,
               are
               of
               Cotton
               ,
               made
               full
               ,
               and
               almost
               all
               without
               Fringe
               on
               the
               sides
               ;
               most
               of
               'em
               colour'd
               with
               Rocou
               ,
               or
               red
               Paint
               ,
               quarter'd
               in
               Flourishes
               that
               are
               made
               with
               pretty
               good
               Proportion
               and
               exactness
               ;
               these
               are
               most
               esteem'd
               for
               Use
               ,
               especially
               in
               the
               Islands
               ,
               because
               they
               last
               a
               great
               while
               ;
               and
               are
               stronger
               than
               those
               of
               Brazil
               ,
               which
               are
               so
               thin
               ,
               one
               may
               generally
               see
               through
               'em
               ,
               and
               are
               made
               of
               twin'd
               Cotton
               ,
               much
               finer
               than
               those
               of
               Guiana
               ,
               which
               are
               also
               made
               of
               twisted
               
               Cotton-thread
               ,
               but
               courser
               .
               Those
               of
               Brazil
               have
               all
               a
               great
               Fringe
               on
               each
               side
               ,
               and
               have
               for
               the
               most
               part
               very
               much
               work
               about
               'em
               ,
               the
               Brazilian
               Women
               are
               so
               ingenious
               ,
               that
               there
               is
               scarce
               two
               of
               their
               Cotton
               Beds
               in
               a
               hundred
               ,
               which
               are
               brought
               from
               the
               same
               place
               ,
               that
               are
               made
               just
               alike
               :
               The
               Galibis
               paint
               most
               of
               'em
               Red
               ,
               after
               they
               are
               made
               ,
               and
               while
               they
               are
               yet
               upon
               the
               Loom
               .
               The
               Brazilian
               Women
               make
               scarce
               any
               but
               white
               Hamocks
               ;
               and
               if
               they
               mix
               either
               Red
               ,
               or
               Blue
               ,
               or
               Green
               ,
               with
               the
               White
               ,
               or
               all
               of
               'em
               together
               (
               as
               they
               do
               frequently
               )
               they
               work
               'em
               with
               Thread
               ready
               dyed
               ,
               and
               so
               the
               Men
               don't
               touch
               'em
               ;
               whereas
               in
               Guiana
               these
               Beds
               are
               painted
               only
               by
               the
               Men
               ,
               the
               Women
               leaving
               this
               Work
               to
               them
               ,
               when
               they
               have
               finished
               the
               Web
               :
               They
               weave
               'em
               after
               the
               following
               Manner
               ,
               as
               well
               in
               Brezil
               as
               in
               Guiana
               .
               All
               their
               Implements
               are
               two
               round
               Sticks
               ,
               about
               8
               or
               9
               Foot
               long
               ,
               and
               3
               or
               4
               Inches
               Diameter
               ;
               the
               two
               Ends
               of
               one
               of
               these
               round
               Sticks
               lie
               a-cross
               upon
               two
               Pieces
               of
               Wood
               ,
               about
               8
               or
               9
               Foot
               from
               the
               Ground
               ,
               more
               or
               less
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               Length
               the
               Work-woman
               is
               order'd
               ,
               or
               designs
               her self
               to
               make
               her
               Bed.
               The
               other
               round
               Stick
               hangs
               directly
               under
               this
               ,
               and
               't
               is
               to
               these
               two
               round
               Sticks
               that
               the
               Warp
               of
               the
               Hamock
               is
               fasten'd
               ,
               after
               which
               they
               have
               a
               kind
               of
               
               Shuttle
               ,
               which
               they
               put
               through
               the
               Threads
               ,
               to
               weave
               it
               after
               the
               Manner
               of
               our
               Gloth
               :
               But
               because
               they
               put
               their
               Shuttle
               through
               Thread
               by
               Thread
               ,
               one
               above
               and
               the
               other
               below
               ;
               this
               Work
               is
               extreamly
               tedious
               ,
               and
               has
               need
               of
               no
               less
               Patience
               than
               theirs
               .
            
             
               Those
               of
               Brazil
               having
               much
               more
               work
               about
               'em
               ,
               require
               the
               more
               Time
               and
               Industry
               to
               make
               'em
               ;
               but
               one
               sort
               and
               another
               are
               very
               much
               bought
               in
               the
               Islands
               ,
               where
               almost
               all
               the
               Europeans
               make
               use
               of
               'em
               ;
               and
               they
               are
               very
               good
               to
               use
               in
               Europe
               ,
               especially
               in
               those
               Places
               ,
               where
               they
               have
               but
               bad
               and
               uncleanly
               Beds
               ,
               particularly
               Spain
               and
               Italy
               ,
               whither
               one
               might
               carry
               'em
               without
               much
               trouble
               ,
               they
               being
               very
               light
               ;
               for
               the
               biggest
               of
               'em
               don't
               weigh
               above
               5
               or
               6
               Pound
               ,
               and
               those
               of
               Brazil
               not
               above
               half
               so
               much
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               thin
               and
               fine
               ;
               with
               2
               Pegs
               ,
               or
               2
               great
               Nails
               they
               may
               be
               hang'd
               up
               any
               where
               .
               The
               Indians
               place
               the
               Props
               of
               their
               Houses
               at
               a
               convenient
               distance
               one
               from
               another
               ,
               for
               this
               Purpose
               :
               They
               don't
               go
               out
               far
               into
               the
               Country
               without
               these
               Beds
               ;
               and
               there
               are
               always
               enough
               left
               in
               their
               Houses
               for
               Strangers
               .
            
             
               This
               sort
               of
               Beds
               is
               likewise
               us'd
               almost
               in
               all
               Southern
               America
               ,
               to
               carry
               wounded
               or
               sick
               People
               in
               ;
               those
               that
               are
               put
               to
               this
               
               use
               ,
               have
               at
               each
               end
               a
               great
               Ring
               ,
               through
               which
               they
               put
               a
               Pole
               of
               a
               sufficient
               length
               for
               the
               Bed
               ,
               and
               strong
               enough
               to
               bear
               a
               Man's
               Weight
               :
               And
               thus
               two
               Indians
               ,
               one
               before
               and
               t'other
               behind
               ,
               carry
               the
               sick
               Man
               ,
               supported
               in
               his
               Hamock
               ,
               by
               the
               Pole
               which
               they
               bear
               upon
               their
               Shoulders
               .
            
             
               The
               Arouagues
               ,
               the
               Araotes
               ,
               and
               most
               of
               the
               other
               Nations
               ,
               toward
               the
               River
               Orenoque
               ,
               make
               their
               Beds
               of
               the
               Thread
               of
               Pite
               ,
               in
               Net-work
               ,
               which
               they
               hang
               up
               after
               the
               Manner
               the
               other
               do
               their
               Cotton
               Hamocks
               .
               Pite
               is
               a
               kind
               of
               Hemp
               or
               Flax
               ,
               but
               much
               longer
               and
               whiter
               ,
               of
               this
               they
               make
               their
               Cords
               for
               the
               Tackling
               of
               the
               Masts
               and
               Sails
               of
               their
               Canoos
               ,
               as
               for
               other
               Occasions
               ;
               this
               Pite
               is
               also
               much
               lighter
               and
               stronger
               than
               Hemp
               ,
               and
               nothing
               near
               so
               apt
               to
               rot
               in
               the
               Water
               ;
               they
               make
               very
               fine
               Thread
               of
               it
               to
               mend
               their
               Arrows
               ,
               and
               for
               other
               such
               uses
               .
               Perhaps
               the
               
                 Aloe
                 Yuccae
                 foliis
                 ,
                 Catal.
                 Plantar
                 .
                 Jamaic
                 .
              
               p.
               118.
               
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 24
                 )
                 P.
                 40.
                 
                 Boucanee
              
               that
               is
               ,
               dry'd
               without
               being
               salted
               ,
               upon
               a
               kind
               of
               Grate
               made
               of
               Sticks
               ,
               plac'd
               about
               3
               Foot
               above
               the
               Fire
               ,
               they
               Boucanee
               Meat
               as
               well
               as
               Fish
               ;
               and
               the
               Word
               Boucaniers
               comes
               from
               this
               ,
               because
               they
               usually
               live
               upon
               Meat
               or
               Fish
               dress'd
               after
               this
               Manner
               .
               This
               Name
               was
               given
               to
               the
               French
               in
               the
               Island
               of
               St.
               Domingo
               ;
               because
               ,
               before
               they
               had
               
               Houses
               ,
               as
               they
               now
               have
               in
               the
               Western
               Part
               of
               the
               Island
               ,
               they
               liv'd
               only
               upon
               Beef
               thus
               dress'd
               ;
               and
               sold
               the
               Hides
               of
               the
               Bulls
               and
               Cows
               ,
               which
               they
               kill'd
               ,
               to
               the
               Captains
               of
               Ships
               ,
               for
               Guns
               ,
               Powder
               and
               Shot
               ,
               Shirts
               and
               Drawers
               ,
               which
               was
               all
               their
               Equipage
               .
               They
               were
               then
               Vagabonds
               in
               the
               Island
               ,
               and
               had
               no
               Houses
               ,
               but
               now
               are
               settled
               there
               ,
               and
               plant
               a
               great
               deal
               of
               Tobacco
               in
               spight
               of
               the
               Spaniards
               .
               They
               are
               under
               the
               Command
               of
               the
               Governour
               of
               
                 la
                 Tortue
              
               ,
               a
               small
               Island
               that
               lies
               near
               St.
               Domingo
               ,
               on
               the
               West-side
               :
               And
               't
               is
               suppos'd
               ,
               that
               the
               Number
               of
               these
               Boucaniers
               surpasses
               that
               of
               all
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               French
               in
               those
               American
               Islands
               ,
               call'd
               the
               Antilles
               .
               These
               Boucaniers
               have
               perform'd
               such
               surprizing
               Exploits
               against
               the
               Spaniards
               at
               Porto-Velo
               ,
               at
               Panama
               ,
               in
               
                 New
                 Spain
              
               ,
               and
               elsewhere
               ,
               that
               what
               we
               are
               told
               in
               the
               Accounts
               of
               the
               Country
               concerning
               'em
               are
               almost
               incredible
               ,
               but
               that
               a
               Spaniard
               has
               lately
               taken
               care
               to
               immortalize
               their
               Memory
               ;
               who
               has
               in
               his
               own
               Language
               given
               us
               the
               History
               of
               divers
               Expeditions
               of
               these
               Adventurers
               ,
               in
               a
               Volumn
               in
               4to
               .
               Printed
               at
               Cologne
               ,
               in
               the
               Year
               1681
               ,
               with
               Figures
               .
            
             
               
                 Note
                 (
                 25
                 )
                 P.
              
               43.
               
               Monsieur
               Fontaine
               is
               Commissary
               ,
               or
               Assistant
               to
               Monsieur
               Fouret
               ,
               who
               has
               very
               fine
               Sugar-Works
               at
               Cayenne
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               A
               RELATION
               OF
               GVIANA
               ,
               AND
               OF
               THE
               COMMERCE
               THAT
               May
               be
               Settled
               there
               .
            
             
               GViana
               is
               a
               great
               Country
               ,
               on
               the
               Continent
               of
               Northern
               America
               ,
               which
               extends
               in
               Latitude
               ,
               from
               the
               Equinoctial
               Line
               ,
               to
               the
               Tenth
               Degree
               ,
               on
               the
               side
               of
               the
               Arctique
               Pole
               ,
               and
               in
               Longitude
               from
               the
               River
               of
               Amazons
               to
               the
               Orenoque
               ,
               which
               contains
               near
               Four
               Hundred
               Leagues
               on
               the
               Sea-Coasts
               ,
               with
               an
               immense
               Stretch
               into
               the
               Countries
               that
               border
               upon
               Brazil
               ,
               on
               the
               South-side
               ,
               and
               
                 New
                 Audalousia
              
               on
               the
               West
               .
            
             
             
               Our
               French
               Seamen
               are
               wont
               to
               call
               Guiana
               by
               the
               Name
               ,
               of
               the
               North-Cape
               ,
               because
               that
               is
               the
               most
               remarkable
               Cape
               on
               that
               Coast
               ;
               and
               those
               that
               have
               Business
               in
               those
               Parts
               ,
               commonly
               put
               ashoar
               there
               ,
               to
               get
               some
               Knowledge
               of
               the
               Country
               .
            
             
               This
               Cape
               is
               between
               the
               2
               and
               3
               Degrees
               of
               Northern
               Latitude
               ,
               and
               between
               the
               345
               and
               the
               346
               Degrees
               of
               Longitude
               .
               This
               Part
               of
               the
               Continent
               is
               water'd
               with
               abundance
               of
               Rivers
               ,
               some
               of
               which
               will
               carry
               great
               Vessels
               up
               a
               considerable
               Way
               beyond
               the
               Mouths
               of
               'em
               ;
               and
               upon
               the
               Shoars
               of
               'em
               ;
               an
               infinite
               Number
               of
               Plantations
               might
               be
               made
               ,
               which
               would
               turn
               to
               a
               very
               considerable
               Account
               ,
               as
               well
               in
               regard
               of
               the
               Traffick
               that
               might
               be
               made
               with
               the
               Natives
               ,
               and
               the
               Fishing-Trade
               that
               might
               be
               carried
               on
               in
               these
               Rivers
               ,
               and
               along
               the
               Sea-Coast
               ,
               as
               of
               the
               Product
               of
               the
               Labour
               and
               Industry
               of
               the
               Planters
               .
            
             
               The
               divers
               Settlements
               the
               French
               have
               made
               there
               at
               different
               Times
               ,
               sufficiently
               prove
               the
               Possibility
               of
               living
               in
               good
               Correspondence
               with
               the
               Indians
               ,
               provided
               they
               be
               treated
               civilly
               ;
               and
               with
               more
               Honesty
               and
               Sincerity
               than
               *
               they
               have
               done
               ,
               who
               have
               hitherto
               had
               the
               Conduct
               of
               these
               kind
               of
               Enterprizes
               ,
               
               fall
               into
               their
               Hands
               .
               The
               ill
               Treatment
               the
               Natives
               have
               receiv'd
               from
               them
               ,
               for
               which
               they
               have
               sometimes
               made
               themselves
               amends
               by
               way
               of
               Reprizal
               ,
               have
               not
               render'd
               'em
               irreconcileable
               ,
               as
               we
               have
               been
               taught
               by
               Experience
               ,
               when
               we
               have
               made
               tryal
               of
               it
               on
               different
               Occasions
               .
            
             
               They
               are
               tolerably
               endued
               with
               good
               Sense
               ,
               which
               they
               have
               opportunity
               to
               cultivate
               and
               refine
               by
               a
               long
               Train
               of
               Experiences
               ,
               with
               which
               the
               many
               Years
               they
               live
               ,
               furnish
               'em
               :
               For
               they
               count
               a
               Man
               dies
               young
               ,
               if
               he
               don't
               live
               above
               100
               Years
               .
            
             
               They
               have
               a
               pretty
               good
               Judgment
               ,
               and
               have
               good
               rational
               Thoughts
               ,
               about
               things
               within
               the
               Compass
               of
               their
               Notice
               ,
               and
               within
               the
               Reach
               of
               the
               Light
               of
               Nature
               ,
               with
               which
               alone
               they
               are
               furnish'd
               .
            
             
               They
               observe
               their
               Words
               with
               great
               Exactness
               ,
               and
               inviolably
               practise
               the
               Maxim
               ,
               of
               not
               doing
               to
               others
               ,
               what
               they
               would
               not
               have
               others
               do
               to
               them
               .
            
             
               They
               are
               rather
               inclin'd
               to
               Peace
               than
               War
               ,
               which
               yet
               they
               engage
               in
               ,
               either
               when
               they
               have
               some
               just
               Quarrel
               ,
               or
               when
               Revenge
               or
               Honour
               prompt
               'em
               to
               it
               .
            
             
               They
               are
               sufficiently
               industrious
               ,
               and
               although
               they
               have
               both
               Patience
               and
               Skill
               in
               Fishing
               and
               Hunting
               ,
               yet
               they
               have
               the
               Fore-sight
               ,
               not
               to
               let
               their
               Subsistance
               depend
               upon
               Hazard
               ;
               and
               therefore
               willingly
               
               cultivate
               their
               Ground
               ,
               in
               proportion
               to
               their
               Occasions
               ,
               and
               the
               Bigness
               of
               their
               Families
               .
            
             
               Before
               Europe
               had
               furnish'd
               them
               with
               Tools
               of
               Iron
               and
               Steel
               for
               this
               Purpose
               ,
               they
               made
               themselves
               some
               of
               hard
               Stones
               ;
               but
               besides
               that
               the
               Labour
               of
               making
               'em
               was
               intolerable
               ,
               the
               Pains
               they
               took
               in
               using
               of
               'em
               ,
               was
               also
               so
               very
               great
               ,
               that
               they
               laid
               aside
               the
               use
               of
               'em
               ,
               as
               soon
               as
               they
               found
               they
               could
               do
               more
               Work
               in
               a
               Day
               with
               our
               Hatchets
               ,
               Bills
               and
               Knives
               ,
               than
               they
               could
               do
               in
               6
               Months
               with
               their
               Stone
               Tools
               ;
               which
               now
               are
               good
               for
               nothing
               ,
               but
               to
               be
               kept
               in
               the
               Closets
               of
               the
               Curious
               ,
               as
               so
               many
               Proofs
               of
               the
               wonderful
               Patience
               of
               those
               People
               .
            
             
               They
               speak
               a
               Tongue
               ,
               which
               is
               not
               only
               understood
               by
               all
               the
               Nations
               ,
               which
               the
               Spaniards
               on
               one
               side
               ,
               and
               the
               Portugese
               on
               the
               other
               ,
               have
               oblig'd
               to
               retire
               into
               Guiana
               ;
               but
               is
               also
               intelligible
               to
               the
               Carraibes
               ,
               who
               are
               the
               Natives
               of
               the
               Antilles
               ,
               and
               use
               this
               Language
               :
               Which
               I
               have
               known
               by
               the
               Indians
               of
               the
               Isles
               of
               St.
               Vincent
               ,
               St.
               Domingo
               ,
               and
               others
               where
               I
               had
               occasion
               to
               converse
               with
               them
               .
               In
               short
               ,
               this
               Language
               is
               spoken
               for
               the
               Space
               of
               above
               Four
               Hundred
               Leagues
               on
               the
               Sea-Coasts
               ,
               and
               in
               many
               Places
               above
               Sixscore
               Leagues
               up
               in
               the
               Country
               .
            
             
             
               They
               bring
               up
               all
               sorts
               of
               tame
               Fowl
               ,
               which
               they
               exchange
               with
               us
               for
               Toys
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               wild
               Fowl
               ,
               and
               other
               Game
               ,
               which
               is
               there
               in
               great
               Plenty
               ;
               as
               also
               abundance
               ,
               both
               of
               Sea
               ,
               and
               Fresh-water
               Fish
               .
            
             
               They
               build
               us
               Houses
               after
               their
               Fashion
               ,
               which
               are
               commodious
               enough
               for
               the
               Country
               ;
               they
               clear
               our
               Ground
               and
               carry
               our
               Letters
               ,
               they
               serve
               to
               load
               and
               unload
               Merchant
               Ships
               ;
               and
               in
               a
               Word
               ,
               there
               's
               scarce
               any
               kind
               of
               Service
               but
               may
               be
               obtain'd
               of
               'em
               by
               a
               courteous
               Carriage
               ,
               and
               by
               giving
               'em
               a
               few
               Trifles
               of
               a
               small
               Value
               ,
               when
               they
               have
               occasion
               for
               '
               em
               .
               They
               undertake
               even
               to
               load
               Ships
               entirely
               with
               a
               kind
               of
               Fish
               ,
               which
               they
               catch
               in
               the
               Rivers
               with
               a
               sort
               of
               Harping-Iron
               ;
               and
               this
               they
               perform
               upon
               such
               reasonble
               Terms
               ,
               that
               those
               who
               follow
               this
               Trade
               by
               their
               Means
               ,
               always
               find
               an
               extraordinary
               Profit
               in
               it
               ;
               because
               the
               Vent
               of
               'em
               is
               always
               speedy
               and
               certain
               in
               the
               Islands
               ,
               where
               there
               is
               a
               great
               Consumption
               of
               'em
               made
               ;
               so
               that
               one
               may
               say
               ,
               this
               sort
               of
               Fish
               ,
               and
               the
               Sea-Tortoise
               ,
               are
               the
               Cod-fish
               of
               the
               Continent
               ,
               and
               the
               Antego
               Islands
               .
            
             
               And
               't
               is
               the
               Manna
               ,
               upon
               which
               the
               Colonies
               between
               the
               Tropiques
               live
               ,
               as
               much
               as
               many
               of
               the
               Europeans
               ,
               and
               some
               others
               ,
               do
               upon
               Cod-fish
               .
               This
               Fishing
               Trade
               is
               practis'd
               all
               the
               Year
               in
               most
               of
               the
               Rivers
               
               on
               this
               Coast
               ,
               except
               the
               Fishing
               for
               Tortoise
               ,
               which
               holds
               but
               3
               or
               4
               Months
               in
               the
               Year
               ;
               during
               which
               ,
               the
               Females
               come
               to
               lay
               their
               Eggs
               in
               the
               Sand
               ,
               beyond
               the
               Marks
               that
               are
               left
               of
               the
               highest
               Tides
               ,
               and
               that
               in
               so
               great
               abundance
               ,
               (
               especially
               on
               the
               Shoars
               that
               are
               least
               frequented
               )
               as
               can
               hardly
               be
               imagin'd
               :
               For
               10
               Men
               can
               turn
               as
               many
               of
               'em
               in
               a
               Night
               ,
               as
               100
               can
               dress
               in
               a
               Week
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               Night
               ,
               which
               is
               the
               only
               time
               they
               take
               to
               lay
               their
               Eggs
               ,
               they
               wait
               'till
               they
               have
               pass'd
               the
               Bounds
               ,
               which
               the
               highest
               Tides
               have
               mark'd
               ,
               and
               then
               turn
               'em
               upon
               their
               Backs
               ,
               and
               being
               once
               in
               this
               Posture
               ,
               they
               can
               by
               no
               means
               recover
               themselves
               upon
               their
               Feet
               to
               go
               back
               into
               the
               Sea.
               
            
             
               Among
               the
               Plants
               which
               the
               Indians
               cultivate
               in
               their
               Plantations
               ,
               Cotton
               is
               one
               of
               those
               that
               principally
               employs
               'em
               ,
               especially
               the
               Women
               who
               make
               this
               their
               particular
               business
               ;
               and
               thus
               find
               means
               to
               adorn
               themselves
               ;
               for
               they
               know
               how
               to
               spin
               it
               as
               fine
               as
               can
               be
               desir'd
               .
               And
               if
               the
               disorders
               that
               have
               happen'd
               in
               the
               Colonies
               upon
               the
               Continent
               ,
               had
               not
               hinder'd
               the
               Establishing
               a
               Regular
               Traffick
               of
               it
               ,
               which
               might
               have
               been
               easily
               accomplish'd
               ;
               I
               say
               ,
               if
               it
               had
               not
               been
               for
               this
               ,
               all
               Europe
               might
               have
               been
               furnish'd
               with
               it
               ,
               in
               all
               manner
               of
               ways
               in
               which
               it
               could
               have
               been
               
               imploy'd
               ,
               without
               costing
               the
               French
               any
               more
               trouble
               or
               charge
               in
               a
               manner
               ,
               than
               that
               of
               receiving
               it
               ;
               because
               of
               the
               natural
               and
               general
               inclination
               the
               Indians
               have
               both
               for
               Work
               ,
               and
               for
               Finery
               ;
               esteeming
               a
               grain
               of
               Christal
               to
               hang
               about
               their
               Neck
               or
               at
               their
               Ears
               ,
               as
               much
               as
               we
               should
               do
               a
               Diamond
               of
               the
               same
               bigness
               .
            
             
               Besides
               ,
               it
               being
               well
               known
               ,
               that
               Cotton
               is
               one
               of
               those
               Commodities
               that
               are
               consum'd
               the
               most
               in
               Europe
               ,
               and
               the
               Price
               of
               which
               is
               least
               varied
               ,
               the
               Inhabitants
               of
               the
               Islands
               would
               never
               have
               left
               off
               cultivating
               it
               ,
               if
               there
               had
               been
               Women
               enough
               to
               spin
               it
               ,
               without
               which
               it
               can't
               be
               Transported
               but
               with
               a
               great
               deal
               of
               Trouble
               ,
               and
               little
               Profit
               .
            
             
               The
               Hamocks
               or
               Cotton-beds
               which
               the
               Indians
               sell
               us
               for
               a
               Bill
               or
               Hatchet
               ,
               are
               afterwards
               sold
               in
               the
               Islands
               with
               considerable
               Advantage
               ;
               every
               one
               there
               having
               one
               of
               'em
               ,
               and
               there
               are
               none
               of
               them
               brought
               from
               any
               other
               Country
               than
               Guiana
               ,
               except
               from
               Brasil
               ,
               and
               that
               but
               rarely
               ,
               because
               of
               the
               small
               Commerce
               the
               French
               have
               there
               .
            
             
               Their
               Rocou
               is
               a
               red
               Die
               ,
               and
               valuable
               when
               't
               is
               natural
               ,
               such
               as
               the
               Indians
               sell
               us
               ,
               before
               it
               has
               been
               falsified
               by
               Forreigners
               ,
               who
               carry
               it
               into
               Europe
               .
               See
               
                 Vrucu
                 in
                 Catal.
                 Plant.
                 Jamaic
              
               .
               P.
               150.
               
            
             
             
               There
               are
               to
               be
               had
               among
               'em
               likewise
               divers
               sorts
               of
               Gumms
               ,
               Woods
               ,
               and
               Roots
               proper
               for
               Physick
               ,
               which
               are
               good
               Commodities
               in
               France
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               several
               sorts
               of
               Wood
               proper
               for
               Dying
               ;
               and
               for
               making
               of
               Cabinets
               and
               Inlaid
               Works
               ,
               among
               which
               is
               the
               Letter-wood
               ,
               which
               the
               French
               call
               
                 Bois
                 de
                 la
                 Chine
              
               ,
               and
               which
               grows
               in
               no
               other
               place
               in
               the
               World
               but
               on
               this
               part
               of
               the
               Continent
               .
               The
               Natives
               cut
               it
               and
               carry
               it
               in
               great
               burthens
               quite
               to
               the
               Ships
               so
               cheap
               ,
               that
               a
               1000
               weight
               of
               it
               comes
               to
               but
               a
               Crown
               ;
               whereas
               that
               quantity
               was
               a
               long
               time
               sold
               for
               a
               100
               Crowns
               ,
               and
               never
               for
               less
               than
               150
               Livres
               .
            
             
               Besides
               those
               Animals
               that
               are
               fit
               for
               sport
               ;
               as
               Apes
               of
               divers
               kinds
               ,
               
                 Sapajous
                 ,
                 Tamarins
                 ,
                 Sagovius
                 ,
                 Parrots
                 ,
                 Arras
              
               and
               Tocaus
               :
               I
               omit
               a
               great
               many
               other
               things
               ,
               which
               this
               Country
               produces
               ;
               and
               one
               may
               say
               ,
               this
               large
               Compass
               of
               Ground
               has
               moreover
               this
               Advantage
               above
               the
               Islands
               of
               America
               ,
               that
               there
               is
               no
               fear
               of
               tiring
               it
               ;
               as
               we
               are
               taught
               by
               Experience
               ,
               the
               Island
               of
               St.
               Christopher
               ,
               and
               others
               have
               been
               in
               a
               little
               Space
               of
               Time
               ,
               where
               the
               Land
               is
               become
               almost
               barren
               ,
               meerly
               by
               being
               over-burden'd
               with
               continual
               Crops
               ,
               because
               it
               can
               never
               be
               suffer'd
               to
               rest
               ,
               by
               Reason
               of
               the
               small
               Portion
               of
               Ground
               that
               every
               Inhabitant
               possesses
               ;
               which
               yet
               does
               not
               
               hinder
               'em
               from
               raising
               every
               Year
               a
               prodigious
               Quantity
               of
               Sugar
               ,
               besides
               Ginger
               ,
               Indigo
               ,
               Cassia
               ,
               and
               other
               Commodities
               that
               are
               cultivated
               and
               made
               there
               .
            
             
               This
               Country
               of
               Guiana
               is
               diversified
               with
               Hills
               ,
               Plains
               and
               Meadows
               ;
               and
               there
               are
               scarce
               any
               Mountains
               but
               would
               turn
               to
               a
               good
               Account
               ,
               if
               they
               were
               manur'd
               :
               The
               Land
               is
               every
               where
               so
               fertile
               ,
               that
               one
               Man
               may
               easily
               get
               ,
               with
               his
               own
               Hands
               ,
               a
               Livelihood
               for
               Twenty
               People
               ,
               the
               Cultivation
               of
               it
               is
               so
               very
               easie
               .
               The
               Fruits
               of
               it
               are
               excellent
               ,
               and
               very
               plentiful
               ;
               and
               all
               our
               sorts
               of
               Corn
               grow
               there
               all
               the
               Year
               round
               ,
               without
               distinction
               of
               Seasons
               ,
               and
               that
               in
               a
               very
               little
               time
               :
               And
               there
               being
               no
               Winter
               ,
               the
               Trees
               are
               alternately
               cover'd
               with
               Blossoms
               and
               Fruits
               ,
               and
               always
               with
               Leaves
               .
            
             
               The
               Air
               is
               very
               good
               ,
               and
               the
               Climate
               very
               Temperate
               ,
               tho'
               it
               be
               between
               the
               Tropiques
               ;
               for
               the
               Heat
               is
               continually
               mitigated
               by
               a
               fresh
               East-wind
               ,
               which
               blows
               all
               the
               Year
               ,
               except
               in
               the
               Night
               ,
               when
               the
               Breezes
               come
               from
               the
               Land
               ,
               which
               are
               only
               felt
               one
               or
               two
               Leagues
               toward
               the
               Sea.
               
            
             
               The
               Waters
               are
               excellent
               ,
               and
               keep
               good
               throughout
               the
               longest
               Voyages
               ,
               as
               has
               been
               often
               experienc'd
               in
               Europe
               ,
               where
               they
               are
               never
               found
               to
               stink
               at
               the
               Return
               
               of
               the
               Ships
               ,
               that
               have
               taken
               in
               their
               Provision
               of
               'em
               in
               this
               Country
               .
               It
               must
               not
               be
               omitted
               ,
               that
               there
               are
               on
               this
               Coast
               a
               great
               many
               Islands
               so
               proper
               for
               the
               Feeding
               of
               Cattle
               ,
               that
               provided
               some
               necessary
               Precautions
               be
               observ'd
               ,
               there
               is
               no
               doubt
               but
               there
               would
               in
               a
               short
               time
               be
               as
               great
               a
               Number
               of
               'em
               produc'd
               (
               if
               a
               Stock
               were
               carried
               thither
               )
               in
               proportion
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               other
               Islands
               ,
               whither
               Ships
               go
               every
               Day
               for
               Hides
               ;
               as
               they
               do
               to
               St.
               Domingo
               ,
               and
               elsewhere
               .
            
             
               This
               Account
               being
               drawn
               up
               only
               as
               a
               Succinct
               Memoir
               of
               Guiana
               in
               general
               ,
               and
               of
               Cayenne
               in
               particular
               ;
               I
               thought
               not
               meet
               to
               extend
               it
               further
               ,
               nor
               to
               give
               the
               Detail
               of
               a
               Country
               ,
               where
               the
               French
               have
               now
               a
               Colony
               ,
               from
               whence
               a
               more
               ample
               Information
               may
               be
               expected
               .
            
             
               FINIS
               .
            
             
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A65182-e470
           
             †
             Nat.
             Sotvelli
             Bibliothec.
             Scriptor
             .
             Societ
             .
             Jesu
             .
             Romae
             ,
             1677.
             
             Fol.
             
          
           
             *
             Nic.
             Antonii
             Bibioth
             .
             Hispan
             .
          
           
             ‖
             Dissert
             .
             de
             M.
             Villamont
             ,
             and
             Hist
             .
             du
             Monde
             par
             Chevreau
             .
          
           
             †
             Description
             de
             la
             Riviere
             &
             Pais
             des
             Amazones
             per
             M.
             Le
             Comte
             de
             Pagan
             12
             o
             ,
             Paris
             1655.
             
          
           
             *
             Lopez
             de
             Gomara
             ,
             also
             Hakluyt
             ,
             and
             Purchas
             
               in
               their
               Collections
               concerning
            
             Guiana
             .
          
           
             †
             Herrera
             ,
             and
             
               John
               de
               Laet
            
             speak
             doubtfully
             of
             these
             places
             .
          
           
             *
             Barth
             .
             de
             las
             Casas
             (
             obispo
             de
             las
             Chiapas
             )
             Hist
             .
             dela
             destrucion
             de
             los
             Indios
             ,
             Venet.
             1630.
             
             Also
             Hist
             .
             novi
             orbis
             per
             Hier.
             Benzon
             .
             
               And
               the
            
             Comment
             .
             Reales
             delos
             Yncas
             ,
             Reyes
             del
             Peru.
             fol.
             
          
           
             ‖
             Pet.
             Martyr
             .
             Decad.
             3.
             cap.
             10.
             
          
           
             ‖
             Ant.
             Galvanos
             
               's
               Discoveries
            
             ,
             4
             o
             and
             Fol.
             
          
           
             *
             Herrera
             D.
             6.
             l.
             3.
             c.
             18.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A65182-e2300
           
             *
             A
             Castillan
             is
             about
             5
             
               s.
               6
               d.
            
             English
             .
          
           
             Note
             .
             This
             
               Pege
               Buey
            
             is
             very
             common
             in
             all
             the
             Rivers
             along
             the
             Coast
             of
             the
             Continent
             ,
             and
             is
             call'd
             by
             the
             English
             Manati
             .
             There
             is
             a
             great
             Vend
             for
             'em
             in
             the
             Antilles
             or
             
             Antego-Islands
             ,
             whither
             the
             Captains
             of
             Merchant-Ships
             carry
             'em
             ,
             who
             buy
             'em
             of
             the
             Indians
             that
             fish
             for
             'em
             in
             the
             Rivers
             ,
             for
             Knives
             and
             Bills
             ,
             and
             make
             the
             Sea-men
             bone
             'em
             and
             salt
             'em
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             keep
             till
             they
             have
             opportunity
             to
             sell
             '
             em
             .
          
           
             *
             Note
             .
             At
             the
             time
             when
             this
             Voyage
             was
             made
             ,
             the
             Dutch
             ,
             who
             were
             at
             War
             with
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             had
             conquer'd
             and
             possess'd
             themselves
             of
             almost
             all
             Brazil
             ,
             the
             Dutch
             West-India
             Company
             then
             having
             Prince
             
               Maurice
               de
               Nassau
            
             for
             the
             General
             of
             all
             their
             Troops
             both
             by
             Sea
             and
             Land.
             
          
           
             *
             He
             means
             the
             Lake
             of
             Parima
             ,
             which
             all
             Geographers
             place
             under
             the
             Equinoctial
             Line
             in
             Guiana
             ,
             and
             upon
             the
             Banks
             of
             which
             is
             that
             pretended
             City
             of
             
               Manoa
               del
               Dorado
            
             ,
             which
             the
             Peruvians
             built
             when
             they
             fled
             thither
             to
             save
             themselves
             from
             the
             Cruelty
             and
             Tyranny
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             opinion
             of
             many
             of
             their
             Authors
             ;
             which
             has
             often
             engag'd
             that
             Nation
             in
             very
             expensive
             Attempts
             :
             but
             the
             Hopes
             of
             finding
             this
             rich
             Countrey
             have
             still
             fail'd
             of
             success
             .
             The
             Essay
             that
             Sir
             
               Walter
               Raleigh
            
             made
             to
             this
             purpose
             ,
             and
             which
             he
             was
             so
             eagerly
             set
             upon
             ,
             was
             no
             less
             unhappy
             ;
             for
             it
             cost
             him
             his
             Son's
             Life
             ,
             who
             was
             killed
             by
             the
             Spaniards
             in
             this
             Expedition
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             his
             own
             Head
             ,
             which
             was
             taken
             off
             at
             London
             by
             King
             James
             soon
             after
             his
             Return
             from
             America
             .
             And
             indeed
             this
             
               Manoa
               del
               Dorado
            
             may
             be
             called
             the
             Philosophers
             Stone
             ,
             or
             rather
             the
             Spaniards
             Chimera
             ,
             in
             search
             of
             which
             they
             have
             imploy'd
             immense
             Sums
             to
             no
             purpose
             ,
             at
             several
             Times
             ,
             and
             under
             several
             Commanders
             ,
             and
             must
             needs
             have
             lost
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Men
             in
             above
             sixty
             different
             Expeditions
             or
             Attempts
             which
             they
             have
             made
             .
          
           
             *
             This
             Meal
             of
             Magnioc
             the
             Author
             speaks
             of
             ,
             is
             bak'd
             and
             eaten
             instead
             of
             Bread
             or
             Cassave
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             this
             Country
             he
             speaks
             of
             ,
             as
             on
             almost
             all
             the
             Coasts
             of
             Brazil
             ,
             where
             the
             Captains
             of
             Ships
             store
             themselves
             with
             it
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             in
             want
             of
             Bisquet
             .
             This
             kind
             of
             Meal
             will
             not
             only
             keep
             good
             oftentimes
             as
             far
             as
             Portugal
             ,
             but
             will
             sometimes
             serve
             again
             in
             other
             Voyages
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             over-stock'd
             with
             it
             .
             It
             has
             this
             Property
             with
             it
             ,
             that
             't
             is
             more
             fit
             for
             long
             Voyages
             than
             Cassave
             ,
             because
             it
             keeps
             better
             .
             'T
             is
             true
             it
             becomes
             very
             insipid
             at
             last
             ,
             and
             so
             would
             the
             best
             Bread
             we
             make
             ,
             if
             kept
             as
             long
             .
             And
             't
             is
             further
             to-be
             noted
             ,
             that
             this
             bak'd
             Meal
             can't
             be
             made
             into
             Bread
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Indians
             bake
             it
             in
             great
             Earthen
             Basons
             over
             the
             Fire
             almost
             as
             Confectioners
             do
             their
             Sweat-meats
             ;
             after
             which
             they
             dry
             it
             yet
             more
             in
             the
             Sun
             ,
             when
             't
             is
             prepar'd
             for
             long
             Voyages
             .
             When
             you
             are
             past
             the
             River
             of
             Amazons
             ,
             the
             Indians
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             Line
             know
             neither
             how
             to
             make
             it
             ,
             nor
             the
             use
             of
             it
             ;
             they
             only
             make
             Cassave
             ,
             which
             is
             Bread
             made
             of
             this
             same
             Meal
             of
             Magnioc
             before
             it
             is
             bak'd
             :
             There
             is
             also
             a
             particular
             way
             of
             preparing
             that
             to
             make
             it
             keep
             well
             for
             long
             Voyages
             ,
             but
             not
             so
             well
             as
             this
             bak'd
             Meal
             .
          
           
             *
             The
             Guiana
             is
             a
             considerable
             part
             of
             the
             Continent
             ,
             and
             not
             one
             of
             the
             Islands
             of
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             as
             our
             Author
             seems
             to
             signify
             in
             this
             place
             ;
             yet
             it
             may
             well
             enough
             be
             said
             ,
             that
             he
             spake
             more
             truly
             than
             he
             thought
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             River
             Orenoque
             ,
             or
             Paria
             ,
             parting
             from
             the
             River
             of
             Amazons
             ,
             to
             come
             afterwards
             to
             discharge
             it self
             into
             the
             Sea
             over
             against
             the
             Island
             of
             
               La
               Trinidada
            
             ,
             betwixt
             the
             ninth
             and
             tenth
             Degrees
             of
             Northern
             Latitude
             ;
             it
             may
             very
             well
             be
             ,
             I
             say
             ,
             that
             Guiana
             by
             these
             means
             becomes
             an
             Island
             ,
             comprehending
             all
             that
             Extent
             of
             Land
             between
             the
             Mouth
             of
             Orenoque
             and
             that
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             quite
             to
             the
             place
             where
             these
             two
             great
             Rivers
             divide
             to
             take
             their
             Course
             asunder
             ,
             till
             they
             fall
             into
             the
             Sea
             at
             above
             300
             Leagues
             distance
             one
             from
             another
             .
             All
             this
             Interval
             is
             what
             Geographers
             commonly
             call
             in
             their
             Maps
             the
             Coast
             of
             Guiana
             .
             In
             this
             place
             the
             Island
             of
             Cayenne
             is
             situate
             ,
             which
             is
             so
             famous
             either
             for
             the
             divers
             Adventures
             which
             the
             French
             Colonies
             have
             had
             at
             several
             times
             in
             establishing
             themselves
             there
             ,
             or
             for
             the
             divers
             Battels
             they
             have
             had
             as
             well
             with
             the
             Indians
             as
             the
             Europeans
             ,
             to
             maintain
             their
             Ground
             there
             ,
             in
             which
             they
             have
             succeeded
             so
             well
             ,
             that
             't
             is
             now
             one
             of
             the
             most
             considerable
             and
             advantageous
             Colonies
             they
             have
             in
             all
             America
             .
          
           
             *
             The
             Aroba
             is
             a
             Weight
             of
             25
             Pounds
             ,
             as
             the
             Quintal
             is
             of
             a
             100
             Pounds
             .
          
           
             *
             Note
             ,
             That
             this
             Discovery
             was
             made
             at
             a
             time
             when
             the
             Portuguez
             were
             continually
             driving
             the
             Dutch
             from
             one
             Garison
             or
             another
             in
             Brazil
             ,
             of
             which
             they
             had
             possess'd
             themselves
             not
             long
             before
             ;
             and
             the
             Conquest
             the
             Dutch
             made
             of
             this
             Country
             was
             the
             occasion
             of
             the
             Establishment
             of
             the
             West-India
             Company
             in
             Holland
             ,
             as
             well
             for
             the
             carrying
             on
             of
             Trade
             in
             this
             part
             of
             America
             which
             the
             Portuguez
             possess'd
             ,
             as
             for
             the
             compleating
             of
             the
             Conquest
             of
             it
             .
             But
             't
             is
             now
             above
             30
             Years
             since
             they
             have
             had
             any
             thing
             beyond
             the
             Line
             .
             On
             this
             side
             of
             the
             Line
             they
             yet
             possess
             Surinam
             on
             the
             Continent
             ,
             and
             the
             Island
             of
             Corassol
             ,
             or
             Curazao
             ;
             and
             they
             have
             still
             a
             great
             many
             strong
             Places
             on
             the
             Western
             Coast
             of
             Africa
             ,
             and
             several
             Factories
             in
             divers
             places
             on
             that
             Coast
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A65182-e32270
           
             *
             Monsieur
             
               de
               la
               Barre
            
             had
             not
             yet
             made
             a
             Settlement
             there
             ,
             when
             this
             Account
             was
             written
             .